WINMAX MILL PROGRAMMING DOCUMENTATIONcnc.hurco.com/media/Manuals/WinMax_Mill_Programming.pdf ·...

June 2015 704-0116-501 Revision D

WINMAX MILL

PROGRAMMING DOCUMENTATION

v9.1 & v10.1

i - WinMax Mill Programming Documentation 704-0116-501

The information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Hurco Companies, Inc. (Hurco). The software described in this document is furnished under the License Agreement to customers. It is against the law to copy the software on any medium except as specifically allowed in the license agreement. The purchaser may make copies of the software for backup purposes.

Hurco Manufacturing Company reserves the right to incorporate any modification or improvements in machines and machine specifications which it considers necessary, and does not assume any obligation to make any said changes in machines or equipment previously sold.

Hurco products and services are subject to Hurco’s then current prices, terms, and conditions, which are subject to change without notice.

© 2015 Hurco Companies, Inc. All rights reserved.

Patents:U.S. Patents B14,477,754; 5,453,933; Canadian Patent 1,102,434; Japanese Patents 1,649,006 and 1,375,124; other Patents pending.

Hurco, Max, Ultimax, and WinMax are Registered Trademarks of Hurco Companies, Inc.

AutoCAD, Autodesk, and DXF are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc.

MS-DOS, Microsoft, and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

Many of the designations used by manufacturers and sellers to distinguish their products are claimed as trademarks. Hurco has listed here all trademarks of which it is aware. For more information about Hurco products and services, contact:

Hurco Companies, Inc. One Technology WayP.O. Box 68180Indianapolis, IN 46268-0180

For Hurco subsidiary contact information, go to Hurco’s Web site:www.hurco.com

WinMax Mill Programming Manual 704-0116-501 Documentation Conventions — ii

DOCUMENTATION CONVENTIONS

This documentation uses several conventions to explain the safety features and emphasize key concepts. These conventions are described in this section.

Additional information is available on the machine’s Documentation CD.

Console Buttons and Keys

References to console buttons and keys appear in bold text throughout the documentation. For example, the Start Cycle button appears as the Start Cycle button and the Manual key appears as the Manual console key in text.

Refer to the Getting Started with WinMax manual for information about console buttons and keys, in addition to other information about using softkeys and the pop-up text entry window.

Icons

This manual may contain the following icons:

Caution/Warning

Important

Troubleshooting

Hints and Tricks

Where can we go from here?Programming and Operation Information

The operator may be injured and the machine severely damaged if the described procedure is not followed.

Ensures proper operation of the machine and control.

? Steps that can be taken to solve potential problems.

Useful suggestions that show creative uses of the WinMax features.

Lists several possible options the operator can take.

iii - Documentation Conventions 704-0116-501 WinMax Mill Programming Manual

Hurco provides documentation for using WinMax software on a control or desktop in two formats: on-screen Help and PDF. The information contained in both formats is identical. The programming and operation information is continually updated with each software version. For example, when v08.01.02 is updated to v08.01.03 or some higher version, the Help and PDFs are updated accordingly. Therefore, the most current information is installed on the control with the software. This information is not included on the Machine Documentation CD because of this reason.

This document explains how to use the On-screen Help on the control and how to copy and print or view the information on a PC.

On-screen Help contains information about the current screen. If Help is not available for a screen, a Welcome screen appears with access to the Table of Contents, Index, or Search functions.

• To view the on-screen Help directly on a Hurco control, select the Help console key.

• To view the on-screen Help on the desktop software, select the Help icon in the menu bar.

PDF files are available on the control’s hard drive. These files can be copied from the hard drive to a USB memory device and transferred to a PC for viewing and printing.

Using the On-screen Help

On-screen Help provides information about using WinMax. The Help is context-sensitive to the screen level. Press the console Help button to display the Help topic for the current screen. The following list describes Help functions:

• Buttons in the upper left-hand corner of the Help screen are used to move through Help topics and print screens.

• Use the Hide button to hide the navigation pane.

• Use the Back button to return to the previous Help screen.

• Use the Print button to print the current displayed Help topic, if a printer is attached and configured. See Printing the Programming Manuals, on page 2 - iv for more information about printing.

• Use the arrow buttons to move between pages within a Help topic and to move through topics.

• Use the Contents tab for a list of information sorted by subject:

1. Select the “+” to expand the topic and view sub-topics.

2. Select the topic to display it.

• Use the Index tab to show the Help index:

1. Quickly scroll to an index topic by typing the topic in the box at the top of the index.

2. Select a topic and the Display button to view the topic.

WinMax Mill Programming Manual 704-0116-501 Documentation Conventions -iv

• Use the Search tab to search the Help for a word or phrase:

1. Type the search word(s) into the text box at the top of the pane.

2. Select the List Topics button. A list of topics that contain the search word(s) is displayed.

3. Select a topic and the Display button to view that topic.

• Use the Favorites tab to save Help topics for quick access:

1. Select the Add button at the bottom of the pane to add the current topic.

2. Select a topic from the Favorites list, and select the Display button to view it.

• Select a topic from the Favorites list, and select the Remove button to remove it from the list.

Printing the Programming ManualsThe WinMax On-screen Help is also provided in PDF format for easy printing. The information contained in the PDF files is identical to the on-screen Help. The PDF files may be copied to a floppy disk or USB memory device to be transferred to a PC for printing. Here are the steps to access the PDF files:

1. From the Input screen, select the F8 softkey.

2. Select the F7 softkey.

3. In the left-hand pane, navigate through the folders:

• For WinMax on a machine, the path is D:\Hurco\\hlp.

• For WinMax Desktop on a PC, the path is C:\Program Files\\hlp.

The PDF files will appear in the right-hand pane.

4. Highlight the PDF file(s) in the right-hand pane, and select the COPY F2 softkey.

5. Ensure that your media is loaded (either a floppy disk in the disk drive or a USB memory device in the USB port), and navigate to the proper location in the left-hand pane of the DISK OPERATIONS screen (either the floppy drive A: or the USB port E:). Highlight the desired location.

6. Place the cursor in the right-hand pane and select the PASTE F3 softkey to paste the PDF file(s) to the desired location.

You may now remove your media and load the PDF file(s) onto a PC for printing.

The SHOW ALL FILE TYPES field in User Interface Settings must be set to YES (default is NO) in order to see the PDF files in the directory. Access the SHOW ALL FILE TYPES field in Auxiliary Mode, Utilities/ User Preferences/ User Interface Settings.

v - Documentation Conventions 704-0116-501 WinMax Mill Programming Manual

WinMax Mill Programming Manual 704-0116-501 Table of Contents -viii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Documentation Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiConsole Buttons and Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiIcons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiUsing the On-screen Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiPrinting the Programming Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Machine and Console Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 1Machine Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 2Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 3Jog Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 9Machine Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 17Machine Operations Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 18Communications Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 20Spindle and Automatic Tool Changers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 23

Program Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 27Managing Program Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 27Program Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 33Disk Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 34FTP Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 35

Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 37System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 38User Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 39Serial Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 44FTP Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 44WinMax Uptime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 44Rotary Axes Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 45Select Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 46Data Logging Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 46Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 47Additional Utilities Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 47Printing Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 47Integrator Support Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 50Serial I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 51Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 51

Machine Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 55Machine Parameters Page 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 56Machine Parameters Page 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 59Machine Parameters Page 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 63Machine Parameters Page 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 70Machine Parameters Pages 5 and 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 72Estimated Run Time Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 73

Programming Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 75WinMax Interface Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 76Input Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 84

ix - Table of Contents 704-0116-501 WinMax Mill Programming Manual

Part Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 85Rotary Part Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 90Part Fixturing and Tool Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 93Work Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 93Stock Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 95Tool Calibration Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 96Tool Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 100Part Program Tool Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 110Tool Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 115Tool and Material Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 117Program Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 118Import / Export Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 121Copy and Change Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 124Review Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 126Manual Safety Override Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 128Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 131Max5 UI Graphics Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 134

Machine Operation Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 135Machine Start Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 136Recovery and Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 137Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 138Automatic Tool Changers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 141Tool Fixture Option (TPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 148HMX Automatic Pallet Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 151Dual-Zone Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 155Auto Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 159Stop Machine Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 165Restart Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 167Shutdown Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 167

UltiMotion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 173

Conversational Programming

Conversational Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 1Part Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 2Programming Dual-Zone Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 8Pecking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 8Cutter Compensation (preliminary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 9Calculated Plunge Points for Milling Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 14Lead In/Out Moves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 15

Milling Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 17General Guidelines for Creating a Milling Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 18Lines and Arcs (Mill Contour) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 19Mill Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 26Mill Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 29Mill Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 31Mill Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 333D Mold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 34Helical Plunge (Ramp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 44Mill Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 51Mill Stick Lettering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 54Mill True-Type Lettering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 56

WinMax Mill Programming Manual 704-0116-501 Table of Contents -x

Stick Lettering Along Contour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 59True-Type Lettering Along Contour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 62HD3 Serial Number Stick Lettering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 65Mill HD3 Lettering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 69Insert Pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 70Swept Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 74Mill Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 79Mill Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 84

Holes Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 87Drill Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 88Tap Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 97Bore and Ream Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 98Back Spotface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 101Bolt Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 102Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 103Bolt Circle to Holes Locations or Pattern Locations Conversion . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 104Holes to Pattern Locations Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 105Holes End Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 105

Patterns Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 107Patterns Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 108Loop Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 109Loop Linear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 110Loop Angular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 111Loop Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 112Pattern Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 113Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 114Mirror Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 115Pattern End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 115

Special Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 117Position Data Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 118Graphics On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 119Change Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 119Change Part Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 121Machine Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 122Lube Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 122Comment Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 123Insert Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 123Tool Change Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 124

NC/Conversational Merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 129

DXF Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 131DXF Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 132DXF Build Data Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 133DXF Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 135Edit Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 136DXF Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 138

UltiPockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 139Helical Plunge with UltiPockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 143

xi - Table of Contents 704-0116-501 WinMax Mill Programming Manual

NC Programming

NC Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 1NC Part Programming Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 2NC Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 6Starting a New NC Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 8NC Editor Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 9NC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 20NC Probing Part Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 25

Preparatory Functions - G Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 27G Code Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 30G Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 31Setting Work Coordinate Systems with G10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 59Setting Tool Offsets with G10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 60Plane Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 62Tool and Radius Offsets (G40–G49) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 73Special Program Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 102Coordinate System Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 137Feed Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 139Canned Cycle Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 142Special Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 145Canned Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 146Canned Cycle Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 148Canceling or Replacing Canned Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 150

Spindle Speed - S Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 151

Tool Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 153D Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 153L Codes (BNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 153T Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 153

Miscellaneous Functions - M Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 155M Code Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 157Program Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 160Axis Limit Overrides (M210, M211, M212) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

NC Productivity Package Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 183Macro Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 184Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 185Program Control Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 200Subprograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 205Modal Subprograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 214User Defined Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 216NCPP Variable Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 224Programming Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 234

WinMax Mill Programming Manual 704-0116-501 Table of Contents -xii

Probing

Tool Probing Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 1Tool Probing in Absolute Tool Length Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 2Tool Probing in Zero Calibration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 8Tool Quality Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 14Appendix A: Tool Probe Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 18Appendix B: Tool Probe Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 26

Part Probing Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 31Part Setup—Part Probe Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 32Part Probe Calibration and Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 34Part Quality Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 67

Rotary Programming

Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1Rotary Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 2Rotary Part Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 5Universal Transform Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 8Transform Plane (configurations other than Universal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 13Universal Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 14Rotary A and Rotary A Tilt B Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 24Tilt A Rotary C Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 29Rotary B Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 34Tilt B Rotary C Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 37

Extended Shop Floor

UltiMonitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 1LAN Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 2Configuring a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 4Using FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 8Extended Shop Floor (ESF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 12

Field Name Glossary

Field Name Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 1

Error Messages and Alarms

Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 1

Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 28

Record of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

xiii - Table of Contents 704-0116-501 WinMax Mill Programming Manual

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-501 Machine and Console Basics 1-1

MACHINE AND CONSOLE BASICS

These topics are discussed in this section:

Machine Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2

Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 3

Jog Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9

Emergency Stop Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 5

Programming Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 5

Axis, Spindle, and Machine Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 8

Machine Operations Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 18

Communications Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 20

Spindle and Automatic Tool Changers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 23

1 - 2 Machine and Console Basics 704-0116-501 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Machine Components

Before using the machine, you should become familiar with its components. Because of European Committee (CE) requirements, Hurco machines sold in Europe differ somewhat from those sold elsewhere. The figure below identifies some of the easily recognized components of a machine. The console is in front of the machine, facing the operator’s area.

Figure 1–1. Hurco Machine with Dual-Screen Console

Hurco machines are available with several hardware and software options. Information about these options is available from Hurco or your Hurco Distributor.

1 Console

2 Way Cover

3 Table

4 Spindle

5 Machine Base

6 Chip Conveyor

7 Tool Changer


Consoles

The console, and the electrical components required to operate it, are called the “control” or the “CNC” (Computer Numeric Control). Some electrical components are built into a separate enclosure kept in the machine’s electrical cabinet. Some internal components, such as drives and memory, are like those in a PC. Only the parts of the Windows® operating system that are necessary to run Hurco CNCs are used. Customers are not permitted to install software on the WinMax control. Pictured below are the Max5 dual-, Max4 dual-, and Max4 single-screen consoles.

Max5 dual-screen console

Max4 dual-screen console Max4 single-screen console


Control Panel Function Groups

The buttons, keys, and knobs on the dual- and single-screen consoles are grouped by their functions. Here are the control panel groups on single- and dual-screen consoles:

1. Machine Control buttons

2. Axis and Spindle Control dials

3. Jog Control functions

4. Machine Operations keyboard

5. Programming keyboard

231

4

5


Emergency Stop Buttons

There is an Emergency Stop button located on each console and one on the Remote Jog Unit. Press the Emergency Stop button to stop all spindle and table motion. This button locks down when pressed. To release it, twist the button in the direction indicated by the arrows.

When the Emergency Stop button is pressed, a special error file is created and saved to the machine hard drive in a folder called NavESTOP. These files record the machine conditions at the time the Emergency Stop button is pressed. These files can be retrieved when necessary for service purposes; refer to Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files, on page 1 - 59 for more information.

Programming Keyboard

Program a job at the machine while reading from a blueprint or program worksheet. The prompts on the Text screen lead you through each element of a part program. Enter machine operations, part dimensions, and other parameters by selecting the appropriate screen softkeys and console buttons.

Set up and run part programs, and manage part program files using the following data entry keys:

• Text Screen Data Entry

• Softkeys

• Numeric Keypad

• Pop-up Text Entry Window

• Graphics Screen Data Entry

Learn the location of all Emergency Stop buttons on the machining center before operating.

If the Emergency Stop button is pressed during execution of a part program, the tool must be jogged clear of the part before resuming operation.


Text Screen Data Entry

Text screen data entry keys are used for entering programming information into the Text screen’s fields. These keys are located in the center of the console’s Programming Keypad.

Programming Mode

Programming Mode console keys are named for the screens they activate:

• Input – displays the main programming screen used to create and edit part programs. From this screen, access Part Setup, Tool Setup, Part Programming, Program Parameters, Copy and Change Blocks, and Restore and Erase menus.

• Auxiliary – accesses program storage management, system configuration settings, DXF files, reset master, and the upgrade system files menus.

• Review – for Conversational programs, provides an outline view of the blocks currently programmed, including type of block and tool used. Jump to a desired block by typing the block number and pressing Enter. For Numerical Control (NC) programs, the Review key displays or re-displays the NC part program.

• Help – displays help text. Place the cursor on a field in question and press the Help key. If help text is available, it will appear in a pop-up window. Help is not available for all screens.

These keys function as they would on a standard PC keyboard:

• Insert - type over and replace current text.

• Delete - delete the character to the right of the cursor.

• Home - position the cursor before a line of text.

• End - position the cursor at the end of a line of text.

• Page Up - position the cursor at the beginning of the previous page.

• Page Down - position the cursor at the beginning of the next page.

Text Screen Cursor Control Keys

These keys control cursor movement and perform programming operations:

• Arrow keys - move the cursor from one field to the next, or advance a part program to the next data block.

• Enter key (↵) - accept the information typed in a text field, or move to the next field.

• Special Function keys / keyboard shortcuts:

• alt + Input—display the Pop-up Text Entry Window.

• alt + Help—produce a bmp screen capture.

• alt + right arrow—tab through fields or through the windows in File Manager.


• alt + left arrow—reverse tab through fields or the windows in File Manager.

• alt + Select—simulate a right mouse click.

• alt + F + left arrow—reverse tab through fields or the windows in File Manager. (Same function as alt + left arrow.)

• alt + F + Select—simulate Shift + left mouse click.

• C (clear) console key—press to clear the value at the current cursor position. The C key works like an Esc key on a keyboard.

• F + Delete—delete the character to the left of the cursor.

• F + Help—produce a bmp screen capture.

• F + End—move the cursor to the end of a list.

• F + Home—move the cursor to the top of a list.

• F + Page Down—move through a list.

• F + Page Up—move through a list.

• F + Select—simulate a left mouse click.

• F + up arrow—move cursor to previous data block.

• F + down arrow—moves cursor to next data block.

• F + left arrow—moves cursor to previous element.

• F + right arrow—moves cursor to next element.

• F + decimal (.)—enable Full Precision Editing. This feature displays a pop-up window showing 12 digits to the right of the decimal for the current field.

• F + Draw—switch to the DXF drawing on the graphics screen.

• F + 1 through 8—simulate function keys on keyboard (F1, F2, F3,...F8).

Numeric Keypad

The numeric keypad allows you to enter numbers and calculate values in the Text screen. Perform the following operations with this keypad:

• Enter numeric data into fields on the screen.

• Perform calculations using the mathematical symbols (÷, ×, −, +) on the keypad.

Optional Computer Keyboard

If the console is equipped with an optional computer keyboard, use it to enter data into a field. Press the Enter key to update a field and advance the cursor.


Axis, Spindle, and Machine Control

The following keys and knobs are used to control machine movement and adjust the spindle and axes.

Override Knobs

Three knobs on the upper console allow you to override the programmed axis feedrate, rapid, and spindle speed.

The Override knobs function as follows:

• Axis Feed Rate - controls the programmed axis feedrate during an auto run program. Turning the dial to counterclockwise slows the feedrate; turning the dial to clockwise speeds the feedrate. Selecting Min slows the spindle to 10% of the nominal value. Selecting Max increases the feedrate to 150% of the nominal value.

• Spindle Speed - controls the spindle speed. Turning the dial counterclockwise slows the spindle; turning the dial clockwise increases spindle speed. Selecting Min slows spindle speed to 640 RPM slower than the nominal value. Selecting Max increases spindle speed to 640 RPM faster than the nominal value.

• Rapid Override - overrides the programmed rapid traverse; the speed at which the table moves from one point to another. Selecting Min slows the table speed to 10% of the nominal value. Selecting Max increases the table speed to 150% of the nominal value.


Jog Units

A jog unit is used to manually jog the axes and control machine operation. Hand-held, or remote, jog units can be removed from the console and carried closer to the work piece.

Max5 Remote Jog Units

Max5 console offers a choice of remote jog units:

• Basic—portable hand-held unit with axes and machine operation controls.

• Premium—portable hand-held jog unit with all the features of the Standard jog unit, plus an LCD touchscreen that displays axes position in Manual mode, Part Setup, Tool Setup, Work Offsets, and Aux Work Offsets.

Max4 Remote Jog Unit

The Console Jog Unit is standard on the Max4 console.

The hand-held remote Max4 Jog Unit is an option on the Max4 console.

Jog Unit Operation

Basic operation of a jog unit is as follows:

1. Select an axis with the Axis Select Switch.

2. Use the Jog Feed Keys:

a. Select either the + or – Jog Feed Keys.b. Adjust Jog Feed Override to override the programmed axis feedrate.

OR

3. Use the Hand Wheel Multiplier:

a. Select a hand wheel resolution with one of the Hand Wheel Multiplier Keys.b. Rotate the Jog Hand Wheel.

Other than the Emergency Stop button, the Jog Unit does not affect running programs.


Setting Jog Unit Parameters

To access the parameters :

1. Press the Manual Mode console key to display the Manual screen.

2. Press the Manual Function (F2) softkey. The Jog Unit parameters are displayed:

• Manual Jog Feed— enter the desired manual jog axis feedrate. The range is from 0.0 to the machine’s maximum feedrate.

An axis may have a maximum jog feedrate slower than other axes. This slower axis can only move at its maximum jog feedrate (and not the higher feedrate of other axes).

For example, the X and Y axes on a machine each have a maximum jog feedrate of 787 inches per minute (ipm). The Z axis has a maximum jog feedrate of 100 ipm. Without using the jog feedrate override, the X and Y axes can jog at 787 ipm, but the Z axis is limited at 100 ipm.

• Manual Spindle Speed —enter the spindle speed when the Spindle On console key is pressed. This value can not be greater than the machine’s maximum spindle speed. Entering a negative value (e.g., -500) causes the spindle to reverse (turn counterclockwise) at that speed.

• Rotary Jog Feed (for machines with rotary or swivel axes)—enter the jog feedrate in RPM.


Max5 Remote Jog Units

Basic Remote Jog Unit

Pictured belows is the Basic Unit. See Remote Jog Units, on page 1 - 15 for more details.

Store Position

Jog Handwheel

Rapid Jog Rate Knob

Flashlight On/Off

Handwheel Multipliers

Stop Cycle

Feed Hold

Start Cycle

Jog Feed

Flashlight

Emergency Stop

Handle

Axis Select Knob


Premium Remote Jog Unit

Pictured below is the Max5 Premium Remote Jog. See Remote Jog Units, on page 1 - 15 for more information.

Store Position

Flashlight

LCD Touchscreen

Jog Handwheel

Rapid Jog Rate Knob

Flashlight On/Off

Handwheel Multipliers

Stop Cycle

(Premium and Wireless)

Start Cycle

Jog Feed

Emergency Stop

Handle

Feed Hold

Axis Select & Override Knob

spindlerapidfeed


This is the view of the back of the Max5 Remote Jog Unit (both Basic and Premium):

Enable button


Max4 Remote Jog Unit

1. Emergency Stop Button2. Store Position Key3. Hand Wheel Multiplier Keys4. Jog Hand Wheel5. Jog Feed Keys6. Jog Feed Override7. Axis Select Switch


Remote Jog Units• Emergency Stop—stops all spindle and table motion. See Emergency Stop

Buttons, on page 1 - 5 for more information.

• Store Position—records the current axis position in the part program’s setup screens.

• LCD screen (available only on Premium units)—displays Manual mode (MAN), Part Setup (PSU), Tool Setup (TSU), Work Offsets (WO), and Aux Work Offsets (AWO).

Mode Selections appear at the bottom of the LCD screen. Use the touchscreen to select a mode; a check mark appears by the current selection. Scroll up, down, left, and right, and select items using the touchscreen.

• MAN—manual mode. The display shows machine or part positions for X, Y, and Z. Positions are zone relative on dual-zone machines.

• PSU—Part Setup. The display shows current part setup information. Values for X, Y, Z, A, B, C, as well as rotary centerline X, rotary centerline Y, and Z table offset are shown. Positions are zone relative on dual-zone machines.

• TSU—Tool Setup. The display shows current tool setup information. The initial tool displayed is the current tool in spindle.

• WO—Work Offsets. The displays shows G54, G55, G56, G57, G58, G59 and Shift values.

• AWO—Aux Work Offsets. The display shows offsets 1-93.

• Start Cycle (Max5)—activates machine operation. The Start Cycle button on the Remote Jog Unit must be used in conjunction with the Enable button, located on the back of the jog unit. Press and hold the Enable button and press the Start Cycle button on the jog unit. The Enable button can be released after the cycle is started.

• Feed Hold (Max5)—stops all axes movement (except a tap operation) when the tool is in the programmed feedrate region. Pressing the button a second time allows machine positioning to resume.

• Stop Cycle (Max5)—stops axes movement, then stops the spindle.

• Axis Selector (& Override) Knob – selects the axis to jog (0, X, Y, Z, A, B). On Premium unit only, this knob also control the override mode: feed, rapid, or spindle.

• Flashlight (Max5)—toggle flashlight or machine work light on and off with this button. A short duration press toggles the flashlight. Flashlight illuminates from the top of the remote jog unit. A longer duration press toggles the machine work light.

• Rapid Jog Rate Knob (Max5)—controls the rapid jog rate when an axis is selected on the Axis Selector (& Override) Knob. On Premium model, when

Both the Enable button and the Start Cycle button must be held down to run the spindle with the enclosure doors open.

See Setting Jog Unit Parameters, on page 1 - 10 for instructions on setting the Jog Unit parameters.


the Axis Selector & Override Knob is set to override mode (one of the bottom three positions), the Rapid Jog Rate Knob controls the override (feed, rapid, or spindle).

• Jog Feed Override (Max4)—control the jog speed (10% to 150%) of the nominal value. Use this dial to touch off the tool and move the X and Y axes to touch off the part for Tool and Part Setup.

• Jog Feed Keys —select minus (-) or plus (+) jog direction.

• Jog Handwheel —select minus (-) or plus (+) jog direction.

• Handwheel Multiplier Keys - defines the hand wheel resolution.

• x1 - defines a one-to-one ratio (each click equals .0001 inch, or .00254 mm).

• x10 - defines a 10-to-one ratio (each click equals .001 inch, or .0254 mm).

• x100 - defines a 100-to-one ratio (each click equal s 0.01 inch, or .254 mm. One full turn equals 1 inch, or 25.4 mm).

• Enable button—on machines with CE enabled, must be held to use the Start Cycle button and the +/- jog on the unit.

Enable Button

The Max5 Remote Jog, Max4 Remote Jog, single-screen and dual-screen consoles may be equipped with an Enable button. The Enable button is functional only on machines that have CE enabled.

The Enable button has three positions: fully up (off), middle (on), and fully down (off). The button must be in the middle position to be enabled. The Enable button is required for the following operations:

• Start Cycle (on Max5 Remote Jog only)—press and hold the Enable button and press the Start Cycle button on the unit. The Enable button can be released after the cycle is started.

It is not necessary to use the Enable button when using the Start Cycle button on the console.

• +/- Jog—press and hold the Enable button while simultaneously selecting either “+” or “-” button to jog the selected axis, only when the enclosure doors are open. If the enclosure doors are closed, it is not necessary to use the Enable button to jog the axes.

It is not necessary to press and hold the Enable button to jog the axis using the hand wheel at x1, x10, or x100 speeds.

Both the Enable button and the Start Cycle button must be held down to run the spindle with the enclosure doors open.


Machine Control

Machine Control buttons start and stop machine operation. The buttons function as follows:

• Power On - enables the relay control system. This button must be illuminated to operate the machine, but may be switched off while creating or editing a part program.

• Start Cycle - activates machine operation. When the machine is in an active mode, the Start Cycle flashes to indicate the machine is ready. When this button is pressed again, the light switches off.

To turn Control Power On:

1. Press the Power On console button.

2. Press the Manual Mode console key.

3. Press the Start Cycle console button.

• Stop Cycle - stops axes movement, then stops the spindle.

• Feed Hold (Motion Hold on Max console) - stops all axes movement, except a tap operation, when the tool is in the programmed feedrate region. Pressing the button a second time allows machine positioning to resume.

To Stop an Automatic Machine Operation:

Press the Stop Cycle button to stop the axis, then the spindle.

1. Press the Feed Hold (or Motion Hold) console button to stop axis motion.

2. Press the Spindle Off console key to stop the spindle.

3. Press the Feed Hold (or Motion Hold) console button again.

Never press the Start Cycle button without knowing exactly what the machine will do.

Or


Machine Operations Keys

The Machine Operations console keys are needed to run part programs and control the machine during cutting. These keys are labeled under the Machine Mode, Spindle, Tool Changer, and Coolant groupings.

Machine Mode

The Machine Mode console keys have these functions:

• Auto - allows you to run a part program automatically. See Auto Mode, on page 1 - 160 for more information.

• Interrupt - halts machine operation during automatic execution of a program to allow manual functions, such as cleaning the work piece. See Stop Motion, on page 1 - 18 for more information. Press Auto or Single to resume the part program and most cycles that were manually started by the operator (such as Chip Auger or Conveyor).

• Single - provides access to the Single Cycle screen. In this mode, the machine stops the axes after each automatic operation. In Conversational Programming the machine halts (with the spindle running) after each hole operation, contour segment, or milling subroutine. For NC Programming, the machine halts with the spindle running after each data block is executed. Pressing the flashing Start Cycle button causes the automatic machining operation to resume. For information on the Single Cycle screen softkeys, see the Auto Mode, on page 1 - 160 section. The softkeys are the same on both screens.

• Test - provides access to perform a program test run to identify potential problems before cutting the part. For more information, see Auto Mode, on page 1 - 160.

• Manual - provides access to manual machine operations that allow axis positioning with the jog unit. See Manual Safety Override Mode, on page 1 - 134 for more information.

Stop Motion

If you observe a problem during the cutting process or simply want to stop the machine to make some adjustments, you may press one of three buttons to stop motion:

• Feed Hold—stops all axes movement (except a tapping operation in progress), when the tool is in the programmed feedrate region. Pressing the button a second time allows machine positioning to resume without loss of position, provided no other button or key has been pressed.

• Interrupt Cycle—halts machine operation during automatic execution of a program to allow manual functions such as cleaning the work piece. Pressing the Interrupt button performs the following actions:

1. Stops all motion except the spindle.

2. Pulls the tool straight up and out of the part.

3. Stops the spindle.

4. Displays the manual screen on the console.


To restart the part program, press the Auto button followed by the Start Cycle button.

• Emergency Stop—all motion stops and power is shut off to the spindle, relay control, and servo systems. An emergency stop message with recovery instructions appears at the bottom of the text screen. To release an Emergency Stop button, twist the button in the direction indicated by the arrows and pull the button up.

Spindle

• On—activates the spindle if the machine is in manual mode. The Start Cycle button must also be pushed to start spindle rotation.

• Off—stops spindle rotation during manual operation if the Spindle On button was previously pressed.

Tool Changer

• Auto—activates the automatic tool changing function. When selected, all operator-initiated tool changes will be automatic.

• Manual—activates the manual tool changing function. When selected, all tools must be manually inserted into or removed from the spindle; bypassing the automatic tool changer.

Coolant

• Auto—activates the selected coolant to spray whenever the tool is below the Retract Clearance plane. The coolant turns off when the tool moves above the Retract Clearance plane, or during a tool change. This key cannot be activated in Manual mode. Pressing this key a second time turns off the coolant operation.

• Primary—functions only on machines equipped with a primary (i.e., flood) coolant system. Activates the primary coolant system when the machine is in Auto or Manual mode, and overrides an Coolant Auto operation. Pressing the Primary key a second time turns off this operation.

If any key other than the Auto button is pressed to restart the program, the system cancels the execution of the part program.

After the last choice is selected, the following sequence occurs:

1. A prompt is displayed to press the Start button while the console Start Cycle button flashes.

2. When the Start Cycle button is pressed, the program begins running at the specified point of the Start Block.

3. When the specified End Block is reached, the display indicates that Recovery Restart mode is complete and the Start Cycle button flashes again.

4. If the Start Cycle button is pressed again, then the program will rerun using the same Start and End Blocks.


• Secondary—functions only on machines equipped with a secondary coolant system (e.g., Coolant Through Spindle, CTS). Activates the secondary coolant system when the machine is in Auto or Manual mode and overrides Coolant Auto operation. Pressing the Secondary key a second time turns off this operation.

Communications Panel

All communication ports are located on the Comm Port panel assembly on machine control cabinet. The following connectors are available:

The communication ports are typically arranged as follows:

Figure 1–2. Communications Panel

Port Connector Type Use

10-base T RJ45 Network (Ethernet)

Indexer 8-pin military Indexer

PORT 1 and Port 2 9-pin RS-232C Serial Communications

USB USB jump drive Not available for use.


RS-232C Serial Port

The RS-232C serial ports can be used to connect peripherals to the machine. These ports may be addressed separately. The standard baud rates are software-selectable. The ports can be used as an output or input, depending upon the software.

The connector pin designated for the RS-232C signal is shown below:

Figure 1–3. Male 9-Pin D-Type Connector

While the signals present at the serial port conforms to the RS-232C standard, not all standard RS-232C signals are available. Some peripheral devices may provide RS-232C control signals that are not available at the port described here. However, such devices can usually be adapted to the port. In some cases, it may be necessary to add jumpers to the connector. Signals available at the serial port are:

To connect a peripheral to the machine, fabricate an adapter cable. If a properly shielded low capacitance cable is used, cable lengths of up to 100 feet are permissible.

Be certain that you use the correct cabling before connecting the device to the machine. Consult the peripheral manual to determine whether the peripheral is a Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) or Data Communication Equipment (DCE) device. The Hurco machine is a DTE device, and in most cases, so is a personal computer. A printer may be either a DTE or DCE device.

Pin Signal Name Signal on the Pin1 Data Carrier Detect (DCD) Not used by the control.

2 Receive Data (RXD) Data received (by machine) in serial format from peripheral device.

3 Transmit Data (TXD) Data transmitted (by machine) to peripheral device in serial format.

4 Data Terminal Ready (DTR) Not used by the control.

5 Signal Ground (SG) Line establishing the common ground reference potential for all interface lines.

6 Data Set Ready (DSR) Signal to notify printer that transmitter is ready for transmission.

7

Request to Send (RTS) Line used by control to instruct peripheral device to get ready to receive data. Data can be transmitted after the Clear-To-Send signal is received from connected peripheral device.

8 Clear to Send (CTS) Control line used by peripheral device to indicate that it is ready to receive data from machine.

9 Ring Indicator (RI) Signal indicates modem has received the ring of an incoming call.


Indexer Port

Indexing signals are always present at the Indexer port, so there is no need to turn it on. It is the customer’s responsibility to provide a harness from the Indexer to the Indexer port. Before making this harness, see the Parts Listing and Diagrams Manual for the correct pin-outs.

Network Port

The 10baseT (RJ45) connector is used with the Ultinet option. This option requires an ethernet card, cabling from the ethernet card to the communications panel, and an optikey diskette to enable the option.

USB Port

The USB Port (Universal Serial Bus) is a high-speed port that allows you to connect devices, such as printers and jump drives to the panel. You can use a jump drive to transfer files.


Spindle and Automatic Tool Changers

Hurco machining centers use either a Swing-Arm Random Pocket Automatic Tool Changer (ATC) or a Horizontal Chain Type ATC. Both types of ATCs function essentially the same.

Each tool is inserted into a tool holder before being loaded into the spindle. The orientation hole in the tool holder must always line up with the orientation key in the tool changer. Tool changer stations are numbered to identify and locate each tool.

Loading a Tool into the Spindle

Use this procedure to manually load a tool into the spindle:

1. Press the Machine Mode Manual console key to prevent the ATC from moving while you insert a tool. The Manual screen appears.

2. Touch the Orient Spindle softkey to position the spindle for tool insertion. If there is a tool in the spindle, refer to Removing Tools from the ATC Magazine, on page 1 - 25.

3. Insert the tool holder into the spindle. Make sure the tool holder slots align with the spindle head guides.

4. Release the Spindle Unclamp button to secure the tool in the spindle. Be certain that the tool is firmly seated.

5. Touch the Tool In Spindle softkey. The Tool In Spindle field appears.

6. Make sure the tool number in the Tool In Spindle field matches the number of the tool in the spindle. If the numbers do not match, enter the correct tool number.

7. To load a tool into the ATC magazine, see the Loading Tools into the ATC Magazine, on page 1 - 24 section.

Unloading a Tool from the Spindle

To manually remove a tool from the spindle, follow these steps:

1. Press the Manual Mode console key. The Manual screen appears.

2. Hold the tool to prevent it from dropping.

3. Press the Spindle Unclamp button. The spindle unclamp button is either on the side of the spindle, or the front of the spindle. Refer to Parts Listing and Wiring Diagrams Manual for your machine for a drawing showing the Spindle Unclamp button location.

4. The tool disengages. Pull the tool out of the spindle.

Only use tools that are dimensioned for the maximum spindle speed.

For machine series-specific ATC information, see Automatic Tool Changers, on page 1 - 139.


5. Release the Spindle Unclamp button when the tool is free.

Loading Tools into the ATC Magazine

The ATC takes a tool from the spindle and automatically loads it into the magazine, if space allows. The tool’s location in the magazine is recorded in the ATC Map (the Horizontal Chain Type ATC does not use an ATC Map). Before loading a tool into the ATC magazine, the Servo power must be On, and the machine must be calibrated.

To load the tool currently in the spindle into the ATC magazine:


2. Select the Tool Management softkey. The Spindle tab displays the Tool in Spindle, Next Tool, and ATC Map (Swing-Arm Random Pocket ATC only) fields appear.

3. Verify that the Tool In Spindle value matches the tool currently in the spindle. If the numbers do not match, enter the correct tool number.

4. Enter the same tool number into the Next Tool field.

5. Press the Tool Changer Auto console key.

6. Enter a new tool number into the Next Tool field. The ATC Map field must be Auto.

7. Press the Tool Changer Auto console key. The Start Cycle light begins flashing.

8. Clear the tool changer and shut the enclosure door. Press the Start Cycle button. The Tool In Spindle field will be updated to the next tool value.

• If the Next Tool is an Auto tool, it was placed into the magazine when the previous tool was removed from the spindle.

• If the Next Tool is a Manual tool, you will be prompted to insert it into the spindle.

Do not manually load tools directly into the magazine.


Removing Tools from the ATC Magazine

Remove tools from the ATC magazine by following these steps:


2. Select the Tool Management softkey to display the Tool in Spindle. If there is no tool in the spindle, set the Tool In Spindle field to 0 (zero).

3. Enter the tool number (of the tool you want to remove in the magazine) into the Next Tool field.

4. Press the Tool Changer Auto console key to move the Next Tool into the spindle.

5. Clear the tool changer area and shut the enclosure door. Press the Start Cycle button to initiate the tool change.

6. Press the Spindle Unclamp button and manually remove the tool from the spindle.

7. Repeat steps 2 through 6, as needed, to remove additional tools from the ATC magazine.

Large Tools in the ATC Magazine

A part program may require tools with large diameters. These tools can be manually loaded by the operator, or automatically loaded.

Follow these steps to load large tools into the ATC magazine:

1. Touch the ATC Map softkey from the Spindle screen. The ATC Map appears.

2. Touch the Max. Tool Dia. More than XX mm softkey.

3. An “ATC Map will be cleared! Are you sure you want to change Max. Tool Diameter to more than XX mm?” message appears.

4. Select the Yes softkey. The ATC Map will clear, then reappear. Only the odd numbered tool pockets will be available.

5. Reload tools into the magazine using the “Loading a Tool into the Spindle” section.

6. Return to the default setting of Maximum Tool Diameter XX mm or Less by using the previous procedure and touching the Max. Tool Dia. XX mm or Less softkey.

The ATC Map field will indicate if the tool selected is in the magazine, and its location.

The ATC magazine capacity is reduced by half for tools larger than 80 mm (125 mm for some machines).

Each time you switch between large and small tools, the entire ATC Map will be cleared and the magazine must be reloaded.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-501 Program Manager 1-27

PROGRAM MANAGER


Managing Program Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 33

Program Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 39

Disk Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 40

FTP Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 41

Managing Program Files

Program Manager shows all part programs that are in the control’s memory to edit or run. Use the Program Manager menu to create, open, save, and close programs. Features of the Program Manager include:

• Ability to load more than one program at a time.

• Ability to load Conversational and NC programs at the same time.

• Ability to copy blocks from one program into another (blocks are copied in Program Review; Program Manager is used to switch between programs to facilitate copy and paste).

Figure 1–1. WinMax Program Manager

List of programs

Unsaved programsProgram storage location

Snapshot of part

File type and description

Program in use lock

1 - 28 Program Manager 704-0116-501 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Program Manager softkeys are:

• New—creates a new part program. Choose the program type by selecting one of these softkeys:

• Conversational Program—creates a new conversational part program.

• NC Program—creates a new NC part program (extensions for NC part programs are determined by the NC dialect set in User Preferences. The .NC extension is also supported.).

• Job List—creates a new job list (.HJL file extension). See Job Lists, on page 1 - 37.

• Open—opens a part program that is saved to the hard drive, network drive, floppy disk, or USB memory device. The Load Program screen opens, where you can locate the program from the list, as in the following example:

Figure 1–2. Load Program screen

To find a program, navigate through the folders in the left pane by selecting “+” or “-” to expand or collapse. Select a folder to view its contents in the right pane.

Sort the program list by Program Name or Path by selecting the corresponding header. Select the Program Name header once to sort the list alphabetically. Select the Program Name header again and sort the list in reverse alphabetical order.

WinMax gives new programs the default name NONAME (for example, NONAME1.HWM). When new programs are created, they should be renamed with a suitable name and be saved to the hard drive or other media.

1. Select folder

2. Select program

3. Select to open

file


• Load—opens an HWM, NC, or XML1 file.

• Import—opens an HD3 file.

• Stream Load—optimizes memory utilization for loading and running NC program files that are too big to be stored in memory. The NC program loads as it is run. This method should be used only when you want to run the program; the file cannot be edited or drawn when opened this way. Only one NC file can be loaded at a time using Stream Load.

Programs loaded with Stream Load must be re-loaded each time WinMax is shutdown. In addition, files cannot contain NCPP calls, and subroutines cannot be in the same file.

• Save—saves the current part program to a hard drive, network drive, floppy disk, or USB memory device. If the program has a path indicated in Program Manager, it will be saved to the same location.

• Save As—allows the current part program to be saved with a different name, as a different file type, or in a different location. Also used to save files with the default NONAME program name. Type the program name in the File Name box and select the file type, as in the following example:

Sort the program list by File, Size, or Date by selecting the corresponding header. Programs with the same date will be sorted alphabetically.

Select the File header once to sort the list alphabetically. Select the File header again to sort the list in reverse alphabetical order.

Files with the same name may be loaded into Program Manager if they are saved in different locations. If an attempt is made to load a file that has the same name and same location as a file already loaded into Program Manager, a message appears confirming that the file should be loaded again. If YES is selected the file will be re-loaded and any unsaved changes will be lost.

HD3 and XML1 files will be listed with .HWM extension in Program Manager. HWM is Hurco’s conversational program file type. SAVE AS must be used to re-save the program as HD3. Using SAVE will save the program with the HWM extension. Programs cannot be saved with the .XML1 extension.

Hurco recommends the following storage areas in My Computer:

• 3½ Floppy (A:)

• PART_PROGS (D:)

• USB Device (E:)

• My Network Places (if the UltiNet option is installed)

Programs cannot be saved to the root level of the My Computer or My Documents directories. You must open these to see the directory listing before you can save to these areas.


To rename a program, highlight the entire name in the FILE NAME field and type or use alpha/numeric console keys to replace the name. To modify character(s) in the name, highlight the name, select again in the field, and use the cursor keys, delete, and the alpha/numeric keys to change the name. When the filename is completely highlighted, the filename extension does not have to be re-entered; the extension selected in the SAVE AS TYPE field will be added to the name entered in the FILE NAME field.

For Conversational programs, the following file types are available from the Save As Type drop-down list:

• .HWM—WinMax Mill conversational format

• .HD5—WinMax Desktop conversational format (desktop only)

• .HD3—Ultimax conversational format

To save as an HWM file, select the Save softkey.

To save as an HD3 (or HD5) file, select the Export softkey.

For NC programs, SAVE AS will default extensions to the selected NC dialect, either FNC (ISNC) or HNC (Basic NC). If another extension is desired, include the extension with the filename in the FILE NAME field. For example, SAMPLE. NC.

The job list extension is .HJL.

• Close—opens a menu to close selected program or all programs.

• Program Properties—stores properties for the selected part program.

• Disk Operations—opens the Disk Operations screen to browse available folders and files, and cut, copy, paste, rename, and delete files.

• FTP Manager—displays external network connections (with the Ultinet option).


Job Lists

A job list is a collection of programs, or “jobs,” that run sequentially to complete a part.

A job list is made up of jobs. A job can be a single file or it can be made up of several files; for example, a job might be a Conversational program and the NC programs that are called in it using NC/Conversational Merge.

Job list files have the file extension .HJL. To create a new job list:

1. Select the Job List softkey on the Program Manager New Program screen. A new program with the .HJL extension is added to the program list. See also Managing Program Files, on page 1 - 33.

2. Select the Save As softkey and type a name in the File Name field. Select the Save softkey.

3. Open the new .HJL file. The Job List screen opens.

4. Type a name for your Job List in the Name field and press the Enter key.

5. Select Add Job softkey. The Job screen opens.

6. Type a name for your job in the Name field and press the Enter key.

7. Select the Select Files to Add softkey. The Program Manager screen opens where you can select the files for your job.

8. Repeat steps 5-7 for as many jobs and files as you want to add.

Here is a sample job list:

The Start Cycle setting controls how the job files are run:

• Once Per Job—Start Cycle console button must be pressed to repeat the job.

• Once Per List—Start Cycle console button must be pressed to repeat the full list.

• Continuous Loop—Job List continuously runs in a loop without the need to

Individual program files must be programmed and saved prior to being added to a Job List.

Use the Add Job softkey to open a job screen.

Use the Remove Job softkey to remove a job from the job list.

Use the Edit Job softkey to edit a job.

Use the Move Job Up and Move Job Down softkeys to rearrange the job order


use the Start Cycle button.

The Force File Reload setting, when Yes, specifies that any previously loaded file will be closed and reloaded before it is run as a part of the job list. This is useful if any program information is dynamically changed while running and needs to be reloaded to take effect.

From the Job List screen, you can select a job to view or edit.

Here is sample job that contains an NC program and the NC state file:

Running the Job ListJob lists are executed from the Auto screen. Partial program runs can be specified using the Start Job and End Job fields.

Recovery Restart is supported with job lists. If machine operation is interrupted:

• during an NC program run, the NC Editor restart screen opens so the restart marker can be set.

• during a Conversational run, the Auto screen opens so the block range and restart operation can be set.

Use Add File to Job softkey to enter a file path to add a new file to the job.

ORUse Select Files to Add softkey to browse for files in Program Manager.

Use the appropriate softkeys to edit the file path, remove a file from the job, or change the order of the files in the job.


Program Properties

Program properties store and manage properties for the selected part program.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Program Properties fields:

Drawing is disabled when a Job List is the active file.

Description

Display Units

Material

Name

Path

Program Type

Write Protection


Disk Operations

Disk Operations displays available directories and files. Cut, copy, paste, rename, and delete program files from Disk Operations.

See also:

Managing Program Files, on page 1 - 33

Import / Export Functions, on page 1 - 127

NC States, on page 1 - 127

Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files, on page 1 - 59

Figure 1–3. Disk Operations

When a directory is highlighted in the Directory window, the softkeys are:

• Cut Directory—deletes the directory from one location to be pasted into another location

• Copy Directory—makes a copy of the directory (but does not delete) to be pasted into another location

• Paste Into Directory—pastes the directory or file that has been cut or copied. For example, to copy a directory and paste it into a new location:

1. Highlight the directory you wish to copy.

2. Select the COPY DIRECTORY F2 softkey.

3. Highlight the folder in which you wish to place the copied directory.

4. Select the PASTE INTO DIRECTORY F3 softkey.

Directory Window Files Window


• Create Directory—creates a new directory.

• Rename Directory—renames a directory.

• Delete Directory—removes the directory.

• FTP Manager—displays the external network connections (with Ultinet option).

When a file is highlighted in the Files Window, the softkeys are:

• Cut—deletes the file from one location to be pasted into another location.

• Copy—makes a copy of the file (but does not delete) to be pasted into another location.

• Paste—pastes the file that has been cut or copied. For example, to copy a file and paste it into a new location:

1. Highlight the file you wish to copy.

2. Select the COPY F2 softkey.

3. Highlight the folder in which you wish to place the copied file.

4. Select the PASTE F3 softkey.

• Rename—renames the file.

• Delete—removes the file.

• Load—loads the file into the Program Manager.

• FTP Manager—displays the external network connections (with Ultinet option).

FTP Manager

FTP Manager allows you to transfer programs from a remote location (host), such as a PC or machine, to a local PC or another machine, using the UltiNet option. See WinMax Mill Options for more information.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-501 Utilities 1-37

UTILITIES

Utilities are accessed with the Auxiliary console key. Select the Auxiliary console key and this window with softkey selections appears on the screen:

Figure 1–1. Auxiliary Screen

Use the softkeys on the Auxiliary screen to navigate to other parts of WinMax Mill. Also toggle the Edit Lockout feature on and off with the Toggle Edit Lockout State softkey. See Edit Lockout, on page 1 - 46 for more information.

Select the Utility Screen softkey to access the Utility screen. These functions are available and are described in this section:

System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 44

User Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 45

Additional Utilities Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 53

Printing Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 53

Integrator Support Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 56

Serial I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 57

Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 57

1 - 38 Utilities 704-0116-501 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

System Configuration

The SYSTEM CONFIGURATION softkey on the Utilities screen displays machine, control, and software information. Softkeys on the System Configuration submenu are:

• WinMax Configuration—changes WinMax configuration settings.

• Machine Specifications—changes machine specifications.

• Backup Config & Machine Files—copy Configuration and Machine files to a directory or to a USB memory device or floppy disk.

• Restore Config & Machine Files—use saved files to overwrite existing Configuration and Machine files.

WinMax Configuration

The WinMax Configuration softkeys are:

• Software Version—displays the current version of WinMax Mill.

• Software Options—displays the current software options. An option can be toggled on or off using the Enable Selected Option and Disable Selected Option softkeys; the option state is displayed as Installed or Disabled.

• Motion Configuration—displays the current motion system.

• Ladder File Configuration—Ladder files bridge communication between the machine and the software. The current version of the Ladder files on the machining center, the total number of Ladder files, and any mismatched Ladder files that may cause a software conflict are displayed.

• Language File Configuration—displays the language files.

• WinMax IP Address—displays the current IP address of the CNC.

Machine Specifications

Displays specific information about the machining center that was entered during software/machine installation.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Machine Specifications fields:

Machine Class Minus/Plus A/B/C Direction Travel Limit

Machine Hour Meter Minus/Plus X/Y/Z Direction Travel Limit

Maximum Contouring Rate Number of Axes Present

Maximum Rapid Traverse Rate Vertical/Horizontal

Maximum Spindle Motor Speed

Maximum Spindle Tool Speed


Backup Config & Machine Files

Backup files can be used to restore corrupted Configuration and Machine files on the hard drive. Select this softkey and choose the location to copy the files. Backup files can be copied to any directory on the hard drive or to a USB memory device or floppy diskette.

Restore Config & Machine Files

Select this softkey to use saved Configuration and Machine files to overwrite existing files stored on the hard drive.

User Preferences

WinMax software can be modified to change how certain information is displayed or calculated. For example, certain interface elements, Conversational and NC settings, machine parameters, and languages can be modified.

Select the User Preferences softkey on the Utilities screen to access to the following:

• User Interface Settings, on page 1 - 46

• Conversational Settings, on page 1 - 48

• NC Settings, on page 1 - 48

• Autosave Settings, on page 1 - 49

• Tool Utilities and Settings, on page 1 - 49

• Machine Parameters, on page 1 - 61

• Serial Port Settings, on page 1 - 50

• FTP Server Settings, on page 1 - 50

• Rotary Axes Parameters, on page 1 - 51

• WinMax Uptime, on page 1 - 50

• Select Language, on page 1 - 52

• Data Logging Filters, on page 1 - 52

• Advanced, on page 1 - 53

User Preference settings can be saved to a file for backup purposes using the Export User Preferences button. When this button is selected, the file manager screen opens. Select a location to save the backup file (filename.setx), then select the Export softkey. The current user preference settings are saved in this file.

To import saved user preference settings use the Import User Preferences button.

Settings can be restored to factory defaults with the Reset User Preferences button.

Integrator Parameters, Machine Parameters, Rotary Axes Parameters, and FTP Host cannot be backed up or restored.


User Interface Settings

User Interface Settings change the screen display.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the User Interface Settings:

Edit Lockout

The Edit Lockout feature limits access to certain program functions and screens. Partial and Full lockout levels are available. Partial lockout prevents changes to the part program, while Full lockout prevents changes to the program as well as to setup information. Refer to the table below for a complete listing of features that are affected by partial and full lockout.

Edit Lockout is enabled or disabled with the Toggle Edit Lockout State softkey located on the Auxiliary screen. When the softkey is selected, a pop-up box appears prompting for the password. Enter the password and select OK. The Edit Lockout feature is enabled (or disabled if it was previously enabled), and a confirmation message appears.

Set Edit Lockout Level to Partial or Full on the User Interface Settings screen:

1. Select the Auxiliary console key. The Auxiliary screen opens.

2. Select the Utility Screen softkey.

3. Select the User Preferences softkey.

4. Select the User Interface Settings softkey. Select Partial or Full in the Edit Lockout Level field. When Partial is selected, you can also lock out Part Setup and/or Tool Setup.

When the cursor is in the Edit Lockout Level field, the Change Lockout Password softkey is available. The first time the feature is used, the password should be reset from the factory default. This password is required to enable and disable Edit Lockout.

Application Font Size Screen Configuration

Edit Lockout Level Screensaver Timeout

Edit Mode Show All File Types

Enable Program Restore Softkey Menu Position

List Icon Size Swap Screens

You will be redirected to the Input screen if you are on a screen that becomes locked out when you enter the password.


Here are the features locked with Edit Lockout:

Additional Edit Lockout considerations:

• Runtime modifications—Edit Lockout does not prevent a running program from modifying setup or itself. For instance, if the program uses part or tool probing blocks or macros that manipulate program variables or part or tool setup directly, this is allowed.

• Recovery Restart—Recovery Restart is enabled in both conversational and NC modes when Edit Lockout is enabled. Access to the NC Editor is allowed in

Feature Partial Full

Part Programming Locked Locked

Program Parameters Locked Locked

Program Review: Multiple Block Functions (Copy, Paste, Insert, Delete)

Locked Locked

Copy/Change Blocks Locked Locked

Erase Functions Erase Part Program and Parameters locked

Locked

Capture Feeds and Speeds (Auto) Locked Locked

DXF Locked Locked

DB Search / Block Jump Locked Locked

Jump to Block (from Error Message) Locked Locked

Import Functions Import Part Program and Parameters locked

Locked

Part Setup Depends on setting Locked

Work Offsets Accessible with Part Setup access Locked

Tool Setup Depends on setting Locked

Tool Setup: Feeds and Speeds When Tool Setup is accessible, feeds and speeds are updated, but data blocks that use the tools are not.

Locked

Tool Offsets Accessible with Tool Setup access Locked

Part Program Tool Review: Match Tools, Add Unmatched Tool

Accessible with Tool Setup access Locked

User Preferences Accessible Locked

Probing Cycles Accessible Locked

Part Counter Accessible Locked

Fields or softkeys appear grayed out and are not accessible when lockout mode is enabled. In cases where an entire screen is locked out, you will be redirected to the Input screen.


this case in order to set the restart marker, but text entry and all softkeys that allow modification of the program (for example, Cut and Paste) are disabled.

• Overrides—Speed/Feed overrides are controlled by the Override Lockout parameter in Program Parameters General 1 tab. Since Program Parameters are not accessible in Partial or Full lockout mode, Override Lockout should be set to ON so overrides cannot be adjusted while running the program.

Conversational Settings

Conversational Settings control certain aspects of Conversational programming.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Conversational Settings:

NC Settings

NC Setting control certain aspects of NC programming.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the NC Settings:

NC Variable Monitoring settings:

Check Calc Assist Inconsistencies Math Assist Style

Data Block Tool Entry Feed and Speed Update

Warn Before Saving in Old Format

Default Conversational Program Type

Display Machine Axes For Universal Type

HD3 Save Program Type

BPRNT/DPRNT Output Device Exported NC Decimal Places

BPRNT/DPRNT Output File NC Dialect

Custom NC File Extensions NC Display Type

Diameter Compensation Using Tool Setup Save NC State with Program

Disable Tool Length Offset Table

Enable Reset at Program Start

Enable Variable Monitoring

Monitored Variable Number

Variable Reset Value


Autosave Settings

Specify Yes or No to enable automatic saving of part programs. When set to Yes, you can specify the frequency and whether to save the active program only.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Autosave Settings:

Tool Utilities and Settings

The Tool Utilities and Settings screen is accessed from Utilities/User Preferences. Fields vary dependent on whether the Tool and Material Library option is loaded.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tool Utilities and Settings:

General tab

Matching tab

Life Monitoring tab

Enable Automatic Save

Save Active Program Only

Save Frequency

Replace In Files

Tool Calibration Mode

Update Data Blocks With Tool Changes

Use Tool Type Checking

Automatically Load Unmatched Tools As Manual

Enable Automatic Matching

Overwrite Existing Zero Calibration

Maximum Diameter Difference

Enable Tool Life Monitoring

Max Tool Cutting Time Exceeded

Reset Cutting Time on Tool Data Change

The Life Monitoring tab is not displayed if the Tool & Material Library option is not installed.


Serial Port Settings

Serial Port Settings allows you to set Port 1 and Port 2 settings for protocol, baud rate, character length, stop bits, and parity. The following fields appear on the Serial Port Settings screen. Refer to your hardware documentation for your equipment’s specific settings.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Serial Port Settings:

FTP Server Settings

The WinMax console can serve as an FTP Server. For more information refer to Using FTP, on page 6 - 8 in Extended Shop Floor.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the FTP Server Settings:

WinMax Uptime

The WinMax Uptime screen displays the start date time and runtime for the current session of Winmax.

Baud Rate

Character Length

Parity

Protocol

Stop Bits

Enable FTP Server

FTP Server Port

Maximum Idle Time (Mins)

Password

Path

User Name


Rotary Axes Parameters

Set the General Rotary Axes Parameters on this screen.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Rotary Axis Parameters:

Set the specific A, B, C axes parameters (depending on configuration) by selecting theA/B/C Axis softkeys.

For dual-zone machines, parameters can be set for each zone, on the Zone 1 and Zone 2 tabs.

Part Kinematics Z Reference

Rotary Axis ISO Standard

Tilt Axis Preference

Automatic Centerline Calculation

Machine Coordinate Relative

Rotary Centerline X/Y/Z


Select Language

Select and register a language on the Language Selection screen:

1. Select a language from the list.

2. Press the Load Language softkey to install the Language files. You can also press the F1 key to perform this function. The selected language is shown in the Current Language field.

Language Quick Toggle

You can toggle between two languages from any screen in WinMax using the Language Quick Toggle feature. To set the primary and secondary languages, highlight a language in the list and select the Set as Toggle Language 1 (for primary language) or Set as Toggle Language 2 (for secondary language). The selected languages are shown at the top of the screen:

Figure 1–2. Language Selection screen

Use Ctrl+L on the keyboard (or virtual keyboard) to switch back and forth between the languages on any screen in WinMax.

Data Logging Filters

Used for diagnostic purposes only.


Advanced

Used for service purposes; requires a password to access.

Additional Utilities Softkeys

• Printing Setup—set printing preferences for program blocks, range of program blocks, program parameters, part setup, and tool setup.

• Integrator Support Services—for diagnostics and machine configuration; password required for access.

• Restart Control—exits all control operations, powers down, then restarts machine and control.

• Shutdown Control—exits all control operations and powers down machine.

• Serial I/O—to begin read/write program operations using screenport 1 or 2.

• Log Files—displays error and status messages that have occurred during normal operation.

Printing Setup

The Printing Setup F3 softkey on the main Utilities screen provides access to the following printing functions:

• Part Program Printing—print part program elements.

• Tool Information Printing—print the Tool Library or save it to file.

• Probing Data Printing—print probing part inspection files.

• Serial Numbers Printing—print a report that lists used Serial Numbers.

Part Program Printing

In the Part Program Printing screen you can choose to print some or all of the following elements:

• Program Blocks (all or a range)

• Program Parameters

• Part Setup

• Tool Setup

After checking the desired elements, select the PRINTING F3 softkey. A pop-up window appears that contains the selected data. The information can be viewed by selecting the heading to expand the section; select the heading again to hide the information. The following softkeys appear in the pop-up window:


• Print Preview—displays the part program information as it will appear when printed.

• Print—sends the information to the printer.

• Save As—saves the information as a text file to an external drive.

• Close—closes the pop-up window.

Tool Information Printing

The TOOL INFORMATION PRINTING F6 softkey on the Tool Utilities and Settings screen allows you to view and print tool information for all tools saved in the Tool Library:

Figure 1–3. Tool Information and Printing

Select the PRINT button on the Tool Information pop-up to print a list of tools and settings, as in the following example:

ATC

Tool Number: 23

Tool Type: Ball End Mill

Tool Diameter is 0.0938 inches.

Tool length is 0.5625 inches.

Length of cut is 0.4688 inches.

Number of flutes is 0 inches.

Direction of Spindle Rotation is Clockwise.

Helix Angle is 0°.

Shank Diameter is 0.0938 inches.

Apt Gear Ratio is 1.

Tool Information Printing is available only with the Tool and Material Library option.

Print tool list

Save tool list


Apt Tool Number is 1.

Apt Diameter Offset is 1.

Apt Length offset is 1.

Simulation Color is SEQUENTIAL.

MTC

Tool Number: 1

Tool Type: Drill


Tool length is 5 inches.

Length of cut is 5 inches.

Number of flutes is 0 inches.

Direction of Spindle Rotation is Clockwise.

Drill Angle is 118.000000°.

Helix Angle is 0°.







Tool Number: 20

Tool Type: Cutting Tap


Tool length is 1.296 inches.

Length of cut is 1.08 inches.

Tap Direction: Right Hand.

Tap Chamfer: Bottoming.

Thread Pitch is 0.0417 inches.

Thread Diameter is 0.216 inches.

Helix Angle is 0°.

Flute Style: Spiral Flute.








Probing Data Printing

When Probing Part Inspection files are generated, they are saved to the same location and with the same filename as the part program with a .TXT filename extension. For example, the Part Inspection file for the program SAMPLE.HWM is SAMPLE.TXT. Part Inspection files are printed from the control using the PROBING DATA PRINTING softkey:

1. Select the PRINTING SETUP F3 softkey from Utilities.

2. Select the PROBING DATA PRINTING F3 softkey.

3. Locate the Part Inspection file from the Locate Probing Data Files screen.

4. Select the PRINT F1 softkey to print the file.

Serial Numbers Printing

You can print a report that lists the Serial Numbers already used in the part program:

1. Select the Printing Setup softkey from Utilities.

2. Select Serial Numbers Printing softkey.

3. The report is displayed in a pop-up window. Select the Print softkey.

Integrator Support Services

Subsequent Part Inspection data from the same part program is appended to the existing Part Inspection file for that program.

The Integrator Support Services screen requires a password to access and is for Hurco Certified Technicians’ use in configuring and setting up the machine.


Serial I/O

Two serial ports are available on the control. The Serial I/O screen contains Status and Bytes Transferred fields for both ports. In addition, there are read, write, and abort softkeys for both ports.

These are the fields on the Serial I/O screen:

• Status—status of serial port.

• Bytes Transferred—number of bytes transferred.

These softkeys are available on the Serial I/O screen. Duplicate sets of fields and softkeys are available on the Serial I/O screen for Port 1 and Port 2.

• Begin Reading from Port—brings up 2 softkey choices: READ NC FROM PORT and READ CONV FROM PORT to identify the program format to read.

• Begin Writing to Port—writes the program to the port.

• Abort Port Operation—halts the read or write operation for the port.

Log Files

WinMax provides two log files that are accessed with the Log Files softkey, as well as status and error listings:

• Active Error Listing, on page 1 - 57

• Active Status Listing, on page 1 - 58

• Error History, on page 1 - 58

• Status History, on page 1 - 59

• Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files, on page 1 - 59

• Export Log, on page 1 - 60

Active Error Listing

WinMax provides a list of the most recent error messages displayed, up to a maximum of 200 messages. Review messages when troubleshooting or to determine if a problem recurs.

These are the softkeys on the Active Error Listing screen:

• Previous Page F1—displays the error messages on the previous page of the Active Error Listing.

• Next Page F2—displays the error messages on the next page of the Active Error Listing.

• Clear All F4—clears all error messages from the Active Error Listing.


Active Status Listing

The Active Status Listing screen displays current machine status messages. Each item will include time/date stamp, language file, language file index and the machine status message currently active in the system. Examples are messages such as “MOTION HOLD HAS BEEN DEPRESSED,” or “LOW LUBE LEVEL.” As each status changes back to a normal state, it will be removed from the list (see Status History, on page 1 - 59).

Example:

10:53:39, STATUS.WRC, 32

CHIP DOOR(S) OPEN.

These are the softkeys on the Active Status Listing screen:

• Previous Page F1—displays the status messages on the previous page of the Active Error Listing.

• Next Page F2—displays the status messages on the next page of the Active Error Listing.

• Clear All F4—clears all status messages from the Active Status Listing.

Error History

The Error History screen displays a list of all system errors since the last power up (see Active Error Listing, on page 1 - 57). A plus sign “+” indicates when the error occurred and a minus sign “-” indicates when the error was cleared.

Examples:

Error occurred:

10:53:40, ERROR.WRC, 110, +

SERVO FAULT – Z AXIS.

Error cleared:

10:57:32, ERROR.WRC, 110, -

SERVO FAULT – Z AXIS.

The history will also display part program errors generated during programming (interpreter errors). These errors will not display in the Active Error Listing since they are transient.

Example:

11:39:21, COMPILER.WRC, 3, +

ERROR IN BLOCK 1: TOOL 1 IS AN INVALID TOOL NUMBER.


Status History

The Status History screen displays a list of all system messages since the last power up (see Active Status Listing, on page 1 - 58). A plus sign “+” indicates when the status went active and a minus sign “-” indicates when the status returned to normal.

Examples:

Status went active:

10:53:39, STATUS.WRC, 32, +

CHIP DOOR(S) OPEN.

Status returned to normal: Log F

10:54:27, STATUS.WRC, 32, -

CHIP DOOR(S) OPEN.

Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files

When the Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files softkey is selected, a file manager screen opens with access to Log and Diagnostic files. Directories are displayed in the left pane; these include AtcMapLog, Communications, DumpFiles, NavErr, NavTap, NavESTOP, Profiles, ScreenCaptures, and ThreadMonitor. Select a directory to see its contents (the files) displayed in the right pane. To help distinguish between files, the date is included in the filename.

When it is necessary to copy certain files for service purposes, follow these steps:

1. Attach the USB flash memory device to the external connector on the communications port on the machine.

2. Select the appropriate directory from the left-hand pane and select the file(s) you wish to copy from the right-hand pane.

3. Select the COPY softkey.

4. In the left-hand pane, select the USB flash memory device (will probably indicate it is E drive in parentheses).

5. Select the PASTE softkey. The files are now on the USB flash memory device, and can be transferred to a PC to be emailed.

Due to the large size of some of the files, it is recommended to copy them from the Hurco machine to a USB flash memory device.


Export Log

The Export Log displays data that is lost or changed when a program is exported from WinMax (.HWM) to another format (.HD3, .FNC, etc.). Each time a program is exported from .HWM to another format, the data from the most recent export is displayed and the older data is erased.

These are the softkeys on the Export Log screen:

• Previous Page F1—displays the previous page if log is longer than one page.

• Next Page F2—displays the next page if log is longer than one page.

• Clear All F4—erases all information from the Export Log.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-501 Machine Parameters 1-55

MACHINE PARAMETERS

The Machine Parameters screens list various parameters, the range of values that can be set for each parameter, and the current set or default value. The values of the Machine Parameters may be changed by the operator.

The fields that will be displayed on the Machine Parameters screens are dependent upon machine type. The values shown on the following screen figures are the default factory settings for HTX and VTX series machines.

Follow these steps to access the Machine Parameters screens:

1. Select the AUXILARY console key.

2. Select the Utility Screen icon.


4. Select the Machine Parameters softkey.

Machine Parameters Page 1, on page 1 - 62




Machine Parameters Pages 5 and 6, on page 1 - 78

Estimated Run Time Parameters, on page 1 - 79

The machine, part, and/or tool may be damaged if parameters are changed without understanding the machine operation that may be affected by the change.

1 - 56 Machine Parameters 704-0116-501 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Machine Parameters Page 1

Parameter Description Range Default

Control Power Off Time

Turns the control off after the specified period of inactivity.

0-255minutes

120

UPS Software Shutdown Off Time

Sets the number of minutes the system will wait before it shuts down after a power loss condition has been detected.

1-20 1 min

Enable Retract Z-Axis on Power Loss

Enables Z-axis retract upon power loss, when an M91 is present.

0 (disable)1 (enable)

0

Auto Balance Enable Adjusts the balance between the motion card and the servo drives at the start of calibration and run program.


1

Disable Auto On Chip Removal

Disables chip conveyor from turning on automatically in AUTO mode.

0-1 0

Chip Removal On/Off Delay Enable

Enables the Chip Removal Delay. 0 (disable)1 (enable)

0

Chip Removal On Delay Time

Sets the time the chip conveyor/auger cycles on, when Chip Removal On/Off Delay is enabled.

0-9999 seconds

0

Chip Removal Off Delay Time

Sets the time the chip conveyor/auger cycles off, when Chip Removal On/Off Delay is enabled.

0-9999 seconds

0

Enable Dual Zones Sets a dual-zone capable machine as either a single long bed machine, or as a dual-zone machine.

0 (1 zone - long bed)1 (dual zones)

1

Dual Laser Probe Present

Sets tool probe in one or both zones of dual-zone machines.

0 (one)1 (both)

0


Control Power Off Time

Turns the control off after the specified period of activity.

The default setting for Control Power Off Time is 120 minutes.

UPS Software Shutdown Off Time

Sets the number of minutes the system will wait before it shuts down after a power loss condition has been detected. The default is 1 minute.

Enable Retract Z-Axis on Power Loss

Enables Z-axis retract on power loss. 0 disables the retract feature. 1 enables the Z-axis retract feature. Default is 0.

This parameter must be used in conjunction with M90/M91. The Z-axis retracts upon power loss when this parameter is set to 1 and an M90 code (Z-axis Retract Enable) is inserted at the beginning of the program. The retract can be turned on and off within the program using M90 (on) and M91 (off).

Auto Balance Enable

Auto Balance Enable set to 1 will have the logic controller send an auto balance request to adjust the balance between the motion card and the servo drives at the start of calibration and run program. No auto balance request will be sent if the parameter is 0.

The default setting for Auto Balance Enable is 1.

Disable Auto On Chip Removal

The Disable Auto On Chip Removal parameter disables the chip conveyor from turning on automatically in Auto Mode. The range is 0 or 1; 0 is the default. Setting the parameter to 1 will disable the Auto On Chip Removal feature.

Chip Conveyor Parameters

The Z-axis will not retract if the M90 code is not used in the program in conjunction with this parameter.

Only a trained technician performing diagnostic tuning of the servo amplifiers should set the Auto Balance Enable value to zero.

Chip Removal On/Off Delay Enable, Chip Removal On Delay Time and Chip Removal Off Delay Time parameters are functional only when the Chip Removal Forward On/Off F2 softkey (Automatic Run Mode) is set to On.


Chip Removal On/Off Delay Enable

The Chip Removal On/Off Delay Enable parameter is used with the Chip removal On Delay Time and Chip Removal Off Delay Time parameters to periodically allow the chip conveyor or auger to remove chips from inside the machine during the part program.

When Chip Removal On/Off Delay Enable is set to 0, this parameter is disabled. Values entered into the Chip Removal On Delay Time and Chip Removal Off Delay Time will not be retained.

When Chip Removal On/Off Delay Enable is set to 1, use the Chip Removal On Delay Time and Chip Removal Off Delay Time parameters to regulate operation of the chip conveyor or auger.

The default setting for Chip Removal On/Off Delay Enable is 0 (disable).

Chip Removal On Delay Time

When the Chip Removal On/Off Delay Enable parameter is set to 1, the Chip Removal On Delay Time parameter defines the time that the chip conveyor or auger cycles On to remove chips from inside the enclosure.

The default setting for Chip Removal On Delay Time is 0 seconds.

Chip Removal Off Delay Time

When the Chip Removal On/Off Delay Enable parameter is set to 1, the Chip Removal Off Delay Time parameter sets the time that the chip conveyor or auger cycles Off. When the chip conveyor or auger cycles Off, the screen status display is FWD-Delay, not Stopped.

The default setting for Chip Removal Off Delay Time is 0 seconds.

Enable Dual Zones

This parameter enables zones on a dual-zone machine. 0 sets both zones as a single long bed machine, and 1 sets the zones as separate zones. The default is 1.

Dual Laser Probe Present

The Dual Tool Probe Present parameter sets tool probe in one or both zones of dual-zone machines. 0 specifies there is one tool probe; 1 specifies there is a probe in each zone. The default is 0.




CAL to LS Velocity X, Y, Z

Sets the feedrate for the X, Y, or Z axis as it moves toward the calibration limit switch during a machine calibration cycle. See Cal to LS Velocity Parameters.

100-2540 MMPM

1270

CAL to LS VelocityA, B, C

Sets the feedrate for the A, B, or C axis as it moves toward the calibration limit switch during a machine calibration cycle. See Cal to LS Velocity Parameters.

100-2540 DPM

0

Disable Tool Picker Option

Turns off the Tool Picker option. 0 (enable)1 (disable)

0

ATC Disable Disables all automatic tool changer functions.

0 (enable)1 (disable)

0

Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC

Manual Mode ATC operations are performed at Safety Position when enabled.


0

Tilt Axis Safety Position

Sets the position for the tilt axis during an automatic tool change when the Table Safety Move parameter is set to Yes for an Automatic Tool Change.

0-360 degrees 0

X-Axis Safety Position

Sets the absolute X axis machine location to which the table will move when the Table Safety Move parameter is set to Yes for an Automatic Tool Change. See X-Axis and Y-Axis Safety Position.

Travel Limits (mm)

0

Y-Axis Safety Position

Sets the absolute Y axis machine location to which the table will move when the Table Safety Move parameter is set to Yes for an Automatic Tool Change. See X-Axis and Y-Axis Safety Position.

Travel Limits (mm)

0

ATC Z-Axis Move to Zero Position

On HMX only, moves the Z-axis to zero position at the end of a tool change.


0


Cal to LS Velocity Parameters

The Cal to LS Velocity parameters set the feed rate for each axis as it is moving towards the calibration limit switch during a machine calibration cycle. Only the axes that are present on the machine need to be set. The units are indicated in parentheses and can be MMPM (millimeters per minute), IPM (inches per minute), or DPM (degrees per minute).

• The default setting for Calibrate to Limit Switch Velocity is 1270 MMPM (50 IPM) for the X, Y, and Z axes. The range for Cal to LS Velocity values for the X, Y, and Z axes is 100 MMPM to 2540 MMPM.

• The default setting for Calibrate to LS Velocity is 0 DPM for the A, B, and C axes. The range for Cal to LS Velocity values for the A, B, and C axes is 100 DPM to 2540 DPM.

• The default setting for Calibrate to Limit Switch Velocity is 1270 mmpm (50 IPM) for X, Y, and Z axes.

• The default setting for Calibrate to Limit Switch Velocity is 1000 mmpm (39.37 IPM) for A axis on a VTXU machine.

• The default setting for Calibrate to Limit Switch Velocity is 2000 (78.74 IPM) mmpm for B axis on an HMX machine.

• The default setting for Calibrate to Limit Switch Velocity is 1000 mmpm (50 IPM) for C axis on a VTXU machine.

Disable Tool Picker Option

Turns off the Tool Fixture (TPS) option, if it is present on your VM, VMX, or VTXU machine. Refer to the Tool Fixture (TPS) chapter in the Options manual.

The default setting for Disable Tool Picker Option is 0.

The Disable Tool Picker Option parameter is not functional on HMX machines.

ATC Disable

The ATC Disable parameter allows the user to completely disable all automatic tool change functions. Setting the ATC Disable parameter to 1 disables the Auto Tool Change button (for performing tool changes in Manual mode or Tool Setup) and the Auto Tool Change in Auto mode button (for running programs). With ATC Disable set to 1, all tools will have to be inserted and removed manually using the Spindle Clamp/Unclamp button mounted on the head.

The default setting for ATC Disable is 0.

When ATC is disabled, the Control assumes that the ATC is in a safe position to allow normal X, Y, and Z axis movement. Input status for the ATC at home position will not be checked. Failure to ensure that the ATC is in a safe position may result in machine damage.


Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC

When the Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC operations parameter is set to 0 for an ATC command, the Z axis moves to tool change height and the ATC is completed at the current X and Y axis position.

The default setting for Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC is 0 (disable).

If this parameter is set to 1, then:

1. The Z axis moves at rapid to zero.

2. The X and Y axes move at rapid to the X- and Y-axis safety positions.

3. The Z axis moves to tool change height.

4. The automatic tool change is completed.

5. The Z axis moves to zero.

6. The X and Y axes move at rapid back to the previous X and Y position.

Axis Safety Position Parameters

Tilt Axis Safety Position

The Tilt Axis Safety Position parameter sets the position for the tilt axis on the VTXU machine during an ATC if either one of the following conditions occurs:

• the Move to Safe Pos During TC parameter is set to Yes (for Auto Run mode).

• the Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC parameter (for Manual or Input modes) is set to 1.

After the Z retracts before the ATC, the tilt axis moves to the position indicated in degrees. After the automatic tool change completes, the tilt axis returns to the original position.

The default setting for Tilt Axis Safety Position is 0.

The Tilt Axis Safety Position parameter is not functional for HMX machines, VM machines, or VMX machines.

X-Axis and Y-Axis Safety Position

The X-Axis Safety Position and Y-Axis Safety Position parameters determine the absolute X-axis and Y-axis machine locations, in millimeters, to which the table will move when the Table Safety Move parameter is set to Yes for an Automatic Tool Change. See Program Parameters for more information.During an automatic tool change with the Table Safety Move set to Yes:

1. The Z-axis will retract to maximum position.

The Move to Safety Position for Manual Mode ATC only applies to Manual mode. ATC operations in Auto Mode are not affected by this parameter. To move the table to the safety position during an automatic tool change in Auto Mode, set the Move to Safe Pos During TC from Program Parameters in Input.


2. The X-axis and Y-axis will move at rapid feedrate to the X-Axis Safety Position and the Y-Axis Safety Position, respectively.

3. The automatic tool change will complete.

4. The X-axis and Y-axis will move at rapid feedrate to the previous X-axis and Y-axis positions before the move to the X-Axis and Y-Axis Safety Positions.

The X-Axis Safety Position value must not exceed the minimum or maximum travel limits for the X-axis. The Y-Axis Safety Position value must not exceed the minimum or maximum travel limits for the Y-axis. If the Table Safety Move parameter is set to No, these parameters are not used, and steps 1, 2, and 4 above are not executed for an automatic tool change.

The default setting for X-Axis Safety Position is 0.000 mm. The default setting for Y-Axis Safety Position is 0.000 mm.

The X-Axis and Y-Axis Safety Position parameters are not functional for HMX machines.

ATC Z-Axis Parameter

ATC Z-Axis Move to Zero Position

This parameter is functional only on an HMX machine. The ATC Z-Axis Move to Zero Position parameter moves the Z-axis to the zero (0) position at the end of either an Auto or Manual tool change.

ATC Z-Axis Move to Zero Position set to 0 disables the parameter. ATC Z-Axis Move to Zero Position set to 1 enables the parameter.

The default setting for ATC Z-Axis Move to Zero Position is 0.

ATC Z-Axis Move to Zero Position parameter is not functional for VTXU, VM, or VMX machines.




Machine Pause - Flood Coolant

Sets the time the program pauses when the primary coolant is enabled.

0-60 seconds 0

Machine Pause - Secondary Coolant

Sets the time the program pauses when the secondary coolant is enabled.

0-60 seconds 0

Aux Coolant Console Button

Identifies which auxiliary output the console Aux Coolant button controls.

0-12 0 (disabled)

Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable

Sets the Washdown Coolant pump run cycle; used in conjunction with other washdown coolant parameters.

0 (continuous)1 (pulsating)2 (delay)

0 or 1(depends on machine)

Alt Washdown Dwell Controls washdown coolant flow on the right side of the machine enclosure on certain machines. Used in conjunction with other washdown coolant parameters.

0-32767(.01 sec)


Alt Dwell Lt Side Controls washdown coolant flow on the left side of the machine enclosure on certain machines. Used in conjunction with other washdown coolant parameters.

0-32767 (.01 sec)

200

Alt Washdown Off Time

Sets the time the washdown coolant flow cycle is paused, on certain machines.

0-32767 (.01 sec)


Washdown On Delay Timer

Defines the time the washdown coolant pump is on; used with Washdown Off Delay Timer.

0-9999seconds

0

Washdown Off Delay Timer

Defines the time the washdown coolant pump is off; used with Washdown On Delay Timer.

0-9999seconds

0


Coolant Parameters

The coolant parameters are used to control coolant flow to the spindle (known as flood coolant), coolant flow in the machine enclosure (known as washdown coolant), or to turn the washdown coolant pump on or off. The Washdown Coolant Pump must be On for Right and Left side operation. Some coolant parameters may not be functional on your machine. For examples of how to use washdown coolant parameters on your Hurco machine, see Table 1–1.Washdown Coolant Parameter Examples, on page 1 - 75.

Washdown coolant flow for VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, and VMX50 machines is continuous to both sides of the enclosure. The amount of washdown coolant used during machining operations is controlled by cycling the washdown coolant pump.

The VMX60, VMX6030, VMX64, and VMX84 machines are equipped with a butterfly solenoid that alternates washdown coolant flow between the right and left sides of the machine enclosure.

This is the washdown coolant flow cycle for VMX64 and VMX84 machines:

1. Coolant flows on right side of machine enclosure (defined in Alt Washdown Dwell).

2. Pause time of no coolant flow (defined in Alt Washdown Off Time).

3. Coolant flows on left side of machine enclosure (defined in Alt Dwell Lt Side).

4. Pause time of no coolant flow (defined in Alt Washdown Off Time).

The amount of washdown coolant used during machining operations for VMX60, VMX6030, VMX64, and VMX84 machines is controlled by the time washdown coolant flows/pauses to each side of the machine enclosure, and/or by cycling the washdown coolant pump.

VMX64 and VMX84 machines are equipped with a separate Factory-configured timer to control the Y-axis rear way cover washdown on and off cycles.

Machine Pause - Flood Coolant

Machine Pause - Flood Coolant pauses the running part program for the indicated time (0-60 seconds) whenever the program enables the primary flood coolant.

The default is 0 seconds.

Machine Pause - Secondary Coolant

Machine Pause - Secondary Coolant pauses the running part program for the indicated time (0-60 seconds) whenever the program enables the secondary (CTS) coolant.

The default is 0 seconds.

Both Flood and Secondary Coolant pause parameters can be set to the same pause time or they may be set separately.

Both Flood and Secondary Coolant pause parameters can be set to the same pause time or they may be set separately.


Aux Coolant Console Button

Identifies which auxiliary output the console Aux Coolant button controls. 0 is disabled. 1-12 identify the auxiliary output.

M52-M55 and M142-M149 are used in the program to enable the auxiliary equipment or machine function that the Aux Coolant Console button controls.

Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable

This parameter is used with other washdown coolant features to regulate washdown coolant flow for continuous clearing of chips from the machine enclosure.

Parameter operation is determined by machine type.

• VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50—use this parameter to manage washdown coolant flow:

• When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 0, washdown coolant will continuously flow on the right and left sides of the machine enclosure. Values in the Alt Washdown Dwell, Alt Dwell Lt Side, or Alt Washdown Off Time will have no effect on washdown coolant operation.

• When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 1, do not use this setting for a VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, or VMX60 machine. If unexpected performance occurs, refer to the Machine Maintenance section of the Maintenance and Safety Manual.

• When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 2, the washdown coolant pump will cycle for the times defined in Washdown Delay On Timer and Washdown Delay Off Timer.

• The default setting for Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable is 0.

• VMX60, VMX6030, VMX64, VMX84—use this parameter to alternate washdown coolant flow on the machine enclosure:

• When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 0, do not use this setting for a VMX64 or VMX84 machine. If unexpected performance occurs, refer to the Machine Maintenance section of the Maintenance and Safety Manual.

• When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 1, washdown coolant flow will cycle for the times defined in Alt Washdown Dwell, Alt Dwell Lt Side and Alt Washdown Off Time.

• When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable parameter = 2, the washdown coolant pump will cycle for the times defined in Washdown On Delay Timer and Washdown Off Delay Timer, whether or not washdown coolant flow is alternating in the machine enclosure.

• The default setting for Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable is 1.

Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable is not functional for HMX, VM, and VTXU machines.


Alt Washdown Dwell

This parameter controls the time washdown coolant flows on the right side of the machine enclosure. Alt Washdown Dwell is used with Alt Washdown Off Time to define the washdown coolant flow cycle on the right side of the machine enclosure. The value for Alt Washdown Dwell in 0.01 sec increments, so a value of 500 equates to 5 sec.

Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable must be set to 1 or 2 to use Alt Washdown Dwell. Parameter operation is determined by machine type.

• VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50

• When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 1, do not use this setting for a VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50 or VMX60 machine. If unexpected performance occurs, refer to the Machine Maintenance section of the Maintenance and Safety Manual.

• When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 2, Alt Washdown Dwell is not functional; entering a value in Alt Washdown Dwell will have no effect on washdown coolant flow for a VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50 or VMX60 machine.

• The default setting for Alt Washdown Dwell is 500 (5 seconds), but set this parameter to 0 to avoid unexpected performance. If unexpected performance occurs, refer to the Machine Maintenance section of the Maintenance and Safety Manual.

• VMX60, VMX6030, VMX64—When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 1 or 2, define the time for washdown coolant to flow on the right side of the machine enclosure.

• The default setting for Alt Washdown Dwell is 500 (5 seconds).

• VMX84—When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 1 or 2, define the time for washdown coolant to flow on the right side of the machine enclosure.

• The default setting for Alt Washdown Dwell is 1000 (10 seconds).

Alternating Washdown Dwell is not functional for HMX, VM, and VTXU machines.

Alt Dwell Lt Side

On VMX60, VMX64, and VMX84 machines, this parameter controls the time washdown coolant flows on the left side of the machine enclosure. Alt Dwell Lt Side is used with Alt Washdown Off Time to cycle washdown coolant flow on the left side of the machine enclosure. The value for Alt Dwell Lt Side is in 0.01 sec increments, so a value of 500 equates to 5 sec.

Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable must be set to 1 or 2 to use Alt Dwell Lt Side. Parameter operation is determined by machine type.

• VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50—Alt Dwell Lt Side is not functional; entering a value in Alt Dwell Lt Side will not affect washdown coolant flow for a VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50 or VMX60 machine.

• The default setting for Alt Washdown Dwell is 200 (2 seconds), but you should set this parameter to 0 to avoid unexpected performance. If unexpected performance occurs, refer to the Machine Maintenance section of the Maintenance and Safety Manual.


• VMX60, VMX6030, VMX64, VMX84—define the time for washdown coolant to flow on the left side of the machine enclosure.

• Alt Dwell Lt Side will only function if the Alt Washdown Dwell is greater than 0. If the value of Alt Washdown Dwell is 0, the machine will ignore Alt Dwell Lt Side and washdown coolant will not flow on either side of the machine enclosure.

• If Alt Dwell Lt Side = 0 and Alt Washdown Dwell is greater than 0, washdown coolant will flow to the left side of the enclosure for the time defined in Alt Washdown Dwell.

• The default setting for Alt Dwell Lt Side is 200 (2 seconds).

Alternating Dwell Left Side is not functional for HMX, VM, and VTXU machines.

Alt Washdown Off Time

On VMX64 and VMX84 machines, this parameter defines the pause time in the washdown coolant flow cycle. The value is in 0.01 sec increments, so a value of 500 equates to 5 sec.

Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable must be set to 1 or 2 to use Alt Washdown Off Time. Parameter operation is determined by machine type.

• VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50—Alt Washdown Off Time is not functional; entering a value in Alt Washdown Off Time will not affect washdown coolant flow for a VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50 or VMX60 machine.

• The default setting for Alt Washdown Off Time is 0; this parameter is not functional for a VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, or VMX60 machine.

• VMX60, VMX6030, VMX64, VMX84—When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 1 or 2, washdown coolant flow will pause for the time indicated in the Alt Washdown Off Time after coolant flow on each side of the enclosure.

• If Alt Washdown Off Time is set to 0, the washdown off-time is 0.7 sec.

• The default setting for Alt Washdown Off Time is 200 (2 seconds).

Alternating Washdown Off Time is not functional for HMX, VM, and VTXU machines.

Washdown On Delay Timer

This parameter defines the time (in seconds) the washdown coolant pump is On, and is used with the Washdown Off Delay Timer to manage coolant usage. The default setting for Washdown On Delay Timer is 0 seconds.

Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable must be set to 2 to use Washdown On Delay Timer.

• VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50—washdown coolant flow will be continuous to both sides of the machine enclosure during the time the washdown coolant pump is On.

• VMX60, VMX6030, VMX64, VMX84—the washdown coolant pump is On for the time defined, whether or not washdown coolant flow is alternating in the machine enclosure. Table 1–1.Washdown Coolant Parameter Examples, on page 1 - 75 shows an example where the washdown coolant pump cycles on and off while washdown coolant flow is alternating on the machine enclosure.


• The default setting for Washdown On Delay Timer is 0 seconds.

This parameter defines the time (in seconds) the washdown coolant pump is On, and is used with the Washdown Off Delay Timer to manage coolant usage. Washdown On Delay Timer is not functional for VM machines.

Washdown Off Delay Timer

This parameter defines the time (in seconds) the washdown coolant pump is Off, and is used with the Washdown On Delay Timer to manage coolant usage. The functionality of this feature is dependent upon machine type. Washdown Off Delay Timer is not functional for VM machines.

Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable must be set to 2 to use this parameter.

• VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50—defines the time the washdown coolant pump is Off.

• VMX60, VMX6030, VMX64, VMX84—defines the time the washdown coolant pump is Off, whether or not coolant flow is alternating in the machine enclosure.

• The default setting for Washdown Off Delay Timer is 0 seconds.

It is recommended that you follow this formula:

Washdown On Delay Timer = Alt Washdown Dwell + Washdown Off Delay Timer + ALT Dwell Left Side + Washdown Off Delay Timer

See Table 1–1.Washdown Coolant Parameter Examples, on page 1 - 75.

It is recommended that you follow this formula:

Washdown Off Delay Timer = Alt Washdown Dwell + Washdown On Delay Timer + Alt Dwell Left Side + Washdown On Delay Timer

See Table 1–1.Washdown Coolant Parameter Examples, on page 1 - 75.

Washdown Off Delay Timer should be calculated using even multiples of its value, increasing it by that value.

For example, if the calculated value is 30, then you can increase it to 60, 90, etc.


Examples for Coolant Parameters Use

Table 1–1. Washdown Coolant Parameter Examples

VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, and VMX60N95 Codes (Integrator Configuration Parameters)

247 228 248 249 297 298 Result

0 0 0 0 0 0 Continuous washdown coolant flow.

2 0 0 0 20 451. Washdown coolant pump on for 20 sec.2. Pump off for 45 sec.3. Cycle repeats.

VMX64, VMX84N95 Codes (Integrator Configuration Parameters)

247 228 248 249 297 298 Result

1 800 600 0 0 0

1. Right side washdown coolant for 8 sec.2. No coolant for 0.7 sec.3. Left side washdown coolant for 6 sec.4. No coolant for 0.7 sec.5. Cycle repeats.

1 800 600 250 0 0

1. Right side washdown coolant for 8 sec.2. No coolant for 2.5 sec.3. Left side washdown coolant for 6 sec. 4. No coolant for 2.5 sec.5. Cycle repeats.

2 1000 1000 500 30 60

1. Right side washdown coolant for 10 sec. 2. No coolant for 5 sec.3. Left side washdown coolant for 10 sec. 4. No coolant for 5 sec.5. Washdown coolant pump on for 30 sec during right & left cycles. 6. Pump off for 60 sec.7. Cycle repeats.

Key to N95 Code Column Headings for Tables AboveIntegrator Configuration Parameter

Definition

N95:247 Pulsating or Delay WD EnableN95:228 Alt WD DwellN95:248 Alt Dwell Lt SideN95:249 Alt WD Off TimeN95:297 WD On Delay TimerN95:298 WD Off Delay Timer




Warm-Up Cycle Time Per Pass

Sets the time for each step of the warm-up cycle.

60-600 120

Warm-Up Starting Speed

Sets the spindle speed for the initial step of the warm-up cycle.

0-25% Max RPM

1000

Warm-Up Speed Steps

Sets spindle speed increments for each step of the warm-up cycle.

0-25% Max RPM

2000

Warm-Up Max Spindle Speed

Sets the spindle speed for the final step of the warm-up cycle.

0-Max RPM Machine’s maximum spindle RPM

Warm-Up Axis Feed Rate

Sets the axis feed rate for each step of the warm-up cycle.

0-Max Rapid

2920

Axis Feedrate Override Min (%)

Sets the Axis Feedrate Override Minimum value.

0-99% 10%

Axis Feedrate Override Max (%)

Not accessible by the user. Contact a Hurco Certified Service representative for assistance.

101-200 150

Rapid Feedrate Override Min (%)

Sets the Rapid Feedrate Override Minimum value.

0-200% 10%

Rapid Feedrate Override Max (%)

Not accessible by the user. Contact a Hurco Certified Service representative for assistance.

0-200 100

Rotary Position Out of Tol Proc

Specifies how to process “Out of position” conditions for the axes.

0 (ignore)1 (warn)2 (error)

0


Warm Up Parameters

These parameters allow the operator to configure the machine’s daily warm-up cycle.

• Warm-up Cycle Time Per Pass

• Warm-up Starting Speed

• Warm-up Speed Steps

• Warm-up Max Spindle Speed

• Warm-up Axis Feed Rate

When the warm-up cycle is initiated:

• Spindle speeds up to the Warm-up Starting Speed RPM for the time indicated in the Warm-up Cycle Time per Pass field.

• X and Y axes move diagonally from corner to corner at the Warm-up Axis Feed Rate.

• The machine then steps through the warm-up cycle until the Warm-up Max Spindle Speed is reached. The length of each step is defined by the Warm-Up Cycle Time per Pass. During each step of the cycle, the spindle speed will increase to the Warm-up Speed Steps RPM and the axes will run at the Warm-up Axis Feed Rate.

Axis Feedrate Override Min (%)

Sets the Axis Feedrate Override Minimum value. This value cannot be greater than or equal to the maximum value.

Rapid Feedrate Override Min (%)

Sets the Rapid Feedrate Override Minimum value. This value cannot be greater than or equal to the maximum value.

Rotary Position Out of Tol Proc

Specifies how to process “Out of position” conditions for the axes:

• 0 = ignore

• 1 = post a warning

• 2 = generate an error condition

The default is 0.

Altering the default daily warm-up parameters may lead to inadequate machine warm up that can negatively impact spindle operations and may void the Hurco warranty.

Refer to your machine’s Maintenance and Safety manual for more information about warm-up cycles.


Machine Parameters Pages 5 and 6

Aux Output Parameters

Aux Output 1-12 Confirmation Enable

Aux Output Confirmation Enable set to 1 enables a confirmation signal for completion of each Auxiliary M-code Output. The program pauses until the confirmation signal is detected. A setting of 0 will not require a confirmation signal and will not pause the program during the Auxiliary M-code Output.

The default setting for each Auxiliary Output Confirmation Enable is 0.

Disable Aux Out 1-12 During Interrupt

When set to 1, the parameter Disable Aux Output During Interrupt disables the specified Auxiliary M-code Output when an Interrupt cycle is selected during Auto Run mode. Upon return to Auto Run mode, the Auxiliary M-code Output will automatically be re-enabled. However, if another mode is selected, then the Auxiliary M-code Output will remain disabled until activated again in Auto Run mode.

A setting of 0 will leave the Auxiliary M-code Output enabled when an Interrupt cycle is selected during Auto Run mode. It will remain enabled after exit from Interrupt cycle, even when accessing a mode other than Auto Run.

The default setting for Disable Aux Out During Interrupt is 0 (enable).


Aux Output 1-12 Confirmation Enable

Enables a confirmation signal for completion of each Auxiliary M-code Output.

0 (disable1 (enable)

0

Disable Aux Out 1-12 During Interrupt

Disables the specified Auxiliary M-code Output when an Interrupt cycle is selected during Auto Run mode.

0 (enable)1 (disable)

0


Estimated Run Time Parameters

Use the Estimated Run Time Parameters to make adjustments to certain machine operations in order to generate a more accurate estimated program run time.

The Compute Estimated Run Time function on the Auto screen provides an estimate of the time it takes to run the current part program. Times entered on the Estimated Run Time Parameters screens are used in the calculation of the overall program run time estimate.

Select the Estimated Run Time softkey from the Machine Parameters screens to view and enter Estimated Run Time Parameters. The values are saved upon exit.

Figure 1–4. Estimated Run Time Parameters for a horizontal milling machine

The available parameters are dependent on machine type.

See Auto Mode, on page 1 - 160 for information about the Compute Estimated Run Time softkey.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-501 Programming Basics 1-75

PROGRAMMING BASICS

The following sections explain basic programming information for Conversational and NC programming, such as required setup, program checking, editing, and running of the program.

WinMax Interface Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 82

Input Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 90

Part Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 91

Rotary Part Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 96

Part Fixturing and Tool Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 99

Work Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 99

Stock Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 101

Tool Calibration Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 102

Tool Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 106

Advanced Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 109

Change Tool Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 116

Part Program Tool Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 116

Part Program Tool Review for NC Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 117

Tool Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 119

Tool Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 121

Tool and Material Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 123

Program Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 124

Import / Export Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 127

Copy and Change Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 130

Review Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 132

Manual Safety Override Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 134

Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 137

1 - 76 Programming Basics 704-0116-501 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

WinMax Interface Environment

There are three ways to navigate and enter data for programming:

• Touchscreen—use the stylus or other pointing device to select softkeys and drop-down lists for data entry and programming.

• Keyboard—use the function (F1-F12) keys and other keyboard shortcuts for navigation and to call up screens.

• Ultimax classic edit mode—use the console keys; for example, use the arrow keys for navigation and the enter key to accept data typed into a field. See Edit Mode below for more information.

Edit Mode

Edit Mode is set in Utilities. Refer to User Interface Settings, on page 1 - 46. WinMax has two edit modes:

• Ultimax Classic (default)—in this mode the console arrow keys are used to move between blocks and segments, and the enter key is used to accept data after it is typed into a field.

• Windows Dialog—in this mode the console arrow keys do not navigate through fields and the enter key is not required to accept data typed into a field.

If you want to... Ultimax Classic Windows Dialog

Enter data into a field Enter key to accept data Enter key to accept dataORDown (or Up) arrow to accept data

Advance to next block Right/Left arrows ORNext Block/Previous Block softkeysORPage Up or Page Down key

Next Block/Previous Block softkeysORPage Up or Page Down key

Advance to next segment or operation

Right/Left arrows ORNext segment/hole softkeysORPage Up or Page Down key

Next segment/hole softkeysORPage Up or Page Down key

Navigate to next or previous tool in Tool Setup

Left or right arrow keys Page Up or Page Down keys

The right and left arrows will change the selection in fields with drop-down lists (such as Tool Type in Tool Setup) in either Ultimax Classic or Windows Dialog mode.


Full Precision Editing

Numbers with decimals are rounded to the decimal display limit (three digits for metric and four digits for imperial) when displayed in a field. Full Precision Editing allows you to view the full number (up to 12 digits after the decimal) and/or to edit it to a more precise point. With the cursor in a numeric decimal field, press F + decimal (.) on a machine, or Ctrl + decimal (.) on the desktop to open a pop-up box containing the number.

Figure 1–5. Full Precision Editing Pop-up Box

Edit the number and select OK to save the changes. To close the pop-up box without saving changes, select Cancel.

Softkeys

Softkeys appear as buttons on the screen; their default location is the right side of the screen, but they can also be positioned on the left by changing the setting in User Preferences (see Utilities, on page 1 - 43 for more information). Select a softkey using one of these methods:

• On the screen, select the softkey.

• On the console, simultaneously press the F key and the number that corresponds to the softkey (for example, F + 1 will select the F1 softkey). For dual-console machines, ALT + the softkey number will select softkeys on the graphics screen.

• On the keyboard (if using), press the corresponding function key (F1, F2, F3, etc).

Do not use Full Precision Editing to change numbers that are automatically calculated by WinMax. These numbers are calculated to their 12-digit maximum accuracy and changing them could result in changes to other automatic calculations in the program.


Drop-down Lists

Many fields contain a choice of items that are viewed by pulling down a list:

Figure 1–6. Example of a drop-down list

Expand and Collapse Files

In the Program Manager, files can be expanded or collapsed as follows:

Figure 1–7. Example of Expand and Collapse Files

Touch the smallarrow to view adrop-down list; usearrow keys tohighlight choiceand Enter consolebutton to select

Touch the “+” to expandand view the files and

Touch the “-” to collapse

folders in a folder

(close) and hide thefiles and folders in afolder


Sorting and Resizing Columns

On screens that contain columns, data in a column can be sorted ascending to descending or descending to ascending by selecting the column heading. Columns can be resized by dragging the column divider in the header.

Figure 1–8. Example of Sorting and Resizing Columns

Pop-ups

During machine operation and programming, pop-up boxes may be displayed to convey prompts or status messages. These pop-up boxes can be closed by selecting the appropriate button (i.e., YES or NO or OK). Some pop-up boxes may only provide informational messages and will be displayed for a few seconds before they automatically close.

Figure 1–9. Pop-up message example

Certain pop-ups, such as the calculator and virtual keyboard, can be minimized by selecting the “—” in the upper right corner. These pop-ups will remain open but are “hidden” in the taskbar, and can be viewed again by touching the taskbar button. These pop-ups can also be closed by touching the “X” in the upper right corner:

Figure 1–10. Pop-up showing minimize and close icons

Select to sort column Select and drag to resize column

Minimize

Close


Status Bar

The Status Bar appears at the bottom of every WinMax screen. It displays the program name of the current active part program, a calculator icon, the current unit of measure (inch or mm), the keyboard icon, and the current time. When viewed on a single screen console, all icons appear in the same status bar; when viewed on a dual-screen console, the program name and calculator icon appear on the left screen status bar, and the unit of measure, keyboard icon and time appear on the right screen status bar.

• To use the calculator function, touch the calculator icon.

• To use the on-screen keyboard, touch the keyboard icon.

• To change the unit of measure, touch the unit of measure abbreviation.

Figure 1–11. Status Bar and other areas

Calculator

Select the calculator icon in the Status Bar to open the calculator. The calculator appears on screen and is operated using the stylus to select the calculator keys on screen.

Figure 1–12. Calculator pop-up

When the calculator is minimized (with “—” in the upper right), the last calculation is retained, but when it is closed (with “X” in the upper right), the last calculation is erased.

Softkeys

Status Bar

Error/Status area

Prompts

WinMax Version


Pop-up Keyboard

Enter part program names using the on-screen, pop-up keyboard. The pop-up keyboard is available for entering text, such as naming a part program.

Figure 1–13. Pop-up Keyboard

1. Either select the keyboard icon located in the screen’s status bar or simultaneously press the Alt and Input keys on the console to activate the keyboard.

2. Use a pointing device such as the stylus to select characters from the keyboard.

3. Press the Enter key to update a field and advance the cursor after the characters are selected in the text field (e.g., after creating a program name).

4. Select the X located in the lower left corner of the text entry window to close the keyboard.


On-screen Help

On-screen Help provides information about using WinMax. The Help is context-sensitive to the screen level. Press the console Help button to display the Help topic for the current screen. The following list describes Help functions:

• Buttons in the upper left-hand corner of the Help screen are used to move through Help topics and print screens.

• Use the Hide button to hide the navigation pane.

• Use the Back button to return to the previous Help screen.

• Use the Print button to print the current displayed Help topic, if a printer is attached and configured. See Accessing the WinMax Help in PDF format, on page 1 - 89 for more information about printing.

• Use the arrow buttons to move between pages within a Help topic and to move through topics.

• Use the Contents tab for a list of information sorted by subject:

1. Select the “+” to expand the topic and view sub-topics.

2. Select the topic to display it.

• Use the Index tab to show the Help index:

1. Quickly scroll to an index topic by typing the topic in the box at the top of the index.

2. Select a topic and the Display button to view the topic.

• Use the Search tab to search the Help for a word or phrase:

1. Type the search word(s) into the text box at the top of the pane.

2. Select the List Topics button. A list of topics that contain the search word(s) is displayed.

3. Select a topic and the Display button to view that topic.

• Use the Favorites tab to save Help topics for quick access:

1. Select the Add button at the bottom of the pane to add the current topic.

2. Select a topic from the Favorites list, and select the Display button to view it.

3. Select a topic from the Favorites list, and select the Remove button to remove it from the list.


Accessing the WinMax Help in PDF format

The WinMax On-screen Help is also provided in PDF format for easy printing. The information contained in the PDF files is identical to the on-screen Help. The PDF files may be copied to a floppy disk or USB memory device to be transferred to a PC for viewing or printing. Here are the steps to access the PDF files:

1. From the Input screen, select the PROGRAM MANAGER F8 softkey.

2. Select the DISK OPERATIONS F7 softkey.

3. In the left-hand pane, navigate through the folders:

• For WinMax Mill on a machine, the path is D:\Hurco\Winmax Mill\hlp

• For WinMax Desktop on a PC, the path is C:\Program Files\Winmax Mill\hlp

The PDF files will appear in the right-hand pane.

4. Highlight the PDF file(s) in the right-hand pane, and select the COPY F2 softkey.

5. Ensure that your media is loaded (either a floppy disk in the disk drive or a USB memory device in the USB port), and navigate to the proper location in the left-hand pane of the DISK OPERATIONS screen (either the floppy drive A: or the USB port E:). Highlight the desired location.

6. Place the cursor in the right-hand pane and select the PASTE F3 softkey to paste the PDF file(s) to the desired location.

7. You may now remove your media and load the PDF file(s) onto a PC for viewing and printing.

The SHOW ALL FILE TYPES field in User Interface Settings must be set to YES (default is NO) in order to see the PDF files in the directory. Access the SHOW ALL FILE TYPES field in Auxiliary Mode, Utilities/ User Preferences/ User Interface Settings.


Input Mode

Input mode is used for part and tool setup, part programming, setting parameters, and other information entry. Press the Input key on the console to access the Input screen.

The following softkeys appear on the Input screen:

• Part Setup—access the Part Setup screen to establish part zero, centerline, offset Z, safety work region, and other parameters.

• Tool Review—access the Tool Review screen for a summary listing of all tools used in active program (see Part Program Tool Review, on page 1 - 116 for more information).

• Part Programming—access and create data blocks of a part program. The current program's data blocks appear on screen when this softkey is used. Delete, add, edit, and navigate through the data blocks. The NC editor is displayed for NC programs.

• Program Parameters—access General, Milling, Holes, Probing, and Performance parameters. NC parameters are accessible for NC programs.

• Import / Export Functions—import parts of a previously saved Conversational program or NC state, export NC state to file, or import/export the tool library.

• Copy and Change Blocks—make changes to several blocks at one time and/or copy and change blocks within the active program.

• Erase Functions—erase sections of the current program.

• Program Manager—access and manage other part programs.

Erase Functions

Erase functions erases (deletes) programs or components (part setup, tool setup, and program parameters):

• Erase Part Setup—resets Part Setup to the default values.

• Erase Tool Setup—deletes tools in Manual Tools, Auto Tools, and spindle.

• Reset Program Parameters—resets Program Parameters to the default values.

• Erase Program—deletes the part program data blocks but retains the program name.

• Unload Program—removes program from the Program Manager, including the filename. This does the same function as CLOSE PROGRAM in the Program Manager.

The Erase Tool Setup softkey deletes ALL tools from the control, and cannot be undone.


Part Setup

Part Setup Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 94

Part Setup Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 94

Rotary Part Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 96

Stock Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 101

Part setup establishes the locations of part zero in X, Y, and Z relative to the machine's absolute zero. Part Zero may be located anywhere on the fixturing or the part. During machine calibration, each axis moves to its + or - travel limits. Machine zero, identified during machine calibration, is the location to which each axis moves to determine a fixed point where the X, Y, and Z axes become tangent. This value does not change after calibration.

Figure 1–1. Part Zero Relative to Machine Zero Viewed Looking Down at Table

Program the axes to move within the coordinate system as shown below:

Figure 1–2. Axis Motion

1. Part Zero

2. Workpiece

3. Machine Zero

4. X Axis

5. Y Axis

-X Table moves to the left

+X Table moves to the right

-Y Table moved toward the operator

+Y Table moves away from

-Z Spindle moved down into the part

+Z Spindle moved up away from part


Figure 1–3. Part Zero in Z (Tool calibration Plane)

Part Setup Coordinate Systems

Machine Coordinate System

The Machine Coordinate System is fixed to the machine frame and does not move when the machine axes move. This coordinate system is located at the spindle nose center when all machine axes are at their zero positions.

Unrotated Coordinate System

The Unrotated Part Coordinate System is present on a 4-axis or 5-axis machine and is located at the Workpiece Coordinate system when all the machine’s axes are at their Part Setup Zero locations. This coordinate system moves with the machine’s linear axes, but does not rotate with the rotary axes. The Unrotated Coordinate system is generally used only by NC Post Processors that do not use Tool Center Point Management.

Workpiece Coordinate System

The Workpiece Coordinate System is fixed to the physical workpiece fixtured to the table; it moves and rotates when the machine axes move.The coordinate system is fixed to the part fixtured on the machining center’s table. The Workpiece Coordinate System is typically set in the user’s CAD/CAM system or on the part drawing used for programming the tool paths.

1. Table

2. Part (Workpiece)

3. Machine Absolute - Z Axis

4. Tool Zero Calibration Plane


The Machine Coordinate, Workpiece Coordinate, and Unrotated Coordinate systems are shown in the figure below:

Figure 1–4. Part Setup Coordinate Systems

1. Machine Coordinate System

2. Unrotated Part Coordinate System

3. Workpiece Coordinate System


Part Setup Fields

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Part Setup fields:

Part Setup Softkeys

Part Setup contains these softkeys:

• Work Offsets—Accesses the work coordinates G54-G59 and a set of shift values for NC programs. These are used to set multiple part zeroes for multiple parts fixtured to the table and milled consecutively using the same program.

• Tool Setup—Accesses Tool Setup screen to enter the descriptions of tools that will be used in the part program.

• Part Programming—Accesses fields to enter the exact description of how the part will be cut. See Part Programming in the Conversational Programming manual for more information.

• Program Parameters—Accesses the Program Parameters screen to specify data common to all program data blocks.

• Part Probing—Accesses the Probing parameters screen (available only with

A Centerline X / Y / Z Offset Z Part Zero Y TIS / Tool in Spindle

B Centerline X / Y / Z Part Part Zero Z X/Y Skew (DEG)

C Centerline X / Y / Z Part Zero A Part Zero Z Shift Zone

Disable Centerlines Part Zero B Probe Z Z Table Offset

Feed Part Zero C Safety Work Region

Machine Part Zero X Spindle

The fields on the Part Setup screen vary depending on machine configuration and tool calibration mode.

Use the Safety Work Region fields on the Part Setup screen to enter values to define the safety region. Type the value in the field, or jog each axis to the desired safety region, and press the Store Position button on the jog unit.

Out of range entries in the Safety Work Region appear in red. See Machine Specifications for ranges.

Always enter the Z(-) parameter (Z Bottom) to prevent the tool from drilling through the part and into the table.

Use the Z(+) field (Z Top) to define the clearance above the part and fixture.

Use the Z(+) field with a Position block. The Z Top value reduces rapid Z motion for Position blocks. The spindle retracts to the Z Top value above the tool zero calibration for Position blocks.


the Probing option). See Part Probing Option.

• Store Machine Position—Sets the current axis position as a Part Zero location. The cursor location determines which axis (X or Y) will be set.

These are the softkeys on the second Part Setup screen, accessed with the More softkey:

• Stock Geometry—Accesses fields to specify the dimensions of the stock material so it displays properly in graphics.

• Orient Spindle—Allows the spindle to be positioned for tool insertion or removal.


Rotary Part Setup

Ensure that the B-axis angle is at zero degree when measuring Z Table Offset, Offset Z, and Zero Calibration fields for 5-axis machining.

For conversational programs, B-axis Part Setup Offset must be zero degree.

Rotary Part Setup for Zero Calibration mode

See Tool Calibration Modes, on page 1 - 102 for more information about tool calibration.

In addition to standard Part Setup fields, Part Setup for rotary programming in Zero Calibration mode includes part zero for the rotary axis and the rotary centerline fields.

Zero Calibration Rotary Centerline Calculation

Hurco recommends automatically calculating the rotary centerline. Use the following steps:

1. Enter Part Zero X and Part Zero Y field values, either manually or by using the jog unit to store the machine position.

1. Workpiece Coordinate System

2. Zero Calibration (positive value)

3. Offset Z (positive value)

4. Z Table Offset (positive value)

Manually type the values directly into the Part Setup fields, or use the jog unit to set the values. Follow these steps to use the jog unit to enter the Part Setup values:

1. Use the jog unit to move the appropriate axis until it is in the position that you want to define as part zero.

2. Select the Store Machine Position softkey or the Store Posi-tion button on the jog unit.


2. Place the cursor in the Part Zero X, Part Zero Y, or Offset Z field to make the Calculate Rotary Offsets softkey available.

3. Select the Calculate Rotary Offsets softkey. The machine automatically calculates the values for the rotary centerline fields.

Figure 1–5. Rotary Centerline

1. Center of cylindrical part and center of rotary table

2. Part Zero

3. A Centerline Y

4. A Centerline Z


Figure 1–6. Rotary Centerline

1. Part Zero

2. X Center

3. Y Center

4. Rotary Centerline

5. Rotary Centerline

6. Rotary Table

When the part is fixtured to the center of the rotary-axis table, the rotary centerline is the Y-Z center point of the part.


Part Fixturing and Tool Loading

Before entering data into the part and tool setup screens for a part program, first fixture the work piece to the table and load a tool into the spindle.

In order to determine the starting point (part zero) in the part, first fixture the work piece (raw material or stock) to the machine tool table. This process, called fixturing, can be accomplished using a variety of clamping devices, such as vises and toe clamps. Select the fixturing device that will hold the work piece securely without getting in the way of the cutting tool while the part is being made.

You may want to insert a tool in the spindle to use as an edge finder when identifying part zero. Press the Manual button in the Machine Mode grouping to display the Manual screen. Use the Tool in Spindle field and softkey to enter the tool number for the edge finder tool.

Insert this tool as described in Loading a Tool into the Spindle, on page 1 - 23. The tool will need to be calibrated as described in Tool Setup, on page 1 - 106.

Work Offsets

The Work Offsets softkey displays up to six work coordinates (G54-G59) and a set of shift offset values. These are used to set multiple part zeroes for multiple parts fixtured to the table and milled consecutively using the same program.

The X, Y, Z, and optional Rotary A and B work offset values can be entered for G54 to G59 codes. The coordinates defining G54 are the part zero coordinates for the original part defined on the Part Setup screen. When the G54 coordinates are changed on this screen, the part setup is also changed.

These work offsets are stored in memory, but not with the part program. They are not saved to a disk file and need to be re-entered.

The shift offset coordinates, which follow the six work coordinates on the screen, move all of the part zero coordinates as a group. This incremental value is useful when you place part fixtures on the table in a different location and want to shift all of the work offsets to the newly fixtured location. The G54-G59 offset values do not change on the screen when shift offset values are entered.


For dual-zone machines, specify the zone for each offset:

Figure 1–7. Work Offsets on a dual-zone machine

Values for the Zone field are:

• 0—zone undefined (the active zone when only one is in use)

• 1—Zone 1

• 2—Zone 2

Auxiliary Work Offsets

There are 93 additional X, Y, Z, and optional Rotary A and B work offsets available on the AUX WORK OFFSETS screen. These are accessed with the Aux Work Offsets F6 softkey on the WORK OFFSETS screen.

To access any of these offsets call G code G54.1 Pn, where n is 1 thru 93. For example, to change to auxiliary work offset 46 you would call G54.1 P46 in your NC program.

To update work offset values, use data setting G code G10 L20 Pn to set the Auxiliary work offsets values. For example, to update work offset 46 value call G10 L20 P46 X12.5 Y3.0 Z-0.5

Following is a sample NC program that uses Auxiliary Work Offsets:

%

G90G80

T1M6F100

G10 L20 P1 X1 Y1 Z.-1

G10 L20 P93 X10 Y10 Z-.1

G54.1 P1 (change work part setup to 1)

G1X0.Y0.Z0.

X1.

Set zone for eachwork offset


Y1.

X0.

Y0.

G54.1 P93 (change work part setup to 93)

G1X0.Y0.Z0.

X1.

Y1.

X0.

Y0.

M02

Stock Geometry

Stock Geometry allows you to specify the dimensions of the stock material so it displays properly in graphics (when Stock Outline field is enabled in Graphics Settings).

For dual-zone machines, choose Zone 1 or Zone 2 tab to specify stock geometry settings.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Stock Geometry fields:

Apply Border To Top Manual Stock Sizing Y Length

Border Size Radius Y Ref Position

Direction Stock Type Z Length

Length X Length Z Ref Position

Manual Border Sizing X Ref Position Zero Ref


Tool Calibration Modes

Tool measurement and Part Setup Z measurements can be set with one of two modes: Zero Calibration or Absolute Tool Length. The mode is selected in Utilities/User Preferences/Tool Utilities and Settings. See Tool Utilities and Settings, on page 1 - 49.

Absolute Tool Length mode

With the Absolute Tool Length method, the absolute length of the tool from the spindle nose to the tip of the tool is stored in Tool Setup. Each tool used in a program should be calibrated to the same gauge device set on table top. To use Absolute Tool Length Mode:

1. In the Tool Setup screen, enter the number of the tool to be calibrated into the Tool Number field.

2. If the tool is in spindle, jog Z down to the gauge block.

3. Select Store Machine Position softkey or button on the Jog Unit.

4. Part Zero is stored separately in the Part Zero Z field in Part Setup and is the distance from Machine Zero to the Z0 of the workpiece:

a. Select Part Setup softkey.b. In Part Zero Z field, use calibrated tool to touch off Z0 of the workpiece

and select the Store Machine Position softkey or button on the jog unit.

If a program’s tools were calibrated using one mode, and that program is loaded into a control that is set to the other mode, a message is displayed that the program’s tool calibrations cannot be used. The program data is loaded, but the tool calibration data is not; tool calibration fields are set to zero.


Setup of Gauge Device

To use Absolute Tool Length mode, you must define the Z location for the table top and the touch off device(s). This needs to be done only once unless the touch off device changes. Access the Tool Measurement screen with the Tool Measurement Settings softkey on the 2nd set of Tool Setup softkeys (use the More softkey):

Figure 1–8. Tool Measurement screen

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tool Measurement fields:

To set the Z Reference position

1. Advance to Z Reference field.

2. Place a gauge of known length on table top.

3. Jog Z-axis down and carefully touch spindle nose to top of gauge block.

4. Select Store Machine Position softkey or press the store position button on remote jog unit.

5. Subtract the length of the gauge block from the value stored in Z Reference

Device

Height

Notes

Touch-Off Device

Z Location

Z Reference

The Part Kinematics Z Reference value from Rotary Axes Parameters may also be used as the Z Reference value by selecting the Set to Part Kinematics Ref softkey.


field.

To set up a gauge device

1. In the Touch-Off Device field, select the device number to be used when measuring tool length. Up to six different devices can be set, but only the one currently selected in the Touch-Off Device field is active when setting tool length.

2. Advance to the row number that corresponds to the touch-off device number.

3. In the Device column, select gauge.

4. In the Height column, enter the height of the gauge.

5. Multiple gauges can be set up by specifying height in the appropriate row (1-6). However, the active device for measuring tool length is the one specified in the Touch-Off Device field.

To set up a probe device

1. Follow the steps to set up a single gauge device (for example, set up gauge for device) and set touch-off device to Device 1.

2. In Tool Setup, use any tool to touch-off on the Device 1 gauge.

3. Select Store Machine Position softkey or Store Position button on jog unit.

4. In Tool Measurement Screen, select the touch-off device to be used when probing tool length.

5. In the appropriate row, select Probe as the device from the drop-down Device list.

6. Jog the tool down to the probe until probe is engaged.

7. With cursor in the Z Location column, select Store Position button on jog unit or Store Z Location softkey. This will calculate the height of the probe from Z Reference.

Also see Tool Probing in Options for more information.

With Z Reference field highlighted, you can type in length of the gauge block followed by enter. For example, if Z Reference measures -562.259, using a 200 length gauge, type “200-” and enter to set Z Reference to -762.259.

Once Z Reference is set it does not have to be changed or set again, even if new devices are used. This field and the calculated Z Location fields should not be edited.

Z Location field will be automatically calculated by adding the height to the Z Reference value. Do not edit Z Location column.

All values set in Tool Measurement Settings are retained in the control and are applicable to all programs. They are not program specific.


Zero Calibration Mode

With the Zero Calibration method of tool measurement, tools are calibrated to a plane in the Z-axis as referenced from the Z Home position. Each tool used in a program should be calibrated to the same plane. To use Zero Calibration mode:

1. In the Tool Setup screen, enter the number of the tool to be calibrated into the Tool Number field.

2. If the tool is in spindle, jog Z down to the reference plane or gauge block.

3. Select Store Machine Position softkey or button on the Jog Unit.

4. If the reference plane is not the same as Z=Part Zero for program depth:

a. Select Part Setup softkey.b. In Offset Z field, enter distance from reference plane to Part Zero, or use

calibrated tool to touch off Z=0 plane and select the Store Machine Position softkey or button on the Remote Jog Unit.

If the plane that all tools are touched off of is the top of the workpiece, all program dimensions for Z will be from Z=0. If the plane is not the top of the workpiece (as when a gauge block is used), the operator can use the Offset Z field in Part Setup to set the distance from the gauge block or other plane to the top of the workpiece plane. See Part Setup, on page 1 - 91 for more information.

All tools should be calibrated to the same reference plane.


Tool Setup

Tool Setup Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 106

Tool Setup Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 106

Advanced Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 109

Change Tool Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 116

Use the Tool Setup screen to describe the tools that will be used for the part program. You can access Tool Setup from several screens by using the Tool Setup softkey.

To review all tools currently programmed, go to the Tool Review screen.

Tool Setup Fields

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tool Setup fields:

Tool Setup Softkeys

Softkeys perform the following functions:

• Delete Tool—Deletes all program settings for the tool number entered in the Tool Field, for a Manual tool. If the tool is in Spindle or Auto, this softkey is not active.

• Part Setup—Accesses Part Setup screen.

• Part Programming—Accesses fields to enter the exact description of how the part will be cut.

• Tool Offsets—Available only for NC programs. The tool length offsets appear

When running a previously created part program, Tool Setup must be carefully checked to be certain the tools described for the old program match the tools planned for the new program. If a tool breaks or is not available when running a previously created part program, the Tool Setup information must be changed.

Coolant Flutes Speed (RPM) Tool Type

Cutting Time Location Spindle Touch-Off Device

Diameter Machine Surface Speed TPI

Diameter Wear Part Thread Diameter Zero Calibration

Feed Pitch Tool Cal Length

Feed/Flute Plunge Feed TIS / Tool in Spindle

Feed/Rev Shank Diameter Tool Number

The fields on the Tool Setup screen vary depending on machine configuration and tool calibration mode.


on the screen. Tool offsets are tool lengths used to compensate tool length without altering the NC program.

• Use the Positive Tool Length Compensation (G43) or Negative Tool Length Compensation (G44) codes. A G49 code specifies tool offset cancel. An H00 also cancels an offset.

• The G43 and G44 codes set a mode of operation within the program that is in effect until a G49 or H00 is used. If an H code is used without a G43 or G44, in effect, the value stored in the tool length offset table is used as the calibrated tool length.

• If a zero is entered for the Tool Offset value (Tool Offset H Table), the control uses the Tool Offset value entered in Tool Setup for the tool length.

• If a value greater than zero is entered for the Tool Offset value (Tool Offset H table), the control replaces the value set in Tool Setup with the Tool Offset H Table value.

• The four keyboard arrows, Page Up, and Page Down keys scroll through the 01 to 200 offsets.

• When the Store Machine Position softkey is pressed, a negative Z value reflecting the Z axis machine position is entered on the screen.

• Tool Home—Allows you to move the tool quickly away from the part. Using this softkey after Tool Calibration is much faster than pressing the axis jog buttons on the jog unit. Press this softkey and then press the Start Cycle button to move the spindle to the change height.

• Set Tool Zero (Zero Calibration mode)—stores the Z-axis position of the tool tip when at workpiece or gauge block plane. To use this softkey, carefully jog the tool in the spindle down to the top of the part or to the fixture defined at the Tool Calibration point and then press the softkey. The system stores the position of the tool into the current part program and the number appears in the Zero Calibration field on the Tool Setup screen. This can also be accomplished by pressing the Store Position button on the jog unit. On the screen the part display for “Z” changes to zero. In Zero Calibration mode, all tools used in a part program will need to be calibrated to the same plane.

• Set Length Using Touch-Off Device (Absolute Tool Length mode)—stores the tool length when using a gauge or other touch-off device. For a gauge, carefully jog the tool in the spindle down to the top of the gauge and select the softkey. The system stores the tool length in the Tool Cal Length field.

Tool offsets are not saved with the NC program.

A warning message is displayed if the edited tool is not the tool in spindle. Select OK to store the current position for the tool that is being edited. Select Cancel if you do not want to set tool zero for that tool.


• Set Tool Zero Using Gauge Block (Zero Calibration mode; Probing only)—stores the Z-axis position of the tool tip when using a gauge block into the Zero Calibration field and marks the tool as probed so it can be used in Part Probing. To use this softkey, carefully jog the tool in the spindle down to the top of the gauge at the Tool Calibration plane and press the softkey.

Second set of Tool Setup softkeys:

• Advanced Tool Settings—set Tool Geometry, Feed and Speed, Surface Finish Quality, and other tool information.

• Change Tool Number—Allows you to change the tool number for the current tool displayed.

• Tool Probing—Accesses the Probing Parameters, see Program Parameters, on page 1 - 124. Probing is available only with BMCs.

• Program Parameters—Accesses the program parameters.

• Part Program Tool Review—Accesses the tool review screen.

• Tool Measurement Settings (Absolute Tool Length mode)—accesses the Tool Measurement screen where touch-off device height is set.

This softkey is active when the following is true:

1. The Tool Probe Parameters Type field is set to No Tool Probe. This field is accessed in Tool Setup:

a. Select the More softkey.b. Select the Tool Probing softkey.c. Select the Tool Probe Setup softkey.

2. The Part Probe Parameters Present field is set to Yes. This field is accessed in Part Setup:

a. Select the Part Probing softkey.b. Select the Part Probe Parameters softkey.

This softkey is active when the following is true:

1. The Tool Probe Parameters Type field is set to No Tool Probe. This field is accessed in Tool Setup:

a. Select the More softkey.b. Select the Tool Probing softkey.c. Select the Tool Probe Setup softkey.

2. The Part Probe Parameters Present field is set to Yes. This field is accessed in Part Setup:

a. Select the Part Probing softkey.b. Select the Part Probe Parameters softkey.


Advanced Tool Settings

Tool Geometry, on page 1 - 110

Feed and Speed, on page 1 - 112

NC SFQ, on page 1 - 114

Supplier, on page 1 - 115

Notes, on page 1 - 115

Edit Apt Parameters, on page 1 - 115

Basic tool information is stored in Tool Setup and additional information can be set in the Advanced Tool Settings screens. Tool Geometry, Feed and Speed information, SFQ, and other tool information are set in the Advanced Tool Settings screen.

Advanced Tool Settings are optional; it is not necessary to adjust these settings in order to run part programs. They are available to simplify programming and increase program efficiency.


Tool Geometry

Tool dimensions are set in the Geometry tab. Fields denoted with a * are required in order to draw a tool in Solid Graphics; however, these fields are automatically populated with information from Tool Setup, as ratio of entered diameter. A picture of the tool is displayed, and when a field is selected, that area on the picture is denoted.

Figure 1–9. Tool Geometry

Most fields on the Geometry screen correspond to tool type; see the following table for information about these fields. Additional Geometry fields are:

The following table provides the tool-type specific fields:

Color

Direction

Tool length fieldis selected andcorresponding area is denoted on picture


Dia

met

er

Sh

ank

Dia

met

er

Len

gth

of

Cu

t

Tool

Len

gth

Flu

tes

Dri

ll A

ng

le

Thre

ad D

iam

eter

TPI

Rad

ius

Ch

amfe

r A

ng

le

Cu

ttin

g E

dg

es

Sty

lus

Len

gth

An

gle

Tip

An

gle

Tip

Len

gth

Tip

Dia

met

er

Rea

m C

ham

fer

Nec

k D

iam

eter

Drill X X X X X X

Tap X X X X

Boring head X X X X X

End Mill X x x x

Face Mill x x x X X X

Ball End Mill X X X X X

Back Spotface X X X X X

Probe X X X X

Gun Drill X X X X X X

Center Drill X X X X X X X X

Chamfer Mill X X X X X X

Bull Nose Mill X X X X X X

Ream X X X X X X

Spot Drill X X X X X

Forming Tap X X X X X

Counter Bore X X X X X X X

Counter Sink X X X X X X

Keyseat Mill X X X X X X

Thread MillSingle Cutter

(SC)X X X X

Thread MillMulti Cutter

(MC)X X X X X X

Taper Radius End Mill X X X X X X X

Corner Round Mill X X X X X X X

Dove Tail Mill X X X X X X X

Engraving Mill X X X X X


Feed and Speed

Feed and Speed settings are carried over from Tool Setup or can be specified in the Feed and Speed tab for specific tool and material combinations in a part program. Choose one of the materials from the work material list for a specific tool and enter the feeds and speeds for both roughing and finishing for that tool and work material combination. This information is saved in the Tool and Material Library and can be utilized in future part programs without re-entering the speeds and feeds: When the Program Parameters for a part program specify a work material, the tool number will recall the feed and speed for that material.

Figure 1–10. Advanced Tool Settings: Feed and Speed

Roughing and finishing tool parameters can be specified.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Feed and Speed fields:

Tip Diameter is used to calculate Milling Type offset for Chamfer Mill, Corner Round Mill, and Taper Radius End Mill.

When Shank Diameter, Length of Cut, and Tool Length are set as a ratio of the diameter, values will be automatically recalculated if the diameter changes or until a user-defined value is entered.

When used in a Thread Milling cycle, the Length of Cut and Pitch are used to calculate the number of passes in the cycle.

Feed and Speed in Advanced Tool Settings is available only with the Tool and Material Library option.

Regardless of the material set in the Feed and Speed tab, the main Tool Setup screen will always display feeds and speeds for “Unspecified” material.

Specify workmaterial

SpecifyRoughing &Finishing

Speed and Feedare calculated or

can be specifiedin these fields


Feed and Speed Calculations

The WinMax software automatically performs tool feed and speed calculations for each tool programmed in Tool Setup, on page 1 - 106. The calculations are carried over to each data block in the part program using the programmed tool.

The software uses data to perform the calculations from these Tool Setup fields: Diameter, Speed (RPM), Surface Speed (FPM) or (MPM), Flutes, and Feed/Flute (Tooth). Feeds and speeds are related using the following formulas: Speed Formulas, on page 1 - 113 and Feed Formulas, on page 1 - 114.

Calculated values are carried forward to the Mill Feed field and Speed (RPM) field for milling and holes data blocks. You can override automatically calculated values in a data block by inserting a user defined value. If you manually change a calculated value in Tool Setup, you will be prompted to update feeds and speeds for the part program data blocks.

Speed Formulas

The WinMax software uses these formulas to automatically calculate the spindle speeds:

Metric Mode:

Surface Speed x 100

English Units:

Chipload Plunge Feed

Coolant Speed (RPM)

Feed Surface Speed

Feed/Rev Tool

Max Depth

Peck Depth

For fields that display truncated decimal point values, you may view the non-truncated value by pressing and holding the CTRL key and pressing the period (.) key.

If the calculated RPM exceeds the maximum spindle RPM entered in Machine Specifications, the value appears in red font color.


Feed Formulas

For Milling data blocks, specify the number of flutes for the tool in the Flutes field.

The software uses the following formula to calculate the Mill Feed:

For Holes operations, flutes are not specified for the tool.

The software uses this formula to calculate the Mill Feed:

NC SFQ

Surface finish quality in NC programming is set in the NC SFQ tab of Advanced Tool Settings. Change Enable Tool SFQ to YES and adjust the Tool SFQ value. This automatically sets the SFQ value whenever the tool is used in NC programming and will override the SFQ value set in Program Parameters or with the G05.3 setting.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the NC SFQ Fields:

If you enter the Surface Speed (fpm) value, the Speed (RPM) value will be calculated for you.

If you enter the Speed (RPM) value, the Surface Speed (fpm) value will be calculated for you.

In some cases, calculation rounding may slightly alter a calculated value.

For example, if you enter a value of 7000 RPM for the Speed field in Tool Setup for a Drill operation, the calculated value for Surface Speed is 458 fpm.

However, if you enter a Surface Speed of 458 fpm in the Surface Speed field, the calculated value for Speed is 6997 RPM.

If the calculated feedrate exceeds the maximum contouring feedrate for the machine, an error is generated during the program run.

NC SFQ in Advanced Tool Settings is available only with the NC/Conversational Merge option.

Enable Tool SFQ

Tool

Tool SFQ


Supplier

The Supplier tab is optionally used to store information about tool supplier and orders in memo-type fields.

Notes

The Notes tab is used to store notes and miscellaneous information about a tool in a memo-type field.

Edit Apt Parameters

The Edit Apt Parameters fields are defined as follows:

• Tool—displays the tool number and type entered on the Tool Setup screen. This field cannot be edited. To change tools, go to Tool Setup, on page 1 - 106.

• NC Gear Range—define the spindle gear range. 0 = Low; 9 = High.

• NC Tool Number—indicate the starting tool in the tool changer. The range is 0 to 999.

• NC Diameter Offset—indicate the tool diameter to be used for cutter compensation. This field is used for posting only. This will not affect a file that is saved as an ISNC file.

• NC Length Offset—indicate the length offset at the machine tool.

Supplier in Advanced Tool Settings is available only with the Tool and Material Library option.

Notes in Advanced Tool Settings is available only with the Tool and Material Library option.

If Cutter Comp is selected from the Output Tool Path As field on the Post Processor Configuration screen, the value in the NC Diameter Offset field will be put into the APT file. This value will refer to the tool diameter offset on the target machine. If Centerline is selected from the Output Tool Path As field, then the value entered in the NC Diameter Offset field will not affect the APT file.


Change Tool Number

The Change Tool Number softkey allows you to change the number of an existing tool or copy an existing tool and give it a different number while retaining the tool with the same number.

To change the Tool Number or create a copy of a tool, display the tool in the Tool Setup screen. With the cursor in the Tool Number field, select the More softkey to display the next softkey menu. Select the Change Tool Number softkey. The Current Tool Description and New Tool Number fields are displayed. Type the new number into the New Tool Number field and select one of the following softkeys:

• Change Tool Number—changes the number of the tool to the new Tool Number. The old tool number is simply changed to the new number. If the new tool number is already assigned to another tool, then the tool numbers are swapped. If the Tool Library option is enabled, the tool number is also updated in the spindle or ATC.

• Copy Tool—adds a new tool that is identical to the Current Tool Description.

If the New Tool Number is not in the current program or Tool & Material Library, the current tool is copied to the New Tool Number. If the New Tool Number is already used in the current program or Tool & Material Library, a prompt appears that the New Tool Number selected will be replaced with a copy of the current tool.

Part Program Tool Review

Use the PART PROGRAM TOOL REVIEW softkey on the Program Review screen to review the tools used in a specific part program. This screen lists all tools used in a program, and the program block where they are used. The location column indicates if the tool is in Manual, Auto, or Spindle.

Figure 1–11. Part Program Tool Review of a Conversational program

List of toolsused in program

Program blocks in whichhighlightedtool is used(highlight blockand select theEdit Blocksoftkey to jump to the program block)

Supplier, Order,Notes, Tool Lifetabs can be used to keep track of other toolinformation


Tool information can be entered into the Supplier, Order, and Notes tabs at the bottom of the Part Program Review screen.

Part Program Tool Review for NC Programs

Part Program Tool Review in NC programming scans the current NC program for T codes to determine the tools used in the program. T codes are ignored if they are inside a comment (surrounded by parentheses) or if they are an argument in a macro call (preceded by a G65).

Tools are listed by number. When a tool is selected (highlighted), the Block list will display the number and NC text of all blocks that contain the T code for a tool change to the selected tool, as shown below:

Figure 1–12. Part Program Tool Review of an NC program

If a tool in the current NC program is not defined in Tool Setup, it appears in the Tool

Start typing a tool number to jump to that tool in the review list. The Jump to tool pop-up box opens; select OK to go to that tool in the list.

Tool notes can be entered and viewed on the Notes tab in the Part Program Tool Review screen and the Advanced Tool Settings screen. Notes can also be viewed in the Select Tool screen (accessed with the Select Tool from List softkey when entering a tool in a program block).

The Supplier, Order, and Notes tabs are only available with the Tool & Material Library option.

Jump to a program block by highlighting the block and selecting the Edit Block softkey.

List of toolsused in program

Program blocks in whichhighlightedtool is used(highlight blockand select theEDIT BLOCK F1softkey to jump to the program block)


Review list as an unknown tool with a diameter of 0 and an unknown location. This is shown below.

Figure 1–13. Tool Review showing Unknown tool in NC program

An undefined tool can be added to the NC tool setup by selecting the tool in the list, selecting the Tool Setup softkey, and selecting a type or entering data for the new tool. The tool can also be quickly added as an unknown tool with a diameter of 0 by selecting the Add As Manual Tool softkey.

Part Program Tool Review Softkeys

Softkeys perform the following functions:

• Part Setup—access Part Setup screen. See Part Setup, on page 1 - 91 for more information.

• Tool Setup—access Tool Setup. See Tool Setup, on page 1 - 106 for more information.

• Part Programming—access and create data blocks of a part program. The current program's data blocks appear on screen when this softkey is used. Delete, add, edit, and navigate through the data blocks. The NC editor is displayed for NC programs. See Conversational Part Programming for more information.

• Program Parameters—accesses the Program Parameters screen to specify data common to all program data blocks. See Program Parameters, on page 1 - 124 for more information.

• Tool Change Review Screen—access the Tool Change Review screen to


see all tool changes in the part program. Available with the Tool Change Optimization option. See Tool Change Optimization in the Options manual for more information.

• Match Tools—access tool matching results. See Tool Matching, on page 1 - 119 for more information.

• Add As Manual Tool—adds the highlighted unmatched tool as a Manual tool in the Tool & Material Library and assigns it the next available tool number.

Tool Matching

When a new program is loaded and the Tool & Material Library option is enabled:

1. The new program’s tools are compared to the tools in the Tool & Material Library to identify a match by tool type and diameter.

2. If only one tool match is found, the program will use that tool number, including the Zero Calibration, from the Tool & Material Library. Note that Feed and Speed data will not be replaced in the program.

3. If more than one match exists, WinMax then looks at tool number. If it finds the same tool number, type, and diameter, it will match the tool.

4. If there are no matches, tools are either loaded into the Tool & Material Library as Manual, or users can select from a list of tools in the Tool & Material Library that are similar to the unmatched tool. The AUTOMATICALLY LOAD UNMATCHED TOOLS AS MANUAL field in Tool Utilities and Settings, on page 1 - 49 controls this:

• When the field is set to Yes, any unmatched tools from the new part program will be added to the Tool & Material Library and will be assigned to the first available tool number.

For example, a new program is loaded with tool #12 as a 0.375 inch end mill. If tool #12 in the Tool & Material Library is not a 0.375 inch end mill and no other tool in the Tool & Material Library is a 0.375 inch end mill, then this tool will be added to the Tool & Material Library as a Manual tool and will be assigned the first available tool number.

• When the field is set to NO, a prompt to match tools appears. Answer YES to the prompt to review the unmatched tools.

Tools that are unmatched are displayed in Tool Matching Results.

The diameter is set in the Tool Matching: Maximum Diameter Difference field in Tool Utilities and Settings, on page 1 - 49.


Tool Matching Results

When tools from the part program cannot find a matching tool in the Tool & Material Library, these unmatched tools are listed in the Tool Matching Results screen, accessed with the MATCH TOOLS softkey from the Tool Review screen. Unmatched tools from the current part program are listed in the “Tools to be matched” section; for imported programs, the Import Number (No.) column contains the tool number saved in the original program. When each unmatched tool is highlighted, a list of tools from the Tool & Material Library with the same tool type are listed in the lower, “Closest matches” section. Tools of the same type are listed in order of closest to furthest diameter difference from the highlighted tool.

Figure 1–14. Tool Matching Results

The Choose As Replacement softkey appears when you select a tool from the Closest matches list. Use this softkey to replace an unmatched tool with the selected tool from the Tool & Material Library.

If there is not a match in “Closest matches,” use the Add As Manual Tool softkey to add the tool to the Tool & Material Library.

The Save To Database softkey appears when you select an unmatched tool from the list. Select the softkey to save the tool to the Tool and Material Database.

Saving a tool to the Tool and Material Database will not match a tool with an existing tool in the Tool & Material Library. The program will still consider the tool unmatched and will not run until a match is selected or a new tool is added to the Tool & Material Library.

Import Tool

List of similar toolsin Tool Library (list

Difference intool diameterfrom

corresponds to thehighlighted tool)

unmatchedtool

UnmatchedTools

Number


Tool Management

Tool Management screens are accessed in Manual Mode with the Tool Management softkey. Tool information can be stored independent of the part program data using the Tool & Material Library option. Program-specific tool information (such as feed rate and speed) created for one program can be reused when tools are selected from the library for a subsequent program. Tool Management tabs are:

• Spindle—shows the tool located in the machine’s spindle.

• Auto—lists the tools that are in the machine’s tool magazine.

• Manual—lists the tools that may be utilized on the machine but are not currently in the machine’s magazine or spindle. The Manual tab is active only with the Tool & Material Library option.

Spindle

The Spindle tab displays information about the tool in spindle and allows you to set the next tool to execute a tool change, or to change the current tool in spindle. The Move Tool to Spindle softkey moves the tool in the Next Tool field to the spindle.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of fields on the Spindle tab (fields displayed vary depending on machine and/or configuration):

Auto

The Auto tab lists the tools in the ATC (automatic tool changer) magazine. Tools are listed by pocket number. The view can be customized to show only occupied pockets or to disable even-numbered pockets (for large tools), using the check boxes at the top of the screen.

Softkeys on the Tool Library Auto tab are:

• Move Tool To Spindle—when spindle is empty, highlighting a tool on the Auto or Manual lists will enable this softkey. Select to confirm and the tool will appear on the SPINDLE tab. The control will prompt to insert the tool into the spindle.

• Select Tool—highlight a tool in the list and touch this softkey to select the tool.

• Clear Pocket—removes the selected tool from the pocket.

• Clear All Pockets—removes all tools from the Auto list.

Axes Status Next Tool

Axis Limit Switches Orientation

F / Feed Part

Machine S / Spindle

Magazine TIS / Tool in Spindle


Manual

The Manual tab shows tools available for use that are resident on the control, but are not currently in the spindle or ATC. The Manual tab is active only with the Tool & Material Library option:

Softkeys are:

• Move Tool To Spindle—when spindle is empty, highlighting a tool on the Auto or Manual lists will enable this softkey. Select to confirm and the tool will appear on the SPINDLE tab. The control will prompt to insert the tool into the spindle.

• Insert Tool—moves a tool from Manual to Auto.

• Tool Setup—accesses the Tool Setup screen.

• Change Tool Number—allows you to change the number of a tool in the list. See Change Tool Number, on page 1 - 116 for more information.

• Clear Tools—clears (removes) tools from the list:

• Clear Selected Tool—removes highlighted tool from the Tool Library.

• Clear Auto And Manual Tools—removes all tools from the Tool Library.

• Clear Auto Tools—removes all tools in Auto from the Tool Library.

• Clear Manual Tools—removes all tools in Manual from the Tool Library.


Tool and Material Database

The Tool and Material Database is available when the Tool & Material Library option is enabled. It is accessed in Auxiliary Mode. Tool and material information can be entered and stored in the database. The materials entered into the database are available in the work material list located on the Feed and Speed tab in Tool Type Setup/Advanced Tool Settings. This information is saved in the material database and can be utilized in future part programs without re-entering the speeds and feeds.

To add a tool to the database:

1. Select the Tools tab.

2. Select Add Tool softkey.

3. Enter the tool information in the fields. See Advanced Tool Settings, on page 1 - 109 for more information about these fields.

Softkeys on the TOOLS tab are:

• Add Tool—accesses Tool Type Setup screen to add a tool to the database.

• Edit Tool—accesses Tool Setup to edit tool.

• Delete Tool—deletes the selected tool from the database.

To add a material to the database:

1. Select the Materials tab.

2. Select the Add Material softkey.

3. Type the name of the material in the Name field.

4. Add any notes in the Notes field.

5. The entry is saved by exiting the screen.

Softkeys on the MATERIALS tab are:

• Add Material—add a new material to the database.

• Edit Material—change the specifications of a material in the database.

• Delete Material—delete a material from the database.

• Select Material for Part Program—uses the highlighted material in the current part program.


Program Parameters

Program parameters are displayed on tabs for General 1, General 2, Milling 1, Milling 2, Holes, Probing, and Performance. The Performance tab in WinMax is active when the SelectSurface Finish Quality option is enabled. The programmer has the option to make changes to any or all of the program parameters and save them as user defaults. The user defaults and original WinMax defaults can be restored by using the appropriate softkey. Parameters can be altered with the Change Parameters data block during program execution. Refer to Change Parameters, on page 2 - 121 in Conversational Programming for details.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of parameters on the General 1 tab:

See the Field Glossary for definitions of parameters on the General 2 tab:

See the Field Glossary for definitions of parameters on the Milling 1 tab:

See the Field Glossary for definitions of parameters on the Milling 2 tab:

Refer to NC Part Programming for information about NC Parameters.

Chord Error Rapid Traverse

Enable Pecking Retract Clearance

Retract Clearance

Override Lockout

Peck Clearance Plane

Pecking Retract Clearance

Automatic Safe Repositioning Retract Override

Move to Safe Pos During TC

Depletion Retract Tool Change Optimization

First Peck Offset

Include Offset Z in Tool Zero Cal

Interrupt Cycle Z Retract

Blend Offset Finish Speed (%)

Blend Overlap Finish XY

Cutter Comp Parameter Finish Z

Default Pocket Overlap Milling Direction

Finish Feed (%) Stock Allowance Mode


See the Field Glossary for definitions of parameters on the Holes tab:

See the Field Glossary for definitions of parameters on the Probing tab:

See the Field Glossary for definitions of parameters on the Performance tab:

Surface Finish Quality (SFQ) is enabled with the SelectSurface Finish Quality option. SFQ parameters can be modified in either Conversational or NC programming. The default SFQ for roughing is 80 and finishing is 20. Recommended values are:

Allow Plunge Outside Pocket Mill Plunge Ramp Slope

Finish Plunge Helix Radius Mill Plunge Type

Finish Plunge Ramp Slope Operator Specify Pocket Start

Finish Plunge Type Pocket Plunge Near Center

Mill Plunge Helix Radius

The Milling 2 Parameters fields are available only when the Helical Plunge option is installed.

Bore Dwell

Bore Orient Retract

Drill Dwell

Tap Retract (%)

Automatic Tool Monitoring

Diameter Tolerance

Length Tolerance

Retain Probed Part Setup

Start Coordinate Reference

Probing parameters affect Tool Quality Monitoring and Part Probing. See Tool Quality Monitoring, on page 4 - 14 and Part Probing Option, on page 4 - 31 for more information.

Smoothing Tolerance

Surface Finish Quality (Finishing Default)

Surface Finish Quality (Roughing Default)


Table 1–1. Recommended SFQ values

Softkeys on the Program Parameters screen are:

• Save As User Defaults—saves the selected field’s value as the user-defined default value.

• Restore User Defaults—restores the user-defined values to a field that has been populated with other values.

• Restore WinMax Defaults—restores the WinMax-defined values to a field that has been populated with other values.

• NC Parameters—accesses NC Configuration Parameters. These parameters are available only with NC Part Programming.

SFQ Desired Result

1-20 High precision parts /finishing

21-79 Good surface quality / finishing, semi-finishing

80-100 High throughput / roughing

If SelectSurface Finish Quality is not enabled, conversational roughing tools use SFQ of 80 and conversational finishing tools use SFQ of 20; NC default is 50.

Change Parameters program blocks load the user-defined parameters set in Program Parameters.


Import / Export Functions

Import Functions imports Part Setup, Tool Setup, Program Parameters, Part Program information, and/or NC states from an existing Conversational program or NC State file into the active part program. Tool lists and Tool and Material Database can also be imported or exported from this menu (with the Tool & Material Library option installed).

1. Select the Import / Export Functions softkey from the Input screen.

2. Select the appropriate softkey to import from a Conversational file, or to import or export NC state or Tool Library.

3. Choose the origination or destination file, or select an operation for the Tool Library then select the appropriate file.

4. Select the Import or Export softkey.

5. Choose one or more components from the list and select the Begin Operation softkey.

Conversational Components

These are the Conversational components that can be imported from an existing part program into a new part program:

• Part Setup—imports the Part Setup from the selected program into the current part program.

• Tool Setup—imports tools from the Tool Setup of the selected part program to the current tool setup on the machine. If the Tool & Material Library option is enabled, unique tools are added as Manual and other tools may be matched (see Tool Matching, on page 1 - 119).

• Program Parameters—imports the Program Parameters from the selected program into the current part program.

• Part Program—imports the part program from the selected program into the current part program.

NC States

NC components are stored in the NC State file on the control. Only one NC State file exists on a control, and it is updated as changes are made to current or new NC programs.

When transferring an NC program from one machine to another the NC State file from the can be imported or exported using the Import (or Export) NC State From (To) File softkey. These are the components that can be imported into an NC file:

• Program Parameters—imports the Program Parameters.

• Part Setup / Work Offsets—imports the Part Setup and Work Offsets.

• Tool Setup—imports tools from the Tool Setup of the selected part program to the current tool setup on the machine. If the Tool & Material Library option is enabled, unique tools are added as Manual and other tools may be matched (see Tool Matching, on page 1 - 119).


• Tool Offsets—imports Tool Offsets.

• NC Parameters—imports the NC parameters.

• NC Variables—imports NC variables.

NC States are saved as follows:

1. Select the Import / Export Functions softkey from the Input screen.

2. Select the Save NC State To File softkey.

3. Choose the location to which the file will be saved in the Save State File screen.

4. Type the name of the file in the FILE NAME field, or use the default, ncstate.ncsx, which appears automatically in this field.

5. Select the SAVE F1 softkey to save the NC States file. A message that the file saved successfully will briefly appear on screen.

Importing NC States into Conversational Programs

NC States information that is valid for Conversational programs (the Part Setup, Tool Setup, and Program Parameters) can be imported into a Conversational program.

1. Make sure the current part program is Conversational.

2. Select the IMPORT FUNCTIONS softkey from the Input screen.

3. Select the IMPORT NC STATE FROM FILE softkey.

4. Choose the NC States file from which components will be imported and select the LOAD F1 softkey. Either file may be used to import any component.

5. Choose one or more components from the list and select the BEGIN OPERATION softkey.

6. Select OK to continue the import operation.

The imported components will replace the current components from the open program; they are not merged together.

It is recommended to rename the NC States file to match the active part program. When renaming, you must retain the .ncs extension at the end of the file name. For example, Program Name.ncsx.


Import and Export Tool Library

The Import / Export Tool Library softkey allows you to move tool information from the WinMax control to other locations and vice versa.

Import / Export Tool Library submenu softkeys are:

• Export Auto And Manual Tools—save Auto and Manual tools to a different directory.

• Export Manual Tool List—save only the Manual tools to a different directory.

• Import Into Manual Tool List—load tools into the control from a directory. All tools are imported into the Manual list, even if they were exported as Auto tools.

• Export Tool and Material Database—save tool templates and materials to a different directory.

• Append Tool and Material Database—load tool templates and materials into the control from a directory. These are added to the existing database on the control.

• Replace Tool and Material Database—load tool templates and materials into the control from a directory. The existing database is replaced.

Import and Export Tool Library functions are available only with the Tool and Material Library option.

The ATC positions are not retained when tools are imported.


Copy and Change Blocks

To make changes to several data blocks at one time, use the Copy and Change Blocks softkey to access the Block Editor.

These are the softkeys:

• Copy Blocks—Duplicate the specified data blocks in another location in the part program.

• Move Blocks—Remove the specified data blocks from their current location and transfer them to another location in the part program.

• Delete Blocks—Remove the specified data blocks from the part program.

• Modify Dimensions—Add offsets to the axes' coordinate dimensions currently stored in the part program for a range of blocks.

• Change All Feeds, Speeds, and Tools—substitutes new feeds and speeds for all tools within the specified range of data blocks.

• Change Feeds and Speeds by Tool—substitutes new speeds and feedrates for a specified tool within a range of data blocks.

• Change Surface Finish Quality—changes the SFQ value(s) for the specified block range.

Copy, Move, or Delete Blocks

The COPY BLOCKS screen is used to duplicate the specified data blocks in another location in the part program.

The MOVE BLOCKS screen is used to remove the specified data blocks from their current location and transfer them to another location in the part program.

The DELETE BLOCKS screen is used to remove specified data blocks from the part program.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Copy/Move/Delete Block fields:

Modify Dimensions

Modify Dimensions allows you to add offsets to the axes' coordinate dimensions currently stored in the part program for a range of blocks.

These softkey choices appear when you select the Modify Dimensions softkey:

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Modify Dimensions fields:

End Block

Put Block Before

Start Block


Enter the modifications in the fields and select the Make The Change softkey to modify the programmed dimensions.

Changing Feeds, Speeds, Tools, and SFQ

Feeds, Speeds, and Tools, and SFQ can be changed for a range of blocks in a part program.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Change Feed, Speeds, Tool and SFQ fields:

Enter the changes in the fields and select the Make the Change softkey.

A Offset Start Block

B Offset X Offset

C Offset Y Offset

Change Z-Start Z Offset

End Block

Modified dimensions are applied to Pattern blocks that provide their own reference points: Loop Rotate center points, Loop Angular reference and center points, Mirror Image reference point, and Scale reference point.

Change Finish SFQ Put Block Before New Tool

Change Rough SFQ New Feed Put Block Before

Change Tool New Finish Tool Rough SFQ

End Block New Plunge Feed

Finish SFQ New Speed (RPM)

The Copy Blocks, Move Blocks, and Delete Blocks softkeys are also available for editing a current program.


Review Mode

The Program Review screen is accessed with the console Review key.

Figure 1–15. Program Review Screen

Data blocks and sub blocks of the active part program are displayed. Program blocks can be moved and added in the Program Review screen.

Tool data and notes are displayed in the Tools and Notes tabs:

• Tool information for the selected data block is displayed in the Tools tab. When a tool is selected the Edit Tool softkey is displayed and will open Tool Setup for the selected tool.

• Notes can be entered for the selected data block or sub block in the Notes tab. Notes are displayed on the Review screen and with the data block when the blocks are printed.

Start typing a block number to jump to that block in the review list. The Jump to block pop-up box opens; select OK to go to that block in the list.

Jump to the program block by highlighting the block in the list and selecting the Part Programming softkey.

List of program’s data blocks

Sub-blocks within the selected data block

Select to jumpto selected

sub-blockdata block or

Tools and Notes forthe selected block


Program Review softkeys are:

• Multiple Block Functions—allows multiple blocks to be cut, copied, or pasted between programs:

• Cut—highlight data block(s) and touch this softkey to delete from the current program. Block(s) can then be pasted into the same or a different program.

• Copy—highlight data block(s) and select this softkey to make a copy that can be pasted into the same or a different program.

• Paste—places previously cut or copied data block(s) above the highlighted data block.

• Delete—highlight data block(s) and touch this softkey to permanently remove the block from the program.

• Convert to Rotary—converts linear dimensions to rotary dimensions; a flat geometry can be wrapped around a cylinder, given a radius. Blocks that can be wrapped are: contour, circle, frame, slot, polygon, TrueType lettering holes (locations), and patterns (loop linear, loop rectangular, and mirror). You will be prompted to enter a cylinder radius.

If centerlines are enabled in Part Setup, the Z values in the blocks are not adjusted. If the centerlines are disabled, the Z axis becomes the radius in the block and the cylinder radius is applied to the value.

• Convert to Linear—converts rotary dimensions to linear dimensions.

• Delete Block / Delete Sub Block—deletes the highlighted data block or sub-block.

• Part Programming—allows you to edit the selected data block or sub-block. See Part Programming in the Conversational Programming manual for more information.

• Program Parameters—access General, Milling, Holes, Probing, and Performance parameters. NC parameters are accessible for NC programs.

• Part Setup—access the Part Setup screen to establish part zero, centerline, offset Z, safety work region, and other parameters.

• Part Program Tool Review—review the tools used in the part program.

• Insert Block / Sub Block Before—inserts a new program block or sub-block before the selected block or sub-block.

Multiple blocks can be selected simultaneously by holding the F and Alt keys while pressing the up or down arrow keys.

For WinMax Desktop and WinMax Mill on machines not equipped with rotary, the Default Conversational Program Type must be changed to a rotary type in order to convert the program to rotary. This is changed in Conversational Settings in Utilities.


Manual Safety Override Mode

For machines with CE safety circuit switches enabled, the Manual Safety Override mode allows the enclosure doors to be opened when the system is in Manual mode so the operator or supervisor can perform limited manual machine operations.

While the doors are open, manual jog feed is restricted. The jog feed is limited to 2 meters per minute, or approximately 80 inches per minute, with manual safety override enabled. No jogging is permitted with manual safety override disabled.

When the Manual Safety Override mode is enabled, it remains enabled until control power is turned off, the Emergency Stop button is pressed, or machine power is turned off. A fault will disable the Manual Safety Override mode also.

If you try to jog the axes with the doors open without enabling the manual safety override mode, a prompt appears to cycle the keyswitch or enter the access code to enable jog.

Manual operations that cannot be started with the doors open, regardless of manual safety override mode, are:

• Spindle On• Park Machine• Warm Up Machine• Calibrate Machine• Spindle Orient• Chip Removal• Tool Changer Functions


CE Diagnostics

To enable the Safety Override mode, access the CE Status & Diagnostics screen.

1. From the Manual mode screen, select the Diagnostics softkey.

2. Select the CE Diagnostics softkey. The following screen appears:

Figure 1–16. CE Status & Diagnostics Screen

The fields on the CE Status & Diagnostics screen are defined as follows:

• CE Configuration—Displays CE logic configuration. Enabled or disabled in Integrator Support Services.

• Door Lock Status—Displays status of all doors with CE safety circuit switches Unlocked or Locked. The Door Switch Status must be Closed when the Door Lock Status is Locked.

• Door Switch Status—Displays status as Closed or Open. The switch must be Closed when the Door Lock Status is Locked.

• Limited Manual Operations—Displays status as Disabled or Enabled. Status is Enabled after entering an access code. Enabled allows limited safe motion with the doors open.

• EIR Relay State—Displays status as Disabled or Enabled. When enabled, the enclosure doors have been locked due to a process request or an active process.


Entering the Access Code

A numeric access code is required to enable Limited Manual Operations. Follow these steps to enter the access code:

1. Select the Enter Access Code softkey. A message appears with a prompt for entering a 4 digit code.

2. Enter a numeric code using the console keypad. Asterisks (*) appear representing each entered digit. When the fourth digit is entered, the asterisks and message disappear.

When the code is successfully entered, the Limited Manual Operations feature is enabled, as indicated in the status field.

For initial setup of the Access Code, the user is prompted to enter a new code and then to enter the same code a second time before it is accepted.

Changing an Existing Access Code

To change an existing access code, follow these steps:

1. Select the Change Access Code softkey. A message appears asking you to enter the current code.

2. Enter the current numeric code from the console keypad. A message appears asking you to enter the new code.

3. Enter the new code. A message appears asking you to re-enter the new code for confirmation.

• If the new code is not re-entered, the code is not changed.

• When the new code is verified, the code will change and a message appears to confirm the action.

Using a non-numeric key cancels the operation.


Graphics

WinMax graphics include Toolpath and Solid Graphics, on page 1 - 138. Real-time graphic animation is available with the Runtime tool, which shows a simulated tool cutting the part on screen while the machine is cutting the actual part.

Graphics Settings

Graphics preferences are set in the Graphics Settings screen, which is accessed with the Graphics Settings softkey.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Graphics Settings fields:

Solid graphics and Runtime tool are only available with theAdvanced Verification Graphics option.

Background Color Override Machine Configuration

Show Graphics Tool Path

Default View Part Surface Show Roughing Tool Path for 2D Surfaces

Universal Type

Default Zone Plunges Show Roughing Tool Path for 3D Surfaces

Use Chord Error From Program

Enable Runtime Tool Display

Rapids Stock Outline

Graphics Chord Error Refresh Speed Stock Transparency

Graphics Optimization Rotary Axis ISO Standard

Tilt Axis Preference


Toolpath and Solid Graphics

Toolpath graphics displays a wireframe view of the part. Toolpath is also animated to show the tool in motion if the runtime tool is displayed (only available with the Advanced Verification Graphics option).

Solid graphics displays a solid 3-dimensional part; only available with the Advanced Verification Graphics option.

Figure 1–17. Solid graphic display

The console Draw button initiates drawing. The Draw Options menu is displayed (for both Toolpath and Solid) to control drawing and animation:

• Draw Options—displays the following draw options:

• Draw (Pause)—starts drawing the part. When drawing is in progress, the softkey displays PAUSE—select it to pause the drawing. When paused, the softkey displays DRAW—select it to resume drawing.

• Accelerated Draw—displays only the completed drawing without showing each block as it is drawn. There may be a delay before the completed drawing appears on screen; selecting the Show Progress softkey displays the drawing at the current point each time the softkey is selected.

• Single Step—displays only one step or program block at a time. Subsequent selection of SINGLE STEP will execute the next step or block.

• Next Tool Change—displays cutting from one tool change to the next.

• Clear Graphics—clears the part drawing from the screen.

• Save Session—saves the current part drawing after a successful draw. Allows the drawing to be loaded for faster drawing at a later time (especially useful for large programs).

• Load Session—loads current program drawing that was previously saved with the Save Session softkey.

Denotes theview selected

Indicatesthe stage ofprocessing


• Select View—choose XY plane, XZ plane, YZ plane, Isometric, or All Views. For dual-zone machines, the Select Zone softkey displays Zone 1, Zone 2, or All Zones.

• Zoom—magnifies an area of the graphic. Select the softkey and choose one of the following:

• Zoom In—magnify incrementally by 20% each time the softkey is selected.

• Zoom Out—shrink view incrementally by 10% each time the softkey is selected.

• Smooth—toggle on or off to sharpen image when drawing completes or with zoom, pan, rotate, etc. An icon located in the top left corner of the graphics screen shows if smoothing is on or off (icon can be toggled as well):

• Default Zoom—returns to the zoom level to the default value.

• Fit To View—returns drawing to the default position, rotation, and zoom levels.

• “Touch-and-drag”—place stylus at a point on the screen and drag it to expand the box over the area you wish to magnify. When stylus is lifted from screen the area will be magnified.

• Pan—moves the graphic up, down, left, or right. Use the softkeys (Pan Up, Pan Down, Pan Left, Pan Right, or Center), or touch the screen and drag the graphic. Fit to View returns the drawing to the default position, rotation, and zoom levels.

• Rotate—changes the rotation of the graphic. Softkeys include Rotate Up, Rotate Down, Rotate Left, and Rotate Right. Default Rotation returns rotation to the default value.

• DB Search—jumps to a selected data block. Select the softkey, touch an area on the graphic touchscreen, and select the JUMP TO BLOCK softkey.

• Snapshot—creates an image of the solid drawing that is stored with the file. The image is displayed on the Program Manager screen when the program is highlighted.

• Graphics Settings—displays the Graphics Settings screen.

Indicates that smoothing is toggled ON.

Indicates that smoothing is toggled OFF.


Max5 UI Graphics Screen

The Max5 Graphics screen is available as an option for Max4 consoles and WinMax desktop software. This graphics screen shows solid renderings of the tool paths and stock removal for the program. In addition, the appropriate console LEDs light when the coolant is programmed to be on, when the spindle is programmed to be on, and when there is a programmed tool change.

This updated graphics screen uses many of the same features of the Max4 Toolpath and Solid graphics.

Zoom in and outPan in selected directionRotate in selected direction in ISO view

Reset All to original view

Opaque viewMeasureFill

XY Side view XZ End view YZ Top view

Isometric view Quad view (all of above)

Run the entire Part programRun Single block or segment of programRun Program until programmed Tool changeGraphics Speed Control buttons

Draw Control buttons

Select point on drawingJump to location in program

Capture graphicSmooth linesAccess screen Settings

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-501 Machine Operation Basics 1-135

MACHINE OPERATION BASICS

The following sections explain basic machine operation.

Machine Start Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 134

Recovery and Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 135

Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 136

Automatic Tool Changers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 139

HMX Automatic Pallet Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 149

Dual-Zone Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 153

Auto Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 157

Stop Machine Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 163

Restart Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 165

Shutdown Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 165

Servo Drive Alarm Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 166

1 - 136 Machine Operation Basics 704-0116-501 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Machine Start Up

Calibrate Machine

Calibrating establishes the machine reference point (absolute zero) for each axis. Absolute zero is the location on the table, usually a corner or near a corner, where the X and Y axes intersect. This value does not change.

To calibrate the machine, press the Manual Mode console button. "Uncalibrated" will be in the Cal Status field.

Establishing Servo Power

Perform the following steps to establish servo power:

1. If necessary, release all Emergency Stop buttons. Twist the button in the direction indicated by the arrows to release it.

2. Press the Manual Mode console button.

3. Press the console Power On button to turn on the machine. The Power On button lights up.

4. If there is a servo or spindle error, press the Reset Servos and Spindle softkey to clear it. The Start Cycle button begins flashing.

5. Press the Start Cycle button to turn on the machine servos. The Start Cycle button stops flashing.

Axes Calibration

To calibrate all axes, follow these steps:

1. Press the Calibrate Machine softkey. The Start Cycle button begins to flash off and on.

2. Press the flashing Start Cycle button. The Axis Limit Switches field indicates the current status of the machining center’s limit switches as each axis calibrates.

3. The machine position display (at the top of the text screen) shows zero (0) for all axes when the calibration process is complete.

Warm Up Machine

If the machine has been idle for an hour or more, it is recommended that the warm up cycle be run. Warming up an idle machine before part cutting improves component reliability and machine performance. You must be in Manual mode to run a warm up cycle.

Follow these steps to warm up the machining center:

1. The control power must be on and the axes must be calibrated. There must not be any tool in the spindle, and the Tool in Spindle field on the Manual screen must be 0.


2. Select the Warm Up Machine softkey. The Start Cycle button begins flashing.

3. Press the Start Cycle button (to cancel the warm up cycle, press any Mode console button or softkey before pressing the Start Cycle button). The axes slowly move from one end of the machine to the other. The spindle moves at a low RPM for five minutes.

4. The warm up cycle completes in 15 minutes. The Manual screen reappears and axis movement stops.

Follow these steps to cancel the warm-up cycle:

1. Press the Feed Hold console button.

2. Press the Spindle Off button.

3. Press the Feed Hold button a second time, or press the Stop Cycle button.

Reset Master

To restart the control (reboot the system) without switching the power to the machine tool off and back on again, follow these steps:

1. Press the Auxiliary console button. The Auxiliary screen appears.

2. Press the More softkey.

3. Press the Reset Master softkey. The Yes and No softkeys appear. When the Yes softkey is pressed, the system will reboot. Pressing the No softkey aborts the reset process.

Recovery and Restart

Restart a part program at almost any point within the program - typically, the point at which the running program was interrupted.

If the Emergency Stop button was used to stop machining, machine power must be restored before restarting the program.

To restart the program, follow these steps:

1. Select the console Auto button. The Start Block default is 1, and the End Block default is the last block of the program.

2. Enter the proper Start Block and, optionally, an End Block if other than the end of the program.

3. Select the Recovery Restart softkey.

4. If the Start Block contains multiple choices for restart, prompts are displayed to select the proper point of restart.

Be sure to save any part program you’re working on before resetting the master. In NC Programming, an unsaved part program will be permanently erased. In Conversational Programming, the part program will be saved, but any changes made after the last autosave will be lost.


Manual Mode

Manual mode controls machine settings and operations.

These are the softkeys for Manual mode:

• Tool Management—Access tool information for Spindle, Auto Tools, and Manual Tools.

• Manual Function Setup— Set manual spindle speed and jog feed, retract tool, execute a manual rapid move, turn chip removal on and off, turn washdown coolant on and off, and turn worklight on and off from this screen.

• Diagnostics— Access the CE Status & Diagnostics screen and the ATC & Machine Diagnostics screen. See Manual Safety Override Mode, on page 1 - 134 and ATC and Machine Diagnostics, on page 1 - 145 for more information.

• Park Machine—Center the table and leave the spindle at the home position.

• Warm Up Machine—Warm up an idle machine.

• Orient Spindle—Ensures that the Z axis is at the correct height for a tool to be inserted in the spindle.

• Reset Servos and Spindle—Activates only to enable recovery from certain types of electronic hardware faults such as overloads.

• Calibrate Machine—Establish absolute zero for each axis on the machining center.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the fields on the Manual mode screens (fields displayed vary depending on machine, configuration, and/or program type):

Manual Function Setup

Set manual spindle speed and jog feed, retract tool, execute a manual rapid move, turn chip removal on and off, turn washdown coolant on and off, and turn worklight on and off from this screen. Some fields vary depending on machine type.

Softkeys are:

The ORIENT SPINDLE softkey will not function unless the enclosure doors are completely closed.

A Jog Along Tool Axis Orientation X

Axes Status Machine Part Y

B Magazine Rotary Jog Feed Z

C Manual Jog Feed Rotary Rapid Feed

Coordinate System Manual Rapid Feed S / Spindle

F / Feed Manual Spindle Speed TIS / Tool in Spindle


• Retract Tool—retracts the tool.

• Retract Tool Along Tool Axis (Tilt B axis machines)—retracts tool along the tool axis.

• Toggle Jog Along Tool Axis (Tilt B axis machines)—toggle on and off

• Manual Rapid Move—accesses the manual rapid move parameters.

• Chip Removal Forward On/Off—turns the chip conveyor on in a forward direction. Also turns conveyor off.

• Chip Removal Reverse On/Off—turns the chip conveyor on in a reverse direction. Also turns conveyor off.

• Washdown Coolant On/Off—turns the washdown coolant on and off.

• Worklight On/Off—turns the worklight on and off.

Manual Rapid Move

Manual Rapid Move executes a single axis rapid move to a specific position at a controlled feedrate. The operator can enter an axis position, either in machine or part coordinates, and initiate the move to that position at a specified feedrate. More than one axis end position may be entered, but the move occurs only on the axis that is selected with the corresponding Rapid Move softkey.

Softkeys are:

• Rapid Move X—enables the rapid move in X.

• Rapid Move Y—enables the rapid move in Y.

• Rapid Move Z—enables the rapid move in Z.

• Rapid Move A—enables the rapid move in A (softkey is inactive if the machine is not equipped with a rotary/tilt A axis).

• Rapid Move B—enables the rapid move in B (softkey is inactive if the machine is not equipped with a rotary/tilt B axis).

• Rapid Move C—enables the rapid move in C (softkey is inactive if the machine is not equipped with a rotary C axis).

To perform a Manual Rapid Move:

1. In Manual mode, select the Manual Function Setup softkey.

2. Select the Manual Rapid Move softkey. The Manual Rapid Move fields are displayed. (This softkey is grayed out if the machine is not calibrated.)

3. Select Part or Machine coordinate system from the drop-down Coordinate System list.

4. Set the linear axis feedrate in the Manual Rapid Feed field. Alternatively, set

The Chip Conveyor continues to run when you exit the Manual screen. If you want to stop the conveyor, you must use this softkey before you exit the screen (E-stop will also stop the conveyor).

The Chip Conveyor continues to run when you exit the Manual screen. If you want to stop the conveyor, you must use this softkey before you exit the screen (E-stop will also stop the conveyor).


the rotary axis feedrate in the Rotary Rapid Feed field.

5. Specify the end position of the move in the appropriate axis field(s).

6. Select the appropriate Rapid Move softkey to enable the move. When the softkey is selected, a message is displayed that instructs the operator to press the Start Cycle button to move the axis. When the Start Cycle button is pressed, the rapid move is performed.

Only one axis move can be performed at a time. During the move, all other Rapid Move softkeys are disabled until the move is completed. Once complete, another softkey can be selected, initiating the next move.

The Rapid Override knob/potentiometer is active during the move.

Manual Rapid Move values are retained after reboot.


Automatic Tool Changers

The ATC for HMX, DCX, and VTXU machines is a random-pocket tool changer that tracks tools in the magazine using an ATC Map. All ATC operations require that the servo power is on, that the machine is calibrated, and that the ATC is at Home position.

Loading Tools into the ATC Magazine

The ATC takes a tool from the spindle and automatically loads it into the magazine, if space allows. The tool’s location in the magazine is recorded in the ATC Map (the Horizontal Chain Type ATC does not use an ATC Map). Before loading a tool into the ATC magazine, the Servo power must be On, and the machine must be calibrated.

To load the tool currently in the spindle into the ATC magazine:


2. Select the Tool Management softkey. The Spindle tab displays the Tool in Spindle, Next Tool, and ATC Map (Swing-Arm Random Pocket ATC only) fields appear.

3. Verify that the Tool In Spindle value matches the tool currently in the spindle. If the numbers do not match, enter the correct tool number.

4. Enter the same tool number into the Next Tool field.

5. Press the Tool Changer Auto console key.

6. Enter a new tool number into the Next Tool field. The ATC Map field must be Auto.

7. Press the Tool Changer Auto console key. The Start Cycle light begins flashing.

8. Clear the tool changer and shut the enclosure door. Press the Start Cycle button. The Tool In Spindle field will be updated to the next tool value.

• If the Next Tool is an Auto tool, it was placed into the magazine when the previous tool was removed from the spindle.

• If the Next Tool is a Manual tool, you will be prompted to insert it into the spindle.

Do not manually load tools directly into the magazine.


Removing Tools from the ATC Magazine

Remove tools from the ATC magazine by following these steps:


2. Select the Tool Management softkey to display the Tool in Spindle. If there is no tool in the spindle, set the Tool In Spindle field to 0 (zero).

3. Enter the tool number (of the tool you want to remove in the magazine) into the Next Tool field.

4. Press the Tool Changer Auto console key to move the Next Tool into the spindle.

5. Clear the tool changer area and shut the enclosure door. Press the Start Cycle button to initiate the tool change.

6. Press the Spindle Unclamp button and manually remove the tool from the spindle.

7. Repeat steps 2 through 6, as needed, to remove additional tools from the ATC magazine.

Large Tools in the ATC Magazine

A part program may require tools with large diameters. These tools can be manually loaded by the operator, or automatically loaded.

Follow these steps to load large tools into the ATC magazine:

1. Touch the ATC Map softkey from the Spindle screen. The ATC Map appears.

2. Touch the Max. Tool Dia. More than XX mm softkey.

3. An “ATC Map will be cleared! Are you sure you want to change Max. Tool Diameter to more than XX mm?” message appears.

4. Select the Yes softkey. The ATC Map will clear, then reappear. Only the odd numbered tool pockets will be available.

5. Reload tools into the magazine using the “Loading a Tool into the Spindle” section.

6. Return to the default setting of Maximum Tool Diameter XX mm or Less by using the previous procedure and touching the Max. Tool Dia. XX mm or Less softkey.

The ATC Map field will indicate if the tool selected is in the magazine, and its location.

The ATC magazine capacity is reduced by half for tools larger than 80 mm (125 mm for some machines).

Each time you switch between large and small tools, the entire ATC Map will be cleared and the magazine must be reloaded.


Each VMX or VM machining center is equipped with a swing-arm random pocket Automatic Tool Changer (ATC).

VM Tool Magazine

The station magazine is positioned vertically on the machine. An electronic motor and helical gear drive the magazine. When activated, the tool magazine operates as described below:

1. The requested tool pocket rotates 90° to make the tool available for the swing arm.

2. The swing arm rotates 60° to simultaneously grab the tool in the pocket and the tool in the spindle.

3. The spindle unclamps.

4. The swing arm moves down to pull the tools out of the pocket and the spindle, and then rotates 180°.

5. The swing arm moves up and swaps the tools.

6. Finally, the swing arm and tool pocket return to their original positions.

There are two types of ATCs, which are described in the following sections:

• 40-Taper ATC with 24- or 40-Station Tool Magazine

• 50-Taper ATC with 30- or 32-Station Tool Magazine

40-Taper ATC with 24- or 40-Station Tool Magazine

This tool changer features a magazine with either 24 or 40 tool pockets (stations). The magazine is positioned vertically on the machine. An electric motor and helical gear drive the 24- and 40-station magazine. The 24-station magazine is round and the 40-station magazine is elliptical. Refer to the previous table for the number of tool pockets (stations) available for a specific machining center.

ATC Sequence

This is the basic sequence of operation of the tool magazine, assuming the magazine is positioned to the next tool required:

1. The requested tool pocket rotates down 90° to make the tool available for the swing arm.

2. The swing arm rotates 60° to simultaneously grab both the tool in the pocket and the tool in the spindle.


4. The swing arm moves down to pull the tools out of the pocket and spindle, and then the arm rotates 180°.

5. The swing arm moves up and swaps the tools.

6. The spindle clamps the new tool in the spindle and the swing arm rotates back to 0°.

7. The tool pocket moves back to its original position.


Figure 1–18. VMX 40-Taper ATC with 24-station Tool Magazine


50-Taper ATC with 30 or 32-Station Tool Magazine

The VMX50/50T uses the 50-Taper ATC with a 30-station tool magazine. The VMX64 uses the 50-Taper ATC with a 32-station tool magazine.

An electric motor, two dogs (cam detents), and three proximity switches control the 50-Taper tool changer motion. For the VMX64, a free-standing hydraulic unit runs the rotation of the magazine, magazine locking cylinder, and the tool pot up and down cylinder. The ATC sequence for the 50-taper ATC is the same as the 40-taper ATC sequence.

Figure 1–19. VMX 64/50-Taper, 32 Station ATC


HMX and VTXU Tool Magazine

The ATC can be operated in Auto or Manual machine mode, using ATC Diagnostics.

HMX Machines

For HMX machines, the following steps explain the basic sequence of operation of the tool magazine, assuming the magazine is positioned to the next tool required.

1. The tool holder rotates to 90°, and the ATC door opens.

2. The exchange arm rotates to 90° and simultaneously grabs the tool in the tool holder, and if present, the tool in the spindle, if the following conditions are met:

• The X, Y, and Z axes are at tool change position.

• The spindle is oriented.


4. The exchange arm moves out and simultaneously pulls the tools from the holder and the spindle, then rotates 180°.

5. The exchange arm moves in and swaps the tools.

6. The exchange arm rotates to 90°.

7. The ATC door closes and the tool holder simultaneously returns to its original position.

VTXU Machines

The following steps describe the basic sequence of operation of the tool magazine in the VTXU magazine, assuming the magazine is positioned to the next tool required.

1. The ATC door opens if the following conditions are met:

• The X and Y axes are at tool change position.

• The Z axis is at Height (refer to ATC and Machine Diagnostics, on page 1 - 145 for more information).

• The spindle is oriented.

2. The tool pocket rotates from the Up position to the Down position.

3. The swing arm rotates 90° and simultaneously grabs the tool in the tool pocket and, if present, the tool in the spindle.


5. The swing arm moves up and swaps the tools, then rotates 180°.

6. The swing arm and tool pocket return to the original positions.

7. The ATC door closes.


ATC and Machine Diagnostics

8. ATC and Machine Diagnostics display status and diagnostics information.

ATC and Machine Diagnostics Fields

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the fields on the ATC and Diagnostic screens. Note not all fields listed here are displayed for every machine model and configuration:

Selecting another softkey before pressing the Start Cycle button cancels the pending command and causes the Start Cycle lamp to cease flashing. If the requirements for a softkey action are not met, a message displays indicating why the action cannot be commanded. The ATC & Machine Diagnostics softkeys are listed below; some softkeys may not be present on all machines or may appear in a different order:

•

• Tool Holder Up / Down—sets the command to move the Tool Holder Down or Up. Each press of the softkey switches command between Down and Up.

• For VM, VMX, VTXU machines, Tool Pocket must be Z-axis at Tool Change Height, Spindle Clamped, and Oriented Down before moving to 60° (90°).

• Exchange Arm Rotate—sets the command to move the Exchange Arm down, rotate 180° and up. Tool Pocket must be Down, Load Arm must be at 60°, and spindle must be unclamped.

• Exchange Arm Jog Reverse—sets the command to pulse jog the exchange arm in the reverse direction. Pulse commands will stop once the Exchange Arm is at 0 degree.

•

• Magazine Pin Lock / Unlock—sets the command to lock or unlock the magazine pin. Locked is required for ATC to begin.

•

Air Pressure Coolant Status Overload Status Way Lube Level

ATC Axis Positions Exchange Arm Spindle Chiller Z-Axis Position

ATC Door Hydraulic Status Spindle Clamp/Unclamp

ATC OK to Stop Magazine Lock Spindle Status

ATC Position Magazine Position Start Pushbutton

ATC Status Magazine Reference Tool Holder

ATC Z Axis Position Magazine Status Tool in Spindle


Tool Fixture Option (TPS)

The Tool Fixture (TPS) option provides an alternative way to manually move tools to and from the spindle during tool setup or program execution. The TPS software option is required, as well as a tool fixture. The fixture is attached to the table, near the front enclosure doors. It is not removable, except for complete removal.

TPS is used as part of a tool change sequence from Tool Setup or Manual or Auto mode. Tools are laterally loaded into and unloaded from the tool fixture, and use the same spindle orient position as the ATC arm.

Tools used with TPS are limited by the tool fixture’s height and diameter, as well as ATC weight restrictions. Tools inserted into the spindle with TPS must be removed with TPS. You can convert a tool loaded with TPS into an auto tool, as long as it fits the diameter and weight constraints of the magazine. Once the tool becomes an auto tool, it is no longer tracked as a TPS loaded tool.

Automatic Tool Removal Using TPS

Follow the instructions below to use TPS to automatically remove a tool from the spindle:

1. Select the Input console key to access the Input screen.

2. Select the Tool Setup softkey.

3. With the cursor in the Tool field, enter the number of the tool you want to change into the spindle.

4. Select the Auto Tool Change console button. The Start Cycle button begins flashing.

5. Press the Start Cycle console button to initiate the tool removal process. The enclosure doors can now be opened. A "Confirm Empty Fixture. Close Doors and Press Start to Continue" message appears. The Start Cycle button flashes.

6. Make certain the Tool Fixture is empty. Press the Start Cycle button and its stops flashing.

7. A "Remove Tool X from Fixture, Close Doors & Press Start" message appears on the screen.

8. Remove the tool from the fixture, close the enclosure doors and Press the Start Cycle button.

9. The tool entered in step #3 is inserted from the magazine into the spindle.

10. The tool removal is complete.

You can insert a tool or remove a tool using TPS in Tool Setup, Manual Mode or Auto Mode. This section describes tool loading and unloading using TPS in Tool Setup.

You must use Manual Mode if the tool you are removing was the last tool in the spindle.


Automatic Tool Change Using TPS

Follow the instructions below to complete an Auto Tool change using TPS:

1. Select the Input console button to access the Input screen.

2. Select the Tool Setup softkey to access the Tool Setup screen.

3. With the cursor in the Tool field, enter the number of the tool that will be inserted into the spindle using TPS.

4. Press the Tool Changer Auto console button. The Start Cycle button begins flashing.

5. Press the Start Cycle button to initiate the tool change.

a. The Z axis rapids to the home position. b. The X and Y axes rapid to the Access position. An "Insert Tool X in Fixture.

Press Start" message appears. The Start Cycle button flashes again.

6. Insert the tool into the fixture.

7. Close the enclosure doors. Press the Start Cycle button.

a. The Start Cycle button stops flashing. b. The X and Y axes rapid to the Fixture position. c. The spindle orients (if it is not already oriented). d. The spindle unclamps. e. The Z axis rapids to the Clear position (its position before the tool change

began) - then moves at a fixed, reduced feedrate to the Fixture position. The spindle clamps the tool.

f. The Z-axis moves to the Fixture position at a reduced feedrate. g. The spindle clamps the tool. h. The X and Y axes move to the Clear position (their positions before the tool

change began) at a reduced feedrate. i. The Z axis rapids to the Tool Change position.

8. The tool change is complete.

If the Tool in Spindle is 0, a message will appear confirming that the spindle is empty. If the Tool in Spindle is a number other than 0, the tool will be removed from the spindle (automatically put into the magazine or you will be prompted to be removed manually)

A message requesting the tool be removed from the spindle using TPS will be displayed for any tool that was inserted into the spindle with TPS. You may use TPS to remove the tool or manually unclamp the tool to remove it from the spindle.


Bypass TPS in an Automatic Tool Change

Follow the instructions below to complete an Auto Tool change and bypass TPS:

1. Select the Input console button to access the Input screen.

2. Select the Tool Setup softkey to access the Tool Setup screen.

3. With the cursor in the Tool field, enter the number of the tool that will be inserted into the spindle.

4. Press the Tool Changer Auto console button; the Start Cycle button begins flashing. Press the Start Cycle button. If there is a tool in the spindle, remove it before proceeding. If the spindle is empty, the machine moves to the Access position.

5. When prompted to insert the tool into the fixture, manually insert the tool into the spindle. To install a tool using TPS, see Automatic Tool Removal Using TPS, on page 1 - 146.

a. Press the spindle unclamp button and insert the tool. The prompt changes to "Insert Tool XX in Spindle & Press Start Cycle."

b. Release the unclamp button. The tool is clamped in the spindle.

6. Close the enclosure doors and press the Start Cycle button.

7. The tool change is complete. Any tool that is inserted into the spindle manually (bypassing TPS) must be removed manually.


HMX Automatic Pallet Changer

The Automatic Pallet Changer (APC) system is standard on HMX machining centers. Equipped with two pallets, the APC provides the ability to set up a part on one pallet while a part is being machined on the other pallet.

This is the basic sequence of operation of the APC:

1. The APC Pin unlocks.

2. The APC table raises and rotates 180°. Hydraulic solenoids ensure the table rotates in the proper direction.

3. The APC table lowers into position.

4. The APC Pin locks.

Squaring the Pallet

The pallet is not automatically squared during machine calibration. It must be squared before it can be used. Follow these steps to square the pallet:

1. Press the MACHINE MODE MANUAL console key.

2. Select the Diagnostics softkey.

3. Select the Pallet Changer Diagnostics softkey to access the APC Diagnostics screen.

4. Select the More softkey to access the second APC Diagnostic screen.

5. Select the Move Z-axis to APC Position softkey to position the Z-axis at the APC position. The APC table must be in the down position to move the Z-axis to the APC position.

6. Select the Square Pallet For Rotation softkey and press the Cycle Start button. The pallet will rotate into the proper position for the pallet exchange cycle.

The B-axis must be squared before any operation can occur. Refer to Squaring the Pallet, on page 1 - 149 for instructions for squaring the APC table.

The APC table does not rotate through 360°, but rotates in the opposite direction to return to its previous position.

Only a Hurco-certified Service Engineer can make adjustments to the APC Table.

If the B-axis is away from the squared position, selecting the Square Pallet For Rotation softkey rotates the table at the maximum RPM back to the squared location.


Operating the APC

The APC can be operated in Auto mode within a Conversational or NC part program.

Follow these steps to operate the APC in a Conversational program:

1. On any Conversational part programming data block, select the Miscellaneous softkey.

2. Select the Machine Function softkey to display the Machine Function screen.

3. Scroll through the M Code list to select the appropriate code, then select the Select M Code softkey.

The following M Codes are used to operate the APC (use the scroll bar to view more M codes, if necessary):

• M51 Cycle APC—requires confirmation from the Operator before a pallet change cycle is initiated (see details below).

• M56 Cycle APC w/o Notify—complete a pallet change cycle without confirmation from the Operator.

• M57 Cycle to Pallet #1—place Pallet 1 in the machine without confirmation from the Operator.

• M58 Cycle to Pallet #2—place Pallet 2 in the machine without confirmation from the Operator.

Figure 1–20. Machine Function Screen with M Code List

Using M51 does not require indicating whether Pallet 1 or 2 is in the machining setup area. Before M51 will initiate the APC cycle, the front enclosure doors must be closed and the APC Ready pushbutton pressed.

• If the front enclosure doors are open when the M51 operation is requested, the program will be in a Feed Hold state and a message to close the front enclosure doors will be displayed. Close the doors and press the APC Ready


pushbutton to continue the part program.

• If the APC Ready pushbutton has not been pressed when the M51 operation is requested, the program will be in a Feed Hold state with the following message displayed, “Pallet setup confirmation required to cycle pallet changer.” Press the APC Ready and Cycle Start pushbuttons on the APC Panel to continue the program.

Refer to the NC Programming Manual for instructions on operating the APC within an NC program.

APC Diagnostics

Follow these steps to access the APC Diagnostics screen:

1. Press the MACHINE MODE MANUAL console key.

2. Select the DIAGNOSTICS softkey.

3. Select the PALLET CHANGER DIAGNOSTICS softkey. The APC Diagnostics screen 1 opens:

Figure 1–21. APC Diagnostics Screens 1 and 2

Pressing Feed Hold during a pallet change cycle will stop the cycle. Releasing Feed Hold will resume the cycle. However, Feed Hold followed by Spindle Off (or the Stop Cycle button) during a pallet change cycle will abort the program and the pallet change cycle. The APC must be returned to the home position using the Pallet Changer Diagnostics before an Auto program can be run again.

APC Diagnostics Screen 1 APC Diagnostics Screen 2


APC Status Conditions

The APC Diagnostics screen displays the status of inputs for the APC system.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the fields on the ATC and Diagnostic screens:

APC Diagnostics Softkeys

The APC Diagnostic softkeys are functional only when Servo Power is On and the machine is calibrated. These are the APC Diagnostic softkeys.

• Cycle Pallet Changer—sets the command to complete a full rotation of the APC Table. This function will perform a full APC cycle. The Z-axis will move to the APC position, the B-axis will square, the APC table will raise, the APC table will rotate 180 degrees, and will then lower.

• Raise Pallet Changer—sets the command to lift the APC Table to the Up position. The B-axis must be squared and the Z-axis must be at the APC position.

• Rotate APC to Position 1—sets the command to rotate the APC table to Position 1 inside the machining area. The B-axis must be squared and the APC must be in the raised position, and Position 1 must not be in the machining area.

• Rotate APC to Position 2—sets the command to rotate the APC table to Position 2 inside the machining area. The B-axis must be squared and the APC must be in the raised position, and Position 2 must not be in the machining area.

• Lower Pallet Changer—sets the command to lower the APC table to the Down position. The Z-axis must be in the APC position. The table must be at Pos 1 or Pos 2.

• More—opens the second APC Diagnostics screen.

• Move Z-Axis to APC Position—sets the command to move the Z-axis to the APC position. The APC table must be in the down position to move the Z-axis to the APC position.

• Square Pallet for Rotation—sets the command to square the pallet.

• Enable APC Jog Mode—allows the operator to jog the APC table up and down and also jog the APC table 180 degrees. When selected, a message displays indicating to proceed with caution:

APC Clamp Status Pallet in Machine

APC Door Status Pallet Pin

APC Position Pallet Reference Position

ATC Status Pallet Status in Machine

B-Axis Status Z-Axis Position

Hydraulic Status


This message is displayed until the APC Diagnostics screens are exited or until an E-stop occurs.

APC Jog Mode

The operator should verify the position of the Z-axis before jogging the APC. From APC screen 1, the operator can select Raise Pallet Changer, Lower Pallet Changer, Rotate APC to Position 1, or Rotate APC to Position 2. Once a function has been selected, the green Start Cycle button flashes and a message is displayed:

Figure 1–22. APC Diagnostic screen 1 with APC Jog Mode messages

The operator can then press and hold the green Start Cycle button to jog the APC. The operator must hold the Start Cycle button down while jogging. Once the Start Cycle button is released, the jogging function stops. The operator must select a softkey function again to enable the jogging.

Dual-Zone Machining

Once selected, the APC Jog Mode remains enabled until the operator navigates away from the APC diagnostic screens or an E-stop occurs


Dual-zone machining provides the ability to set up a job in one zone while machining in the other zone.

To use both zones on a dual-zone capable machine, the Enable Dual Zones parameter must be set to enable dual zones. This is done in Machine Parameters:

1. Select the Auxilary console key.

2. Select the Utility Screen icon.


4. Select the Machine Parameters softkey.

The Enable Dual Zones parameter is listed on Page 1 of Machine Parameters. Set this parameter to 1 to enable dual zones (1 is the default setting). When this parameter is set to 0, the machine can be used as a single long bed vertical machine.

See Machine Parameters, on page 1 - 61 for more information about the Enable Dual Zones parameter.

Part Programming for Dual-Zones

Each zone has its own coordinate system, so a Change Part Setup data block is used to modify the coordinates for each zone. This Change Part Setup block is used to switch zones while running a program. At the beginning of the program and at each point where a zone change is required, insert a Change Part Setup block:

1. From the Input screen select Part Programming, the Insert Block Before softkey, the Miscellaneous softkey, and the Change Part Setup softkey. A Change Part Setup block is added.

2. Modify Part Zero X, Y, Z (Part Zero Z is available only if using Absolute Tool Length mode) for the zone.

3. Modify Offset Z (if using Zero Calibration mode only) for the zone.

4. Specify the zone the part setup applies to in the Zone field.

• 1 = Zone 1 (the left-side zone when facing the machine).

• 2 = Zone 2 (the right-side zone when facing the machine).

• 0 = the current zone. Zone 0 can be used when dual zones are enabled but you do not need to run the program in a particular zone. Setting the Zone field to 0 will run the program in the zone that the spindle currently occupies.

The zone partition must be removed to use as a single long bed vertical machine.

Zone field is not displayed in single long bed configuration.


Viewing Graphics

Graphics can be displayed in one or both zones:

1. Press the Draw console key to display the Graphics screen.

2. Select the Select View softkey. Select the All Views softkey.

3. Select the Select Zone softkey.

4. Select Zone 1, Zone 2, or All Zones.

The zone is displayed in the lower left corner of the graphics display:

Figure 1–23. Isometric view of parts in both zones

Dual-Zone Operation

Programs can be run in one zone while the other zone is accessible to the operator for set up or other functions.

Setup Confirmation

Each zone door is equipped with a green Zone Setup Confirmation button and a red Emergency Stop button:

Figure 1–24. Emergency Stop and Zone Confirmation buttons

The zone setting must match the zone of the program (or be set to All Zones) to view the part program in Graphics.

Confirmation ButtonEmergency Stop Button


The green Zone Setup Confirmation button must be pressed to confirm that the zone is ready before the spindle will move into the zone to start machining.

The red Emergency Stop button will stop all machine operation when pressed.

Running Programs

To run a program, press the Cycle Start button. A pop-up confirmation message appears, and the green Zone Setup Confirmation button flashes on the door of the zone where the program will run. Push the green flashing button to confirm setup. If the spindle head is in the current zone for program, no confirmation is required.

While the program is running, you are able to set up in the other zone. When the door to the second zone is closed and the program completes its run in the first zone, the green Zone Setup Confirmation button on the second zone door flashes. Press it to start machining in the that zone.

• In dual-zone configuration, the door of the opposite zone can be opened until the green Zone Setup Confirmation button is pressed. The door must be closed before the confirmation will be accepted and the door locked.

• To unlock the door while the spindle head is in the opposite zone, press the green Zone Setup Confirmation button to cancel confirmation.

• With CE enabled the door will not open when the green Zone Setup Confirmation button is lit.


Auto Mode

Programs are run in Auto Mode. Press the Auto button on the console to access Auto Mode to check for errors, compute estimated run time, recovery/restart, perform a dry run, or run a part program.

Figure 1–25. Auto Mode screen

The following softkeys are available in Auto Mode:

• Use Editing File—selects the active program file to run. If this softkey is not selected, WinMax defaults to the last program run. If the last program run does not match the program that is being edited (as indicated in status bar), the operator will be prompted to select which program to run.

• Feed & Speed Optimization—fine tunes program execution, using the Axis Feed Rate and Spindle Speed dials to adjust values. This softkey is disabled in Test Mode.

• Linear Thermal Compensation—accesses the Linear Thermal Compensation table where parameters are set to manage linear growth. See Linear Thermal Compensation, on page 1 - 159.

• Check for Errors—checks the program from the Start Block through the End Block and displays error status. The number of the data block containing the error is included in the error message.

The time required for error checking depends upon the program’s length and complexity. Select the Abort Operation softkey to stop error checking at any time.

• Compute Estimated Run Time—provides an estimate of time it takes to run the program. Select the Abort Operation softkey to stop computing estimated run time.

Error checking automatically occurs during Compute Estimated Run Time.


• Recovery Restart—restarts a conversational or NC part program; typically at the point at which the program was interrupted. This softkey is disabled in Test Mode.

• For Conversational Programs—if necessary, Conversational Start and End blocks can be changed from the default.

For Mill Contour data blocks: Recovery Restart only occurs at segment 0 of a Mill Contour data block, not at a segment within a data block.

For Pattern data blocks: the user is prompted to specify which pattern or block instance to restart at and to provide any additional restart information for the start block. See Patterns Overview, on page 2 - 110 of the Patterns chapter, for more information.

• For NC Programs—use the following softkeys to restart an NC program after it was aborted either by the machine or the operator. Preparatory functions such as coolant, feeds and speeds, and offsets will be executed before machining resumes, and Tool Vector input is checked.

• Set Restart Marker—manually sets the restart marker. An “R” will appear to the left of the block selected, and will clear if the program successfully runs.

• Auto Set Restart Marker—automatically marks the last block being executed when the program was stopped, or where an error occurred during error checking.

• Reset Restart Marker—clears the Restart Marker and cancels the Recovery Restart operation. Can be used on a block after a G41/G42.

• Set End Marker—indicates the block that system should use to end program verification and execution. An “E” is inserted to the left of the block.

• Reset End Marker—restores end marker to its default position at the end of the program.

• Dry Run—active in Test Run mode only. Performs a program test run to identify potential problems before cutting the part. Specify all or a portion of the part program that will be tested in the Start and End blocks.

Trace the tool over the part at the programmed minimum Z level with the Spindle Off. Peck cycles and roughing passes are skipped.

• Run Program—initiates program execution and displays monitoring information. Disabled in Test Mode. When selected, the program is buffered and the Start Cycle button flashes. Pressing the Start Cycle button starts the program run. If the machine is not calibrated, the Manual screen immediately displays.

If the Z Start value is set below the stock surface, the Minimum Z value must be programmed so the tool does not plunge into the part. A message appears requesting the Minimum Z value. Note that Minimum Z will be shifted by patterns.

Changes made to a program while running take effect when the Start Cycle button is pressed again.


Linear Thermal Compensation

Linear Thermal Compensation parameters allow axis adjustments to compensate for linear growth. Offsets can be set for any linear axis, at specified time intervals, in minutes (up to 99,999,999). Between two and ten entries can be set.

Linear Thermal Compensation is enabled in the Auto Mode screen, where the reference time is set in the Current Time field. Current Time is increased automatically during program run, and is paused when the program is finished. Time and offsets remain unchanged when the program is not running.

Offsets can be imported using the Import Offsets from File softkey. Offsets can be saved/exported using the Export Offsets to File softkey.

Determining Offset Time and Positions for Linear Thermal Compensation

The Linear Thermal Compensation table is part-specific. A gauge or probe can be used to determine the offsets by measuring reference surfaces.

1. Turn off Linear Thermal Compensation (Enable set to NO on Auto Mode screen).

2. Measure reference surfaces.

3. Run part program. At identified intervals (in minutes), quickly measure reference surfaces using same tool or probe, at same locations.

4. Recovery restart the part program.

5. Repeat step 3 and 4 until the part program is finished or measurement values stabilize.

6. Record the intervals (time) and position differences into the Linear Thermal Compensation table.

Since compensation is applied to the machine X-, Y-, and/or Z-axes, it cannot be used to compensate spindle thermal growth on rotary machines when the spindle is not aligned to the machine Z-axis.


Auto Mode Monitoring

The Auto Mode Monitoring screen appears when the Run Program softkey is selected and program execution begin. Real-time machine and part locations and machine status are shown, as well as Spindle Load Monitor, the data block and type of operation, and the part count.

For NC programs, five lines of NC code are shown; to view more NC code as the program runs, select the NC Monitor softkey. The bottom portion of the screen is reserved for program status and error messages.

Figure 1–26. Auto Mode Monitoring screen

See the Field Glossary for definitions of fields on the Auto mode screens (fields displayed vary depending on machine, configuration, and/or program type):

These are the monitoring softkeys that may be available for Auto Mode Monitoring:

• Reset Part Count—Part Count is the number of times a program was executed. To return this value to zero when a new program starts, select the

Axis Limit Switches End Block Part Count S / Spindle

Block End Job Part Program Name Spindle Load Monitor

Coolant F(%) Part Program Path Start Block

CR / Chip Removal F / Feed Opt Stop On (Off) Start Job

Current Time Machine Orientation Time / Program Run Time

Enable Linear Thermal Compensation

Magazine R(%) TIS / Tool in Spindle

Part S(%) Zone

Spindle LoadMonitor

5 lines ofNC code


Reset Part Count softkey. A pop-up window opens, where the part count value can be changed or reset to zero.

• Chip Removal Forward On/Off— turn the chip auger in the forward (clockwise) direction on or off. This selection is saved when the Interrupt button is pressed or after the program has finished running. If a stop condition or mode change is made before restarting a new part program or exiting the interrupt cycle, the saved information is cleared. This softkey is only available if your machining center uses a chip auger.

• Optional Stop On/Off—pauses the program and shuts off the spindle. Optional Stop can be turned On and Off through a soft key in the main menu on the Auto screen while a program is running. When this setting is changed, the new state applies immediately and applies to all programs.

For NC programs, when Optional Stop is ON, an M01 code in an NC program will be processed and will cause a program stop (see M00), which will display a message requesting that the operator press Start Cycle to continue. When Optional Stop is OFF the code will be ignored.

For Conversational programs, an M01 can be inserted using a Machine Function data block.

An optional stop can also be set in Position, Rotary Position, and Comment data blocks by setting the Stop field to Optional. The block will function as if the Stop field were set to YES when the Optional Stop softkey is enabled. See Position Data Block, on page 2 - 120 and Comment Block, on page 2 - 125 in Conversational Programming, and Rotary Position Block, on page 5 - 6 in Options.

• Select DRO— view machine, part, distance-to-go, workpiece, and/or transform plane information, displayed in either standard or quad-size DRO view. See Digital Read Out (DRO), on page 1 - 162, below.

• Coolant Washdown On/Off—turn the coolant washdown on or off for washing chips from the enclosure.

• NC Monitor—displays a pop-up window containing the current NC code. This feature allows you to view the code as the program runs; the program name appears in the Current Program Name box at the bottom of the monitor. The line of code that is currently being machined is identified in red. When the “Show Modals” boxed is checked, the current active modals are shown. As machining progresses, the monitor will scroll through the lines of code. Select the “Close” button at the bottom of the window to close the NC Monitor.

The NC Monitor softkey is available when an NC program is running or during the NC portion of an NC/Conversational merged program. In a merged program, once the monitor is opened, it will display during the NC program run, and will be automatically hidden during the Conversational run.

• Toggle Rapid Override Lockout—enable or disable overrides to the programmed rapid traverse using the Rapid Override console knob. A confirmation message appears; select Yes to confirm the switch.

Access to the part counter is locked out by Edit Lockout Level “Full,” set in User Interface Settings. See Edit Lockout, on page 1 - 46 for information.


• Worklight On/Off—turn the enclosure worklight on or off. This softkey is only available if your machining center is equipped with an enclosure worklight.

Digital Read Out (DRO)

The Auto Run screen uses a standard size digital read out (DRO) at the top of the screen in addition to other fields and information. A Quad-size DRO is available that provides large-view machine, part, or distance-to-go for the part program that is running.

Select the SELECT DRO softkey on the Auto Program Run screen to change the size of the digital read out (DRO). From the Select DRO screen you can see real-time machine information displayed in full-screen view. The softkey menu provides these DRO options:

• Machine / Part (Standard DRO)—shows real-time axes location relative to machine zero and current part zero.

• Distance to Go (Standard DRO)—shows real-time axes location relative to machine zero and current part zero, and the remaining distance to completion of move.

• WorkPC / TR Plane (Standard DRO)—shows real-time axes location relative to machine zero, workpiece zero, and transform plane zero.

• Machine (Quad-size DRO)—shows in a larger view the real-time axes location relative to machine zero.

• Part Relative (Quad-size DRO)—shows in a larger view the real-time axes location relative to current part zero.

• Distance To Go (Quad-size DRO)—shows in a larger view the remaining distance to completion of each move.

• Dist to Go / Trans (Standard DRO)—shows real-time distance-to-go, and axes location relative to workpiece zero and transform plane zero.

Use the SELECT DRO softkey to select a different DRO display.


To access the configurable DRO view, select the Auxiliary button, and choose the Launch DRO softkey.

Concurrent Programming

Concurrent Programming allows you to create or edit a program while simultaneously machining a different program. When using Concurrent Programming, two part programs are simultaneously available. To enter Concurrent Programming while machining a part, press the console Input key. The Auto screen is replaced by the Input screen.

Stop Machine Operation

There are three methods to stop machine operation without turning off the power:

• Emergency Stop

• Park machine

• Control Power Off Timer parameter

Emergency Stop

To shut down the machining center quickly, press the Emergency Stop button. All motion stops and power is shut off to the spindle, relay control, way lubrication pumps, and servo systems.

When the Emergency Stop button is pressed, a special error file is created and saved to the machine hard drive in a folder called NavESTOP. These files record the machine

A (c) next to the axis indicates the axis is clamped.

The methods described here stop machine operation, but do not shutdown the control. See Shutdown Control, on page 1 - 165 for more information about shutting down the control.

If the machine will not be used for several days, or the shop has power surges or blackouts, turn off machine power at the main power switch, after stopping machine motion and shutting down the control.

Do not use Emergency Stop shut down if the machine has a long table with heavy equipment attached to one end. Instead, park the machine so that the weight of the table and any attached equipment will be evenly distributed.

Before hitting the Emergency Stop button, park the machine or center the table.


conditions at the time the Emergency Stop button is pressed. These files can be retrieved when necessary for service purposes; refer to Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files, on page 1 - 59 for more information.

Park Machine

Parking the machine centers the table and places the spindle at the home position. Table and attached equipment weight is distributed evenly when the machine is parked. Before parking the machine, the servo power must be on, the machine must be calibrated and the Tool in Spindle must be 0.

Follow this procedure to park the machine:

1. Press the Manual Mode console button.

2. Select the PARK MACHINE softkey. The Start Cycle button flashes.

3. Press the Start Cycle button. The machine moves to its park position.

4. A message with instructions to return to the power-up condition is displayed.

Control Power Off Timer

Set the Control Power Off Timer on the Machine Parameters screen. All motion stops and power is shut off to the spindle, relay control, way lubrication pumps, and servo systems.

Where can we go from here?

To restart the machine after the Emergency Stop was pressed, follow this sequence:

1. Twist the Emergency Stop button to release it.

2. Press the Manual Machine Mode button.

3. Press the Power On button.

4. Press the Start Cycle button. Or...

To restart the machine after it was parked, follow this sequence:

1. Press the Manual Machine Mode button.

2. Press the Power On button.

3. Press the Start Cycle button. Or...

If machine will not be used for several days or power surges and blackouts are common, switch off the machine’s power. After restarting, calibrate and warm up the machine.


Restart Control

The Restart Control command will remove control power, complete an orderly shutdown of the WinMax Mill control, and then restart.

Follow these steps to use the Restart Control command:

1. Press the Aux/Menu key followed by the Utility Screen softkey to access the Utilities screen and softkey menu.

2. From the Utilities screen, select the Restart Control softkey to access the Restart Control command. A pop-up message appears: “Do you really want to restart the control?”

3. Select Yes or No. When Yes is selected, the Restart Control command is performed. This feature saves time and avoids having to shut down the entire machine when it is only necessary to restart the control.

Shutdown Control

The Shutdown Control command will remove control power and complete an orderly shutdown of the WinMax control.

1. Follow these steps to use the Shutdown Control command:

2. Press the Aux/Menu key followed by the Utility Screen softkey to access the Utilities screen and softkey menu.

3. From the Utilities screen, select the Shutdown Control softkey to access the Shutdown Control command. A pop-up message appears: “Do you really want to shut down the control?”

4. Select Yes or No. When Yes is selected, the Shutdown Control command is performed.

5. Wait for the shutdown process to finish before shutting off machine power at the Main Disconnect switch.

Hurco recommends using the Shutdown Control command prior to turning off machine power to ensure that no data is lost.

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-501 UltiMotion 1-169

ULTIMOTION

Hurco’s UltiMotion system provides the following benefits:

Improved Surface Quality

With Hurco's proprietary smoothing, lookahead and motion control technology, the UltiMotion system provides significantly improved part surface quality. You'll see smoother and shinier surfaces, less vibration, less chatter marks, and higher accuracy.

Higher Throughput

Compared with a standard motion system, the UltiMotion system's advanced motion planning and rapid corner feature can provide decreased cycle time with the same or even better surface finish quality. This is especially true for parts with complex geometries or large amounts of repeated tasks, such as drilling or tapping.

Rapid Corner

For programs with a lot of consecutive rapid moves, the UltiMotion system doesn't stop between two rapids. Instead, it travels through blended corners at very high speed with only negligible deviation. This saves significant amount of time for repeated tasks, such as drilling and tapping.

Broader Performance Range for Surface Finish Quality

The Surface Finish Quality (SFQ) mechanism is Hurco's proprietary technology to allow users to choose better surface finish or higher throughput for their applications via a simple one-parameter control mechanism. Winmax control automatically adjusts internal parameters to achieve either better surface quality (smaller SFQ) or higher throughput (higher SFQ). The UltiMotion system extends the performance range for SFQ to have even better surface quality for your finish pass and even more time savings in the roughing or semi-roughing passes.

Higher Quality Rigid and Regular Tapping

The UltiMotion system deploys a coordinated motion control mechanism for regular and rigid tapping. You no longer need to worry if your tap will pass go/no-go tests; the UltiMotion system monitors the spindle angle at all times and controls the Z-axis to track the spindle position.

Smoother Motion Results in Longer Machine Life

Rough motion, vibration, and bumping increase mechanical system fatigue and shorten machine life. The UltiMotion system's unique acceleration and jerk control, along with its advanced motion planning, have made it possible to achieve faster, yet smoother motion. You will get a faster machine with extended machine life.

1 - 170 UltiMotion 704-0116-501 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Robust and Consistent Performance Over a Wide Range of Working Conditions

Have you ever had trouble maintaining the equivalent performance with work pieces weighing from several ounces to several thousands of pounds? The UltiMotion system's advance and accurate model compensation will help you to maintain the same level of performance over a wide range of working conditions.

Dynamic Variable Lookahead Algorithm

Hurco's proprietary Lookahead doesn't require a fixed number of blocks lookahead like conventional controls; instead the lookahead varies dynamically depending on the geometry and motion profile, but always guarantees there is enough to make optimized maneuvers.

Smooth and Responsive Handwheel Jogging

Compared with standard system, the UltiMotion system's hand wheel jogging is optimized to reduce bumping and vibration while providing more responsiveness.

How to Select the Motion System

The UltiMotion option must be installed. To turn it on or off:

1. Select the Auxiliary console button.


3. Select the System Configuration softkey.

4. Select the WinMax Configuration softkey.

5. Select the Software Options softkey. The software options are displayed.

6. Select the UltiMotion option and use the Enable or Disable Selected Option softkeys to toggle on or off.

To view the current Motion System:

1. Select the Auxiliary console button.


3. Select the System Configuration softkey.

4. Select the WinMax Configuration softkey.

5. Select the Motion Configuration softkey. The Motion Configuration screen opens and the current motion system is displayed.

6. Select either Standard or UltiMotion in the Motion System field. The system must be restarted for the change to take effect.

Conversational Programming 704-0116-501 Conversational Programming 2-1

CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

Conversational programming allows you to create a part program from a blueprint or program worksheet while working at the machine. Operating selections and prompts on the screen lead you through the steps necessary to enter the data for a part program. Machining operation information is stored within data blocks describing each operation to be performed.

Create and access the data blocks through the Part Programming softkey or icon.

These topics are discussed in the Overview section:

Part Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2

Programming Dual-Zone Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 8

Pecking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 8

Cutter Compensation (preliminary). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9

Calculated Plunge Points for Milling Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 14

Lead In/Out Moves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 15

2 - 2 Conversational Programming 704-0116-501 Conversational Programming

Part Programming

Part Programming is the process of entering data, often from a blueprint, into program data blocks to create a part.

Data blocks appear in numerical order as they are created.

To create a Conversational Part Program:

1. Press the Input console key to display the Input screen. The Input screen allows you to access setup functions including Import Functions, Tool Setup, and Program Parameters. See Input Mode, on page 1 - 90l for more information.

2. Enter machining operation information in the Part Setup and Tool Setup functions. This information is stored within data blocks describing each operation to be performed. Create and access the data blocks through the Input screen.

3. Select the Part Programming softkey to begin programming. The system displays either the first block of an existing program or a New Block screen for new programs.

Data blocks can be managed with the following programming operations:

• Access softkeys to create a new data block or edit an existing data block in the Input screen.

• View a list summarizing a part program's data blocks on the Program Review screen. See Review Mode, on page 1 - 132 for more information.

• View the current program's tool list on the Tool Review screen. Refer to Part Program Tool Review, on page 1 - 116 for more information.

• Use the Insert Block Before softkey to Insert a new data block between two sequentially numbered blocks. The data blocks following the inserted block are automatically renumber.

• Holes blocks contain operations, and Mill Contour blocks contain segments.

Part Programming softkeys access the following options:

• Position—Insert instructions to move the tool away from the part (or fixture), or to stop a program. A Position block is most often used to move the table to an X-Y location and is normally used at the end of the program and at any time the tool must be moved to the Z Top position of the Safety Work Region. See Position Data Block, on page 2 - 120 for more information.

• Holes—Select Drill, Tap, Bore and Ream drilling operations, and Back Spotface and Bolt Circle hole drilling. The locations of these holes on the part can be specified using the Locations operation, and the holes can also be programmed in a Bolt Circle pattern. See Holes Operations, on page 2 - 89 for more information.


• Milling—Program milling operations. See also Lines and Arcs (Mill Contour), on page 2 - 19, Mill Ellipse, on page 2 - 33, Mill Frame, on page 2 - 29, Mill Face, on page 2 - 31, Mill HD3 Lettering, on page 2 - 69, and Swept Surface Parameters, on page 2 - 75. Special milling blocks Triangle, Diamond 1 Face, Diamond 2 Faces, and Hexagon are accessed with the Special softkey, see Insert Pockets, on page 2 - 70 for more information.

• Patterns—Repeat or modify a sequence of one or more data blocks. A program sequence can be repeated in a rectangular, linear, angular, or rotated pattern or at specified locations. This operation is also used to scale or mirror a programmed part. See Patterns Operations, on page 2 - 109 for more information.

• Miscellaneous—Access these softkey functions:

• Graphics Off and ON; see Graphics On/Off, on page 2 - 121.

• Change Parameters; Change Parameters, on page 2 - 121.

• Change Part Setup; see Change Part Setup, on page 2 - 123.

• Machine Function; see Machine Function, on page 2 - 124.

• Probe Part Setup; see Probe Part Setup Data Block, on page 4 - 65.

• Lube Cycle; see Lube Cycle, on page 2 - 124.

• Comment; see Comment Block, on page 2 - 125.

• Insert; see Insert Block, on page 2 - 125.

• Tool Monitoring (Probing); see Tool Quality Monitoring, on page 4 - 14.

• Part Inspection; see Part Quality Verification, on page 4 - 67.

• Tool Optimize On and Off; see Tool Change Optimization, on page 2 - 126.

• NC Program Call—Access an NC program from within the conversational program with this softkey. See NC/Conversational Merge, on page 2 - 131.

• Rotary and Transform Planes—Accesses the Rotary New Block menu where you can access the Rotary Position, Milling, and Patterns, and Parameters blocks, as well as the Transform Plane and Transform Plane Groups blocks. See Rotary, on page 5 - 1 for more information.


Block Layout

The layout of most data blocks includes the part geometry at the top of the screen with the tool information below it, as in the following example:

Operation Data

Information about block execution, such as tool, cutter compensation, pocketing, roughing, finishing, and surface finish quality is entered on the bottom part of the data block. Fields are displayed on tabs for Roughing, Rest, Finishing, SFQ, and Allowances. The tabs and fields displayed are dependent on the block, machine type/configuration, or software options installed:

Roughing tab

This tab contains the tool information for the roughing pass.

• Tool—the tool used for the roughing pass.

• Milling Type—the type of cutting operation.

• Pocket Type (appears when Milling Type is Pocket Boundary)—the pocket type: Inward, Outward, ADP Zigzag, or ADP 1-Way.

• Mill Feed—the axis feedrate. Value initially displayed has been calculated by the control and can be retained or changed to a different value.

• Speed (RPM)—spindle speed for the roughing tool. This value is carried over from Tool Setup, but can be overridden here by typing a value in the field.

• Pocket Overlap (%) (appears when Milling Type is Pocket Boundary, UltiPockets option required)—the percentage of tool diameter that overlaps for each pass in a pocket milling operation. If the overlap is less than 50%, the toolpath may make additional moves to clean out the pocket. For example (toolpath is red):

Part geometry

Operation data


• Peck Depth—the maximum depth to be cut in one pass. If the total depth is greater than this value, multiple cutting passes occur. Entering a zero (0) value causes the total programmed depth to be cut in one pass of the tool.

• Plunge Feed—the feedrate for the tool moving from Z Start to Z Bottom.

• Radial Peck Count (appears only in a Mill Thread block)—the number of radial pecking passes. See Radial Pecks, on page 2 - 53 for more information.

• Radial Peck Depth (appears only in a Mill Thread block)—the incremental distance from the final cut. See Radial Pecks, on page 2 - 53.

Rest tab

This tab appears only when the Milling type is Pocket Boundary and the Pocket Type is ADP Zigzag or ADP 1-Way (UltiPockets option required). This tab is used to specify the tool information for the rest milling pass - to clear out remaining material from corners when pocketing.

• Tool—the tool used for the rest milling pass.

• Pocket Type—the pocket type: ADP Zigzag or ADP 1-Way.


• Speed (RPM)—spindle speed for the rest milling tool. This value is carried over from Tool Setup, but can be overridden here by typing a value in the field.

• Peck Depth—the maximum depth to be cut in one pass. If the total depth is greater than this value, multiple cutting passes occur. Entering a zero (0) value causes the total programmed depth to be cut in one pass of the tool.


Finishing tab

This tab contains tool information for the finishing pass.

If you change the Pocket Overlap using this field and save the file as an HD3 file, a Change Parameters data block will be inserted into the HD3 file to make the Pocket Overlap change. The Change Parameters block changes only the Pocket Overlap, leaving all other parameters as they were.

Additional corner moves for Pocket Overlap of 25%


• Tool—the tool used for the finishing pass.

• Milling Type—the type of cutting operation. This value is carried over from the Roughing tab and cannot be changed.

• Pocket Type (appears when Milling Type is Pocket Boundary)—the pocket type for the finish pocketing operations: Inward or Outward.


• Speed (RPM)—spindle speed for the finishing tool. This value is carried over from Tool Setup, but can be overridden here by typing a value in the field.


SFQ tab

This tab is used to specify the surface finish quality for the roughing pass and finishing pass. SelectSurface Finish Quality option is required.

The default SFQ for roughing is 80 and finishing is 20. Recommended values are:

Allowances tab

This tab appears when Stock Allowance mode is set to Data Blocks in Program Parameters, Milling 1 tab. See Program Parameters, on page 1 - 124 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill. This allows the stock allowance to be set in the data block rather than using a global value from Program Parameters.

Set the stock allowances left by the roughing pass:

• Finish XY—specifies the stock width to be left by the roughing pass.

• Finish Z—specifies the stock depth to be left by the roughing pass.

When the cursor is in the Finish XY or Finish Z field, the following softkeys appear:

• Copy Allowances from Parameters—copies the values for Finish XY and Finish Z from Program Parameters.

• Clear Allowances—zeros out the values in the Finish XY and Finish Z fields.

Select Tool from List

Use the following steps to select a tool using the Select Tool From List softkey:

1. In a program block screen, place the cursor in the Tool field and choose the Select Tool From List softkey.

2. Locate the desired tool using one of the following methods:

SFQ Desired Result

1-20 High precision parts / finishing




• Scroll through the list of tools and select the desired tool to highlight it.

• Begin typing the number of the desired tool. A pop-up box will appear when the first digit is entered; enter the entire number and select OK to jump to that tool number in the list.

3. Select the Select Tool softkey, which enters the tool into the data block or segment.

Temporary Parameter Change

For some programs, you may want to insert a temporary parameter change block between data blocks.

1. Display the data block for which the parameter change will first be used.

2. Select the Insert Block Before softkey. The New Block screen appears.

3. Select the Miscellaneous softkey. Choose the Change Parameter Softkey.

See Change Parameters, on page 2 - 121 and Change Part Setup, on page 2 - 123 for more information.

Automatic Calculations

The WinMax AutoCalc feature enables the system to calculate certain dimensions automatically after sufficient data has been programmed. Leave a data field blank to automatically calculate the value for that field. After sufficient data is entered in the other fields, the system automatically fills in the blank data field(s) and displays “CAL” next to those field(s).

The screen displays a Store Calculated Value softkey for editing a field with a calculated value. Select this softkey or the Enter key to store the displayed value into the part program. Do not re-enter the data, i.e., 8.9199; the data is actually 8.9199xxx and will be calculated as such when entered with the softkey or Enter key.

If you enter a value and later decide to let the control calculate the data, clear the entered value by following these steps:

1. Use the Arrow keys or the touchscreen to select the parameter where the automatic calculation is needed.

2. Press the C (Clear) console key or the Delete key on the keyboard.

3. Press the Enter key. The calculated value is displayed (if the field remains blank, additional data must be entered so the control can calculate the value).

If Tool Type Checking is enabled, only tools that are suitable for the programmed operation can be selected.

Check the Display Tool Notes checkbox to view the Notes for each tool. Notes can be entered in Part Program Tool Review and Advanced Tool Settings when the Tool & Material Library option is installed.

The Select Tool list displays in the sort order most recently used, when accessed via any screen - data blocks, Tool Management, or Tool Setup.


Programming Dual-Zone Machines

With dual-zone machining, machining occurs in one zone while the other zone is being used to set up the part. A Change Part Setup data block is used to switch zones. The Enable Dual Zones parameter must be set for dual zones to use both zones; see Machine Parameters, on page 1 - 61 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill.

Pecking

Pecking in a Milling Block

Pecking optimizes tool wear, deflection, feeds, and speeds by avoiding a full depth of cut in a single machining pass.

Pecking is controlled with the Peck Depth field in a milling block. Peck Depth specifies the maximum depth that is milled per pass:

If the Peck Depth value is non-zero, the following sequence occurs:

1. Tool feeds down to the first peck depth (the value of Z Start minus the Peck Depth value).

2. Contour is milled.

3. Tool retracts at rapid to Retract Clearance Plane.

4. XY moves at rapid to plunge point.

5. Tool moves at rapid down to the previous peck depth plus the Peck Clearance Plane.

6. Tool feeds down to the second peck depth (Z start minus 2 times the Peck Depth value).

7. Cycle repeats until the Z Bottom depth is reached.

If Peck Depth is zero, the total depth to Z Bottom is cut in one pass.

Pecking clearances are set on the Program Parameters screen/General 1 tab:

• Enable Pecking Retract Clearance

• Pecking Retract Clearance

• Peck Clearance Plane

In a Mill Thread block, Radial Peck Depth is used when more than one cutting pass is required. See Radial Pecks, on page 2 - 53 for more information.


Cutter Compensation (preliminary)

Cutter Compensation is set in the Milling Type field in a milling program block.

Cutter Compensation allows you to choose the side of the contour the tool should begin cutting. The programmed tool automatically follows the finished contour of the part when cutter compensation is selected. Without cutter compensation, the centerline of the programmed tool follows the print line.

Figure 2–1. Cutter Compensation

The following diagram shows tool paths using no cutter compensation compared to tool paths using left and right compensation. When either right or left cutter compensation is selected, the tool is offset from the cutting path a distance equal to the tool’s radius. The tool begins cutting at the offset and moves in the selected direction.

Figure 2–2. Tool Paths for Cutter Compensation

1 Programmed path2 Cutting tool3 Path compensating for cutter radius4 Cutter radius = amount of cutter compensation offset

1 No Cutter Compensation2 Cutter Compensation to the left3 Cutter Compensation to the right4 Tool5 Centerline of contour


The following are the types of cutter compensation used for Mill Contours such as Lines, Arcs, Blend Arcs, Helices, True-Type Lettering, and 3D Blend Arcs:

• On—Locates the center of the tool on the programmed contour of the frame.

• Left—Performs climb milling. Refer to Climb Milling (Left), on page 2 - 12.

• Right—Performs conventional milling. Refer to Conventional Milling (Right), on page 2 - 12.

• Profile Left—Removes material from a contour for climb milling. Refer to Profile Left and Right, on page 2 - 13.

• Profile Right—Removes material from a contour for conventional milling. refer to Profile Left and Right, on page 2 - 13.

The following are the types of cutter compensation used for milling Circles, Frames, and Ellipses:

• On—Locates the center of the tool on the programmed contour.

• Inside—the tool enters the part inside the contour and blend into the programmed contour using a 180° arc. Cutter compensation is automatically employed, and the edge of the tool remains inside a programmed contour.

• Outside—the tool enters the part outside the programmed contour and follow the outside contour. Cutter compensation is automatically employed, and the edge of the tool remains outside the programmed contour.

• Inside Tangent—the tool enters the part inside and tangent to the programmed contour. Cutter compensation is automatically employed, and the edge of the tool remains inside and tangent to the programmed contour. The direction the tool travels depends upon the Milling Direction. The tool is withdrawn from the part inside and tangent to the programmed contour.

• Outside Tangent—the tool enters the part outside and tangent to the programmed contour. Cutter compensation is automatically employed, and the edge of the tool remains outside and tangent to the programmed contour. The direction the tool travels depends upon the Milling Direction. The tool is withdrawn from the part outside and tangent to the programmed contour.

• Pocket Boundary—the tool cuts the part around the programmed boundary and avoid any programmed islands or pockets.

• Pocket Type—The Pocket Type field appears with Inward and Outward softkey and drop-down list box choices when Pocket Boundary or Pocket Island is chosen for Milling Type. The choices define whether spindle movement spirals from inside the pocket or outside the pocket.

• Outward—the tool begins cutting operations in the center region of the pocket and cut outward to the edge of the programmed boundary. Outward is used only for Circle and Frame data blocks without islands.

• Inward—the tool cuts in from the outside of the defined boundary, avoiding the defined islands.

• Pocket Island—Defines islands within pockets on a part. As many islands as desired may be defined (subject to available memory), but all must fit within the defined boundary and must allow the tool to completely define the island. A Pocket Island cannot follow an Outward Pocket Boundary.


The order in which segments are programmed determines the direction the tool moves from the start point. Setting Conventional (right) or Climb (left) in Milling Parameters overrides the direction of the programmed path.

Unless the Blend Offset is set for 0.0 in Milling Parameters, the system automatically creates Lead In and Lead Out arcs for closed contours. Refer to Lead In/Out Moves, on page 2 - 15.

Circle

Ellipse

Frame

Centerline Inside Outside InsideTangent

OutsideTangent Pocket






Climb Milling (Left)

Climb milling is the preferred method of cutter compensation, except when the fixturing is not rigid. In climb milling, the tool cuts in the same direction as the feeding motion. This is also known as “in–cut” or “down milling.”

During climb milling, the spindle turns in a clockwise direction. The tool is on the left-hand side of the cut.

The advantages of using climb milling are as follows:

• The chip starts thick and allows easy penetration into the surface of the part, causing less tool wear and less power consumption.

• The tool force cuts in and down on the part, helping to hold the part in the fixture. The more rigid the fixture, the better the hold on the part.

• Chip removal is greater, and there is less re-cutting of chips or marring of the part surface.

• The cutting fluid is more accessible to the cutting surface.

Conventional Milling (Right)

During conventional milling, the cutting teeth move in the opposite direction to the feeding motion. This is known as “out–cut” or “up milling.” When using conventional milling with a clockwise spindle direction, the tool is on the right-hand side of the cut.

The advantages of using conventional milling are as follows:

• The chip thickness starts at zero, causing less impact on the cutting teeth. This is ideal for setups that are not very rigid.

• The backlash in older machines is greatly diminished.


Profile Left and Right

Profile Left and Profile Right work the same as Left (Climb) and Right (Conventional) milling, except that a Max Offset may be added.

Maximum Offset

The Max Offset field appears when either Profile Left or Profile Right is selected. Max Offset allows the cutter to be programmed to start at some specific distance away from the programmed profile and move toward the finished profile, using the Pocket Overlap parameter, as each pass is completed. It is typically the radius of the largest inscribed circle minus the tool radius. Manually calculate the value and enter it into this field.

If a .500" diameter (.25" radius) End Mill is used to machine the part illustrated below (a circle with a 1" radius), the value for the Maximum Offset field is 0.75".

Figure 2–3. Determining Maximum Offset

If the tool diameter is changed (i.e., the cutter is sharpened to a smaller diameter), the Maximum Offset value must be manually re-calculated and this new value programmed into Segment 0 of the Mill Contour's Start block. Refer to Lines and Arcs (Mill Contour), on page 2 - 19. The Tool diameter is programmed in Tool Setup and cannot be changed in Part Programming. See Tool Setup in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

The programming sequence of Lines and Arcs segments determines the cutting direction. However, when programming Mill Frames, Circles and Ellipses, the cutting direction is determined by the values entered in Program Parameters.

Drawing the part on the graphics screen is the key to determining an optimum Maximum Offset value.

1 Starting point for the tool2 Largest inscribed circle in this contour3 Radius


Calculated Plunge Points for Milling Cycles

The following calculations are for determining the plunge points for milling cycles. The examples are for Climb Milling.

The Blend-in move is 90° for all examples.

The Arc of Radius = Blend Offset for all examples.

The plunge points apply to Circle and Frame milling cycles.

Circle, Inside Circle, Outside

Occurs at 3 o’clock position on the circle.

X Plunge = X Center + Circle Radius - Blend Offset - Tool Radius

X Plunge = X Center + Circle Radius + Blend Offset + Tool Radius

Y Plunge = Y Center Y Plunge = Y Center

Frame, Inside Frame, Outside

Occurs at 6 o’clock position on the frame.

X Plunge = X Corner + (X Length/2) X Plunge = X Corner + (X Length/2)

Y Plunge = Y Corner + Blend Offset + Tool Radius

Y Plunge = Y Corner - Blend Offset - Tool Radius


Lead In/Out Moves

With posted NC programs, use Lead In and Lead Out moves to control the tool path before the tool moves into position to cut the part.

A positive Lead Angle starts the tool path away from the programmed path when performing a Lead In move and ends away from the programmed path when performing a Lead Out move. A negative Lead Angle has the opposite effect.

Toolpath Graphics will not draw the Lead Angle or Lead Length motion.

Figure 2–4. Lead In/Out Moves

When you select Milling Type Left, Right, Inside, or Outside, and enable the Display APT fields in Editor field on the Utilities—Post Processor screen, Lead Angle and Lead Length fields appear on the Milling data block.

Lead In/Out moves are determined by the lead angle and lead length values. With the exception of open contours, perform a 90º arc Lead In and Lead Out move.

These NC Programming fields operate similarly to Conversational Blend In/Blend Out moves (Blend Offset and Blend Overlap values).

A Lead In moveB Lead Out move1 Programmed paths2 Offset tool path3 (-) Lead Angle4 (+) Lead Angle5 Lead Length


Lead Angle

Lead Angle is used with Lead Length to define Lead In and Lead Out moves. Lead Angle is an angle relative to the direction of the cut, measured 180º from the end of the first segment.

If starting a contour in the middle of a line or arc, set the Lead Angle at 45º or 90º to prevent gouging the contour.

Use caution with Lead Angle, because the tool could gouge the part if left at the default of 0.

Lead Length

Lead Length is used with Lead Angle to define Lead In and Lead Out moves. Lead Length is the length of the Lead In move.

The Lead Length must be larger than the tool's radius. For example, using a 1" diameter End Mill, the Lead Length would be 0.505".

Conversational Programming 704-0116-501 Milling Operations 2-17

MILLING OPERATIONS


General Guidelines for Creating a Milling Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 18

Lines and Arcs (Mill Contour) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 19

Mill Circle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 26

Mill Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 29

Mill Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 31

Mill Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 33

3D Mold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 34

Helical Plunge (Ramp). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 44

Mill Thread. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 51

Mill Stick Lettering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 54

Mill True-Type Lettering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 56

Stick Lettering Along Contour. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 59

True-Type Lettering Along Contour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 62

HD3 Serial Number Stick Lettering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 65

Mill HD3 Lettering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 69

Insert Pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 70

Swept Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 74

Mill Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 79

Mill Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 84

2 - 18 Milling Operations 704-0116-501 Conversational Programming

General Guidelines for Creating a Milling Block

1. Select the Part Programming softkey from the Input screen.

2. Select the Insert Block Before softkey.

3. When the New Block screen appears, select the Milling softkey to display the milling options shown in the seven softkey selections.

4. Select the milling operation and the first data block screen appears.

5. Enter the geometry values in the appropriate fields/tabs.

6. Enter tool information on the Roughing tab (and on the Finishing tab if a finish tool will be used). Type the number of the tool in the Tool field and a list of stored tools appears. Select your tool.

• The tool numbers and their descriptions are entered in Tool Setup. If the tool information has not been entered or another tool should be added to the program, select the Tool Setup softkey to update the tool descriptions for this program.

• Entering a number in the Tool field pulls information from Tool Setup and automatically loads it into fields on the program block screen. Note that the Mill Feed and Speed (RPM) fields are filled in based on the information about the tool.

• To use the UltiPocket option feature, select a pocket boundary. The Pocket Type field appears when a pocket operation is selected.

Many WinMax screens have fields that appear based on selections made in other fields. These are conditional fields because they only appear on a screen under certain conditions.


Lines and Arcs (Mill Contour)

Mill contour data blocks use segments to create lines and arcs in a part program. A segment is any single or combined X-Y-Z axis movement at a programmed feedrate. A series of line and arc segments can be programmed in a single data block, using different segments, to form a complete contour.

• Start Segment, on page 2 - 19

• Line Segment, on page 2 - 20

• Arc Segment, on page 2 - 21

• Blend Arc Segment, on page 2 - 22

• Helix Segment, on page 2 - 23

• 3D Arc Segment, on page 2 - 24

The Field Name Glossary, on page 7 - 1 contains definitions of all WinMax fields. The fields listed below appear on the Mill Contour screens. Fields displayed on screen may vary according to machine type, configuration, parameter settings, and/or settings in other fields.

Start Segment

The first segment in a Mill Contour block is always a Start segment, indicated by the segment zero (0). Enter the tool that will be used for the entire operation in the Start segment - all segments in the operation will use this tool. X, Y, and Z Start coordinates are also entered in the Start segment.

Block Mill Feed Rough SFQ X Start Z Bottom

Finish SFQ Milling Type Radius XY Angle Z Center

Finish XY Overlap Speed (RPM) XY Length Z End

Finish Z Peck Depth Sweep Angle Y Center Z Point

Lead Pocket Overlap X Center Y End Z Start

Lead Angle Pocket Type X End Y Point

Lead Length Plunge Feed X Point Y Start

Cutter compensation, set in the Milling Type field, determines the compensation applied to the tool path. See Cutter Compensation (preliminary), on page 2 - 9 for more information.

Pecking is the use of multiple cutting passes to optimize tool operation. See Pecking, on page 2 - 8 for more information.

To use pocketing with Mill Contour, the UltiPockets option must be installed. See UltiPockets, on page 2 - 141 for more information.


Line Segment

For line segments, the Auto-Calc feature automatically calculates certain unknown dimensions after you enter sufficient data.

The figure below illustrates the XY Length and XY Angle in a Line segment:

• If the X End and Y End coordinates are entered, the system calculates the XY length and the XY angle values.

• The XY Angle is the angle of the line segment (from the start point to the end point), measured counterclockwise from the 3 o'clock position.

• If both end points are unknown but the XY Length and XY Angle fields are programmed, the system calculates the values for the X End and Y End fields.

• If one end point coordinate and the XY Angle field are programmed, the system calculates the values for the unknown end point and the XY Length fields.

• If one end point coordinate and the XY Length field are programmed, the system calculates the values for the unknown end point and the XY Angle fields. However, unless the XY Angle is known, there are two possible solutions for the unknown end point, and the correct one must be determined for the program.

• When two possible solutions exist, the "Another end point exists" message appears and one of the two possible solutions appears in the unknown field. You can use the Draw key to view the solution in the Graphics screen. You can also use the Find Another Endpoint softkey to see the alternate solution, and view it in Graphics as well. Use the Enter key to accept either displayed solution.


The following illustration shows a line segment with unknown Y End and XY Angle:

Arc Segment

The software uses data in the Arc Segment fields as described below to perform automatic calculations:

• The center points plus the start points or end points provide the arc radius.

• The start points and end points plus the radius provide the two possible center points.

• Either of the end points and the center point provide the value of the other end point and the radius.

• When a known center point, start point, or end point and radius are provided, an unknown center point is provided.


Blend Arc Segment

A blend arc is an arc that joins two other segments and is tangent to both. Use a blend arc to join two line segments, to join a line segment and an arc segment, or to join two arc segments. The segments to be joined must have a theoretical point of intersection.

Figure 2–5. Blend Arc Examples

Follow this link to the Hurco website to view a Blend Arc programming video demonstration:

Video Demonstrations at www.hurco.com

Scroll to the bottom of the page and select the video to download. Internet connection is required.

Two Lines Joined by a Blend Arc

Line and Arc Joined by a Blend Arc

Two Arcs Joined by a Blend Arc

1 X/Y Start 1 X/Y Start 1 X/Y Start2 X/Y End 2 X/Y End 2 X/Y End3 Segment 1 (Line) 3 Segment 1 (Line) 3 Segment 1 (Arc)4 Segment 1 End/Segment 3 Start (Point of Intersection)

4 Segment 1 End/Segment 3 Start (Point of Intersection)

4 Segment 1 End/Segment 3 Start (Point of Intersection)

5 Segment 2 (Blend Arc) 5 Segment 2 (Blend Arc) 5 Segment 2 (Blend Arc)6 Segment 3 (Line) 6 Segment 3 (Arc) 6 Segment 3 (Arc)

http://www.hurco.com/en-us/support/manuals/default.aspx


If the only information known about an arc is its radius, it is easier to program it as a blend arc if the segments intersect.

Reference values programmed in a previous segment to a blend arc define the start point of this segment and are displayed in parentheses. These values can only be changed in the segment in which they were created.

Some guidelines that must be followed when creating a blend arc:

• The first or last segment of a Mill Contour data block cannot be blend arc segments.

• Blend arc segments cannot be adjacent to one another in a program cannot be blend arc segments. For example, if segment #2 is a blend arc, neither segment #1 nor #3 can be blend arc segments.

• Segments that are adjacent to the blend arc segment must intersect at some point in their theoretical plane. Therefore, if segment #2 is a blend arc, segments #1 and #3 must theoretically intersect at some projected point.

• The Radius of a blend arc segment cannot be too large to be tangent to both of the adjoining segments.

• If any coordinate (start point, center point, or end point) is important to the construction of the two segments to be blended, the segment must be programmed as an arc and not as a blend arc.

• The Feed field is initially displayed with a value carried forward from the previous segment. This value can be accepted or changed.

Helix Segment

The software uses data in the Helix fields as described below to perform automatic calculations:

• The Z End and Sweep Angle provide data to calculate the Lead.

• The Sweep Angle is used to calculate the Z End.

• The X End, Y End, and Lead values provide the Z End.

• The Z End and Lead values provide the X End, Y End, and Sweep Angle values.

• The X End, Y End, X Center, and Y Center values supply the Radius.

• The Sweep Angle and either the X or Y end point provide the unknown X End or Y End.

A series of arcs and lines can be programmed in a single data block to form a complete contour. Press the right Arrow key to program additional Line and Arc segments for the current data block.


3D Arc Segment

Use 3D Arc to create a three-dimensional arc segment.

This diagram shows the relationships of the coordinates to each other:

To calculate the centerline of cutter movement, remember these points. Refer to Cutter Compensation (preliminary), on page 2 - 9 for information about cutter compensation.

• Depending on the axis being worked, X can be interchanged with Y or Z.

• The X and Z points must be calculated for an X-Z arc.

• The Y and Z points must be calculated for a Y-Z arc (all arcs travel through at least two axes).

• To calculate the centerline in the X axis for a ball-nosed end mill, use this formula:

Here are the elements of this formula:

Xa = Actual centerline dimension of cutter in X axis

X s = Arc reference starting point in the X axis

Xc = X center point

Do not confuse the 3D Arc feature with the 3D Mold Option. The 3D Arc feature is always included in the WinMax software. Refer to WinMax Mill Options for more information on the 3D Mold option.

1 Start Point

2 Center Point

3 X, Y, Z Point

4 End Point


Ri = Radius of arc minus ½ cutter diameter

R = Radius of arc

Contour End

This block marks the end of the programmed contour. To view the previous segment, select the Previous Segment softkey. If there are no existing segments, select the Insert Segment Before softkey or the PAGE DOWN key to create a new segment.

The Contour End screen is shared by Lines and Arcs, Rotary Lines and Arcs, and 3D Mold.

Follow these guidelines when programming 3D arcs:

• Never program cut right or cut left cutter compensation into a 3D arc block.

• Always program the centerline of cutter movement.• Lower the tool calibration point to one-half the cutter diameter by

manually changing the Tool Zero reference point. For example, when using a 1/4" ball-nosed end mill with Tool Zero of 2.2500" (ball tip touched to work surface), the new zero calibration is 2.3750". Remember this change when entering Z Up and Z Start dimensions (which must include the value of this manual change to the reference point).


Mill Circle

Use the Circle data block to mill circles.

To create a Mill Circle data block:

1. From the Input screen, select the Part Programming softkey or icon.


3. From the New Block screen, select the Milling softkey.

4. From the New Block (Milling) screen, select Circle. Mill Circle screen opens.

5. Enter geometry data into the appropriate fields. Field definitions can be found by following the links below.

6. Enter block operation data into the appropriate tabs and fields. Field definitions can be found by following the links below. Also see Operation Data, on page 2 - 4 for more information.

The Field Name Glossary, on page 7 - 1 contains definitions of all WinMax fields. The fields listed below appear on the Mill Circle screen. Fields displayed on screen may vary according to machine type, configuration, parameter settings, and/or settings in other fields.

Block Peck Depth Start Angle

Finish SFQ Pocket Overlap Tool

Finish XY Pocket Type X Center

Finish Z Plunge Feed Y Center

Mill Feed Radius Z Bottom

Milling Type Rough SFQ Z Start

Overlap Speed (RPM)


Mill Circle Example

The sample data in the fields above create the following circle.

In this example, Milling Type is ON. Machine movement occurs as follows:

1. Tool moves at Rapid Traverse rate in Z to the Retract Clearance plane.

2. Table moves at Rapid Traverse rate in XY to the Start Angle position at the 3 o’clock position.

3. Tool moves at Rapid Traverse rate to Z Start.

4. Tool moves at Plunge Feed rate to Z Bottom.

5. When the tool reaches Z Bottom, machining continues at Mill Feed with the center of the tool along the contour, moving clockwise around the circle (direction set in Program Parameters) until cutting is complete.

6. Tool retracts at Rapid Traverse rate to the Retract Clearance plane.


Tool plunge point



To use pocketing with Mill Circle, the UltiPockets option must be installed. See UltiPockets, on page 2 - 141 for more information.

Follow this link to the Hurco website to view a Mill Circle video demonstration:



For Rotary Circle, see Rotary Circle - Universal, on page 5 - 16 in the Rotary manual.



Mill Frame

The Mill Frame data block supports the creation of frames with or without uniform corners.

To start a new Mill Frame block:




4. From the New Block (Milling) screen, select Frame. Mill Frame screen opens.

The Mill Frame block fields appear on two tabs: Geometry and Corners. The frame geometry parameters are entered on the Geometry tab. Corner Radius specifies the radius of the reference corner. Use this field if all four corners of the frame will have the same radius.

To program unique corners (with different radii), parameters are set on the Corners tab. Select Line or Arc for each corner, and specify a radius for arcs, or length and angle for lines. If the corner should have neither, geometry should be left as an arc with radius of 0.00, which is the default.

The Field Name Glossary, on page 7 - 1 contains definitions of all WinMax fields. The fields listed below appear on the Mill Frame screen. Fields displayed on screen may vary according to machine type, configuration, parameter settings, and/or settings in other fields.

If all four corners of the frame should have the same radius, the Corners tab does not need to be used; instead use the Corner Radius parameter on the Geometry tab.

Specifying a value in the Corner Radius field will reset all of the corners set as Arcs in the Corners tab to that radius. If you are creating unique corners, do not use the Corner Radius field.

Block Peck Depth X Length

Corner Radius Plunge Feed Y Corner

Finish SFQ Speed (RPM) Y Length

Finish XY Rough SFQ Z Bottom

Finish Z Start Side Z Start

Mill Feed Tool

Milling Type X Corner

For Rotary Frame, see Rotary Frame - Universal, on page 5 - 16 in the Rotary manual.


Mill Frame Example

The sample data in the fields above create the following frame.

In this example, Milling Type is ON. Machine movement is:

1. Tool moves at Rapid Traverse rate to Z Start.

2. Tool moves at Plunge Feed rate to Z Bottom at the mid-point of the bottom side of the frame (because Start Side is Bottom).

3. When the tool reaches Z Bottom, milling occurs with the center of the tool along the contour (Milling Type On), moving clockwise around the frame until milling is complete.

4. Tool retracts at Rapid Traverse rate to the Retract Clearance plane.


Mill Face

Face milling directs the cutter path so the tool moves over the rectangular face area of the part, removing material using 60% of the tool diameter from the previous pass (but the last pass may be less).

Axis positioning places the tool over the next cutting path, and cutting resumes in the opposite direction.

To start a new Mill Face block:




4. From the New Block (Milling) screen, select Face. The Mill Face screen opens.

There are four types of face milling, set in the Milling Type field:

• X Unidirectional—Directs the tool to cut in one direction, parallel to the X axis, and then move the spindle to the retract clearance value. Axis movement occurs at rapid traverse to return the tool to the start point of the next cutting path, which is determined by the system. The start point for each cut is the tool radius plus blend offset away from the starting edge corner.

• X Bi-directional—Directs the tool to cut in one direction from the start point, parallel to the X axis. Axis positioning occurs to place the tool over the next



To use pocketing with Mill Frame, the UltiPockets option must be installed. See UltiPockets, on page 2 - 141 for more information.

Follow this link to the Hurco website to view a Mill Face programming video demonstration:





cutting path, and cutting resumes in the opposite direction. The new cutting path for the tool is automatically determined by the system.

• Y Unidirectional—Directs the tool to cut in one direction, parallel to the Y axis, and then move the spindle to the retract clearance value. Axis movement occurs at rapid traverse to return the tool to the start point of the next cutting path, which is determined by the system. The start point for each cut is the tool radius plus blend offset away from the starting edge corner.

• Y Bi-directional—Directs the tool to cut in one direction from the start point, parallel to the Y axis. Axis positioning occurs to place the tool over the next cutting path and cutting is in the opposite direction. The new cutting path for the tool is automatically determined by the system.

The Field Name Glossary, on page 7 - 1 contains definitions of all WinMax fields. The fields listed below appear on the Mill Face screen. Fields displayed on screen may vary according to machine type, configuration, parameter settings, and/or settings in other fields.

1 Blend Offset

2 X Unidirectional

3 Y Unidirectional

4 X Bidirectional

5 Y Bidirectional

Block Plunge Feed Y Length

Finish SFQ Speed (RPM) Z Bottom

Finish XY Rough SFQ Z Start

Finish Z Tool

Mill Feed X Corner

Milling Type X Length

Peck Depth Y Corner


Mill Ellipse

The Mill Ellipse block creates ellipses. To start a new Mill Ellipse block:




4. From the New Block (Milling) screen, select Ellipse. Mill Ellipse screen opens.

Ellipse axes must be programmed parallel to the respective axes of the machine. X Radius and Y Radius specify the distance along the X axis from X Center, or along the Y axis from Y Center, to the edge of the ellipse.

The major axis is the longer or wider axis and can be either the X or Y axis. The minor axis is the smaller axis. Program an ellipse with the major and minor axes non-parallel to the machine using a Pattern Loop Rotate routine and rotating the ellipse after it has been programmed. Refer to Loop Rotate, on page 2 - 114.

The Field Name Glossary, on page 7 - 1 contains definitions of all WinMax fields. The fields listed below appear on the Mill Ellipse screen. Fields displayed on screen may vary according to machine type, configuration, parameter settings, and/or settings in other fields.

Follow this link to the Hurco website to view a Ellipse programming video demonstration:



To use pocketing with Mill Ellipse, the UltiPockets option must be installed. See UltiPockets, on page 2 - 141 for more information.

Block Peck Depth X Center

Finish SFQ Plunge Feed X Radius

Finish XY Pocket Overlap Y Center

Finish Z Pocket Type Y Radius

Mill Feed Rough SFQ Z Bottom

Milling Type Speed (RPM) Z Start

Overlap Tool X Radius



3D Mold

3D Mold creates a three dimensional part. Requires the 3D Mold option.

3D Mold Parameters

To create a three-dimensional (3D) part, define a two-dimensional (2D) profile in either the XY or XZ plane (these are the 3D mold parameters). Repeat the 2D profile along a straight line (translate) or repeat it around a centerline (revolve) to produce the final 3D shape (the 3D mold contour). Choose Draw 2D Contour to draw the original 2D contour that will be manipulated using the 3D operations.

To start a new 3D Mold data block:




4. From the New Block (Milling) screen, select 3D Mold. 3D Mold screen opens.

Combine of any of the three types into composite contours to machine complex parts:

• XY Revolved About X (About X)—Use a 2D contour programmed in the XY plane and revolve it about a centerline on the X axis to produce the finished 3D contour.

• XZ Revolved About Z (About Z)—Use a 2D contour programmed in the XZ plane and revolve it about a centerline on the Z axis to produce the finished 3D contour.

• XZ Translated in Y (Trans Y)—Use a 2D contour programmed in the XZ plane and translate it in the Y axis.

Select the Edit 3D Mold Contour softkey to access the contour segments. Use the Edit 3D Mold Parameters softkey to reach the parameters screen from any of the contour screens.



To use pocketing with Mill Frame, the UltiPockets option must be installed. See UltiPockets, on page 2 - 141 for more information.

For Swept Surface programming, see Swept Surface, on page 2 - 74 in the Milling chapter of the Conversational Programming manual.


The Field Name Glossary, on page 7 - 1 contains definitions of all WinMax fields. The fields listed below appear on the 3D Mold Parameter screens. Fields displayed on screen may vary according to machine type, configuration, parameter settings, and/or settings in other fields.

Centerline Y and Centerline Z

Figure 2–6. Increased Radius

Bidirectional Finish SFQ Start Angle Z Start

Block Mill Feed Step Size

Centerline X Milling Type Stock Allowance

Centerline Y Peck Depth Tool

Centerline Z Plunge Feed Type

Cut Direction Rough SFQ Y End

End Angle Speed (RPM) Y Start

1 X Centerline = 0

2 Y Centerline = 5


Figure 2–7. Zero Radius

The Centerline Z field determines the Z axis position of the X axis centerline. Changing the Z axis centerline moves the X axis centerline above or below the part surface. This alters the depth of the 3D contour. The Z axis centerline is used only for XY Revolved About X.

To machine the 3D contour below the part surface, enter a negative value in the Centerline Z field. This value is equal to the radius of the part measured from the Y centerline.

Here is a convex contour programmed below the part surface:

Figure 2–8. Convex Contour Below the Part Surface

Y Start and Y End

1 X Centerline = 0

2 Y Centerline = 0

1 Original Profile

2 Z Centerline


Determine the length of the 3D contour along the Y axis for XZ Translated in Y, as shown in the example below:

Figure 2–9. Y Start and Y End Fields (XZ Translated in Y)

1 Part Zero

2 Y Start

3 Y End


3D Mold Contour

Used in conjunction with 3D Mold Parameters to mill a 3D Mold, program the part surfaces as a 2D profile in either the XY or XZ plane.

The Start Segment number is always 0. Use segments to program lines and arcs which create a contour. Repeat the 2D profile along a straight line (translate) or repeat it around a centerline (revolve) to produce the final 3D shape. The Contour End block marks the end of the programmed contour.

Select the Edit 3D Mold Parameters softkey to access the parameters screen. The Edit 3D Mold Parameters softkey is not available when the cursor is in either the Block or Segment field. When you select the Edit 3D Mold Parameters softkey, it changes to Edit 3D Mold Contour. This softkey is not available when the cursor is in the Block field.

3D Mold Start Segment

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the 3D Mold Contour Start segment fields:

Continue programming the contour by using the Page Down key or by selecting the Next Segment softkey.

Line, Arc, and Blend Arc softkey choices appear.


For Lettering Along Contour programming, see Stick Lettering Along Contour, on page 2 - 59 or True-Type Lettering Along Contour, on page 2 - 62 in the Milling chapter of the Conversational Programming manual.

Block

Segment

X Start

Y Start

Z Start


3D Mold Line

Use the 3D mold Line Segment block to create the geometry for a 3D Mold Line segment.

Some 3D Mold Line fields are automatically calculated with the Auto-Calc feature. See Automatic Calculations, on page 2 - 7 for more information. Use the Store Calculated Value softkey to retain a calculated value.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the 3D Mold Line segment fields:

Some fields on screen will vary depending on the type of contour selected.

A contour can also be created by pasting an existing contour into the program, using Multiple Block Functions on the Program Review screen. This allows you to use the same segments for a Mill Contour Block and a 3D Mold Block without entering each segment twice.

• To copy a block, select the contour that you wish to copy on the Program Review Screen and use the MULTIPLE BLOCK FUNCTIONS softkey to access the COPY softkey.

• To paste a block, select the 3D Mold Block that you wish to paste the contour into on the Program Review screen and use the MULTIPLE BLOCK FUNCTIONS softkey to access the PASTE softkey.


Block XY Length Z End

Segment XZ Angle Z Start

X End XZ Length

X Start Y End

XY Angle Y Start


3D Mold Arc

Some 3D Mold Arc fields are automatically calculated with the Auto-Calc feature. See Automatic Calculations, on page 2 - 7 for more information. Use the Store Calculated Value softkey to retain a calculated value.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the 3D Mold Arc segment fields:


3D Mold Blend Arc



Some 3D Mold Blend Arc fields are automatically calculated with the Auto-Calc feature. See Automatic Calculations, on page 2 - 7 for more information. Use the Store Calculated Value softkey to retain a calculated value.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the 3D Mold Blend Arc segment fields:



Block X Center Y Start

Direction X End Z Center

Radius X Start Z End

Segment Y Center Z Start

Sweep Angle Y End

For Swept Surface programming, see Swept Surface, on page 2 - 74 in Conversational Programming.

Block X End Z Center

Direction X Start Z End

Radius Y Center Z Start

Segment Y End

X Center Y Start


Roughing and Finishing Tools

In many applications, a Flat End Mill can be used for roughing, followed by a Ball-Nosed End Mill, which is required for cutting the finished surface.

Figure 2–10. Flat End Mill on a Contour

Figure 2–11. Ball-Nosed End Mill on a Contour

Flat End Mill - the cutter path is computed as if a Ball-Nosed End Mill is used. This computation allows a Flat End Mill to be used for roughing without gouging the part, and in most cases leaves enough material to be removed for the finished surface using a Ball-Nosed End Mill.

1 First Data Block Using a Flat End Mill

2 Programmed Contour

3 Material to be Removed by Ball-Nosed End Mill

1 2nd Data Block using a Ball-Nosed End Mill

2 Programmed Contour (Same Contour as DB1)

3 Material to be Removed by Ball-Nosed End Mill


Figure 2–12. Flat End Mill

Ball-Nosed End Mill - the system computes the compensated cutter path of the ball center:

1 Tool Calibrated on Tip

2 Tool Calculated as center of imaginary ball nose

3 Tool Zero

1 Tool Calibrated on Tip

2 Tool Calculated as center of ball nose

3 Tool Zero


Figure 2–13. Ball-Nosed End Mill

Roughing and Finishing Passes

The Flat End Mill tool path is calculated as a Ball-Nosed End Mill for the roughing pass.

The maximum additional material remaining on the overall 3D contour will not exceed the tool's radius.

Figure 2–14. Roughing and Finishing Passes

1 Roughing contour using Flat End Mill

2 Finishing contour using Ball-Nosed End Mill

3 Extra Material


Helical Plunge (Ramp)

To use Helical Plunge, the Helical Ramp software option must be installed.

The Helical Plunge programming option provides helical plunging as an alternative machining strategy. Helical plunge and straight plunges can be used separately for roughing and finishing phases, or they can be used together for the same operation. For example, you can rough with a helical plunge and finish with a straight plunge.

With Helical Plunging, the tool rotates around the cut and moves down the Z-axis. The cutting tool is continuously cutting deeper and enters and exists the machined part only once.

The Helical Plunge fields are located on the Milling 2 tab on the Program Parameters screen. Set Mill Plunge Type and/or Finish Plunge Type to Helix. Specify the ramp slope and radius percentage.

Helical Plunge Milling Parameter Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 45

Helical Plunge (Inside/Outside) for Mill Frames, Mill Circles and Ellipses . . . . . 2 - 45

Helical Plunge with UltiPockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 45

Helical Plunge with Operator Specified Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 46

Helical Plunge in the Center of a Pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 46

Helical Plunge with Outward Pocketing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 46

Helical Plunge of Mill Frame Inside with No Pecking and Blend Offset . . . . . . . 2 - 46

Helical Plunging of Mill Frame Inside with Pecking and Straight Plunge Finish Pass and Blend Offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 48

Helical Plunge with Lines and Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 50

Helical Plunge with 3-D Part Programming Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 50

• Helical Plunge uses the feedrate programmed by the operator on the mill circle, mill frame, ellipse, or mill contour start screens.

• Pattern blocks can be used with helical plunging. A scaled-up or scaled-down pattern will not affect the diameter of the helix plunge. When using a mirror image pattern, the helical plunge will be in the negative Z direction.

• Helical Plunge for rotary mill frames, mill circles, and mill contours is similar to helical plunging for non-rotary mill frames, mill circles, and mill contours.


Helical Plunge Milling Parameter Fields

On the Program Parameters screen, Milling 2 tab, select Helix in the Mill Plunge Type field.

The Field Name Glossary, on page 7 - 1 contains definitions of all WinMax fields. The fields listed below appear on the Milling 2 (Helical Plunge) screen. Fields displayed on screen may vary according to machine type, configuration, parameter settings, and/or settings in other fields.

Helical Plunge (Inside/Outside) for Mill Frames, Mill Circles and Ellipses

Helical Plunge is similar for milling the inside or outside of mill frames, circles, and ellipses (with or without blend-in moves). The center location of the helical plunge is the same as a straight plunge. The direction of the helical plunge (clockwise, CW, or counter clockwise, CCW) will be determined by the tool spin direction (CW or CCW) and the milling direction (climb or conventional). If Blend Offset is used, the helical plunge will be centered about the plunge point of the Blend Offset.

The helical plunge direction that provides a smooth transition to the tool path will be chosen. Helical plunge is not allowed when Milling Type On is selected.

Helical Plunge with UltiPockets

The Helical Plunge option is used with the UltiPocket option to define the plunging location when inward pocketing. The operator can specify the pocket plunge location using the Operator Specify Pocket Start function, or start the pocket plunge near the center by using the Inward Pocket Plunge Near Center function. See Helical Plunge with UltiPockets, on page 2 - 145 in Conversational Programming.

When both the Operator Specify Pocket Start and the Inward Pocket Plunge Near Center are set to No, the plunge locations are used that would have been used without the Helical Plunge option.

Allow Plunge Outside Pocket Mill Plunge Helix Radius Pocket Plunge Near Center

Finish Plunge Helix Radius Mill Plunge Ramp Slope

Finish Plunge Ramp Slope Mill Plunge Type

Finish Plunge Type Operator Specify Pocket Start

An error message appears if the plunge point specified would violate the programmed part surface.


Helical Plunge with Operator Specified Location

When the operator specifies the plunge point, all of the helix plunge moves will occur at that location, even for the pocket boundary.

Helical Plunge in the Center of a Pocket

When the Inward Pocket Plunge Near Center field value is Yes (Operator Specify Pocket Start value must be No), a plunge point near the center of the pocket will be chosen. Islands near the center will impact upon the plunge point’s location.

Helical Plunge with Outward Pocketing

Helical plunging occurs near the center of the pocket when used with Outward Pocketing, and only one plunge location is needed. The Operator Specify Pocket Start and the Inward Pocket Plunge Near Center fields have no effect on Helical Plunge with Outward Pocketing.

Helical Plunge of Mill Frame Inside with No Pecking and Blend Offset

The tool will helical plunge to the Z Bottom level and then perform the normal blend-in move. The direction of the helical plunge arc will smoothly transition to the blend-in arc. For instance, if the blend-in arc is CCW, the direction of the helical plunge will be CW. The following isometric views are created by setting the Draw Plunge Moves graphics parameter field to Yes.

When machining a part with a lot of webbing (many small pockets separated by walls), it may be desirable to disable helical plunging.

This graphical representation is only for informational purposes and cannot be viewed with WinMax.


The graphics show the finish pass only if a finish tool is specified in the frame block, and do not show individual peck levels.

Figure 2–15. Helical Plunge with No Pecking and Blend Offset (Isometric View)


Helical Plunging of Mill Frame Inside with Pecking and Straight Plunge Finish Pass and Blend Offset

The following example is a Mill Frame Block Type with Inside Milling Type. The finish tool specified and the peck depth is set to 0.6 inches.

First Peck - The tool helical plunges down to the -first peck depth, then mills another full circle to ensure that all material down to the first peck is removed. After the full circle is completed, a 180° blend in arc is performed. The direction of the helical plunge will always be in the opposite direction of the blend-in arc.

Figure 2–16. First Peck (Isometric View)

Second Peck and All Pecks to Finish Peck Depth - The tool will rapid down to the previous peck depth plus the peck clearance plane. The tool then helical plunges down to the next peck depth or the Z Bottom plus the Finish Z. If the tool is at a peck depth, a 360o arc will be machined. The 360o arc will not be machined if it is the last peck depth. Instead, a blend-in arc will be machined. The blend-in arc for the last peck depth will be similar to the one machined for the first peck.

These graphical representations are only for informational purposes and cannot be viewed with WinMax.


Figure 2–17. Second Peck (Isometric View)

Finish Pass - The tool will rapid down to the Z Start and plunge feed down to the Z Bottom. A blend-in move is performed before milling the frame contour.

Figure 2–18. Finish Pass (Isometric View)

When helical plunge is used for roughing passes, a large amount of material is removed around the point of entry. Therefore, using helical plunging for the finish passes is probably not necessary.

If the finish tool is larger than the roughing tool, helical plunges should also be performed for the finish pass. If a post was created by the roughing tool (the Helix plunge radius was greater than 50 percent) the finish tool may be cutting into the post.


Helical Plunge with Lines and Arcs

Helical plunge with lines and arcs occurs at the start of the contour.

The following example shows helical plunging with right cutter compensation of a contour.

Figure 2–19. Helical Plunging with Lines/Arcs (Isometric View)

Helical Plunge with 3-D Part Programming Option

Helical plunging is supported in the 3-D Part Programming option. A helical plunge can be performed when the Mill Plunge Type field is set to Helix.

Only one helical plunge occurs when using a bi-directional tool path. When performing helical plunge using unidirectional tool path, a helical plunge occurs for each cutter pass.

An error message will be displayed if the helical plunge would cut into a part surface. If this error message appears, move the starting location of the contour to an area that will not cause interference.

When programming complex 3-D parts, the operator should review helical plunge placements in graphical form before milling to ensure helical plunges from one block do not interfere with neighboring blocks.

If Mill Plunge Type field is set to Helix, but the helical plunge does not appear on the graphics screen, check the Z Start field on the Mill 3-D block screen. The plunges may not appear if Z Start value is too low.


Mill Thread

The Mill Thread data block mills a part with internal or external threads. Milling can be clockwise or counterclockwise, and occur from top to bottom or bottom to top.

Thread Direction Down

The following diagram shows the Z positions, and the arrows indicate tool movement when the Thread Direction is Down. In this case, the tool moves at rapid feedrate to the Z Plunge Start position, then feeds to the Z Top position. The tool mills down to the Z Bottom position. It then moves at rapid feedrate out of the hole to Z Plunge Start + Z retract clearance height (set in Program Parameters).

Figure 2–20. Tool movement when Thread Direction is down

Thread Direction Up

The following diagram shows the Z positions, and the arrows indicate tool movement when Thread Direction is Up. In this case, the tool moves at rapid feedrate to the Z Plunge Start position, then feeds down to the Z Bottom position, and mills up to the Z Top position. The tool then moves at rapid to Z Plunge Start and retracts to the Z retract clearance height (set in Program Parameters).

Figure 2–21. Tool movement when Thread Direction is up

Z Plunge Start

Z Thread Top

Z Thread Bottom

Z Plunge Start

Z Thread Top

Z Thread Bottom


To access the Mill Thread block:

1. From a New Block screen, select the Milling softkey.

2. Select the More softkey twice.

3. Select the Thread softkey. The Mill Thread block opens.

Thread geometry is set in the Thread tab. Specify the radius, TPI/Pitch, inside or outside threads, start angle, and any taper angle.

Thread location is set in the Location tab. Specify the X and Y centers, the Z plunge start point, thread top and bottom locations, and the threading direction.

Cutting information is set in the Process tab. Specify cutter compensation, blend type, and center start.

When using a single-cutter thread mill, the Taper Angle field appears in the Thread tab. External threads must have a positive taper angle and internal threads must have a negative taper angle:

The Field Name Glossary, on page 7 - 1 contains definitions of all WinMax fields. The fields listed below appear on the Mill Thread screen. Fields displayed on screen may vary according to machine type, configuration, parameter settings, and/or settings in other fields.

-10° Taper with Internal Threads 10°Taper with External Threads


Radial Pecks

The Radial Peck feature can be used when more than one cutting pass is required, such as with harder materials.

Enter an incremental distance from the final cut in the Radial Peck Depth field, and enter the number of passes in the Radial Peck Count field. Milling occurs as follows:

• Orientation Outside—milling begins at (radius) + (Radial Peck Count x Radial Peck Depth) position, and proceeds inward for the number of passes (count) specified, to the final radius cut.

• Orientation Inside—milling begins at (radius) - (Radial Peck Count x Radial Peck Depth) position, and continues outward in the number of passes (count) specified, to the final radius cut.

If Radial Pecking is not desired, set Radial Peck Count to 1 (default).

Blend Type Pitch Start at Center Z Plunge Start

Block Plunge Feed Taper Angle

Cutter Length Radial Peck Count Thread Bottom

Direction Radial Peck Depth Thread Top

Enable Cutter Comp Radius TPI

Mill Feed Speed (RPM) X Center

Orientation Start Angle Y Center

For example:

Radius = 2.0Radial Peck Count = 10Radial Peck Depth = .05Orientation = Inside

Milling begins at 1.5 [2.0 -10x.05)], makes 10 incremental .05 passes to finish at 2.0.

First cut 1.5

Incremental cuts .05

Final Radius 2.0


Mill Stick Lettering

<See also Mill True-Type Lettering, on page 2 - 56.>

The Stick Lettering block supports the HD3 lettering (military text) character set. Use the X and Y Ref Locations to specify the X and Y reference points—start, center, or end:

Specify the text, length, and orientation. For example:

The Field Name Glossary, on page 7 - 1 contains definitions of all WinMax fields. The

Y Reference

Top

Center

Bottom

X Reference

EndStart Center


fields listed below appear on the Mill Stick Lettering screen. Fields displayed on screen may vary according to machine type, configuration, parameter settings, and/or settings in other fields.

Recovery Restart is supported from a specific letter, specified as character number. For example, to restart from the “R” in HURCO, you would specify character 3 as the starting character. Recovery Restart is launched from the Auto mode screen.

Block Peck Depth X Reference

Char Spacing Plunge Feed X Ref Location

Finish SFQ Rough SFQ Y Length

Finish XY Speed (RPM) Y Reference

Finish Z Text Y Ref Location

Mill Feed Tool Z Bottom

Orientation X Length Z Start


Mill True-Type Lettering

The Mill True-Type Lettering block mills True-Type fonts. These True-Type fonts are available in different styles and are block-type letters with closed profiles for milling, which allow cutter compensation - i.e., inside, outside, and pocket milling. Supported characters include the full character sets for most Western European languages.

Specify the text, length, and orientation. For example:

Common Fonts Available with Mill True-Type Lettering

Arial (default)

Arial Black

Comic Sans MS

Courier New

Franklin Gothic Medium

Georgia

Impact

Lucida Console

Lucida Sans Unicode

Marlett

Microsoft Sans Serif

Palatino Linotype

Sylfaen

Tahoma

Times New Roman

Trebuchet MS

Verdana

Webdings

Wingdings


Figure 2–22. Example of True-Type Lettering

The X and Y Ref Locations specify the X and Y reference points—start, center, or end:

The Field Name Glossary, on page 7 - 1 contains definitions of all WinMax fields. The fields listed below appear on the Mill True-Type Lettering screen. Fields displayed on screen may vary according to machine type, configuration, parameter settings, and/or settings in other fields.

Start Center End

X Reference

Y Reference

Bottom

Top

Center


Block Mill Feed Speed (RPM) Y Reference

Enable Blend Moves Orientation Text Y Ref Location

Finish SFQ Overlap Tool Z Bottom

Finish XY Peck Depth X Length Z Start

Finish Z Plunge Feed X Reference

Font Pocket Overlap X Ref Location

Mapping Rough SFQ Y Length


Stick Lettering Along Contour

<See also True-Type Lettering Along Contour, on page 2 - 62.>

With Stick Lettering Along Contour, text is oriented along a programmed contour, which determines the size and orientation. The contour is grouped with the data block and programmed like the contours in a 3D mold or Swept Surface data block.

The opening screen is the lettering parameters screen. The text dimensions and spacing are set in this screen. First, specify how the width of the text is determined, in the Width Method field:

• Use Contour—the text will be distributed evenly along the contour.

• Specify Width—specify the width measurement in the Text Width field (appears when Specify Width is selected).

Text Width—field appears when Specify Width is selected as Width Method. Enter the total width of the text along the contour, or use the Calculate Text Width softkey to automatically calculate the text width based on the contour length.

Figure 2–23. Stick Lettering Along Contour Lettering Parameters screen

Use Edit Along Contour softkey to open the Start segment:

Figure 2–24. Stick Lettering Along Contour Start Segment

The contour start segment includes fields to specify which side of the contour the text is positioned relative to. The text offset specifies distance between the contour and the


reference point of the text.

Select the Next Segment softkey to lay the text out on a line, arc, and/or blend arc. Here is an example with a single arc segment:

Figure 2–25. Stick Lettering Along Contour Arc Segment

Figure 2–26. Example of Stick Lettering Along Contour


A contour can also be created by pasting an existing contour into the program, using Multiple Block Functions on the Program Review screen.


The Field Name Glossary, on page 7 - 1 contains definitions of all WinMax fields. The fields listed below appear on the Stick Lettering Along Contour screen. Fields displayed on screen may vary according to machine type, configuration, parameter settings, and/or settings in other fields.

Block Peck Depth Text Offset XY Length

Char Spacing Plunge Feed Text Height Y Center

Direction Radius Text Width Y End

Finish SFQ Rough SFQ Width Method Y Start

Finish XY Speed (RPM) X Center Z Bottom

Finish Z Sweep Angle X End Z Start

Font Side of Contour Tool X Start

Mill Feed Text XY Angle


True-Type Lettering Along Contour

With True-Type Lettering Along Contour, text (True-Type font) is oriented along a programmed contour, which determines the size and orientation. The contour is grouped with the data block and programmed like the contours in a 3D mold or Swept Surface data block.

True-Type fonts are available in different styles and are block-type letters with closed profiles for milling, which allow cutter compensation - i.e., inside, outside, and pocket milling. Supported characters include the full character sets for most Western European languages.

The font selection dialog box is opened with the Select New Font F3 softkey, when the cursor is in the Text field on the parameters screen.

The lettering parameters are programed on the opening screen. The text dimensions and spacing are set in this screen. First, specify how the width of the text is determined, in the Width Method field:



Text Width—field appears when Specify Width is selected as Width Method. Enter the total width of the text along the contour, or use the Calculate Text Width softkey to automatically calculate the text width based on the contour length.

Here is an example of a True-Type Lettering Along Contour parameters block:

Common Fonts Available with Mill True-Type Lettering

Arial (default)

Arial Black

Comic Sans MS

Courier New


Georgia

Impact

Lucida Console

Lucida Sans Unicode

Marlett


Palatino Linotype

Sylfaen

Tahoma

Times New Roman

Trebuchet MS

Verdana

Webdings

Wingdings


Use the Edit Along Contour softkey to open the Start segment:

The contour start segment includes fields to specify which side of the contour the text is positioned relative to. The text offset specifies distance between the contour and the reference point of the text.

Select the Next Segment softkey to lay the text out on a line, arc, or blend arc:


Figure 2–27. Example of True-Type Lettering Along Contour


The Field Name Glossary, on page 7 - 1 contains definitions of all WinMax fields. The fields listed below appear on the True-Type Lettering Along Contour screen. Fields displayed on screen may vary according to machine type, configuration, parameter settings, and/or settings in other fields.

A contour can also be created by pasting an existing contour into the program, using Multiple Block Functions on the Program Review screen.

Block Mill Feed Sweep Angle XY Angle

Blank Spacing Milling Type Tool XY Length

Char Spacing Overlap Text Y Center

Direction Peck Depth Text Offset Y End

Finish SFQ Plunge Feed Text Height Y Start

Finish XY Pocket Overlap Text Width Z Bottom

Finish Z Pocket Type Width Method Z Start

Font Radius X Center

Font Side of Contour Rough SFQ X End

Mapping Speed (RPM) X Start


HD3 Serial Number Stick Lettering

HD3 Serial Number Lettering mills a sequence of unique serial numbers that increment each time the block is run. The characters are HD3-style (non-true type) and can be alphabetic A-Z, numeric 0-9, and special characters @#!$^&*()-[]_=+’:;%?/<>,.\. Alpha characters are all upper case. The last character in the serial number must be numeric and is incremented by a specified amount.

• Users can manually provide serial number data, which includes a starting sequence, such as 0001 or ABC001, and an increment which advances the serial number for each subsequent run.

• Data can originate from a file in which the serial numbers are listed. Each time the block is run, the next serial number is extracted from the file. The format of this file must be one serial number per line, each line must end in a carriage return, line feed sequence, or Return key.

To create an HD3 Serial Number Lettering block from the New Block Screen:

1. Select the Milling softkey.

2. Select the More softkey.

3. Select the Lettering softkey.

4. Select the Serial Number Stick Lettering softkey.

The HD3 Serial Number Lettering screen uses three tabs: Text, Orientation, and Format.

Text tab

The text of the serial number is set up in the Text tab:

The Character Width includes the character left-justified, plus some spacing between it and the next character to be milled. Spacing between the characters is equal to the tool's diameter. Because cutter compensation is not used in this routine and letter contouring


follows the center of the tool, character spacing can be adjusted by adjusting the tool diameter in Tool Setup.

To populate serial numbers from a source file, specify From File in the Data Origin field. The File field and Locate... button appear. The file must be located on the hard drive or an accessible network drive, or can be on a floppy disk or USB memory device that has been loaded onto the control. To select the file:

1. Select the Locate... button to browse for the file.

2. Navigate to the location of the file in the dialog box that opens.

3. Select the file.

4. Select the Open button on the dialog box. The file and path appear in the File field.

Orientation tab

The Orientation fields specify the orientation of the X and Y reference points.

Figure 2–28. Serial Number Orientation tab

Figure 2–29. X Reference and Y Reference locations

Start Center End

X Reference

Y Reference

Bottom

Top

Center


Format tab

The Format fields indicate whether the serial number should have a minimum length and what that length should be.

Figure 2–30. Serial Number Format tab

Leading Symbol Example:

Starting Sequence 001

Increment 1

Assure Minimum Length Yes

Minimum Length 5

Leading Symbol A

First Serial Number will be AA001 NOTE: A second “A” is added to starting sequence of 001 to assure the minimum length of 5.

Second Serial Number will be AA002

999th Serial Number will be AA999

1000th Serial Number will be A1000 NOTE: The second “A” is no longer needed to assure minimum length. If serial number “AA1000” is required, the Starting Sequence would be AA001 and Assure Minimum Length would be set to No.

Format tab only assures a minimum number of characters. The serial number will continue to increment and expand with continuous running of the block.


History tab

The History tab displays the last used and next serial numbers and contains the Reset Numbering button:

Figure 2–31. Serial Number History tab

The Last Used and Next Serial Numbers are saved in the part program after each cycle so milling can restart from where it was stopped when the part program was closed.

The Field Name Glossary, on page 7 - 1 contains definitions of all WinMax fields. The fields listed below appear on the Serial Number Stick Lettering screen. Fields displayed on screen may vary according to machine type, configuration, parameter settings, and/or settings in other fields.

Assure Minimum Length

Last Used Serial Number

Plunge Feed X Ref Location

Block Leading Symbol Reset Numbering Y Reference

Character Height Mill Feed Speed (RPM) Y Ref Location

Character Width Minimum Length Starting Sequence Z Bottom

Data Origin Next Serial Number Tool Z Start

Increment Peck Depth X Reference


Mill HD3 Lettering

Mill HD3 Lettering supports programs created in the legacy Ultimax Classic mode.

Use the X and Y Ref Locations to specify the X and Y reference points—start, center, or end:

Figure 2–32. X Reference and Y Reference locations

Specify the character dimensions in Character Height and Character Width, and the text to be milled in the Text field.

Cutter Compensation is not available for HD3 Lettering. Milling is performed using the centerline of the tool. Refer to Cutter Compensation (preliminary), on page 2 - 9.

The Field Name Glossary, on page 7 - 1 contains definitions of all WinMax fields. The fields listed below appear on the HD3 Lettering screen. Fields displayed on screen may vary according to machine type, configuration, parameter settings, and/or settings in other fields.

Block Speed (RPM) Y Ref Location

Character Height Text Z Bottom

Character Width Tool Z Start

Mill Feed X Reference

Peck Depth X Ref Location

Plunge Feed Y Reference

Start Center End

X Reference

Y Reference

Bottom

Top

Center


Insert Pockets

Cutter insert manufacturers use the Insert Pockets milling routines to mill pockets in triangular, diamond, and hexagon shapes. These routines are sold as the Insert Pockets option and can be defined in one program data block.

To access the Insert Pockets features, select the Milling softkey in a New Block screen, then Select the More softkey. If the option is installed the next screen will have a Special softkey. Select that softkey to display the following screen:

Choose Triangle, Diamond 1 Face, Diamond 2 Faces, or Hexagon milling.

Mill Triangle, on page 2 - 71—mills a triangle shape with three equal 60° angles with one open face.

Mill Diamond, on page 2 - 71—mills a four-sided diamond shape with opposite angles equal with one or two open faces.

Mill Hexagon, on page 2 - 72—mills a six-sided hexagon shape with every other angle equal.

For all shapes, the cutting operation is set in the Milling Type field:

• Inside - cuts just the non-open faces of the pocket, including the relief cuts.

• Inside 2 Passes - cuts the same as Inside, except this selection uses a roughing pass and a finishing pass. During roughing, material is left for the finish pass.

• Pocket Outside In - cuts along the faces of the insert, including the relief cuts and then steps inward and cleans out the entire insert by executing smaller versions of the shape until the center point is reached.

• Pocket 2 Passes Outside In - cuts in the same manner as Pocket Outside In, except this selection uses a roughing and a finishing pass.


• Pocket Inside Out - plunges tool at X-Y center of the insert and cuts outward, executing larger versions of the shape until the faces and relief cuts are milled.

• Pocket 2 Passes Inside Out - cuts the same as Pocket Inside Out, except this selection uses a roughing and a finishing pass.

Mill Triangle

The triangle pocket shape has three equal 60° angles with one open face as shown below. A relief cut can be programmed in the corner at point 1.

Figure 2–33. Triangle Programming Diagram

Mill Diamond

The diamond pocket shapes have four sides with opposite angles equal.

The Diamond 1 Face has one open face and the option of a right, center, or left relief cut in the corners at point 1 and point 2 as shown below:

Figure 2–34. Diamond 1 Face Diagram

Open Face Orientation = 0

Relief Corner

Radius Centerpoint

3

2

1

Open Face

Orientation =0

Relief CornersAngle

Radius

1

Centerpoint 2

3

4


The Diamond 2 Faces pocket has two open faces and the option of a right, center, or left relief cut in the corner at point 1 as shown below:

Figure 2–35. Diamond 2 Faces Diagram

Mill Hexagon

This pocket shape has six sides and every other angle equal. In the diagram below, the shape has two open faces and the option of a relief cut in the corners at point 1, point 2, and point 3, and the option of a face relief distance between points 0 and 1 and points 3 and 4.

Figure 2–36. Hexagon Programming Diagram

The Field Name Glossary, on page 7 - 1 contains definitions of all WinMax fields. The fields listed below appear on the Insert Pockets screen. Fields displayed on screen may

P-0 Point 0

P-1 Point 1

P-2 Point 2

P-3 Point 3

P-4 Point 4

P-5 Point 5

R-1 Relief 1

R-2 Relief 2

R-3 Relief 3

Open FaceOpen Face

Orientation = 0

ReliefCorners

Angle

Radius

Centerpoint

1

2

3

4

Orientation=0

Radius

ShapeAngleX and Y

Centerpoint

Tool path

Relief Distance


vary according to machine type, configuration, parameter settings, and/or settings in other fields.

Block Radius Text

Mill Feed Relief 1 Tool

Milling Type Relief 2 X Center

Orientation Relief 3 Y Center

Peck Depth Shape Angle Z Bottom

Plunge Feed Speed (RPM) Z Start


Swept Surface

The Swept Surface option in WinMax allows you to program draft angles for pocket or island walls with greater flexibility, including Spiral, Constant Z level, and Cusp Height cutting strategies.

Swept Surface builds on the WinMax 3D Mold option. The basic elements in Swept Surface programming are:

• Draw Profile Contour—build the XZ or YZ shape of the part

• Draw Along Contour—build the shape of the contour

• Swept Surface—provide details of how to cut the part

To begin a new Swept Surface program block, perform the following steps:



3. Select the Swept Surface softkey.

4. Use the drop-down list to select the type of contour in the Type field: Draw Profile, Draw Along, or Swept Surface.

5. To program Draw Profile Contours or Draw Along Contours, place the cursor in the Type field, and select the Edit Along Contour or the Edit Profile Contour softkey.

Follow this link to the Hurco website to view a Swept Surface programming video demonstration:

Video Demonstrations at www.hurco.comScroll to the bottom of the page and select the video to download. Internet connection is required.

A Swept Surface program block must contain all three types of contours: Draw Profile, Draw Along, and Swept Surface.



Swept Surface Parameters

Swept Surface parameters establish the machining characteristics.

The Field Name Glossary, on page 7 - 1 contains definitions of all WinMax fields. The fields listed below appear on the Swept Surface parameter screen. Fields displayed on screen may vary according to machine type, configuration, parameter settings, and/or settings in other fields.

Swept Surface Contours

Program the part surfaces as a 2D profile in either the XY or XZ plane.

The Start Segment number is always 0. Use segments to program lines and arcs which create a contour. Repeat the 2D profile along a straight line (translate) or repeat it around a centerline (revolve) to produce the final 3D shape. The Contour End block marks the end of the programmed contour.

When creating/editing a contour segment, select the Swept Surface Parameters softkey to access the parameters screen. When on the parameters screen, the Edit Profile Contour and Edit Along Contour softkeys appear. Use these softkeys to switch between the parameter and contour screens; softkeys do not appear if the cursor is in the Block or Segment fields.

Draw Profile Contour

Set the Type field to Draw Profile(s) and select the Edit Profile Contour softkey. Seg-ment types are:

• Start Segment

• Line Segment

Bidirectional Individual Profiles

Pocket Finish SFQ

Rough SFQ Type of Corners

Block Mill Feed Pocket First Speed (RPM) Use Cusp Height

Cusp Height Milling Type Pocket Overlap Start Angle Z Roughing

Cut Direction Min Cusp Overlap (%)

Pocket Rough SFQ

Step Size Z Start

End Angle Min Z Pocket Type Stock Allowance Y End

Finish SFQ Overlap Profile Number Step Connect Type

Finish XY Peck Depth Roll End Point Tool

Finish Z Plunge Feed Roll Start Point Type

The Draw Profile Contour screen is displayed as Swept Surface (Profile Contour).


• Arc Segment

• Blend Arc Segment

Draw Along Contour

Set the Type field to Draw Along and select the Edit Along Contour softkey. Segment types are:

• Start Segment

• Line Segment

• Arc Segment

• Blend Arc Segment

The Surface Side field (present in Segment 0) specifies on which side of the Along contour the profile is cut:

• When set to Right, the profile is cut to the right of the contour forming a surface to the right of the along contour.

• When set to Left, the profile is cut to left of the contour creating a surface to the left of the along contour.

Start Segment

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Swept Surface Contour Start segment fields:

Continue programming the contour by using the Page Down key or by selecting the Next Segment softkey.

Line, Arc, and Blend Arc softkey choices appear.

A contour can also be created by pasting an existing contour, circle, frame, slot, or polygon into the program, using Multiple Block Functions on the Program Review screen.

The Draw Along Contour screen is displayed as Swept Surface (Along Contour).

A contour can also be created by pasting an existing contour, circle, frame, slot, or polygon block into the program, using Multiple Block Functions on the Program Review screen.

Block

Segment

Surface Side

X Start

Y Start

Z Start


Line Segment

Use the Line Segment block to create the geometry for a line.

Some Line fields are automatically calculated with the Auto-Calc feature. See Automatic Calculations, on page 2 - 7 for more information. Use the Store Calculated Value softkey to retain a calculated value.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Swept Surface Line segment fields:


Arc Segment

Some Arc fields are automatically calculated with the Auto-Calc feature. See Automatic Calculations, on page 2 - 7 for more information. Use the Store Calculated Value softkey to retain a calculated value.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Swept Surface Arc segment fields:


A contour can also be created by pasting an existing contour into the program, using Multiple Block Functions on the Program Review screen. This allows you to use the same segments for a Mill Contour Block and a 3D Mold Block without entering each segment twice.

• To copy a block, select the contour that you wish to copy on the Program Review Screen and use the MULTIPLE BLOCK FUNCTIONS softkey to access the COPY softkey.

• To paste a block, select the 3D Mold Block that you wish to paste the contour into on the Program Review screen and use the MULTIPLE BLOCK FUNCTIONS softkey to access the PASTE softkey.

Block XY Length Z End

Segment XZ Angle Z Start

X End XZ Length

X Start Y End

XY Angle Y Start

Block X Center Y Start

Direction X End Z Center

Radius X Start Z End

Segment Y Center Z Start

Sweep Angle Y End


Blend Arc Segment



Some Blend Arc fields are automatically calculated with the Auto-Calc feature. See Automatic Calculations, on page 2 - 7 for more information. Use the Store Calculated Value softkey to retain a calculated value.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Swept Surface Blend Arc segment fields:


Block X End Z Center

Direction X Start Z End

Radius Y Center Z Start

Segment Y End

X Center Y Start


Mill Slot

The Mill Slot block creates a line or arc shape of any width. The slot is defined by a line or an arc segment and a width. The ends of the slot can be round or square.

Milling begins at the center of the bottom wall of the slot, assuming the shape is parallel to the X axis (Angle field is set to zero). The same relative “bottom” wall is maintained when the shape is rotated, so when the Angle field is nonzero, milling begins on the side that would be parallel with the X-axis if the Angle was zero:

Figure 2–37. Line Slot rotated 90°

For Rotary Slot see Rotary Slot - Universal, on page 5 - 19 in the Rotary chapter.

Line Slot Arc Slot

Top

Start

Bottom

Start Point

XY

Width

XY End

Width

XY Start

Bottom

Start PointXY End

Start Point

XY End

XY Start


Mill Slot Programming



3. Select the Slot softkey. The Mill Slot screen contains three tabs: Start, Geometry, and Caps.

Start tab

Define the slot shape, width, and common starting information on the Start tab:

Geometry tab

The fields that appear on the Geometry tab depend on the slot shape selected in the Start tab (line or arc). Define the slot geometry:

To use pocketing with Mill Slot, the UltiPockets option must be installed. See UltiPockets, on page 2 - 141 for more information.

Some fields may be automatically calculated when sufficient data has been entered. The CAL notation appears before the field.


Caps tab

The slot ends are defined on the Caps tab:

The Field Name Glossary, on page 7 - 1 contains definitions of all WinMax fields. The fields listed below appear on the Mill Slot screen. Fields displayed on screen may vary according to machine type, configuration, parameter settings, and/or settings in other fields.

If a Corner Radius exceeds 1/2 of the slot width, WinMax will find the intersection point to close the contour.

Block Peck Depth Start Cap XY Angle

Corner Radius Plunge Feed Sweep Angle XY Length

Direction Pocket Overlap Tool Y Center

End Cap Pocket Type Width Y End

Mill Feed Radius X Center Y Start

Milling Type Shape X End Z Bottom

Overlap Speed (RPM) X Start Z Start


Start Cap and End Cap specify the type of ends the slot uses:

• Line closes the slot with a straight line, passing through the programmed endpoint:

• Append Arc appends an arc at the ends of the slot length, i.e., center of semi-circle is programmed endpoint:

• Include Arc includes the arc in the slot length, i.e., outermost edge of semi-circle is programmed endpoint:


Mill Slot Sample Program

NOTE: values are metric

DB Data Block Field Name Field Value

1 Mill Slot

Start tab

Shape Line

Width 30.000

X Start 20.000

Y Start 20.000

Z Start 1.000

Z Bottom -10.000

Geometry tab

X End 100.000

Y End 20.000

XY Length [CAL] 80.000

XY Angle [CAL] 0.000

Caps tab

Start Cap Line

Corner Radius 0.000

End Cap Append Arc

Corner Radius n/a

Roughing tabMilling Type Pocket Boundary

Pocket Type Outward


Mill Polygon

The Mill Polygon data block mills a multi-sided contour with equal-length sides. The bottom of the polygon is parallel to the X axis at 0° orientation (three o’clock position):

Milling begins on the side of the polygon that is parallel to X at 0° prior to rotation. Rotation is achieved with the Orientation Angle field.

To access the Mill Polygon block:



3. Select the Polygon softkey. The Mill Polygon block opens:

Figure 2–38. Mill Polygon screen

For Rotary Polygon information, see Rotary Polygon - Universal, on page 5 - 19 in the Rotary chapter.

To use pocketing with Mill Polygon, the UltiPockets option must be installed. See UltiPockets, on page 2 - 141 for more information.

X

Y


The Sizing Method determines how the polygon size is established:

• Outer Diameter—the diameter of a circle that encompasses the outside of the polygon, touching it at the corners:

• Inner Diameter—the diameter of a circle contained within the polygon, touching at the center of each edge:

• Side Length—the length of one side of the polygon:

The Orientation Angle field rotates the part. This field specifies an angle relative to the X axis that determines where the starting side occurs. An orientation of 0° indicates that the starting side is at the bottom of the polygon, parallel to the X axis. For example:

The Field Name Glossary, on page 7 - 1 contains definitions of all WinMax fields. The fields listed below appear on the Mill Polygon screen. Fields displayed on screen may vary according to machine type, configuration, parameter settings, and/or settings in other

0° Angle 45° Angle

Starting Side Starting Side


fields.

Block Plunge Feed X Center

Corner Radius Pocket Overlap Y Center

Direction Pocket Type Z Bottom

Mill Feed Radius Z Start

Milling Type Side Length

Number Of Sides Sizing Diameter

Orientation Angle Sizing Method

Overlap Speed (RPM)

Peck Depth Tool

A Mill Polygon data block will convert to a Mill Contour data block if saved as an HD3 program.

Conversational Programming 704-0116-501 Holes Operations 2-87

HOLES OPERATIONS

A Holes block consists of the operation (drill, tap, bore, ream, or back spotface) and the pattern or location (bolt circle or locations).

These topics explain the hole operations:

Drill Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 90

Drill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 91

Center Drill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 91

Counterbore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 91

Spotface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 91

Countersink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 91

Gun Drill. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 92

Custom Drill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 94

Tap Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 99

Bore and Ream Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 100

Bore. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 101

Ream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 101

Bore Rapid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 101

Bore Orient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 102

Ream Rapid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 102

Back Spotface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 103

These topics explain the pattern or location of the hole operation:

Bolt Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 104

Locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 105

Bolt Circle to Holes Locations or Pattern Locations Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 106

Holes to Pattern Locations Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 107

Holes End Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 107

2 - 88 Holes Operations 704-0116-501 Conversational Programming

Drill Operations

Select the Drill Operations softkey on the New Hole Operation screen to select the type of drilling operation. The appropriate screen appears with fields describing the operation. The drill operations are:

Drill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 91

Center Drill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 91

Counterbore. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 91

Spotface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 91

Countersink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 91

Gun Drill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 92

Custom Drill. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 94

The diagram below shows the relationships of the field names to positions of the tool to the work piece:

Figure 2–39. Reference Points Relative to Drill Operations

Be aware of the drill bits' characteristics. The system does not keep track of the type and length of flutes on the bits or the shapes of drills with pilots or other multiple-diameter drills.

This is the machine motion in a basic drilling operation:

1. The table moves at the rapid traverse rate to the programmed X and Y dimensions.

2. The Z axis moves at the rapid traverse rate to the programmed retract clearance.

3. When these coordinates are reached, the Z axis moves at the rapid traverse rate to Z Start.

4. Then the Z axis moves at the programmed plunge feed rate until reaching the Z Bottom dimension.

See Bore and Ream Operations, on page 2 - 100 for information about bore and ream.

1 Head

2 Part

3 Table

4 Z Start Plane

5 Rapid Traverse

6 Retract Clearance Plane

7 Plunge Feed

8 Z Bottom


5. The Z axis dwells the time specified and rapid traverses to the retract clearance.

The rapid traverse rate, retract clearance, and drill dwell are selected in Program Parameters or Change Parameters.

When all values are programmed, the Bolt Circle and Locations softkeys are available. See Bolt Circle, on page 2 - 104 and Locations, on page 2 - 105 for more information.

Drill

Use a drill to create holes that may be complete or may be used as the starting points for additional drilling operations.

See Drill Fields, on page 2 - 98 for field definitions.

Center Drill

Select Center Drill when the work piece is very rigid to create a guide hole for the drilling tool that will be used to complete the hole. Center drilling helps keep holes in their proper locations and prevent runout.

Center drills are special tools with short flutes, but a standard drilling tool may be used to create these starting holes.


Counterbore

Use Counterbore to enlarge the end of a previously drilled hole. This operation creates an enlarged area at the end of the hole to accommodate a bolt, cap screw, or pin. These square-shoulder fasteners can then be inserted flush with the top of the part or slightly below the surface of the material.

To avoid unneeded tool changes, use Counterbore before drilling the hole.


Spotface

Spotface smooths and squares the surface around a previously drilled hole to provide a seat for a bolt head, a nut, or the shoulders on mating members. The spotfacing operation is a shallow counterboring operation. Spotfacing is often used when the surface of the part is uneven.

To avoid unnecessary tool changes, Spotface can be used before drilling the hole.


Countersink


Countersink enlarges the top end of a hole to a cone shape to accommodate the head of a flat or oval headed machine screw. The hole is enlarged so that when the screw is inserted, the screw head will be flush with or slightly below the top of the work piece surface:


Gun Drill

Select the Gun Drill feature when using a very long tool and drilling deep holes, as if drilling out the center of a gun barrel. A long, rotating tool may whip off center when approaching the cutting surface, so a drilling cycle that controls the approach to the work piece and corrects positioning of the tool is required.

The Gun Drill selection positions the tool without rotating the spindle. This allows the tip of the tool to position precisely in a pre-drilled starting hole, as shown in the diagram below:

Figure 2–40. Gun Drilling

To use the Gun Drill features, perform these tasks:

• Describe the gun drill tool during Tool Setup.

• Create a starting hole for the drill as the first step in part programming.

• Create a Gun Drill data block in the part program.

1 Work Piece

2 Planned Path

3 Pre-drilled starting hole

4 Long tool moves into position with the spindle off to avoid whipping


Each Gun Drill data block must contain at least two operations: one describing the starting hole and one for the gun drill hole.

To create a Gun Drill data block, begin on a New data block screen and follow these general steps:

1. Press the Drill Operations softkey.

2. Create the first operation of the data block by describing the starting hole portion of the data block. Select either the Drill softkey or the Center Drill softkey. Type in the description of the starting hole into the fields displayed on the screen.

3. When all of the starting hole data have been entered, begin the second operation in this data block.

4. Press the Drill Operations softkey and then the Gun Drill softkey.

The following illustration shows the Gun Drill program fields as they relate to a part and the drilling tool:


1 Work Piece

2 Move at rapid traverse down to Z top

3 Z Top

4 Z Top Feed—feedrate between Z top and Z Start

5 Z Start—spindle begins to rotate at Speed (RPM)

6 Z Bottom


Custom Drill

The Custom Drill feature can be used to adjust the feedrate and speed for each step in the drill cycle: entry into hole, break out through bottom of material, bottom, re-entry into hole from bottom, out move at top of hole, and the move to retract clearance plane. Custom Drill is typically used for long hole drill cycles but can be used to customize any drill cycle.


Tool Tab

The Custom Drill screen is organized into tabs where the feed, speed, and other parameters are entered for each step of the drill cycle. The first tab is the Tool tab:

Figure 2–41. Custom Drill Tool tab

A list of all hole operations are displayed on the Tool tab to show the relation of the Custom Drill cycle with other operations in the block. The tool is specified on this screen.


Entry Tab

The Entry step establishes the speed and feed for the approach move starting at Z Start and ending at Z Top. The image shows the move from Z Start to Z Top:

Figure 2–42. Custom Drill Entry tab

Break Out Tab

The Break Out tab allows the user to set a feed and speed for the drill operation that differs from the feed and speed used for the move breaking through the bottom of the material (typically to avoid whipping). This step is optional and can be skipped by setting the Enable field to No. When Enable is No, the feed and speed from the Bottom tab are used for the move from Z Top to Z Bottom, and the pecking parameters are set on the Bottom tab.

The image shows the plunge move from Z Top to Z Break Out, if enabled:

Figure 2–43. Custom Drill Break Out tab


Bottom Tab

The final move through the hole from Z Break Out to Z Bottom is set in the Bottom tab. If the previous Break Out step is not enabled, then the feed and speed set in this step are used for the entire move from Z Top to Z Bottom.

The image shows the motion for the plunge move from Z Break Out to Z Bottom:

Figure 2–44. Custom Drill Bottom tab

Re-entry Tab

The Re-entry step allows the user to set a speed and feed for the retract move from Z Bottom to a Z position back inside the hole (Z Re-entry). This step is optional and can be skipped by setting the Enable field to No. When Enable is No, the move occurs from Z Bottom to the next enabled step (Out or Retract). If there are no other enabled steps, the spindle moves at rapid out of the hole to the Z start location.

The image shows the move from Z Bottom to Z Re-entry, if enabled:

Figure 2–45. Custom Drill Re-entry tab


Out Tab

The Out step allows the user to set the speed and feedrate for the retract move from Z Re-entry to Z Out (the Z end position of the retract move from Z Re-entry). This step is optional and can be skipped by setting the Enable field to No. When Enable is No, the move occurs from the last enabled step (Bottom or Re-entry) to the Retract step, if it is enabled. If the Retract step is not enabled, the spindle moves at rapid from the last enable step (Bottom or Re-entry) out of the hole to the Z start location.

The image shows the move from Z Re-entry to Z Out, if enabled:

Figure 2–46. Custom Drill Out tab


Retract Tab

The Retract step allows the user to set the feed and speed for the move from Z Out to Z Retract. This step is optional and can be skipped by setting the Enable field to No. When Enable is No, the tool moves at rapid feedrate from the last enabled step (Bottom, Re-entry, or Out) to the Z Start position.

From Z Retract, the tool moves at rapid feedrate to the retract clearance plane; therefore, Z Retract should be less than the retract clearance plane. Z Retract can be greater than, less than, or equal to Z Start.

The image shows the retract move from Z Out to Z Retract:

Figure 2–47. Custom Drill Retract tab

Drill Fields

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Drill Operations fields:

Block Peck Retract Feed Tool Z Start

Enable Peck Type Z Bottom Z Top

Feed Plunge Feed Z Break Out Z Top Feed

Operation Rapid Peck Retract Z Out Z Top RPM

Peck Depth Speed (RPM) Z Re-entry

Pecking Retract Clearance

Spindle Stop Z Retract


Tap Operations

To program a new Tap operation:

1. Display the Input screen and select the Part Programming softkey.


3. Select the Holes softkey. The Hole Operation screen opens.

4. Select the Tap Operations softkey.

5. Select the Tap or Rigid Tap softkey.

• Tap - programs a standard tapping sequence.

• Rigid Tap - programs a tapping sequence in which the same hole is tapped repeatedly with precision.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tap Operations fields:

Block Tool

Dwell Time TPI

Operation Z Bottom

Pitch Z Start

Plunge Feed

Speed (RPM)


Bore and Ream Operations

The bore and ream operation types are:

Bore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 101

Ream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 101

Bore Rapid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 101

Bore Orient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 102

Ream Rapid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 102

Use a bore when a straight and accurately round hole is needed. A boring bar usually has one or, at the most, two blades projecting out from the shank. The blades are adjustable on many types of boring bars.

Figure 2–48. Two-Bladed Boring Bar with Adjustment Dial

Use a ream to size a previously drilled hole. A reaming tool has multiple flutes that run vertically along the shank of the tool. During reaming, the cutter follows the angle of the existing hole and cannot be used to straighten the angle of the hole.

Figure 2–49. Reaming Tool

To program a new Bore or Ream operation:




4. Select the Bore and Ream Operations Softkey softkey

5. Select the Bore or Ream operation.

1 Shank

2 Blade depth adjustment dial

3 Replaceable cutter inserts


Bore

Use a bore when a straight and accurately round hole is needed. A boring bar is a tool with typically one or two blades projecting out from the shank. The blades on many boring bars can be adjusted to increase or decrease the size of the hole. The illustration below shows a two-bladed boring bar.

Insert the boring tool into the spindle with the cutting face in line with the tool holder’s orientation hole, opposite the spindle key. WinMax uses this oriented spindle key angle to determine the bore orient retract direction.

Figure 2–50. Two-bladed Boring Bar with Adjustment Dial

Ream

Use the Ream feature to size a previously drilled hole. Reaming clears burrs and other particles left from a drilling or boring operation. During reaming, the cutter follows the angle of the existing hole and cannot be used to straighten the angle of the hole.

A reaming tool has multiple flutes that run vertically along the shank of the tool as shown in the following illustration:

Figure 2–51. Reaming Tool

Bore Rapid

Use Bore Rapid when the tool should retract at the Rapid Traverse feedrate programmed

1 Boring Bar

2 Shank

3 Blad depth adjustment dial

4 Replaceable blades

Pecks are not allowed with the reaming feature.


in General Parameters or Change Parameters.

Bore Orient

Use Bore Orient to orient the bore at Z Bottom and move the boring bar. The cutting edge of the boring bar moves away from the surface of the bored hole so that during the next step the cutting edge will not scrape the walls of the hole. The distance the boring bar moves is set in the Bore Orient Retract field on the Holes Parameters screen.

Insert the boring tool into the spindle with the cutting face in line with the tool holder’s orientation hole, opposite the spindle key. WinMax uses this oriented spindle key angle to determine the bore orient retract direction.

Ream Rapid

Use Ream Rapid when the tool should retract at Rapid Traverse feedrate programmed in General Parameters or Change Parameters.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Bore and Ream Operations fields:

Block Z Bottom

Operation Z Start

Plunge Feed

Speed (RPM)

Tool


Back Spotface

Use the Back Spotface function to cut out the underside of holes that must be cut through the workpiece.

To program a new Back Spotface operation:




4. Select the Back Spotface softkey.

This motion sequence occurs with Back Spotface:

1. Rapid to Z Start minus cutter offset and set the spindle speed to a plunge speed.

2. Move to Z Plunge minus cutter offset at a closing feedrate to close the cutter.

3. Rapid to Z Bottom minus cutter offset.

4. Dwell for a specified reverse dwell amount, reverse the spindle direction and ramp to cutting speed to open the cutter.

5. Move up to Z Depth minus cutter offset at a cutting feedrate.

6. Dwell for the drill dwell time (from program parameters).

7. Rapid down a Z Clearance amount.

8. Dwell for the Reverse Dwell time and reverse the spindle direction to plunge speed to close the cutter.

9. Move to Z Retract minus cutter offset at a closing feedrate to insure the cutter is closed.

10.Rapid out of the hole.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Back Spotface fields:

Block Speed (RPM) Z Retract

Closing Feed Tool Z Start

Operation Z Bottom

Plunge Feed Z Clearance

Plunge Speed Z Depth

Reverse Dwell Z Plunge


Bolt Circle

For each Holes block, you must include a Bolt Circle, Locations, or Rotary Locations operation. The Bolt Circle, Locations, or Rotary Locations softkeys are not available for the first operation in a Holes block because they require prior operations to identify the type of operation, the tool, reference points, and machining information.

A Bolt Circle operation executes a series of equally spaced holes in a common circle. This operation allows skipping holes in the bolt circle.

• All Locations programmed in a block containing a Bolt Circle are executed in addition to the Bolt Circle pattern.

• All operations programmed in a data block are performed at all locations specified in that block.

To program a new Bolt Circle operation:




4. Select and program the hole operation(s).

5. Place cursor in the Operation field and select Next Operation softkey.

6. Select the Bolt Circle softkey.

Enter the number of holes, the radius, and the X and Y center coordinates to establish the bolt circle pattern. Use the Skip List field to specify positions that should be skipped. For example, in the diagram below there are 6 holes in the pattern. If you do not want to drill holes for positions 2 and 5, enter 2 and 5 in the Skip List field

Figure 2–52. Bolt Circle Pattern

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Bolt Circle fields:

A Start Angle

B X Center, Y Center

C radius


Locations

For each Holes block, you must include a Bolt Circle, Locations, or Rotary Locations operation. The Bolt Circle, Locations, or Rotary Locations softkeys are not available for the first operation in a Holes block because they require prior operations to identify the type of operation, the tool, reference points, and machining information.

• All Locations programmed in a block containing a Bolt Circle are executed in addition to the Bolt Circle pattern.

• All operations programmed in a data block are performed at all locations specified in that block.

To program a new Locations operation:




4. Select and program the hole operation(s).

5. Place cursor in the Operation field and select Next Operation softkey.

6. Select the Locations softkey.

Specify the X and Y hole locations. Up to 10 locations can be displayed on the screen. The Page Up/Page Down softkeys appear when there are more than 10 locations programmed. With the cursor in a Location X or Y field, the Add Location and Insert Location Before softkeys appear. Select one of these softkeys to either add or insert fields in the list for entering data. The Delete Location softkey appears when at least one location is in the list.

Move to the next Block or the next Operation by placing the cursor in the desired field and selecting the appropriate softkey (Next Block, Next Hole Operation, etc.).

Block Start Angle

Operation X Center

Number of Holes Y Center

Radius

Skip List

See Bolt Circle to Holes Locations or Pattern Locations Conversion, on page 2 - 106 to convert the Bolt Circle to a Holes Locations or Pattern Locations block.

See Holes to Pattern Locations Conversion, on page 2 - 107 to convert the Locations block to a Pattern Locations block.


Bolt Circle to Holes Locations or Pattern Locations Conversion

A Bolt Circle data block can be copied or converted to either a Holes Locations or Pattern Locations block. Place the cursor in a Bolt Circle field and the Copy and Convert softkeys appear:

Figure 2–53. Bolt Circle Hole or Pattern Locations Copy and Convert softkeys

Use the following softkey commands:

• Copy to Hole Locations—a Holes Locations block is created with the Bolt Circle coordinates, and is inserted before the Bolt Circle operation in the program. The Bolt Circle operation is maintained in the program. A Holes End block is inserted after the Hole Locations block.

• Convert to Hole Locations—a Holes Locations block is created with the Bolt Circle coordinates, and replaces the Bolt Circle operation in the program. The Bolt Circle operation is removed from the program. A Holes End block is inserted after the Hole Locations block.

• Copy to Pattern Locations—a Pattern Locations block is created with the Bolt Circle coordinates, and is inserted before the Holes block in the program. The Bolt Circle operation is maintained in the program. A Pattern End block is inserted after the Holes block.

• Convert to Pattern Locations—a Pattern Locations block is created with the Bolt Circle coordinates. The Bolt Circle operation is removed from the program, and a Holes Location block with 0.0 coordinates is inserted for a reference point. A Pattern End block is also inserted after the Holes block.

Copy or convert toHole Locations block

Copy or convert toPattern Locations block


Holes to Pattern Locations Conversion

A Holes Locations data block can be copied or converted to a Pattern Locations block. Place the cursor in a field and the Copy and Convert softkeys appear:

Figure 2–54. Holes to Pattern Locations softkeys

Use the following softkey commands:

• Copy to Pattern Locations—a Pattern Locations block is created with the Holes locations, and is inserted before the Holes block in the program. The Holes operation is maintained in the program. A Pattern End block is inserted after the Holes block.

• Convert to Pattern Locations—a Pattern Locations block is created with the Holes locations. The Holes Locations block remains in the program with 0.0 coordinates as a reference point. A Pattern End block is inserted after the Holes block.

Holes End Block

A Holes End block is automatically inserted at the end of each Holes data block.

Conversational Programming 704-0116-501 Patterns Operations 2-107

PATTERNS OPERATIONS

Patterns Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 110

Loop Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 111

Loop Linear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 112

Loop Angular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 113

Loop Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 114

Pattern Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 115

Scale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 116

Mirror Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 117

Pattern End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 117

2 - 108 Patterns Operations 704-0116-501 Conversational Programming

Patterns Overview

Pattern operations repeat or modify a sequence of data blocks. This may save programming time by duplicating part geometry to complete a part program or create multiple parts from one program.

Pattern Nesting

Patterns may only be nested 10 levels deep.

Recovery Restart with Patterns

Recovery Restart can be used to restart the program if milling is interrupted during a pattern. The Recovery Restart softkey is located on the Auto screen, see Recovery and Restart, on page 1 - 135 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill.

When Recovery Restart is initiated, the user is prompted to select a starting pattern number plus any other additional restart information. The program runs the remaining blocks for the selected pattern instance, then runs all blocks in remaining pattern instances, and then continues with the remaining program blocks.

Example restart scenarios using the following program:

Block 1—Pattern Linear x 3

Block 2—Mill Circle Roughing & Finishing passes

Block 3—Mill Frame Roughing & Finishing passes

Block 4—Mill Contour Roughing & Finishing passes

Block 5—Pattern End

Example 1—Recovery Restart on Pattern Linear: control prompts for the starting pattern number (1, 2, or 3). All blocks in the pattern are run.

Example 2—Recovery Restart on the Frame block: control prompts for the starting pattern number, and whether to start on the finishing pass. If pattern number 1 and finish pass for the frame are specified, it runs the finish pass for the frame in the first pattern, followed by the entire contour block, then runs the circle, frame, and contour for all remaining instances of the pattern.

Example 3—Partial Program Run using the Start and End block fields: Start block set to 3 (Frame), end block set to 5 (pattern end), and Run Program softkey selected. Restart information is not requested; the frame and contour blocks are run for all 3 instances of the pattern. The circle is not run since it is outside the specified block range.

With Recovery Restart a program can be restarted at a specific pattern number, whereas in a partial program run (using the Start and End block fields on the Auto screen) only blocks can be specified, including blocks within a pattern, but a specific pattern number cannot be specified with partial program run.


Loop Rectangular

This routine repeats a pattern a specified number of times along lines parallel to the X and Y axes. The original pattern is always milled at its programmed location. Always program a Pattern End data block following a Loop Rectangular block.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Pattern Loop Rectangular fields:

1 X Axis

2 Y Axis

3 Original Pattern

4 X Distance

5 Y Distance

6 X Number = 3; Y Number = 2

Block

X Distance

X Number

Y Distance

Y Number


Loop Linear

This routine repeats a pattern a specified number of times along a line defined in the X-Y plane. Even though the defined line of this pattern is not parallel to the X or Y axes, the original pattern is always milled at its programmed location and orientation does not change with respect to the X and Y axes. Always program a Pattern End data block following a Loop Linear block.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Pattern Loop Linear fields:

1 X Axis

2 Y Axis

3 Original Pattern

4 Distance

5 Angle

6 X Distance

7 Y Distance

8 Number = 3

Angle

Block

Distance

Number

X Distance

Y Distance


Loop Angular

This routine repeats a programmed pattern a specified number of times along a circular path. Pattern orientation does not change with respect to the X and Y axes. The original programmed pattern is not executed at its original position unless the routine places it at that location. The pattern is only shown in the locations specified by the routine. Always program a Pattern End data block following a Loop Angular block.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Pattern Loop Angular fields:

1 X Axis

2 Y Axis

3 Original Pattern

4 XY Center

5 Start Angle

6 Rotate Angle

7 XY Reference

8 Number = 3

Block Y Center

Number Y Reference

Rotate Angle

Start Angle

X Center

X Reference


Loop Rotate

This routine repeats a pattern along a circular path. Loop Rotate moves the pattern around the X-Y center point and executes the pattern only at the programmed locations.

The original programmed pattern is not executed at its original position, unless this routine places it at that location. The pattern is only shown in the specified locations. Always program a Pattern End data block following a Loop Rotate block.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Pattern Loop Rotate fields:

1 X Axis

2 Y Axis

3 Original Pattern

4 XY Center

5 Start Angle

6 Rotate Angle

7 XY Reference

8 Number = 3

Block

Number

Rotate Angle

Start Angle

X Center

Y Center


Pattern Locations

Enter a Pattern Location block each time a programmed pattern is to be repeated. The pattern is repeated by offsetting the pattern with each displacement specified in the Pattern Location block. Always program a Pattern End data block following a Pattern Location block.

Use the X, Y, and Z fields to identify the locations where the pattern is to be executed in the X, Y, and Z axes.

For Transform Plane, see Transform Plane (configurations other than Universal), on page 5 - 13 in Rotary Programming.


Scale

This routine scales a programmed pattern down or up in a range of 0.100 to 10.000 (10% to 1000%) respectively. Always program a Pattern End data block following a Scale block.

When you use Cutter Compensation (preliminary), on page 2 - 9 in the program, the X and Y scale factors must be equal, except for these selections where the X and Y scale factors can be different:

• Circle (ON)

• Frame (ON)

• Ellipse (ON)

• Contour (ON)

• True-Type Font (ON)

• HD3 Lettering

When using Z scaling, the Peck Depth, Retract Clearance Plane, Peck Clearance Plane, and Z Safety Plane values are not affected.

Z Bottom and Z Start are the values commonly affected by Z scaling.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Pattern Scale fields:

1 X Axis

2 Y Axis

3 Original Pattern

4 Scaled Pattern

5 XY Reference

6 X Scale = 3; Y Scale = 2; Z Scale = not shown

Block Z Reference

X Reference Z Scale

X Scale

Y Reference

Y Scale


Mirror Image

This pattern programs a part as a mirror image of an existing programmed part. The routine can execute the mirror image alone or the original part and the mirror image. Always program a Pattern End data block following a Mirror Image block.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Pattern Mirror Image fields:

Pattern End

There are no fields to enter in this data block. It is a marker at the end of the sequence of data blocks used in a Pattern operation. There must be an equal number of Pattern blocks and Pattern End data blocks.

1 X Axis

2 Y Axis

3 Original Pattern

4 Angle

5 XY Point on Mirror Line

Angle

Block

Keep Original

X

Y

Conversational Programming 704-0116-501 Special Operations 2-117

SPECIAL OPERATIONS

Special data blocks can be inserted between operational data blocks to change the position of the table, automatically stop a program, or temporarily change the part program parameters or set a new part zero.

Position Data Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 120

Graphics On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 121

Change Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 121

Change Part Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 123

Machine Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 124

Lube Cycle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 124

Comment Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 125

Insert Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 125

Tool Change Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 126

2 - 118 Special Operations 704-0116-501 Conversational Programming

Position Data Block

Use a Position block to move the table, or to stop motion so you can adjust the work piece, or to gain clearance around the tool or work piece. See Part Setup Safety Work Region in Part Setup, on page 1 - 91 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill.

Use a Position data block instead of a Change Parameters data block in these instances:

• Between operations, when a clamp or raised portion of the part is higher than the programmed relative clearance.

• When cutting occurs inside a cavity and is followed by work inside another cavity in which an optimal Retract Clearance for operations in the recessed areas is below the surface of the part.

• The Z Retract is the same as the Z safety plane height in a Position data block.

Refer to Change Parameters, on page 2 - 121 for more information.

To program a Position block:


2. Select the Insert Block Before softkey. The New Block screen opens.

3. Select the Position softkey. The Position block opens.

4. Select the order of axis movement with the drop-down lists and specify the coordinate(s). Multiple axes with the same value will move simultaneously.

5. Specify in the Z Retract field if the Z axis should retract before the axes move to the specified positions. If Yes, this move happens first.

6. Specify a tool in the Tool field. If a tool is not specified, a tool change does not occur.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Position fields:

If there is a tool change in the position block, the tool change safety move occurs and the axes will not return to their pre-tool change positions. Only axes that did not have a move specified are left in their pre-tool change positions.

Block X

Index Pulses Y

Stop Z

Tool Z Retract

If you want to open the CE Safety enclosure doors after the Position data block executes (the Stop field is Yes), press the Machine Mode Interrupt console key, then press the Start Cycle button. The enclosure doors can be opened and the axes jogged. To resume program execution, close the enclosure doors and press the Start Cycle button.


Graphics On/Off

Graphics On and Graphics Off program blocks allow you hide selected operations in the graphics display. For example, setting a Graphics Off block as block 3 in a part program and Graphics On as block 10 will hide blocks 4-9 when the part is viewed using Solid or Toolpath graphics.

To insert a Graphics On or Graphics Off block:



3. From the New Block screen, select the Miscellaneous softkey.

4. Select the Graphics On/Graphics Off softkey.

Change Parameters

Use this feature to change data stored in Program Parameters (Refer to Program Parameters, on page 1 - 124 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill):

• Change Parameters (General), on page 2 - 122

• Change Parameters (Milling), on page 2 - 122

• Change Parameters (Holes), on page 2 - 122

• Change Parameters (Probing), on page 2 - 122

• Change Parameters (Performance), on page 2 - 122

When a part program is executed, the data selected in Program Parameters are in effect until the system encounters another Change Parameters data block or until the end of the program.

When planning a change to the Retract Clearance parameter, consider the following points:

1. This parameter is defined relative to the Z Start dimension and can optimize Z axis tool motion between localized operations.

2. If all of the operations are at the same Z Start plane, there is no difference between a relative and an absolute clearance. However, when groups of cutting operations are at different Z levels on the part, programming a relative Retract Clearance can be more efficient than an absolute retract dimension. It is possible, using a relative Retract Clearance, to eliminate unnecessary tool motion and save execution time.

3. If the Z Start dimension of the next operation is different from that of the current operation, the control uses the higher of the two values for Retract Clearance before positioning the part in the X-Y axes.

All blocks that are hidden by this operation are still cut when the program is run.


4. To achieve a Retract Clearance close to the part may require the use of a Position data block. Programming a Position block causes the tool to retract to the Z Top (+) of the Safety Work Region.

Examples of areas in which a Position data block must be used rather than a simple parameter change are as follows:

• Between operations, a clamp or raised portion of the part is higher than the programmed relative clearance.

• When cutting occurs inside a cavity and is followed by work inside another cavity in which an optimal Retract Clearance for operations is below the surface of the part.

Refer to Position Data Block, on page 2 - 120 for information about when to use a Position block instead of changing parameters.

Change Parameters (General)

Use this feature to change the General Parameters for the current program.

Change Parameters (Milling)

Use this feature to change Milling Parameters for the current program.

Change Parameters (Holes)

Use this feature to set the Holes Parameters for the current program.

Change Parameters (Probing)

Use this feature to change the Probing Parameters for the current program.

Change Parameters (Performance)

The Change Parameters (General) fields are the same as General Parameters 1 and General Parameters 2. Refer to Program Parameters, on page 1 - 124 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill.

The Change Parameters (Milling) fields are the same as Milling Parameters 1 and Milling Parameters 2. Refer to Program Parameters, on page 1 - 124 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill.

The Change Parameters (Holes) fields are the same as Holes Parameters. Refer to Program Parameters, on page 1 - 124 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill.

The Change Parameters (Probing) fields are the same as Probing Parameters. Refer to Program Parameters, on page 1 - 124 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill.


Use this feature to change Surface Finish Quality parameters for the current program.

Change Part Setup

Use this function to change the part zero coordinates and the Offset Z value. Change Part Setup values remain in effect until the next Change Part Setup block. The Auto screen will show the part position relative to the current part setup block. To change the part setup back to the original parameters, enter another Change Part Setup screen with the original parameters at the point in the program where the setup must be reset.

To create a new Change Part Setup data block:

1. From the Input screen, select the Part Programming softkey.


3. Select the Miscellaneous softkey.

4. Select the Change Part Setup softkey.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Change Part Setup fields:

The Change Parameters (Performance) fields are defined the same as Performance Parameters. Refer to Program Parameters, on page 1 - 124 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill.

Part Zero A and Centerline A fields appear on the screen when the Rotary option is installed.When the program will be used to cut more than one part insert another Change Part Setup data block at the end of the program to restore the original (default) part setup.

Block Part Zero C X/Y Skew (DEG)

Offset Z Part Zero X Z Table Offset

Part Zero IV Part Zero Y Zone

Part Zero V Part Zero Z

Part Zero A Part Zero Z Shift

Part Zero B Probe Z


Machine Function

Insert Machine Function command into a part program with the Machine Function block.

To add a Machine Function block:

1. From the Input screen, select the Part Programming softkey.


3. Select the Miscellaneous softkey.

4. Select the Machine Function softkey.

5. Select the desired M Code/function.

6. Select the Select M Code softkey.

7. Enter the number of times the M code should repeat in the Repeat Count field.

8. Enter delay in the Repeat Delay field.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Machine Function fields:

Lube Cycle

If additional lubrication is needed, insert this block into your program to pulse the lube pump. The current lube cycle will not be affected. Check your machine manual to see if your lube reservoir/pump supports programmed inputs. If your lube pump and or reservoir is actuated by a timer, this option will not function. Most Hurco machines made after 1998 have timer actuated lube, but the Lube Cycle option is provided for backward compatibility with older machines. This option is not needed in newer machines due to higher quality components and adequate lube application.

If the Machine Function softkey appears grayed out, the machine does not have auxiliary machine or equipment-specific M codes defined.

Block Pallet

Confirm APC Ready Repeat Count

M Code


Comment Block

Comment blocks are useful for the programmer to outline tooling requirements and part setup data. Comment blocks display text to the operator during program execution when the block is encountered in the program. The amount of time a comment block is visible can be programmed in the comment data block. Subsequent machining data blocks will continue to execute during this time.

When posting Conversational programs to NC, Comment Blocks explain the program code or provide information, such as setup instructions.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Comment Block fields:

Insert Block

When posting Conversational programs to NC, use an Insert Block to insert up to ten lines of NC code (Text Option) or up to ten lines of APT code (APT option).

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Insert Block fields:

Block

Display Time

Line 1-10

Stop

Block

Line 1-10

Type


Tool Change Optimization

Tool Change Optimization reduces the number of tool changes in Conversational programs. In typical Conversational program execution, each data block is completed (roughing and finishing) before the program moves to the next data block. With Tool Change Optimization, operations are completed sequentially by tool; for example, the program completes all operations that use tool 1 before moving to the operations that use tool 2, and so on.

For example:

A Mill Frame with tool 1 for roughing and tool 2 for finishing, patterned three times, with tool 1 in the spindle:

• Without Tool Change Optimization, each frame in the pattern is rough cut and finish cut before moving to the next frame in the pattern. Sequence of tool changes: 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2. Total number of tool changes = 5.

• With Tool Change Optimization enabled, all three frames are rough cut, then all are finish cut. Sequence of tool changes:1, 2. Total number of tool changes = 1.

Using Tool Change Optimization

To use Tool Change Optimization, the Tool Change Optimization parameter must be set to YES (default is Yes). This parameter is found on the General 2 tab in Program Parameters:

Figure 2–55. Tool Change Optimization parameter in Program Parameters

In addition, the Tool Change Optimization On block must be inserted ahead of the program blocks to which it applies. Both the parameter and the data block are necessary to activate Tool Change Optimization. The Tool Change Optimization Off block is inserted after the last block in which tool optimization is to occur. This allows flexibility in using


Tool Change optimization on select blocks while maintaining normal tool change sequence in other blocks of the program.

To use the Tool Change Optimization On and Off blocks:

1. From a New Block screen, select the Miscellaneous softkey.

2. Select the More softkey twice.

3. Select the Tool Optimize On softkey. The block opens:

Figure 2–56. Tool Change Optimization On block

4. Set the operations that will have tool changes optimized:

• Maintain Operation Level 1 Order—when set to Yes, all Level 1 operations (typically these are the roughing operations) are performed in block sequence, including any specified tool changes. When set to No, all Level 1 operations are performed in tool change sequence. Default is No.

• Maintain Operation Level 2 Order—when set to Yes, all Level 2 operations (typically these are the finishing operations) are performed in block sequence, including any specified tool changes. When set to No, all Level 2 operations are performed in tool change sequence. Default is No.

With Tool Change Optimization on, a data block should not be dependent on the finishing pass of the preceding block to clear out stock (material) prior to that data block. With Tool Change Optimization, the finishing pass has not yet run (because all roughing operations are completed first), and therefore the finish material is not yet removed.

For Holes, the first hole operation is treated as a Level 1 operation and will be executed when other Level 1 operations are executed, based on the Maintain Operation order. The other hole operations will always follow the first hole operation. If the hole operation should not be started until a previous block has been finished, then be sure to disable Tool Change Optimization prior to hole operation.


5. Select the Tool Optimize Off softkey. The Tool Change Optimization Off block is used to turn off the Tool Change Optimization feature for a block or group of blocks within a program, after the Tool Change Optimization On block has been used at an earlier point in the program.

Example

Figure 2–57. Placement of Tool Change Optimization blocks

In the sample screen above, tool change optimization occurs for blocks 2-6. The sequence with Tool Change Optimization parameter set to Yes and the Tool Optimization On block Maintain Operation Level 1 Order and Maintain Operation Level 2 Order set to No is shown below:

Note in the sequence that all roughing blocks that use the first roughing tool (Tool 1) are executed in block sequence, before switching to the next roughing tool (Tool 2). After all roughing operations are completed, all finishing operations that use the first finishing tool (Tool 3) are executed in block sequence, followed by the block that uses the next finishing tool (Tool 4). This requires 3 tool changes.

The Maintain Operation Level 2 Order parameter does not apply to holes operations.

Block

1234567

Type

TCO OnMill ContourMill FrameMill CircleMill Ellipse

Mill ContourTCO Off

Rough Tool

11211

Finish Tool

33433

Tool Change SequenceBlock 2 (Tool 1)Block 3 (Tool 1)Block 5 (Tool 1)Block 6 (Tool 1)Block 4 (Tool 2)Block 2 (Tool 3)Block 3 (Tool 3)Block 5 (Tool 3)Block 6 (Tool 3)Block 4 (Tool 4)

Tool Changes = 3

Tool ChangeOptimizationBlocks


When Tool change Optimization is not used (no Tool Optimization On block), the sequence of tool changes looks like this:

Note that tool changes occur in block order, resulting in 9 tool changes.

If a finish tool is not specified in a milling block, the tool listed in the Roughing tab is considered a finish tool and will be grouped with the other finish tools.

If a hole block is within a group of blocks that use Tool Change Optimization, the hole operations are completed as a group. In addition, the first hole operation’s tool is grouped with the tools of the other blocks and is completed in the sequence specified by the Maintain Roughing Sequence.

Block

12345

Type

Mill ContourMill FrameMill CircleMill Ellipse

Mill Contour

Rough Tool

11211

Finish Tool

33433

Tool Change SequenceBlock 1 (Tool 1)Block 1 (Tool 3)Block 2 (Tool 1)Block 2 (Tool 3)Block 3 (Tool 2)Block 3 (Tool 4)Block 4 (Tool 1)Block 4 (Tool 3)Block 5 (Tool 1)Block 5 (Tool 3)

Tool Changes = 9


Tool Change Review

Tool changes are reviewed in the Tool Change Review Screen, accessed with the Tool Change Review softkey in the Part Program Tool Review menu. Tools are displayed in the order they are used in the program. All tool changes in a part program are displayed, even if the Tool Change Optimization feature is not used.

Figure 2–58. Tool Change Review Screen

Jump to the data block from this screen in one of the following ways:

1. Select the block in the list and press the Enter console key.

2. Select the block in the list and select the Part Programming softkey.

3. Double-click on the block in the list.

Tools aredisplayed in theorder they areused in program

Data blocksare displayed inthe order they are executed

Operation islisted for eachblock:- Roughing- Finishing- Hole operation by type

Conversational Programming 704-0116-501 NC/Conversational Merge 2-129

NC/CONVERSATIONAL MERGE

WinMax allows you to execute an ISNC G-code (NC) program from within a Conversational part program with NC/Conversational merge. G-code programs can be used and re-used within the Conversational program.

To include this data block in a Conversational program, select the NC Program Call softkey. Use the Program Number field to initiate the NC program (program number must not exceed 6999). For programs that use variables, the Argument Type field allows you to enter argument variables (String or List) to pass to a subprogram. See WinMax Mill NC Programming for more information about variables and arguments.

To invoke a G-Code program from within a Conversational part program, the program must be loaded in Program Manager. The first line of NC code following the percent (%) sign must contain the program number preceded by the letter “O” (not a zero) or a colon (:), for example, O1234 or :1234. There cannot be any other information on this line and “O” or “:” must be the first character. The program must end with an M99 to allow other Conversational program operations after the NC program is complete, as in the following program (O number and M99 are bolded for emphasis):

Example:%

O5085

(#1 IS THE START ANGLE)

(#2 IS THE NUMBER OF GEAR TEETH)

(#3 IS THE OUTSIDE RADIUS)

(#11 IS THE INSIDE RADIUS)

(#4 IS THE GEAR CENTER PT X COORD)

(#5 IS THE GEAR CENTER PT Y COORD)

(#6 IS THE GEAR CENTER PT Z COORD)

(#19 IS THE TOOTH TO SKIP)

(#18 IS THE TOOTH RATIO)

/

T1 M06

M03G00G21G90X0Y0Z0S1800

(VARIABLE #4006 - INCHES/METRIC)

IF[#4006EQ20]GOTO10

IF[#4006EQ21]GOTO15

N10#850=25.4

GOTO20

N15#850=1.0

N20G0X-3Y-5

Y5

X8

Y-5

#30=[360.0/#2]

2 - 130 NC/Conversational Merge 704-0116-501 Conversational Programming

#31=0

#22=[#30*#18]

#23=#30-#22

#24=#11*#850

#25=#3*#850

#26=#20*#23

X#4 Y#5

G90G00G16X#25Y#1

G01Z-.25F20.

WHILE[#31LT#2]DO250

#1=[#1+[#22]]

G03G16X#25Y[#1]R#3

G01X#24Y[#1+#26]

#1=[#1+[#23]]

G03X#24Y[#1-#26]R#11

G01X#25Y[#1]

G15

N200#31=#31+1

N400END250

M99

See the Field Glossary for definitions of NC/Conversational Merge (NC Program Call block) fields:

The states for modal G-codes such as work offsets (G54-G59), absolute/incremental (G90, G91), or SFQ (G5.3 P__) are retained until they are explicitly changed. They are not automatically reset at the end of the subprogram run when you return to conversational. You must explicitly reset the modal code(s) before ending the NC subprogram if you do not want to retain the state.

Argument Type

Block

Program Number

Conversational Programming 704-0116-501 DXF Option 2-131

DXF OPTION


DXF Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 134

DXF Build Data Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 135

DXF Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 137

Edit Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 138

DXF Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 140

2 - 132 DXF Option 704-0116-501 Conversational Programming

DXF Overview

WinMax DXF offers greater flexibility, improved compatibility with AutoCad®, and the ability to save DXF changes directly to file (avoiding the need to send DXF files back to the CAD system for editing). The DXF file translation software is compatible with DXF files generated with Autocad version 12 and earlier.

DXF files are loaded directly into WinMax as follows:

1. Press the Auxiliary console button.

2. Select the DXF icon on the Auxiliary screen.

3. Find the DXF file on the Load DXF File screen, and select it to highlight.

4. Select the Load softkey.

• On single-screen machines, the DXF program blocks are displayed in the Program Review Screen; use F+Draw (console key) to display the DXF drawing.

• On dual-screen machines, the DXF drawing is displayed on the graphics screen. After building the data blocks, the part can be viewed in Solid or Toolpath graphics using the Draw console key. Switch the screen back to the DXF drawing using F + Draw (console keys). You can switch the screen back to the previously drawn graphic (without causing it to be redrawn) with the Draw console key. To redraw the graphic, select the Draw console key a second time (or access the DRAW OPTIONS F1 softkey).

DXF units of measurement (INCH or MM) match global WinMax units. When a data block is built from a CAD drawing, the data block adopts the unit displayed on the WinMax status bar. In Build DB, changing the WinMax unit will result in a different sized element, for example, a segment that is 3 inches or 3 mm in length.

Here are the softkeys on the DXF screen:

• Parameters—see DXF Parameters, on page 2 - 137.

• Build DB—see DXF Build Data Block, on page 2 - 135.

• Zoom Window—see Zoom Window, on page 2 - 137.

• Edit Drawing—see Edit Drawing, on page 2 - 138.

• Layers—see DXF Layers, on page 2 - 140.

• Save DXF—saves the DXF file.

• Part Programming—goes to the active part program.

• Quit CAD—exits the DXF CAD option.

The Part Programming softkey or icon toggles back to Part Programming without closing the DXF file. You may return to DXF at any time by selecting the DXF icon.

The DXF Editor is functional in Conversational programs only. If the DXF Editor is started when the current active program is NC, a prompt asks if you want to start a new conversational part program. Answer Yes to create a new Conversational part program.


DXF Build Data Block

The Build DB softkey accesses the automatic data block building features. The system creates milling, holes, position, or pattern locations data blocks.

Milling - the Milling operation softkeys perform these functions in Lines/Arcs, Circles, Frame, 3D Mold, or Ellipse data blocks:

• Accept—loads the entity into the data block.

• Zoom Window—refer to Zoom Window, on page 2 - 137.

• Edit Drawing—refer to Edit Drawing, on page 2 - 138.

• Reverse—reverses the contour direction.

• AutoChain—defines contours by autochaining individual segments together.

• Default Radius—inserts the value of the default radius set in the Frame screen’s Corner Radius field.

• Exit/Cancel—cancels the operation and returns to the previous screen.

If you are using AutoCAD 14, set the registers to generate Polylines and Ellipses so they are saved as pline entity types and not splines.

Holes -Holes data blocks are built using the Hole Location Method (F1) or the Hole Pattern Method (F2):

• Use Hole Location Method—builds Holes Locations blocks from selected points on the drawing.

• Use Hole Pattern Method—builds Holes Pattern blocks from selected points on the drawing.

For either softkey, select holes on the drawing with one of three methods:

• Select individual holes on the touchscreen.

• Choose the Window Select softkey and drag across an area of the screen to select a group of holes.

• Use the Intersect softkey to select two intersecting lines. The point of intersection becomes the center of the hole.

Select the Accept softkey to create the data blocks.

These are the softkeys in the Holes menu:


• Zoom Window— refer to Zoom Window, on page 2 - 137.


• Window Select—selects a group of holes on the drawing.

• Intersect—draws a hole at the intersection of two selected lines and represents the center with a highlighted plus (+).

• Default Order—orders the holes as they were selected in the Auto CAD


drawing.


Position - creates a Position data block from the DXF drawing. These are the softkeys on the Position menu:


• Zoom Window—refer to Zoom Window, on page 2 - 137.



• Intersect—draws a hole at the intersection of two selected lines and represents the center with a highlighted plus (+).

• Default Order—orders the holes as they were drawn in the original AutoCAD drawing.


Pattern Locations—builds a Pattern data block. To use, select the softkey and then select points on the drawing to serve as pattern locations, using one of the following methods:

• Select individual holes on the touchscreen.

• Choose the Window Select softkey and drag across an area of the screen to select a group of holes.

• Use the Intersect softkey to select two intersecting lines. The point of intersection becomes the center of the hole.

Select the Accept softkey to create an empty Pattern Locations data block. Additional data can then be added either manually or from the DXF drawing.

These are the softkeys on the Pattern Locations menu:


• Zoom Window— refer to Zoom Window, on page 2 - 137.



• Intersect—specifies a pattern location at the intersection of two selected lines.

• Default Order—orders the holes as they were selected in the Auto CAD drawing.



DXF Parameters

These parameters link contour segments, define part zero within the drawing, and set the radius for frame corners.

Use the Move Zero and Select Value softkeys to change the location of part zero. The part zero symbol is a circle with crosshairs. To change this location manually, move the cursor to the field for Part X Offset or Part Y Offset and enter the X or Y Offset values. To change this location graphically and automatically, use the Move Zero softkey.

Frame Radius sets the default corner radius. If the corners of a frame do not have the same radius, you are prompted to either select a corner radius on the drawing or use the default value entered in this field for the radius.

The Exit softkey returns to the DXF softkeys.

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the DXF Parameter fields:

Use the check boxes to turn on or off the following parameters:

• Display Geometry—shows selected lines on the graphic display in a color other than black, illustrating which elements have been selected. Colors can be changed with the Choose Colors softkey on the Parameters screen.

• Autochain Contours—allows autochaining to be turned off so that a contour may be created by individually selected segments into a chained contour. By default, segments are automatically chained to create contours.

• Select Holes by Diameter—selects holes with the diameter specified in the Hole Diameter field (defined above) when the WINDOW SELECT softkey is used. This selection allows you to order the hole selection by size, which optimizes tool changes.

Zoom Window

Use the Zoom Window softkey to enlarge an area of the drawing or zoom out to see a full view. Use the pointer to touch an area on the screen and drag across the screen to enlarge an area of the drawing. When an area is enlarged, use the following softkeys:

• Zoom Out—pulls back from the drawing incrementally to the previous magnification level without re-centering the part in the drawing.

• Fit to View—gives a full scale of the drawing with the part in the drawing

Drawing scale

Endpoint Tolerance

Frame Radius

Hole Diameter

Part X Offset

Part Y Offset


auto-centered.

• Pan—relocates the center of the drawing on the Graphic display.

• Exit—returns to the previous menu.

Edit Drawing

Use the Edit drawing feature to extend, join, modify, or split segments that need to be edited in order to create the proper geometry for the part program.

• Extend—locates the intersection of two lines and extends one or both of the lines to the intersection point.

To extend lines, select the EDIT DRAWING softkey and then the Extend softkey. Select the two lines that need to be extended. Both lines are highlighted when selected and extended to their points of intersection as shown in the examples below:

• Join—moves a selected line endpoint to the endpoint of a line or arc segment. Always select as the first endpoint the point that will be joined to the second endpoint. The endpoint at the opposite end of the first selected segment remains stationary and becomes a pivoting point. Both segments are highlighted when selected, and the screen is redrawn to reflect the joining of the two segments.

• Modify—is used to view or modify the actual geometry data of segments. Choose the SELECT POINT softkey to view the segment data.

A Original drawing

B Edited drawing

1 Extended line

2 Both lines extended

3 Start of arc

4 Selected intersection point

5 Extended arc


• The DXF Edit Modify - Arc dialog box appears if you select an arc. Refer to DXF Edit Modify - Arc, on page 2 - 140.

• The DXF Edit Modify - Line dialog box appears if you select a line. Refer to DXF Edit Modify - Line, on page 2 - 140.

• The DXF Edit Modify - Point dialog box appears if you select a point. Refer to DXF Edit Modify - Point, on page 2 - 140.

• The segment appears gray on the Graphic display.

Choose the Accept softkey to retain the changes in the control's memory.

Figure 2–59. Joined Lines and Arcs

• Split—use to divide segments for selection, de-selection, and chaining. Segments may be split at midpoint or any point of intersection with other segments.

To split a segment, first select the segment and then select the point where the segment will be divided. When a segment is selected for splitting, the midpoint and all intersection points with the other segments are indicated with crosshair markers. Follow the directions in the Prompt display.

• Delete—deletes a programmed endpoint.

• Trim—trims a selected segment.

• Explode PCurve—shows an exploded view of a selected PolyCurve. If you are using Auto CAD 14, set the registers to generate Polylines and Ellipses so they are saved as pline entity types and not splines.

• Exit/Cancel—return to the Main DXF menu.

A Original drawing

B Edited drawing

1 Stationary endpoint

2 Selected segment endpoint

3 Joining endpoint

4 Newly joined segment


DXF Edit Modify - Arc

The DXF Edit Modify - Arc dialog window contains these fields:

• Start Angle—defines the starting point of the angle.

• Sweep Angle—defines the total number of degrees in the arc to be cut. This number can be greater than 350.

• Direction—identifies the direction of the arc from the start point.

• Radius—identifies the radius of the arc.

• Center X and Center Y—identify the X and Y coordinates for the center point of the arc.

DXF Edit Modify - Line

The DXF Edit Modify - Line dialog window contains these fields:

• Endpoint1 X and Endpoint1 Y—define the first endpoints for the X and Y coordinates.

• Endpoint2 X and Endpoint2 Y—define the second endpoints for the X and Y coordinates.

• Length—identifies the line length.

• XY Angle—identifies the angle of the XY coordinate.

DXF Edit Modify - Point

The DXF Edit Modify - Point dialog window contains these fields:

• X Value—identifies the X location for the selected point.

• Y Value—identifies the Y location for the selected point.

DXF Layers

Many DXF drawings use layers - an electronic method of representing transparent acetate overlays used in hand-drawn drafting work.

• Select Layer—toggles the highlighted layer on and off.

• All On—turns on all of the layers.

• All Off—turns off all of the layers.

• Exit—return to the Main DXF menu.

Layer names longer than 31 characters will be shortened during processing.

Conversational Programming 704-0116-501 UltiPockets 2-139

ULTIPOCKETS

The UltiPocket™ programming option adds special milling routines for machining pocket boundaries with islands. This option provides complete clean out of odd-shaped pockets without cutting the islands programmed inside the boundary. The software automatically calculates the tool path around islands eliminating the long task of plotting these shapes. Islands may also be rotated, scaled, and repeated.

The following drawing shows an inward spiral boundary with three differently shaped islands.

The pocket feature is available for any closed contour data block: Mill Contour, Mill Frame, Mill Circle, Mill Ellipse, Mill Slot, or Mill Polygon.

Additionally, see these topics:

Helical Plunge with UltiPockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 145

Helical Plunge Using Operator Specify Pocket Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 145

To use the UltiPocket feature, first establish the cutter compensation parameter and then program any UltiPocket data blocks.

• Refer to Milling Parameters. • Select either Insert Arc or Insert Line for the Cutter Comp Parameter

field. If this field does not appear on the Milling Parameters screen, the UltiPocket option has not been installed on the control.

2 - 140 UltiPockets 704-0116-501 Conversational Programming

Pocket Boundary

The Pocket Boundary is the outside frame of the part. The basic philosophy of the UltiPocket option is to program the boundary and then tell the system which pockets or islands to avoid within that boundary. This approach eliminates complex calculations and shortens the part programming process.

The types of Pocket Boundaries are Outward, Inward, ADP Zigzag, and ADP 1-Way. These are explained below.

Outward

This selection is only for Circle and Frame data blocks without islands. When this routine is selected, the tool begins from the center region of the part outward to pocket the entire programmed boundary. This operation is, therefore, the same as the standard WinMax Pocket selection. With this selection the cutter overlap is controlled by the Pocket Overlap value on the Milling Parameters screen, not the Pocket Overlap field on the Mill Circle and Mill Frame screens.

Inward

This selection cuts in from the outside of the defined boundary avoiding the defined islands. When this routine is selected, the tool enters the part and begins following a path formed by offsetting the boundary one-half the tool radius, plus the pocket overlap.

To control the percentage of overlap during cutting, enter a value in the Pocket Overlap field. After the first pass, the tool follows a path produced by offsetting the boundary by the tool radius, plus the pocket overlap for each pass while avoiding islands inside the boundary.

After pocketing the boundary, the tool then cuts around the inside of the boundary and the outside of each island, using the selected blend offset and the programmed tool radius.

ADP Zigzag

With AdaptiPath (ADP) pocket types the tool makes constant contact with the material surface to decrease cutting time. ADP Zigzag moves the tool in a zigzag pattern; one pass is climb milling, the next pass is conventional milling, alternating climb and conventional passes until complete.

To control the percentage of overlap during cutting, enter values in the Overlap Target and Min(imum) fields.

For more information, see Climb Milling (Left), on page 2 - 12 and Conventional Milling

Follow this link to the Hurco website to view a Pocket Boundary video demonstration:





(Right), on page 2 - 12 in Conversational Programming.

ADP 1-Way

With AdaptiPath (ADP) pocket types the tool makes constant contact with the material surface to decrease cutting time. ADP 1-Way moves only in climb or conventional direction, skimming the part surface on the return move. Climb or Conventional Milling Direction is set in the Program Parameters Milling 1 tab. See Program Parameters, on page 1 - 124 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill.

To control the percentage of overlap during cutting, enter values in the Overlap Target and Min(imum) fields.

For more information, see Climb Milling (Left), on page 2 - 12 and Conventional Milling (Right), on page 2 - 12 in Conversational Programming.

Rest Machining

Rest Machining is available with Pocket Boundary ADP Zigzag and ADP 1-Way. Rest Machining allows you to specify a small tool that is used to clear out remaining pocket areas, i.e., corners where a bigger tool might not be able to reach. The Rest tab appears in the tool data area when either ADP Zigzag or ADP 1-Way pocket types are selected with Pocket Boundary Milling Type on the Roughing tab:

Programming Islands

After programming the mill data block for a boundary, an island can be defined by creating a Pocket Island data block. As many islands as desired may be defined (subject to computer memory on the control), but all must fit within the defined boundary and should allow the tool to completely define the island.

The island data block can be a Mill Frame, Circle, or Contour (provided it is a closed contour). The Pocket Island data blocks use the standard milling values from the boundary data block and do not display these parameters on the island programming screen. The pocket overlap percentage was also defined in the boundary data block.

Mill Contours

To create a Mill Contour data block using the UltiPocket option, set up the operation in the start segment (segment zero). As in standard WinMax milling, an UltiPocket Mill Contour


block consists of segments beginning with segment zero. With the cursor in the MILLING TYPE field, select one of the Pocket options in the Start segment to indicate whether this block is the boundary of the part or one of the islands within the boundary. The boundary must occur first in the program.

The segments after the Start segment are programmed in the same manner as standard milling lines and arcs. Automatic calculation of unknown points is available for these data blocks.

Mill Frame

The Mill Frame data block is often used to create the part boundary.

This block is programmed in the same manner as the standard WinMax Mill Frame, with the addition of the Pocket Overlap percentage.

Mill Circle

The Mill Circle data block is used for both boundaries and islands. It is similar to the standard Mill Circle data block except that if this block is used to create an island, it uses the tool from the boundary data block.

Pattern

Pattern data blocks can be inserted to rotate, scale, or repeat islands. Only Pattern data blocks can be programmed between a boundary data block and an island. As many islands as desired may be defined (subject to available memory), but all must fit within the defined boundary.


Helical Plunge with UltiPockets

The Helical Plunge option is used with the UltiPockets option to define the plunging location when inward pocketing. Islands created using inward pocketing can influence plunge locations. A plunge location is determined that will not interfere with pocket islands.

The plunging location in outward pocketing is the same as a straight plunge. Outward pocketing is used only for mill frame, mill circle, and ellipse pocket boundaries that do not have pocket islands. Since islands are not present with outward pocketing, the plunging location is in the middle of the mill frame, mill circle and ellipse.

When the Helical Plunge option is installed, two additional pocketing-related fields appear on the Milling 2 tab on the Program Parameters screen. These fields are Operator Specify Pocket Start and Pocket Plunge Near Center.

The Operator Specify Pocket Start field takes precedence over the Pocket Plunge Near Center field. If the Operator Specify Pocket Start field is set to Yes, the value of the Inward Pocket Plunge Near Center field is ignored.

When the Operator Specify Pocket Start field is set to No, the value of the Inward Pocket Plunge Near Center field is checked. If the Inward Pocket Plunge Near Center field is set to Yes, a starting location will be determined near the center of the pocket. If both fields are set to No, the default starting position will be used for the pocket.

Helical Plunge Using Operator Specify Pocket Start

To use the Operator Specify Pocket Start function:

1. Set the Type field to Pocket Boundary on the Mill Contour, Mill Frame or Mill Circle screen.

2. Set the Pocket Type field to Inward on the Mill Contour, Mill Frame or Mill Circle screen.

3. Set the Operator Specify Pocket Start field to Yes on the Milling Parameters screen.

4. The Pocket X Start and Pocket Y Start fields appear on the Mill Contour, Mill Frame, or Mill Circle screen. The operator identifies the pocket plunge location with the Pocket X Start and Pocket Y Start fields.

The Pocket X Start and Pocket Y Start fields define the centerline of the plunge path. This is the location where the helix will be centered. If a straight plunge is selected, the straight plunge will occur at the location.

The following figure shows the Pocket X Start and Pocket Y Start fields on the Mill Frame screen. See Helical Plunge (Ramp), on page 3 - 1 for an example using Pocket Start X and Pocket Start Y fields.


For non-rotary blocks, Pocket X Start and Pocket Y Start define the XY starting location. For rotary blocks, these fields define the XA starting location.

An error message will display if the values for Pocket X Start or Pocket Y Start interfere with the pocket island or pocket boundary.

WinMax Mill NC Programming 704-0116-501 NC Programming 3-1

NC PROGRAMMING

This documentation describes the use of NC (Numerical Control) Part Programming, which includes the BNC (Basic Numerical Control) and the ISNC (Industry Standard Numerical Control) Editor portion of the CNC software as it is used on the machine tool console. This section explains the following:

NC Part Programming Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2

NC Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6

Starting a New NC Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 8

NC Editor Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9

NC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 20

NC Probing Part Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 25

3 - 2 NC Programming 704-0116-501 WinMax Mill NC Programming

NC Part Programming Principles

NC part programming adheres to the ANSI/EIA RS–274–D standard terminology with extensions for BNC and ISNC dialects. In addition, the NC programming facilities were designed to use as much of the WinMax Conversational system as possible. As a result, most of the screens are the same in both the NC and the conversational systems. This allows a smooth transition between the two.

The primary difference between conversational and NC programming is the program editors. NC programming uses standard G and M codes; whereas, conversational programming uses plain English or another supported programming language.

NC part programs can be created using the CNC on the machine tool or off-line CNC programming software running on a personal computer. NC programs cannot be converted to conversational programs, nor can NC programs be converted automatically to any other NC format.

NC Part Program Components

NC programs are a series of characters and words that form program blocks. These program blocks tell the machine tool how and where to move. The operator needs to understand the basic program structure and the types of codes in order to create, edit, and run a program successfully. These components make up NC code:

Program Start

NC data can begin with the with a “%” (percent) character to indicate the beginning of the file. When a percent character is received, the control starts to accept, check, and load blocks into its memory. If you are creating a new part program at the control, the percent character is automatically inserted at the beginning of the program.

Sequence Number

A sequence number serves as a block label; it has no other significance within the part program except being required with GOTOs in the NCPP option and the M99 jump command. Sequence numbers are often used to mark the beginning of milling sequences so you can restart at a given sequence number or recall specific operations within the program. The maximum sequence number is 9999999.

When programming on an off-line system, sequence numbers should be used sparingly. Sequence numbers (N words) are optional in the NC Editor, and they are useful in programs sent over the RS-232 link. However, the absence of sequence numbers permits faster processing (loading, syntax checking, and parsing) of the part program and can result in improved part program execution. In addition, omission of these numbers increases the amount of the program that can fit into memory.

The CNC software can read NC files from the serial port directly into dynamic memory or run NC files that are partially loaded into dynamic memory. NC files can be serially loaded to the hard disk.


Address Characters

An address character is the first character of a word in a program block. The Ignore Command signals the system to ignore the remainder of the block. The Comment Command characters are used to delimit comments. The following is a list of the address characters recognized by this system:

Special Characters

Special characters are ASCII characters within a file which have special meaning to the system and cannot be edited. The following special characters are recognized by the NC software:

• %—Beginning/End of file—signals the system that all of the following characters are part of the program. The system automatically adds this character to the beginning of a new program. (% is not used in subprograms.)

You can also include the % character to signal the End of File.

• E— —signals the NC system that no more legal program characters follow.

If you request renumbering of part program sequence numbers, any sequence numbers in GOTO statements will not be updated. You must then press the (F1) Yes softkey before re-sequencing will take place. To cancel the renumbering, press the (F8) No softkey. In general, you will not want to renumber part programs that use GOTO statements.

/ Ignore Command( ) Comment Command: Subprogram Number (NCPP Option)A Rotary Dimension Around X-axisB Rotary Dimension Around Y-axisD Tool Diameter OffsetF FeedrateG Preparatory FunctionsH Index into the tool length offset table I X-axis Arc Center/Offset, X scale factor, Canned Cycle Bore ShiftJ Y-axis Arc Center/Offset, Y scale factor, Canned Cycle Bore ShiftK Z-axis Arc Center/Offset, Z scale factor, Canned Cycle RepeatL Tool Length Offset, Data Set ModeM Miscellaneous FunctionsN Sequence NumberO Subprogram Number (NCPP option)P Subprogram Number, Dwell Time, Scaling FactorQ Canned Cycle Bore Shift, Peck DepthR Rotation Angle, Return Level, Circular Interpolation RadiusS Spindle Speed FunctionT Tool SelectX Primary X Motion Dimension, Dwell TimeY Primary Y Motion DimensionZ Primary Z Motion Dimension


This character is optional to provide compatibility with existing programs that include EOT characters at the end.

• [CR]—Carriage Return—signals the End of a Program Block.

• [CRLF]—Carriage Return/Line Feed Pair—signals the End of a Program Block (identical to [CR]).

Words

A word is a group of alphanumeric characters. The first character is an address character—a letter such as M or G. The address character is followed by a signed or unsigned numeric value. Some sample NC words are “X-.03” and “G00.” One word or groups of words form a program block.

Block

A block is a group of words terminated by the end-of-block character: a carriage return [CR] or a carriage return/line feed pair [CRLF]. Each block within a part program must be terminated with either a [CR] or a [CRLF].

The following illustration shows a typical NC block and its components:

Figure 3–1. Typical NC Block

[CRLF] is not shown when the program is viewed in the NC Editor.

1 Word2 Address character3 Numeric character4 Feedrate word5 Sequence number6 Modal preparatory functions7 One-shot preparatory function8 Dimension words9 Miscellaneous function


Default M and G Codes

Upon power up, control reset, initial entry into the NC Editor, or after erasing a program, the system presets these M codes as defaults:

M05 Spindle Off

M09 Both Coolant Systems Off

The system also presets certain G codes as the default active codes. The default G codes are highlighted in the G Code Table in the “Preparatory Functions-G Codes” section.

The system uses the units specified when the NC Editor is selected, not the G codes, for graphics display and running the part program.

Navigation

To move the cursor from a block to the beginning of the next block, press the down arrow (↓). Use the right/advance arrow (→) and the left/back arrow (←) to move the cursor within a block. Use the Enter key to move the cursor between words and blocks.

To move to the beginning of the current block, press the Home key or the up arrow (↑). If the cursor is already at the beginning of the block, pressing the up arrow moves the cursor to the beginning of the last word in the previous block.

To move from a word to the beginning of the next word, press the Enter key. If the cursor is at the end of the current block when the Enter key is pressed, the editor automatically presents the next legal address character.

To move from one character to the next, press the right arrow. If the cursor is at the end of the current block, the cursor wraps around to the beginning of the block.

To move from one character to the preceding character, press the left arrow. If the cursor is at the start of the current block, it wraps around to the end of the current block.

Delete characters or words from a block using these methods:

• To delete numeric data, position the cursor on the number and press the Delete key.

• To erase the entire word, position the cursor on the address character and then press the left arrow or the Delete key. The entire word is removed since numeric data is not allowed in an NC program without an address character to introduce it.


NC Editor

NC Editor provides a wide range of tools to review, create, and modify NC part programs. The editor has the following features:

• Several ways of selecting the code, such as by dragging the stylus across the screen, and by using keyboard keys (if available).

• Copying/Pasting/Cutting of a block of selected code, including to applications outside WinMax.

• Undo/Redo functionality.

• Unlimited number of tags.

• Real-time syntax check. Incorrect syntax is indicated by showing the incorrect text in red. Comments are shown in a user-defined color (green in this example):

• Real-time indicators of the meanings of the G codes. Place the cursor on the G code and the definition is displayed in the prompt area of the screen.

• Simplified and friendlier access to common editing tasks, such as jumping and searching operations.

• Keyboard shortcuts:

• Ctrl + Home—jump to the beginning of program

• Ctrl + End—jump to the end of program

• Shift + Ctrl + Home—selects all text between cursor and beginning of program

• Shift + Ctrl + End—selects all text between cursor and end of program

• Shift + Home—selects the text between cursor and beginning of line

• Shift + End—selects the text between cursor and end of line

• Ctrl + C—copy selected text to the clipboard

• Ctrl + F—opens a Find window. Enter text to find in the current program.

• Ctrl + G—opens a Goto window. Enter a block number to navigate to that block.

• Ctrl + H—opens a Find and Replace window.

• Ctrl + X—cut the selected text from screen and copy to clipboard

• Ctrl + V—paste the copied or cut text

• Ctrl + Z—undo the last change

• Ctrl + Y—redo the last undo

See NC Editor Settings, on page 3 - 19 for information about the comment color.


The status bar provides real-time updates on the status on the program being edited. The information shown in the status bar is as follows:

Figure 3–2. Status Bar in NC Editor

The Part Program name is shown first in the status bar. Coding standard can either be Industry Standard (I) or Basic NC (B). Current Line number indicates the current location of the cursor in the part program. Insert mode is indicated as INS, while overstrike mode is indicated as OVR.

Refer to NC Editor Menus, on page 3 - 9 for information about the NC Editor menus.

1 Part Program Name

2 Units

3 Coding Standard

4 Current Line Number

5 Insert/Overstrike Mode

6 Block Skip On/Off

213 4 5 6


Starting a New NC Program

To begin NC part programming, press the Input key. Refer to Getting Started with WinMax Mill, Program Manager section, for information about saving, opening, and loading programs.

The NC file extension is set in User Preferences. Refer to Getting Started with WinMax Mill.

These steps help determine the most efficient tool movement and basic program structure to save time during programming:

1. Determine the tool path on the print and label the points where the path direction changes.

2. Make a chart showing the coordinates of each point identified in the previous step.

3. Identify the spindle movements that will be necessary during cutting.

NC Programming Rules

Here are some basic rules to follow when creating NC part programs:

• The axis letter always precedes the numeric information.

• In most cases an integer works the same as a decimal or real number. In the following cases an integer is scaled by the appropriate scaling factor to maintain compatibility with existing NC programs:

Feedrate: F (BNC only)

Rotation: R (ISNC Only)

Dwell: P, X (Both BNC and ISNC)

Scaling: P (ISNC only)

• All axis dimensions are considered to be positive unless a minus sign is entered. When describing axis motion, the codes for the program block must contain the following information in order to move properly:

• Axis identification (e.g., X, Y, Z).

• Direction the axis will move (+ or -).

• Distance the axis will move (e.g., 4.0).

• Enter the speed preceded by the F address character to program a feedrate in a block.

• Include a Z parameter in the NC part program to permit the system to draw the part on the graphics screen. An absolute Z command must occur after a tool change before making another move command.

If an integer is below the acceptable range after scaling, a “Below Minimum Value” error message occurs.


NC Editor Menus

Hurco's NC system provides many levels of program editing, as well as editing tools, to simplify the task.

The NC Editor contains these top level menus:

Basic Programming Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9

Jump and Search Functions Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 10

Edit Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 12

Renumbering and Tagging Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 14

Program Execution Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 16

NC Editor Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 18

Basic Programming Menu

While entering NC codes to create blocks, you may wish to insert new blocks, delete blocks, or display different sections of the part program on the screen.

Figure 3–3. NC Basic Programming Menu

The Basic Programming softkeys provide these functions:

• Insert Block Before—Inserts a blank line before the block where the cursor is located. This permits addition of a new block of data. This softkey will be disabled if text can't be inserted at the current cursor location.

• Delete Block—Removes the block where the cursor is positioned. This softkey will be disabled if the block can't be deleted.


• Jump to Beginning—Moves the cursor to the beginning of the first program block in memory. If a keyboard is available, Ctrl + Home combination will result in the same action.

• Jump to End—Moves the cursor to the beginning of the last program block in memory. If the keyboard is available, Ctrl + End combination will result in the same action.

• Jump and Search Functions—Invokes Jump and Search Functions menu.

• Edit Functions—Invokes Edit Functions menu

• More ->—Displays the next menu.

• Exit Editor—Exits the NC Editor and moves to the Input screen. Select Part Programming to return to the NC Editor screen.

Jump and Search Functions Menu

The Jump and Search provides the flexibility to locate hard-to-find items in program memory using the block or sequence number or searching for specific address characters, numeric parameters, or words.

Figure 3–4. NC Jump and Search Functions Menu

When the Jump & Search Functions softkey is selected from the Basic Programming menu, these softkeys appear:

• Jump to Block Number—enter a block number in the popup box. The cursor is positioned on the specified block. The number entered refers to the position that block has in NC memory.

• Jump to Sequence Number—enter a sequence number (N code) in the popup box. The cursor is positioned on that block.

You can also use the touchscreen to select the Line number in the Editor status bar to open the Jump to Block popup box.


• Search for Text—activates the Search submenu.

• Jump to Beginning—moves the cursor to the beginning of the first program block in memory. If a keyboard is available, Ctrl + Home combination will result in the same action.

• Jump To End—moves the cursor to the beginning of the last program block in memory. If the keyboard is available, Ctrl + End combination will result in the same action.

• Jump To Previous Syntax Error—tries to find the previous syntax error, and if successful, takes the user to that line.

• Jump To Next Syntax Error—tries to find the next syntax error, and if successful, takes the user to that line.

• Exit—returns to the previous menu.

Search Submenu

The Search submenu allows the user to search for specific text in the part program.

Figure 3–5. NC Search Submenu

The menu contains the following softkeys:

• Enter Text To Search—opens a popup box where search text is entered. Type search term and select the Find Next button. The NC editor finds the next occurrence of the entered text following the current cursor position. If found, the text is highlighted. Selecting the Search Up checkbox will search for the search term prior to the current cursor position.

• Search Again—repeats the last search operation without prompting the user.

If text is highlighted on a single line before the Enter Text to Search softkey is selected, that text is inserted in the Search box.


• Find and Replace—opens a popup box where search text is entered and replacement term is specified.

• The Replace Next button finds the next instance of the search term and replaces it with the new term. To find and replace the next instance you must select the Replace Next button again.

• The Replace All button finds and replaces all instances of the search term.

• Exit—invokes the Jump and Search menu.

Edit Functions Menu

The Edit menu provides advanced editing functionality to the user.

Figure 3–6. NC Edit Functions Menu

When the Edit softkey is selected from the Basic Programming menu, these softkeys appear:

• Insert/Overstrike Mode Toggle—switches the data entry style between insert and overwrite. Currently active mode is shown on the status bar of the window - “INS” indicates Insert and “OVR” indicates Overwrite.

• Copy Selection—this softkey copies the selected text to the Windows' clipboard memory. If the keyboard is available, this action can be achieved by pressing Ctrl + C combination. Text can be selected by dragging the stylus (up/down/right/left) across the editing area of the screen, or by holding down the keyboard Shift key and using the up/down/left/right arrow keys to

If text is highlighted on a single line before the Find and Replace softkey is selected, that text is inserted in the Find And Replace box.

You can also use the touchscreen to toggle the Insert/Overstrike Mode in the Editor status bar.


select text.

• Cut Selection—copies the selected text to the Windows clipboard. In addition, the selected text is deleted from the part program. If the keyboard is available, Ctrl + X combination will cut the selected text and place it in the Windows clipboard.

• Paste Selection—text previously copied to the Windows' clipboard is inserted at the current cursor position. If the keyboard is available, this action can be achieved by pressing Ctrl + V keys.

• Redo—each click redoes the editing operation(s) previously undone by the Undo softkey. If the keyboard is available, Ctrl + Y combination will result in the same action. This action can be locked out with the Disable Undo and Redo setting in NC Settings, NC Editor Settings, on page 3 - 19.

• Undo—each click on undoes the previous editing operations starting from the latest to the earliest. The depth of the undo buffer is 100. If more than one text modification was performed in a single step (e.g. “Replace All”), all those modifications will be undone in one step as well. If the keyboard is available, Ctrl + Z combination will result in the same action. This action can be locked out with the Disable Undo and Redo setting in NC Settings, NC Editor Settings, on page 3 - 19.

• Find & Replace—activates a popup box where search text and replacement text are entered. NC editor finds occurrences of the search text and replaces it with the replacement text.

• Exit—loads the Basic Programming menu.


Renumbering and Tagging Menu

Renumbering and tagging menu offers access to renumbering and tagging functionality. This menu can be accessed by pressing More-> from the Basic programming menu.

Figure 3–7. NC Renumbering and Tagging Menu


• Block Renumbering mode—invokes Block Renumbering Mode submenu. See Block Renumbering Submenu, on page 3 - 15.

• Tag Block—tags a block by underlining it. There is no limit on the amount of tagged blocks you can have.

• Jump to Previous Tagged Block—NC editor tries to find the closest tagged block before the current cursor's position. If such block is found, the cursor is placed in the beginning of the block.

• Jump to Next Tagged Block—NC editor tries to find the closest tagged block after the current cursor's position. If such block is found, the cursor is placed in the beginning of the block.

• Tagged Block List—invokes Tagged Blocks List screen, which allows the user to review the tagged block and manage the tags. See NC Tag List, on page 3 - 16.

• More->—invokes program Execution menu.

• Exit Editor—this softkey operates the same as in the Basic Programming menu.


Block Renumbering Submenu

The Block Renumbering mode submenu allows the user to search for specific text in the part program.

Figure 3–8. NC Block Renumbering Mode Submenu


• Jump & Search Functions—opens the Jump and Search Functions menu.

• Enable Optional Numbering—enables user-assigned block numbering mode.

• Enable Auto Numbering—enables automatic block numbering mode.

• Renumber Numbered Blocks—enables block renumbering. The renumbering interval is entered into the popup box and the blocks are automatically renumbered.

• Renumber Selected Blocks—enables renumbering of selected blocks. First select the blocks to be renumbered by dragging the stylus (up/down/right/left) across the editing area of the screen, or by holding down the keyboard Shift key and using the up/down/left/right arrow keys to select text. Then select the softkey and specify the renumbering interval. The selected blocks are renumbered.

• Exit—invokes the Renumbering and Tagging menu.


NC Tag List

The NC Tag List screen is accessed with the Tagged Block List softkey on the Renumbering and Tagging Menu. The tagged blocks in a program are displayed:

Figure 3–9. NC Tag List screen

Softkeys are:

• Jump to Selected Tag—goes to the selected tag in the program.

• Clear Tag—deletes the selected tag.

• Clear All Tags—deletes all tags in the list.

Program Execution Menu

Program Execution menu allows selection of the part program to be processed for graphics and for execution. This menu can be accessed by twice pressing More-> (first from the Basic programming menu and then from the Renumbering and Tagging menu.)


Figure 3–10. NC Program Execution Menu


• Set Wireframe Start Marker—marks the current block as the beginning point for the graphics display by inserting a left bracket ([) to the left of the block.

• Set Wireframe End Marker—marks the current block as the ending point for the graphic display by inserting a right bracket (]) to the left of the block.

• Reset Wireframe Markers—returns start and end wireframe markers to their default locations. The defaults are at the beginning and end of the program.

• Set Start marker—indicates the block that the system should use to start program execution when running and verifying the program. A letter S is inserted to the left of the block, and the code before the marker is grayed out.

• Set End marker—indicates the block that system should use to end program verification and execution. A letter E is inserted to the left of the block, and code after the end marker is grayed out.

• Reset Start/End Markers—restores start and end markers to their defaults. The defaults are at the beginning and end of the program.

• More->—invokes NC Editor Settings menu.


If the Wireframe Start and Wireframe End markers overlap, the pound (#) sign is displayed to the left of the line.

If the Start and End markers overlap, the dollar ($) sign is displayed to the left of the line.


NC Editor Settings Menu

Figure 3–11. NC Editor Settings menu

• NC Editor Settings—invokes NC Editor Settings screen, which allows the user to modify the editor's behavior. See NC Editor Settings, on page 3 - 19.

• More ->—invokes Basic Programming menu.



NC Editor Settings

Figure 3–12. NC Editor Settings screen

Refer to the Field Glossary for NC Editor Settings definitions:

Block Skip Enable

Comment Color

Current Font

Disable Undo and Redo


NC Parameters

The NC Parameters softkey accesses these functions:

NC Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 20

NC M and G Code Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 21

NC Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 22

NC Configuration Parameters

Use this screen to change general NC part program parameters and set ASR Buffering.

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the NC Configuration Parameters:

General 1

General 2

Intelligent ASR

When enabled, Intelligent ASR buffering begins automatically when certain conditions are met in the program.

M16 (Automatic Buffering On) and M17 (Automatic Buffering Off) are used to turn automatic buffering on and off within a program. The parameter must be turned on in order to use M16/17.

Disable X Scaling Least Scaling Factor Reference Point Z

Disable Y Scaling NC Optional Program Stop Tool Length Tolerance

Disable Z Scaling Reference Point X

Least Dwell Units Reference Point Y

Allow Vacant Variables Enable Lead In Error Checking

Assume Feedrate .1 Increment Enable Lead Out Error Checking

Default Cutter Comp Lookahead M6 Initiates Tool Change

Default Tool Number

Intelligent ASR Triggers

Intelligent Automatic Safe Repositioning

Linearization Override

Retract Override

Safety Clearance


NC M and G Code Parameters

Use this screen to change M code and G code program numbers for an NC part program using the NCPP option:

• Enable User M/G Codes—enables user customization of M codes and/or G codes to perform specialized tasks. User defined M and G codes define a custom code which performs a specialized task, replace an existing G or M code, or provide compatibility between different NC dialects from various machine tool control manufacturers.

• Enable User S/B/T Codes—enables user customization of S codes, B codes, or T codes to perform specialized tasks. User defined S, B, or T codes replace spindle and tool functions with custom subprograms.

• M-Code—allows programming of customized M codes. Up to 13 user defined M codes can be programmed from M01 through M255 (except M02, M98, and M99). Negative numbers cannot be entered in the column for user defined M codes. Enable programmed M codes using the Enable User M Codes function.

• G-Code—allows programming of customized G codes. Up to 10 user defined G codes can be programmed from G01 through G255 (except G65, G66, and G67). If a negative number is entered for a user defined G code, the subprogram becomes modal. Enable programmed G codes using the Enable User G-Codes function.

G08.1 and G08.2 (ASR Command Buffering On/Off) always have priority over Intelligent ASR (automatic buffering). Automatic buffering will not become active if G08.1/G08.2 is active in a program. Additionally, if automatic buffering is active and either a G08.1 or a G08.2 is called, the automatic buffering is immediately turned off.

M00 (Program Stop) and M01 (Planned Stop) codes are skipped in ASR buffering mode. Codes are re-posted when buffering is no longer active, except in a Recovery/Restart.


NC Variables

Use this screen to define Global and System NC variable codes and subprograms for an NC part program using the NCPP option. Programs with variables can be reused. All variables must begin with the "#" character followed by a valid, writeable register number and an equal sign. The following example sets the variable value (#500) to 100:

# 500 = 100

Some variables are read only when an operator attempts to write to the variable.

There are four types of variables that can be used in NC programming:

• Global—can be used by all programs. Assign a global variable before it is used in an equation or expression, or the variable will be considered vacant, generating an error unless the Allow Vacant Variables field is set to Yes. Use the Global 100-199 and Global 500 - 999 softkeys to enter global variables on the NC Variables screen.

• System—provide information about the state of the system such as X, Y, and Z external work compensation, miscellaneous system parameters, modal information, position information, and G code group status. Use the Tool Offset 2001-2200, Work Offset 2500-2999, Misc 3000-3014, Modal 4001-4320, and Position 5001-5083 softkeys to enter system variables on the NC Variables screen.

• Local—are valid only within the current program. These variables are only available in Macro Mode B and range from #1 to #33. Enter local variables in the NC Editor screen. Refer to NC Editor, on page 3 - 6.

• Assign a value to the local variable before it is used in an equation or expression, or the variable will be considered vacant, generating an error unless the Allow Vacant Variables field is set to Yes.

• When the subprogram call is not made using an M98, local variables are nested, meaning that when a subprogram call is made, a new set of local variables is received and the old set is stored. After leaving the subprogram, these local variables are destroyed and the previous set is restored.

• Passing parameters to subprograms automatically initializes local variables when subprogram calls other than M98 are made.

• Arguments—available only Macro Mode A. Arguments are used to pass parameters to subprograms. Parameters are the addresses which follow G65, G66, and M98 codes. Enter arguments in the NC Editor screen. Refer to NC Editor, on page 3 - 6

Refer to the Macro Mode A G Code Group Status table.

Use the softkeys to select the type of NC Variable to appear on the NC Variables screen:

• Global 100-199

• Global 500 - 999

• Tool Len Offset 2001-2200

• Work Offset 2500-3000


The More softkey accesses these softkey choices:

• Misc 3000-3021

• Position 5061-5083

• Tool Dia Offsets 12001-12200

The More softkey returns to the first softkey menu described above.

The Toggle Units softkey toggles the dimensional variables (Tool Offset, Work Offset, Position) between inch and metric.

Macro Mode A Subprogram Variables

In this table, the values for the NC parameters are stored in addresses #8004 to #8026 for Macro Mode A subprogram calls.

The status for each variable is stored in address #8104 to #8126.

The status for the variables is non-zero (>1) if an argument is specified in the subprogram call, and zero otherwise.

Table 3–1. Macro Mode A Subprogram Variables

Macro Mode A Subprogram Variables

NC Parameter Value Address Type Status Address R/WW/WWW

I #8004 ARG #8104 R

J #8005 ARG #8105 R

K #8006 ARG #8106 R

F #8009 ARG #8109 R

G #8010 ARG #8110 R

H #8011 ARG #8111 R

M #8013 ARG #8113 R

N #8014 ARG #8114 R

P #8016 ARG #8116 R

Q #8017 ARG #8117 R

R #8018 ARG #8118 R

S #8019 ARG #8119 R

T #8020 ARG #8120 R

X #8024 ARG #8124 R

Y #8025 ARG #8125 R

Z #8026 ARG #8126 R


Macro Mode A G Code Group Status

In this table, the value for each G Code Group is stored in addresses #8030 to #8046 for Macro Mode A subprogram calls G65, G66, and user defined G codes and M codes.

The status for each G Code Group is stored in addresses #8130 to #8146.

The status is non-zero if an argument is specified in the subprogram call, and empty otherwise.

Table 3–2. Macro mode A G Code Group Status


G Code Value Address

Type Status Address

R/W

00 #8030 ARG #8130 R

01 #8031 ARG #8131 R

02 #8032 ARG #8132 R

03 #8033 ARG #8133 R

05 #8035 ARG #8135 R

06 #8036 ARG #8136 R

07 #8037 ARG #8137 R

08 #8038 ARG #8138 R

09 #8039 ARG #8139 R

10 #8040 ARG #8140 R

11 #8041 ARG #8141 R

15 #8045 ARG #8145 R

16 #8046 ARG #8146 R


NC Probing Part Setup

It is possible to perform a part probe setup using calls to a set of predefined subprograms. A subprogram is a group of commands stored under one name. These probing subprogram calls mimic the probe part setup conversational data block.

The first five subprogram calls (P1000 through P5000) are used to set internal reference locations that perform the probing function. The sixth subprogram, P6000, performs the probing operation.

In addition, an NC program utilizing G31 commands can be used to perform a probing part setup.

Here is an example of the NC codes for probing part setup:

G165 P1000 X0.0 Y0.0

G165 P2000 X1.0 Y8.0 Z-10.0

G165 P3000 X4.0 Y1.0 Z-10.0

G165 P4000 X4.0 Y2.0 Z-5.0

G165 P5000 X1.0 Y2.0 Z-10.0

G165 P6000 X+1 Y+1 A1

Probing is used for setting up part zero for G54 only.

1 P2000 XYZ X Start Location

2 P3000 XYZ Y Start Location

3 P4000 XYZ Z Start Location

4 P5000 XYZ Skew Start Location

5 X Probe Direction

6 Y Probe Direction

7 Skew Axis: X


The previous example illustrates these subprograms:

• P1000 is used to set the X and Y reference locations.

• P2000 is used to set the X Start Location.

• P3000 is used to set the Y Start Location.

• P4000 is used to set the Z Start Location.

• P5000 is used to set the Skew Start Location.

• P6000 is used to set the X and Y direction (+1.0 means positive -1.0 means negative) and the Skew axis (A = 1 for X axis, A = 2 for Y axis, any other value or no A parameter indicates no skew axis).

The P1000 to P5000 subprograms must be used prior to P6000. Once a P6000 is used, the internal reference locations are reset to zero after the probing operation is performed. To retry the part setup, the P1000 to P5000 subprograms must be reset before P6000.

WinMax Mill NC Programming 704-0116-501 Preparatory Functions - G Codes 3-27

PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G CODES

This section defines G codes and their functions. This information is often needed when using an off-line CAM or CAD/CAM system to create NC part programs.

G Code Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 30

G Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 31

Rapid Traverse (G00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 40

Linear Interpolation (G01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 42

Circular and Helical Interpolation (G02 and G03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 44

3D Circular Interpolation (G02.4 and G03.4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 49

Dwell Mode (G04). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 50

Surface Finish (G05.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 51

Data Smoothing (G05.2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 51

Surface Finish Quality (G05.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 51

Cylindrical Rotary Wrap On (G07.2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 52

Cylindrical Rotary Wrap Off (G07.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 53

Automatic Safe Repositioning Command Buffer On (G08.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 54

Automatic Safe Repositioning Command Buffer Off (G08.2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 56

Precision Cornering (G09) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 58

Setting Work Coordinate Systems with G10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 59

Setting External Work Zero Offsets (G10 with L2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 59

Setting Tool Offsets with G10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 60

Initializing Tool Length Offsets (G10 with P, R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 60

Initializing Tool Offsets (G10 with T, H, D). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 60

Assigning Tool Offsets (G10 with L3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 61

Polar Coordinates Command (G16). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 61

Plane Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 62

XY Plane Selection (G17). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 63

XZ Plane Selection (G18). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 64

YZ Plane Selection (G19). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 66

Units of Measure ISNC G20, G21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 67

Automatic Return To and From Reference Point (G28 and G29) . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 67

Skip (Probing) Function (G31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 70

Tool and Radius Offsets (G40–G49) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 73

Cutter Compensation (G40–G42) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 74

3 - 28 Preparatory Functions - G Codes 704-0116-501 WinMax Mill NC Programming

Cutter Compensation – ISNC and Basic NC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 75

Cutter Compensation Off (G40) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 76

Cutter Compensation Left (G41). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 77

3D Tool Geometry Compensation (G41.2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 77

Cutter Compensation Right (G42). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 78

Tool Length Offset (G43, G44, G49) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 80

5-Axis Linear Interpolation (G43.4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 83

Tool Radius Offset (G45–G49) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 84

Tool Radius Offset Increase (G45) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 84

Tool Radius Offset Decrease (G46) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 84

Tool Radius Offset Double Increase (G47) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 84

Tool Radius Offset Double Decrease (G48). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 84

Scaling (G50 and G51) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 87

Mirror Image (G50.1 and G51.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 90

Local Coordinate System Setting (G52) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 93

Machine Coordinates (G53) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 96

Multiple Work Coordinate Systems (G54–G59) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 98

Aux Work Coordinate Systems (G54.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 100

Special Program Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 102

Rotation (G68 and G69) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 102

Global Rotation NC Transform Plane (G68.2) and Local Rotation NC Transform Plane (G68.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 104

Coordinate System Rotation Cancel (G69) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 105

Units of Measure (BNC G70, G71). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 106

Peck Drilling (G73) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 107

Left-Handed Tapping Cycle (ISNC G74). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 109

Single-Quadrant Circular Interpolation (BNC G74) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 110

Multi-Quadrant Circular Interpolation (BNC G75) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 110

Bore Orient (G76). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 111

Canned Cycle Cancel (G80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 113

Drill, Spot Boring (G81). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 113

Drill with Dwell, Counter Boring (G82) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 115

Deep Hole Drilling (G83) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 116

Tapping (G84) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 120

Boring (G85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 123

Bore Rapid Out Cycle (ISNC G86). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 125

Chip Breaker (BNC G87) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 127

Back Boring (ISNC G87) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 128

Rigid Tapping (BNC G88; ISNC G84.2; ISNC G84.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 130

Canned Boring with Manual Feed Out and Dwell (ISNC G88) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 131


Bore with Dwell (G89). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 133

Absolute and Incremental (G90, G91). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 135

Coordinate System Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 137

Part Zero Setting (G92). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 137

Feed Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 139

Inverse Time Feedrate (G93) and Feed Per Minute Feedrate (G94). . . . . . . . . 3 - 139

Rotary Tangential Velocity Control (G94.1) (preliminary). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 140

Canned Cycle Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 142

Return to Initial Point in Canned Cycles (G98) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 142

Return to R Level in Canned Cycles (G99) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 144

Special Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 145

Canned Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 146

Canned Cycle Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 148

Depth (Z Parameter). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 149

Dwell (P Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 149

Feedrate (F Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 149

Canceling or Replacing Canned Cycles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 150


G Code Groups

The G codes are grouped by functions.

Table 3–3. G Code Groups

Group Function Group Function

00 One-Shot 10 Return from Canned Cycles

01 Interpolation 11 Scaling

02 Plane Selection 12 Macro/Subprogram

03 Dimension 14 Coordinate System Selection

05 Feed 15 Precision Cornering

06 Measurement 16 Rotation

07 Cutter Compensation 17 Polar Coordinates

08 Tool Length Compensation 18 Mirroring

09 Canned Cycles 19 Program Parameters for Surface Finish/Data Smoothing

The system displays the number 010 as an alarm if an invalid G code (one not listed in the following table) is entered.More than one G code can be specified in the same block. If more than one is from the same group, the last G code entered is active.Specifying a group 01 (Interpolation) G code in a canned cycle automatically enters the G80 condition (Canned Cycle Cancel). Conversely, a group 01 G code is not affected by the canned cycle G codes.


G Code Table

The following table lists the G codes, identifies the defaults (in the shaded areas), lists Modal (M) or Non-modal (N) types, identifies groups, and describes the G codes’ functions.

Some G codes are strictly BNC or strictly ISNC, and are identified as such in this manual. Otherwise, the G codes apply to either dialect.


G Code Type Group Function

G00 M 01 Positioning (Rapid Traverse)

G01 M Linear Interpolation (Cutting Feed)

G02 M Circular Interpolation/Helical CW

G02.4 M 3D Circular Interpolation CW

G03 M Circular Interpolation/Helical CCW

G03.4 M 3D Circular Interpolation CCW

G04 N 00 Dwell, Exact Stop

G05.1 M 19 Surface Finish Parameters

G05.2 M Data Smoothing

G05.3 M Surface Finish Quality

G07.2 M 00 Cylindrical Rotary Wrap On

G07.3 M 00 Cylindrical Rotary Wrap Off

G08.1 M 00 ASR Command Buffer On

G08.2 M 00 ASR Command Buffer Off

G09 N 00 Decelerate Axis to Zero

G10 N Data Setting

G11 N Data Setting Mode Cancel

G15 M 17 Polar Coordinates Cancel

G16 M Polar Coordinates

G17 M 02 XY Plane Selection

G18 M ZX Plane Selection

G19 M YZ Plane Selection

ISNC G20 M 06 Input in Inch

ISNC G21 M Input in mm

G28 N 00 Return to Reference Point

G29 N Return from Reference Point

G31 N Skip Function


G Code Type Group Function (Continued)

G40 M 07 Cutter Compensation Cancel

G41 M Cutter Compensation Left

G41.2 M 3D Tool Geometry Compensation

G42 M Cutter Compensation Right

G43 M 08 Tool Length Compensation + Direction

G43.4 M 5-Axis Linear Interpolation

G44 M Tool Length Compensation - Direction

G45 N 00 Tool Offset Increase

G46 N Tool Offset Decrease

G47 N Tool Offset Double Increase

G48 N Tool Offset Double Decrease

G49 M 08 Tool Length Offset Compensation Cancel

G50 M 11 Scaling Cancel

G51 M Scaling

G50.1 M 18 Mirroring Cancel

G51.1 M Mirroring

G52 N 00 Local Coordinate System Setting

G53 N Machine Coordinate System Selection

G54 M 14 Work Coordinate System 1 Selection

G54.1 M Aux Work Coordinate Systems

G55 M Work Coordinate System 2 Selection





G61 M 15 Decelerates to Zero–Precision Cornering

G64 M Cancels Precision Cornering

G65 N 12 Macro Command, Subprogram Call

G66 M Modal Subprogram Call

G67 M Modal Subprogram Call Cancel

G68 M 16 Coordinate Rotation


G68.2 M Global Rotation NC Transform Plane

G68.3 M Local Rotation NC Transform Plane

G69 M Coordinate System Rotation Cancel

BNC G70 M 06 Input in Inch

BNC G71 M Input in mm

G73 M 09 Peck Drilling Cycle

ISNC G74 M Left-handed Tapping Cycle

ISNC G74with M29

M Left-handed Rigid Tapping

BNC G74 M 01 Single-quadrant Circular Interpolation

BNC G75 M Multi-quadrant Circular Interpolation

G76 M 09 Bore Orient Cycle

G80 M Canned Cycle Cancel

G81 M Drilling Cycle, Spot Boring

G82 M Drilling Cycle, Counter Boring

G83 M Peck Drilling Cycle

G84 M Tapping Cycle

ISNC G84.2 M Rigid Tapping Cycle

ISNC G84.3 M Rigid Tapping Cycle

ISNC G84 with M29

M Rigid Tapping Cycle

G85 M Boring Cycle

BNC G86 M Bore Orient Cycle

ISNC G86 M Bore Rapid Out Cycle

BNC G87 M Chip Breaker Cycle

ISNC G87 M Back Boring Cycle

BNC G88 M Rigid Tapping Cycle

ISNC G88 M Boring Cycle Manual Feed Out, Dwell

G89 M Boring Cycle Bore and Dwell

G90 M 03 Absolute Command

G91 M Incremental Command

G92 N 00 Programming of Absolute Zero Point



G93 M 05 Inverse Time

G94 M Feed per Minute

G94.1 M 05 Rotary Tangential Velocity Control

G98 M 10 Return to Initial Point in Canned Cycle

G99 M Return to R Point in Canned Cycle

Table 3–4. G Codes in order of Codes



The following table lists the G codes by group, identifies the defaults (shaded areas), lists Modal (M) or Non-modal (N) types, and describes the G codes’ functions.

Group G Codes Type Function

00 G04 N Dwell, Exact Stop

G07 M Cylindrical Rotary Wrap

G08 M ASR Command Buffering

G09 N Decelerate Axis to Zero

G10 N Data Setting

G11 N Data Setting Mode Cancel

G28 N Return to Reference Point

G29 N Return from Reference Point

G31 N Skip Function

G45 N Tool Offset Increase

G46 N Tool Offset Decrease

G47 N Tool Offset Double Increase

G48 N Tool Offset Double Decrease

G92 N Programming of Absolute Zero Point

01 G00 M Positioning (Rapid Traverse)

G01 M Linear Interpolation (Cutting Speed)

G02 M Circular Interpolation/Helical CW

G02.4 M 3D Circular Interpolation CW

G03 M Circular Interpolation/Helical CCW

G03.4 M 3D Circular Interpolation/Helical CCW

BNC G74 M Single-quadrant Circular Interpolation

BNC G75 M Multi-quadrant Circular Interpolation

02 G17 M XY Plane Selection

G18 M ZX Plane Selection

G19 M YZ Plane Selection


Group G Codes Type Function (Continued)

03 G90 M Absolute Command

G91 M Incremental Command

05 G93 M Inverse Time

G94 M Feed per Minute

G94.1 M Rotary Tangential Velocity Control

06 BNC G70 M Input in Inch

BNC G71 M Input in mm

07 G40 M Cutter Compensation Cancel

G41 M Cutter Compensation Left

G41.2 M 3D Tool Geometry Compensation

G42 M Cutter Compensation Right

08 G43 M Total Length Compensation + Direction

G43.4 M 5-Axis Linear Interpolation

G44 M Total Length Compensation – Direction

G49 M Tool Length Offset Compensation Cancel


09 G73 M Peck Drilling Cycle

ISNC G74 M Left-handed Tapping Cycle

ISNC G74 with M29

M Rapid Tapping

G76 M Bore Orient Cycle

G80 M Canned Cycle Cancel

G81 M Drilling Cycle, Spot Boring

G82 M Drilling Cycle, Counter Boring

G83 M Peck Drilling Cycle

G84 M Tapping Cycle

ISNC G84.2


ISNC G84.3


ISNC G84 with M29


G85 M Boring Cycle

BNC G86 M Bore Orient Cycle

ISNC G86 M Bore Rapid Out Cycle

BNC G87 M Chip Breaker Cycle

ISNC G87 M Back Boring Cycle

BNC G88 M Rigid Tapping Cycle

ISNC G88 M Boring Cycle Manual Feed Out, Dwell

G89 M Boring Cycle, Bore and Dwell


Table 3–5. G Codes in order of Groups

Group G Codes Type Function (Continued)

10 G98 M Return to Initial Point in Canned Cycle

G99 M Return to R Point in Canned Cycle

11 G50 M Scaling Cancel

G51 M Scaling

12 G65 N Macro Command, Subprogram Call

G66 M Modal Subprogram Call

G67 M Modal Subprogram Call Cancel

14 G54 M Work Coordinate System 1 Selection






15 G61 M Decelerates to Zero-Precision Cornering

G64 M Cancels Precision Cornering

16 G68 M Coordinate Rotation



G69 M Coordinate System Rotation Cancel

17 G15 M Polar Coordinate Cancel

G16 M Polar Coordinates

19 G05.1 M Surface Finish Parameters

G05.2 M Data Smoothing

G05.3 M Surface Finish Quality


Rapid Traverse (G00)

Rapid Traverse mode (G00) is the default and moves the axes to a specified location at the rapid feedrate programmed in the Program Parameters screen. Up to five axes (X, Y, Z, A, B, C) of coordinated rapid motion can be specified while in this mode.

Set either a linear or non-linear tool path on the NC Parameters screen. The linear tool path is the default. ISNC and BNC have different linear tool path modes. In the ISNC linear mode the tool motion is in all three axes (X, Y, Z) simultaneously. In the BNC linear mode the motion is divided into separate X, Y, and Z moves. The motion in the XY plane is a straight line.

The ISNC and BNC non-linear modes are the same. In the non-linear tool path mode, the XY plane motion is broken down into a 45° move and a straight line move parallel to either the X or Y axis. The determination of whether the 45° move or the straight line move is made depends first on the distances from the current position to the end position along the X and Y axes.

If it is desired that the tool move to a position which is compensated, G41 or G42 needs to be specified along with the offset before any axis coordinates are given. The rapid traverse rate is set on the General Parameters screen.

FormatThe format of the rapid traverse command is as follows:

G00 X_____Y_____Z_____A_____B_____C____W____

where

X is the Primary X Motion Dimension

Y is the Primary Y Motion Dimension

Z is the Primary Z Motion Dimension

A is the Rotary Dimension around X-axis

B is the Rotary Dimension around Y-axis

C is the Rotary Dimension around Z-axis

W is the secondary, linear axis in the Z direction

The G00 mode is canceled by using the G01, G02, G03, or canned cycle (G73, G76, G81–G89) commands.

G17, G18, or G19 determine plane of offset.

G90 specifies absolute dimensioning and G91 specifies incremental dimensioning.

Another work coordinate system can be selected by using commands G54 through G59.


ExampleIf one axis of movement is specified in a G00 block, that axis moves at the rapid traverse feedrate. When two axes of movement are specified in a G00 block, the rapid traverse feedrate is assigned to the longest vector component. The resulting feed that appears on the screen may actually exceed the rapid traverse feedrate parameter.

If a block containing a G00 word also contains a Z word that causes the Z-axis to move away from the part, the Z-axis moves first. The other specified axes then move in linear or non-linear mode at the rapid feedrate to their specified end points. If Z is to move toward the part, all axes except Z move in linear or non-linear mode at rapid feedrate to their specified end points; then Z moves down to its end point. If no Z is programmed, all axes move at rapid feedrate coordinated to the specified end point. G00 is a member of the tool positioning code group and is canceled by G01, G02, G03, and G81–G89.

The diagram below shows the two different rapid traverse modes:

Figure 3–13. G00 Axis Movement

This code is used for positioning only and should never be used for cutting material.

1 Start Point

2 End Point

3 Linear

4 Non-Linear


Linear Interpolation (G01)

The Linear Interpolation code (G01) moves the axes to a specified location at the programmed feedrate. Up to five axes (X, Y, Z, A, B, C) of coordinated motion can be specified while in this mode. The programmed feedrate can be changed by adding an F word to any NC block while in this mode. X, Y, Z, A, B, C, and F dimensions need to be supplied only if they change.

FormatThe format of the linear interpolation command is as follows:

G01 X_____ Y_____ Z_____ A_____ B_____C____ F_____

where







F is the Feedrate. If rotary axis parameters (A and B) are used, the feedrate units are in degrees/minute.

G01 is a member of the tool positioning code group and is canceled by G00, G02, G03 and the canned cycle (G73, G76, G81–G89) commands.

G90 specifies absolute dimensioning and G91 specifies incremental dimensioning.

G41 or G42 may be optionally selected if a cutter offset is desired.

This code is used when the tool is in contact with the work piece to cut a line parallel to an axis or at an angle to an axis.


ExampleThe diagram below illustrates the linear interpolation axis movement:

Figure 3–14. G01 Axis Movement

1 Start Point

2 End Point


Circular and Helical Interpolation (G02 and G03)

These two codes are members of the tool positioning code group. The Clockwise Circular or Helical Interpolation code (G02) causes the axes to generate an arc or helix in a clockwise direction. The previous block’s end point defines the start point of the arc.

The Counterclockwise Circular or Helical Interpolation code (G03) causes the axes to generate an arc or helix in a counterclockwise direction. The previous block’s end point defines the start point of the arc.

If the first segment in a contour is an arc with a radius smaller than the radius of the tool, the +-control will generate an error message indicating that you need to use a tool with a smaller radius or program a larger radius. An error message is generated only if the Enable Lead In/Out Error Checking parameter in NC Configuration Parameters is Yes.

Calculate the linear feedrate to verify that it does not exceed various limit values.

Both G02 and G03 codes are canceled by G00, G01, the canned cycle (G73, G76, G81–G89) commands, or by each other.

The programmed feedrate can be changed by adding an F word to any NC block when this code is active.

G17, G18, or G19 specify plane of interpolation.

G41 or G42 may be optionally selected if a cutter offset is desired.

G40 is used to cancel cutter offset.

G02 or G03 cannot be used in a start up block in offset mode.

(X,Y) for G17, (X,Z) for G18, and (Y,Z) for G19 specify the end location on the selected plane.

R or the incremental coordinates ((I,J) or (I,K) or (J,K)) specify the arc center location. The R is modal and stays in effect until another R value is specified or (I,J) is used. With the R (radius) parameter, you specify the radius. You do not need to calculate the center point.

• A positive R produces an arc of less than or equal to 180°. • A negative R produces an arc of greater than or equal to 180°. • The R takes precedence over an I, J, or K in the same block.For BNC, I, J, K, and R are modal for G02 and G03. The I, J, and K center point location is incremental from start point in G91 mode and absolute coordinates in G90 mode.

For ISNC, when G02 or G03 are specified, the I, J, and K are reset to 0.0. They remain modal until another G02 or G03 is encountered. R is not reset to 0.0. For ISNC, the I, J, and K are incremental from the start point in both G90 and G91 mode.


FormatThe formats of the Circular Interpolation commands are as follows:

Circular interpolation (Z = 0) Helical interpolation (Z ≠ 0)

G02/G03 (for G17) X_____ Y_____ {R_____ or [I_____ and J_____ ]}Z_____ F_____

G02/G03 (for G18) X_____ Z_____ {R_____ or [I_____ and K_____ ]}Z_____ F_____

G02/G03 (for G19) Y_____ Z_____ {R_____ or [J_____ and K_____ ]}Z_____ F_____

where




R is the Circular Interpolation Radius

I is the X-axis Arc Center

J is the Y-axis Arc Center

K is the Z-axis Arc Center

F is the Feedrate

You can specify an R value for arcs when the arc is in the G17 XY plane or the G19 YZ plane.

Arcs use the right-hand coordinate system for all planes, except when using Basic NC for the G18 XZ plane. Arcs use a left-hand coordinate system when using the Basic NC for the G18 XZ plane.

When interpreting an arc in ISNC, a helix will be the result if a valid center point was established in the previous block and only a Z value is given.

F specifies the feedrate in degrees/minute along the arc in the circular plane.


This diagram illustrates circular and helical interpolation:

Figure 3–15. Circular and Helical Interpolation

1 Start Point

2 End Point (Circular)

3 End Point (Helical)


G02 ExampleConsider the following section of an NC program using a G02 code in absolute mode using R to specify the modal turn radius:

NC Part Program 1 InchG02.FNC

%

G00 G90

M25

T1 M06

Z5.05

X2.0 Y0.0

S2000 M03

Z0.05

G01 Z-0.5 F10.

G01 X2.0 Y0.0

G01 X0.5

G02 X0.0 Y0.5 R0.5 ⇐ R needs to be specified only once.

G01 Y2.5

G02 X0.5 Y3.0

G01 X3.5

G02 X4.0 Y2.5

G01 Y0.5

G02 X3.5 Y0.0

G01 X2.0

M25

M05

M02


BNC G03 ExampleConsider the following section of a BNC program using a G03 code in absolute mode:

NC Part Program 1 InchG03ABS.HNC

%

N110 Z0 G91

N115 T01 M06

N116 X0. Y0. Z0.

N120 F40 S1000 M3

N130 G00 X3. Y4.

N140 G01 X3. Y2. F10

N150 G03 X4. Y1.5858 I4. J3.

N160 X7.4142 Y5. J5.

N170 G01 Y7.

N220 M02

E

This is an example of the same geometry using the incremental mode:

NC Part Program 1 InchG03INC.HNC

%

N110 Z0

N115 T01 M06

N116 X0. Y0. Z0.

N120 F40 S1000 M3

N130 G00 X3. Y4.

N140 G01 Y-2. F10

N150 G03 X1. Y-.4142 I1. J1.

N160 X3.4142 Y3. I0. J3.4142

N170 G01 Y2.

N220 M02

E

A, B, and C words are not allowed in circular interpolation mode. The programmed feedrate can be changed by adding an F word to any block while in this mode.

X, Y, and Z define the end point of the arc and I, J, and K define the center point of the arc. I represents the X center point; J represents the Y center point; and K represents the Z center point. The X, Y, Z, and F words do not need to be programmed when you are initially setting the circular interpolation mode if they have not changed from the previous block.


For BNC, the I, J, and K dimensions must be specified when initially setting the circular interpolation mode (when a G02 or G03 is in the block) to establish a center point.

For ISNC, I, J, or K are set to 0.0 if they are not initially specified.

Once the circular interpolation mode is set, the X, Y, Z, I, J, K, and F dimensions need to be supplied only if they change. A block with missing dimensions uses the last specified locations.

If the programmed end point is not on the arc or helix, an end point is calculated using the start point, center point, and programmed end point. The start point and center point determine the radius of the arc and thus the distance of the calculated end point from the center point. The center point and programmed end point determine the line on which the calculated end point results.

The chord error of arcs and helices may be controlled through the chord error parameter in the Program Parameters screen. The default chord error is 0.0001 inches (.003 mm). This creates very smooth arcs, but may limit the maximum feedrate for the arc or helix. Larger chord errors allow higher feedrate arcs or helices, but may be less accurate.

3D Circular Interpolation (G02.4 and G03.4)

The 3D Circular Interpolation (G02.4 and G03.4) codes are part of the tool positioning code group. These codes require two lines of NC code:

• The first line contains a set of X, Y, and Z values which represent the Intermediate Point.

• The second line contains a set of X, Y, and Z values which represent the End Point.

The Radius, Direction (CW or CCW), and Center Point are calculated based on the current location, the Intermediate Point, and the End Point. G02.4 and G03.4 can be used interchangeably to represent the same arc. The actual direction is calculated by the software.

A circle or circular helix may be programmed by either using the same end and start point, or by not programming the end points. Ensure that the specified end point is mathematically on the arc.

Arcs in this system are approximations that are comprised of small line segments or arc chords.

Both G02.4 and G03.4 codes are canceled by G00, G01, the canned cycle commands (G73, G76, G81-G89), or by each other.

The programmed feedrate can be changed by adding an F word to any NC block when this code is active.

G17, G18, G19 are irrelevant for these G codes.

G41 and G42 may not be used with these G codes.


ExampleBelow is a program example using G03.4:

%

T1 M6 S500 M3

G0 X0 Y0 Z6

G1 X0 Y0.0 F5.

Z0

G3.4 X5.0 Y2.5 Z1.0 (Intermediate Point)

X10.0 Y0.0 Z0.0 (End Point)

G0Z6

M2

E

Dwell Mode (G04)

The Dwell Mode code (G04) causes the machine to delay the shift to the next block in the program by the amount specified by parameter P or X for a specified amount of time. When an integer is used with the G04 command, the value is multiplied by 0.01 for BNC and.001 or .0001 for ISNC depending on the Least Dwell Units programmed on the NC Parameters screen.

The BNC format for the dwell time is as follows:

Real Number:.3 second = G04 X.3 or G04 P.3

Integer Number:.3 second = G04 X30 or G04 P30

This is the ISNC format for the dwell time programmed with a real number:

Real Number:.3 second = G04 X.3 or G04 P.3

When .001 is programmed for the Least Dwell Units field on the NC Parameters screen, the ISNC format for the dwell time programmed with an integer is this:

Integer Number: .3 second = G04 X300 or G04 P300

When .0001 is programmed for the Least Dwell Units field on the NC Parameters screen, the ISNC format for the dwell time programmed with an integer is this:

Integer Number:.3 second = G04 X3000 or G04 P3000

The Dwell Mode code is only active in the programmed block, but the dwell time is modal and it affects most of the canned cycles.

A decimal after an integer indicates whole seconds. For example, G04 P5 = .005 second dwell, while G04 P5. = 5 second dwell.


Format

G04 P_____ or X_____

where

P is the Dwell Time

X is the Dwell Time

The range of values is 0.001–9999.999 seconds.

Surface Finish (G05.1)

The code determines the type of finish quality, P_.

• P1 = Precision

• P2 = Standard

• P3 = Performance

The parameter Q_ sets the chord segment for the finish, where the Q value is the acceptable error value.

Data Smoothing (G05.2)

Q_ sets the Tool Path Tolerance. The deviation from the tool path the system will tolerate must be between 0 to 0.0005 inches, inclusive (0 to 0.012 mm).

Surface Finish Quality (G05.3)

The G05.3 command is used with the Select Surface option.

G05.3 P_, where the P value is 1.0 to 100.0. P1 gives a smoother surface but requires a longer cutting time. P100.0 cuts down time to cut the part, but gives a rougher surface finish.


Cylindrical Rotary Wrap On (G07.2)

The G07.2 code wraps X-, Y-, and Z-axis commanded motion to a cylinder for 4- and 5-axis machines, and can be used in transform planes.

There are two methods for setting the cylinder location and orientation: Rotary Axis Method and Vector Method. Using default parameters for both styles, the X-direction is wrapped around the cylinder, the Y-direction points along the cylinder axis, and the Z-direction always maps to the cylinder radius.

Tool changes can be safely performed while milling with G07.2, because the control utilizes ASR Command Buffering. See Automatic Safe Repositioning Command Buffer On (G08.1), on page 3 - 54.

Format

G07.2 requires parameters to identify the location and the orientation of the cylinder:

Rotary Axis Method

The Rotary Axis Method wraps XYZ to the cylinder.

G07.2 X_____Y_____Z_____ C_____ D_____P_____L_____Q_____

• X_____Y_____Z_____ is cylinder coordinate system location with respect to the current coordinate system. If not specified, the control sets them to zero.

• C______indicates cylinder axis is along C-axis and the # indicates the mapping radius. The radius cannot be zero. If the radius is negative, it will wrap to the inside of the cylinder along the negative radial direction (180 degrees rotation). A_ or B_ can be specified instead of C to define the rotary axis the cylinder is parallel to.

• D_____ (optional) Indicates inside cylinder wrap. When specified, it will invert the wrap at the same angle (no 180 degree rotation as when a negative radius is specified).

• P_____ (optional) Indicates lead/lag distance (tangential to positive rotation direction at contact point on cylinder).

• L_____ (optional) Incremental distance from first position after G07.2 to the Retract Plane (same as for G08.2). If not specified, control uses L=infinity.

• Q_____ (optional) Incremental distance from first position after G07.2 to the Safety Plane (same as for G08.2). If not specified, control uses Q=0 (Safety Plane passes through the Target Point).

• H_____(optional) The rotation in degree about the Z-direction for the 3D feature that will be wrapped (prior to being wrapped). 0 degrees is the default if no H parameter is specified; this will align the Y-direction to the cylinder axis and the X-direction to be wrapped around the cylinder.


Vector Method

The Vector Method uses vectors (IJK and UVW) to define the zero-angle direction and the cylinder axis direction.

G07.2 X_____Y_____Z_____I_____J_____K_____U_____V_____W_____R_____D_____P_____L_____Q_____

• X_____Y_____Z_____ is the cylinder coordinate system location with respect to the current coordinate system. If not specified, the control sets them to zero.

• I_____J_____K_____ is the cylinder Zero Rotation direction with respect to the current coordinate system.

• U_____V_____W_____ is the cylinder axis direction with respect to the current coordinate system.

• R_____ is the mapping radius. The radius cannot be zero. If the radius is negative, it will wrap to the inside of the cylinder along the negative radial direction (180 degrees rotation).

• D_____ (optional) indicates inside cylinder wrap. When specified, it will invert the wrap at the same angle (no 180 degree rotation as when a negative radius is specified).

• P_____ (optional) indicates lead/lag distance (tangential to positive rotation direction at contact point on cylinder).

• L_____ (optional) Incremental distance from first position after G07.2 to the Retract Plane (same as for G08.2). If not specified, control uses L=infinity.

• Q_____ (optional) Incremental distance from first position after G07.2 to the Safety Plane (same as for G08.2). If not specified, control uses Q=0 (Safety Plane passes through the Target Point).

Cylindrical Rotary Wrap Off (G07.3)

This command cancels the G07.2 command.


Automatic Safe Repositioning Command Buffer On (G08.1)

The G08.1 code turns on the Automatic Safe Repositioning (ASR) Command Buffering. This feature allows NC programs to automatically retract, reorient, and plunge from anywhere in the machine to any point in the program using a series of moves computed automatically that do not violate machine limits. When G08.1 is called, the control will stop outputting machine motion and commands. Internally the control will continue to process the program and buffer up all machine commands. Each subsequent block is processed and the target position is updated with each new programmed move.

Machine Movement

The following example outlines the basics of Automatic Safe Repositioning (ASR). This example is for an SR machine; the objective is to safely move the tool from one Transform Plane to another, both at different locations and orientations.

The following graphic shows the tool in the begin and target positions, as well as the retract plane and machine limits:

The tool starts in the begin position (1) and retracts along the tool vector (direction) to the machine limits, M140 (2):

Retract PlaneMachineX, Z limits

TargetPosition

PositionBegin

1

Retract Plane

2

Retract Plane


The tool retracts to the vertical (Z) machine limit (3) and then re-orients to the target position orientation (4):

The tool tip moves to the retract plane (5) and then moves to a point above the plunge position in XY of the retract plane (6):

If the tool tip is not at or above the retract plane, program execution is stopped and an error message is generated.

3

Retract Plane

4

Retract Plane

5

Retract Plane

6

Retract Plane


The tool plunges to the target position along the plunge direction (7):

Automatic Safe Repositioning Command Buffer Off (G08.2)

The G08.2 code turns off ASR Command Buffering. When the G08.2 command is called, the buffer state is turned off and the control outputs any buffered up machine commands (for example, preparatory functions, tool change, and so on).

There are two versions of ASR available. Option 1 is a simple retract, reorient and reposition to the specified location and orientation. Option 2 adds buffering of commands from a start block to an end block.

Format

The command format is as follows:

Option 1—Direct Reposition

G08.2 X_Y_Z_[I_J_K_ or A_B_C_][L_][D_]

where

X_Y_Z_ are the target positions to move to.

I_J_K_ are the target tool vectors to reorient to. Cannot be used with A_B_C_.

The control will not output redundant commands after the ASR Command Buffer state is turned off. For example, if a rotary clamp was on before G08.1 and the clamp was toggled off and on several times, then finally set to off, G08.2 will only output one unclamp command.

G31 Skip Function is not compatible with ASR Command Buffering.

M00 (Program Stop) and M01 (Planned Stop) codes are skipped in ASR buffering mode. Codes are re-posted when buffering is no longer active, except in a Recovery/Restart.

7

Retract Plane


A_B_C are the target rotary axes positions. Cannot be used with I_J_K_.

L_ is the incremental safety clearance distance along the tool vector to the target position. An error will be reported and the program will stop if the tool tip cannot clear this distance from the target position at the start of the final approach move.

D_ is the linearization override parameter that specifies how the control will reorient to the new tool vector or rotary angles. D0 forces linearization off; D1 forces linearization on. This parameter is optional; when not present the control uses the current linearization interpolation mode G43.4.

Option 2—Buffer Command Direct Reposition

G08.1 (ASR Command Buffering start; control begins buffering commands.

No physical motion until G08.2 is called.)

…

G0X_Y_Z_I_J_K_

G08.2 [L_][D_] (ASR Command buffering end; control moves to the position and

orientation prior to this block)

where



Tool Vector Canned Cycles with G08.2

NC canned cycles can be modified to execute along the current tool vector at a 3D point without having to define a full Transform Plane (G68.2). The G08.2 ASR Command can be used to re-orient the tool to a new tool vector after which the canned cycle can be commanded to execute along the new tool vector:

G08.2 X_Y_Z_I_J_K (ASR move to start point and tool vector orientation)

G81 X_Y_Z_I_R_[P_Q_L_K_F_S_](e.g. Drill along current tool vector)

where

X_Y_Z_ are the target positions to move to.

I_J_K_ are the target tool vectors to reorient to. Cannot be used with A_B_C_.


A_B_C are the target rotary axes positions. Cannot be used with I_J_K_.



Precision Cornering (G09)

The Precision Cornering code (G09) decelerates the axes to zero velocity at the end of the block in which it is programmed. After stopping, the axes accelerate to the programmed feedrate in the next block. This causes a sharp corner to be cut regardless of the programmed feedrate. The G09 code is not part of a G code group, so it affects only the axis movement of the block in which it is specified.


Setting Work Coordinate Systems with G10

This code is used for setting tool offsets, entering tool wear data, and changing work coordinate systems. The G11 command cancels the data setting mode.

Setting External Work Zero Offsets (G10 with L2)

One of six work coordinate systems can be changed as shown below where P is used to select the external work zero point offset value (P parameter = 0), or one of the work coordinate systems (P parameter = 1 to 99), and X, Y, Z, A, B, C is the work zero point offset value of each axis. G90 specifies absolute dimensioning and G91 specifies incremental dimensioning.

FormatThe command format for setting external work zero offsets is as follows:

G10 L2 P____ X____Y____Z____ A ____ B ____C____

where

P is the Work Coordinate System







G10 commands can not be performed by graphics at the same time that the program is running.


Setting Tool Offsets with G10

This code is used for setting tool length and radius offsets. The G11 command cancels the data setting mode.

Initializing Tool Length Offsets (G10 with P, R)

G10 is used with the P and R parameters. P is the offset number 01 through 200, and R is the offset amount which may be absolute or incremental depending on G90 or G91.

FormatThis is the command format for initializing tool length offsets:

G10 P____ R____

where

P is the Tool Length Offset Number

R is the Offset value

Initializing Tool Offsets (G10 with T, H, D)

G10 is used with the T, H and D parameters. The T parameter is the offset number 01 through 200, H is the tool length offset and D is the tool radius offset.

FormatThis is the command format for initializing tool offsets:

G10 T___ H___ D____

where

T is the Offset Index Number

H is the Tool Length Offset Value

D is the Tool Radius Offset Value


Assigning Tool Offsets (G10 with L3)

The following example shows how to assign tool offsets. T is the tool number, H is the tool length offset number, and D is the cutter compensation (offset) number.

FormatThe command format for assigning tool offsets is as follows:

G10 L3 T_____H_____D_____

where

T is the Offset Index

H is the tool Length Offset Value

D is the Tool Radius Offset Value

ExampleThe following tool offset initialization example shows how to set up a program to assign offsets to the tools.

G10L3

T0001 H_____ D_____ (for tool 1)

T000n H_____ D_____(for tool n)

G11 (to cancel)

Polar Coordinates Command (G16)

This command allows coordinates in the current block to be input in polar coordinates (radius and angle). The first coordinate in the currently selected plane is the radius coordinate in mm, and the second coordinate in the plane is the angle in degrees. For the XY plane, the X value represents radius and the Y value represents the angle.

G16 is canceled by G15 (Polar Coordinates Cancel).

FormatThe command format for Polar Coordinates is as follows:

G16 X____ Y_____ Z_____

where

X is the Primary X Motion Dimension, Dwell Time


The tool number does not require leading zeroes.



ExampleSelect Metric mode for the following sample program using the Polar Coordinates command:

NC Part Program 1 MetricPIE.FNC

%

T1 M06

M03 G00 G90 X0 Y0 Z0 S1800

G01 Z-.25 F20.

G01 G16 X50. Y60.

G03 X50. Y120. R50.

G15

G01 X0 Y0

M02

Plane Selection

The three codes in the plane selection group and their relationships to each other are illustrated below:

Figure 3–16. Plane Selection Group Codes


XY Plane Selection (G17)

The XY Plane Selection code (G17) is the default and sets the plane for circular interpolation modes G02 and G03 to the XY plane. The X, Y, Z, I, and J words are valid in circular interpolation blocks; K words are invalid. If a Z word is programmed in the circular interpolation block, a helix is generated in the XY plane. The direction of an arc or helix in the XY plane can be determined by looking at the XY plane with positive X to the right and positive Y going up. The XY plane is a right-handed coordinate system (thumb points to positive Z, and fingers wrap in counterclockwise direction).

In G17, the arc end point is defined by the X and Y words in the block. The arc center point is defined by the I and J words in the block.

G17 is canceled by G18 and G19.

FormatThe format of the XY plane selection command is as follows:

G17 X____ Y____

where



ExampleThe diagram below illustrates XY plane selection:

Figure 3–17. XY Plane Selection (G17)


XZ Plane Selection (G18)

The XZ Plane Selection code (G18) sets the plane for the circular interpolation codes G02 and G03 to the XZ plane. The X, Y, Z, I, and K words are valid in circular interpolation blocks; J words are invalid. If a Y word is programmed in the circular interpolation block, a helix is generated in the XZ plane. The direction of an arc or helix in the XZ plane can be determined by looking at the XZ plane with positive X to the right and positive Z going up.

Basic NC and ISNC handle the XZ plane differently. For Basic NC, the XZ plane is a left-handed coordinate system (thumb points to positive Y, and fingers wrap in clockwise direction). For ISNC, the XZ plane is a right-handed coordinate system (thumb points to positive Y, and fingers wrap in a counterclockwise direction).

In G18, the arc end point is defined by the X and Z words in the block. The arc center point is defined by the I and K words in the block.


FormatThe format of the XZ plane selection command is as follows:

G18 Z____ X____

where




ExampleThe diagrams below illustrate XZ plane selection in Basic NC and in ISNC:

Figure 3–18. Basic NC XZ Plane Selection (G18)

Figure 3–19. ISNC NC XZ Plane Selection (G18)


YZ Plane Selection (G19)

The YZ Plane Selection code (G19) sets the plane for circular interpolation codes G02 and G03 to the YZ plane. The X, Y, Z, J, and K words are valid in circular interpolation blocks; I words are invalid. If an X word is programmed in the circular interpolation block, a helix is generated in the YZ plane. The direction of an arc or helix in the YZ plane can be determined by looking at the YZ plane with positive Y to the right and positive Z going up. The YZ plane is a right-handed coordinate system (thumb points to positive X, and fingers wrap in counterclockwise direction).

In G19, the arc end point is defined by the Y and Z words in the block. The arc center point is defined by the J and K words in the block.


FormatThe format of the YZ plane selection command is as follows:

G19 Y____ Z____

where



ExampleThe diagram below illustrates YZ plane selection:

Figure 3–20. YZ Plane Selection (G19)


Units of Measure ISNC G20, G21

Before setting the coordinate system at the beginning of the program, the units of measure must be specified in an independent block. A part program may switch between English and Metric modes as long as the format of the dimensions is correct for the chosen mode.

The Imperial Units of Measure code (ISNC G20) signals the system that the dimensions are in inches.

ISNC G20 is canceled by G21.

The Metric Units of Measure code (ISNC G21) signals the system that the dimensions are metric units.

ISNC G21 is canceled by G20.

FormatThese are the command formats for the inch/metric conversion commands:

ISNC:

G20: Inch command

G21: Metric command

Automatic Return To and From Reference Point (G28 and G29)

Any point within the machine coordinate system can be selected as the reference point. The return to reference point is often used to move the part forward so you can remove chips from the part and inspect the part. Select the reference point on the NC Parameters screen.

The Automatic Return To Reference Point command (G28) specifies an automatic return to the reference point for the designated axes. An intermediate point can be specified with the X____Y____Z____ parameters. If no intermediate point coordinates are specified, the system uses the previous intermediate point coordinates. If no intermediate point coordinates are specified during the current program execution, the machine returns directly to the reference point.

The Automatic Return From Reference Point command (G29) specifies an automatic return from the reference point through the intermediate point, if specified by a previous G28, and to the end point designated by the X, Y, and Z parameters. If no intermediate point coordinates were specified during the current program execution, the machine will return directly from the reference point to the specified end point.

The ISNC G20 and G21 codes do not affect the units of measure used in the graphics and machine status display screens. The displays are controlled by the units selected when entering NC editing.


G28 FormatThe format for the automatic return to reference point command is:

G28 X____ or Y____ or Z____

where




These parameters specify the absolute or incremental location of the intermediate point in coordinates relative to the current coordinate system. The G28 command is only performed for the axes which follow the G28. For example, if an X value follows the G28, the machine moves to the X reference point, not the Y or Z reference point.

As another example, a typical method to home the Z axis using incremental mode is shown below. The combination of G91 and a value of zero for the Z axis causes the Z axis to move directly to the home (reference) point without moving through an intermediate point.

G91 G28 Z0

G90

.

.

.

G29 FormatThe format for the Automatic Return to Reference Point command is:

G29 X____ Y____ Z____

where




When the G29 command is given, the system returns to the most recently used working coordinate system. These parameters specify the absolute or incremental location of the end point in coordinates relative to the current coordinate system in effect when the G28 command was processed.


ExampleThis sample program uses G28 and G29 to return the spindle to and from the reference point. Set Part Zero to X12 Y9 before running the program.

NC Part Program 1 InchPLAIN_28.FNC%

G00 X0 Y0 Z0

G28 X-7 Y-8

G29 X3 Y-4

M02


Skip (Probing) Function (G31)

The Skip Function command is used to perform probing within an NC program, allowing you to specify a target position. The machine axis will stop when the target position is reached, or if the probe comes in contact with another surface. The Skip Function command can be programmed on a PC, but it can only be run properly on the control. On a PC, the command works similarly to the Linear Interpolation (Cutting Feed) (G01) command. The Skip Function command is a one-shot command and is only effective in the current block.

Two-touch and single-touch probing is supported. These modes are selected with the M41 and M42 codes. Two-touch probing is the default probing mode.

When performing two-touch probing (M42 specified), the probe moves in the specified direction until it touches the part, backs up away from the part, and then moves forward again at the specified feedrate. When the probe touches the part again, the trigger point is stored in variable #5061 (X axis), #5062 (Y axis), or #5063 (Z axis) with the NCPP option. The NCPP option allows you to create macro subroutines and use conditional statements and math functions. (Refer to NC Productivity Package Option, on page 3 - 183 for more information about the variables and subprograms.)

When performing one-touch probing (M41 specified), the probe does not back up after the first touch.

Values may be written to tool offset variables so they can be viewed after running the program on the Tool Offset screen. If the system does not have the NCPP option, the values need to be recorded manually. A Programmed Stop (M00) command can follow the G31 block to stop the machine so you can record the machine’s location.

The values which are stored are referenced to the current coordinate system (working, local, or machine). If the probe does not touch the part before the end of the movement, the end coordinate value is stored in #5061, #5062, or #5063.

The current positions of the XY and Z axes can be retrieved using the #5041, #5042, and #5043 registers. The values can then be stored into part setup using the G10 code. For example, to set the X value for work offset G54, use the following G10 command:G10 L2 P1 X[#5041]

FormatThe format for the Skip (Probing) Function is as follows:

G31 X____ Y____ Z____ and/or F____

where




F is the Feedrate

This command cannot be performed with cutter compensation (G41, G42, G43 {with G18 or G19}, G45, G46, G47, and G48).


ExampleThe following program example finds the center point within a box when run on the control.

NC Part Program 1 InchG31_TEXT.FNC

%

(GO TO INITIAL PART ZERO)

G01 X0 Y0 F15.

G31 X7 F15.

#2001 = #5061

G01 X0 Y0 F25.

G31 X-7 F15.

#2002 = #5061

#2003 = [#2002+#2001]/Z

G01X#2005Y#2006F25.

N100 M00

G31 Y5 F15.

#2004 = #5062

G01 X#2003 Y0F25.

G31 Y-5 F15.

#2005 = #5062

#2006 = [#2004+#2005]/Z

(THE SPINDLE NOW MOVES TO THE CENTER OF THE BOX)

G01 X#2003 Y#2006


Parallel sides are assumed to be aligned with the X and Y axes. Additional programming steps will be required to determine the angle between the sides and the X and Y axes (skew angle) if the sides are not aligned. The initial part zero is set somewhere within the box.

The probe moves in the +X and then the -X direction to determine the center point between the sides in the X axis.

Figure 3–21. ISNC Skip (Probing) Function

1 X Left

2 X Right

3 Y Top

4 Y Bottom

5 Initial Part Zero


Tool and Radius Offsets (G40–G49)

Tool and Radius Offsets include the Tool Length Offsets and Tool Radius Offsets. Cutter Compensation G codes G40–G42 are used to control tool movement. Access the Tool Offsets from the Tool Setup screen. Select the Tool Offsets (F4) softkey. From the Tool Setup - NC Tool Offsets screen, select either Tool Length Offsets (F4) or Tool Radius Offsets (F4). The softkey toggles between these selections.

• The Length Offset Table contains the tool length offset (G43, G44).

• The Radius Offset Table holds signed values for cutter compensation (G40–G42) and Tool Radius Offset Increase/Decrease (G45–G48).

The measurement units for the offsets in the Tool Offset Table depend on the programmed units. If -9.5 is entered for tool offset 15, that tool offset is -9.5 inches (or -9.5 mm, depending on the unit of measurement).

The Toggle Units softkey on the NC Tool Offsets screen changes the units of measurement between inch and metric.

Use either the Page Up and Page Down softkeys, the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys, or the scroll bar to scroll through all of the Tool Offset fields. The keyboard up and down arrows move through the fields displayed on the screen.

Cutter Compensation (G40–G42), on page 3 - 74

Tool Length Offset (G43, G44, G49), on page 3 - 80

Tool Radius Offset (G45–G49), on page 3 - 84

Tool changes may be made from the offsets table screen. Place the cursor in the offset field of the tool you wish to change to, and press the console Auto Tool Change button.


Cutter Compensation (G40–G42)

Cutter compensation may be used for two purposes. First, it may be used when the dimensions in the program and the part surface are the same. The system calculates the proper tool path by using the part surface and the tool diameter information.

Second, cutter compensation corrects the difference between the diameters of the tool specified and the tool actually used to cut the part. This situation often occurs when the program originates from an off-line device. Note that the coordinates of those programs are usually tool center line data.

Cutter compensation is based on the direction of travel of the tool. To determine which type of cutter compensation to use, look at the part as if you are moving around the part always keeping the tool ahead of you. Then it becomes obvious whether the tool needs to be on the right or the left of the programmed line or the boundary of the part as shown in the illustration below.

Figure 3–22. Cutter Compensation

If the first segment in a contour is an arc with a radius smaller than the radius of the tool, the control will generate an error message indicating that you need to use a tool with a smaller radius or program a larger radius.

1 Part

2 Cutter

3 Programmed Part Outline

4 Direction of Cutter Travel

5 Compensated Cutter Path


Cutter Compensation – ISNC and Basic NC

You may program cutter compensation using ISNC or Basic NC.

Tool Radius Offset

ISNC

There are two options to program cutter compensation using ISNC:

1. Use Diameter and Diameter Wear values from Tool Setup. To use this method, the Diameter Compensation Using Tool Setup parameter in NC Settings must be set to Yes. The control will use the values from Tool Setup to calculate the offset.

2. Use a D code (Tool Radius offset). The D code specifies an index into the Tool Offset Table or an actual offset value. For example, in the command G41 D5, the index value is an actual offset value of 5.

Basic NCTo program cutter compensation using Basic NC, you may choose whether or not to use a D code:

1. Use Diameter and Diameter Wear fields from the Tool Setup screen. If a D code is not present the control will always use Diameter and Diameter Wear.

2. Use a D code. Basic NC interprets the D code value based on whether you are calling out a tool change or commanding a G41 or G42:

• If you use a D code when calling out a tool change, enter the actual tool diameter. Basic NC divides this value by two to calculate the tool diameter offset.

• If you are programming a G41 or G42 code, Basic NC interprets the D code based on whether the D code value contains a decimal point:

• Contains a decimal point – Basic NC interprets the D value as the tool diameter offset.

• Does not contain a decimal point – Basic reads the D value as an index value for the Tool Offset table.

If a D code is present, it always takes priority over the Diameter and Diameter Wear method, even if the Diameter Compensation Using Tool Setup parameter is Yes.

An error will be generated if there is a decimal point.

Access the Tool Radius Offset Table using the Tool Offset softkey on the Tool Setup screen. The Tool Radius Offset page contains 200 registers for storing radius offsets.


Tool Length OffsetYou may use a G43 code to program tool length offsets. This is true for ISNC and Basic NC. Use an H code to specify an index into the Tool Offset Table. For example, in the command G43 H01, the index value is “01”.

The value in the Tool Offset Table is a negative value that represents the distance from the Z home position to the top of the part with the tool tip touching the top of the part.

Cutter Compensation Off (G40)

The Cutter Compensation Off code (G40) is the default. It cancels cutter compensation by erasing all the data in the system’s cutter compensation look-ahead buffers and moving to the current uncompensated endpoint at the programmed feedrate.

G00 or G01 must be selected in order for this command to cancel the offset compensation. Each axis moves straight (G01) or at rapid traverse (G00) from the point of the old vector at the start point toward the end point. The machine should be in G40 mode before the end of a program. Otherwise, when the program ends in the offset mode, positioning cannot be made to the terminal point of the program, and the tool position will be separated from the terminal position by the vector value.

FormatThe command format for Cutter Compensation Off is as follows:

G40 X____ Y____

where



If the parameters are omitted, the tool moves the old vector amount in the opposite direction which effectively cancels the offset.

Another way to program a tool length offset would be to use the Zero Calibration field in the Tool Setup screen, and not use the G43 H code. This is recommended, especially if you are using the Tool Probing software.

It is possible to switch from left to right cutter compensation (and vice versa) without first canceling cutter compensation.


Cutter Compensation Left (G41)

The Cutter Compensation Left code (G41) switches on cutter compensation. It establishes a new tool path left and parallel to the programmed path. The distance between the new tool path and the programmed path is equal to the cutter compensation value for the programmed tool.

G41 is canceled by G40.

The offset executes only in the G17 offset plane. In simultaneous three-axis control, the tool path projected on the offset plane is compensated.

G00, G01, G02, or G03 must be specified.

FormatThe command format for cutter compensation left is as follows:

G41 X _____ Y_____ D_____

where



D is the Tool Radius Offset

If the offset number for cutter compensation is D00, the system will not go into G41 mode.

3D Tool Geometry Compensation (G41.2)

3D Tool Geometry Compensation (G41.2) allows the specification of the Surface Contact Point, Surface Normal Vector, and Tool Vector for ball nose, flat end, and bull nose endmills. See 3D Tool Geometry Compensation (G41.2), on page 3 - 77 discussion in Tool Centerpoint Management (M128) for more information.

G41 cannot be used when G42 or G41.2 are active.

Tool Vector orientation cannot be changed when G41 is active.

G41.2 cannot be used when G41 or G42 are active.


Cutter Compensation Right (G42)

The Cutter Compensation Right code (G42) switches on cutter compensation and establishes a new tool path right of and parallel to the programmed path. The distance between the new tool path and the programmed path is equal to the cutter compensation value for the programmed tool.


This command is an offset method similar to G41 except that the offset is to the right of the programmed path looking in the direction in which the tool is advancing. The offset is performed only in the G17 offset plane. Only the coordinate values of an axis in the offset plane are affected by the offset. In simultaneous three-axis control, the tool path projected on the offset plane is compensated.

G00, G01, G02, or G03 must be specified.

Format The command format for cutter compensation right is as follows:

G42 X _____ Y_____ D_____

where




If the offset number is D00, the system will not go into G42 mode.

G42 cannot be used when G41.2 is active.

Tool Vector orientation cannot be changed when G42 is active.


Cutter Compensation Programming

Follow these steps to use cutter compensation:

1. Enter the part surface description according to the final dimensions of the part.

2. Enter the full cutter diameter as a positive number in the Diameter Compensation field in Tool Setup, or supply a D word when changing tools (Basic NC only).

3. Activate cutter compensation in the desired direction (left or right of part surface with respect to tool path direction).

4. Supply an entry move from somewhere outside the part to the start point of the part surface, i.e., somewhere outside of the compensated path. The part surface appears as a blue line on the graphics display.

5. Following all of the blocks to be compensated, provide an exit move to somewhere outside the compensated path and turn off cutter compensation (G40). When a G40 is programmed, cutter compensation extracts any remaining information from its look-ahead buffer and moves to the last programmed end point. The tool moves from the compensated end point of the previous move to the end point of the exit move.

6. Be certain that the exit move is outside the compensated path. Otherwise, turning off cutter compensation may cut into the part surface. To check the exit move, use graphics to verify the tool path movements.

The tool moves from the start point of the entry move and ends at the compensated start point for the part surface as shown in the graph below:

Figure 3–23. Cutter Compensated Tool Movement

1 Part

2 Actual Tool Path

3 Programmed Move


In the previous illustration, the value in the Diameter Compensation field is 1.00, and these codes were used to control tool movement:

• G00 G40 X5. Y5.

• G41 X7. Y2.

Tool Length Offset (G43, G44, G49)

Tool offsets, G43 and G44 tool length compensation codes, are used to compensate tool length without altering the NC program. G43 is for positive tool length compensation. G44 is for negative tool length compensation. Either the G49 command, or an H00 command, immediately cancels the offset.

The tool offset specified by a G43 or G44 overrides the tool length offset from the Zero Calibration field on the Tool Setup screen. The Zero Calibration field on the Tool Setup screen is always treated as a negative Z offset. For example, if a value of 3.0 is put in the Zero Calibration field, a Z offset value of -3.0 is stored. If the command G43 H1 is then used where the value -2.2 is stored in the H1 offset register, WinMax uses a tool offset of –2.2. The table below illustrates tool offsets:

Table 3–6. Tool Offsets

Z movements may be used for the entry and exit moves. For example, turn on cutter compensation when moving to a Z Start plane before plunging. Turn off cutter compensation after retracting the tool from the part.

Turn off cutter compensation using a G40 code before ending a program or all programmed blocks may not be cut.

Refer to NC Parameters, on page 3 - 20 for information about the DEFAULT CUTTER COMP LOOK AHEAD field in the NC Parameters screen.

Tool Setup Screen Zero Calibration

Tool Length Offset Mode H1 Total

Tool Offset

3.0 G43 -2.2 -2.2

3.0 G44 -2.2 +2.2

3.0 G49 -2.2 -3.0

3.0 G49 +2.2 -3.0

3.0 G43 +2.2 +2.2

3.0 G44 +2.2 -2.2

The values in the Tool Setup screens always remain in the units selected when going into the NC Editor.


For Basic NC (BNC)An H address may specify an index into the tool length offset table without specifying a G43 or G44. In such a case, the value in the tool length offset table is used as the tool offset. This is equivalent to the Zero Calibration field on the Tool Setup screen.

For BNC and ISNC, if the system is in the G43 and G44 mode already, an H code can be used by itself to replace the existing tool length already in effect.

FormatThe H is the Offset Code with a range of H00 to H200. G17 is optional when a Z axis offset is desired.

[G17 _____] or [G18 _____] or [G19 _____] H_____

The following four examples illustrate tool length offset H codes with the G43 and G44 codes. Tool 1 had a value of 5.0 for the Zero Calibration field on the Tool Setup screen. The Tool Length Offset 1 value is –6.0 and the Tool Length Offset 2 value is –7.5.

Example 1

T01 M06

With these offsets, the calibrated tool length will be 5.0. That length is taken from the Tool Setup screen)

If no G43 or G44 is programmed and an H offset is not specified, tool lengths are taken from the Tool Setup screen.

An offset in the X axis can be specified with the G19.

An offset in the Y axis can be specified with the G18.

If a G17 is provided, or none of the plane selection commands (G17, G18, and G19) is present, specify an offset in the Z axis.

The G17, G18, and G19 used in this block are only used to specify the axis of the tool offset and will not affect the specified plane.

An offset in the X or Y axis cannot be specified when cutter compensation is active or commands G45–G48 are being used.

Commands G45–48 support existing X or Y axis tool offset programs; however, to save time, automatic Cutter Compensation (G40–G42) should be used instead.

Commanding an H00 cancels an offset.

Either G43 or G44 is in effect until a G49 or H00 is used.


Example 2

T01 M06

H02

At this point, the calibrated tool length will still be 5.0 because no G43 or G44 has been entered.

Example 3

T01 L4.0 M06

G43 H01

At this point, the calibrated tool length is 6.0 because the L value was superseded by the offset value of 6.0.

Example 4

T01 M06 - sets the tool length to be 5.0

H02 - tool length remains 5.0

G43 - tool length remains 5.0

H02 - sets the tool length to be 7.5


5-Axis Linear Interpolation (G43.4)

The CNC offers two rotary interpolation modes of the tool relative to the Workpiece Coordinate System. Refer to Getting Started with WinMax Mill.

• Linearly interpolate the Tool Vector with respect to the Workpiece Coordinate System between tool positions. Refer to Getting Started with WinMax Mill.

• Linearly interpolate the programmed rotary angle between tool positions.

Format

G43.4 Q{0, 1} will turn on the 5-axis workpiece-relative linear interpolation.

G43.4 Q0 linearly interpolates the Tool Vector and Tool Tip between NC points with respect to the Workpiece Coordinate System. Refer to Getting Started with WinMax Mill.

G43.4 Q1 linearly interpolates the Tool Tip between tool positions with respect to the Workpiece Coordinate System and the rotary angles in the Machine Coordinate System. Refer to Getting Started with WinMax Mill.

Ensure the tool start point is relatively close to the C-axis centerline location immediately before activating the G43.4 command.

When executing a Tilt Axis Preference command, the machine may need to rotate the part up to 180° around the machine singularity point when moving to the contouring start point and tool orientation. Refer to Tilt Axis Preference (M200), on page 3 - 179.

If the tool start point is too far away from the C-axis centerline, an “Axis out of limits” error will occur.

The 0 and 1 parameters for G43.4 are optional. If you do not choose a parameter, the control will automatically choose:

• 0 when Tool Vector Input, on page 3 - 173 is used.• 1 when Axes Angle Input, on page 3 - 172 is used.

Although G43.4 Q0 will interpolate the Tool Tip and Tool Vector relative to the Workpiece Coordinate System, the CAM software must generate properly toleranced tool paths to machine smooth surfaces.


Tool Radius Offset (G45–G49)

Tool position offset commands increase or decrease the amount of axis movement. Offset values within the following ranges can be selected for the tool radius offset commands:

Tool Radius Offset Increase (G45)

This command increases the specified block’s tool radius offset amount by the value stored in the offset value memory.

Tool Radius Offset Decrease (G46)

This command decreases the specified block’s movement amount by the value stored in the offset value memory.

Tool Radius Offset Double Increase (G47)

This command increases the specified block’s movement amount by twice the value stored in the offset value memory.

Tool Radius Offset Double Decrease (G48)

This command decreases the specified block’s movement amount by twice the value stored in the offset value memory.

Tool Offset Cancel (G49)

This command cancels the offset.

FormatThe command format for the tool position offsets is as follows:

GXX X_____Y_____Z_____A_____B____C____ D____

ISNC and Basic NC – the tool used for cutter compensation must be smaller than or equal to the arc that you have programmed. If the tool radius is greater than or equal to the arc radius, the compensated tool path will sweep in the opposite direction of the programmed arc.

mm input inch inputOffset Value 0∼±999.999 mm 0∼±99.999 in.

0∼± 999.999° 0∼±999.999°

G45–48 support existing X or Y axis tool offset programs. However, to save time, use the automatic Cutter Compensation (G40-G42) instead.


where




A is the Rotary Dimension Around X-axis

B is the Rotary Dimension Around Y-axis

C is the Rotary Dimension Around Z-axis


GXX is an optional Interpolation (Group 1) move command, and D is the offset command. The number which follows D is an index into the tool offsets table. The offset value is modal and needs to be specified only once. The offset is applied to all axes specified in the parameters.

ExampleSet tool offset 1 to the desired offset before running the following program using the Tool Radius Offset commands (G45 through G48):

Industry-Standard NC Part Program 1 InchG45_G48.FNC

%

N10 G10 P1 R0.5

N20 G00

N30 G90

N40 M25

N50 T1 M06

N60 Z5.0 X0. Y0.

N70 S2000 M03

N80 Z0.05

N90 G00 Z-0.5 F10.

N200(INNER OUTLINE WITHOUT USING OFFSETS)

N210 G91 X4 Y4

N220 G01 X3

N230 Y1.5

N240 X4

N250 G45 Y-1.5

N260 X3

N130 G03 X1 Y1 I0. J1

N140 G01 Y4

N150 X0

N160 G02 X-2 Y2 I0. J2


N170 G01 Y0

N180 X-3

N190 Y-2.5

N200 X-3

N210 Y2.5

N220 X-3

N230 G03 X-1 Y-1 I0. J-1

N240 G01 Y-2

N250 X1

N260 Y-4

N265 Z5.05

N270 G00 X-4 Y-4

N275 G90 X0 Y0

N280(OUTER OUTLINE USING G45, G46, G47, AND G48)

NC Part Program 2 InchG45_G48.FNC

N290 G91 G46 X4 Y4 D1

N300 G47 G01 X3 F20.

N305 Y1.5

N307 G48 X4

N308 Y-1.5

N309 G45 X3

N310 G45 G03 X1 Y1 I0. J1

N320 G45 G01 Y4

N330 G46 X0

N340 G46 G02 X-2 Y2 I0. J2

N350 G45 G01 Y0.

N360 G47 X-3

N370 Y-2.5

N380 G48 X-3

N390 Y2.5

N400 G45 X-3

N410 G45 G03 X-1 Y-1 I0. J-1

N420 G45 G01 Y-2

N430 X1

N440 Y-4

N450 G00 G46 X-4 Y-4

N460 G00 Z5.05

N470 M25

N480 M05

N490 M02


Scaling (G50 and G51)

The G51 code is used to scale subsequent move commands by a programmable scale factor and must be in an independent block.

Scaling is not applicable to the following movement in case of canned Z axis movements. If scaling results are rounded and units less than 5 are ignored, the move amount may become zero and may affect cutter movement. Whether the scaling function is effective or not, it can be set by a parameter for each axis. The scaling function always becomes effective for the circular radius command R in the G51 mode, regardless of these parameters.

One or more axes’ scaling can be disabled on the NC Parameters screen. The methods for specifying the scaling center point and the scaling factor are different with BNC and ISNC.

For BNC, X, Y, and Z are the scaling center points in absolute coordinates. The I, J, and K codes specify the scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes. If only I is specified, all axes will be scaled by that factor. Scaling G51 codes may not be nested.

For ISNC, these two methods can be used to specify scaling parameters:

Method 1: X, Y, or Z present. X, Y, Z define the scaling center point. If I, J, or K are present, they define the scaling factors. If they are absent and P is present, the P value defines the scaling factor for all three axes. If P is an integer (no decimal point) the value is multiplied by the least scaling factor parameter on the NC Parameters screen; otherwise, the exact P value is used.

Method 2: X, Y, or Z absent. I, J, K define the scaling center point. P provides the scaling factor if provided for all three axes. If P is an integer (no decimal point) the value is multiplied by the least scaling factor parameter on the NC Parameters screen; otherwise, the exact P value is used.

FormatThe format of the BNC scaling code is as follows:

G51 X___ Y___ Z___ I___ J___ K___

where

X is the X-axis Scaling Center Point or Scaling Factor

Y is the Y-axis Scaling Center Point or Scaling Factor

Z is the Z-axis Scaling Center Point or Scaling Factor

I is the X-axis Scaling Center Point or Scaling Factor

J is the Y-axis Scaling Center Point or Scaling Factor

K is the Z-axis Scaling Center Point or Scaling Factor

The format of the ISNC scaling code is as follows:

Method 1: G51 X___ Y___ Z___ (I____ J_____ K____ or P____)


Method 2: G51 I____ J_____ K____ P____

ExampleHere is a BNC sample using the scaling codes:

Using G91 — G00 X20. Y20.

G51 X40. Y40. I.5

G01 X40.

Y40.

X-40.

Y-40.

G50

The following diagram illustrates the previous code sample:

Figure 3–24. G51 Scaling Code

The smallest unit of scaling is either 0.001 or 0.00001 when an integer P value is provided. The Least Scaling Factor field on the Configuration Setup screen is used for setting the smallest unit of scaling.If scaling factors are not specified, the default scaling factor 1.0 is used.If the scaling center point is not specified, the G51 command point is used for the scaling center.Scaling can be enabled/disabled for a particular axis on the Configuration Setup screen.

1 Centerpoint

2 Scaled

3 Original


The Scaling (G51) command must always be canceled with a Cancel Scaling (G50) command.


Mirror Image (G50.1 and G51.1)

Mirroring (G51.1) and Mirroring Cancel (G50.1) commands are used when the shape of the workpiece is symmetric to an axis. The whole part can be prepared by programming a subprogram and using programmable mirror imaging. Ordinary mirror image comes after the programmed mirror image. The first movement command must be absolute when in this mode. The following actions occur when the mirror image is applied to only one axis composing a plane:

• Circular Command: CW and CCW are reversed.

• Cutter Compensation: Right and Left Offset are reversed.

• Coordinate Rotation: Rotation angle becomes reversed.

FormatThe formats of the mirroring codes are as follows:

G51.1 X___ or Y___ or Z___

G50.1 [X0] or [Y0] or [Z0]

where

X is the X-axis Dimension

Y is the Y-axis Dimension

Z is the Z-axis Dimension

Specifying a G50.1 with no X, Y, or Z parameter cancels the mirroring code in the X, Y, and Z axes. The coordinates about which the tool path will be mirrored are in absolute values. The mirroring codes create the following special conditions:

• For circular commands CW and CCW are reversed.

• Cutter compensation for Right and Left are reversed.

• Mirroring G51.1 codes may not be nested.

G51.1 is used to mirror a tool path about the X, Y, or Z axis while G50.1 is used to cancel mirroring for the X, Y, or Z axis.

This mode is canceled by G50.1. The first movement command after a G50.1 command must be an absolute command. This mode must not be specified in the G68 or G50 mode.


ExampleIn the illustration below, part #1 (in the upper right corner) is mirrored three times into part #2, #3 and #4. Note that the direction of the tool path (shown as directional arrows numbered 1, 2, and 3) on each part changes with each mirroring operation:

Figure 3–25. BNC G50.1 and G51.1 Mirroring Codes

A X Axis

B Y Axis

C X Mirror Axis

D Y Mirror Axis


The following program example mirrors the part as shown in the example from the previous page:

NC Part Program 1 inchMIRROR.FNC

%

N10 (FIG 7-94 MIRRORING EXAMPLE)

N42 ( )

N44( MAIN PROGRAM )

N46 ( )

N50 M98 P8888

N60 (2-PART#1 MIRRORING IN X)

N70 G51.1 X1.5

N80 M98 P8888

N90 (3-MIRRORING CONTINUED IN Y)

N100 G51.1 Y1.5

N110 M98 P8888

N120 (CANCEL INITIAL X & Y MIRROR)

N130 G50.1

N140 (4-PART#1 MIRRORED IN Y)

N150 G51.1 Y1.5

N160 M98 P8888

N170 M02

N172 (END OF MAIN PROGRAM)

N180 ( )

N190 (SUB-PROGRAM 8888)

N200 (1-PART#1 UPPER RIGHT)

N210 (TRIANGLE 3,2 3,3 2,3)

N215 ( )

N220 O8888

N230 G00 G90 T01 M06

N240 X0 Y0 Z.05 M03 S800

N250 G00 X3 Y2 Z0

N260 G1 Y3 F50

N270 X2

N280 X3 Y2

N290 M99

E


Local Coordinate System Setting (G52)

While programming in a work coordinate system, it is sometimes more convenient to use a local coordinate system within the current work coordinate system. The zero point of each local coordinate system is equal to the X, Y, Z, position of the current work coordinate system. The local coordinates are relative to the workpiece coordinate system, including any skew that may be active at that time. A, B, C angles are not rotations with respect to the workpiece coordinate system, but are rotary axis positions that rotate the local coordinate system around each rotary axis centerline.

To cancel the local coordinate system, the zero point of the local coordinate system should be matched with the zero point of the work coordinate system by using the G52 X0 Y0 Z0 command. The local coordinate system can also be canceled by switching to another work coordinate system (including the current work coordinate system) or to the machine coordinate system (G53).

The G52 command is most useful in conjunction with subprogram commands. A subprogram could be used to cut a part and the local coordinate system can be shifted to cut a number of similar parts.

FormatThe format of the local coordinate system command is as follows:

G52 X_____Y_____Z_____A____B____C____

where

X is the X-axis Local Coordinate

Y is the Y-axis Local Coordinate

Z is the Z-axis Local Coordinate

A is the A-axis Local Coordinate

B is the B-axis Local Coordinate

C is the C-axis Local Coordinate


ExampleThis illustration shows setting a local coordinate system using the G52 command:

Figure 3–26. Setting Local Coordinate System Using G52

1 Machine Zero Point

2 Shift Offsets

3 Local Coordinate System

4 G54

5 G55 through G58

6 G59


The following is a sample program, which uses G52 to set local coordinates:

NC Part Program 1 InchLOC_COOR.FNC

%

N10 G00 G90

N40 M25

N45 X0 Y0

N50 T1 M06

N60 Z5.

N90 S2000 M03

N100 Z0.05

N110 M98 P2121

(USE LOCAL COORD SYSTEM)

N240 G52 X-1.5 Y-1.5

N320 G65 P2121

N380 G52 X1.5 Y-1.5

N390 M98 P2121

N430 G52 X0 Y-3

N440 M98 P2121

N430 Z5.

N1170 M25

N1190 M05

N1200 M02

O2121

N500 X1

N510 Y1

N520 X0

N530 Y0

M99


Machine Coordinates (G53)

This Machine Coordinates (G53) command moves the tool to the X, Y, Z, A, B, C machine coordinate position at rapid traverse. This command is only effective in the block in which it is specified and in Absolute mode (G90). The system reverts to the last commanded work coordinate system.

If a local coordinate (G52) is used before a machine coordinate (G53) is commanded, the local coordinate is canceled when the system goes back to the last commanded coordinate system. Reinstate the local coordinate system with another G52.

FormatThe format of the machine coordinates command is as follows:

G53 X____Y____Z____ A ____ B ____C____

where

X is the X-axis Machine Coordinate

Y is the Y-axis Machine Coordinate

Z is the Z-axis Machine Coordinate

A is the A-axis Machine Coordinate

B is the B-axis Machine Coordinate

C is the C-axis Machine Coordinate

ExampleBefore running this sample program, set the shift offsets to X0 Y0 Z0 and set part zero to X2.0 Y3.0 and Z1.0.

%

G00 G90

M25

X0 Y0

T1 M06

Z5.

S2000 M03

Z0.05

G01 X1 F30.

Y1

X0

Y0

(USE MACHINE COORD SYSTEM)

G01 G53 X0

G53 X1 F30.

G53 Y1


G53 X0

G53 Y0

G53 G00 Z5.

M25 M05

M02

E

When running a program on the control, do not use negative shift offsets with G28 or G53. An error message will occur since the negative machine positions cannot be implemented.


Multiple Work Coordinate Systems (G54–G59)

These modal commands select the work coordinate systems 1–6. The work coordinate systems are affected by the work offsets, the shift offset, and the G92 (Set Part Zero) command. Coordinate system 1 is the same as the part setup and it is the default coordinate system. Coordinate systems 1–6 are established by manually entering work offset values for G55–G59 on the Work Offset screen or with the G10 command.

Use the G10 command to set tool offsets, enter tool wear data, and change work coordinate systems, and use the G92 command to set part zero. All six work coordinate systems can be moved an equal distance and direction by using the G92 command.

FormatThe format of the multiple work coordinates command is as follows:

G54 (Select work coordinate system 1)






ExampleWhen in the NC mode, the Part Setup screen has the Work Offsets (F1) softkey to display up to six work coordinates (G54–G59) and a set of shift offset values. As shown below, these codes are used to set multiple part zeroes for multiple parts fixtured to the table and milled consecutively using the same part program.

Figure 3–27. Work Offset G Codes for Multiple Parts

1 Machine Zero

2 Part Zero


The coordinates defining G54 are the part zero coordinates for the original part defined on the Part Setup screen. Set the X, Y, and Z values for the G54 to G59 codes. These work offsets are stored in memory, but not with the part program.

The G54 work offsets are the same registers as those in the Part Setup screen for Part Zero X, Y, and offset Z. Editing G54 work offsets for multiple coordinate systems updates the part setup for X, Y, and Z on the Part Setup screen.

Aux Work Coordinate Systems (G54.1)

There are 93 additional X, Y, Z, and optional Rotary A and B work offsets available in NC programming. To access any of these offsets call G code G54.1 Pn, where n is 1 thru 93. For example, to change to auxiliary work offset 46, call G54.1 P46 in the NC program.

To update work offset values, use data setting G code G10 L20 Pn to set the Auxiliary work offsets values. For example, to update work offset 46 value call G10 L20 P46 X12.5 Y3.0 Z-0.5

Precision Cornering On (G61) and Off (G64)

Precision cornering allows non-tangent blocks to be milled with precise corners, regardless of programmed feedrate.

The NC Precision Cornering codes work in the following manner in standard Hurco machines. If you have the UltiPro II option installed, refer to the Precision Cornering with UltiPro II Option table.

Table 3–7. Standard Precision Cornering

Precision cornering works differently on machines that have the UltiPro II option installed. Please use the tables below to determine how precision cornering will operate on your machine.

Code Action

G61

Causes the axes to decelerate to zero velocity at the end of a block, if the blocks are not tangent. Tangency is defined as an angle of 5° or less between two consecutive blocks.If the angle is greater than 5°, the system stops and then accelerates to the programmed feedrate in the next block.

G64(default)

Causes the axes to decelerate to zero velocity at the end of a block, if the blocks are not tangent. Tangency is defined as an angle of 44° or less between two consecutive blocks.If the angle is greater than 44°, the system stops and then accelerates to the programmed feedrate in the next block. The first line is marked as a stop when complete.


The NC Precision Cornering codes work in the following manner in Hurco machines that have the UltiPro II option installed. If you do not have the UltiPro II option installed, please refer to the Standard Precision Cornering table.

Table 3–8. Precision Cornering with UltiPro II Option

Code Action

G61

Causes the axes to decelerate to zero velocity at the end of a block, if the blocks are not tangent. Tangency is defined as an angle of 44° or less between two consecutive blocks.If the angle is greater than 44°, the system stops and then accelerates to the programmed feedrate in the next block. The first line is marked as a stop when complete.

G64(default)

Causes the axes to traverse all blocks at a constant feedrate and blends for constant surface finish with no regard to tangency. The first line is not marked as a stop when complete.


Special Program Support

Rotation (G68 and G69)

The Coordinate Rotation (G68) command turns on coordinate system rotation, and the Coordinate Rotation Cancel (G69) command turns off coordinate system rotation.

FormatThe G68 code uses this format to command rotation:

G68 (XY___ or XZ ___ or YZ___) R___

When the G17 plane is used, X and Y addresses are used in the format to describe the center point. When G18 is used, X and Z describe the center point. If the plane is defined using G19, the Y and Z addresses define the center point.

R specifies the angle of rotation. A positive R value indicates a CCW direction, and a negative R value indicates a CW direction. When the coordinate values of rotation center are omitted, the current position is used as the center point.

The range of R depends on whether BNC or ISNC is selected and whether an integer or decimal value is specified. Here are the R ranges for each NC type:

BNC: R has a range of -360.0 to +360.0, whether an integer or real number is used.

ISNC: Units of R have a value of 0.001° when R is an integer.

R has a range of -360,000 ≤ R ≤ 360,000 when R is an integer value.

R has a range of -360.0 to +360.0 when R is a real number.

Rotation is canceled with a G69. Do not use G17, G18, or G19 while in the G68 mode. Use G69 to disable the G68 mode, change the plane, and then go back to the G68 mode.

G68 codes may not be nested.


ExampleThis program uses the rotation codes:

ISNC Part Program 1 InchG68.FNC

%

(USING REAL NUMBER WITH G68)

T1 M06

G68 X0 Y0 R45

Z5.05

G01 Z-0.5 F10.

G91 X1.0

Y2.0

X-1.0

Y-2.0

(CANCEL ROTATION)

G69

(USING INTEGER NUMBER WITH G68)

G68 X0 Y0 R45000

X1.0

Y2.0

X-1.0

Y-2.0

(CANCEL ROTATION)

G69

M05

M02


Global Rotation NC Transform Plane (G68.2) andLocal Rotation NC Transform Plane (G68.3)

G68.2G68.2 specifies global rotations for the A, B, and C angles in the NC Transform Plane block. G69 cancels G68.2.

The rotation sequence will be in the order of A, followed by B, followed by C, where all rotations are around the X, Y, and Z axes of the Workpiece Coordinate System. Refer to Getting Started with WinMax Mill.

G68.3

G68.3 specifies local rotations for the A, B, and C angles in the NC Transform Plane block. G69 cancels G68.3.

The rotation sequence will be in the order of A, followed by B, followed by C, where all rotations are around the X, Y, and Z axes of the rotating Transform Plane Coordinate System.

• Rotation of the A angle will be around the workpiece’s X-axis.

• Rotation of the B angle will be around the Y-axis of the rotating Transform Plane Coordinate System that has been rotated by the A-angle.

• Rotation of the C angle will be around the Z-axis of the Transform Plane Coordinate System that has been rotated by the A-angle and B-angle rotations.

FormatThe G68.2 code uses this format to command rotation of the NC Transform Plane:

G68.2 X_Y_Z_A_B_C_

where







The NC Transform Plane block is not a motion block; it does not execute motion.


The G68.3 code uses this format to command rotation of the NC Transform Plane:

G68.3 X_Y_Z_A_B_C_

where







All subsequent tool positions (X, Y, Z positions, I, J, K Tool Vectors, and U, V, W Surface Normal Vectors) are specified with respect to NC Transform Plane, except program rotary angles (i.e., B and C angles).

Coordinate System Rotation Cancel (G69)

Coordinate System Rotation Cancel (G69) cancels the following rotation commands:

• Coordinate Rotation (G68)

• Global Rotation NC Transform Plane (G68.2)

• Local Rotation NC Transform Plane (G68.3)

Rotary moves are permitted while NC Transform Plane is active.

NC Transform Planes can be stacked and the coordinates are relative to the last stacked coordinate system.

NC Hole cycles are permitted only if the Tool Vector is aligned with the Z-direction of the Transform Plane.

M128 (Tool Centerpoint Management) cannot be used with G68.2 or G68.3.


Units of Measure (BNC G70, G71)

Before setting the coordinate system at the beginning of the program, the units of measure must be specified in an independent block. A part program may switch between English and Metric modes as long as the format of the dimensions is correct for the chosen mode.

The Imperial Units of Measure code (BNC G70 signals the system that the dimensions are in inches).

BNC G70 is canceled by G71.

The Metric Units of Measure code (BNC G71signals the system that the dimensions are metric units.

BNC G71 is canceled by G70.

FormatThese are the command formats for the inch/metric conversion commands:

BNC:

G70: Inch command

G71: Metric command

The BNC G70 and G71 codes do not affect the units of measure used in the graphics and machine status display screens. The displays are controlled by the units selected when entering NC editing.


Peck Drilling (G73)

For Peck Drilling, the spindle moves down in incremental steps and retracts to the position set in the Pecking Retract Clearance field on the General 1 Parameters screen. After each peck, the drill is retracted by the Peck Clearance Plane value set on the General 1 Parameters screen. These screens are described in the Getting Started with WinMax Mill manual.

Spindle positioning is performed on the XY plane and hole machining is performed on the Z axis. These parameters are stored as modal values; therefore, if a parameter value does not change for subsequent drilling commands, those commands do not have to contain the parameter.

FormatThe command format for the Peck Drilling canned cycle is as follows:

G73 X____, Y____, Z____, R____, Q____, F____, [K____ or L____]

where




R is the Return Level

Q is the Peck Depth

F is the Feedrate

K or L is the number of repeats for a series of operations in a specified block.

Range = 1 through 6; Default = 1.

If L=0, drilling data is stored and no drilling is performed.

The incremental distance and direction between canned cycles is determined by the previous block’s position from the first canned cycle’s position.

K and L parameters function the same.


ExampleThe diagram below illustrates tool movement for the G73 command:

Figure 3–28. Tool Movement for the Peck Drilling Cycle (G73)

1 Part

2 Z Start (Basic); Return Point (Industry Standard)

3 Z Bottom

4 Peck Depth

5 NC Parameter Peck Clearance Distance


Left-Handed Tapping Cycle (ISNC G74)

During the Left-Handed Tapping Cycle the spindle rotates CCW to the bottom of the hole. Then the spindle stops, an optional dwell is performed, the spindle rotates CW, and left-handed tapping is performed.

The positioning for this cycle is performed on the XY plane and hole machining is performed on the Z axis. During left-handed tapping, the feedrate override is ignored and the cycle does not stop until the end of the return operation, even if a feed hold is applied.

If a Start Spindle Clockwise (M3) code is in effect, the spindle direction will be reversed prior to executing a G74 cycle. Rigid Tapping is performed when an Enable Rigid Tapping (ISNC M29) code is used in a block previous to the G74 block.

FormatThe command format for the Left-Handed Tapping cycle is as follows:

G74 X____, Y____, Z____, R____, P____, F____, [Q____,] [K____, or L____].

where





P is the Dwell Time

F is the Feedrate

Q is the Peck Depth

K or L is the Number of repeats for a series of operations in a specified block.


If L = 0 drilling data is stored and no drilling is performed.




Single-Quadrant Circular Interpolation (BNC G74)

The Single-Quadrant Circular Interpolation Mode (G74) causes the system to interpolate arcs and helices in a single quadrant only. The arc or helix must remain within the quadrant in which it started (the arc or helix cannot be larger than 90°). Since the arc cannot cross quadrants, the center point is determined by looking toward the center of the arc from the start point. I, J, and K are unsigned incremental distances from the arc start point to the center of the arc.


Multi-Quadrant Circular Interpolation (BNC G75)

The Multi-Quadrant Circular Interpolation Mode (G75) is the default and causes the system to interpolate an arc or helix across all quadrants. The arc or helix can start and end in any quadrant. An arc or helix may be up to 360° in this mode. The center point data can be represented in two different ways based on the current machine dimension mode (G90 and G91).


Z is the distance from the R Point (in Return to R Point in Canned Cycle [G99] mode) to the Z Bottom or the distance from the Initial Point (in Return to Initial Point in Canned Cycle [G98] mode) to the Z Bottom.

Q is the optional peck depth. If Q equals 0.0, pecking is not performed. Q used for G74 with M29 applies only to rigid tapping.


Bore Orient (G76)

The Bore Orient cycle provides a feed-in, stop-feed, orient spindle, move tool away from part surface, rapid-out, and spindle restart sequence suitable for boring operations when the tool needs to be moved away from the part surface before retracting out of the hole. If the default Bore Orient Retract vector is not suitable, I and J words may be used to specify a new retract position.

A value needs to be entered in the Bore Orient Retract field on the Holes Parameters screen. That value specifies the distance the X and Y axes travel to retract the tool from the part surface during the Bore Orient cycle.

A spindle oriented stop is performed at the bottom of the hole and the spindle retracts after shifting in the direction opposite to the cutter direction. High precision and efficient boring is performed without scratching the workpiece surface.

The bore orient cycle moves the axes in this manner:

1. The spindle should already be switched on.

2. The spindle positions the tool at the rapid speed to the XY location, if necessary.

3. The spindle moves down at the specified feedrate to the Z value.

4. The spindle stops and orients.

5. The spindle moves from the XY location to the IJ position or to the Bore Orient Retract distance.

6. The system rapidly moves Z to the initial Z location.

FormatThe format of the Bore Orient cycle is as follows:

G76 X____, Y____, Z____, [I_____, J_____, or Q____] R____, P____, F____, [K____, or L____]

where




I is the X-axis Incremental Bore Shift

J is the Y-axis Incremental Bore Shift

Q is the Incremental Bore Shift (can be used to shift XY instead of using IJ)

The Bore Orient G86 mode continues to be supported to provide compatibility with existing BNC programs.

This cycle applies only to machines that have an electronic or mechanical orient feature (refer to the machine tool owner’s manual).



P is the Subprogram Dwell Time

F is the Feedrate






ExampleThe diagram below illustrates tool movement for the Bore Orient cycle:

Figure 3–29. Tool Movement for the Bore Orient Cycle (G76)

I and J may also be used instead of Q to specify an incremental bore shift value and direction. If Q is used, the Q value must be a positive number; otherwise, an error message will occur.

For BNC, Q and I, J are optional to maintain compatibility with older programs. A default Z value of 1.0 will be used for BNC if a Q word is not contained in the same block with the G86 command. Q is not modal for BNC.

The Q value is modal. Since Q is used as the cut-in value for G73 and G83, use care when specifying Q.

1 Part


3 Z Bottom

A Stop and Orient Spindle

B Rapid Feed

C Feedrate

D Move Tool


Canned Cycle Cancel (G80)

Canned Cycle Cancel is a machine default mode and cancels all canned cycles. When a cycle is canceled using a G80, program execution returns to the One-Shot (G00, G01, G02, or G03) mode that was in effect before the canned cycle was executed. Use either G00, G01, G02, or G03 to cancel a canned cycle.

The G80 cycle also cancels the R and Z Points. That is, R = 0 and Z = 0 for the incremental command. Other drilling data are also canceled.

Drill, Spot Boring (G81)

The Drill, Spot Boring cycle is a feed-in, rapid-out sequence. The axes move in this manner with the spindle switched On:

1. Ensure that the initial Z location is above Z bottom and above any obstructions.

2. The tool is positioned at the Initial Z location and moves at the rapid speed to XY if it is in the block.

3. The spindle drills down to Z Bottom at the specified feedrate.

4. The spindle moves up to Z Start at the rapid speed.

FormatThe command format for Drill cycle is as follows:

G81 X____, Y____, Z____, R____, F____, [K____, or L____]

where





F is the Feedrate







ExampleThis is a sample BNC Drilling cycle:

G81 Z1.0000 (inches) G90 or G91

Here is a sample ISNC Drilling cycle and a tool movement diagram:

G81 Z-1.0000 (inches) in G91 mode

Figure 3–30. Tool Movement for the Spot Boring Cycle (G81)


2 Z Bottom


Drill with Dwell, Counter Boring (G82)

The Drill with Dwell, Counter Boring cycle provides a feed-in, dwell, and rapid-out sequence.

FormatThe command format for the Drill with Dwell cycle, or Counter Boring, is as follows:

G82 X____, Y____, Z____, R____, P____, F____, [K____, or L____]

where





P is the Dwell Time

F is the Feedrate






ExampleThis diagram illustrates tool movement for the Counter Boring cycle:


Figure 3–31. Tool Movement for the Counter Boring Cycle (G82)

Deep Hole Drilling (G83)

The Deep Hole Drilling cycle provides a sequence of feed-in and rapid-out movements until the specified hole depth is reached.

For BNC, each feed-in moves the distance of the peck depth. The tool will rapid back to the Z Start position.

For ISNC the tool will rapid out to the Return point.

Next the tool will rapid down until it reaches the starting point for the next peck (for either BNC or ISNC). The starting point is an incremental distance above the last peck, defined on the Holes Parameter screen as the Peck Clearance Distance.

BNC has three Z values: Z1, Z2, and Z3. They may be programmed in this canned cycle and are unsigned incremental distances. There is a rapid traverse back to R at the end of each pecking cycle and then the tool feed begins above where the tool stopped during the last pecking cycle.

1 Part


3 Z Bottom Dwell Point


Z1 is the total depth for the hole.

Z2 is the depth of the first peck.

Z3 is the depth for each of the remaining pecks.

Z2 and Z3 must be smaller than Z1.

If Z2 and Z3 are not programmed, this canned cycle functions like G81.

If Z3 is not programmed, Z2 is the depth for each peck. The last peck for the hole is the programmed peck depth or the remaining distance from the last peck to the bottom of the hole, whichever is smaller.

If Z1, Z2, and Z3 do not change between G83 blocks, they need not be reprogrammed. Use the Precision Cornering codes (G61 and G64) to control the Z axis deceleration between pecks.


FormatThe command formats for the Deep Hole Drilling cycle are as follows:

BNC: G83 X____,Y____, Z____, [Z____,] [Z____,] R____, F____,[K____, or L____]

where





F is the Feedrate






ISNC: G83 X____,Y____, Z____, R____, Q____, F____, [K____, or L____]

where




Q is the Peck Depth

F is the Feedrate


For BNC, the first Z is the distance from Z Start to Z Bottom. The second Z is the first cut-in depth. The optional third Z is the depth of the remaining pecks. The Zs are always positive. All of the peck depths will be the same if the third Z is left out.

For BNC, R is always positive and is an incremental distance from the initial point to point R.






ExampleThe diagram below illustrates tool movement for the G83 code:

Figure 3–32. Tool Movement for the Deep Hole Drilling Cycle (G83)

ISNC has one Z parameter which represents the location of Z Bottom.

1 Part


3 Z Bottom

+ Up to 3 Peck Depths Can be Programmed

* NC Parameter Peck Clearance Distance


Tapping (G84)

The Tapping cycle provides a tap sequence. The current feedrate (F) and spindle speed (S) are used. The spindle accelerates to the defined speed and the Z axis plunges at the defined feedrate. At the bottom of the hole, the spindle and Z axis decelerate in coordination to a stop. They then reverse directions and accelerate in coordination to the programmed feed and speed. Once back to the original Z level, the spindle shuts off and reverses back to the original direction in preparation for the next operation.

For BNC, G84 is used for right- and left-handed tapping. Start Spindle Clockwise (M3) or Start Spindle Counterclockwise (M4) commands determine whether right- or left-handed tapping is performed.

For ISNC, G84 performs right-handed tapping only. A Start Spindle Counterclockwise (M4) command causes the system to reverse the spindle direction at the start of the cycle to ensure that right-handed tapping is performed.

Use the following formula to calculate the correct feed and speed for the tap cycle:

Feedrate:

Feed in inches or mm per minute = Spindle RPM / threads per inches or mm

Spindle RPM:

Spindle RPM = Feed in inches (mm) per minute × threads per inch (mm)

When an M3/M4 command is detected in a program and the current tool in the spindle is defined as a tapping tool in tool setup, the system looks 10 blocks ahead for another tap cycle, a G01/G02/G03 code, or a canned cycle other than a tap. If any cutting move (G01, G02, G03, or any canned cycle other than a tap) is found within 10 moves or 10 rapid moves are found, the spindle is turned on as usual. If a G84 is found and all moves from the M3/M4 are rapid moves, the spindle is not turned on, and the rapid moves will be executed with the spindle off.

The spindle rotates clockwise to the bottom of the hole. At the bottom of the hole, the spindle is reversed and rotates counterclockwise and tapping is performed. During the tapping, the feedrate override is ignored and the cycle does not stop until the end of the return operation, even if a feed hold is applied.

For ISNC, a Rigid Tap Enable (M29) command initiates rigid tapping instead of regular tapping. Rigid Tap is disabled with a G00, G01, G02, G03, or G80 command. The programmed feedrate can be overridden for rigid tapping.


FormatThe command format for the Tapping cycle is as follows:

G84X____, Y____, Z ____, R ____, P____, F ____, [Q____,] [K____, or L____]

where





P is the Dwell Time

F is the Feedrate

Q is the Canned Cycle Bore Shift, Peck Depth






P is used only with ISNC for the Tapping cycle. P specifies a dwell period at the bottom of the hole and after leaving the hole.

Q, the optional peck depth, is only used with ISNC for the Tapping cycle. If Q equals 0.0, pecking is not performed. M29 is required with Peck for Rigid Tapping.


ExampleThe diagram below illustrates tool movement for the Tapping cycle (G84):

Figure 3–33. Tool Movement for the Tapping Cycle (G84)

1 Part


3 Z BottomSpindle Stop; DwellSpindle Reverse


Boring (G85)

The Boring cycle provides a feed-in and feed-out sequence suitable for boring.

The boring cycle moves the axes in this manner:

1. The spindle should already be switched on using an M3 code.

2. The tool is positioned over the hole location.

3. At the G85, the spindle feeds to Z Bottom as specified.

4. At Z Bottom, the spindle feeds to the Z Start position.

FormatThe command format of the Boring cycle is as follows:

G85 X____, Y____, Z____, R____, F____, [K____, or L____]

where





F is the Feedrate






It is possible to have an XY position move with the G85 code.


ExampleThe diagram below illustrates tool movement for the Boring cycle (G85):

Figure 3–34. Tool Movement for the Boring Cycle (G85)

1 Part


3 Z Bottom


Bore Rapid Out Cycle (ISNC G86)

The ISNC Bore Rapid Out canned cycle is a feed-in, rapid-out sequence. The spindle stops at the bottom of the hole and is retracted at the rapid traverse rate.

The Bore Rapid Out canned cycle moves the axes in this manner with the spindle switched on:

1. The tool is positioned at the Initial Z location and moves at the rapid speed to XY if it is in the block.

2. The spindle bores down to Z Bottom at the specified feedrate.

3. The spindle turns off.

4. The spindle moves up to Z Start at the rapid speed.

5. The spindle turns on.

FormatThe command format for the Bore Rapid Out cycle is as follows:

G86 X____, Y____, Z____, R____, F____, [K____, or L____]

where





F is the Feedrate







ExampleThis diagram illustrates tool movement for the Bore Rapid Out cycle:

Figure 3–35. Tool Movement for the Bore Rapid Out Cycle (G86)

1 Part


3 Z BottomSpindle Stop


Chip Breaker (BNC G87)

The Chip Breaker cycle provides drilling with a dwell every 0.050" (1.27 mm) to break off the chip. The dwell time is automatically calculated so the spindle revolves two times to break the chip. After the dwell, the system feeds another 0.050" (1.27 mm) and again breaks the chip until the bottom of the hole is reached. This cycle breaks the chip without retracting the tool entirely from the hole as with the Deep Hole Drilling cycle (G83). Use the Precision Cornering codes (G61 and G64) to control the Z axis deceleration between dwells.

The Chip Breaker cycle moves the axes in this manner with the spindle switched on:

1. The tool is positioned at the rapid speed to XY if necessary.

2. The spindle moves down 0.05" at the feedrate.

3. The spindle dwells at that location for two rotations.

4. The spindle moves down another 0.05" at the feedrate.

5. This is repeated until the Z depth is reached.

6. The spindle moves at the rapid speed to the initial Z location.

FormatThe format of the Chip Breaker cycle is as follows:

G87 X___ Y___ Z___ F____, [K____, or L____]

where




F is the Feedrate







Back Boring (ISNC G87)

The Back Boring cycle provides a boring sequence in the positive Z direction. Boring is performed from the specified R level to the Z level. Positioning is performed on the XY plane and hole machining is performed on the Z axis.

FormatThe command format for the back boring cycle is as follows:

G87 X____, Y____, Z____, R____, Q____, I_____, J_____, P____, F____, [K____, or L____]

where




R is the Z Depth Position Prior to Bore Shift Movement

Q is the Incremental Bore Shift



P is the Dwell Time

F is the Feedrate






R is used to specify the depth to which the bore moves before shifting over Q or IJ and moving up to the Z level.

Q is used to store an incremental bore shift value. I and J may also be used instead of Q to specify an incremental bore shift value. I and J can be used to specify a distance and direction. Q can only specify distance; the direction is pre-defined by machine parameters.


ISNC G87 ExampleThe drawing below illustrates tool movement for the Back Boring cycle (ISNC G87):

Figure 3–36. Tool Movement for the Back Boring Cycle (ISNC G87)


2 R Point


1 Spindle Stop, Orient, and Move A Stop and Orient Spindle

2 Feed Down to R Point B Repid Feed

3 Spindle Stop, Spindle Move C Feedrate

4 Spindle Start D Move Tool

5 Feed Up to Z Bottom

6 Dwell Point

7 Spindle Stop, Orient, and Move

8 Rapid Move

9 Spindle Move


Rigid Tapping (BNC G88; ISNC G84.2; ISNC G84.3)

Rigid tapping allows the same hole to be tapped repeatedly with precision. The rigid tapping feature increases accuracy by synchronizing the rotation of the spindle with the feed of the Z axis. ISNC G84.2 is used for right-handed tapping, and ISNC G84.3 is used for left-handed tapping. M29 is required for Rigid Tapping.

The format of the rigid tapping cycle is as follows:

M29

G88X____, Y____, Z____, [Q____], R____, F____, P____ [K____, or L____]

or

M29

G84.2X____, Y____, Z____, [Q____], R____, F____, P____ [K____, or L____]

or

M29

G84.3X____, Y____, Z____, [Q____], R____, F____, P____ [K____, or L____]

where




Q is the Peck Depth


F is the Feedrate

P is the Dwell Time







Canned Boring with Manual Feed Out and Dwell (ISNC G88)

With this canned cycle, a dwell is performed at the bottom of the hole and the system goes into Interrupt mode. The spindle can then be retracted manually using the jog controls. When the desired manual position is reached, follow these steps:

1. Press the console Auto button (in Machine Mode group).

2. The Start button starts flashing and the “Press Start Button” message displays.

3. Press the Start button.

4. The program finishes the canned cycle and then continues with the rest of the program.

FormatThe command format for the Boring With Manual Feed Out and Dwell canned cycle is as follows:

G88 X____, Y____, Z____, R____, I_____, J_____, P____, F____, [K____, or L____]

where







P is the Dwell Time

F is the Feedrate






ExampleThe drawing below illustrates tool movement for the Canned Boring with Manual Feed Out

The optional Q parameter defines the peck depth.


and Dwell cycle (ISNC G88):

Figure 3–37. Tool Movement for ISNC G88 Cycle

1 Part


3 Z Bottom Spindle Stop after Dwell

4 Resume Program Execution

A Rapid Feed

B Manual Retract

C Feedrate


Bore with Dwell (G89)

The Bore with Dwell cycle provides a feed-in, dwell, and feed-out sequence.

The Bore with Dwell cycle moves the axes in this manner with the spindle switched on:

1. The tool positions at the rapid speed to XY position, if necessary.

2. The spindle moves down at the feedrate to Z Bottom.

3. The spindle stays at the Z Bottom position for the specified dwell time.

4. The spindle moves Z up to Z Start at the rapid speed.

FormatThe command format for the Bore with Dwell cycle is as follows:

G89 X____, Y____, Z____, R____, P____, F____, [K____, or L____]

where




R is the Rotation Angle, Return Level, Circular Interpolation

P is the Subprogram Number, Dwell Time, Scaling Factor

F is the Feedrate







ExampleThe drawing below illustrates tool movement for the Bore with Dwell cycle (G89):

Figure 3–38. Tool Movement for the Bore with Dwell Cycle (G89)

1 Part




Absolute and Incremental (G90, G91)

The Absolute Machining Mode (G90) is the default and signals the system that the programmed dimensions are relative to part zero. Once programmed, this default stays in effect until canceled with a G91.

The Incremental Machining Mode (G91) signals the system that all programmed dimensions are incremental distances from the position in the previous block. Once programmed, this mode stays in effect until canceled with a G90.

If Absolute Machining Mode (G90) is activated, the center points I, J, and K are absolute Cartesian (rectangular) coordinates from part zero in BNC, but are incremental for ISNC.

If Incremental Machining Mode (G91) is activated, the center points I, J, and K are signed incremental distances from the arc start point for both BNC and ISNC. If I, J, or K is missing on an ISNC block, a zero is assumed.

FormatThis is the command format for each position command:

Absolute command:

G90 X_____Y_____Z_____

Incremental command:

G91 X_____Y_____Z_____

where




ExampleA machine is resting at the programmed part zero location, and the following blocks are executed in inches:

N2 G01 X1.0 Y1.0 F10.0

N4 X1.0 Y1.5

If the system is in Absolute Machining mode (G90), the N2 block causes the axes to travel at a 45° angle to the 1.0" position in X and 1.0" in Y. As a result of the N4 block, the machine remains at the 1.0" position in X and Y moves to the 1.5" position.

If the system is in Incremental Machining mode (G91), the N2 block causes the axes to travel at a 45° angle to the 1.0" position in X and the 1.0" position in Y—just as before. But, as a result of the N4 block, X continues to move 1.0" to the 2.0" position; Y moves 1.5" to the 2.5" position.


The diagram below illustrates absolute and incremental axis moves.

Figure 3–39. Differences Between Absolute and Incremental

A Absolute

B Incremental


Coordinate System Setting

This section explains the commands used for these coordinate system settings: part zero, machine coordinates, multiple work coordinates, local coordinates, polar coordinates, and automatic return to and from reference point.

Part Zero Setting (G92)

This command establishes the work coordinate system so that a certain point of the tool, for example the tool tip, becomes X, Y, Z, A, B, C in the established work coordinate system. The distance shifted with this command is added to all subsequent work coordinate system zero point offset values; all work coordinate systems move by the same distance. The G92 command can be used in any work coordinate system (G54–G59).

A G92 command makes the dimensions included in the block the new part relative position for the current machine location. The new part zero location is calculated from the current location of the axes and the dimensions included in the G92 block.

The part zero location is only altered for dimensions programmed in the G92 block. This makes it possible to alter the part zero locations for certain axes without affecting the others.

G92 is invalid while cutter compensation is on.

FormatThis is the format of the setting part zero command:

G92 X_____Y_____Z_____A_____B_____C____

where







ExampleSet Part Zero (G92) establishes new part relative coordinates at the current axis positions. For example, if the machine is positioned at part relative X2.0 and Y2.0, the block G92 X0.0 Y0.0 would make the current X and Y axis part relative positions equal 0.0. The machine axes will not move, but the status screen changes to reflect the new part zero reference point(s). Any programmed coordinates after the G92 block are

Cancel Scaling (G50) must be active before selecting G92.


referenced to the new part zero location(s).

Use the G92 code for repeating parts of a program at another location. The following is a sample of the codes used in incremental mode. Refer to the diagram below for an illustration of these codes.

NC Part Program 1 InchPARTZERO.FNC%

N10 G0 X20. Y20.

N12 X40.0

N14 Y40.0

N16 X20.0

N18 Y20.0

N20 X70.

N22 G92 X0. ⇐ Set new part zero

N24 X20.0

N26 Y40.0

N28 X0.0

N30 Y20.0

M02

Figure 3–40. Set Part Zero (G92)


Feed Functions

The Feedrate (F words) value establishes the non-rapid move feedrate. It remains active for all non-rapid moves until another Feedrate code is entered.

For Inch units in Basic NC, the actual feedrate is dependent on the usage of a decimal point. If no decimal point, the actual feedrate is one-tenth of the programmed feedrate (F30 equates to 3 inches per minute). If a decimal point is specified then the actual feedrate will be the programmed feedrate (F30.0 is 30 inches per minute). For metric units in Basic NC, the actual feedrate is the same as the programmed feedrate regardless of a decimal point (F75 and F75.0 are both 75 millimeters per minute).

The Feedrate code is active before the other commands in the program block are executed. G94, Feed per Minute Feedrate, is the default setting unless otherwise specified.

Inverse Time Feedrate (G93) and Feed Per Minute Feedrate (G94)

The default setting for Feedrate is G94 for Feed per Minute Feedrate, either inches per minute or millimeters per minute. G93 cancels G94 and G94 cancels G93.

Inverse Time (G93) can be specified to change the feedrate as a function of time and distance. If the time is unchanged but the distance changes then the actual feedrate will change proportionally. The format for Inverse Time is F6.3 (maximum of six digits before the decimal point and maximum of three digits after the decimal point) and the units are minutes. Feedrates of up to 999999.999 can be programmed using G93. The time is computed by dividing one by the Inverse Time programmed. The actual feedrate is the distance divided by the time.

Example

G93 G1 X5.0 F10.0

Y7.0 F10.0

Time is 1/10.0min = 0.1min

Actual Feedrate for first line is 5.0in/0.1min = 50ipm.

Actual Feedrate for second line is 7.0in/0.1min = 70ipm.

The feedrate must be specified for every move.

If the inverse time value falls outside the contouring limits of the machine, the control will instead use the minimum or maximum value.


FormatG93 X____ Y____ Z____ A____ C____ F____ (activate Inverse Time)

X ____Y____ Z____ A____ C____ F____

...

G94 X____ Y____ Z____ F____ (cancel Inverse Time and enable Feed Per Minute feedrate)

where






F is the Feedrate

Rotary Tangential Velocity Control (G94.1) (preliminary)

The Rotary Tangential Velocity Control (G94.1) command maintains the tool tip feedrate regardless of tool or part linear or rotary motion. This command works identically for 4- and 5-axis simultaneous motion, transitions between 4- and 5-axis simultaneous motion, linear to rotary moves, combined rotary to linear moves, or rotary-only moves.

G94.1 computes feedrate changes in real time as the tool approaches and moves away from a centerline of rotation, even if this happens during the execution of a single NC block. For example, on a 4-axis machine with Rotary A configuration, if the tool tip starts away from the rotary centerline and the NC block commands only the Y-axis to move such that the tool tip moves over and past the A centerline of rotation while rotating the A-axis, the machine will start with slower axes movement, then speed up to higher A- and Y-axes feedrates when the tool tip is just above the centerline of rotation. It will then slow down as it moves away from the centerline. This happens because the radial distance of the tool tip is shortest when the tool is just above the centerline, so the axes will have to move more quickly to maintain the feedrate.

G94.1 stays on until it is turned off with a G93 or G94.

Absolute Tool Length mode is the recommended tool calibration mode for use with the G94.1 command. If Z calibration mode is used, the Part Setup Offset Z, Z Table Offset, Tool Z calibration, and Rotary and Tilt axes centerline locations must be set. See “Tool Calibration Modes” in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.


Example

G21

G94.1

G1A90F1000

When executed on a 4 axis machine with Rotary A configuration, this example will result in a 90 degree arc cut on the cylinder circumference. The move will maintain a tool tip velocity with respect to the rotating part of 1000mm/min.


Canned Cycle Descriptions

Canned cycle descriptions, formats, and examples follow.

Return to Initial Point in Canned Cycles (G98)

Position the Z axis to the initial level. The initial level is the last position of the Z axis before the canned cycle is started. The Z axis rapids or feeds to the Z Retract Clearance level, based on the canned cycle being performed. Z Start in the canned cycle description is then equal to the initial point.

Format

G98 (no parameters follow)

Example

Figure 3–41. Return to R Plane Example

1 Initial Level

2 Retract Level


Sample NC Part Program Using G98Below is a program example using G98:

%

N1 G90 G80 G40 G21

N2 T1M6

N3 G43 H1 S3000 M3

N4 Z78.0 M8

N5 F1270.0

N6 G99 G81 X15 Y15 R28.0 Z-10.0

N7 Y35.0

N8 X60

N9 G98 Y15.0

N10 G99 X140.0

N11 Y35.0

N12 X185.0

N13 G98 Y15

N14 G80

N15 G0 G91 M28 Z0 M5 M9

E


Return to R Level in Canned Cycles (G99)

The Return to R Level in Canned Cycles command positions the Z axis to a return (R) level. The Z axis rapids or feeds to the return level between locations during canned cycles. Z Start in the canned cycle descriptions is then equal to the Return Point. Even when the canned cycle is performed in G99 mode, the initial level remains unchanged.

For BNC, specify an R with the G99.

For ISNC, the modal value of R is used.

FormatThe format of this code is as follows:

G99 R___

ExampleThe drawing below illustrates tool movement for the Return to R Level in Canned cycles (G99) command:

Figure 3–42. Tool Movement for the G99 Cycle

For BNC, the R parameter is an incremental distance from the initial Z level. Use this code to reduce the returned distance between locations during canned cycles.

For ISNC, the R parameter is an absolute Z level in G90 mode and an incremental negative Z distance in G91 mode.

1 Part

2 Initial Point

3 Z Bottom

4 Return Point (Industry Standard); Z Start (Basic)


Special Functions

Motoman Robot Control (G140)

The G140 code provides the ability to control a Motoman robot. The robot is physically connected to WinMax via ethernet (either direct or over a network). RS-232 (serial) connections are not supported.

Format

G140 uses the following syntax:

G140(J:Jobname R:xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)

The parentheses after G140 are required. The “J:” character sequence precedes the name of the robot job to run. The sequence “R:” is used to indicate the robot to receive the command and is specified as an IP (Internet Protocol) address. Each robot controller has a unique IP address and this format allows WinMax to work with multiple robots within the same program, if desired. The Jobname must already exist in the desired robot (there may be multiple jobs programmed into the robot). WinMax is simply selecting the job and robot and will wait for the job to complete before executing the next NC block.

Example

A robot is programmed with a job named “MovePallet” and the IP address of the robot is 192.168.11.7. To run the job, insert the following in the NC program:

G140(J:MovePallet R:192.168.11.7)

When the block is executed WinMax will stop, wait for the robot to run its job then continue once the job is complete.

This feature requires a USB dongle that enables the robot control functions.


Canned Cycles

Canned cycles use a one-block G code to provide drilling, boring, and tapping operations. Using one G code instead of several helps simplify writing NC programs. Various parameters are used in common with all or most of the canned cycles. For instance, Z is used to specify the canned cycle’s depth, P is used to specify dwell time, and F is used to specify the feedrate. For BNC, if there is no spindle speed and direction specified in the program, these values are retrieved from the tool page.

The table below contains canned cycles, G codes, and spindle operation while moving in the negative Z direction, being at Z Bottom, and moving in the positive Z direction.

Operation G Codes Spindle Operation

CannedCycle BNC ISNC In -Z

Direction At Z Bottom In +Z Direction

Peck Drilling G73 G73 Peck Feed None Rapid Traverse

Left Handed Tapping

G84with M04

G74 FeedSpindle Stop,

Dwell, Spindle CW

Feed

Bore Orient G76G86 G76 Feed Oriented Spindle

Stop Rapid Traverse

Canned Cycle Cancel G80 G80 None None None

Drill, Spot Boring G81 G81 Feed None Rapid Traverse

Drill with Dwell, Counter Boring G82 G82 Feed Dwell Rapid Traverse

Deep Hole Drilling G83 G83 Peck Feed None Rapid Traverse

TappingG84with M03

G84 Feed

Spindle Stop, Dwell,

ISNC Spindle CCW or

BNC Spindle CW

Feed

Boring G85 G85 Feed None Feed


Table 3–9. Canned Cycles, G Codes and Z Spindle Operations

These canned cycles are different for BNC than ISNC:

Table 3–10. BNC and ISNC Specific Canned Cycles

Operation G Codes Spindle Operation

CannedCycle BNC ISNC In -Z

Direction At Z Bottom In +Z Direction

Bore Orient Cycle G86 -

Bore Rapid Out - G86 Feed Spindle Stop Rapid Traverse

Back Boring– G87 Feed

Spindle Stop, Spindle Move, Spindle Start

Rapid Traverse

Chip Breaker G87 – Peck Feed with Dwell None Rapid Traverse

Boring with Manual Feed Out – G88 Feed Dwell Manual Move,

Rapid Traverse

Rigid Tapping

G88

G74 with M29; G 84 with M29; 84.2;

or 84.3

FeedSpindle Stop,

Dwell, Spindle Reverse

Feed

Bore with Dwell G89 G89 Feed Dwell Rapid Traverse

BNC-Specific Canned Cycles ISNC-Specific Canned Cycles

G84 with M04 Left-Handed Tapping

G74—Left-Handed Tapping

G84 with M03 Tapping G84—Tapping

G86—Bore Orient Cycle G86—Bore Rapid Out

G87—Chip Breaker G87—Back Boring

G88—Rigid Tapping G74 and G84 with M29— Rigid Tapping

G88—Boring with manual Feed Out


Canned Cycle Parameters

These parameters are used for programming the various canned cycles. They determine the spindle movement. In the pages that follow, the canned cycles are described and the parameters for each one are identified.

Table 3–11. Canned Cycle Parameters

Parameter Description

F Feedrate

I Signed, incremental distance from start point to center of spindle shift position (X axis).

J Signed, incremental distance from start point to center of spindle shift position (Y axis).

K

Number of repeats for a series of operations in a specified block.Range = 1 through 6; Default = 1. If K = 0, drilling data is stored and no drilling is performed.The incremental distance and direction between canned cycles is determined by the previous block’s position from the first canned cycle’s position.K and L parameters function the same.

L

Number of repeats for a series of operations in a specified block.Range = 1 through 6; Default = 1. If L = 0 drilling data is stored and no drilling is performed.The incremental distance and direction between canned cycles is determined by the previous block’s position from the first canned cycle’s position.K and L parameters function the same.

P Dwell time at the bottom of the hole.

Q Incremental peck depth value or spindle shift distance.

R

BNC: Incremental, positive distance from the Initial Point to Point R.Only used in G99 mode for BNC.ISNC: Represents absolute Z level at which machining begins in either G98 or G99.Must be specified for all ISNC canned cycles.

X X axis hole position data.

Y Y axis hole position data.

Z

Defines Z Bottom location.BNC:Always a positive value.In G98 mode:incremental distance down from initial point.In G99 mode:incremental distance down from the R level.ISNC:In G90 mode: absolute Z level.In G91 mode: negative incremental value measured from the R level.


Depth (Z Parameter)

Z is used to specify the canned cycle’s depth. All canned cycles require a Z word. Z Start is the Z level where the negative Z (-Z) axis movement begins. This dimension is the same as the Return to Initial Point in Canned Cycle (G98) and the Return to R Point in Canned Cycle (G99) codes. The Z Bottom parameter is the point of maximum Z down (except for ISNC G88) and the dimension where the -Z axis movement ends.

A rapid move at the Z Start level is automatically used to move from one canned cycle block to another. Make sure the current Z Start level is high enough to clear all fixtures and obstacles.

Note the differences in the definitions for BNC and ISNC Z parameters in the previous table.

• For BNC, the current Z level should be established before invoking the canned cycle (via G00 or G01). Once a Z distance is established, it does not need to be reprogrammed until the canned cycle mode is canceled or changed.

• For ISNC, the Z word represents a negative or positive absolute Z drilling level in G90 mode which must be below the current Z level, or an incremental negative distance from the current R level in G91 mode.

Dwell (P Parameter)

Many of the canned cycles have dwell capability. The scaling factors used with the canned cycle dwell parameter P are the same as Dwell, Exact Stop (G04). The length of dwell time is modal and can be specified using one of these methods:

• G04 with a P or X value

• P value with a canned cycle command

• Dwell parameters on the Holes Parameters screen

If you use the default dwell parameters on the Holes Parameters screen, G04 P0.0 or a P0.0 is required with the canned cycle command to cancel any previously commanded dwell time.

Feedrate (F Parameter)

The current feedrate is used for feed moves and may be reprogrammed in any canned cycle block by including an F word. The feedrate parameter applies only to the Z direction during canned cycles.

Taps use the Bore Dwell parameter.

For BNC files, if no decimal point is included, the system automatically divides the feedrate by 10.

For ISNC files, if no decimal point is included and the Assume Feedrate 1 Increment field on the NC Parameters⎯Configuration Parameters screen is set to Yes, the system automatically divides the feedrate by 10.


Canceling or Replacing Canned Cycles

All canned cycles are canceled by G00, G01, G02, G03, (the One-Shot Group 00 G codes) or G80 (Canned Cycle Cancel).

Current canned cycles can be replaced with another canned cycle without first canceling the canned cycle.

If a G00, G01, G02, G03, or G80 occurs in the same block with a canned cycle command (for example G00 G85), the G00 is ignored and the canned cycle command (G85 in this case) is executed. If a G00, G01, G02, or G03 command follows a canned cycle command, the X, Y, Z parameters are used to perform the interpolation or rapid positioning, and the remaining canned cycle parameters in the block are ignored.

All canned cycle data are modal. When a canned cycle is canceled using G00 or G80, the R point, canned cycle repetition value K, and the Q (cut-in, bore shift) are canceled.

Canned cycles, which turn off the spindle during the cycle, automatically restore the spindle to the original speed and direction before completing the cycle. If a canned cycle requires a certain spindle direction and the opposite spindle direction is currently in effect, the system reverses the spindle direction automatically.

Except for tap cycles, canned cycles do not activate the spindle. The program must have a Start Spindle Clockwise (M03) or Start Spindle Counterclockwise (M04) to turn on the spindle prior to executing a canned cycle. For tap cycles, both the spindle speed and direction are retrieved from the tool library if not specified in the program. If a spindle speed is not provided with the M3 or M4, the spindle speed from the tool library is used.

WinMax Mill NC Programming 704-0116-501 Spindle Speed - S Codes 3-151

SPINDLE SPEED - S CODES

The Spindle Speed code (S) specifies the spindle rotation speed. The spindle does not rotate until a Start Spindle Clockwise (M03) or a Start Spindle Counterclockwise (M04) is programmed.

If the S is present with an M03 or an M04 in the same program block, it is active before the other codes in the program block are executed. As soon as an S appears in the program, its value is used for the M03s and M04s that follow until a new S value is encountered. If there is a rapid on the same line, the spindle will ramp up while simultaneously moving in the other axes.

For ISNC, if the spindle has already been turned on, the S code is sufficient for changing spindle speed. If the spindle is already turned on and an S code occurs either in a tool change block or in a block following a tool change block, the spindle ramps up to the new spindle speed after the tool change.

3 - 152 Spindle Speed - S Codes 704-0116-501 WinMax Mill NC Programming

WinMax Mill NC Programming 704-0116-501 Tool Functions 3-153

TOOL FUNCTIONS

These codes control tool selection: T, L, and D. The L and D codes are for BNC only. To activate these codes, an M06 code must be contained in the same block. To activate the L and D words, an M06 must be used with a T word. The NC Parameters screen contains two fields for controlling tool changes: the Default Tool Number and the M6 Initiates Tool Change.

D Codes

The Tool Diameter Offset codes (D values) are used in ISNC and BNC programs and cause the specified dimension to be loaded into the tool diameter register.

Otherwise, for BNC only, the Diameter value in the appropriate Tool Setup data is used. This dimension is used for cutter compensation, again, only for BNC.

Negative values are not permitted.

L Codes (BNC)

The Tool Length Offset (L) codes cause the specified dimension to be loaded into the tool offset register. Otherwise, the Zero Calibration value in the appropriate Tool Setup data is used.

Negative values are not permitted.

T Codes

The Tool Select (T) codes specify the tool number. The value is composed of up to two digits. Placing the T word in a block does NOT cause a tool change to occur.

If the M6 Initiates Tool Change field is set to Yes, the M06 code must be used to initiate the tool change.

If the M6 Initiates Tool Change field is set to Yes, and a program has a T Code without an M6 Code, the machine will pre-fetch the tool. When this occurs, the tool changer moves the tool carousel so the next tool is ready, but does not complete the change until it encounters the M6.

3 - 154 Tool Functions 704-0116-501 WinMax Mill NC Programming

WinMax Mill NC Programming 704-0116-501 Miscellaneous Functions - M Codes 3-155

MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS - M CODES

The following information is described in this section:

M Code Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 157

Program Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 160

Program Stop (M00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 160

Planned Stop (M01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 161

End of Program (M02). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 161

Start Spindle Clockwise (M03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 162

Start Spindle Counterclockwise (M04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 162

Spindle Off (M05) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 162

M6 Initiates Tool Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 162

Secondary Coolant On (M07) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 163

Primary Coolant On (M08) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 163

Both Coolant Systems Off (M09) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 163

Both Coolant Systems On (M10). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 163

Clamp C-axis (M12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 164

Unclamp C-axis (M13). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 164

Automatic Buffering On (M16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 164

Automatic Buffering Off (M17) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 164

Oriented Spindle Stop (M19) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 164

Pulse Indexer One Increment (M20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 165

Z Axis to Home Position (M25) - Basic NC Programming only. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 165

Select Part Probe Signal (M26). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 165

Select Tool Probe Signal (M27). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 165

Enable Rigid Tapping (ISNC M29) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 165

Program End (M30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 165

Rotary Encoder Reset (M31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 165

Clamp A-axis (M32) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 166

Unclamp A-axis (M33). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 166

Clamp B-axis (M34) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 166

Unclamp B-axis (M35). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 166

Servo Off Code (M36) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 166

Laser Input Update (M38-M40) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 166

Single-Touch Probing (M41). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 167

3 - 156 Miscellaneous Functions - M Codes 704-0116-501 WinMax Mill NC Programming

Double-Touch Probing (M42) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 167

Barrier Air Control (M43 and M44) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 167

Shutter Probe Control (M45 and M46) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 167

Laser Emitter On/Off Control (M47 and M48) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 167

Laser Receiver On/Off (M49 and M50). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 167

Enable Auxiliary Output 1 through 4 (M52 – M55) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 167

Nonconfirmation Pallet Change (M56 – M58) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 168

Chip Conveyor Fwd/Reverse/Stop (M59, M60, M61) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 168

Disable Auxiliary Output 1 through 4 (M62 – M65) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 168

Washdown Coolant System (M68, M69) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 168

Pallet Changer Control (M70) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 168

Right Handed C Axis (M80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 169

Left Handed C Axis (M81) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 169

Z Axis Retract Enable (M90)/Disable (M91) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 169

Subprogram Call (M98) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 169

Jump; Return from Subprogram (M99) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 170

Shortest Rotary Angle Path Traverse (M126) and Shortest Rotary Angle Path Traverse Cancel (M127) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 171

Tool Center Point Management (M128) and Tool Center Point Mngmt Cancel (M129) 3 - 172

Retract Along Tool Vector (M140) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 177

Enable Auxiliary Output 5 through 12 (M142-M149) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 178

Disable Auxiliary Output 5 through 12 (M152 – M159) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 178

B-Axis Pinning (M170 - M175) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 178

Spindle Gear Select (M176) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 178

ASR Non-Interpolated Axis Motion (M177). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 179

Tilt Axis Preference (M200) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 179

Minimum Axis Limit Override (M210) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 180

Maximum Axis Limit Override (M211) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 180

Cancel Axis Limit Overrides (M212) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 180

Kinematic ASR Motion (M213) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 180

Kinematic ASR On/Off (M214) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 181


M Code Definitions

Miscellaneous Functions (M codes) cause machine-related action (e.g., coolant control and tool changes). Each Miscellaneous Function is explained below. Multiple M codes can be used within an NC block.

M Code Table

M Code Definition

M00 Cancels the spindle and coolant functions; stops part program execution

M01 Program stop often used when the operator wants to refixture the part

M02 Marks the end of the program; stops the spindle, coolant, and axes feed

M03 Starts clockwise rotation of the spindle

M04 Starts counterclockwise rotation of the spindle

M05 Switches the spindle off

M06 Requests an automatic tool change

M07 Switches on secondary coolant systems

M08 Switches on primary coolant system

M09 Switches off both the primary and secondary coolant

M10 Switches on both the primary and secondary coolant

M12 Clamp Rotary C Axis

M13 Unclamp Rotary C Axis

M16 Automatic Buffering On

M17 Automatic Buffering Off

M20 Advances the indexer one position

M21 Initiates lubrication

M25 Retracts the Z axis to the home position (tool change height)

M26 Select Part Probe Signal

M27 Select Tool Probe Signal

ISNC M29 Enables rigid tapping

M30 Program End

M31 Resets the rotary axis encoder position

M32 Clamps the rotary A axis

M33 Unclamps the rotary A axis

M34 Clamps the rotary B axis

M35 Unclamps the rotary B axis

M36 Switches off the servos

M38 Reads and places the state of the laser OK signal

M39 Reads and places the state of the laser static signal

M40 Reads and places the state of the laser dynamic signal


M Code Table

M Code DefinitionM41 Enables single-touch probing when using the G31 command

M42 Enables two-touch probing with the G31 command.

M43 Increases the barrier air.

M44 Reduces barrier air.

M45 Opens the shutter.

M46 Closes the shutter.

M47 Turns the laser emitter on.

M48 Turns the laser emitter off.

M49 Turns the laser receiver on / Disable Latch Mode.

M50 Turns the laser receiver off / Enable Latch Mode.

M51 Cycle Pallet Changer

M52 Enables auxiliary output 1.




M56 Rotates the pallet changer for a non-confirmation pallet change.

M57 Rotates the pallet changer to pallet 1.

M58 Rotates the pallet changer to pallet 2.

M59 Turns chip conveyor forward mode on.

M60 Turns chip conveyor reverse mode on.

M61 Stops the chip conveyor.

M62 Disables auxiliary output 1.




M68 Enables washdown coolant system.

M69 Disables washdown coolant system.

M70 Pallet Changer Control

M76 Normal A Axis operation (default).

M77 Reverses A Axis operation.

M78 Normal B Axis operation (default).

M79 Reverses B Axis operation.

M80 C Axis is right-handed (default).

M81 C Axis is left-handed.

M90 Z Axis Retract Enable

M91 Z Axis Retract Disable

M98 Subprogram call.

M99 Jump; Return from subprogram.


M Code Definition

M126 Shortest Rotary Angle Path Traverse

M127 Cancels Shortest Rotary Angle Path Traverse (M126)

M128 Tool Center Point Management

M129 Cancels Tool Center Point Management (M128)

M140 Retract Along Tool Vector

M142 Enable Auxiliary Output 5








M152 Disable Auxiliary Output 5








M170 Pin Boring Mill B-axis to 0 degrees




M174 Boring Mill table pin in

M175 Boring Mill table pin out

M176 Spindle Gear Select

M177 ASR Non-Interpolated Axis Motion

M200 Tilt Axis Preference

M210 Minimum Axis Limit Override

M211 Maximum Axis Limit Override

M212 Cancel Axis Limit Overrides

M213 Kinematic ASR Motion

M214 Kinematic ASR On/Off


Program Functions

The Program Functions (M00, M01, and M02) stop the execution of the part programs.

Program Stop (M00)

The Program Stop (M00) cancels the spindle and coolant functions and terminates further program execution after completion of other commands in the same program block. When the program is stopped, existing modal information remains unchanged as in single block operation. The Start Cycle button on the control flashes and this prompt message appears:

Cycle complete; press start to continue.

Pressing the Start Cycle button resumes the spindle and coolant operation and continues the program execution.

This M code should not be set simultaneously with other M codes. M00 is executed following execution of the rest of the address words on the block. Here is an example using the M00 code:

N10 G01 X2. Y1. F10. M00

In this example, the machine moves to the X2/Y1 location before it shuts down.

Program blocks should be included that retract the tool to a safe position before a block containing an M00 is programmed. If these program blocks are not included, the spindle stops while cutting the part.


Planned Stop (M01)

The Planned Stop Code (M01) pauses the program and shuts off the spindle. M01 is ignored unless previously validated in the parameter page.

Include a data block to retract the tool to a safe position before a block containing an M01 is programmed. If the retract tool data block is not included, the spindle will stop while cutting the part.

End of Program (M02)

The End Of Program code (M02) indicates the end of the main program (the completion of the part), and is necessary for the registration of CNC commands from tape to memory. M02 stops the spindle, the coolant, and the axis feed after completing all of the commands in the program. M02 is active after the block is executed.

The enclosure doors can be opened after an M01 command, but no machine operation is allowed. Once the doors are closed, press the flashing Start Cycle button to acknowledge the command and allow the program to continue.

You can also pause the program and shut off the spindle by selecting the NC Optional Stop On/Off softkey on the Auto Run screen or setting the NC Optional Program Stop parameter on the NC Configuration Parameters screen. Refer to Auto Mode Monitoring in Getting Started with WinMax Mill and NC Parameters, on page 3 - 20 for more information.

When the Start Cycle button is pressed after an M01, the control looks ahead 30 blocks to determine if the spindle and/or coolant should be turned back on. For the spindle, a M06, M19, M5, M2, M30 or M36 event without a G01, G02, or G03 will keep the spindle off. For coolant, a M06, M09, M2, or M36 event without a G01, G02, or G03 will keep the coolant off. Otherwise, the spindle and/or coolant is turned back on.

The M02 does NOT stop the NC program loader if the program is loading from a serial link. An E character must be transmitted to signal the loader that the entire program has been sent to the remote device.

This M code should not be set simultaneously with other M codes unless it is the last M code in the block.


Start Spindle Clockwise (M03)

The Start Spindle Clockwise code starts a clockwise spindle rotation (as viewed from the headstock). The spindle reaches the programmed speed before X, Y, and Z (also A and B if present) axis feed starts. If the M03 is on the same line as a Rapid move (G00), the spindle ramps up to speed while moving at rapid to position. If the spindle speed has not been defined, the Tool Setup screen’s spindle speed is used.

M03 is active before the other commands in the block are executed.

Start Spindle Counterclockwise (M04)

The Start Spindle Counterclockwise code starts spindle rotation in a counterclockwise direction (as viewed from the headstock). The spindle reaches the programmed speed before X, Y, Z (A or B) feed starts. If the spindle speed has not been defined, the Tool Setup screen’s spindle speed is used.


Spindle Off (M05)

The Spindle Off code is the default and causes the spindle to stop in a normal manner. If the machine is equipped with a brake, it is applied.

M05 is active after the other commands in the block are executed.

M6 Initiates Tool Change

Use this field on the NC Parameters screen to indicate whether tool changes are initiated with the M6 or with the T code. Set this field to No and the M06 is ignored and tool changes are initiated whenever a T code is found in the program (not when T is used for user-defined subprogram or subprogram parameter).

If this field is set to Yes, the M6 is required for tool changes. (Default is Yes.)

If this field is set to Yes and a T code is used without the M06, the machine will “pre-fetch” the tool. When this occurs, the tool changer moves the tool carousel so the next tool is ready, but does not complete the change until it encounters the M06.

Change Tool (M06)

The Change Tool code requests that the machine perform a tool change. These tool changes should be performed in rapid traverse mode. The following sequence occurs if an automatic tool changer is present and in the Auto Tool Change mode:

1. The Z axis retracts to tool change position.

2. The machine moves the X and Y axes to the Tool Change position if the tool change position parameter is set to Yes.

3. The spindle orients and stops.

4. The “old” tool is returned to the tool changer.


5. The “new” tool is placed in the spindle.

6. New tool offsets from the Tool Offset screen are loaded into the appropriate registers. The Tool Length Offsets from G43 and G44 remain in effect.

7. The program continues.

This sequence occurs for manual tool changes:

1. Z axis retracts to its tool change position.

2. The machine moves the X and Y axes to the Tool Change position if the tool change position parameter is set to Yes.

3. The spindle stops and orients.

4. The screen prompts for a tool change.

5. Change the tool and press the Start Cycle button on the control to allow the program to continue.

6. New tool offsets are loaded into the appropriate registers.

7. The program continues.

Secondary Coolant On (M07)

The Secondary Coolant On code switches on the mist coolant, if available. M07 is active before the other commands in the block are executed.

Primary Coolant On (M08)

The Primary Coolant On code switches on the flood coolant, if available. M08 is active before the other commands in the block are executed.

Both Coolant Systems Off (M09)

The Coolant Off code is the default and switches off the coolant if it has been activated by Secondary Coolant On (M07) or Primary Coolant On (M08). M09 is active after the other commands in the block are executed.

Both Coolant Systems On (M10)

The Both Coolant Systems On code switches on the coolant if it has been activated by Both Coolant Systems Off (M09).

The M06 is optional if the M6 Initiates Tool Change field on the NC Parameters screen is set to Yes; otherwise, tool changes are performed with the T code.

The first Z dimension after a tool change must be absolute. Any Z dimension programmed in a tool change block is ignored.


Clamp C-axis (M12)

The Clamp C axis code clamps the C axis. For C axis moves after M12, the C axis is automatically unclamped for the move and clamped again after the move is complete.

M12 is active before the other commands in the block are executed and is canceled by an Unclamp C axis (M13) command.

Unclamp C-axis (M13)

The Unclamp C axis code unclamps the C axis until an M12 is programmed.

M13 is active before the other commands in the block are executed and is canceled by a Clamp C axis (M12) command.

Automatic Buffering On (M16)

Turns on automatic buffering when the Intelligent Automatic Safe Repositioning parameter is enabled in NC Parameters. M16/M17 are used to turn automatic buffering on and off within a program.

Automatic Buffering Off (M17)

Turns off automatic buffering.

Oriented Spindle Stop (M19)

The Oriented Spindle Stop code causes the spindle to stop in the oriented position. A brake, if available, will be applied. The coolant is also turned off. This function only applies to machines which have an orient feature. On machines without the orient feature, this function works like the Spindle Off (M05) command.

S___ defines the position of the spindle, from 0 to 359 degrees, in 1 degree increments.

Q___ defines the reference method for the spindle zero position:

• Q0 defines the orient position as the zero position. The spindle position is a positive angle measured CCW from the orient position. This is the default reference method.

• Q1 defines the positive X axis as the zero position. The spindle position is a positive angle measured counterclockwise from the positive X axis, when looking down the spindle. A position of zero will align the oriented spindle key along the positive X axis.

M19 is active after the other commands in the block are executed. When the M19 S_ command is received, WinMax will stop the spindle, orient the spindle, move to the S_ position, and then hold position.


Pulse Indexer One Increment (M20)

The Pulse Indexer One Increment code advances the indexer one position. A reply signal is sent back from the indexer to indicate when it is in position. When the signal is received, the program continues. For multiple indexes, separate M20 blocks must be programmed. (Refer to the indexer’s manual and the Hurco Maintenance Manual for information on attaching an indexer to the machine.)

M20 is active after the other commands in the block are executed.

Z Axis to Home Position (M25) - Basic NC Programming only

The Z Axis to Home Position code retracts the Z axis to the home position (tool change height) at the rapid traverse rate selected in the Program Parameters screen. The first Z value after an M25 must be absolute.


Select Part Probe Signal (M26)

When G31 is used to invoke probe motion, the machine will move to the specified destination until either the destination is reached or a probe deflection occurs. The Select Part Probe Signal (M26) alerts the G31 move to detect a part probe deflection.

Select Tool Probe Signal (M27)

When G31 is used to invoke probe motion, the machine will move to the specified destination until either the destination is reached or a probe deflection occurs. The Select Tool Probe Signal (M27) alerts the G31 move to detect a tool probe deflection.

Enable Rigid Tapping (ISNC M29)

When Enable Rigid Tapping (M29) is used before a Left-Handed Tapping Cycle (ISNC G74) or Tapping Cycle (G84) command, rigid tapping is performed. M29 stays in effect until a One-Shot (G00, G01, G02, G03) code or Canned Cycle Cancel (G80) command is used.

Program End (M30)

The Program End code (M30) indicates the end of the main program (the completion of the part). M30 stops the spindle, the coolant, and the axis feed after completing all of the commands in the program. M30 is active after the block is executed.

Rotary Encoder Reset (M31)

If the rotary axis rotates to a position greater than +180° or less than -180°, the M31 resets the current axis position to 0° so subsequent rotations of the axis will move based on the new rotary position of 0°.


For example, if the rotary axis is positioned to 9000° and the program is rerun, without an M31 the rotary axis will have to unwind back to be within (-180°, 180°) before moving to 9000°. With an M31 before the 9000° move, the rotary axis will reset from 9000° to 0° and will not have to unwind.

An M31 command can be called in both Conversational and NC part programs. If M31 is executed during contouring operations in a part program, the move prior to the M31 command will come to an exact stop before M31 is executed.

Clamp A-axis (M32)

The Clamp A-axis code clamps the A axis. For A axis moves after M32, the A axis is automatically unclamped for the move and clamped again after the move is complete.

M32 is active before the other commands in the block are executed and is canceled by an Unclamp A axis (M33) command.

Unclamp A-axis (M33)

The Unclamp A axis code unclamps the A axis until an M32 is programmed.

M33 is active before the other commands in the block are executed and is canceled by a Clamp A axis (M32) command.

Clamp B-axis (M34)

The Clamp B axis code clamps the B axis. For B axis moves after M34, the B axis is automatically unclamped for the move and clamped again after the move is complete.

M34 is active before the other commands in the block are executed and is canceled by an Unclamp B axis (M35) command.

Unclamp B-axis (M35)

The Unclamp B axis code unclamps the B axis until an M34 is programmed.

M35 is active before the other commands in the block are executed and is canceled by a Clamp B axis (M34) command.

Servo Off Code (M36)

The servos may be turned off using the Servo Off (M36) command.

Control power to the machine will be turned off. The control will still be powered on. This is similar to an emergency stop.

Laser Input Update (M38-M40)

These codes read the state of the three laser inputs (M38: OK signal;


M39: static signal; and M40: dynamic signal).

Single-Touch Probing (M41)

For a G31 probing move, perform one touch.

Double-Touch Probing (M42)

For a G31 probing move, perform two touches. This is the default mode.

Barrier Air Control (M43 and M44)

Barrier air is used to prevent chips and debris from getting into the laser emitter and receiver. M43 causes the air flow at the probe to increase; M44 reduces the airflow. During operation of the probe, the barrier air should be increased whenever the probe shutter is open. It should remain at the high flow rate except during the actual tool measurement. When the shutter is closed, the flow rate may be reduced.

Shutter Probe Control (M45 and M46)

A pneumatic shutter protects the probe. During a measurement, the barrier air should be increased and the shutter opened. After the probe cycle is completed, the shutter should be closed and the barrier air reduced. M45 causes a brief puff of air that helps clear chips and debris from the probe. M46 closes the shutter.

Laser Emitter On/Off Control (M47 and M48)

M47 turns the laser emitter on. M48 turns the laser off. It is recommended to turn the laser emitter off when not in use.

Laser Receiver On/Off (M49 and M50)

M49 turns the laser receiver on. M50 turns the laser receiver off. It is recommended to turn the laser receiver off when not in use.

Cycle Pallet Changer (M51)

M51 rotates the pallet changer on horizontal machining centers without regard to position or pallet setup. Confirmation is required.

Enable Auxiliary Output 1 through 4 (M52 – M55)

M52 through M55 are used to individually enable auxiliary equipment or a unique machine function from within a part program. Enter performance time for the machine-

M49 is also used to disable latch mode and M50 to enable latch mode with some probe types.


specific M code in the M Code Table. When M52 through M55 are active, the corresponding auxiliary equipment or machine function is turned on, and any performance time is added to estimated run time.

M52 enables Auxiliary Output 1, M53 enables Auxiliary Output 2, M54 enables Auxiliary Output 3, M55 enables Auxiliary Output 4.

Nonconfirmation Pallet Change (M56 – M58)

M56 rotates the pallet changer without regard to position or pallet setup confirmation. M57 rotates the pallet changer to pallet 1. M58 rotates the pallet changer to pallet 2.

The Z-axis automatically moves to zero when a M56, M57 or M58 command is executed.

Chip Conveyor Fwd/Reverse/Stop (M59, M60, M61)

M59 enables chip conveyor forward mode. M60 enables chip conveyor reverse mode. M61 stops the chip conveyor motion.

Disable Auxiliary Output 1 through 4 (M62 – M65)

M62 through M65 turn off auxiliary equipment or machine functions enabled with M codes M52 through M55.

M62 disables Auxiliary Output 1 (M52), M63 disables Auxiliary Output 2 (M53), M64 disables Auxiliary Output 3 (M54), and M64 disables Auxiliary Output 4 (M55).

Washdown Coolant System (M68, M69)

M68 enables washdown coolant system. M69 disables washdown coolant system.

Pallet Changer Control (M70)

M70 controls pallet changes with or without two optional parameters, P_ and L_. By itself (without P_ or L_ parameters) it cycles the pallet changer without confirmation. Confirmation requires the APC Ready button.

M70 P_ L_ (optional)

where

P0 = change current pallet (no P token is the same as P0)

P1 = change to pallet #1

P2 = change to pallet #2

Auxiliary Outputs 5 through 12 are enabled with M142-M149.


L0 = perform pallet change without confirmation (no L token is the same as L0)

L1 = perform pallet change with confirmation (APC Ready button)

Right Handed C Axis (M80)

When this M code is active and a command is given to the C axis to go in a positive direction, the axis will rotate counter clockwise.

Left Handed C Axis (M81)

When is M code is active and a command is given to the C axis to go in a negative direction, the axis will rotate clockwise.

Z Axis Retract Enable (M90)/Disable (M91)

M90 enables the Z Axis to be retracted in the event of a power loss. M91 disables Z retract.

M90/M91 must be used with the Enable Retract Z-Axis on Power Loss parameter. The parameter must be set to 1 to enable the feature, and can then be turned on and off within a program using M90 (on) and M91 (off).

Subprogram Call (M98)

One way of specifying the number of iterations for a subprogram to perform is with M98 subprogram calls.

When making M98 subprogram calls, the P parameter is used to specify iterations as well as the subprogram number. Up to four digits can be used to specify iterations for a maximum of 9999 iterations. Leading zeros are not required when specifying iterations; however, leading zeros are required with a subprogram number that is less than 1000.

In Example 1 below, M98 P60050 must be used instead of M98 P650 to run program 50 with 6 iterations because the subprogram number (50) is less than 1000.

In Example 2, the M98 P23013000 subprogram example, the four digits to the left (2301) specify the number of iterations, and the four digits to the right (3000) specify the subprogram number.


As other examples, M98 P1 runs program 1 with no iterations, and M98 P100001 runs program 1 ten times.

Jump; Return from Subprogram (M99)

Each subprogram ends with an M99 Jump statement.

Example 1 Example 2

A Number of Items

B Subprogram Number


Shortest Rotary Angle Path Traverse (M126) and Shortest Rotary Angle Path Traverse Cancel (M127)

M126 activates Shortest Rotary Angle Path Traverse. The control will move the rotary-axis through the shortest angular distance to the commanded position. M127 cancels the Shortest Rotary Angle Path Traverse.

Example

The table below illustrates machine movement with the M126 command.

Table 3–12. Machine Movement with M126 Command

The table below illustrates machine movement with the Shortest Rotary Angle Path Traverse Cancel (M127) command. Standard machine movement for the VMX42 SR is the same as machine movement with the Shortest Rotary Angle Path Traverse cancelled, except when Tool Vector Input, on page 3 - 173 (G00 or G01) or 3D Tool Geometry Compensation (G41.2), on page 3 - 174 are active.

Table 3–13. Machine Movement with M127 Command

Initial Position

Commanded Position

Angular Distance Traverse

350° 20° +30°

20° 350° -30°

Initial Position

Commanded Position

Angular Distance Traverse

350° 20° -330°

20° 350° +330°


Tool Center Point Management (M128) and Tool Center Point Mngmt Cancel (M129)

The Tool Center Point Management feature allows programming of 5-axis tool positions in the Workpiece Coordinate System, independent of the Part Setup location in the machine. Refer to the Getting Started with WinMax Mill manual.

M128 activates Tool Center Point Management and M129 cancels Tool Center Point Management.

Three input modes are available with M128:

• Axes Angle Input, on page 3 - 172 (G00 or G01): Tool Bottom Centerpoint (X_Y_Z_) and Axes Angle Input (B_C_)

• Tool Vector Input, on page 3 - 173 (G00 or G01): Tool Bottom Centerpoint (X_Y_Z_) and Tool Vector (I_J_K_)

• 3D Tool Geometry Compensation (G41.2), on page 3 - 174: Surface Contact Point (X_Y_Z_) and Tool Vector (I_J_K_) and Surface Normal Vector at contact point (U_V_W_)

Axes Angle Input

Allows the Operator to specify the Tool Bottom Centerpoint with respect to the Workpiece Coordinate System, and the rotary and tilt axes relative to the Unrotated Coordinate System. Refer to the Getting Started with WinMax Mill manual.

Format

G01 X_Y_Z_B_C_

where

{X, Y, Z} is the Tool Bottom Centerpoint.

{B, C} are the rotary and tilt angles relative to Part Setup. B and C are modal.

G00, G01, G02, and G03 moves are supported in M128 mode.

NC Hole cycles are permitted with M128 activated, only if the Tool Vector is vertical.

Both G93 (Inverse Time) and G94 (UPM) are supported when M128 is active.


Tool Vector Input

A vector is a direction in 3D space that is defined using values for the X, Y, and Z direction components, as shown in the figure below. Since vectors describe a direction, their base is always at the Coordinate System origin from which they point outward. Tool Vector is the vector that describes the orientation of the tool axis; the direction from the tool tip pointing up through the spindle and away from the workpiece.

The drawing below is a plot of a vector with its, Â I, J, and K components that correspond to the X, Y, and Z directions.

Figure 3–43. Plot of a Vector

When the NC program contains Tool Vectors in the tool position blocks with M128 or NC Transform Plane active, the CNC will compute the appropriate rotary and tilt axes (B-axis and C-axis) positions. The Tool Tip location in the part program specifies where on the workpiece the tool should be positioned. The CNC computes the X, Y, and Z machine axes positions to move the rotated tool tip to the specified point on the rotated workpiece.

Tool Vector Input is only available if M128 or NC Transform Plane is active.

The Tool Vector can be specified with up to six decimal places. It is highly recommended that the full precision be used. Field values will normally lie in the range of -1.000 000 to +1.000 000. If the magnitude of the vector does not equal 1, the vector will be normalized by the CNC.

The magnitude of a vector is determined by using the following equation:

The Tool Tip and Tool Vector are specified with respect to the Workpiece Coordinate System defined in the CAM software or the NC Transform Plane. The CNC will automatically compute the machine axes positions using the Tool Length and the Part Setup information. Refer to Getting Started with WinMax Mill.

magnitude I2 J2 K2+ +=


Format

G01 X_Y_Z_I_J_K_

where

{X, Y, Z} is the Tool Bottom Centerpoint. X, Y, and Z are modal.

{I, J, K} is the Tool Vector. I, J, and K are non-modal.

3D Tool Geometry Compensation (G41.2)

G41.2 allows specification of the Surface Contact Point, the Surface Normal Vector, and the Tool Vector. The CNC will compute the tool position automatically for ball nose, flat end, and bull nose endmills. The tool will be positioned to tangentially touch the specified Surface Contact Point. The following figure shows the Surface Normal Vector, Tool Vector and Surface Contact Point for a tool.

Figure 3–44. Tool Components for 3D Tool Geometry Compensation

Both G93 (Inverse Time) and G94 (UPM) are supported with Tool Vector Input.

M128 must be active when using G41.2.

1 Surface Normal Vector

2 Tool Vector

3 Surface Contact Point

Although ball, flat, and bull nose endmills can be positioned interchangeably with a G41.2 command, there is no guarantee that the selected tool dimensions and geometry will not cause gouging of the part.

It is the responsibility of the Operator to ensure that the tool path is gouge-free for the selected tool.


The Surface Contact Point, Surface Normal Vector, and Tool Vector are specified with respect to the Workpiece Coordinate System defined in the CAD/CAM software or part drawing. The CNC will automatically compute the machine axes coordinates using the tool dimensions and Part Setup information. Refer to Getting Started with WinMax Mill.

For flat and corner radius end mills, there are infinite solutions for the tool position when Tool Vector and Surface Normal Vector point in the same direction and any point on the bottom face of the tool can touch the Surface Contact point (shown by #1 and #2 in the following figure). When this condition exists, the CNC will place the Tool Bottom Center on the Surface Contact Point, as shown by #3 in the figure below.

Figure 3–45. 3D Tool Geometry Compensation Infinite Solution Examples

• G41.2 requires the radius and corner radius to compute tool positions. Refer to the following figure for tool geometry.

• G41.2 D_R_ specifies the Tool Radius (D_) and the Corner Radius (R_) for both the ISNC and Hurco Basic NC dialects. The values in D_ and R_ are indexes for the Tool Radius Offset Table and Tool Corner Radius Offset Table, respectively.

Tool Vector and Surface Normal Vector can be specified with up to six decimal places. It is highly recommended that the full precision be used. Field values will normally lie in the range of -1.000 000 to +1.000 000. If the magnitude of the vector does not equal 1, the vector will be normalized by the CNC.

A Tool Vector

B Surface Normal Vector

C Surface Contact Point


Figure 3–46. Tool Geometry

Format

G01 X_Y_Z_I_J_K_U_V_W_

where

All coordinates are specified in the Workpiece Coordinate System. Refer to Getting Started with WinMax Mill.

{X, Y, Z} is the part’s Surface Contact Point and is modal.

{U, V, W} is the Surface Normal Vector of the part contact point and is non-modal.

{I, J, K} is the Tool Axis Vector and is non-modal.

G41.2 uses G01 for contouring moves.

G40 cancels G41.2

3D Tool Geometry Compensation (G41.2) is well-suited for using with a ball nose endmill. The potential for surface gouging exists when using the G41.2 command with flat and corner radius endmills.


Retract Along Tool Vector (M140)

M140 allows the Operator to move the tool along the current Tool Vector for a specified distance or to retract to machine limits. In the drawing below, positive Retract Along Tool Vector is in the direction of the arrow (which will move the tool away from the part).

Figure 3–47. Positive Retract Along Tool Vector

Format

M140 is non-modal and is only active for the current block.

M140 [L_], where L_ is the incremental distance the tool will move from its current position along the current Tool Vector direction.

• A positive L_ value will move the tool in the direction pointing from the cutting tool bottom up through the spindle (i.e., moves the tool away from the part). Typically, a positive L_ value will be programmed.

• A negative L_ value will move the tool in the opposite direction.

• When M140 is used without the L_ parameter, the tool will retract along the positive direction of the current Tool Vector to the machine limits (i.e., move the tool tip away from the workpiece).


Enable Auxiliary Output 5 through 12 (M142-M149)

M142 through M149 are used to individually enable auxiliary equipment or a unique machine function from within a part program. Enter performance time for the machine-specific M code in the M Code Table. When M142 through M149 are active, the corresponding auxiliary equipment or machine function is turned on, and any performance time is added to estimated run time.

M142 enables Auxiliary Output 5, M143 enables Auxiliary Output 6, M144 enables Auxiliary Output 7, M145 enables Auxiliary Output 8, M146 enables Auxiliary Output 9, M147 enables Auxiliary Output 10, M148 enables Auxiliary Output 11, and M149 enables Auxiliary Output 12.

Disable Auxiliary Output 5 through 12 (M152 – M159)

M152 through M159 turn off auxiliary equipment or machine functions enabled with M codes M142 through M149.

M152 disables Auxiliary Output 5 (M142), M153 disables Auxiliary Output 6 (M143), M154 disables Auxiliary Output 7 (M144), M155 disables Auxiliary Output 8 (M145), M156 disables Auxiliary Output 9 (M146), M157 disables Auxiliary Output 10 (M147), M158 disables Auxiliary Output 11 (M148), and M159 disables Auxiliary Output 12 (M149).

B-Axis Pinning (M170 - M175)

The B-Axis on boring mill machines can be locked, or “pinned.” M170 through M175 are used to specify the pinning position (machine position):

• M170—Table select B to 0 degrees and pin

• M171—Table select B o 90 degrees and pin



• M174—Table pin in (must be at one of the above positions)

• M175—Table pin out (must be at one of the above positions)

Spindle Gear Select (M176)

M176 selects the spindle gear. Applicable only on machines that have multi-speed spindles.

Format is M176 Pn, where n is gear number 1-5. Once a spindle gear is specified, it remains active until the gear is changed with another M176.

Auxiliary Outputs 1 through 4 are enabled with M52-M55.


ASR Non-Interpolated Axis Motion (M177)

L0 (default) Enable ASR non-interpolated axis motion.

L1 Disable ASR non-interpolated axis motion.

Tilt Axis Preference (M200)

To improve the work volume when the spindle is horizontal, the C axis table has been located at the corner of the machine's base table. Although this configuration provides a large work volume for negative B axis angles, it restricts the work volume for positive B axis angles. Since parts that require positive B axis angles can be cut using a negative B axis angle with a rotation of 180 degrees of the C axis table, the configuration does not impose limitations on the parts that the user can cut.

M200 can be used to select the Tilt Axis Preference direction for simultaneous 5-axis contouring in an NC program. A positive Tilt Axis Preference will keep the B axis between 0 to +90 degrees. A negative Tilt Axis Preference will keep the B axis between -90 to 0 degrees. A neutral Tilt Axis Preference specifies no preference and the program will execute with the shortest angular traverse if activated. A Neutral, Positive, and Negative preference is specified using P0, P1, or P2 parameter with the M200 command.

Tilt Axis Preference is only applied under the following conditions:

• Tool Center Point Management (M128) OR Transform Plane is active.

• AND Tool Vector input is used.

OR

• Cylindrical wrap machining (G07.2) is used.

The default for programs is specified in the Rotary Parameters settings screen.

Motion During 5-axis Contouring with Tilt Axis Preference

If the B axis is requested to move to the opposite side of the Tilt Axis Preference, the CNC will interpolate the tool tip and tool vector up to the machine singularity point (B axis at 0 degrees), then the machine will rotate about the singularity point (i.e. the CNC will rotate the C axis and interpolate the X- and Y axes while keeping the tool tip at a constant location relative to the workpiece), followed by interpolating the B axis and tool tip to their final positions with the B axis on the Tilt Axis Preference Side.

Since positive B-axis angles have a restricted work volume for 3+2-axis machining, the Operator may request that the post processor set the B-axis limits from -90° to 0° to prevent using positive B-axis angles.

Note that during 5-axis simultaneous interpolated moves, if the machine is not on the tilt axis preference side, it can only move back to the preference side when the tool path moves through the machine singularity point (i.e. B0 machine position).


Format

M200 P[0,1,2]

P0 = None (turns tilt axis preference off), control uses shortest angular traverse

P1 = Positive, B axis between [0°, +90°]

P2 = Negative, B axis between [-90°, 0°]

Axis Limit Overrides (M210, M211, M212)Axis limit overrides allow new minimum and maximum travel limits to be set for an axis.

Minimum Axis Limit Override (M210)

Use M210 to set a new minimum axis limit during machining, overriding the default real machine limits.

M210 X_Y_Z_A_B_C_, where the value following the axis is the new minimum limit.

Maximum Axis Limit Override (M211)

Use M211 to set a new maximum axis limit during machining, overriding the default real machine limits.

M211 X_Y_Z_A_B_C_, where the value following the axis is the new maximum limit.

Cancel Axis Limit Overrides (M212)

M212 cancels the axis limit overrides (M210 / M211) and restores the default real machine limits. Limits are also restored to defaults when the program ends.

Kinematic ASR Motion (M213)

M213 is used to specify various aspects of motion when Kinematic ASR (M214) is enabled. M213 optional; when not present the control uses the defaults for the specified parameters.

M213 [L_ | R_] P_ Q_, where

L_ specifies an absolute retract distance along tool vector

Before changing an axis limit be sure the current machine position is within the new limits or an out of limits error will be generated.

Before a tool change is executed the limits should be restored to defaults using the M212 to avoid an out of limits error.


R_ retract distance is tool length plus this offset (default distance is tool length)

P_ specifies plunge distance (default is 5mm)

Q_ specifies plunge feedrate (default is current feedrate)

Kinematic ASR On/Off (M214)

M214 enables or disables Kinematic ASR. Kinematic ASR applies only to rotary axes with motion limits. If the control detects that axis motion limits will be reached, Kinematic ASR retracts and reorients the tool so cutting can continue without going out of limits.

M214 L_, where L0 disables and L1 enables kinematic ASR (default is enabled)

L_ and R_ are mutually exclusive and only the last one specified is active.

R_ is valid only in Absolute Tool Length mode.

WinMax Mill NC Programming 704-0116-501 NC Productivity Package Option 3-183

NC PRODUCTIVITY PACKAGE OPTION

The NC Productivity Package (NCPP) option provides features that enhance productivity and aid in producing smaller, more powerful, and easier to maintain NC programs. NCPP features include variables, subprogram calls, macros, user-defined codes, mathematical equations and address expressions. The NCPP option requires the presence of the ISNC option.

Macro Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 184

Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 185

Program Control Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 200

Subprograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 205

Modal Subprograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 214

User Defined Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 216

NCPP Variable Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 224

Programming Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 234

NC files that are larger than dynamic RAM memory can be serially loaded to the hard disk. The CNC can run NC files that do not entirely fit into dynamic RAM memory.

3 - 184 NC Productivity Package Option 704-0116-501 WinMax Mill NC Programming

Macro Modes

The CNC software provides compatibility between different NC dialects from various machine tool control manufacturers. The software calls NC macros (Macro Mode A or Macro Mode B) to be compatible with existing NC macros.

Older NC macros use the Macro A method of calling subprograms. The main difference between the two macro modes is Macro Mode A does not provide for local (general purpose) variables within a subprogram. Also, Macro Mode B provides the potential to embed more NC computer programming. The table below identifies each macro mode’s variables and the functions for which the variables are used. (Refer to the “Variables” section for more information about local variables.)

Table 3–14. Subprogram Variables

To enable the appropriate macro mode, press the NC Parameters (F3) softkey on the Program Parameters screen. The NC Parameters⎯ Configuration Parameters screen appears with the cursor in the upper left-hand corner at the default Macro Mode B Yes field.

Enable Macro Mode B by selecting the Yes (F2) softkey; enable Macro Mode A by selecting the No (F1) softkey.

• Macro Mode A contains 3 program numbers (9001–9003).

• Macro Mode B contains 13 program numbers (9001–9003 and 9020–9029).

Refer to User Defined Codes, on page 3 - 216 for more information about user defined codes.

The user can assign G or M codes in the appropriate column on the NC Parameters⎯M and G Code Program Numbers screen for each program number.

Functions Subprogram Variables

Macro Mode A Macro Mode B

Local Variables None #1-33

Tool Offsets #1-#99 #2001-#2200

User defined M Codes 9001-9003 9001-9003; 9020-9029

Indirect Variable Referencing #9100 #[#100]

Pass Subprogram Parameters #8004-#8026; #8104-#8126

#1-#33

G Code Status #8030-#8046; #8130-#8146


Variables

Variables are used to create programs that can be easily modified. Programs with variables can be reused for various applications. All variables must begin with the “#” character followed by a valid, “writeable” register number and an equal sign.

The example that follows sets the variable value (#500) to 110:

# 500 = 110.

There are four types of variables that can be used in NC programming: global, system, local, and arguments. Arguments and local variables are only available in Macro Mode A. Some variables are read only and an error is generated when an attempt is made to write to the variable.

Global Variables

Global variables are general purpose variables that can be used by all programs. Assign a value to the global variable before it is used in an equation or expression, or the variable will be considered vacant. An error message is generated when the system attempts to read a vacant variable.

If the value of a global variable is changed in a program, all other programs can reference that variable with the new value.

Global variables range between #100 to #199 and #500 to #999.

System Variables

System variables are predefined variables that provide information about the state of the system such as X, Y, Z, external work compensation, miscellaneous system parameters, modal information, position information, and G code group status.

For instance, the coordinates of a probe touch are saved to variables #5061, #5062, and #5063 when using the G31 command. These variables contain information about the probe’s location when the probe touch occurs.

Macro Mode A Local Variables

Local variables are general purpose variables that are only valid within the current program. They are only available in Macro Mode A and range from #1 through #33. Assign a value to the local variable before using it in an equation or expression, or it will be considered vacant. An error message is generated when the system attempts to read a vacant variable.

These variables are nested, meaning that when a subprogram call is made, a new set of local variables is received and the old set is stored. After leaving the subprogram, these local variables are destroyed and the previous set is restored.


Passing parameters to subprograms automatically initializes local variables when subprogram calls other than M98 are made. Refer to Passing Single Dedicated Parameters to Subprograms, on page 3 - 221 for more information.

Macro Mode A Arguments

Parameters are the addresses which follow G65, G66, and M98. Arguments include the parameter’s G group status, and they are used to pass parameters to subprograms. In the table below, the subprogram numbers listed in the Value column contain the code variable or G group modal status, and the subprogram numbers in the Status column contain the status of corresponding values. Notice that these arguments are read only.

Macro Mode A Parameters

In the table below, the parameters’ values (I, J, K,.....Z) are stored in addresses #8004 to #8026 for Macro Mode A subprogram calls. The status for each variable is stored in addresses #8104 to #8126. The status for the variables is non-zero (≥1) if an argument is specified in the subprogram call, and zero otherwise.

Table 3–15. Macro Mode A Subprogram Parameters

Macro Mode A Subprogram Parameters

Value of Status of

I #8004 ARG #8104 R

J #8005 ARG #8105 R

K #8006 ARG #8106 R

F #8009 ARG #8109 R

G #8010 ARG #8110 R

H #8011 ARG #8111 R

M #8013 ARG #8113 R

N #8014 ARG #8114 R

P #8016 ARG #8116 R

Q #8017 ARG #8117 R

R #8018 ARG #8118 R

S #8019 ARG #8119 R

T #8020 ARG #8120 R

X #8024 ARG #8124 R

Y #8025 ARG #8125 R

Z #8026 ARG #8126 R


Macro Mode A G Code Groups

The value for each G Code Group is stored in addresses #8030 to #8046 for Macro Mode A subprogram calls G65, G66, and user defined G and M Codes. The status is stored in addresses #8130 to #8146. The status is non-zero if an argument is specified in the subprogram call, and empty otherwise.

Table 3–16. Macro Mode A G Code Group Status


Value of Status of

00 #8030 ARG #8130 R

01 #8031 ARG #8131 R

02 #8032 ARG #8132 R

03 #8033 ARG #8133 R

05 #8035 ARG #8135 R

06 #8036 ARG #8136 R

07 #8037 ARG #8137 R

08 #8038 ARG #8138 R

09 #8039 ARG #8139 R

10 #8040 ARG #8140 R

11 #8041 ARG #8141 R

15 #8045 ARG #8145 R

16 #8046 ARG #8146 R


Read/Write Restrictions

Read only variables are fixed values. You can change write only variables. Some variables within NCPP are read only (R), some are write only (W), and others are read/write (R/W). Most variables can be used to store either real variables or 32 bit binary values, and the software performs the appropriate conversions when the variables are used within equations. The types of variables are identified as follows: Argument (A), Global (G), Local (L), and System (S).

This table lists the NCPP variable types and read/write restrictions.

Variable Number Type Restriction Variable Number Type Restriction

#1 to #33 L R/W #4309 S R

#1 to #99 S R/W #4311 S R

#100 to #199 G R/W #4313 S R

#500 to #999 G R/W #4314 S R

#2000 S R #4315 S R

#2001 to #2200 S R/W #4319 S R

#2500 S R/W #4320 S R

#2501 to #2506 S R/W #5001 to #5004 S R

#2600 S R/W #5021 to #5023 S R

#2601 to #2606 S R/W #5041 to #5043 S R

#2700 S R/W #5061 to #5063 S R/W

#2701 to #2706 S R/W #5081 to #5083 S R

#3000 S R/W

#3004 S R/W #8004 A R/W

#3005 S R #8005 A R/W

#3007 S R #8006 A R/W

#4001 to #4021 S R #8009 A R/W

#4022 S R #8010 A R/W

#4102 S R #8011 A R/W

#4107 S R #8013 A R/W

#4109 S R #8014 A R/W

#4111 S R #8016 A R/W

#4113 S R #8017 A R/W

#4114 S R #8018 A R/W

#4115 S R #8019 A R/W


Variable Number Type Restriction Variable Number Type Restriction

#4119 S R #8020 A R/W

#4120 S R #8024 A R/W

#4201 to #4221 S R #8025 A R/W

#4222 S R #8026 A R/W

#4302 S R #8030 A R

#4307 S R #8031 A R

#8032 A R #8117 A R

#8033 A R #8118 A R

#8035 A R #8119 A R

#8036 A R #8120 A R

#8037 A R #8124 A R

#8038 A R #8125 A R

#8039 A R #8126 A R

#8040 A R #8130 A R

#8041 A R #8131 A R

#8045 A R #8132 A R

#8046 A R #8133 A R

#8104 A R #8136 A R

#8105 A R #8137 A R

#8106 A R #8138 A R

#8109 A R #8139 A R

#8110 A R #8140 A R

#8111 A R #8141 A R

#8113 A R #8145 A R

#8114 A R #8146 A R

#8116 A R

Table 3–17. NCPP Variable Types and Read Write Restrictions


Addresses with Variables

NC blocks contain addresses with specific numbers. Variables can be used in place of numbers for addresses in the NC blocks, making the program generic. The example below uses variables in the block’s address instead of the numbers they represent:

Address with Variables

G#110 X[#122+.3] Y-[#115/5.] Z[#120 + #121]

Address with Numbers

The same address would be written as follows if numbers were used instead of variables:

G0.00 X[12.00 + .3] Y-[10.00/5] Z[1.00 + 0.25]

–Or–

G0.00 X12.3 Y2 Z1.25

Alarm 3000 Messages

Variable #3000 writes an Alarm 3000 error message to the screen. The following is an example of this type of error message:

#3000 = 140 (ARGUMENT MISSING)

The right-hand side of the equation must begin with a number in the range of 0 to 200 followed by a left parenthesis, a string which is limited to 26 characters, and a right parenthesis. This number is added to 500 and stored to variable #3000. The message “ARGUMENT MISSING” is displayed on the screen.

Number Variable

0.00 #110

-10.00 #115

1.00 #120

0.25 #121

12.00 #122


Vacant Variables

A variable is considered vacant if a local or global variable has not been assigned a value before it is used in an equation or expression. An error message occurs with vacant variables.

A variable can be tested to determine if it is vacant by comparing it with the null variable #0. The variable #0 is called the “null variable” because it cannot be used to store a value and is only used to perform vacant variable tests.

For example, the following IF conditional statement is true if variable #510 is vacant and false if the variable is not vacant. (Refer to the “IF Statements” section of this chapter for information about IF statements.)

IF[#510 EQ #0] GOTO 100

It is best to avoid using vacant variables in equations. However, when it is necessary to use them to maintain compatibility with existing programs, vacant variables can be used in some circumstances without receiving an error message.

The function NE (not equal) can also be used with vacant variables.


The following table shows what happens when vacant variables are used in equations versus setting variables to zero. This table shows the difference between using vacant variables and setting variables to 0 in equations:

Table 3–18. Comparison of Vacant Variables and Setting Variables to Zero (0)

Comparison of Vacant Variables and Setting Variables to Zero (0)

Function ExamplesNull/Vacant

Variable(#10 = <vacant>)

Variable Set to 0

(#10 = 0)

Assignment #20 = #10 Error Message #20 = 0

Multiplication #20 = #10 * 3 #20 = 0 #20 = 0

#20 = #10 * #10 Error Message #20 = 0

#20 = #10 * #0 Error Message Error Message

#20 = #0 * 3 Error Message -

#20 = #0 * #0 Error Message -

Addition #20 = #10 + 3 #20 = 0 #20 = 0

#20 = #10 + #10 Error Message #20 = 0

#20 = #10 + #0 Error Message Error Message

#20 = #0 + 3 Error Message -

#20 = #0 + #0 Error Message -

EQ (equal) #10 EQ #0 True False

#10 EQ 0 Error Message True

NE (not equal) #10 NE #0 False True

#10 NE 0 Error Message False

GE (greater than or equal to)

#10 GE #0 True False

#10 GE 0 Error Message True

GT (greater than) #10 GT #0 Error Message Error Message

#10 GT 0 Error Message False

Other Functions - Error Message Depends on Function


Variable Expressions

Instead of using a number after an NC parameter, a variable expression (or math expression) can be used.

• The “[”and the “]” characters serve as delimiters in the expressions.

• A negative sign entered before the left bracket ([) indicates that the expression is negative (i.e. X-[[#110+3.4] + 4.5]).

Expression Symbols and Keywords

Various keywords and symbols can be used in the expressions. At least two letters of the keyword are required: RO, ROU, ROUN, and ROUND perform the same function. The software checks spelling. RUON is not a valid abbreviation for ROUND, but ROUN is acceptable.

Table 3–19. NC Expression Symbols

Symbol Description Example

+ Addition #500 = #600 + 2.3

- Subtraction #500 = #600 - 2.3

/ Division #500 = #600 / 2.3

* Multiplication #500 = #600 * 2.3

^Power(i.e. 2^2, 2 to the 2nd power, or 4)

#500 = 4.5 ^ 2#500 will be set to 20.25.


The keywords are described and examples are provided in the following table:

Operation Keyword Description Example

ABS Absolute Value #500 = ABS [-#550]

ACOS Arc or Inverse Cosine function #500 = ACOS [#540]

AND Logical AND #500 = #600 AND 48

ASIN Arc or Inverse Sine function #500 = ASIN [#540]

ATAN Arc Tangent (degrees) #500 = ATAN [.34]

BCD Convert Binary to BCD Format #500 = BCD [#600]

BIN Convert BCD to Binary Format #500 = BIN [#600]

COS Cosine (degrees) #500 = COS [45.3]

DEGREES Converts radians to degrees #500 = DEGREES [5.437]#500 will be set to 311.52 degrees.

EQ Equal #500 = #510 EQ 3.4#500 will be set to 0 if false; 1 if true.

EXP Exponential function #500 = EXP [3.67]#500 will be set to 39.252.

FIX Discards fractions less than 1 #500 = FIX [45.2375]#500 will be set to 45

FUP Adds 1 for fractions less than 1 #500 = FUP [45.2375]#500 will be set to 46

GE Greater Than Or Equal To #500 = #510 GE 3.4#500 will be set to 0 if false; 1 if true.

GT Greater Than #500 = #510 GT 3.4#500 will be set to 0 if false; 1 if true.

HSIN Hyperbolic Sine function #500 = HSIN[#540]

HCOS Hyperbolic Cosine function #500 = HCOS [#540]

INVERSE Binary Inverse function #500 = [7 AND [INV[3]]]#500 will be set to 4.0.

LE Less Than or Equal To #500 = #510 LE 3.4#500 will be set to 0 if false; 1 if true.

LN Natural Logarithmic function #500 = LN [24.89]#500 will be set to 3.2144.


Operation Keyword Description Example

LOG Logarithmic function #500 = LOG [345.89]#500 will be set to 2.5389.

LT Less Than #500 = #510 LT 3.4#500 will be set to 0 if false; 1 if true.

MOD Modulus operator #500 = 19 MOD 6.7Will return a value of 5.6

NE Not Equal #500 = #510 NE 3.4#500 will be set to 0 if false; 1 if true.

OR Logical OR #500 = 41 OR 4

RADIANS Converts degrees to radians #500 = RADIANS [270.34]#500 will be set to 4.718 radians.

ROUND Rounds off #500 = ROUND [34.56 result is 35]

SIN Sine (degrees) #500 = SIN [#610]

SQRT Square Root #500 = SQRT [#540]

TAN Tangent (degrees) #500 = TAN [32.4]

XOR Logical Exclusive OR #500 = #560 XOR 34

Table 3–20. NC Expression Keywords


The software automatically converts real numbers to hexadecimal format before performing logical operations. The Operation Keyword “AND” does not function on real numbers. As shown below, the #500 value is truncated to 32 and the #550 value is truncated to 48. When the “AND” function is performed, the truncated numbers are stored in variable #560.

• #500 = 32.456

• #550 = 48.98

• #560 = [#500 AND #550]

These examples are valid variable expressions:

• G01 X#140 Y [#500 + 2.] Z[#550 * [SIN [#130 + 23.5 ]]]

• G02 Z [2.3 / [SIN 43]] Y[2 ^ 3] G20 M25

• X [ROUN[3.45 * COS[#520]]]

• R [SQRT[[#510 ^ 2] + [#511 ^ 2]]]

• G01 X-#510 Y-[#520 + 4.5] Z4

Operation Priorities

The interpreter gives operations within the expression a certain priority in order to determine how the expression is evaluated. This is a listing of the priorities:

Table 3–21. Numerical Operations Priorities

Even though the interpreter assumes this priority, in order to make the NC program more understandable and more maintainable, use brackets to divide the expressions. For example, G01 X[34.5+23.4 / 32] should be rewritten as G01 X[34.5 + [23.4/32]]. Using spacing within an expression can also make the expression more readable. Decimal points and leading or trailing zeros are not required with the numbers.

Priority Operation

Highest Functions

Second Symbols Power (^)

Third Multiplication (*) Division (/)

Lowest Addition (+) Subtraction (-)


Indirect Variables

Variables can be referenced indirectly by using multiple levels of pound signs (#) and brackets ([ and ]).

#100 = 600⇐ #100 is equal to 600.

#600 = 4.5 ⇐ #600 is equal to 4.5.

#[#100] = 4.5⇐ #[#100] is equal to #600; #600 equals 4.5.

Macro Mode A variables are referenced indirectly by using a “9” as the first number:

In #9500, #9 is the address of the value at 500, which is the same as using #[#500] in Macro Mode A or Macro Mode B.

Saving Variable Values To a File on the Control

When running the program on the CNC, if an error occurs during the program run, the variable values are not saved. The variable values are saved if the program runs successfully.

Variable Example

This program illustrates the use of #0 in an IF statement to determine if an argument is passed to subprogram 3100. There are two IF statements in sequence numbers 100 and 200 in the subprogram which test to verify that the calling program (0100) had passed parameters I and J which correspond to #4 and #7 in subprogram 3100, respectively. If either variable #4 or #7 is vacant, an Alarm 3000 error message is written to the screen. (Refer to the “Program Control Statements” section for more information about IF statements.)


ISNC Part Program 1 InchTRU_CRC.FNC

%

O0100 ⇐ Calling Program⎯0100⎯Start

T01 M06

S1500 M03

G00 G90 X5.0 Y5.0

G43 Z.1 H01

M08

G01 Z-.5 F5.0

G65 P3100 I.5 D2 F15.0

G00 Z.1 M09

G91 G28 Z0 M05

M30 ⇐ End of Program⎯0100

:3100(True CIRCLE TYPE 1) ⇐ Subprogram⎯3100⎯Start

#27 = #4001

#28 = #4003

#29 = #4107

N100 IF[#4EQ#0] GOTO 1000 ⇐ Vacant Variable Check

N200 IF[#7EQ#0] GOTO 1000

#1 = ABS [#4]-ABS [#[2000+#7]]

IF [#1LE0] GOTO 2

#20 = #1/2

#21 = ROUND [#20*1000]

#22 = #21/1000

#2 = #1-#22

#3 = #1-#2

IF [#23EQ#0] GOTO 10

G01 G91 X-#2 Y-#3 F#9

G17 G02 X-#3 Y#3 J#3


View the part using the Draw console key to verify that the part is programmed correctly.

I#1

X#3 Y#3 I#3

G01 X#2 Y-#3 F[#9*3]

GOTO 5

N10 G01 G91 X-#2 Y#3 F#9

G17 G03 X-#3 Y-#3 J-#3

I#1 J0

X#3 Y-#3 I#3

G01 X#2 Y#3 F[#9*3]

GOTO 5

N1000 #3000 = 100(ARGUMENT MISSING) ⇐ Alarm Message

N5 G#27 G#28 D#29

M99 ⇐ M99 is end of Subprogram 3100


Program Control Statements

Program control statements are NC blocks which direct the flow of the NC program or subprogram. The following section describes using the different NCPP option’s program control statements.

Program control statements use keywords: GOTO, IF, WHILE, and DO. At least two letters of the keyword are required. For example, WH, WHI, WHIL, and WHILE all perform the same function. Some program control statements are only effective within the current program or subprogram, and other program control statements cause program execution to go to subprograms. The software can only locate sequence numbers that are in memory.

The following program control statements are effective only within the current program being executed:

• WHILE [conditional expression] DO#

• DO#

• IF [conditional expression] GOTO [expression or #]

• GOTO [expression or #]

• END#

• M99 or M99 P____

These program control statements cause program execution to call subprograms:

• M98 P____

• G65 P____ L____ [Optional Argument List]

• G66 P____ L____ [Optional Argument List]

• User defined G code followed by [Optional Argument List]

• User defined M code followed by [Optional Argument List]

• User defined B, S, and T codes followed by optional parameter

Variables can be referenced indirectly to initialize a large block of variables, for example:

• #100 = 500

• WHILE [#100 LT 1000] DO 250

• #[#100] = 1.5

• #100 = #100+1

• END 250


The alternative to indirectly referencing variables is to have a program line for each variable as shown below:

• #500 = 1.5

• #501 = 1.5

• …

• #999 = 1.5

In this case, 500 program lines would be required to perform what five program lines accomplished in the first example.

GOTO Statements

GOTO statements jump the program to a specific number in the program. Any valid address expression can be used in place of a sequence number after the GOTO. Fractions are truncated. For example, GOTO 3.45 and GOTO 3 work the same. The program cannot locate sequence numbers that are not in memory. If the search reaches the end of the program without finding the sequence number, the software generates an error message.

Positive GOTO Statement

If the resultant value is positive, the software searches for the sequence number from the point of the GOTO to the end of the program. Then it proceeds to the beginning of the program and searches for the sequence number until reaching the starting point (GOTO statement).

Negative GOTO Statement

If the resultant value of the expression is negative, the search begins at the beginning of the program.

IF Statements

IF statements contain a conditional expression and a GOTO statement. The expression which follows the GOTO must result in a valid sequence number; otherwise, an error message is generated. The program cannot locate sequence numbers that are not in memory. The following line illustrates an IF statement’s components:

• IF [conditional expression] GOTO [expression or #]

• If the conditional expression has a value of 1, it is true, and the GOTO is performed.

• If the conditional expression has a value of 0, it is false, and the next NC block is executed.

• If the conditional expression has a value other than 0 or 1, it is invalid.

These are examples of conditional expressions used in IF statements:

IF[[[#100 LT 2.3] OR [#320LE7.34]] AND [#400LT3.4]] GOTO#340

IF[#150 EQ 2] GOTO 10

IF[#750 GT 2.34] GOTO [[#550+23]/40]


WHILE Loops

WHILE loops contain a conditional expression and a DO statement. This is a sample WHILE loop:

• WHILE [conditional expression] DO number

• NC block

• NC block

• NC block

• END number

The blocks between the WHILE statement and the END statement are repeated as long as the conditional expression is true. The following are other details about WHILE loops:

• A WHILE loop must have a matching END statement within the same program.

• The DO must match the number following END and must be an integer in the range of 1 to 255.

• The program cannot locate sequence numbers that are not in memory.

• No other NC commands can be contained on the same lines as the WHILE or END statements.

• If the WHILE conditional expression is false, the program continues execution with the NC block which follows the END statement.

• DO loops operate the same as WHILE loops with a conditional expression which is always true.

• The DO statement can also be used by itself without the WHILE conditional statement.

To exit an infinite WHILE loop while the program is being drawn, press the console Draw key.


DO Loops

DO loops operate the same as WHILE loops with a conditional expression which is always true. The DO statement can also be used by itself without the WHILE conditional statement. The following are some additional details about DO loops:

• DO loops must contain a matching END statement within the same program.

• The numbers following DO and END must match and must be an integer in the range of 1 to 255.

• The program cannot locate sequence numbers not in memory.

• No other NC commands can be contained on the same lines as the DO or END statements.

The following is a sample DO loop:

• DO number

• NC block

• NC block

• NC block

• END number

The blocks between the DO statement and the END statement are repeated continuously in an infinite loop unless one of the following events occurs:

• The program exits the loop with a GOTO or M99 P ____ jump statement.

• The program execution is terminated with an M02 or M30.

• The right mouse button is pressed. The right mouse button acts as a graphics reset.

To exit an infinite DO loop while the program is being drawn, press the console Draw key.


Stop Program Execution

The M02 (End of Program) and M30 (End Program) program control statements stop program execution. The following examples of program control statements are used correctly:

Table 3–22. Correct Program Control Statement Examples

These examples show incorrect use of program control statements:

Table 3–23. Incorrect Program Control Statement Examples

Nested WHILE Loops

Branch Outside WHILE Loop

Subprogram Call from Inside WHILE Loop

Reuse of DO-END Pairing Number

WHILE[...] DO 100 NC blocksWHILE[...] DO 200 NC blocksWHILE[...] DO 250 NC blocksEND 250 NC blocksEND 200 NC blocksEND 100

WHILE[...] DO 200 NC blocks GOTO 3535 NC blocksEND 200 NC blocksN3535

WHILE[...] DO 150 NC blocks M98 P3000 NC blocksEND 150 NC blocksWHILE[...] DO 200 NC blocks G65 P3000 NC blocksEND 200 NC blocks

WHILE[...] DO 100 NC blocksEND 100 NC blocksWHILE[...] DO 100 NC blocksEND 100 NC blocksWHILE[...] DO 100 NC blocksEND 100

Incorrectly Nested WHILE Loops

Branch Into a WHILE Loop

Improper Reuse of DO-END Pairing Number

WHILE[...] DO 100 NC blocksWHILE[...] DO 200 NC blocksWHILE[...] DO 250 NC blocksEND 100 NC blocksEND 200 NC blocksEND 250

GOTO 3535 NC blocks WHILE[...] DO 200 NC blocks N3535 NC blocksEND 200

WHILE[...] DO 100 NC blocksWHILE[...] DO 100 NC blocksEND 100 NC blocksEND 100 NC blocks


Subprograms

Subprograms are stand-alone NC programs that can be called from another NC program. Subprograms begin with the letter “O” or the “:” character (but do not use the “%”) followed by a four-digit number that identifies the subprogram. Each subprogram ends with an M99 statement. The only limitation for the number of NC files and subprograms the software can load is the amount of available dynamic RAM memory.

The following is a sample subprogram:

Subprograms can be nested 15 levels deep. In general, different types of subprogram calls can be used in various combinations. There are some restrictions in the use of modal subprograms and user defined G, M, B, S, and T subprogram calls, however, which will be described in more detail later.

Programs cannot call themselves as subprograms because the repetition exhausts the 15 levels of subprogram nesting. For the same reason, a user defined code cannot be used in a program which is associated with the same user defined code. For example, a G65 P5000 command is illegal within the program 5000.

N10 O7162 ⇐ begins with “O” followed by 4-digit number

N20 G00 G90

N30 M25

N40 X0 Y0

N50 T1 M06

N60 Z5.

N70 S2000 M03

N80 Z0.05

N90 M99 ⇐ ends with M99


G65 Subprogram Call

The G65 subprogram command has the following form:

G65 P____ L_____ [followed by optional arguments]

The P represents the subprogram number and the L represents the number of iterations that the subprogram must perform. These two methods of argument passing can be used together:

Arguments

In a G65 subprogram call, the local variables in the calling program are not copied to the local variables in the called subprogram. Arguments which follow the G65 command are copied to the local variables in the subprogram as illustrated in the following command:

G65 P5080 A0.0 B8 C2.3 S6 T2 H81 I9 J3.5 K0 Z-1 R.1

The value which follows A is copied to the local variable #1 in the subprogram. The table on the following page shows the relationships between the subprogram arguments and the local variables in the subprograms.

Multiple Arguments

Multiple I, J, and K arguments can also be used as subprogram arguments. For example, if three I arguments are used in the subprogram call, the first I maps to the #4 variable, the second I maps to the #7 variable, and the third I maps to the #10 variable. The following subprogram call is legitimate:

G65 P2000 A2.3 B3.2 I2.0 J3. K5.4 I3. I5. J2. I6. W3. U3

Only numbers may be used as arguments in a G65 subprogram call; no variables or expressions can be used. If multiple iterations of the subprogram are to be performed, the local variables will be initialized to the same argument values.


Passing Argument Lists to Subprograms in Macro Mode B

There are several methods for passing arguments and parameters to subprograms. The G65 and G66 subprogram calls allow an argument list to be provided after the G65 and G66, respectively. The user defined M Code and the user defined G Code allow an argument list to be provided after the user defined Code. The argument list consists of various letters followed by values. The values are then stored as local variables within the subprogram.

The table below lists the correspondence between the arguments and the local variables in Macro Mode B. The argument list is optional. Any arguments which are not included in the list are given vacant status.

Table 3–24. Macro Mode B Local Variables and Subprogram Arguments

Macro Mode B

Local Variables SubprogramArguments Local Variable Subprogram

Arguments

#1 Argument A #18 Argument R or K5

#2 Argument B #19 Argument S or I6

#3 Argument C #20 Argument T or J6

#4 Argument I or I1 #21 Argument U or K6

#5 Argument J or J1 #22 Argument V or I7

#6 Argument K or K1 #23 Argument W or J7

#7 Argument D or I2 #24 Argument X or K7

#8 Argument E or J2 #25 Argument Y or I8

#9 Argument F or K2 #26 Argument Z or J8

#10 Argument I3 #27 Argument K8

#11 Argument H or J3 #28 Argument I9

#12 Argument K3 #29 Argument J9

#13 Argument M or I4 #30 Argument K9

#14 Argument J4 #31 Argument I10

#15 Argument K4 #32 Argument J10

#16 Argument I5 #33 Argument K10

#17 Argument Q or J5


Layering of Local Variables within Subprogram Calls

M98 subprogram calls use local variables differently from other subprogram calls since the called subprogram does not get a new set of local variables. Changes made to the local variables within the current subprogram will be retained when the calling program is re-instated.

Changes can be made to the local variables within the current subprogram, but when program execution returns to the calling program, the values of the local variables of the calling program are reinstated. The local variables in the subprogram can be changed, however, without affecting the local variables in the calling program. With other subprogram calls, unless an argument list is passed to the subprogram, the local variables are given vacant status.

Specifying Subprogram Iterations

The number of iterations for a subprogram to perform are specified with G65, G66, and M98 subprogram calls.

Using G65 and G66

When making G65 and G66 subprogram calls, the L parameter is used to specify iterations. The maximum number of iterations which can be specified with the G65 and G66 subprogram calls is 999.

Using M98

When making M98 subprogram calls, the P parameter is used to specify iterations as well as the subprogram number. Up to four digits can be used to specify iterations for a maximum of 9999 iterations. Leading zeros are not required when specifying iterations; however, leading zeros are required with a subprogram number that is less than 1000.


G65 Subprogram Example

In the following example a line of holes will be drilled along a line. The type of canned cycle can be determined along with the distance between the holes in both the X and Y axes. The type of canned cycle and various canned cycle parameters can also be set.

ISNC Part Program 1 InchBOLT_LN.FNC

O4000

T1 M06

M03 G00 G90 X0 Y0 Z0 S1800

/

(B REPRESENTS THE NUMBER OF BOLT HOLES)

(H REPRESENTS THE DESIRED CANNED CYCLE)

(X,Y REPRESENT THE INCREMENTAL DISTANCE BETWEEN HOLES)

(Z REPRESENTS THE HOLE DEPTH)

(R REPRESENTS THE R PLANE LEVEL)

/

#500=99 (RETURN TO R LEVEL)

G65 P5070 X.5 Y.75 B10 H81 Z-1 Q0. R.1 F20.

M30

(*************************************************)

( BOLT HOLE LINE PATTERN - SUBPROGRAM 5070 )

(*************************************************)

O5070

(#2 IS THE NUMBER OF HOLES)

(#11 IS THE CANNED CYCLE NUMBER)

(#26 IS THE HOLE DEPTH)

(#500 IS 99 FOR RETURN TO R LEVEL MODE OR 98 FOR RETURN TO INITIAL POINT)

(#5003 IS THE Z COORDINATE BEFORE THE CANNED CYCLE IS PERFORMED)

/

WHILE [#2GT0] DO250

G91 G#500 G#11 Z#26 Q#17 R[#5003-#18] F#9

G00 X#24 Y#25

#2 = #2-1

END250

M99



Macro Instruction (G65)

G65 Macro instructions are G65 commands which are used to perform mathematical, trigonometric, or program control functions instead of subprogram calls. These commands are intended to support existing programs which use this program format.

The value in the H parameter defines the operation being performed. In all instructions except the GOTO commands H80 through H86, a variable number follows the P parameter. The operation’s result is stored in that variable number. In the following command the value stored in variable #100 is added to the number 1 and the resultant value is stored in variable #115.

G65 H02 P#115 Q#100 R1

For the GOTO commands, the value which follows the P is a positive or negative integer. If the number is negative, the software begins searching for the sequence number at the beginning of the file and continues to search for the sequence number until reaching the end of the file. If the number is positive, the search for the sequence numbers begins with the block after the GOTO command and continues until reaching the end of the file. The software then searches from the beginning of the file until reaching the GOTO command block.

The values which follow Q and R are general purpose parameters which are used in mathematical, logical, or GOTO operations. The specific operations are listed in the following table.

Format

The following is the G65 Macro Instruction format:

G65 H ____, P #a , Q #b , R #c ,.


The table below lists the Descriptions and Instruction Functions for the H codes used in the G65 macro instructions:

Table 3–25. H Code Descriptions and Instruction Functions for G65 Macro Instructions

H Code Description Instruction Function

H01 Definition, Substitution #a = #b

H02 Addition #a = #b + #c

H03 Subtraction #a = #b - #c

H04 Product #a = #b * #c

H05 Division #a = #b / #c

H11 Logical Sum #a = #b .OR. #c

H12 Logical Product #a = #b .AND. #c

H13 Exclusive OR #a = #b .XOR. #c

H21 Square Root #a = √#b

H22 Absolute Value #a = |#b|

H23Remainder #a = #b - trunc (#b/#c) * #c

trunc: discard fractions less than 1.

H24 Conversion from BCD to Binary #a = BIN(#b)

H25 Conversion from binary to BCD #a = BCD(#b)

H26 Combined Multiplication/Division #a = (#a * #b) / #c

H27 Combined Square Root 1 #a = √(#b2 + #c2)

H28 Combined Square Root 2 #a = √(#b2 - #c2)

H31 Sine #a = #b * SIN(#c)

H32 Cosine #a = #b * COS (#c)

H33 Tangent #a = #b * TAN(#c)

H34 Arc tangent #a = TAN(#b/#c)

H80 Unconditional Divergence (GOTO) GOTO a

H81 If Statement, Equals IF #b = #c, GOTO a

H82 If Statement, Not Equal IF #b ≠ #c, GOTO a

H83 If Statement, Greater Than IF #b > #c, GOTO a

H84 If Statement, Less Than IF #b < #c, GOTO a

H85 If Statement, Greater Than/Equals IF #b >= #c, GOTO a

H86 If Statement, Less Than/Equals IF #b <= #c, GO TO a


For H80 through H86, if “a” has a negative value, the software performs a GOTO but begins looking for the sequence number at the beginning of the program. No variables can be used for the P parameter for H80 through H86.

Example

The following example shows how to use G65 macro instructions in a Bolt Hole Circle subprogram:

ISNC Part Program 1 InchG65INST.FNC

%

(#600 IS BOLT HOLE CIRCLE X COORD)

(#601 IS BOLT HOLE CIRCLE Y COORD)

(#602 IS BOLT HOLE CIRCLE RADIUS)

(#603 IS STARTING ANGLE)

(#604 IS NUMBER OF BOLT HOLES)

#600 = 0

#601 = 0

#602 = 2.

#603 = 30.

#604 = 12.

T1 M6

G00 X0 Y0 Z0.05

M98 P3030

G00 X0 Y0 Z0.05

M02

O3030

(#110 IS BOLT HOLE COUNTER)

(#112 IS ANGLE OF CURRENT HOLE)

(#113 IS X COORD OF CURRENT HOLE)

(#114 IS Y COORD OF CURRENT HOLE)

N10 G65 H01 P#110 Q0

G65 H22 P#111 Q#604

N20 G65 H04 P#112 Q#110 R360

G65 H05 P#112 Q#112 R#604

The G65 Macro Instructions are intended to support existing Macro A programs. Use equations and regular GOTO statements in place of these instructions when developing new programs.

For example use #100 = 4.56 OR #110 instead of G65 #11 P#100 Q4.56 R#110.

And use IF [#150 EQ #160] GOTO 100 instead of G65 H81 P100 Q#150 R#160.

These commands can be used in either Macro A or B mode.


ISNC Part Program 2 InchG65INST.FNCG65 H02 P#112 Q#603 R#112

G65 H32 P#113 Q#602 R#112

G65 H02 P#113 Q#600 R#113

G65 H31 P#114 Q#602 R#112

G65 H02 X#114 Q#601 R#114

G90 H00 X#113 Y#114

G81 Z-1. F20.

G80

G65 H02 P#110 Q#110 R1

G65 H84 P-20 Q#110 R#111

M99

View the part using the Draw console key to verify that the part is programmed correctly


Modal Subprograms

Modal subprograms are executed every time a motion is performed (i.e., after a Move command). Use them for performing repetitive tasks at different locations. The repetitive tasks can be put inside a modal subprogram. A subprogram call can be made to a program which contains X, Y, and Z locations and will be executed at each of these locations.

A modal subprogram will not be modal within another modal subprogram. If the modal subprogram contains Move commands, the modal subprogram will not be performed after Move commands within the modal subprogram. This allows Move commands to be contained within modal subprograms.

These methods allow the subprogram call to be modal:

• A Modal Subprogram Call (G66) Command

• A Modal user defined G code

Modal Subprogram Call (G66)

In a G66 Modal subprogram call, the subprogram is repeatedly executed after each Move command until the Modal Subprogram Call Cancel (G67) command is performed.

Modal User Defined G Code

The user defined G code is made modal by entering a negative number in the G code column on the Change NC Parameters screen. Only one user defined G code can be designated as a modal subprogram. The first one in the list is treated as modal if more than one negative number is entered in the G code column. The remaining negative G codes are treated as regular user defined G codes.

When the modal user defined G code is encountered in the NC program, the subprogram becomes modal until a G67 is used. Only one modal subprogram can be in effect at any given time; an error message occurs if a modal subprogram is first initiated with a G66 command and the modal user defined G code is then attempted.

Modal Subprogram Cancel (G67)

The G67 command is used to cancel modal subprograms initiated with either the G66 or with a modal user defined G code.


Modal Subprogram Call (G66) Example

The following program draws a series of squares and rectangles:

NC Part Program 1 InchG66.FNC

%

(EXAMPLE OF MODAL SUBPROGRAM CALL G66)

(P6010 IS USED AS MODAL SUBPROGRAM)

(THE VALUES AFTER I AND J ARE PASSED TO)

(THE SUBPROGRAM. THE SUBPROGRAM IS ONLY)

(EXECUTED AFTER BLOCKS WITH MOVE COMMANDS.)

X0 Y0 Z0

X5 G66 P6010 I1. J1.5

Y-3

X-5

Y0

(MODAL SUBPROGRAM IS NOW CANCELED WITH G67)

G67

Y3

(THE MODAL SUBPROGRAM IS STARTED AGAIN WITH)

(NEW PARAMETERS.)

X0 G66 P6010 I3.J1.

Y0

Y-2

M02

:6010

(THIS SUBPROGRAM CREATES A SIMPLE BOX SHAPE.)

G91

X#4

Y#5

X-#4

Y-#5

G90

M99



User Defined Codes

G, M, S, B, and T codes can be customized to perform specialized tasks. Enable these codes on the NC Parameters Configuration Parameters screen by placing the cursor at the code’s field and selecting the Yes softkey.

User defined G and M codes define a custom code in a subprogram which replaces an existing G or M code, performs a specialized task, or provides compatibility between different NC dialects from various machine tool control manufacturers. For instance, if a different NC program uses G codes for canned cycles that are not defined by Hurco BNC or ISNC, User Defined G codes can re-map the canned cycles to enable the program to run on a Hurco. You can also set User Defined Codes to allow a BNC subprogram to be used in ISNC mode.

The user defined B, S, and T subprograms provide additional user defined subprograms. User defined S and T subprograms replace the spindle and tool functions with custom subprograms.

Before enabling any User Defined Code, a subprogram will need to be created that contains the Hurco-acceptable operations to replace the code that is not recognized or needs to be changed. Follow all instructions for creating a subprogram in Subprograms, on page 3 - 205. The subprogram number must use one of the valid subprogram numbers associated with each code. The subprogram(s) must be loaded into the Program Manager prior to running the main program. For the main program:

1. Select the Program Parameters softkey.

2. Select the NC Parameters softkey.

3. Enable the appropriate User Defined Code.

4. Enter the code from the main program in the subprogram list to indicate the G- or M-code that is to be replaced by the subprogram (for example, if G86 is to be replaced by a G76 in subprogram 9010, set 86 in 9010 field). For S-, B-, and T-codes no code number is required.

G Codes

G1 through G100 (except G65, G66, and G67) can be programmed for user defined G codes. Enable the user defined G codes by selecting Yes in the Enable User G Code field on the NC Parameters screen. The subprogram is executed after every Move command once the modal G code is invoked.

User Defined G Code Example

This example converts a G86 Bore Orient cycle for BNC into a G76 Bore Orient cycle compatible with ISNC option. Up to 10 user defined G codes can be defined on the Change NC Parameters screen.

To re-map BNC G86 to ISNC G76 follow these steps:

1. Press the console Input key to display the Input screen.

2. Press the Program Parameters softkey.

3. Select the NC Parameters softkey. The Change NC Parameters screen appears.


4. Select the NC M and G Code Parameters softkey.

5. Enable the User G Codes field by placing the cursor at the field and selecting the Yes softkey.

6. Set 9010 to 86 on the Change NC Parameters screen.

7. Load the 9010: program.

NC Part Program 1 InchG86_TRAN.FNCG99 G90 G00 X0.0 Y0.0 Z1.0

G86 X2.0 Y3.0 Z3.0 I1.0 J0.0 R1.0 F100. ⇐ User defined G86 called

O9010 ⇐ Subprogram⎯9010⎯ Start

IF [#4003 EQ 91] GOTO 100 user defined G86)

(TRANSLATION FOR ABSOLUTE MODE)

G76 X#24 Y#25 Z[#5003-#26] R[#5003-#18] I#4 J#5 F#9

GOTO 200

(TRANSLATION FOR INCREMENTAL MODE)

N100 G76 X#24 Y#25 Z[-#26] R[-#18] I#4 J#5 F#9

N200

M99 ⇐ End of Subprogram⎯9010

M Codes

Up to 13 user defined M codes can be programmed from M01 through M100 (except M02, M30, M98, and M99). Enable the user defined M codes by selecting Yes in the Enable User M Code field on the NC Parameters screen. The user defined M codes can be assigned to subprograms 9020 through 9029 and 9001 through 9003.

There are no modal user defined M codes; therefore, negative numbers cannot be entered in the column for user defined M codes on the Change NC Parameters screen.


User Defined M Code Example

This example converts an M77 into a rectangle:



3. Select the NC Parameters softkey. The Change NC Parameters screen appears.


5. Enable the User M Codes field by placing the cursor at the field and selecting the Yes softkey.

6. Enter 77 into the 9020 field.

The following program re-maps a BNC G86 Bore Orient cycle to the ISNC G76 cycle:

NC Part Program 1 InchUSER_MAC.FNC%

(GOTO NC PARAMETERS PAGE)

(FIRST ENABLE USER DEFINED M CODES)

(SET USER DEFINED 9020 TO 77)

X0 Y0 Z0 ⇐ Main Program Start

X5

Y-3

X-5

Y0

G67

Y3

X0

M77 ⇐ M77 Call

Y4

M77

M02 ⇐ Main Program End

:9020 ⇐ Subprogram⎯9020⎯ Start (user defined M77)

G91

X.75

Y1.5

X-.75

Y-1.5

M99 ⇐ End of Subprogram⎯E



S, B, and T Codes

Enable the user defined S, B, or T codes by selecting Yes in the Enable User S, B, or T Code field on the Change NC Parameters screen. The software executes the appropriate subprogram when it encounters an S, B, or T code in an NC program.

If a user defined T subprogram call is made, Tool Function commands T____ contained within program 9000 will be treated as normal Tool Function commands. If a number follows the T, this value is stored in variable #149. Including a number after the S, B, or T is optional.

The variable numbers and subprogram numbers are fixed for these subprogram calls:

Table 3–26. Fixed Variable and Subprogram Numbers

User Defined S, B, and T Code Example

Follow these steps before running the sample user defined S, B, and T code program:



3. Select the NC Parameters softkey. The NC Parameters screen appears.


5. Enable the User S Codes, B Codes, and T Codes fields by placing the cursor at each field and selecting the Yes softkey.

NC Part Program 1 InchBST.FNC

%

(GOTO NC PARAMETERS PAGE)

(FIRST ENABLE B, S, AND T CODES)

X0 Y0 Z0

X5 B1.4 Y2 ⇐ user defined B Call

Y-3 S2. ⇐ user defined S Call

X-3 T1.5 Y-1.5 ⇐ user defined T Call

X-5 Y0 B.75 ⇐ user defined B Call

Y3 S1.8 ⇐ user defined S Call

X0 T2.

Y0

M02

User Defined B Variable #146 Program #9028

User Defined S Variable #147 Program #9029

user Defined T Variable #149 Program #9000


:9000(USER DEFINED T MACRO)

G91

X#149

X-[#149/2] Y#149

X-[#149/2] Y-#149

G90

M99

:9028(USER DEFINED B MACRO)

G91

X#146

Y#146

X-#146

Y-#146

G90

M99

NC Part Program 2 InchBST.FNC

:9029(USER DEFINED S MACRO)

G91

X#147

X[#147/2] Y#147

X-#147

X-[#147/2] Y-#147

G90

M99



Passing Single Dedicated Parameters to Subprograms

User defined subprogram calls’ conditions are listed in the table below. If a user defined M, G, S, B, or T subprogram call is not allowed, it is treated as a normal M, G, S, B, or T code. There are no restrictions for G65, G66, and M98 subprogram calls provided that the subprogram has been loaded in memory.

For user defined S, B, and T subprograms, a single parameter is passed to the subprogram. These parameters are optional and they are stored at specific variable locations. The value of the passed parameter can be retrieved by accessing the specific variable which corresponds to the parameter. For example, variable #149 is used for the T subprogram parameter, variable #147 is used for the S subprogram parameter, and #146 is used for the B subprogram parameter. The table below lists the conditions for using modal and user defined subprograms:

Table 3–27. Conditions Under Which User Defined Subprograms Can Be Utilized

Types of User Defined Subprograms

Conditions Under Which User Defined Subprograms Can Be Utilized

No Sub-

prgram Call

M98 G65 G66User

M Code

User G

Code

User B

Code

User S

Code

User T

Code

User G Code X X X X X X X

User M Code X X X X X X

User T Code X X X X

User B Code X X X X

User S Code X X X X


While executing a user defined S Code subprogram, user defined G and M Codes can be used, but user defined S, B, and T Codes cannot. There are several different ways of performing subprogram calls. The information in the following table illustrates the different methods for making subprogram calls. The format of the optional argument list is the same for all the different methods of subprogram calls.

Table 3–28. Subprogram Capabilities

Types of Subprogram Calls

Subprogram Capabilities

Modal Capability

Can Specify Iterations

Optional Argument List

Single Predefined Parameters

G65 X X

G66 X X X

M98 X

User Defined G Codes Optional X

User Defined M Codes X

T Code X

B Code X

S Code X


This table shows which program numbers are assigned to the different macro calls and their variables:

Table 3–29. Program Numbers and Their Assigned Macro Calls and Variables

Program # Macro Call Variables Note

9000 T-Subprogram Parameter @ #149

9001M-Macro Mode A #8004-#8026 are R/W,

#8030-#8046 are RStatus #8104-#8146Tool Offsets #1-#99





9010 G-Code

9011 G-Code

9012 G-Code

9013 G-Code

9014 G-Code

9015 G-Code

9016 G-Code

9017 G-Code

9018 G-Code

9019 G-Code

9020 M-Macro Mode B #1-#33








9028 M-Macro Mode B #1-#33 B-Parameter @ #146

9029 M-Macro Mode B #1-#33 S-Parameter @ #147


NCPP Variable Summary

In the tables below, the Type column indicates the type of variable: Argument (A), System (S), Common (C), and Local (L). The R/W column indicates whether the variable is Read or Read/Write.

Table 3–30. NCPP Local Argument Variables (#1 - #33) for Macro Mode B

Variable Number Type R/W Local Variables for Macro Mode B (Note 3)#1 A R/W Address A (Note 4)#2 A R/W Address B (Note 4)#3 A R/W Address C (Note 4)#4 A R/W Address I (Note 1)or I1 (Note 2)#5 A R/W Address J (Note 1) or J1 (Note 2)#6 A R/W Address K (Note 1) or K1(Note 2)#7 A R/W Address D (Note 1) or I2 (Note 2)#8 A R/W Address E(Note 1) or J2 (Note 2)#9 A R/W Address F (Note 1) or K2 (Note 2)#10 A R/W Address I3 (Note 2)#11 A R/W Address H (Note 1) or J3 (Note 2)#12 A R/W Address K3 (Note 2)#13 A R/W Address M (Note 1)or I4 (Note 2)#14 A R/W Address J4 (Note 2)#15 A R/W Address K4 (Note 2)#16 A R/W Address I5 (Note 2)#17 A R/W Address Q (Note 1) or J5 (Note 2)#18 A R/W Address R (Note 1) or K5 (Note 2)#19 A R/W Address S (Note 1) or I6 (Note 2)#20 A R/W Address T (Note 1) or J6 (Note 2)#21 A R/W Address U (Note 1) or K6 (Note 2)#22 A R/W Address V (Note 1) or I7 (Note 2)#23 A R/W Address W (Note 1) or J7 (Note 2)#24 A R/W Address X (Note 1) or K7 (Note 2)#25 A R/W Address Y (Note 1) or I8 (Note 2)#26 A R/W Address Z (Note 1) or J8 (Note 2)#27 A R/W Address K8(Note 2)#28 A R/W Address I9 (Note 2)#29 A R/W Address J9 (Note 2)#30 A R/W Address K9(Note 2)#31 A R/W Address I10 (Note 2)#32 A R/W Address J10 (Note 2)#33 A R/W Address K2 (Note 2)


Table 3–31. Tool Offset Variable Numbers for Macro Mode A (#1 - #99)

Table 3–32. NCPP Common Variables (#100 - #199 and #500 - #599)

Table 3–33. Tool Offset/Wear Number Variables for Macro Mode B (#2000 - #2200)

1. Valid for argument assignment method 1 where multiple sets of (I,J,K) are not used.

2. Valid for argument assignment method 2 where multiple sets of (I,J,K) are used.

3. Local variables are used to pass arguments to a macro. If a local variable without a transferred argument is vacant in its initial status, it can be used freely in the macro.

4. Valid for argument assignment method 1 and 2

Custom Macro Mode A

Variable Number Type R/W Tool Offset Amounts

#1 to #99 S R/W Tool offset amounts for custom macro mode A

Variable Number#100 to #199#500 to #999

Type R/W Common Variables

#100 to #199

C R/W

Use these variables to store binary numbers as well as real numbers. All programs and subprograms can read and write to them. Variables #146, #147, and #149 also store the values which follow the B, S, and T code when B, S, and T subprogram calls are performed.

#500 to #999C R/W

Use these variables to store binary numbers as well as real numbers. All programs and subprograms can read and write to them.

Variable Number#2000 to #2200 Type R/W Tool Offset/Wear Number Variables

Macro Mode B

#2000 S R Tool Length Offset Number 00. (Always 0.)

#2001 to #2200 S R/W Tool Length Offset Number 1-200 for H.

#12001 to #12200 S R/W Tool Radius Offset Number 1-200 for D.


Table 3–34. External Work Compensation and Work Coordinate System 1 Variables (#2500 - #2906)

Variable Number#2500 to #2906

Type R/WExternal Work Compensation and Work Coordinate System 1 (G54) to 6 (G59)Used to Read/Write Zero Point Offset Values

#2500 S R/W X External Work Compensation.Compensation is applied to the Work Coordinate System 1 to 6 X value.

#2501 to #2506 S R/W X For Work Coordinate System 1 to 6

#2600 S R/W Y External Work Compensation.Compensation is applied to the Work Coordinate System 1 to 6 Y value.

#2601 to #2606 S R/W Y For Work Coordinate System 1 to 6

#2700 S R/W Z External Work Compensation.Compensation is applied to the Work Coordinate System 1 to 6 Z value.

#2701 to #2706 S R/W Z For Work Coordinate System 1 to 6

#2800 to #2906 S R/W Rotary Axes for External Work Coordinates 1 to 6.

4 axis program types:

• Rotary A: 2800 - 2899 = Work offsets for A axis, 2900s are unused

• Rotary B: 2800 - 2899 = Work offsets for B axis, 2900s are unused

5 axis program types:

• Rotary A, Tilt B: 2800s = A, 2900s = B

• Tilt A, Rotary C: 2800s = A, 2900s = C

• Tilt B, Rotary C: 2800s = B, 2900s = C

• Universal: 2800s = IV, 2900s = V


Table 3–35. Miscellaneous System Parameters Variables (#3000 - #3020)

Variable Number#3000 to #3005 Type R/W Miscellaneous System Parameters

#3004

S R/W

If #3004 = 0 to 7, feed hold, feedrate override (F.O.), or exact stop check (E.S.C.) will be enabled or disabled. Currently not implemented. #3004 Feed Hold F.O. E.S.C. 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 0 2 0 X 0 3 X X 0 4 0 0 X 5 X 0 X 6 0 X X 7 X X XKey: 0 = Effective, X= SuppressedFeed Hold and Exact Stop are currently not implemented.

#3005

S R

Provides the condition of mirror image of each axis at that time.

Bit 0: X axis (set to 1 if X axis mirroring is being used)

Bit 1: Y axis (set to 1 if Y axis mirroring is being used)

Bit 4: inch/mm status flaginch input (set to 1)mm input (set to 0)

Bit 6: absolute/incremental flagabsolute (set to 1)incremental (set to 0)

#3007 S R Indicates the active pallet number, 1 or 2.

#3020

S R

Indicates whether the probe touched during a G31 move.Equals 0 if the probe does not touch. Equals 1 if the probe does touch.


Table 3–36. Tool Probe Variables (#3101 - #3116)

Table 3–37. Part Probe Variables (#3120 - #3129)

Tool Probe

Variable Number Type R/W Description

#3101 S Current Tool Number

#3102 S R Tool Probe present

#3103 S R Tool Probe X location

#3104 S R Tool Probe Y location

#3110 S R Tool Probe X Plus Offset location

#3111 S R Tool Probe X Negative Offset location

#3112 S R Tool Probe Y Plus Offset location

#3113 S R Tool Probe Y Negative Offset location

#3114 S R Tool Probe Z Plus Offset location

#3115 S R Tool Probe Z Negative Offset location

#3116 S R Tool Probe Tool Length tolerance

Part Probe


#3120 S R Part Probe X Plus Offset location

#3121 S R Part Probe X Negative Offset location

#3122 S R Part Probe Y Plus Offset location

#3123 S R Part Probe Y Negative Offset location

#3124 S R Part Probe Z Plus Offset location

#3125 S R Part Probe Z Negative Offset location

#3126 S R Part Probe Z (reserved; not supported)

#3127 S R Part Probe Safety Min Z (reserved; not supported)

#3128 S R Tool Probe safety Min Z (reserved; not supported)

#3129 S R Tool Probe Z (reserved; not supported)


Table 3–38. Tool Variables (#3201 - #3900)

Tool Variables


#3201-#3300 S R Tool Type

#3301-#3400 S R Tool Diameter

#3401-#3500 S R Reserved

#3501-#3600 S R Tool Probe Offset X

#3601-#3700 S R Tool probe Offset Y

#3701-#3800 S R/W Probe Calibration

#3801-#3900 S R/W Tool Calibration

There are 100 variables each reserved for tool type, tool diameter, tool calibration, probe calibration, tool probe offset X, and tool probe offset Y regardless of whether or not the machine can handle that many tools. If the program tries to access a variable for a tool that does not exist, an error is generated. The variables for tool type (#3201 – #3300) have these values:

Undefined -10

Drill -11

Tap -12

Bore -13

Mill -14

Face Mill -15

Ball End -16

Back Spot Face -17

Probe -18

Gun Drill -19


Table 3–39. Modal Information from Previous Block Variables (#4001 - #4120)

Table 3–40. Modal Information for Current Block Variables (#4201 - #4320)

Variable Number#4001 to #4120 Type R/W Modal Information from Previous Block

#4001 to #4021 S R G Code Groups 1 to 21

#4022 S R G Code Group 22

#4102 S R B Code

#4107 S R D Code

#4109 S R F Code

#4111 S R H Code

#4113 S R M Code

#4114 S R Sequence Number of previous block

#4115 S R Program Number of previous block

#4119 S R S Code

#4120 S R T Code

Variable Number#4201 to #4210 Type R/W Modal Information for Current Block

#4201 to #4221 S R G Code Groups 1 to 21

#4222 S R G Code Group 22

#4302 S R B Code

#4307 S R D Code

#4309 S R F Code

#4311 S R H Code

#4313 S R M Code

#4314 S R Sequence Number of current block

#4315 S R Program Number of current block

#4319 S R S Code

#4320 S R T Code


Table 3–41. Position Information Variables (#5001 - #5083)

Arguments in the following table are variables used only in Macro A subprograms that pass parameters to subprograms. They are used to support existing Macro A subprograms. When a Macro A subprogram is called, the variables #8004 to #8026 are initialized with the address values in the calling program. Variables #8104 to #8126 are set to 1 if the address value is valid, and they are set to 0 if the address value is invalid.

In general, variables #8004 to #8026 are initialized after a subprogram call is made. These variables are not kept up to date. They are only valid immediately after a subprogram call. Variables #8104 to #8126 are set to 1 during a subprogram call and reset to 0 when the software returns from the subprogram.

Likewise, variables #8030 to #8046 are initialized to the G group modal status when a Macro A subprogram is called. Variables #8130 to #8146 are then set to 1 if the corresponding parameter is passed.

Variable Number#5001 to #5083 Type R/W Position Information

#5001 to #5004

S R

X, Y, Z, and A axis block end part coordinate respectively.

Coordinates are referenced to the current coordinate system.

#5021 to #5023

S R

X, Y, and Z axis machine coordinate position respectively.Coordinates are referenced to the current working coordinate system.Based on real time measured position.These variable cannot be used while Cutter Compensation is active.

#5041 to #5043

S R

X, Y, and Z axis work coordinate position respectively.Coordinates are referenced to the current working coordinate system.Based on real time measured position. These variable cannot be used while Cutter Compensation is active.

#5061 to #5063

S R/W

X, Y, and Z axis skip signal position respectively.Coordinates are referenced to the current coordinate system (machine, local, or working). Based on real time measured position.

#5081 to #5083 S R X, Y, and Z axis tool offset respectively.


Table 3–42. Macro Mode A Subprogram Parameters Variables (#8004 - #8026, #8104 - #8126)

Variable Number Macro Mode A

Value Status Type R/W Subprogram Parameters

#8004 #8104 A R I

#8005 #8105 A R J

#8006 #8106 A R K

#8009 #8109 A R F

#8010 #8110 A R G

#8011 #8111 A R H

#8013 #8113 A R M

#8014 #8114 A R N

#8016 #8116 A R P

#8017 #8117 A R Q

#8018 #8118 A R R

#8019 #8119 A R S

#8020 #8120 A R T

#8024 #8124 A R X

#8025 #8125 A R Y

#8026 #8126 A R Z

The G code groups’ values are stored in addresses #8004 to #8026 for Macro Mode A subprogram calls G65, G66, and user defined M and G codes. The G code groups’ status is stored in addresses #8114 to #8126. The software sets the value to 1 if an argument is specified in the subprogram call.

#8104 is non-zero if an argument is specified during the macro call and zero if no argument is specified.

#8004 has a valid value if #8104 is non-zero and may be undefined if #8104 is zero.


Table 3–43. Macro Mode A G Code Group Status Variables (#8030 - #8046, #8130 - #8146)

Variable Number Macro Mode A

Value Status Type R/W G Code Group Status

#8030 #8130 S R Group 00 G codes

#8031 #8131 S R Group 01 G codes: G00, G01, G02, G03

#8032 #8132 S R Group 02 G codes: G17, G18, G19

#8033 #8133 S R Group 03 G codes: G90, G91

#8035 #8135 S R Group 05 G codes: G94




#8039 #8139 S R Group 09 G codes: G73, G74, G76, G80-G89



#8045 #8145 S R Group 15 G codes: G61, G62, G63, G64


The G code groups’ status is stored in addresses #8030 to #8046 for Macro Mode A subprogram calls G65, G66, and user defined M and G codes.

The status is stored in addresses #8130 to #8146 and is non-zero if an argument is specified in the subprogram call. It is zero if no argument is specified in the subprogram call.


Programming Examples

This section contains NC programming examples. The first one uses basic BNC programming features while the second example uses the NCPP programming features. The third example illustrates Polar Coordinates in a subprogram.

NC Part Program Example

Following the simple drawing below, of a part program, is a sample NC part program that may be used to test the BNC programming features.

Figure 3–48. Sample NC Part Program Drawing


Here is one way the part shown on the previous page may be programmed using the NC system:

BNC Part Program 1 InchPART.HNC%

N10 G0 G90 x0. Y0. S500 T1 M6

N12 X0.5 Y0.5 Z0.5 M3

N15 G81 X0.5 Y0.5 Z0.75 F5.

N20 X0.5 Y7.5

N25 X9.5 Y7.5

N30 X9.5 Y0.5

N35 G0 X0. Y0. S1000 T2 M6

N40 G0 X5. Y6.5 Z0.5

N50 G0 G42 X5. Y6.5 M3

N55 G1 Z-0.25 F5.

N65 G2 X5. Y1.5 I5. J4. F10.

N70 X5. Y6.5 I5. J4.

N71 G0 Z0.5

N72 G0 G40 X5. Y6.5

N75 G0 Y10.5 Z3. M2

E


NCPP Example—Bolt Hole Circle

The Bolt Hole Circle program uses subprograms to produce five different Bolt Hole patterns, as shown below, and specifies which canned cycle to use, how many holes to skip, and on which hole to begin the skip.

Figure 3–49. Bolt Hole Circle Example Drawing

ISNC Part Program 1 InchBOLT_ABS.FNC%

O4000

T1 M06

M03 G00 G90 X0 Y0 Z0 S1800

#500 = 99

G65 P5080 A30.0 B10 C2.5 S4 T3 H81 I-9 J-3.5 K0 Z-1 R-.7

G65 P5080 A30.0 B12 C2.6 S2 T4 H81 I9 J-3.5 K0 Z-1 R-.2

G65 P5080 A0.0 B8 C2.3 S6 T2 H81 I9 J3.5 K0 Z-1 R-.4

G65 P5080 A30.0 B9 C2.5 S2 T1 H81 I-9 J3.5 K0 Z-1 R-.1

#1 = 0

WHILE [#1LT5] DO 100

#500 = 98

G65 P5080 A90.0 B5 C[1.5+#1] S0 T0 H81 I0 J0 K.5 Z-2 R-.7

#1 = #1+1

N1000 END 100

M02


ISNC Part Program 2 InchBOLT_ABS.FNC

O5080


(#2 IS THE NUMBER OF HOLES)

(#3 IS THE RADIUS)

(#4 IS THE BOLT CIRCLE CENTER PT X COORD)

(#5 IS THE BOLT CIRCLE CENTER PT Y COORD)

(#6 IS THE BOLT CIRCLE CENTER PT Z COORD)

(#18 IS THE RETURN LEVEL)

(#19 IS THE HOLE TO SKIP)

(#11 IS THE CANNED CYCLE NUMBER)

(#26 IS THE HOLE DEPTH)

#30 = [360.0/#2]

#31 = 0

#32 = 0

#33 = 0

WHILE [#31LT#2] DO 250

#7 = [#1+[#31*#30]]

IF [[#19-1]EQ#31] GOTO 200

IF[#32EQ1] GOTO 200

#33 = 1

G00 Z#6

G#500 G#11 Z#26 X[#4+[#3*COS[#7]]] Y[#5+[#3*SIN[#7]]] R[#18] F20.

N200 #31 = #31+1

IF [#33EQ1] GOTO 300

IF [#20EQ0] GOTO 300

#20 = #20-1

#32 = 1

GOTO 310

N300 #32 = 0

N310 #33 = 0

N400 END 250

M99


NCPP Example—Gear Pattern

The program below uses Polar Coordinates in a subprogram to generate a Gear pattern:

Figure 3–50. Display of Gear Pattern Example

NC Part Program 1 InchGEAR_ABS.HNC

%

M03 G00 G21 G90 X0 Y0 Z0 S1800

(VARIABLE #4006 - INCHES/METRIC)

IF [#4006 EQ 20] GOTO 10

IF [#4006 EQ 21] GOTO 15

N10 #850 = 25.4

GOTO 20

N15 #850 = 1.0

N20

G65 P5085 A30.0 B8 C2.5 S0 H2. I1 J1 K1 R.45 T.2

G65 P5085 A0.0 B5 C1.5 S0 H1.2 I5 J3 K1 R.3 T.2

G65 P5085 A15. B20 C1.8 S0 H1.5 I5 J-3. K1 R.6 T.1

M02

/


NC Part Program 2 InchGEAR_ABS.HNC

O5085


(#2 IS THE NUMBER OF GEAR TEETH)

(#3 IS THE OUTSIDE RADIUS)

(#11 IS THE INSIDE RADIUS)

(#4 IS THE GEAR CENTER PT X COORD)

(#5 IS THE GEAR CENTER PT Y COORD)

(#6 IS THE GEAR CENTER PT Z COORD)

(#19 IS THE TOOTH TO SKIP)

(#18 IS THE TOOTH RATIO)

/

#30 = [360.0/#2]

#31 = 0

#22 = [#30*#18]

#23 = #30-#22

#24 = #11*#850

#25 = #3*#850

#26 = #20*#23

G52 X#4 Y#5 Z#6

G90 G00 G16 X#25 Y#1

G01 Z-.25 F20.

WHILE [#31LT#2] DO 250

#1 = [#1+[#22]]

G03 G16 X#25 Y[#1] R#3

G01 X#24 Y[#1+#26]

#1 = [#1+[#23]]

G03 X#24 Y[#1-#26] R#11

G01 X#25 Y[#1]

G15

N200 #31 = #31+1

N400 END 250

M99

E

Probing 704-0116-501 Tool Probing Option 4-1

TOOL PROBING OPTION

Tool Probing measures Tool Cal Length (in Absolute Tool Length mode) or Zero Calibration (in Zero Calibration Mode) and Diameter/Diameter Wear using either a touch probe or a laser probe.

To get started, select the calibration mode you use:

Tool Probing in Absolute Tool Length Mode, on page 4 - 2

Tool Probing in Zero Calibration Mode, on page 4 - 8

Included in this chapter:

Tool Probing in Absolute Tool Length Mode, on page 4 - 2

Tool Probing in Zero Calibration Mode, on page 4 - 8

Tool Quality Monitoring, on page 4 - 14

Appendix A: Tool Probe Setup, on page 4 - 18

Appendix B: Tool Probe Calibration, on page 4 - 26

If the probe is newly installed or has been relocated, it must be calibrated and the parameters set before probing. See Appendix A: Tool Probe Setup, on page 4 - 18 and Appendix B: Tool Probe Calibration, on page 4 - 26. These need to be done only when the probe is installed, replaced, or relocated, NOT each time it is used.

Calibration mode is set in Utilities/User Preferences/Tool Utilities and Settings. For more information, see Tool Calibration Modes, on page 1 - 102 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill.

4 - 2 Tool Probing Option 704-0116-501 Probing

Tool Probing in Absolute Tool Length Mode

In Absolute Tool Length mode, the tool is probed and the Tool Cal Length and Diameter Wear values are measured.

Set the Probing Parameters—Absolute Tool Length Mode

The tool information for the tool(s) to be probed and the probing cycle information is entered in Tool Setup:

1. From the Input screen, select the Tool Review softkey, then the Tool Setup softkey.

2. Select the number of the tool you will be probing, or if it is a new tool, enter the number and type.

3. Enter the tool diameter in the Diameter field.

4. Enter an approximate tool length in the Tool Cal Length field. Find this approximate length by measuring the tool in the spindle from the spindle nose to the tip of the tool. This value will be updated when the tool is probed.

5. Enter other parameters as necessary to define the tool. For more information, see Tool Setup Fields, on page 1 - 106 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill.

6. Select the More softkey to access the second set of Tool Setup softkeys.

7. Select the Tool Probing softkey. The Tool Probing screen opens:

Figure 4–1. Tool Probing screen in Absolute Tool Length mode

The probe must be setup and calibrated before proceeding. This is done only once, unless the probe is replaced or relocated. For more information see Appendix A: Tool Probe Setup, on page 4 - 18 and Appendix B: Tool Probe Calibration, on page 4 - 26.


The current tool is displayed in the Tool field. The cycle parameters are displayed on the Main tab, and are read-only. Default values are set in the Tool Probing Cycle Defaults screen, see Tool Probing Cycle Defaults, on page 4 - 4. If you need to change one or more parameters for the current tool, check the Edit Parameters check box. (If you need to change a parameter for all tools, go back to the Tool Probing Cycle Defaults screen and make the change there.) The defaults should be set before proceeding with the probing cycle.

To set the remaining cycle parameters on the Main tab:

1. Select the type of probing cycle from the drop-down list in the Cycle field:

• Length—measures the Tool Cal Length. This value is automatically calculated by subtracting the probed Z location of the tool in spindle from the Z location of the probe stored in the Tool Measurement screen.

• Diameter—measures the actual tool diameter, and uses this value to determine the Diameter Wear and Radius Offset. For more information, see the Diameter Wear definition in Tool Setup Fields, on page 1 - 106 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill.

• Length & Diameter—measures both length and diameter.

2. Indicate Yes or No for Multi Tool Probing. Yes will include the current tool in multi-tool probing cycle.

3. Specify a Sister Tool to be used as a replacement if tool wear is out of tolerance. See Tool Quality Monitoring, on page 4 - 14.

The Length and Diameter tabs specify where these values are stored. These are also set in the Tool Probing Cycle Defaults screen, but can be changed here by selecting the Edit Parameters check box:

• Length—results are stored as either the Tool Length, or as a Tool Length Offset, or both. When stored as an offset, the Offset Number field appears where you can indicate the number in the Tool Offset table where the value is to be stored.

• Diameter—results are stored as either Diameter Wear, Tool Radius Offset, Diameter, Diameter Wear and Radius Offset, or Diameter and Radius Offset. When stored as an offset, the Offset Number field appears where you can indicate the number in the Tool Offset table where the value is to be stored.

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tool Probing Parameters:

Cycle Multi-Tool Probing Spindle Usage

Fast Feed Rapid Clearance Store Result As

Length Offset X Rapid Z Position Tool Cal Length

Length Offset Y Slow Feed Z Drop Down Depth

Min Length Delta Spindle Clearance

Min Z Position Spindle Speed


Tool Probing Cycle Defaults

These are the Tool Probing Cycle defaults in Absolute Tool Length mode. For Zero Calibration Mode, see Tool Probing Cycle Defaults, on page 4 - 10.

Defaults for probing cycle parameters that infrequently need to be changed are set and stored in the Tool Probing Cycle Defaults screen. Once these parameters are set, they are automatically applied to each tool and do not have to be accessed again. However, if it is necessary to change one or more parameters for a specific tool, this is done in the Tool Probing screen. To access the Tool Probing Cycle Defaults screen:

1. From the Tool Probing screen, select the Tool Probe Setup softkey. The Tool Probe Parameters screen opens.

2. Select the Tool Probing Cycle Defaults softkey. The Tool Probing Cycle Defaults screen opens. Set the default values in this screen.

Figure 4–2. Tool Probing Cycle Defaults screen in Absolute Tool Length mode

3. Select the Spindle Usage. This is the direction the spindle turns during the probe cycle.

4. Enter a Spindle Speed, if Spindle Usage is CW or CCW.

5. Specify the Fast Feed and Slow Feed. These are the feedrates of the initial touch (Fast) and measurement touch (Slow).

6. Enter a value in the Rapid Clearance field. This is the distance above probe stylus or beam that determines Rapid Z Position.

7. Specify the Min Length Delta. This is the distance below the probe stylus or beam that the Z-axis is allowed to travel; determines the Min Z Position.

8. Specify the X and Y Length Offsets, if probing for length of a tool with its cutter offset from the center, for example, a face mill. Otherwise, leave at 0.0.

9. Specify Z Drop Down Depth for diameter. This is the distance the tool drops down from the point where the tool tip touches the top of the probe, when probing for diameter. Value is always negative.

10.Specify Spindle Clearance, the distance between the tool and the probe


when the tool drops down for diameter probing.

11.Specify how to store the Length and Diameter results:

• Length can be stored as Length, Offset, or both.

• Diameter can be stored as:

• Diameter Wear

• Radius offset

• Diameter

• Diameter Wear and Radius Offset

• Diameter and Radius Offset

Select the Apply Defaults to Current Tool softkey to apply these defaults to the tool currently being edited. You only need to do this when you first set the defaults or when you change any of the values.

Select the Apply Defaults to All Tools softkey to apply these defaults to all tools in the active program’s tool setup, or to the entire tool library if using the Tool and Material Library option.

Select Exit twice to return to the Tool Probing screen.

Run the Probe Cycle

When the cycle parameters are set, you are ready to run the probe cycle:

1. Select the Probe Single Tool softkey.

2. Enter the Tool Number to probe. The following sequence occurs for length probing:

a. The Start Cycle button flashes and a prompt to press Start appears.b. Press the Start Cycle button to continue.

• Ιf the tool to be probed is not in the spindle, a tool change occurs.

• If the tool to be probed is not in the magazine, the software prompts for the tool.

• The spindle operates as specified in the Spindle Usage field in Tool Setup.

c. The Z axis moves downward at rapid feed until it reaches Rapid Z Position. Axis Feedrate Override is active during this move.

• The Z axis continues moving at Fast Feed until a probe deflection occurs.

• If the probe reaches Min Z Position prior to deflection, an error message appears. The value may need to be adjusted to correct the problem.

If the tool that you wish to probe is already in the spindle, select the Probe Current Tool Now softkey.

To probe multiple tools, see Probe Multiple Tools, on page 4 - 7.


d. The tool touches the probe (or breaks the beam for laser).

e. For a touch probe:

• The tool retracts slightly (at Slow Feed) and makes three touches (deflections) at Slow Feed. The average length of these deflections is used to determine the tool length.

For a laser probe:

• The tool retracts up out of the beam (at Slow Feed) until the beam is uninterrupted. The measurement is always taken when the tool moves back into the beam. The average of these readings is used to determine the tool length.

3. The Probe Single Tool cycle is now complete for length. Select the Exit softkey to return to the initial Tool Setup screen. The Tool Cal Length field is updated and the “P” designator appears.

Continue with the next step to probe the tool’s diameter.

4. If you entered an estimate of the tool’s diameter in the Diameter field and selected Diameter or Length & Diameter in the Cycle field on the Tool Probing screen, the probe cycle continues with the tool Diameter sequence:

a. The tool retracts just above the probe and moves to one side at Spindle Clearance.

b. The tool drops down to Z Drop Down Depth, below the top of the tool probe stylus or beam, and moves toward the probe.

c. The tool touches the probe (or breaks the beam for a laser).

d. For a touch probe:

• The tool retracts slightly (at Slow Feed) and makes three touches (deflections) at Slow Feed. The average of these deflections is stored for calculation after the other side of the tool is probed.

For a laser probe:

• The tool retracts out of the beam (at Slow Feed) until the beam is uninterrupted. The measurement is always taken when the tool moves back into the beam. The average of these readings is stored for calculation after the other side of the tool is probed.

e. The tool moves up to Rapid Clearance and over to the other side of the stylus or beam (to Spindle Clearance), and steps a-d are repeated from the other side of the probe.

f. The two readings (one from each side of the probe) are used to determine the actual diameter of the tool.

5. The actual probed diameter is subtracted from the tool diameter entered in Tool Setup, and this value appears in the Diameter Wear field on the Tool Setup screen with the “P” designator.


Probe Multiple Tools

The Probe Multiple Tools cycle determines Tool Cal Length (Length) and/or Diameter/Diameter Wear based on the setting of the probe cycle field. All tools that are defined in Tool Setup and have Multi-Tool Probing field set to Yes will be included in the multiple tool probing cycle. Any tool that has Multi Tool Probing set to no will be skipped but may still be probed using the single tool cycle.

The tools must be entered in Tool Setup and the probe cycle parameters set; see Set the Probing Parameters—Absolute Tool Length Mode, on page 4 - 2.

Follow these steps to perform a Probe Multiple Tools cycle:

1. Select the Probe Multiple Tools softkey.

2. The following sequence occurs:

a. The Start Cycle button flashes and a prompt requests you to press Start to initiate the multiple tool probing cycle.

b. Press the Start Cycle button to continue. The first tool to be calibrated is determined by the current tool in the spindle, the Cycle field and the value of the Multi Tool Probing field. The control starts with the current tool in spindle and scans in ascending order. A tool must have a Cycle defined (Length, Diameter, or both) and the Multi Tool Probing field set to Yes. The first tool to meet these requirements is placed in the spindle.

1. The tool is probed as described in Run the Probe Cycle, on page 4 - 5.

2. The tools list is scanned again in ascending order until the next tool to meet the multi tool probing criteria is found. A tool change occurs and the tool is probed as described in Run the Probe Cycle, on page 4 - 5.

3. This process repeats until there are no more tools to probe. During the tool scanning when the highest number tool is reached the list wraps around to tool one. The scan continues until the original tool in spindle is reached. When this occurs the multi tool probing cycle is complete.

Note that once this process begins the operator is no longer required. The entire process is automatic (as long as the tools are in the ATC).


Tool Probing in Zero Calibration Mode

In Zero Calibration mode, the tool is probed and the Zero Calibration and Diameter Wear values are calculated.

Set the Probing Parameters—Zero Calibration mode

The tool information for the tool(s) to be probed and the probing cycle information is entered in Tool Setup:

1. From the Input screen, select the Tool Review softkey, then the Tool Setup softkey.

2. Select the number of the tool you will be probing, or enter a number and type, if it is a new tool.

3. Enter other parameters as necessary to define the tool. For more information, see Tool Setup Fields, on page 1 - 106.

4. Select the More softkey to access the second set of Tool Setup softkeys.

5. Select the Tool Probing softkey. The Tool Probing screen opens:

Figure 4–3. Tool Probing screen in Zero Calibration mode

The current tool is displayed in the Tool field. The cycle parameters are displayed but are read-only. Parameter default values are set in the Tool Probing Cycle Defaults screen, see Tool Probing Cycle Defaults, on page 4 - 10. If you need to change one or more parameters for the current tool, check the Edit Parameters check box. (If you need to change a parameter for all tools, go back to the Tool Probing Cycle Defaults screen and make the change there.) The defaults should be set before proceeding with the probing cycle.

The probe must be setup and calibrated before proceeding. This is done only once, unless the probe is replaced or relocated. For more information see, Appendix A: Tool Probe Setup, on page 4 - 18 and Appendix B: Tool Probe Calibration, on page 4 - 26.


To set the remaining cycle parameters for the current tool:

1. Select the type of probing cycle from the drop-down list in the Cycle field:

• Length—measures the tool length (as Zero Calibration). This value is automatically calculated using the stored internal value and the Probe Z value obtained from probe calibration.

• Diameter—measures the actual tool diameter, and uses this value to determine the Diameter Wear. For more information, see the Diameter Wear definition in Tool Setup Fields, on page 1 - 106.

• Length & Diameter—measures both length and diameter.

2. Ensure the correct value has been entered in the Rapid Z Position field. This is the position just above the contact point of the probe that the tool rapids down to before continuing downward at Fast Feed for the initial touch.

To set Rapid Z Position, use the remote jog unit to jog the part probe to a point just above the contact point of the tool probe and select the Set Position softkey, or type in a value for the Rapid Z Position field. (With the cursor in this field, the Position Tool Over Probe softkey can be used to position the part probe over the tool probe before jogging Z to the desired position.)

3. Specify the Min Z Position. This is the lowest position that Z will be allowed to travel during the probe cycle.

4. Indicate Yes or No for Multi Tool Probing. Yes will include the current tool in multi-tool probe cycle.

5. Specify a Sister Tool to be used for as a replacement if tool wear is out of tolerance. See Tool Quality Monitoring, on page 4 - 14.

6. The Length and Diameter tabs contain the values for these parameters set in the Tool Probing Cycle Defaults screen, and may be changed here for the current tool; check the Edit Parameters check box.

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tool Probing Parameters:

Cycle Rapid Z Position

Fast Feed Slow Feed

Length Offset X Spindle Clearance

Length Offset Y Spindle Speed

Min Z Position Spindle Usage

Multi-Tool Probing Z Drop Down Depth


Determine Probe Z

The Probe Z value of the part needs to be set whenever a new part is placed on the table. The Zero Calibration value of the tool is calculated using the new Probe Z value, the stored internal value (from tool probe calibration), and the probed tool length.

If you are using a reference tool to calibrate the tool probe:

1. From the Input screen, select the Part Setup softkey to open the Part Setup screen.

2. With the cursor in the Probe Z field, touch off the top of the part with the part probe or reference tool.

3. Select the Store Machine Position softkey. This value is stored in Probe Z.

If you are using a part probe to calibrate the tool probe, use the part probe Z Edge cycle to determine Probe Z. See Edge, on page 4 - 42 in Part Probing.

Tool Probing Cycle Defaults

Defaults for probing cycle parameters that infrequently need to be changed are set and stored in the Tool Probing Cycle Defaults screen. Once these parameters are set, they are automatically applied to each tool and do not have to be accessed again. However, if it is necessary to change one or more parameters for a specific tool, this is done in the Tool Probing screen. To access the Tool Probing Cycle Defaults screen:

1. From the Tool Probing screen, select the Tool Probe Setup softkey. The Tool Probe Parameters screen opens.

2. Select the Tool Probing Cycle Defaults softkey. The Tool Probing Cycle Defaults screen opens. Set the default values in this screen.

Figure 4–4. Tool Probing Cycle Defaults screen in Zero Calibration mode

3. Select the Spindle Usage. This is the direction the spindle turns during the probe cycle.

4. Enter a Spindle Speed, if Spindle Usage is CW or CCW.


5. Specify the Fast Feed and Slow Feed. These are the feedrates of the initial touch (Fast) and measurement touch (Slow).

6. Specify the X and Y Length Offsets, if probing for length of a tool with its cutter offset from the center, for example, a face mill. Otherwise, leave at 0.0.

7. Specify Z Drop Down Depth for diameter. This is the distance the tool drops down from the point where the tool tip touches the top of the probe, when probing for diameter. Value is always negative.

8. Specify Spindle Clearance, the distance between the tool and the probe when the tool drops down for diameter probing.

Select the Apply Defaults to Current Tool softkey to apply these defaults to the tool currently being edited. You only need to do this when you first set the defaults or when you change any of the values.

Select Exit twice to return to the Tool Probing screen.

Run the Probe Cycle

When the Probe Z value is set, return to the Tool Setup/Tool Probing screen

1. Select the Probe Single Tool softkey.

2. Enter the Tool Number to probe. The following sequence occurs for length probing:

a. The Start Cycle button flashes and a prompt to press Start appears.b. Press the Start Cycle button to continue.

• Ιf the tool to be probed is not in the spindle, a tool change occurs.

• If the tool to be probed is not in the magazine, the software prompts for the tool.

• The spindle operates as specified in the Spindle Usage field in Tool Setup.

c. The Z axis moves downward at rapid feed until it reaches Rapid Z Position. Axis Feedrate Override is active during this move.

• The Z axis continues moving at Fast Feed until a probe deflection occurs.

• If the probe reaches Min Z Position prior to deflection, an error message appears. The value may need to be adjusted to correct the problem.

d. The tool touches the probe (or breaks the beam for laser).

e. For a touch probe:

• The tool retracts slightly (at Slow Feed) and makes three touches (deflections) at Slow Feed. The average length of these deflections is used to determine the tool length.

If the tool that you wish to probe is already in the spindle, select the Probe Current Tool softkey.

To probe multiple tools, see Probe Multiple Tools, on page 4 - 7.


For a laser probe:

• The tool retracts up out of the beam (at Slow Feed) until the beam is uninterrupted. The measurement is always taken when the tool moves back into the beam. The average of these readings is used to determine the tool length.

3. The Probe Single Tool cycle is now complete for length. Select the Exit softkey to return to the initial Tool Setup screen. The Zero Calibration field is updated and the “P” designator appears.

Continue with the next step to probe the tool’s diameter.

4. If you entered an estimate of the tool’s diameter in the Diameter field and selected Diameter or Length & Diameter in the Cycle field on the Tool Probing screen, the probe cycle continues with the tool Diameter sequence:

a. The tool retracts just above the probe and moves to one side at Spindle Clearance.

b. The tool drops down to Z Drop Down Depth, below the top of the tool probe stylus or beam, and moves toward the probe.

c. The tool touches the probe (or breaks the beam for a laser).

d. For a touch probe:

• The tool retracts slightly (at Slow Feed) and makes three touches (deflections) at Slow Feed. The average of these deflections is stored for calculation after the other side of the tool is probed.

For a laser probe:

• The tool retracts out of the beam (at Slow Feed) until the beam is uninterrupted. The measurement is always taken when the tool moves back into the beam. The average of these readings is stored for calculation after the other side of the tool is probed.

e. The tool moves up to Rapid Z Position and over to the other side of the stylus or beam (to Spindle Clearance), and steps a-d are repeated from the other side of the probe.

f. The two readings (one from each side of the probe) are used to determine the actual diameter of the tool.

5. The actual probed diameter is subtracted from the tool diameter entered in Tool Setup, and this value appears in the Diameter Wear field on the Tool Setup screen with the “P” designator.


Probe Multiple Tools

The Probe Multiple Tools cycle determines Zero Calibration and/or Diameter Wear (Diameter) based on the setting of the probe cycle field. All tools that are defined in Tool Setup and have Multi-Tool Probing field set to Yes will be included in the multiple tool probing cycle. Any tool that has Multi Tool Probing set to no will be skipped but may still be probed using the single tool cycle.

The tools must be entered in Tool Setup and the probe cycle parameters set; see Set the Probing Parameters—Zero Calibration mode, on page 4 - 8.

Follow these steps to perform a Probe Multiple Tools cycle:

1. Select the Probe Multiple Tools softkey.

2. The following sequence occurs:

a. The Start Cycle button flashes and a prompt requests you to press Start to initiate the multiple tool probing cycle.

b. Press the Start Cycle button to continue. The first tool to be calibrated is determined by the current tool in the spindle, the Cycle field and the value of the Multi Tool Probing field. The control starts with the current tool in spindle and scans in ascending order. A tool must have a Cycle defined (Length, Diameter, or both) and the Multi Tool Probing field set to Yes. The first tool to meet these requirements is placed in the spindle.

1. The tool is probed as described in Run the Probe Cycle, on page 4 - 11.

2. The tools list is scanned again in ascending order until the next tool to meet the multi tool probing criteria is found. A tool change occurs and the tool is probed as described in Run the Probe Cycle, on page 4 - 11.

3. This process repeats until there are no more tools to probe. During the tool scanning when the highest number tool is reached the list wraps around to tool one. The scan continues until the original tool in spindle is reached. When this occurs the multi tool probing cycle is complete.

Note that once this process begins the operator is no longer required. The entire process is automatic (as long as the tools are in the ATC).


Tool Quality Monitoring

Tool Monitoring is available to automatically monitor calibrated tools and detect breakage or wear. The software compares the current tool dimensions to the calibrated dimensions stored in Tool Setup for the programmed tool. If the current dimensions deviate from the defined tolerance programmed in the tool monitoring menus, the tool is defective.

This section describes the ways to perform Tool Monitoring:

Probe Tool Monitoring Data Block , on page 4 - 14

Automatic Tool Monitoring Parameter, on page 4 - 17

Probe Tool Monitoring Data Block

It is possible to program a spare tool (Sister Tool) to automatically replace a defective monitored tool. If a Sister Tool is not programmed, or if there is no ATC, axis motion stops and the following message appears on the screen:

“Tool # x is defective, no more tools to substitute.”

To access the Probe Tool Monitoring data block, follow this softkey sequence from the Input screen:

1. Select Part Programming.

2. Select Miscellaneous.

3. Select More.

4. Select Tool Monitoring (Probing).

Figure 5. Probe Tool Monitoring Screen


From the Probe Tool Monitoring screen, select the type of measuring cycle by selecting the appropriate softkey. The measuring cycles are described in the following sections.

Tool Breakage Detection

Tool Breakage Detection monitors the tool for breakage. Follow these steps to program a Tool Breakage Detection Cycle:

1. From the Probe Tool Monitoring screen, select Tool Breakage Detection in the Probe Cycle Type field.

2. Enter the tool to be monitored, in the Tool field. The tool must be programmed in Tool Setup, and it must be probed.

3. If desired, adjust the Speed (RPM) value.

4. Enter the Breakage Tolerance. This is the amount of deviation from the tool length programmed in the Tool Cal Length field in Tool Setup.

When the data block is executed in the part program, the current tool length is measured and compared with the Tool Cal Length/Zero Calibration in Tool Setup.

The software monitors the tool and determines if the tool is within the Breakage Tolerance. If the tool is shorter than the programmed tolerance, the tool is broken. If the tool is broken, the software checks for a spare tool.

• Ιf a Sister (spare) Tool has been entered in Tool Setup for this tool, axis motion stops and a tool change automatically occurs.

• If there is no Sister Tool programmed for this tool, or if there is no ATC, axis motion will stop and a message appears telling you to change tools.

Tool Wear Detection

To monitor tool length and/or diameter wear, select from the following Probe Cycle Type choices:

• Tool Length Wear Detection

• Tool Diameter Wear Detection

• Tool Length & Diameter Wear Detection

Follow these steps to program a Tool Wear Detection Cycle:

1. From the Probe Tool Monitoring screen, select the Probe Cycle Type.

2. Enter the Tool to be monitored. The tool must be programmed in Tool Setup, and it must be calibrated.

3. Enter Length Tolerance or Diameter Tolerance, or both if monitoring both length and diameter.

When the data block is executed in the part program, the current tool length is measured

As with any data block, use the Insert Block Before and Delete Block softkeys available for each measuring data block to add and delete measuring cycles from the program.


and compared with the tool length or diameter tolerance, or both if monitoring both length and diameter.

The figure below illustrates the tool length and diameter tolerances:

Figure 6. Tool Wear Tolerances

The software monitors the tool and determines if the tool is within the Length Tolerance or the Diameter Tolerance, or both if monitoring both length and diameter.

• If the tool is shorter than the Length Tolerance value minus the length, the tool is worn.

• If the tool’s diameter is less than the Diameter minus the programmed tolerance, the tool is worn.

• If the tool is worn, the software checks for a sister tool.

• If a Sister (spare) Tool has been entered in Tool Setup for this tool, axis motion stops and a tool change automatically occurs.


Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tool Quality Monitoring fields:

1. Length Tolerance

2. Diameter Tolerance

Breakage Tolerance Probe Cycle Type Spindle Usage

Diameter Tolerance Probing Method Tool

Direction Sister Tool

Length Tolerance Speed (RPM)


Automatic Tool Monitoring Parameter

Another method of monitoring tool quality is the Probing Parameter’s Automatic Tool Monitoring field. This setup automatically checks every probed tool for wear before and/or after cutting.

To set this parameter to automatically monitor tool quality:

1. From the Input screen, select the Program Parameters softkey.

2. Select the Probing tab.

3. Select the Automatic Tool Monitoring parameter:

• Incoming Tool—tool is checked after it is inserted into spindle

• Outgoing Tool—tool is checked before it is removed from the spindle

• Both—checked before and after cut

4. Specify the Length Tolerance. This is the amount of deviation from the tool length programmed in Tool Setup screen.

5. Specify the Diameter Tolerance. This is the amount of deviation from the tool diameter programmed in Tool Setup screen.

The software monitors the tool and determines if the tool is within the Length Tolerance or the Diameter Tolerance, or both if monitoring both length and diameter.

• If the tool is shorter than the Length Tolerance value minus the length, the tool is worn.

• If the tool’s diameter is less than the Diameter minus the programmed tolerance, the tool is worn.

• If the tool is worn, the software checks for a sister tool.

• If a Sister (spare) Tool has been entered in Tool Setup for this tool, axis motion stops and a tool change automatically occurs.



Appendix A: Tool Probe Setup

Tool probe setup parameters provide critical information on how the machine will use the probes. The parameters include fields specific to programming a touch probe or a laser probe.

From Tool Setup, select the Tool Probing softkey, then the Tool Probe Setup softkey. The Tool Probe Parameters screen opens. From here, you can access the parameters for the type of probe you select, either Touch Probe or Laser Probe.

Touch Probe Parameters

Select the Touch Probe Parameters softkey to access the touch tool probe fields. The following screen appears:

Figure 4–1. Touch Probe Parameters

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Touch Probe Parameters fields:

Tool probe setup parameters should only be adjusted when a tool probe is newly installed, relocated, or when probing feedrates are changed.

Contact Point X Repetitions Setup Fast Feed

Contact Point Y Retract Feed Stylus Width

Max Spread Retract INCR Type

Probing Axis Retract INIT


Laser Probe Parameters

Select the Laser Probe softkey to access the laser tool probe fields:

Figure 4–2. Laser Probe Parameters

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Laser Probe Parameters fields:

Laser Beam Calibration

The Laser Beam Calibration cycle uses a tool to probe the beam and determine the exact trigger point position in the light beam for X/Y and Z axes so the light beam can effectively measure tools. The Determine Laser Beam Offset softkey on the Tool Setup Probe Parameters screen initiates the cycle to set the beam offset value. Refer to Appendix A: Tool Probe Setup, on page 4 - 18 for field definitions for this screen.

You must calibrate the laser system before using the light beam for measuring tools. The laser calibration tool or precision dowel used for performing calibration is inserted into the spindle just like any tool.

Beam Offset Contact Point Y Repetitions

Cal Tool D Drip Rej. Delay Retract Feed

Cal Tool H Drip Rej. Samples Setup Fast Feed

Cal Tool L Retract INCR Stylus Width

Center Beam X Retract INIT Type

Center Beam Y Max Spread

Contact Point X Probing Axis


Laser Tool Calibration Calculations

The calibration tool’s dimensions are determined by using a precision dowel or a laser calibration tool, as shown in the figure below. Use this formula to determine the location on the tool’s diameter to interrupt the beam:

Length + (Height / 2) = Point on Diameter to Interrupt Beam

The software uses the Cal Tool D(iameter), H(eight), and L(ength) fields (shown below as D, H, and L) and the trigger points established in this cycle to determine the Center Beam X or Y values, depending on the Probing Axis.

Figure 4–3. Typical Laser Probe Calibration Tool

1. Donut

2. Tip


Laser Tool Calibration Cycle

Follow these steps to run the Laser Calibration Tool cycle:

1. Access the Tool Setup Probe Parameters screen using this softkey sequence:

a. Tool Setup softkeyb. More softkeyc. Tool Probing softkey

d. Tool Probe Setup softkey

2. In the Type field, select Laser Probe.

3. Enter values in the Cal Tool D, H, or L fields. The DETERMINE LASER BEAM OFFSET softkey appears when the cursor is in any of these fields.

4. Select the DETERMINE LASER BEAM OFFSET softkey and this sequence occurs:

a. The Start Cycle button flashes.b. Press the Start Cycle button to begin the cycle. The tool moves down in

the Z Plane at Setup Fast Feed until the beam is interrupted by the tip of the tool.

c. The tool moves up slightly at Retract Feed until the beam is uninterrupted. This sequence of slow moves into, then out of, the beam repeats for Repetition number of readings. The average switch point coming out of the beam is recorded.

d. The tool moves up slightly again, moves over in the X/Y Plane, and down until the laser beam is positioned parallel to the center of the tool’s donut.

e. The tool moves in the X/Y Plane at Fast Setup Feed toward the beam until the beam is interrupted.

f. The sequence of slow moves into then out of the beam repeats for Repetition number of readings. The average switch point coming out of the beam is recorded.

g. The process is repeated from the opposite side of the beam.h. The Center Beam X or Y field is updated based on the trigger points

established in this cycle, depending on the Probing Axis selection.

• Ιf Probing Axis is X, the Center Beam X field is updated.

• Ιf Probing Axis is Y, the Center Beam Y field is updated.

i. The Beam Offset field is updated based on the trigger points established in this cycle.


The figure below illustrates the tool motion during this cycle:

Figure 4–4. Typical Laser Probe Calibration Tool Motion

1. Z Minus

2. X/Y Plus

3. X/Y Minus


Probe Deflection Offset Calibration

Tool and part probe deflection offsets are the difference between the contact point of the probe and the actual receipt of a probe deflection signal. The offsets may vary for each direction of deflection. The switch points are repeatable to one micron or less.

These offsets need to be adjusted during an initial probe installation, a new stylus installation, or for centering or re-centering a stylus. They do not need to be performed each time the control is reset.

Tool Probe Deflection Offset

Access the Tool Probe Deflection Offset screen from the Tool Setup screen. Select the Tool Probing softkey, the Tool Probe Setup softkey, and the Tool Probe Deflection Offset softkey. This screen appears:

Figure 4–5. Tool Probe Deflection Offsets

The Reference Tool Diameter field holds the diameter of the tool being probed.

The probe orientation determines the offsets used in the Probe Stylus Position fields. The -Z offset is always used along with +/-X or +/-Y, depending from which direction the probe can deflect.

The following sections describe the two methods for determining Tool Probe Deflection Offsets: Absolute Location, on page 4 - 24 or Reference Tool Touch, on page 4 - 24.


Absolute Location

Use an edge finder to determine the absolute location of each edge of the probe stylus.

1. Enter the Reference Tool Diameter.

2. Position the cursor on the desired offset field.

3. Position the reference tool to the correct start position.

4. Press the Use Probe To Determine Offset softkey. The Start Button flashes.

5. Press the flashing Start Button.

a. The cursor position determines which axis is moved and in what direction.b. The deflected position is used to calculate the offsets.c. The offset value appears in the current field.d. The offsets are saved by the system so they are retained after power to

the machine is turned off.e. Unused fields contain a 0 value.f. The sign of the offset is + for plus axis deflections and - for negative axis

deflections.

Reference Tool Touch

Use a feeler gauge to determine the position where the reference tool touches the top and each side of the probe stylus. Follow the prompts on the screen to know which side of the stylus to use. Follow these steps:

1. Enter a 0 for the Reference Tool Diameter.

2. Position the reference tool in the correct start position. Begin with the top of the stylus.

3. Place the cursor in the -Z field of the Probe Stylus column.

4. Press the USE PROBE TO DETERMINE OFFSET (F1) softkey. The Start Button flashes.

5. Press the flashing Start Button.

a. The cursor position determines which axis is moved and in what direction.b. The deflected position is used to calculate the offsets.c. The offset value appears in the -Z field.d. The offsets are saved by the system so they are retained after power to

the machine is turned off.e. Unused fields contain a 0 value.f. The sign of the offset is + for plus axis deflections and - for negative axis

deflections.

6. Repeat these steps for the other two axis positions (+/- X and +/-Y). Position the reference tool appropriately and put the cursor in the appropriate Probe Stylus field.

The Apply G Code Offset parameter applies the deflection offsets to G31 commands when conversational and NC probing are used together.


You can manually adjust the deflection offsets to optimize performance. By running a probe cycle on a reference tool you may make slight adjustments to the deflection offsets until the cycle returns with the exact value(s) desired.



Appendix B: Tool Probe Calibration

The Tool Probe must be calibrated before probing can be performed.

Probe Calibration—Absolute Tool Length mode

To calibrate the Tool Probe:

1. Access the Tool Measurement screen (Tool Setup/More/Tool Measurement Settings softkey):

2. Specify Probe in the Device field.

The Z Reference position must be known to proceed. Z Reference is the distance from the table top to Machine Zero. If already set, skip to step 8.

3. Advance to Z Reference field.

4. Place a gauge of known height on table top.

5. With a reference tool in spindle, jog Z-axis down and carefully touch reference tool to top of gauge block.

6. Select the Store Machine Position softkey or press the store position button on remote jog unit.

7. Subtract the reference tool length and the gauge height from the stored machine position, and manually enter this value in the Z Reference field.

For example, if the stored machine position is -300mm, and the reference tool length = 150mm, and the gauge height = 50mm, the Z Reference value is -500mm.

8. Access the Tool Setup screen. Enter the exact tool length for the Reference Tool in the Tool Cal Length field.

9. Select the More softkey, and then the Tool Probing softkey. The Tool Probing screen opens.

10.Select Length in the Cycle field.

11.Select the Calibrate the Tool Probe softkey. The control asks for the reference tool (number) to use for calibrating the probe; enter the number and select OK to calibrate the probe.

12.When calibration is complete, the Tool Measurement screen opens and the Height and Z Location fields contain the measured and calculated values:

Probe Calibration must be completed before probing can begin, but they only need to be done one time, unless the probe is relocated or replaced, if the Slow Feed value is changed, or if the tool calibration mode is changed.


Figure 4–6. Tool Measurement Screen

Now the probe is calibrated and you can proceed to Set the Probing Parameters—Absolute Tool Length Mode, on page 4 - 2.

Probe Calibration—Zero Calibration mode

The tool probe can be calibrated (Z height determined) with a part probe or with a reference tool.

When tools are probed, the Probe Z value and the stored internal value (from the calibration of the tool probe) are used to calculate Zero Calibration. When a new part is placed on the table, a new Probe Z value must be determined.

Figure 4–7. Tool Setup Probing Parameters in Zero Calibration mode


Calibrate Tool Probe with Part Probe

The Tool Probe can be calibrated (Z height determined) with a Part Probe.

With the part probe in the spindle:

1. From the Tool Setup screen, select the More softkey.

2. Select the Tool Probing Softkey.

3. Set the Rapid Z Position. Use the remote jog unit to jog the part probe to a point just above the contact point of the tool probe and select the Set Position softkey, or type in a value for the Rapid Z Position field. (With the cursor in this field, the Position Tool Over Probe softkey can be used to position the part probe over the tool probe before jogging Z to the desired position.)

4. Select the Calibrate the Tool Probe softkey.

5. Press the flashing Start Cycle button.

The control activates the part probe and the Z axis moves down at rapid, then at Approach Feed until a probe deflection occurs or Minimum Z is reached. (Ιf the probe reaches Minimum Z prior to deflection, an error message appears. Minimum Z is set in the Part Setup Probe Parameters.)

If the appropriate fields are set correctly, then the two probes will touch (or the part probe breaks the beam on a laser tool probe). The part probe will then retract slightly and touch again at the feed rate specified in the Measurement Feed field. The average deflection position is recorded and saved internally for the Zero Calibration value calculation.

Next you must determine the Probe Z value. See Determine Probe Z, on page 4 - 10.

Calibrate Tool Probe with Reference Tool

The Tool Probe can be calibrated (Z height determined) with a Reference Tool.

1. From the Tool Setup screen, select the More softkey.

2. Select the Tool Probing Softkey.

3. Set the Rapid Z Position. Use the remote jog unit to jog the reference tool to a point just above the contact point of the tool probe and select the Set Position softkey, or type in a value for the Rapid Z Position field. (With the cursor in this field, the Position Tool Over Probe softkey can be used to position the reference tool over the tool probe before jogging Z to the desired position.)

4. Select the Calibrate the Tool Probe softkey.

5. A prompt appears requesting the Reference Tool number. Enter the appropriate tool number and select OK.

When using a part probe, Part Probe Parameters and Deflection Offsets must be set before proceeding with tool probe calibration. Part Setup—Part Probe Parameters, on page 4 - 32 and Part Probe Deflection Offset Calibration, on page 4 - 34.



The Z axis moves downward at rapid then at Fast Feed until a probe deflection occurs or Minimum Z is reached. (Ιf the probe reaches Minimum Z prior to deflection, an error message appears. Minimum Z is set in the Tool Probing screen.)

The reference tool touches the tool probe, retracts slightly, and touches again at the feedrate specified in the Slow Feed field. The number of slow touches is specified by the Repetitions parameter. The average deflection position is recorded and saved internally for the Zero Calibration calculation.

Next you must determine the Probe Z value. See Determine Probe Z, on page 4 - 10.

If necessary, a tool change occurs, placing the reference tool in the spindle. If the tool is not in the magazine, the software will prompt you for the tool.

Probing 704-0116-501 Part Probing Option 4-31

PART PROBING OPTION

Part probing is used during Part Setup to probe the part’s edge, corner, bore, boss, rectangular pocket, or rectangular solid. The probe collects information about the part’s center position and diameter. This information is used to set Part Zero, making part setup faster and more accurate. Part probing can be used in Manual or Auto mode and with either Conversational or NC programming. Part probing can also be used for part quality verification.

Manual Mode

Probing in Manual Mode is used to set part zero and/or determine skew:

1. Enter information about the probe in Part Probe Parameters. See Part Setup—Part Probe Parameters, on page 4 - 32.

2. Calibrate the probe and enter the deflection offsets. See Part Probe Calibration and Cycles, on page 4 - 34.

3. Select the cycle and probe the part. See Manual Mode Part Setup Probing Cycles , on page 4 - 42 and/or Manual Mode Part Skew Probing Cycles , on page 4 - 57.

Auto Mode

Probing in Auto Mode is used to set part zero and/or determine skew within the part program (rather than in Part Setup as in Manual Mode). It can also be used to gather data about part quality.

1. Enter information about the probe in Part Probe Parameters. See Part Setup—Part Probe Parameters, on page 4 - 32.

2. Calibrate the probe and enter the deflection offsets. See Part Probe Calibration and Cycles, on page 4 - 34.

3. Probe the part to set part zero and/or determine skew. This is done within the program; see Automatic Mode, on page 4 - 64.

Additionally, part inspection is performed in Auto Mode. See Part Quality Verification, on page 4 - 67.

It is the operator’s responsibility to set safe travel limits for the part probe as described in this chapter.

4 - 32 Part Probing Option 704-0116-501 Probing

Part Setup—Part Probe Parameters

The part probing parameters are accessed through Part Setup. These parameters must be adjusted when a new stylus is installed in the part probe, when the probe work region is changed, or when probing feedrates are changed.

To access the Part Probe Parameters:


2. Press the Part Setup softkey.

3. Press the Part Probing softkey. The Part Setup screen is displayed with the Part Probing menu.

Figure 5. Probing Part Setup Softkey Menu

4. Select the Part Probe Parameters softkey.


The Part Setup Probe Parameters screen appears:

Figure 6. Part Setup Screen with Part Probe Parameters

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Part Probe Parameters:

Approach Feed Minimum Z Stylus Diameter

Circular Passes Present X Max

Fast Start Feed Repetitions X Min

Max Spread Retract INCR Y Max

Measurement Feed Retract INIT Y Min


Part Probe Calibration and Cycles

This section describes the probe calibration and cycles available with the Probing Option. Once the probing equipment is calibrated, the tool and part can be calibrated using the probing equipment. This information can be stored as appropriate in Tool or Part Setup, or in a data block to be executed with the part program.

Probe calibration is only required on systems that also have a tool probe installed. Calibration methods vary between systems with tool probing only, versus systems with both tool and part probing. See Probe Calibration—Absolute Tool Length mode, on page 4 - 26 or Probe Calibration—Zero Calibration mode, on page 4 - 27 of Tool Probing for details.

Part Probe Deflection Offset Calibration

Part probe deflection offsets are the difference between the contact point of the probe and the actual receipt of a probe deflection signal. The offsets may vary for each direction of deflection.

These offsets need to be adjusted during an initial probe installation, a new stylus installation, or for centering or re-centering a stylus. They do not need to be performed each time the control is reset.

Access the Part Probe Deflection Offset screen from the Part Setup screen. Select the Part Probing softkey followed by the Part Probe Deflection Offsets softkey. This screen appears with softkeys for selecting the method to use for determining offsets.

Figure 7. Part Probe Deflection Offset

The sections that follow describe the procedures to follow for each method: Ring Gauge, on page 4 - 35 and Reference Block, on page 4 - 36.


Ring Gauge

The Ring Gauge method probes in a circular pattern. Select the PART PROBE DEFLECTION OFFSETS softkey followed by the RING GAUGE softkey, and this screen appears:

Figure 8. Ring Gauge Deflection Offset

Follow these steps to determine a Ring Gauge Deflection Offset:

1. Enter the Diameter of the part.

2. Use an indicator or some similar method to determine the center of the gauge. Enter the Center of the gauge in the Center X and Center Y fields.

3. Jog the spindle to a point in Z where the probe just touches the part and enter the value in the Datum Z field. This value can be entered manually or by pressing the Store Position key.

4. Position the probe tip inside the gauge at the desired depth and select the Use Gauge To Get X&Y Offsets softkey. The Start button begins to flash.

5. Press the Start button to begin the cycle.

6. The probe touches the part at 36 points (10° increments) inside the gauge to automatically calculate the X and Y offsets. To determine the Z offset, position the probe tip above the chosen datum point and select the Use Datum Point To Get Z Offset softkey. The Start button begins to flash.

7. Press the Start button to begin the cycle.

8. The probe touches off the datum point and calculates the offset.

9. The Offset values appear on the screen and are stored in memory.

This offset will be used anytime the control uses a probe location.

Offset values may be entered manually by the operator. If you know the readings are off by a certain amount, you can make adjustments without even using the probe.


The sign of the offset should be + for plus axis deflections and - for minus axis deflections.

Reference Block

The Reference Block method probes in the + or - X or Y direction. Select the Part Probe Deflection Offsets softkey followed by the Reference Block Method softkey, and this screen appears:

Figure 9. Reference Block Deflection Offset

Follow these steps to determine the Reference Block Deflection Offsets for the X or Y axes:

1. Enter X or Y values manually in the Reference Block X or Y fields.

2. Position the cursor under the Deflection Offset column at the offset to be determined.

3. Manually jog the machine so the part probe is in the proper location to touch off the reference block for the desired axis and direction.

4. Select the Use Probe To Determine Offset softkey, and the Start button begins to flash.

5. Press the Start Button to start the cycle. The probe touches off the reference block. The offset values are calculated, appear on the screen, and are stored in memory.

This offset is used when the control uses a probe location.

Follow these steps to determine the offset for the Z axis:

1. Jog the probe to the top of the reference block.



2. Use a feeler gauge to determine where the tip of the stylus would touch the reference block. Enter this value in the -Z field in the Reference Block column.

3. Select the Use Probe To Determine Offset softkey. The probe touches off the part in the Z axis to determine the offset.

Offset values may be entered manually by the operator. If you know the readings are off by a certain amount, you can make adjustments without using the probe.

The sign of the offset should be + for plus axis deflections and - for minus axis deflections.

• The probe measures the part at 36 points in 10° increments on the ring gauge.

• The 4 points measured on the reference block correspond to the 0°, 90°, 180°, and 270° values on the ring gauge. The remaining 32 values are estimated using the 4 actual measurements to fill in the 10° incremental offsets.

The Ring Gauge method is more accurate than the Reference Block method.



Conversational Part Probing Cycles

Part probing is used for locating the position and alignment of the part on the table. Inserting a Probe Part Setup data block to run from the part program allows you to probe multiple parts and locate them at run time. This section describes probing cycles which are used for creating Probe Part Setup data blocks.

The software uses information programmed in the Part Setup screen to perform the Probing Cycles in Manual or Automatic mode.

There are two types of cycles available for probing different types of part features: Part Setup Probing Cycles and Part Skew Probing Cycles.

To select the Part Probe cycle type:


2. Press the Part Setup softkey.

3. Press the Part Probing softkey. The Part Setup screen is displayed with the Part Probing menu.

• Select the Part Zero Probe Cycles softkey for the Part Setup Probing Cycles. Refer to Part Setup Probing Cycles, on page 4 - 40 for details about programming these Manual Mode cycles. Refer to Automatic Mode, on page 4 - 64 for information about programming these Auto Mode cycles.

• Select the Part Skew Probe Cycles softkey to access the Part Skew Probing Cycles. Refer to Part Skew Probing Cycles, on page 4 - 56 for details about programming these Manual Mode cycles.Refer to Automatic Mode, on page 4 - 64 for information about programming these Auto Mode cycles.

Select the probing cycle type from the Part Setup screen with the Part Probing softkey.The cycles provide a method for allowing the software to automatically enter the Part Zero X, Part Zero Y, Probe Z, and X/Y Skew (deg) fields in the Part Setup screen.

Part Setup Screen

In addition to the standard Part Setup fields defined in the Getting Started with WinMax Mill manual, the software updates these Part Setup fields with data obtained during the probing cycles:

Refer to Determine Probe Z, on page 4 - 10 of Tool Probing for more details about Probe Z calculations.

Part probing may be run either from Manual Mode or from Auto Mode inside the part program. The sections that follow describe the different types of Manual Mode Probing

Part Zero X

Part Zero Y

Probe Z

X/Y Skew (DEG)


Cycles. Auto Mode probing is described at the end of this chapter.

Part Probe Deflection

During the probing cycles described in this section, the part probe positions and moves at Approach Feed until it reaches the geometry. Then it backs up and moves again at Measurement Feed until it deflects the geometry a second time. The Measurement Feed touches are repeated a total of Repetitions times and the average is used.

Part Probe Working Envelope

The part probe cycles allow the part probe to operate within the constraints set in the Part Setup—Part Probe Parameters, on page 4 - 32. A working envelope containing safe part probe travel limits is stored in the Part Probing Parameters.

The working envelope represents the area on the machine table in which the probe can search for geometric features. The travel limits mentioned in each of the Manual Mode Part Setup Probing Cycles and the Manual Mode Part Skew Probing Cycles are set in the working envelope. This area is determined by these fields in the Part Probing Parameters screen: X Min, X Max, Y Min, Y Max, and Z Min. Z Min is a location above the table. The X and Y parameters are illustrated in the figure below:

Figure 4–1. Part Probe Working Envelope’s X and Y Parameters

Each cycle’s feed rate is determined by the value set in the Part Probing Parameters Approach Feed and Measurement Feed fields.

1. Y Max

2. Y min

3. X Min

4. X Max

If the probe reaches any part probe travel limit before reaching the part feature, a fault occurs, motion stops, and an error message appears on the screen.


Part Setup Probing Cycles

The table below describes the process for each Part Setup Probing Cycle:

Cycle Type Parameter Input

Automatic Execution

Results Displayed

Optional Storage

Edge AxisProbe DirectionPositive OR NegativePreset X or Y

Approach edge.Retract.Return to Start Position.

Deflection Position X, Y, or Z

Deflection Position X, Y, or Z is Part Zero X, Part Zero Y,ORProbe Z.

HoleCirclePocket

Start Angle 1, 2, 3Preset XPreset Y

Approach 3 Circle Points from inside.Position Probe into Center.

Center XCenter YDiameter

Center is Part Zero X and Part Zero Y.

Cylinder Probing RadiusStart Angle 1, 2, 3Z DepthPreset XPreset Y

Approach 3 Cylinder points from outside.Position Probe above cylinder Center.

Center XCenter YDiameter


Rectangular Pocket

Preset XPreset Y

Approach the 4 pocket walls from inside.Position Probe into pocket Center.

Center (X)Center (Y)Length (X)Length (Y)


Rectangular Solid

Probing Length (X)Probing Length (Y)Z DepthPreset XPreset Y

Approach the 4 Rectangle walls from outside.Position Probe above rectangle Center.

Center (X)Center (Y)Length (X)Length (Y)



Cycle Type Parameter Input

Automatic Execution

Results Displayed

Optional Storage

Plane Intersection

X Probe DirectionOffset 1Offset 2Y Probe DirectionOffset 1Offset 2Preset XPreset Y

Approach 2 points on each of the two planes.Return to Start Position.

Intersection point of the two planes in the X/Y coordinate system

Intersection point is Part Zero X and Part Zero Y.

Slot Inside Preset XORPreset Y

Approach the 2 slot walls from inside.Position Probe into slot Center.

Center (X) ORCenter (Y)Length (X) ORLength (Y)

Center is Part Zero X OR Part Zero Y.

Web Outside Probing Length (X)ORProbing Length (Y)Z DepthPreset X ORPreset Y

Approach the 2 web walls from outside.Position Probe above web Center.

Center (X) ORCenter (Y)Length (X) ORLength (Y)

Center is Part Zero X OR Part Zero Y.


Manual Mode Part Setup Probing Cycles

During a Part Setup Probing cycle, the probe moves to specified points on the part, deflects, and stops in the center or at the Start Position, depending on the part feature. From the Part Setup screen, use the PROBING (F5) softkey to access the Probing Cycles.

Each cycle is described in detail in the following sections. When the cycle is finished, the software displays values representing the desired features. The fields for each cycle vary and are defined with each cycle description.

You can accept these values by pressing the ACCEPT POSITION AS PART ZERO softkey when it appears. If you have entered Preset X or Preset Y offsets, these offsets are subtracted from the probed Part Zero values, and the new Part Zero values appear after pressing the ACCEPT POSITION AS PART ZERO softkey.

Follow these steps to access the Part Probe Cycles:

1. From the Part Setup screen, select the Part Probing softkey.

2. Select the Part Zero Probe Cycles softkey. The probe cycle softkeys appear. Select a softkey to select a cycle.

Depending on the Probing Cycle selected, different probing fields appear on the Part Setup screen.

Edge

An Edge Cycle is used for determining the location of a specified edge of the part. During an Edge Cycle, the part probe moves to the X, Y, or Z edge of the part and records the deflection position.

The figure below shows part probe movement during X, Y, and Z Edge Cycles:

The following sections describe how to program each of the Part Setup Probing Cycles.

Edge Probing in X direction (positive) Top View1 Start Position

Edge Probing in Y direction (positive)Top View2 Start Position

Edge Probing in Z direction

Side View3 Start Position


The figure below shows a side view of an Edge cycle probing in the X direction:

Figure 5. Part Probe Movement for Edge Probing Cycles

In addition to the standard Part Setup fields which are defined in the Getting Started with WinMax Mill manual, these Part Setup fields appear for the Edge Probing Cycle:

Follow these steps to program an Edge Probing Cycle:

1. From the Part Zero Probe Cycles softkey menu, select Edge.

2. In the Probing Axis field, select the axis to move toward the edge of the part: X Axis, Y Axis, or Z Axis.

3. In the Probing Direction field, select the direction to probe: Positive or Negative. This field appears when the Probing Axis is X or Y. It is not available for Z Probing Axis.

4. If you want to program an offset from Part Zero X or Part Zero Y, enter the offset value in the Preset X or Preset Y field. This field appears when the Probing Axis is X or Y. It is not available for Z Probing Axis.

Edge Probing in X direction (positive)Side View4 Start Position

Part Zero Cycle Probe Z

Part Zero X Probing Axis

Part Zero Y Probing Direction

Preset X

Preset Y


When the Part Setup fields have been entered, start the Edge Probing Cycle:

1. Place the part probe in the spindle and jog the probe to the Start Position, near the edge to be probed.

2. Press the Start Probing Cycle softkey. The Start Cycle button flashes.


a. The probing axis moves in the specified direction until the probe is deflected.

• Ιf no deflection occurs before the probe reaches the probe’s travel limit, the cycle is stopped and an error message appears.

• To clear the error message and return to the Part Setup screen, press any key.

• Check the Part Probe Parameters and the part fixturing. Make adjustments as necessary and re-start the cycle.

b. The deflection position appears in the Edge (X,Y, or Z) field when the cycle is finished.

c. The probing axis returns to the Start Position.

4. The Accept Position As Part Zero and Do Not Accept softkeys appear. Press the appropriate softkey.

• The Accept Position As Part Zero softkey accepts the edge position and subtracts the Preset X or Y value to determine Part Zero.

• The Do Not Accept softkey ignores the edge position value and the Preset X or Y value. Part Zero remains unchanged.

Refer to Part Zero Storage, on page 4 - 55 for more information.

5. The initial Part Setup screen appears with Part Zero entries established during the cycle.

Hole or Circle Pocket

The Hole or Circle Pocket Cycle is used for determining the center location and the diameter of a hole or pocket. During a Hole or Circle Pocket Cycle, the part probe moves from the inside of the circle out to three points on the edge, touches at each point, and returns to the Start Position within the circle after each touch. The software records each deflection position and calculates the center location. The probe positions in the center of the pocket.

The figure below shows part probe movement during a Hole or Circle Pocket Cycle:


Figure 6. Hole or Circle Pocket Probing Cycle

In addition to the standard Part Setup fields which are defined in the Getting Started with WinMax Mill manual, these Part Setup fields appear for the Hole or Circle Pocket Probing Cycle:

Follow these steps to program a Hole or Circle Pocket Probing Cycle:

1. From the Part Zero Probe Cycles softkey menu, select Hole or Circle Pocket.

2. In the Start Angle fields, enter the desired approach angles.

3. If you want to program an offset from Part Zero X or Part Zero Y, enter the offset value in the Preset X or Preset Y field.

1. Start Position

2. Start Angle 1

3. Start Angle 2

4. Start Angle 3

5. Start Position

6. Start Angle 1

Center X Preset Y

Center Y Start Angle

Diameter

Part Probe Cycle

Preset X


When the Part Setup fields have been entered, start the Hole or Circle Pocket Probing Cycle:

1. Place the part probe in the spindle and jog the probe to the Start Position, into the pocket and below the surface.

2. Press the START PROBING CYCLE (F1) softkey. The Start Cycle button flashes.

3. Press the Start Cycle button.

a. The probe moves along Start Angle 1 until it is deflected at the edge of the hole or circle pocket.

• If no deflection occurs before the probe reaches its travel limit, the cycle is stopped and an error message appears.



b. After the first deflection, the probe returns to the Start Position. c. The probe moves along Start Angle 2 to a second contact point. d. After the deflection, the probe returns to the Start Position. e. The probe moves along Start Angle 3 to a third contact point.f. After the deflection, the probe returns to the Start Position. g. Using the three contact points, the control calculates the diameter and the

center (X and Y) of the hole.

h. The probe moves to the center of the hole or circle pocket. The results appear in the Center X, Center Y, and Diameter fields.

4. The ACCEPT POSITION AS PART ZERO (F1) and DO NOT ACCEPT (F2) softkeys appear. Press the appropriate softkey.

• The ACCEPT POSITION AS PART ZERO (F1) softkey accepts the center position and subtracts the presets to determine Part Zero.

• The DO NOT ACCEPT (F2) softkey ignores the center value and the Preset X or Y value. Part Zero remains unchanged.




Cylinder

The Cylinder Cycle is used for determining the center location and the diameter of a cylinder. During a Cylinder Cycle, the part probe moves from the Start Position above the cylinder, out and down to three points around the diameter. The probe touches at each point and returns up and over to the Start Position above the cylinder after each touch. The software determines the diameter and the center location.

The figure below shows part probe movement during a Cylinder Cycle:

Figure 7. Cylinder Probing Cycle

In addition to the standard Part Setup fields which are defined in the Getting Started with WinMax Mill manual, these Part Setup fields appear for the Cylinder Cycle:

Follow these steps to program a Cylinder Probing Cycle:

1. From the Part Zero Probe Cycles softkey menu, select Cylinder.

2. In the Probing Radius field, enter the probe search radius.


4. In the Z Depth field, enter the distance the Z axis moves down before

1. Start Position

2. Start Angle 1

3. Start Angle 2

4. Start Angle 3

5. Start Position

6. Start Angle 1

Center X Preset Y

Center Y Probing Radius

Diameter Start Angle

Part Probe Cycle Z Depth

Preset X


changing direction and searching horizontally for each contact point.

5. If you want to program an offset from Part Zero X and Part Zero Y, enter the offset value in the Preset X and Preset Y field.

When the Part Setup fields have been entered, start the Cylinder Probing Cycle:

1. Place the part probe in the spindle and jog the probe to the Start Position, above the cylinder.



a. The probe moves along Start Angle 1 until it reaches the Probing Radius.

• If no deflection occurs before the probe reaches the probe’s travel limit, the cycle is stopped and an error message appears.



b. The probe moves down until it reaches Z Depth.

• If deflection occurs during the Z move, axis motion stops and an error message appears.



c. The probe moves backwards in the X/Y plane toward the Start Position in order to find a contact point.

d. After deflection, the probe moves up and over to the Start Position above the cylinder.

e. The probe moves along Start Angle 2 until it reaches the Probing Radius. The same motion occurs as with Start Angle 1.

f. After the deflection, the probe moves up and over to the Start Position above the cylinder.

g. The probe moves along Start Angle 3 until it reaches the Probing Radius. The same motion occurs as with Start Angles 1 and 2.

h. After the third deflection, the control uses the three contact points and calculates the diameter and center (X and Y) of the cylinder.

i. The probe moves up and over to the center above the Z Plane of the cylinder. The results appear in the Center X, Center Y, and Diameter fields.


• The ACCEPT POSITION AS PART ZERO (F1) softkey accepts the center and subtracts the presets to determine part zero.


• The DO NOT ACCEPT (F2) softkey ignores the center values and the Preset X or Y value. Part Zero remains unchanged.



Rectangular Pocket Inside

The Rectangular Pocket Inside (or Rectangular Pocket) Cycle is used for determining the center location of the pocket and the X and Y length of the rectangle. During a Rectangular Pocket Cycle, the part probe moves from inside the pocket out to a point on each edge of the rectangle, touches at each point, and returns to the Start Position after each touch. The software records each deflection position and calculates the center location and lengths.

The figure below shows part probe movement during a Rectangular Pocket Cycle.

Figure 8. Rectangular Pocket Probing Cycle

In addition to the standard Part Setup fields which are defined in the Programming Basics chapter of the Getting Started with WinMax manual, these Part Setup fields appear for the Rectangular Pocket Cycle:

1. Start Position

2. Point 1

3. Point 2

4. Point 3

5. Point 4

6. Start Position

7. Point 1

Center X Preset X

Center Y Preset Y

Length (X)

Length (Y)

Part Probe Cycle


The offset(s) will be subtracted from the center point of the pocket and applied to Part Zero X and Y if you select the ACCEPT POSITION AS PART ZERO softkey, which appears after the cycle has been run.

Follow these steps to program a Rectangular Pocket Cycle:

1. From the Part Zero Probe Cycles softkey menu, select Rectangular Pocket Inside.

2. If you want to program an offset for Part Zero X or Part Zero Y, enter the offset value in the Preset X or Preset Y field.

When the Part Setup fields have been entered, start the Rectangular Pocket Cycle:

1. Place the part probe in the spindle and jog the probe to the Start Position, into the pocket and below the surface.

2. Press the START PROBING CYCLE softkey. The Start Cycle button flashes.


a. The probe moves in the positive X direction until it is deflected at the edge of the pocket.

• Ιf no deflection occurs before the probe reaches its horizontal travel limit, the cycle is stopped and an error message appears.



b. After the first deflection, the probe returns to the Start Position.c. The probe moves in the negative X direction, reaches a second contact

point, and returns to the Start Position. d. The probe moves in the positive Y direction, reaches a third contact point,

and returns to the Start Position.e. The probe moves in the negative Y direction, reaches a fourth contact

point, and returns to the Start Position.f. Using the four contact points, the control calculates the length of the

pocket in the X and Y directions and the center (X and Y) of the pocket.

g. The probe moves to the center of the rectangle. The results are displayed on the screen in the Center X, Center Y, Length (X), and Length (Y) fields.

4. The ACCEPT POSITOIN AS PART ZERO and DO NOT ACCEPT softkeys appear. Press the appropriate softkey.

• The ACCEPT POSITOIN AS PART ZERO softkey accepts the center and subtracts the presets to determine part zero.

• The DO NOT ACCEPT softkey ignores the center and length values and the Preset X or Y value. Part Zero remains unchanged.




Rectangular Solid Outside

A Rectangular Solid Outside (or Rectangular Solid) Cycle is used for determining the center location of the pocket and the X and Y length of the rectangle. During a Rectangular Solid Cycle, the part probe moves from above the rectangle out and down to a point on each of the four walls, touches at each point, and returns to the Start Position after each touch. The software records each deflection position and calculates the center position and lengths.

The figure below shows part probe movement during a Rectangular Solid Cycle:

Figure 9. Rectangular Solid Probing Cycle

In addition to the standard Part Setup fields which are defined in the Programming Basics chapter of the Getting Started with WinMax manual, these Part Setup fields appear for the Rectangular Solid Cycle:

Follow these steps to program a Rectangular Solid Cycle:

1. From the Part Setup Probe Cycles softkey menu, select Rectangular Solid Outside.

2. In the Probing Length X field, enter an estimate for the X length.

3. In the Probing Length Y field, enter an estimate for the Y length.

1. Start Position

2. Point 1

3. Point 2

4. Point 3

5. Point 4

6. Start Position

7. Point 1

Center X Probing Length X

Center Y Probing Length Y

Length (X) Preset X

Length (Y) Preset Y

Part Probe Cycle Z Depth


4. In the Z Depth field, enter the distance the Z axis should move down.

5. If you want to program an offset for Part Zero X and Part Zero Y, enter the offset value in the Preset X and Preset Y field.

When the Part Setup fields have been entered, start the Rectangular Solid Cycle:

1. Place the part probe in the spindle and jog the probe to the Start Position, above the middle of the rectangle.



a. The probe moves in the positive X direction, until it reaches its horizontal travel limit determined by the Probing Length X field.




b. The probe moves down until it reaches Z Depth.

• If deflection occurs during the Z move, axis motion stops and an error message appears.



c. The probe moves backwards in the X/Y plane toward the Start Position and deflects.

d. The probe returns up and over to the Start Position. e. The probe moves in the negative X direction until it reaches its horizontal

travel limit determined by the Probing Length X field.f. The probe moves down until it reaches Z Depth.g. The probe moves backwards in the X/Y plane toward the Start Position and

deflects.h. The probe moves up and over to the Start Position. i. The probe moves in the positive Y direction until it reaches its horizontal

travel limit determined by the Probing Length Y field.j. The probe moves down until it reaches Z Depth.k. The probe moves backwards in the X/Y plane toward the Start Position and

deflects.l. The probe moves up and over to the Start Position. m. The probe moves in the negative Y direction until it reaches its horizontal

travel limit determined by the Probing Length Y field.n. The probe moves down until it reaches Z Depth.o. The probe moves backwards in the X/Y plane toward the Start Position and


deflects.p. The probe moves up and over to the Start Position. q. After the last deflection, the control calculates the X and Y lengths of the

solid and the center (X and Y) of the rectangle.

r. The results appear in the Center X, Center Y, Length (X), and Length (Y), fields. The probe moves to the center above the rectangle.


• The ACCEPT POSITION AS PART ZERO (F1) softkey accepts the center and subtracts the presets to determine part zero.

• The DO NOT ACCEPT (F2) softkey ignores the center and length values and the Preset X or Y value. Part Zero remains unchanged.



Plane Intersection (Non-Rectangular Corner)

A Plane Intersection Cycle is used for determining an X and Y intersection for a non-rectangular corner. During a Plane Intersection Cycle, the part probe moves from an offset position to two points in the X direction and two points in the Y direction to determine an X and Y intersection point.

The Plane Intersection cycle can be used with solid or pocket geometry. The figure below shows part probe movement with the two types of geometry:

Figure 10. Plane Intersection Probing Cycle

1. Solid geometry Start

2. Solid Geometry Point 1




6. Pocket Geom. Start

7. Pocket Geom. Point 1





In addition to the standard Part Setup fields which are defined in the Programming Basics chapter of the Getting Started with WinMax manual, these Part Setup fields appear for the Plane Intersection Cycle:

Follow these steps to program a Plane Intersection Cycle:

1. From the Part Zero Probe Cycles softkey menu, select Plane Intersection.

2. In the Probing Direction X field, select Positive or Negative.

3. In the Offset 1 field, enter the position for the first Y Offset, relative to the Start Position.

4. In the Offset 2 field, enter the position for the second Y Offset, relative to the Start Position.

5. In the Probing Direction Y field, select Positive or Negative.

6. In the Offset 1 field, enter the position for the first X Offset, relative to the Start Position.

7. In the Offset 2 field, enter the position for the second X Offset, relative to the Start Position.

8. If you want to program an offset from Part Zero X or Part Zero Y, enter the offset value in the Preset X or Preset Y field.

When the Part Setup fields have been entered, start the Plane Intersection Cycle:

1. Place the part probe in the spindle and jog the probe into the Start Position, near the non-rectangular corner.



a. The probe moves the direction specified in Probing Direction X the distance specified in Offset 1.




b. The probe reaches the first contact point with the first edge in the X direction, deflects, and moves to the position specified in Offset 2.

c. The probe reaches the second contact point in the X direction and deflects.

Corner X Preset X

Corner Y Preset Y

Offset

Probing Direction X

Probing Direction Y


d. The probe returns to the starting point.e. The probe moves the direction specified in Probing Direction Y the distance

specified in Offset 1.f. The probe reaches the first contact point with the first edge in the Y

direction, deflects, and moves to the position specified in Offset 2. g. The probe reaches the second contact point in the Y direction and deflects.h. The probe returns to the Start Position.

i. Using the four contact points, the control calculates the X and Y intersection points. The results appear in the Corner X and Corner Y fields.

4. The ACCEPT POSITION AS PART ZERO (and DO NOT ACCEPT softkeys appear. Press the appropriate softkey.

• The ACCEPT POSITION AS PART ZERO (F1) softkey accepts the corner position and subtracts the Preset X or Y value to determine Part Zero.

• The DO NOT ACCEPT (F2) softkey ignores the corner values and the Preset X or Y value. Part Zero remains unchanged.



Part Zero Storage

At the end of each Probing Cycle, the results of the cycle are displayed on the screen. These results are displayed in machine coordinates and do not include the Preset values.

Selecting the ACCEPT POSITION AS PART ZERO softkey accepts the probed values and subtracts the presets to determine part zero. The new Part Zero values appear in the Part Zero X and Part Zero Y fields.

With an Edge probing cycle the probe moves only one axis. Therefore, only one of Part Zero X, Part Zero Y, or Probe Z is set. With all other cycles, both Part Zero X and Part Zero Y are determined at the same time.

Cycle Results

Edge Contact Position (X, Y, or Z)

Hole or Circle Pocket Diameter, Center (X and Y)

Cylinder Diameter, Center (X and Y)

Rectangular Pocket Lengths (X and Y), Center (X and Y)

Rectangular Solid Lengths (X and Y), Center (X and Y)

Plane Intersect Corner (X and Y)


Part Skew Probing Cycles

The following table describes the process of the Skew Probing Cycles:

Skew Cycle Type

Cycle Parameter Input

Automatic Execution

Display of the results

Optional storage

Edge Axis X, Y, or ZProbe Direction: Positive or Negative Preset X orPreset Y

Cycle Start Approach edge.Retract.Return to Start Position.

Deflection Position X, Y, or ZSkew Angle (deg)

Skew Angle

Hole orCircle Pocket

Start Angle 1, 2, 3

Preset XPreset Y

Cycle Start Approach 3 Circle Points from inside.Position Probe into Center.

Center XCenter YDiameterSkew Angle (deg)

Skew Angle

Cylinder Probing RadiusZ Depth Start Angle 1, 2, 3Preset XPreset Y

Cycle Start Approach 3 Cylinder Points from outside.Position Probe above cylinder Center.

Center XCenter YDiameterSkew Angle (deg)

Skew Angle

Rectangular Pocket

Preset XPreset Y

Cycle Start Approach the 4 pocket walls from inside.Position Probe into pocket Center.

Center XCenter YLength XLength YSkew Angle (deg)

Skew Angle

Rectangular Solid

Probing Length XProbing Length YZ Depth Preset XPreset Y

Cycle Start Approach the 4 Rectangle walls from outside.Position Probe above rectangle Center.

Center XCenter YLength XLength YSkew Angle (deg)

Skew Angle

Two Point Edge

Axis X or YProbe Direction: Positive or Negative Offset

Cycle StartApproach two points on the edge.Return to Start Position.

Skew Angle (deg) Skew Angle


Manual Mode Part Skew Probing Cycles

From the Part Setup screen, use the PROBING softkey to access the Probing Cycles. During a Part Skew Probing cycle the probe moves to specified points on the part, deflects, and stops in the center of the part feature. These cycles detect and compensate for X/Y skew in the workpiece. X/Y skew represents, in degrees, how far the part is from perfect alignment with the table.

• A positive skew angle means the part is rotated in a counterclockwise direction from the machine axes (as viewed from above the part).

• A negative skew angle indicates a clockwise rotation from the machine axes.

Although this angle, if known, may be manually typed in using the keypad, it is easier and more accurate to let the probe find the skew angle and automatically enter it.

After probing the Part Zero position as a reference, the skew cycles allow you to probe a second feature on the part and adjust all machining operations by the skew angle to exactly match the part.

When the cycle is finished, the software displays values representing the desired features. The fields for each cycle vary and are defined with each cycle description.

You can accept these values by pressing the Accept X/Y Skew Angle softkey when it appears. Preset X or Preset Y offsets are used in the skew calculation. The presets are subtracted from the probed Part Zero values, and the new Part Zero values appear after pressing the ACCEPT POSITION AS PART ZERO softkey.

The figure below illustrates a skewed workpiece with a Preset Y offset.

For best results, it is recommended that you use the probe for determining Part Zero X, Part Zero Y, and X/Y Skew. Entering values for any of these fields with the keypad reduces the amount of information available for skew calculations. Also, the software must make assumptions that may reduce accuracy.

1. Part Zero (Corner, first reference)

2. Hole Centerpoint (used as a second reference for skew compensation)

3. Preset Y


Figure 11. Example of a Skewed Workpiece

Follow these steps to perform a Skew Probe Cycle for workpiece skew compensation:

1. Perform the Part Zero Probe Cycle. Refer to the appropriate Part Probe Cycle in this chapter (i.e., Edge, Cylinder, etc.) or more information.

2. From the Part Setup screen, select the PROBING softkey followed by the PART SKEW PROBE CYCLES softkey to access the Part Skew Probe Cycles.

3. The Skew Probe Cycle Type softkeys appear. Select the appropriate softkey for the desired cycle.

Depending on the Skew Probing Cycle selected, different probing fields appear on the Part Setup screen.

Edge Skew

Follow these steps to program an Edge Skew Probing Cycle:

1. From the Part Setup Skew Probe Cycle softkey menu, select Edge.

2. In the Probing Axis field, select the axis to move toward the edge of the part: X Axis, Y Axis, or Z Axis.

3. In the Probing Direction field, select the direction to probe: Positive or Negative. Z Axis always probes in the Negative direction.

4. Program an offset in the Preset X or Preset Y field, if desired.

When the Part Setup fields have been entered, start the Edge Skew Probing Cycle:




The tool motion for an Edge Skew Cycle is the same as the motion described for an Edge Cycle. The results appear in the Edge (X,Y, or Z) and Skew Angle (Deg) fields. The probe returns to the Start Position.

4. The ACCEPT X/Y SKEW ANGLE (F1) and DO NOT ACCEPT (F2) softkeys appear.

• The ACCEPT X/Y SKEW ANGLE (F1) softkey accepts the skew position and

Enter offsets for Preset X and Preset Y for a precise Skew Angle. If only one Preset value is entered, the skew angle will be approximate and should not exceed 3 degrees.

Skew Compensation is intended to be used for correcting a slight misalignment. If the skew angle contains only one Preset value and is greater than approximately 3 degrees, then Part Skew probing may not be exact, especially for Edge and Rectangular cycles.

The following sections describe how to program each of the Part Skew Probing Cycles.


subtracts the Preset X or Y value to determine Part Zero.

• •The DO NOT ACCEPT (F2) softkey ignores the edge position value and the Preset X or Y value. Part Zero remains unchanged.


5. The initial Part Setup screen appears with the skew value established during the cycle stored in the X/Y Skew (deg) field, if accepted.

Hole or Circle Pocket Skew

Follow these steps to program a Hole or Circle Pocket Skew Probing Cycle:

1. From the Part Setup Skew Probe Cycle softkey menu, select the HOLE OR CIRCLE POCKET (F2) softkey.

2. In the Start Angle 1, Start Angle 2, and Start Angle 3 fields, enter the desired approach angles.

3. Program an offset in the Preset X and/or Preset Y field(s), if desired.

When the Part Setup fields have been entered, start the Hole or Circle Skew Probing Cycle:

1. Place the part probe in the spindle and jog the probe to the Start Position, inside the pocket near the center.



The tool motion for a Hole or Circle Pocket Skew Probing Cycle is the same as the motion described for a Hole or Circle Pocket Cycle. The results appear in the Center X, Center Y, Diameter, and Skew Angle (deg) fields. The probe stops in the center of the pocket.


• The ACCEPT X/Y SKEW ANGLE (F1) softkey accepts the skew position and subtracts the Preset X or Y value to determine Part Zero.

• The DO NOT ACCEPT (F2) softkey ignores the edge position value and the Preset X or Y value. Part Zero remains unchanged.




Cylinder Skew

Follow these steps to program a Cylinder Skew Probing Cycle:

1. From the Part Setup Skew Probe Cycle softkey menu, select Cylinder.

2. In the Probing Radius field, enter the probe search radius.


4. In the Z Depth field, enter the distance the Z axis moves down before changing direction and searching horizontally for each contact point.

5. Program an offset in the Preset X and/or Preset Y field(s), if desired.

When the Part Setup fields have been entered, start the Cylinder Skew Probing Cycle:

1. Place the part probe in the spindle and jog the probe to the Start Position, above the cylinder near the center.



The tool motion for a Cylinder Skew Probing Cycle is the same as the motion described for a Cylinder Cycle. The results appear in the Center X, Center Y, Diameter, and Skew Angle (deg) fields. The probe stops in the center above the cylinder.







Rectangular Pocket Skew

Follow these steps to program a Rectangular Pocket Skew Cycle:

1. From the Part Setup Skew Probe Cycle softkey menu, select Rectangular Pocket Inside.

2. Program an offset for the Preset X and/or Preset Y field, if desired.

When the Part Setup fields have been entered, start the Rectangular Pocket Skew Probing Cycle:

1. Place the part probe in the spindle and jog the probe to the Start Position, inside the rectangular pocket.



The tool motion for a Rectangular Pocket Skew Probing Cycle is the same as the motion described for a Rectangular Pocket Cycle. The results are displayed on the screen in the Center X, Center Y, Length (X), Length (Y) and Skew Angle (deg) fields. The probe stops in the center of the pocket.







Rectangular Solid Skew

Follow these steps to program a Rectangular Solid Skew Cycle:

1. From the Part Setup Skew Probe Cycle softkey menu, select Rectangular Solid Outside.

2. In the Probing Length X field, enter the pocket’s estimated X Length.

3. In the Probing Length Y field, enter the pocket’s estimated Y Length.

4. In the Z Depth field, enter the distance the Z axis moves downward before changing direction and moving to the edges for deflection.

5. Program an offset for the Preset X and/or Preset Y field, if desired.

When the Part Setup fields have been entered, start the Rectangular Solid Skew Probing Cycle:

1. Place the part probe in the spindle and jog the probe to the Start Position, above the rectangle near the center.



The tool motion for a Rectangular Solid Skew Probing Cycle is the same as the motion described for a Rectangular Solid Cycle. The results appear in the Center X, Center Y, Length (X), Length (Y), and Skew Angle (deg) fields. The probe moves to the center above the rectangle.







Two Point Edge Skew

Follow these steps to program a Two Point Edge Skew Probing Cycle:

1. From the Part Setup / Part Probing / Part Skew Probe Cycle screen, select the Two Point Edge softkey.

2. In the Probing Axis field, select the axis to move toward the edge of the part: X Axis, Y Axis.

3. In the Probing Direction field, select the direction to probe: Positive or Negative.

4. Program the value for the second point in the Offset field.

When the fields have been entered, start the Two Point Edge Skew Probing Cycle:


2. Press the START PROBING CYCLE softkey. The Start Cycle button flashes.


a. The probing axis moves in the specified direction until the probe is deflected.

b. Retracts to the start position.c. Moves to the second start point, determined by the Offset value.d. Moves in the specified direction until the probe is deflected. e. Returns to start position.

4. A pop-up box with the probing results appears when probing is complete. Select Yes or No to accept or reject the results.




Automatic Mode

To locate part zero and to determine skew in the XY plane as part of the program instead of manually during Part Setup, the Probe Part Setup conversational data block can be used to automatically perform this function.

Access the Probe Part Setup data block from the Part Programming screen as a Miscellaneous Data Block. Select the Miscellaneous (F5) softkey from the New Block screen and the following screen appears:

Figure 12. New Block Screen with Probe Part Setup Softkey


Probe Part Setup Data Block

<For Part Inspection Data Block, see Part Quality Verification, on page 4 - 67.>

From the New Block (Miscellaneous) screen, press the Probe Part Setup softkey. The Probe Part Setup data block screen appears with fields for programming cycles to determine part zero alone or in addition to determining the skew in the XY plane.

The fields on the left-hand side of the screen and the XYZ Start fields apply to the Part Zero Cycle; the fields on the right-hand side of the screen and the Skew Start fields apply to the Skew Cycle:

Figure 13. Probe Part Setup Data Block

Probe Part Setup Fields

The Probe Part Setup screen contains fields for the Part Zero Cycle and the Skew Cycle. The fields change depending on the selected cycle.

Part Zero and Skew Cycles

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Part Zero and Skew Cycle fields:

Offset Probe Direction X Skew Start Positions Z Start

Offset X Probe Direction Y Start Angle

Offset Y Probing Length X Tool

Part Zero Cycle Probing Length Y X Start

Preset X Probing Radius Y Start

Preset Y Skew Axis Z Depth

Probe Axis Skew Cycle Z Drop Down Depth


Probe Part Setup Data Block Execution

When the program executes this data block, it will automatically probe the part and update Part Zero X, Part Zero Y, Probe Z and X/Y Skew. The data block may be placed anywhere in the part program except within a Pattern.

The Store Results field allows you to specify where you want the probed results to be stored.

• Part Setup—sends the results to Part Setup.

• Work Offset—sends the results to the work offset you specify (G54-G59).

• Aux Offset—sends the results to the Aux Work Offset you specify (1-93).


Part Quality Verification

Part Inspection data blocks are available with the Probing Option for performing part quality verification. This section describes the Part Inspection data blocks.

Part Inspection

A Part Inspection data block is available to monitor real-time data for selected probing cycles. When the data block is executed, the software creates two files: progname.txt and progname.dat, where “progname” is the name of the part program.

The files are stored on the hard drive in the same sub-directory as the part program file and contain time-stamped information about the selected geometry.

The information in the files can be used for reports and part quality verification. Both files contain the same information and are available for you to view.

• progname.txt - contains ASCII text, viewable with any editor.

• progname.dat - contains a comma delimited file that may be imported to a spreadsheet.

Part Inspection Cycles

To access the Part Inspection cycles, follow this softkey sequence from the Input screen:

1. Select PART PROGRAMMING.

2. Select MISCELLANEOUS.

3. Select MORE. This screen appears:

Figure 14. New Block Screen with Part Inspection Softkey


Select the PART INSPECTION (F5) softkey and this screen appears:

Figure 15. Part Inspection Screen

Part Inspection Fields

The fields on the Part Inspection screen change depending on the selected cycle and are defined as follows; refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Part Zero Cycle fields:

Part Inspection Programming

Follow these steps to program a Part Inspection data block:

1. Enter the part probe tool number in the tool field.

2. When the cursor is on the Inspection Cycle field, the softkeys change. Select a cycle type for the Inspection Cycle field.

3. Program the remaining fields as described in the “Part Inspection Fields” section. The data block is stored with the program and executed automatically.

Inspection Cycle Probing Length X Y Start

Offset X Probing Length Y Z Depth

Offset Y Probing Radius Z Start

Probe Axis Start Angle

Probe Direction X Tool

Probe Direction Y X Start


Part Inspection Files

When the Part Inspection data block is executed, the software automatically creates the part inspection files. The position data is presented in part relative coordinates.

• To view the files on your PC, first copy them to a disk in the floppy drive. Follow the steps for saving files to disk in the Programming Basics chapter of the Getting Started with WinMax manual.

Here is a sample Part Inspection Probe.txt file:

****************************************** * PART INSPECTION DATA * ****************************************** Cylinder inspection (block # 3) executed 15:46:58 8/10/2000 Part Count = 4Center Diameter *********************************************************** X 16.7168 inches ( 424.607 mm)1.8878 inches ( 47.951 mm) Y 10.0995 inches ( 256.527 mm)

Single point inspection (block # 3) executed 9:50:31 8/11/2000 Part Count = 5 Point ******************************* X 10.3365 inches ( 262.548 mm) Y 10.3882 inches ( 263.860 mm) Z 14.2154 inches ( 361.070 mm)

Hole/circle inspection (block # 4) executed 9:50:45 8/11/2000 Part Count = 5 Center Diameter *********************************************************** X 9.3299 inches ( 236.978 mm)2.7577 inches ( 70.045 mm) Y 15.4572 inches ( 392.612 mm)

Cylinder inspection (block # 5) executed 9:51:02 8/11/2000 Part Count = 5 Center Diameter *********************************************************** X 16.7171 inches ( 424.613 mm)1.8883 inches ( 47.962 mm) Y 10.0996 inches ( 256.531 mm)

Rectangular pocket inspection (block # 6) executed 9:51:24 8/11/2000 Part Count = 5Center Length ************************************************************** X 14.4527 inches ( 367.099 mm)X 4.7259 inches ( 120.037 mm) Y 14.3001 inches ( 363.223 mm)Y 4.7258 inches ( 120.034 mm)

Rectangular solid inspection (block # 7) executed 9:51:47 8/11/2000 Part Count = 5

It is not possible to view the Part Inspection files on the CNC.


Center Length ************************************************************** X 9.4447 inches ( 239.895 mm)X 3.8176 inches ( 96.967 mm) Y 12.1092 inches ( 307.575 mm)Y 1.2629 inches ( 32.079 mm)

Plane intersect inspection (block # 8) executed 9:52:08 8/11/2000 Part Count = 5 Corner ******************************* X 7.7663 inches ( 197.264 mm) Y 13.2841 inches ( 337.417 mm)

Rotary Programming 704-0116-501 Rotary 5-1

ROTARY


Rotary Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2

Rotary Part Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 5

Universal Transform Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 8

Universal Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14

Rotary A and Rotary A Tilt B Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24

Tilt A Rotary C Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 29

Rotary B Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 34

Tilt B Rotary C Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37

5 - 2 Rotary 704-0116-501 Rotary Programming

Rotary Overview

Rotary-axis and tilt-axis operations and hardware (e.g., rotary table, trunnion table, swivel head) are typically used to cut around a cylindrical part while it is turning. When your machine is equipped with rotary-axis and/or tilt-axis hardware, you can mill more diverse parts than with 3-axis machining. Hurco’s Conversational rotary part programming allows you to easily drill and contour cylindrical, curved, odd-shaped or asymmetrical parts using rotary-axis and/or tilt-axis hardware.

In non-rotary linear milling operations, the machine table and spindle move in the X, Y, and Z axes. In rotary-axis and/or tilt-axis milling operations, the A, B, and/or C axes replace the corresponding linear axes.

Figure 5–1. Axes Movement

The configuration of rotary and/or tilt hardware installed in your machining center will determine which axes are available for rotary-/tilt-axis milling operations.

A rotary axis can move in a 360° rotation in positive or negative directions. See Rotary Axis, on page 5 - 3.

A tilt axis moves less than a 360° rotation. The machine configuration determines the limits of tilt-axis rotation. See Tilt Axis, on page 5 - 3.

• A axis rotates/tilts around the X axis.• B axis rotates/tilts around the Y axis.• C axis rotates/tilts around the Z axis.


Rotary Axis

Rotary-axis operations in a Conversational rotary part program are similar to standard milling operations, except that the rotary milling feature (e.g., rotary circle, rotary frame) is wrapped around a cylinder. Rotary-axis operations can be performed on a 4-axis or 5-axis machine where the part is fixtured to the centerline of the rotary-axis.

Tilt Axis

A pivoting rotary table allows you to tilt the table to a specific angle during machining. Any rotary program or standard milling operation can be executed at the tilt position, but the tilt-axis will remain stationary while the data block is being machined. If you want to machine a part while moving the tilt axis, you must use NC programming. Refer to the WinMax Mill NC Programming manual for more information.

Configuration of Hurco Machining Centers

Hurco machining centers provide a variety of machine configurations. Rotary and/or tilt tables can be installed in Hurco machining centers, either at the factory or on-site. Some Hurco machine models come with rotary hardware as standard equipment. The table below shows configurations available for Hurco machining centers.

Table 5–1. Rotary Configurations Available on Hurco Machines

A rotary-axis table can move in a 360º rotation in both positive and negative directions.

A tilt-axis moves less than a 360º rotation. The machine configuration determines the limits of tilt-axis rotation.

Configuration Machine Type

Universal All axis configurations and machines

Rotary A 4-axis rotary machining

Rotary A, Tilt B 4-axis rotary and 5-axis rotary or tilt machining

Tilt A, Rotary C 4-axis rotary and 5-axis rotary or tilt machining on trunion table machines

Rotary B 4-axis rotary machining on horizontal (HMX) machines

Tilt B, Rotary C 4-axis rotary and 5-axis rotary or tilt machining on SR machines


Setting the Axis Configuration

You must set the axis configuration in the Conversational part program before you program rotary or tilt operations. Follow these steps to set the axis configuration:

1. Press the Auxiliary console button to access the Auxiliary screen.

2. Select the Utilities icon from the Auxiliary screen.


4. Select the Conversational Settings softkey.

5. Select the axis configuration from the Default Conversational Program Type drop-down list or softkeys on the Conversational Settings screen (configurations listed below are not available for all Hurco models):

• Standard—Non-rotary

• Rotary A—Rotary axis

• Rotary A Tilt B—Rotary and/or tilt axis

• Tilt A Rotary C—Rotary and /or tilt axis

• Rotary B—Rotary axis

• Tilt B Rotary C—SR only

• Universal—all configurations (default)

Select the axis configuration for all of the axes on your machine, even if you don’t think they will be used in the program. Rotary- and/or tilt-axis data blocks can be added to an existing program as long as the rotary-axis and/or tilt-axis configuration was selected when the program was first created.

Once an axis configuration is set for a program, it cannot be changed. However, you can use an existing Conversational program to create a new program that contains rotary-axis and/or tilt-axis programming data blocks. Follow these steps to create the new program:

1. Create a new Conversational program with the rotary-axis or tilt-axis configuration for your machine.

2. Select the Import Functions softkey from the Input screen to pull in all data blocks and setups from an existing Conversational part program. Refer to Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

3. Add rotary-axis or tilt-axis operations in the new program.

4. Save the new program under a new name. You now have a rotary-axis and/or tilt-axis version and a standard version of the same Conversational part program.


Rotary Part Programming

Part program type is dependent upon machine configuration:

• Universal—all axis configurations and machines (default)

• Rotary A—4-axis rotary machining

• Rotary A Tilt B—4-axis rotary and 5-axis rotary or tilt machining

• Tilt A Rotary C—4-axis rotary and 5-axis rotary or tilt machining on trunnion table machines

• Rotary B—4-axis rotary machining on horizontal machines

• Tilt B Rotary C—4-axis rotary and 5-axis rotary or tilt machining on SR machines

See Configuration of Hurco Machining Centers, on page 5 - 3 for information about setting the program type.

The following sections contain details about the program blocks for each configuration:

Universal Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14

Rotary A and Rotary A Tilt B Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24

Tilt A Rotary C Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 29

Rotary B Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 34

Tilt B Rotary C Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37

Rotary New Block

Rotary New Block is the same for all configurations. When you select the Rotary softkey a new data block will appear with the following softkeys:

• Rotary Position—moves all axes, including the rotary axis. See Rotary Position Block, on page 5 - 6.

• Rotary Milling—access the Rotary Lines and Arcs, Circle, Frame, True-Type Font, Slot, and Polygon data blocks. See Rotary Milling New Block, on page 5 - 6.

• Rotary Patterns—access the Rotary Pattern Loop, Rotary Pattern Locations, Rectangular, Mirror, and Transform Plane data blocks to repeat a rotary feature on a cylinder. See Rotary Patterns, on page 5 - 7.

• Rotary Parameters—define the parameters of the cylinder. See Rotary Parameters (non-Universal configurations), on page 5 - 7.

• Transform Plane—access the Transform Plane block where angles or vectors information is entered. See Universal Transform Plane, on page 5 - 8.

• Transform Plane End—ends the Transform Plane.

• Transform Plane Groups—accesses the Transform Plane Group blocks: Linear, Rotate, and Locations. SeeTransform Plane Groups, on page 5 - 11.


Rotary Position Block

A Rotary Position data block is used to move the machine’s axes to a specific location at Rapid feedrate. A new Rotary Position data block is required each time the rotary-axis must be repositioned in the part program.

The tool will move to the Retract Plane, Safety Plane, or Home Z position before the table rotates into position each time a Rotary Position data block with rotary-axis positioning is executed in a Conversational part program.

Rotary Position Block fields are dependent upon machine axis configuration. Fields for all configurations except Universal are listed below. See Rotary Position Block - Universal, on page 5 - 14 for Universal Rotary Position block fields.

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of Rotary Position Block fields:

Rotary Milling New Block

Rotary Milling New Block is the same for all configurations. These softkeys appear on the Rotary Milling New Block screen:

• Rotary Lines And Arcs—access the Rotary Mill Contour data block to create lines and arcs on a cylinder.

• Rotary Circle—access the Rotary Mill Circle data block to create a circle on a cylinder.

• Rotary Frame—access the Rotary Mill Frame data block to create a frame on a cylinder.

• Rotary True Type Font (available with Universal Rotary configuration only)—access the Rotary True Type font data block to create text on a cylinder.

• Rotary Slot (available with Universal configuration only)—access the Rotary Slot data block to create a slot on a cylinder.

• Rotary Polygon (available with Universal configuration only)—access the

Tool changes are completed before each rotary data block is executed. The tool change will be automatic or the machine will prompt for manual insertion of the tool specified in the data block.

A Rotary Position data block should be included as the first data block in a Conversational rotary part program to define the initial orientation of the rotary axis.

A Angle Tool Y Position

B Angle Transform Part Zero Y Safety Position

C Angle Use Offset Z Z Move Type

Rotary Safety Move X Position

Stop X Safety Position


Rotary Polygon data block to create a polygon on a cylinder.

• Rotary Stick Lettering (available with Universal configuration only) — access the Rotary Stick Lettering data block to create text on a cylinder.

Rotary Patterns

Rotary patterns allow you to repeat a rotary mill feature (e.g., rotary circle, rotary frame, holes) on the part. These are the softkeys on the Rotary Patterns data block:

• Rotary Loop—repeats a pattern along the X-A plane on a cylindrical part.

• Rotary Locations—repeats a mill feature anywhere on a cylindrical part.

• Rotary Rectangular (available only with Universal configuration)—repeats a rectangle on a cylindrical part.

• Rotary Mirror (available only with Universal configuration)—repeats a pattern as a mirror image.

Rotary Parameters (non-Universal configurations)

The Rotary Parameters data block is used to set the radius of the cylindrical part and to define the Y Off of Centerline parameter.

For Universal configurations, see Rotary Parameters - Universal, on page 5 - 23.

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of Rotary Parameters Block fields:

Cylinder Radius

Rotary Centerline X

Rotary Centerline Y

Y Off Of Centerline


Universal Transform Plane

Hurco’s Universal Transform Plane feature can be used with 4-axis or 5-axis machining centers to machine non-rotary (i.e., 3-axis) milling or drilling features on multiple sides (planes) of a part. The method of orientation (angles or vectors) is established and the machine automatically moves so that the tool is positioned perpendicular to the transformed plane.

Universal Transform Plane has the following benefits:

• Reduces setup time and potential positioning errors because the part doesn’t have to be refixtured each time the plane is transformed.

• Allows a non-rotary milling or drilling feature to be machined on one or more sides of an irregularly-shaped work piece.

Transform Plane Block

A Transform Plane block is used in a Conversational program to repeat a non-rotary feature (for example, mill contour or holes) on multiple sides of a part.

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Universal Transform Plane fields:

Follow these steps to use Universal Transform Plane:

1. Insert a Transform Plane block before the non-rotary milling or drilling block you want to transform.

• Select the Orient Method.

• Enter the origin point coordinates and the angles or vectors.

2. Create the non-rotary milling or drilling block(s) on the X-Y plane (i.e., create the milling or drilling feature as a 3-axis part). Multiple milling or drilling operations may occur within a Transform Plane operation.

3. Insert a Transform Plane End block. The Transform Plane operation ends and part zero is the reference point.

Rotary Pattern Loop and Rotary Pattern Locations data blocks can not be used within a Transform Plane operation.

Non-rotary patterns cannot be in effect (i.e., must be closed with a Pattern End data block) prior to a Transform Plane operation. However, non-rotary patterns can be used within a Transform Plane operation.

Orient Method

Origin Point

Rotation Angles

X Direction

Y Direction


Also see Universal Transform Plane Example, on page 5 - 10.

Transform Plane End Block

The Transform Plane End block ends the Transform Plane operation and part zero is the reference point.

Repeat steps 1-3 for each transform (repeat of the milling/drilling feature on another side/plane of the part).

Stacking or nesting of multiple transform planes is allowed. In this case the Transform Plane End block is not used between transform plane moves, so the tool does not move back to part zero between transform planes. At the end of the stack, there must be a Transform Plane End block for each transform plane contained inside the stack.


Universal Transform Plane Example

The figure below shows a non-rotary mill polygon created on the top of the part and transformed onto two additional sides.

DB Data Block/Fields Value Notes

1 Mill Polygon (Pocket Boundary)

Creates the non-rotary polygon on the XY plane.

2 Transform Plane Re-orients the work plane.

Orient Method Angles

Origin Point X0, Y0, Z-6

Rotation Angles R(X)90, R(Y)0, R(Z)0


Creates the non-rotary polygon on the first transform plane.

4 Transform Plane End Ends the transform plane.

5 Transform Plane Re-orients the work plane.

Orient Method Angles

Origin Point X6, Y0, Z-6

Rotation Angles R(X)90, R(Y)0, R(Z)90


Creates the non-rotary polygon on the 2nd transform plane.

7 Transform Plane End Ends the transform plane.

Initial polygon

Initial Part Zero

1st transform plane 2nd transform plane


Transform Plane Groups

Transform Plane Groups allow you to easily pattern or sequence a Transform Plane feature without the need to program a series of transform planes at each location and with different angles.

Three types of Transform Plane group blocks correspond with the three methods of sequencing transform plane geometry: linear, rotate, and locations:

• Transform Plane Group Linear—repeats a transform plane along a linear pathway with XYZ locations specified.

• Transform Plane Group Rotate—repeats a transform plane around an axis with the angle and distance specified.

• Transform Plane Group Locations—repeats a transform plane at specified locations using Angles or Vectors method.

Follow these steps to use Universal Transform Plane Groups:

1. Insert a Transform Plane Group block and program the fields to specify the sequence moves.

2. Insert a Transform Plane block and program to specify the transform plane moves.

3. Create the non-rotary milling or drilling block(s) on the X-Y plane (i.e., create the milling or drilling feature as a 3-axis part).

4. Insert a Transform Plane End block to end the transform plane moves.

5. Insert a Transform Plane Group End block to end the sequence.

See Universal Transform Plane Groups Example, on page 5 - 13.

Transform Plane Group Linear

Repeat transform planes along a linear pathway. Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Transform Plane Group—Linear block fields:

Transform Plane Group Rotate

Repeat transform planes around an axis. Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Transform Plane Group—Rotate block fields:

Number

X Distance

Y Distance

Z Distance


Transform Plane Group Locations

Repeat transform planes at specified locations using angles or vectors. Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Transform Plane Group—Locations block fields:

Transform Plane Group End

Ends the Transform Plane Group sequence.

Keep in mind that when using Transform Plane Groups the group block and group end block must bookend the transform plane and non-rotary feature blocks, as shown in the example below:

Axis Distance

Number

Rotation Angles

Rotation Axis

Orient Method

Origin Point

Rotation Angles

X Direction

Y Direction


Universal Transform Plane Groups Example

The figure below shows a non-rotary mill polygon created on the top of the part and transformed onto two additional sides, using a Groups method. Note that the geometry is the same as the Transform Plane example provided above, but the Transform Plane Group Locations block specifies the transform planes. In this case the polygon data block is created only once, simplifying program maintenance if it needs to be changed.

Transform Plane (configurations other than Universal)

The Transform Plane feature is available for the non-Universal configurations. It is used with 4-axis or 5-axis machining centers to machine non-rotary milling or drilling features on multiple sides (i.e., planes) of a workpiece. Part zero is reestablished for each transformed plane in a Transform Plane Reference Points data block; the tool automatically moves so that it is always perpendicular to the transformed plane.

DB Data Block/Fields Value Notes

1 Transform Plane Group LocationsOrient Method = Angles

3 Locations:X0, Y0, Z0, R(X)0, R(Y)0, R(Z)0X0, Y0, Z-6, R(X)90, R(Y)0, R(Z)0X6, Y0, Z-6, R(X)90, R(Y)0, R(Z)90

Specifies the locations of the initial polygon and the 1st and 2nd transform planes.


Creates the non-rotary mill polygon on the XY plane.

3 Transform Plane Group End

Ends the transform plane.

Initial Part Zero Initial polygon

2nd transform plane

1st transform plane


Universal Configuration

Universal Configuration is used with all rotary types.

Rotary Position Block - Universal

A Rotary Position data block is used to move the machine’s axes to a specific location at Rapid feedrate. A new Rotary Position data block is required each time the rotary-axis must be repositioned in the part program.

The tool will move to the Retract Plane, Safety Plane, or Home Z position before the table rotates into position each time a Rotary Position data block with rotary-axis positioning is executed in a Conversational part program.

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Universal Rotary Position block fields:

Rotary Lines and Arcs - Universal

Rotary line and arc segments are used to create a rotary mill contour. A rotary mill contour is similar to a standard mill contour, except the rotary contour is wrapped around a cylinder. See Lines and Arcs (Mill Contour), on page 2 - 19 in WinMax Mill Conversational Programming for more information.

Start Segment

The first segment in a Lines and Arcs block is always a Start segment, indicated by the segment zero (0).

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Universal Rotary Lines and Arcs Start segment fields:

A Rotary Position data block should be included as the first data block in a Conversational rotary part program to define the initial orientation of the rotary axis.

Enable X Position

IV Angle Y Position

Retract Type Z Position

Stop

V Angle

Angle Start

Axis Start

Radius Bottom

Radius Start


Line Segment

For Line segments, the Auto-Calc feature automatically calculates certain unknown dimensions after you enter sufficient data. See Line Segment, on page 2 - 20 in WinMax Mill Conversational Programming for more information.

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Universal Rotary Line segment fields:

Arc Segment

For Arc segments, the Auto-Calc feature automatically calculates certain unknown dimensions after you enter sufficient data. See Arc Segment, on page 2 - 21 in WinMax Mill Conversational Programming for more information.

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Universal Rotary Arc segment fields:

Blend Arc Segment


Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Universal Rotary Blend Arc segment fields:

Angle End Radius End

Angle Start Radius Start

Axis End

Axis Start

Angle Center Axis Start Sweep Angle

Angle End Direction

Angle Start Radius

Axis Center Radius End

Axis End Radius Start

Angle Center Axis End

Angle End Axis Start

Angle Start Direction

Axis Center Radius


Rotary Circle - Universal

A rotary mill circle is similar to a standard mill circle, except the rotary mill circle is wrapped around a cylinder.

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Universal Rotary Circle block fields:

Rotary Frame - Universal

A rotary mill frame is similar to a mill frame, except the rotary frame is wrapped around a cylinder. Rotary Frame block supports the creation of frames with or without uniform corners.

The Universal Rotary Frame block contains fields on two tabs: Geometry and Corners. The geometry parameters are entered on the Geometry tab:

Figure 5–2. Universal Rotary Frame Geometry tab

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Universal Rotary Frame block fields:

Angle Center Radius Start

Axis Center Start Angle

Radius

Radius Bottom

See also Mill Circle, on page 2 - 26 in Conversational Programming for additional information.

Angle Length Radius Bottom

Angle Start Radius Start

Axis Length Start Side

Axis Start

Corner Radius


Each corner of a frame can be programmed with a radius or chamfer of a different size, on the Corners tab:

Figure 5–3. Universal Rotary Frame Corners tab

Select Line or Arc for each corner:

• Specify radius for arcs.

• Specify length and angle for lines.

Here is an example of a Rotary Frame:

Figure 5–4. Universal Rotary Frame example

If the corner should have neither, the geometry should be left as an arc with radius of 0.00, which is the default.


Rotary True Type Font - Universal

Rotary True Type Font is available with Universal Rotary configuration only.

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Universal Rotary True-Type Lettering fields:

Angle Reference Mapping Text Height

Angle Ref Location Orientation Text Width

Axis Reference Radius Bottom

Axis Ref Location Radius Start

Font Text

Available Fonts for Mill True-Type Lettering

Arial (default)

Arial Black

Comic Sans MS

Courier New


Georgia

Impact

Lucida Console

Lucida Sans Unicode

Marlett


Palatino Linotype

Sylfaen

Tahoma

Times New Roman

Trebuchet MS

Verdana

Webdings

Wingdings


Rotary Slot - Universal

The Rotary Slot block creates a line or arc shape of any width on a cylinder.

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Universal Rotary Slot fields:

Rotary Polygon - Universal

The Rotary Polygon data block mills a multi-sided contour with equal-length sides on a cylinder.

See Mill Polygon, on page 2 - 86 in Conversational Programming for more information.

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Universal Rotary Polygon fields:

See Mill Slot, on page 2 - 81 of the Conversational Milling chapter for additional information.

Angle Center Axis Start Radius Bottom Width

Angle End Corner Radius Radius Start

Angle Start Direction Shape

Axis Center End Cap Start Cap

Axis End Radius Sweep Angle

See Mill Polygon, on page 2 - 86 in the Conversational Milling chapter for additional information.

Angle Center Radius Bottom

Axis Center Radius Start

Corner Radius Side Length

Number Of Sides Sizing Diameter

Orientation Angle Sizing Method


Rotary Stick Lettering - Universal

The Rotary Stick Lettering block allows text to be wrapped around a cylinder.

Figure 5–5. Rotary Stick Lettering screen

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Universal Rotary Stick Lettering fields:

Rotary Patterns - Universal

Rotary patterns allow you to repeat a rotary mill feature (e.g., rotary circle, rotary frame, holes) on the part. The Rotary Patterns data block is available with multiple rotary configurations; see Rotary Patterns, on page 5 - 7 for an explanation of the softkeys on this screen. The specific pattern data blocks for Universal Rotary are explained below.

Rotary Loop

A rotary loop defines the number and locations a feature is repeated on a cylinder. The initial mill feature is located at part zero and all subsequent copies are at a specific distance along the X-A axis of the cylinder.

Angle Reference Orientation Text Width

Angle Ref Location Radius Bottom

Axis Reference Radius Start

Axis Ref Location Text

Char Spacing Text Height

Rotary Patterns only apply to cylindrical wrapping and therefore only apply to rotary blocks within the pattern.

Use non-rotary patterns to repeat a feature on a plane

Use Transform Plane when you want to repeat a non-rotary feature (e.g., mill contour, holes) on multiple sides of a part. See Universal Transform Plane, on page 5 - 8.


Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Universal Rotary Patterns loop fields:

Rotary Locations

The Rotary Pattern Locations data block is used to create a list of locations of a mill feature repeated on a cylinder. Up to 999 copies can be located anywhere on the part.

Each set of locations listed on the Rotary Patterns Location data block is a specific location on the cylinder, relative to part zero. If you want the mill feature to be cut at part zero, you must define the coordinates of part zero in one of the sets of locations.

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Universal Rotary Pattern Locations fields:

A rotary Pattern End data block is required to end the sequence repeated in the Rotary Pattern Loop data block.

Angle Distance

Axis Distance

Number

Rotary pattern and standard pattern data blocks can be nested (i.e., entirely contained within another pattern). The order of execution for nested rotary pattern and standard pattern data blocks is from the inside to the outside.

In the following example of nested data blocks, this is the order of execution:

1. Holes and rotary Mill Frame operations contained within the Pattern Loop Rotate data block.

2. Standard Mill Circle operation contained within the Rotary Pattern Loop data block.

Rotary Pattern Loop Standard Mill Circle (or any other rotary or non-rotary data blocks) Pattern Loop Rotate Holes operation Rotary Mill Frame (or other rotary or non-rotary data blocks) Pattern End (ends the Pattern Loop Rotate) Pattern End (ends the Rotary Pattern Loop)

Only one Rotary Position data block is required for nested Rotary Pattern Loop data blocks.

Angle

Axis

A rotary Pattern End data block is required to end the sequence in the Rotary Pattern Locations data block.


Rotary Rectangular

Rotary Rectangular Pattern Block is available only with the Universal Rotary configuration.

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Universal Rotary Pattern Rectangular fields:

Rotary Mirror

Rotary Mirror Pattern Block is available only with the Universal Rotary configuration.

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Universal Rotary Pattern Mirror fields:

Pattern End

A Pattern End data block is required to end rotary Pattern Loop and rotary Pattern Locations operations. There are no fields in the Pattern End data block.

If the part program continues beyond the Rotary Pattern operation, another Rotary Position data block will be required if the axes must be reoriented to a different position.

• A Rotary Pattern Loop data block only modifies the rotary operations contained within the pattern.

• The subsequent Rotary Position data block defines the orientation of the machine axes after the pattern is executed, and can provide a reference point if Recovery Restart is used.

After the rotary Pattern End data block has executed, the orientation of the machine axes will remain at the position defined in the most recent Rotary Position data block.


Angle Distance

Angle Number

Axis Distance

Axis Number

Angle

Cylinder Angle

Cylinder Axis

Keep Original



• If the Rotary Pattern End data block is the last data block of the part program, a subsequent Rotary Position data block is not necessary.

• If a non-rotary operation data block (e.g., holes operation) is used in a rotary loop, a Rotary Position data block is required before the non-rotary operation data block to position the axes before the operation is executed in the loop.

Rotary Parameters - Universal

The Rotary Orientation field defines the axis configuration: Rotary A/AB, Rotary B, Rotary AC, Rotary BC, and User Defined. User Defined orientation requires the Axis of Rotation (Cylinder Axis vector) and Zero Angle vector. The Zero Angle vector describes the zero-degree Cylindrical Point vector direction with respect to the current coordinate system. These vectors must be perpendicular otherwise the control will throw an error. Other Rotary Orientation selections (Rotary A/AB, Rotary B, Rotary AC, Rotary BC) are available to automatically configure the Axis of Rotation and Zero Angle vectors to describe rotary features for Hurco's current program type configurations.

Set Cylinder Radius Data to use the Radius Start value from the Rotary block or to a User Defined value. A user defined value may be used when you want to move the feature so the cylinder wrapping is referenced somewhere between radius start and bottom instead of radius start. Off CL Distance allows a +/- value for distance from centerline.


Rotary A and Rotary A Tilt B Configuration

Rotary A configuration can be used only with a full rotary (A axis) table.

Rotary A Tilt B configuration can be used only with a full rotary (A axis) and tilt (B axis) table.

Rotary Position

The Rotary Position data block is available with multiple rotary configurations; see Rotary Position Block, on page 5 - 6 for an explanation of the softkeys on this screen.

Rotary Lines and Arcs

Rotary line and arc segments are used to create a rotary mill contour. A rotary mill contour is similar to a standard mill contour, except the rotary contour is wrapped around a cylinder.

Start Segment

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Rotary A/Rotary A Tilt B Start segment fields:

Line Segment

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Rotary A/Rotary A Tilt B Line segment fields:

A Angle

X Start

Z Bottom

Z Start

A End Z End

A Start Z Start

X End

X Start


Arc Segment

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Rotary A/Rotary A Tilt B Arc segment fields:

Blend Arc Segment

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Rotary A/Rotary A Tilt B Blend Arc segment fields:

Mill Contour End Block

A Contour End data block is required to end rotary Mill Contour operations. There are no fields in the Contour End data block.

Rotary Circle

A rotary mill circle is similar to a standard mill circle, except the rotary mill circle is wrapped around a cylinder.

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Rotary A/Rotary A Tilt B Circle fields:

A Center Radius X Start

A End Sweep Angle Z End

A Start X Center Z Start

Direction X End

A Center Radius

A End X Center

A Start X End

Direction X Start

A Center Z Bottom

Radius Z Start

X Center

Start Angle


Rotary Frame

A rotary mill frame is similar to a mill frame, except the rotary mill frame is wrapped around a cylinder.

Rotary Patterns

The Rotary Patterns data block is available with multiple rotary configurations; see Rotary Patterns, on page 5 - 7 for an explanation of the softkeys on this screen. The specific pattern screens for Rotary A and Rotary A Tilt B are explained below.

Rotary Loop

A rotary loop defines the number and locations a mill feature will be repeated on a cylinder. The initial mill feature is located at part zero and all subsequent copies are at a specific distance along the X-A axis of the cylinder.

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Rotary A/Rotary A Tilt B Pattern Loop fields:

A Distance

B Distance

Number

X Distance


Rotary Locations



Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Rotary A/Rotary A Tilt B Pattern Locations fields:


This is an example of nested data blocks in a program (the indentations are used illustrate the order of execution; your Conversational part program will not have these indentations).

In the following example, this is the order of execution:





A

B

X

Y

Z



Pattern End


Rotary Parameters

The Rotary Parameters data block is available with multiple rotary configurations; see Rotary Parameters (non-Universal configurations), on page 5 - 7 for an explanation of the fields on this screen.

Transform Plane

The Transform Plane data block is available with multiple rotary configurations; see Transform Plane (configurations other than Universal), on page 5 - 13 for an explanation of the fields on this screen.










Tilt A Rotary C Configuration

Tilt A Rotary C configuration can be used only with an integrated trunnion tilt (A axis) and full rotary (C axis) table.

Rotary Position

The Rotary Position data block is available with multiple rotary configurations; see Rotary Position Block, on page 5 - 6 for an explanation of the fields on this screen.



Start Segment

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tilt A Rotary C Start segment fields:

Line Segment

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tilt A Rotary C Line segment fields:

Arc Segment

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tilt A Rotary C Arc segment fields:

C Angle

Radius Bottom

Radius Start

Y Start

C End Y End

C Start Y Start

Radius End

Radius Start

C Center Radius Y Center

C End Radius End Y End

C Start Radius Start Y Start

Direction Sweep Angle


Blend Arc

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tilt A Rotary C Blend Arc segment fields:



Rotary Circle

A rotary mill circle is similar to a standard mill circle, except the rotary mill circle is wrapped around a cylinder. These are the fields on the Rotary Mill Circle data block:

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tilt A Rotary C Circle fields:

Rotary Frame


Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tilt A Rotary C Frame fields:

C Center Radius

C End Y Center

C Start Y End

Direction Y Start

C Center Y Center

Radius

Radius Bottom

Radius Start

C Corner Radius Start

C Length Y Corner

Corner Radius Y Length

Radius Bottom


Rotary Patterns

The Rotary Patterns data block is available with multiple rotary configurations; see Rotary Patterns, on page 5 - 7 for an explanation of the softkeys on this screen. The specific pattern data blocks for Tilt A Rotary C are explained below.

Rotary Loop


Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tilt A Rotary C Pattern Loop fields:

A Distance

C Distance

Number

Z Distance










Rotary Locations



Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tilt A Rotary C Pattern Locations fields:

A

C

X

Y

Z





Pattern End


Rotary Parameters


Transform Plane









Rotary B Configuration

Rotary B configuration can be used only with full rotary table (B axis) on horizontal (HMX) machines.

Rotary Position


Rotary Milling

For rotary milling programs on an HMX machine, Universal Rotary configuration must be used; see Universal Configuration, on page 5 - 14.

Rotary Patterns

The Rotary Patterns data block is available with multiple rotary configurations; see Rotary Patterns, on page 5 - 7 for an explanation of the softkeys on this screen. The specific pattern data blocks for Rotary B configuration are explained below.

Rotary Loop


Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Rotary B Pattern Loop fields:

B Distance

Number

Z Distance



Rotary Locations



Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Rotary B Pattern Locations fields:








B

X

Y

Z



Pattern End


Rotary Parameters


Transform Plane











Tilt B Rotary C Configuration

Tilt B Rotary C configuration can be used only with a swivel head (B axis) spindle and full rotary table (C axis).

Rotary Position




Start Segment

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tilt B Rotary C Start segment fields:

Line Segment

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tilt B Rotary C Line segment fields:

Arc Segment

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tilt B Rotary C Arc segment fields:

C Angle

Radius Bottom

Radius Start

Z Start

C End Z End

C Start Z Start

Radius End

Radius Start

Arc Radius Direction Z Center

C Center Radius End Z End

C End Radius Start Z Start

C Start Sweep Angle


Blend Arc Segment

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tilt B Rotary C Blend Arc segment fields:



Rotary Circle

A rotary mill circle is similar to a standard mill circle, except the rotary mill circle is wrapped around a cylinder. These are the fields on the Rotary Mill Circle data block:

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tilt B Rotary C Circle fields:

Rotary Frame


Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tilt B Rotary C Frame fields:

Rotary Patterns

The Rotary Patterns data block is available with multiple rotary configurations; see Rotary Patterns, on page 5 - 7 for an explanation of the softkeys on this screen. The specific

Arc Radius Z Center

C Center Z End

C End Z Start

C Start

Direction

C Center Z Center

Radius

Radius Bottom

Radius Start

C Corner Radius Start

C Length Z Corner

Corner Radius Z Length

Radius Bottom


pattern data blocks for Tilt B Rotary C configuration are explained below.

Rotary Loop


Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tilt B Rotary C Pattern Loop fields:

C Distance

Number

Z Distance










Rotary Locations



Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tilt B Rotary C Pattern Locations fields:

A

B

X

Y

Z





Pattern End


Rotary Parameters

The Rotary Parameters data block is available with multiple rotary configurations; see Rotary Parameters (non-Universal configurations), on page 5 - 7 for an explanation of the field on this screen.

Transform Plane








Extended Shop Floor 704-0116-501 UltiMonitor 6-1

ULTIMONITOR

The UltiMonitor option adds capability and flexibility to your WinMax Mill operation by providing connection to your Local Area Network (LAN). Using UltiMonitor, you can communicate with other CNCs, and with PCs or file servers connected to your LAN using standard TCP/IP and FTP protocols. UltiMonitor also includes Extended Shop Floor (ESF) for remote machine monitoring and communication.

This section covers the use of the UltiMonitor product. For information about basic system operation, refer to the Getting Started with WinMax Mill manual.

LAN Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2

Configuring a Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4

Using FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 8

Extended Shop Floor (ESF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 12

Customers using UltiNet should refer to this section for product guidance. The UltiNet option provides the same FTP connectivity as UltiMonitor but does not include ESF.

6 - 2 UltiMonitor 704-0116-501 Extended Shop Floor

LAN Requirements

To use UltiMonitor, you must have a Local Area Network (LAN or “network”) that supports the IEEE 802.3 Ethernet hardware standards. Contact your IT provider for guidance about proper LAN design and setup.

Limitations for UltiMonitor

1. Do NOT connect machines to a domain. When connecting a machine to a network, a workgroup must be used. WinMax software runs on an embedded Windows operating system, and any changes to the system could cause unwanted effects.

2. Installing any physical cards, including wireless devices, is NOT supported. WinMax is designed and configured to operate with the existing system hardware.

3. Use of an Ethernet cable connection to a machine is required.

Glossary of Networking Terms

Following are definitions for networking terms used throughout this section.

• Client/Server—This is a term commonly used to describe how computers do work for each other. One computer runs server software; the other computer runs client software. The server software waits for requests from the client in order to perform tasks. Many times the server is a background task that runs all the time. A client is a user application on a PC or some other workstation and usually will not run all the time. A user may begin running client software, do some work, then shut down the client when finished. It is important to note that a single server may handle many clients. It is also possible for a computer to function as both a client and a server simultaneously.

• Ethernet—Ethernet is a particular networking technology specification. Ethernet uses CSMA/CD to gain access to the network media (cable). CSMA/CD stands for Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection. Ethernet sends its data on a carrier wave. Since there are multiple Ethernet adapters attached to the same cable, they must take turns sending data. When ready to transmit, an adapter checks for the presence of a carrier wave. If no carrier is detected, the adapter begins transmission. If another adapter begins transmitting data at the same time, a collision will occur. The Ethernet hardware senses when a collision occurs. The two adapters involved in the collision will stop, delay for a random length of time, and then try to retransmit the data. This process repeats until the data is successfully sent. Data is sent in the form of packets, which have a limited size, allowing other hosts an opportunity to use the network media.

• FTP—This is an acronym for File Transfer Protocol. FTP is implemented using the client/server model and uses TCP/IP as its protocols. FTP software contains a standard set of commands that are used to transfer files and manage directory structures.

• Host—Any computer connected to a network can be a host, including a PC running DOS, Windows XP/Vista/7, Windows NT; a UNIX workstation; a


mainframe computer; a CNC control; or any machine with networking capability.

• IP Address—An IP (Internet Protocol) address is used to identify a particular host on a network. Each host on a network must have a unique IP address consisting of a 32-bit number usually presented in dotted decimal format; for example, 200.100.150.1. This format divides the address into four single byte values separated by decimal points. On most networks, the first three bytes represent the network and the last byte is the host. Following this practice, the first three bytes are the same for all hosts and the last byte is different for each host. On the Internet, these cryptic addresses usually are not used⎯most addresses are represented as plain text, which are converted to IP addresses by DNS, or Domain Name Server. The underlying protocol still uses the unique 32-bit IP addresses.

• TCP/IP—This is an acronym for the two major protocols of the Internet, Transmission Control Protocol and Internet Protocol. IP data normally reaches its intended destination, but there is no failure notification for the sender if it does not. TCP, however, has an acknowledgment that the message was received. The TCP layer of a protocol stack uses IP to send a message in the form of packets, or bundles of data. Each packet must be acknowledged or it will be sent again. This process repeats until the entire message, which contains multiple packets, is received. TCP is defined as a reliable stream-oriented protocol. The use of TCP/IP is not limited to the Internet. It is commonly used for communication between hosts on LANs (local area networks). It may be used for any application that requires reliable data transfer.


Configuring a Network

UltiMonitor allows machines to be connected on a Local Area Network (LAN or “network”).

Configuring an IP address for your machine

An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a numerical label assigned to each device in a computer network. IP addresses are assigned to a host either at the time of booting, or permanently by fixed configuration of the hardware or software. Persistent configuration is also known as using a static IP address. In contrast, a dynamic IP address occurs when a device’s IP address is assigned with each reboot. All Hurco machines, by default, are configured to use dynamic IP addresses. This is shown in the figure below.

The configuration can be changed to a static IP address, if desired. IP addresses must always be unique to your network; contact your network administrator for the proper IP address values.

To access the LAN and Internet Protocol properties:

1. Select the Windows key (or the Ctrl+Esc keys) on the keyboard to access system settings through the Shell.

2. Expand the left pane of the Shell.

3. Select Control Panel.

4. Select Network Connections.

5. Enter password.

6. Highlight Local Area Connection.

7. Select File/Properties. (See Figure 12-1 a.)

8. Highlight Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).

9. Select Properties. The IP address configuration can be changed in the TCP/IP Properties box that opens. (See Figure 12-1 b.)


Figure 6–1. Default LAN and Internet Protocol Properties

a. b.


Configuring the Computer and Workgroup Names

A computer name is an easy way to locate a networked device when connected to a local network, as an alternative to an IP address. Like IP Addresses, it is very important that these names are unique. All Hurco machines are, by default, configured with unique computer names. Although the default name is unique, it is not descriptive or easy to remember, so many users may wish to change this value. The computer name is changed in System Properties. To access:


2. Expand the left pane of Shell.

3. Select Control Panel.

4. Select System.

5. Enter password.

6. Select Computer Name tab. (See Figure 12-2 a.)

7. Select Change.

8. Enter new name in the Computer name field. Select OK. (See Figure 12-2 b.)

Figure 6–2. Computer Name Changes in System Properties

While in this screen, the name of the workgroup or domain to which this machine is a member may also be changed. Hurco DOES NOT support connections to network domains. A workgroup can be used as a logical grouping of networked devices for a particular purpose. It is easiest to place all devices under a particular workgroup but is not required or necessary. By default, all Hurco controls are configured to be on the workgroup named WORKGROUP.

a. b.


Mapping a Network Drive

A server share is basically a folder on a different computer that is being shared with everyone else. So when you “map a drive,” you are saying that you want access to that folder on your computer also, which is done by mapping it to a letter, for example, F, G, H, etc. To access the Map Network Drive dialog:


2. Expand right pane of Shell.

3. Select Map Drive.

4. Enter password. The Map Network Drive dialog box opens:

Figure 6–3. Map Network Drive dialog

To map a network drive:

1. Select an unused Drive letter to represent the shared folder and type in the UNC path in the Folder field. UNC path is a special format for pointing to a folder on another computer. The format is \\computer name\folder name.

If you're not sure what the name of the folder is, you can select Browse... to find the computer that way. Select Entire Network, then Microsoft Windows Network and expand the workgroup that your computer is in.

2. Click Reconnect at logon to make the connection permanent, which means the drive will still be mapped even after you restart the computer.

If the drive is password protected, use the “Connect using a different user name” link in the mapping window to configure the mapping with the user name and password.


Using FTP

FTP (File Transfer Protocol) is a method of transferring files from one computer to another, using the Internet. For Hurco machining and turning centers, FTP is required for transferring programs between two or more machines. FTP can also be used to transfer programs between a computer and a machine.

FTP Server Settings

To access the FTP Server Settings screen:

1. Press the Auxiliary console key.

2. Select the Utilities softkey to access the Utilities screen and softkey menu.



5. Select the FTP Server Settings softkey. The screen is displayed:

Figure 6–4. FTP Server Settings screen

FTP Server Settings Fields

These fields are available on the FTP Server Settings screen:

• Enable FTP Server—select Yes to enable or No to disable the FTP server.

• FTP Server Port—enter a number for the FTP server port. The default is 21.

• Maximum Idle Time (mins)—enter the number of idle time minutes before the server disconnects. The default is 0 with no time out.

• User 1-4 Name—enter each user’s logon name. Up to 4 users can logon.

• User 1-4 Password—enter each user’s logon password. Up to 4 users can logon.


• User 1-4 Path—enter each user’s root path. Up to 4 users can logon.

FTP Server Settings Softkeys

These softkeys are available on the FTP Server Settings screen:

• Display WinMax IP Address—displays the IP address list in a pop-up window. Select OK to close the window.

An IP (Internet Protocol) address is used to identify a particular host on a network. Each host on a network must have a unique IP address consisting of a 32-bit number usually presented in dotted decimal format; for example, 200.10.150.1. This format divides the address into four single byte values separated by decimal points.

On most networks, the first three bytes represent the network and the last byte is the host. Following this practice, the first three bytes are the same for all hosts and the last byte is different for each host.

On the Internet, these cryptic addresses usually are not used—most addresses are represented as plain text, which are converted to IP addresses by DNS, or Domain Name Server. The underlying protocol still uses the unique 32-bit IP addresses.

• Change FTP Root Drive—displays a pop-up window to browse for a folder. Select the appropriate root drive and select OK to close the window. Select Cancel to stop browsing without changing the root drive.

• Disconnect All Users—select Yes in the pop-up window to disconnect all current FTP users; select No to cancel the disconnect operation.

If the logon name is “anonymous,” the password is not required.


FTP Manager

To manage FTP connections:

1. Press the Input console key.

2. Select the Program Manager softkey.

3. Select the FTP Manager softkey to open the FTP Host List screen. From here, you can connect to or disconnect from, add, edit, and delete FTP servers which are identified on this list:

Figure 6–5. FTP Host List screen

To access the FTP Host Properties screen to add a host to the FTP Host List screen:

1. Select the Add Host softkey. The FTP Host Properties screen appears.

Figure 6–6. FTP Host Properties screen

2. Enter an Alias name to appear on the FTP Host List screen for this host.


3. Enter an IP Address for connecting to the host.

4. Specify Yes or No for Automatic Login:

• If set to No, the user is required to enter the username and password at the time of connection.

• If set to Yes, the User Name and Password fields appear. The username and password are stored for automatic connection when the host is selected.

5. Enter the Default Remote Directory to be opened, or leave this field blank for the FTP server’s root directory.

6. Select either 8.3 DOS or LONG for the Filename Format field.

• 8.3—file names with eight characters before the period (.) and three characters for an extension after the period are allowed.

• Long—the complete path to the file, including the drive letter, server name, folder path, and file name and extension can contain up to 255 characters – however, it will be truncated to the 8.3 format. For example, LongFilename.txt will be truncated to LongFil_.txt

7. Select the Apply softkey to add this host to the FTP Host List screen.

From the FTP Host List screen,

• Select the Connect softkey to connect to a host.

• Select Disconnect to disconnect from a host.

• Select Delete Host to remove a host from the list.

• Select the Exit softkey to return to the Project Manager screen.

Select the File Manager softkey to access a list of system directories and filenames connected with UltiMonitor.

After editing, files may be saved directly to the remote location:

1. Select the Save or Save As softkey in Program Manager.

2. Select the FTP Manager softkey. The screen will switch to the remote File Manager, if connected, or to the login screen if not connected.

3. When connected, select the appropriate remote directory and save the file.


Extended Shop Floor (ESF)

Hurco’s Extended Shop Floor provides a web-based access point for a machine shop owner to communicate and view machine data using a web browser. Additionally, ESF is a distribution point for information about Hurco’s machine tools and it supports the remote monitoring and diagnosis of the machine. By default, an ESF connection is made to Hurco servers when an internet connection is present.

Here are the ESF connection states:

For more information refer to the ESF User’s Guide found at the ESF website, https://esf.hurco.com; a user account with password is required to access ESF.

ESF State Description

The ESF Machine Service is not running. Clicking this icon will turn the ESF Machine Service on.

Please wait while the ESF Machine Service is starting and attempting to establish a connection with the ESF Server.

The ESF Machine Service is running and communicating with the ESF Server. Clicking this icon will turn the ESF Machine Service off.

The ESF Machine Service is running but is unable to communicate with the ESF Server. There may be a problem with the network connection. Clicking this icon will turn the ESF Machine Service off.

WinMax Mill Programming 704-0116-501 Field Name Glossary 7-1

FIELD NAME GLOSSARY

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P R S T U V W X Y Z

A

A—the A end position of the move (fields are inactive for a non-rotary machine).

—in a Rotary Position block, the rotary-axis coordinate (angle) where the mill feature will be located on the part.

A Angle—the rotary-axis coordinate (angle) relative to Part Zero A.

A Center—the rotary-axis coordinate (angle) of the center point.

A Centerline X / Y / Z—the offset from true part zero. Field is available when Disable Centerlines is No in Part Setup. Program the value in order to draw the program properly on the Graphics screen.

A Corner—the rotary-axis coordinate (angle) of the reference corner of the frame.

A Distance—the distance (angle) on the rotary-axis between each repetition of the mill feature.

A End—the rotary-axis coordinate (angle) for the ending point of the line.

A Length—the rotary-axis coordinate (angle) from the reference corner.

• A Length is positive if the location of the frame is clockwise from the reference corner.

• A Length is negative if the location of the frame is counter clockwise from the reference corner.

A Offset—the offset for the A axis, to be added to the A dimension in the data block.

A Start—the rotary-axis start point coordinate, calculated with data from the previous segment. The value of A Start can be changed only in the segment in which it was created.

Air Pressure—indicates Pressure OK or Low Pressure. Pressure OK is required to begin an ATC operation.

Allow Plunge Outside Pocket—if Yes, UltiPocket will plunge outside the pocket, moving through the open side of the pocket boundary. May be used with open contours only; cannot be applied to frames, circles, or ellipses because they cannot be programmed with open contours.

7 - 2 Field Name Glossary 704-0116-501 WinMax Mill Programming

The Operator Specify Pocket Start parameter must also be set to Yes.

The contour Pocket Type must be set to Inward.

Allow Vacant Variables—allows variable values to be left blank when Yes.

Alt Dwell Lt Side—controls washdown coolant flow on the left side of the machine enclosure on certain machines. Used in conjunction with other washdown coolant parameters. See Machine Parameters Page 1, on page 1 - 62 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Alt Washdown Dwell—controls washdown coolant flow on the right side of the machine enclosure on certain machines. Used in conjunction with other washdown coolant parameters. See Machine Parameters Page 1, on page 1 - 62 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Alt Washdown Off Time—the time the washdown coolant flow cycle is paused, on certain machines. See Machine Parameters Page 1, on page 1 - 62 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Angle—in Pattern Loop Linear, the angle (in degrees) between the defined line and the X positive axis. A positive value is counterclockwise (CCW) from the 3 o'clock position, and a negative value is clockwise (CW) from the 3 o'clock position.

—in Pattern Mirror Image, the orientation in degrees of the mirror line (which passes through the X-Y dimensions); measured from the 3 o'clock position. A positive value is CCW.

—in Rotary Pattern Locations, the angle coordinate where the mill feature will be located on the part.

—in Rotary Patterns Mirror, the orientation of the mirror line which passes through the point defined above (measured in XY from 3 o’clock).

Angle Center—rotary-axis coordinate (angle) of the center point.

Angle Distance—the distance (angle) on the rotary-axis between each repetition of the

The plunge point should be placed near the open side of the contour outside the pocket. The tool moves through this opening near the approximate center. The software verifies the tool will fit through the opening and generates an error message if it will not.

Plunge point

Toolpath

Open Contour


mill feature.

—in Rotary Rectangular, the distance between the patterns along the rotary axis.

Angle End—axis coordinate for the ending point of the line or arc.

Angle Length—rotary-axis coordinate (angle) from the reference corner.

• Angle Length is positive if the location of the frame is clockwise from the reference corner.

• Angle Length is negative if the location of the frame is counter clockwise from the reference corner.

Angle Number—the number of times the programmed routine will be repeated along the rotary axis.

Angle Reference—the reference coordinate of the point where text begins/ends, relative to the Angle Ref Location.

Angle Ref Location—the location of the reference point in the text: Bottom of text, Top of text, Center of text.

Angle Start—rotary-axis coordinate (angle) for the segment starting point.

The value of Angle Start can be changed only in the segment in which it was created.

APC Clamp Status—indicates if the APC table is clamped or unclamped.

APC Door Status—indicates if the APC door is Open and Unlocked, Closed and Unlocked, or Closed and Locked.

APC Position—indicates whether APC table is in the Up or Down position.

Application Font Size—size of text displayed by the application in lists (for example, in Program Manager); default is Large. This field is inactive in WinMax Mill (active in WinMax desktop).

Apply Border To Top—applies the automatically-calculated border to the top of the stock, in Stock Geometry. The border is automatically applied to the bottom. Field is available when Manual Stock Sizing is set to NO.

Approach Feed—the feed rate to use for the initial touch of the part. No measurement is taken at this feed rate, it is simply used to locate the part feature to be probed.

Arc Radius—the radius of the arc, if known.

Argument Type—the type of Argument, String or List, and variables in a NC Program Call block.

Assume Feedrate .1 Increment—assumes a feedrate increment of .1 when Yes is selected.

Assure Minimum Length—specifies Yes or No. When Yes is selected, the Minimum Length and Leading Symbol fields appear so that a placeholder can be used to achieve consistent serial number length. Default is Yes.


ATC Axis Positions—indicates At X, At Y, and At Z positions. All three are required for ATC to begin.

ATC Disable—disables all automatic tool changer functions. See Machine Parameters Page 2, on page 1 - 65 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

ATC Door—indicates Closed or Open position. Closed is required for ATC Status Home.

ATC OK to Stop—indicates if the ATC is at a position where it can stop.

ATC Position—indicates Z At Height and X/Y At Position (VTXU only).

ATC Status—indicates if ATC is in Home position. Home is required for ATC or APC cycle to begin. Home is defined as ATC Door closed, Exchange Arm at 0°, Tool Holder at 0°, and Magazine In Pos (1).

ATC Z-Axis Move to Zero Position—in HMX only, moves the Z-axis to zero position at the end of a tool change. See Machine Parameters Page 2, on page 1 - 65 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

ATC Z Axis Position—indicates Z is at Machine Tool Change Height.

Auto Balance Enable—adjusts the balance between the motion card and the servo drives at the start of calibration and run program. See Machine Parameters Page 2, on page 1 - 65 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Automatically Load Unmatched Tools As Manual—automatically loads unmatched tools from newly-loaded conversational part programs:

• YES—new tools from the newly loaded program (that are not in the Tool & Material Library) are automatically added to Manual.

• NO—requires new tools to be matched (see “Part Program Tool Review” section for more information about matching tools.)

Automatic Centerline Calculation—specify Yes or No to enable automatic centerline calculation.

Automatic Safe Repositioning Retract Override—available only with Universal program types. When set to OFF the tool automatically retracts, reorients, and plunges, using a series of moves computed automatically that do not violate machine limits. Set to ON to override the automatic repositioning and enter a retract distance along the tool vector from the target position.

See Automatic Safe Repositioning Command Buffer On (G08.1), on page 3 - 54 in NC Programming for more information about Automatic Safe Repositioning.

Automatic Tool Monitoring—in the Program Parameters Probing tab, select the method of checking tools calibrated with the probe:

• Incoming Tool—tool is checked after it is inserted into spindle

• Outgoing Tool—tool is checked before it is removed from the spindle

• Both—checked before and after cut

Specify tolerances in the Length Tolerance and Diameter Tolerance. For more information


about tool monitoring, see Tool Quality Monitoring, on page 4 - 14 in Probing.

Aux Output 1-12 Confirmation Enable—enables a confirmation signal for completion of each Auxiliary M-code Output. See Machine Parameters Pages 5 and 6, on page 1 - 78 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Axis—axis coordinate where the mill feature will be located on the part.

Axes Status—the calibration status of machine axes.

Axis Center—Z-axis coordinate of the center point.

Axis Distance—the distance between each transform plane in the sequence, along the rotation axis.

—in Rotary Patterns, the distance on the X-axis between each repetition of the mill feature. The right-hand rule determines if Distance is positive or negative.

—in Rotary Rectangular, the distance between the patterns parallel to the rotary axis.

Axis End—axis coordinate for the end point. The Axis End value is the depth of the cut at the end point and is carried forward from the previous segment. Retain the Axis End value or type in a new value.

Axis Feedrate Override Max (%)—Parameter not accessible by the user. Contact a Hurco Certified Service representative for assistance.

Axis Feedrate Override Min (%)—sets the Axis Feedrate Override Minimum value. See Machine Parameters Page 4, on page 1 - 76 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Axis Length—the axis coordinate measured from the reference corner.

• Axis Length is positive if the reference corner is at the left side of the rectangle.

• Axis Length is negative if the reference corner is at the right side of the rectangle.

Axis Limit Switches—the status of the machine’s limit switches as each axis calibrates.

Axis Number—the number of times the programmed routine will be repeated along a line parallel to the rotary axis.

Axis Reference—the reference coordinate of the point where text begins/ends, relative to the Axis Ref Location.

Axis Ref Location—the location of the reference point in the text: Start of text, End of text, Center of text.

Axis Start—axis coordinate for the segment starting point. Field is read-only in other segments and can be changed only in the segment in which is was created.

—in Rotary Frame, the axis coordinate of any one of the four corners of the frame. This corner becomes the reference corner.


B

B—the B end position of the move (fields are inactive for a non-rotary machine).

—in Rotary Position block, Rotary A Tilt B and Tilt B Rotary C configurations, the tilt-axis coordinate (angle) where the mill feature will be located on the part.

—In Rotary Position block, Rotary B configuration, the rotary-axis coordinate (angle) where the mill feature will be located on the part.

B—rotary-axis coordinate (angle) where the mill feature will be located on the part.

B Angle—the rotary-axis coordinate (angle) relative to Part Zero B.

B-Axis Status—indicates if the B-axis is Clamped or Unclamped.

B Centerline X / Y / Z—the offset from true part zero. Field is available when Disable Centerlines is No in Part Setup. Program the value in order to draw the program properly on the Graphics screen.

B Distance—in Rotary A Tilt B configuration, the distance (angle) on the tilt axis between each repetition of the mill feature.

—in Rotary B configuration, the distance (angle) on the rotary axis between each repetition of the mill feature.

B Offset—the offset for the B axis, to be added to the B dimension in the data block.

Background Color—choose Black or White background color for the graphics display.

Baud Rate—the communication speed rate.

Beam Offset—the width of the beam based on + and - trigger points (laser tool probe only). This field is updated after running the Determine Laser Beam Offset cycle. It may be adjusted by the user to optimize performance.

Bidirectional—the direction of the tool path while the 3D Mold part is being machined:

• No—causes the tool to machine in one direction, based on the direction of the contour definition.

• Yes—causes the tool to machine in both directions without retracting the tool until the entire contour is complete.


Blank Spacing—the size of the blank character (space). Leave at zero to use the default spacing for the selected font.

Blend Offset—the distance from the entry point of the part surface and the Z plunge point where the tool enters the work piece. This field is used in milling circles, frames, and ellipses; it is also used in contours with Milling Type set to Left/Right or Profile Left/Profile Right and Enable Blend Moves set to Yes.

• The default is 0.1181 inches (3 mm).

• The range is 0 through 99.999 inches (0 through 2539.997 mm).

Blend Overlap—the distance the tool travels past the entry point before it is withdrawn from the part. This field is used in milling circles, frames, and ellipses; it is also used in contours with Milling Type set to Left/Right or Profile Left/Profile Right and Enable Blend Moves set to Yes.

• The default is 0.1181 inches (3 mm).

• The range is 0 through 99.999 inches (0 through 2539.997mm).

1 Yes

2 No


Figure 7–1. Blend Offset and Blend Overlap

Blend Type—the type of blend move to make at the beginning and end of the threading operation. Choices are line, ramp, arc, helix:

Block—the block number for this operation. The system determines the number by the position of this data block in the program.

—in the DRO, the block number and type for Conversational programs. Displays 5 current blocks for NC programs (2 previous, current, 2 next).

Block Skip Enable—when set to Yes in NC Editor Settings, NC codes which follow the Ignore (/) character are skipped.

Border Size—the stock border dimension in Stock Geometry (field is available only when

1. Start Point

2. 1/2 X length

3. X length

4. Blend offset

5. Tool path

6. Blend offset

7. Blend overlap

8. End point

Line Ramp

Arc Helix

blend-out

blend-in

blend-out

blend-in

blend-in

blend-out

blend-out

blend-in


Manual Border Sizing is set to YES).

Bore Dwell—the pause in seconds before the tool retracts at the bottom of a Bore operation. This parameter is not used for NC programs.

• The default is 1.0 seconds.

• The range is 0 through 20 seconds.

Bore Orient Retract—the distance the boring tool moves away from the part surface at the end of the boring cycle. Used only when a Bore Orient data block is included in the part program.

• The default is 0.019685 inches (0.05 mm).


BPRNT/DPRNT Output Device—the output location for BPRINT and DPRINT formatted data; desktop version only.

BPRNT/DPRNT Output File—the file path if BPRINT and DPRINT data will be output to a file; desktop version only.

Breakage Tolerance—the amount of deviation from the tool length programmed in the Tool Cal Length field in Tool Setup.

C

C—the C end position of the move (fields are inactive for a non-rotary machine).

—in Rotary Position Block, the rotary-axis coordinate (angle) where the mill feature will be located on the part.

C Angle—in Rotary Position block, the rotary-axis coordinate (angle) relative to Part Zero C.

—in Rotary AC Contour block, the rotary-axis coordinate (angle) for the first segment’s starting point.

C Center—the rotary-axis coordinate (angle) of the center point.

C Centerline X / Y / Z—the offset from true part zero. Field is available when Disable Centerlines is No in Part Setup. Program the value in order to draw the program properly on the Graphics screen.

C Corner—the rotary-axis coordinate (angle) of the reference corner of the frame.

C Distance—the distance (angle) on the tilt axis between each repetition of the mill feature.

C End—the rotary-axis coordinate (angle) of the line or arc end point.

C Length—the rotary-axis coordinate (angle) from the reference corner.


• C Length is positive if the location of the frame is clockwise from the reference corner.

• C Length is negative if the location of the frame is counter clockwise from the reference corner.

C Offset—the offset for the C axis, to be added to the C dimension in the data block.

C Start—the C-axis coordinate start point calculated with data programmed in the Start segment. The value of C Start can be changed only in the segment in which it was created.

CAL to LS Velocity A, B, C—sets the feedrate for the A, B, or C axis as it moves toward the calibration limit switch during a machine calibration cycle. See Machine Parameters Page 2, on page 1 - 65 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

CAL to LS Velocity X, Y, Z—sets the feedrate for the X, Y, or Z axis as it moves toward the calibration limit switch during a machine calibration cycle. See Machine Parameters Page 2, on page 1 - 65 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Cal Tool D—the diameter (D) of the Laser Calibration Tool (laser tool probe only). This value can be obtained by measuring the diameter of a precision dowel or a laser calibration tool.

Cal Tool H—the height (H) of the Laser Calibration Tool (laser tool probe only). This value can be obtained by measuring the height of a precision dowel or a laser calibration tool.

Cal Tool L—the length (L) of the Laser Calibration Tool (laser tool probe only). This value can be obtained by measuring the length of a precision dowel or a laser calibration tool.

Center Beam X—the center locationof the beam in X (laser tool probe only). Do not change this value after the Laser Tool Calibration cycle has been run, unless you re-run the cycle. The user enters an approximate value then the laser calibration cycle determines the precise location.

Center Beam Y—the center location of the beam in Y (laser tool probe only). Do not change this value after the Laser Tool Calibration cycle has been run, unless you re-run the cycle. The user enters an approximate value then the laser calibration cycle determines the precise location.

Centerline X—the coordinate point of the center of the part on the X axis.

Centerline Y—the coordinate point of the center of the part on the Y axis.

Centerline Z—the coordinate point of the center of the part on the Z axis.

Center X—the Center X machine coordinate location. This field appears upon completion of the probing cycle.

Center Y—the Center Y machine coordinate location. This field appears upon completion of the probing cycle.

Chamfer Angle—the tool corner angle.

Change Finish SFQ—specifies if the Finish SFQ should be changed for the block range.


Change Rough SFQ—specifies if the Rough SFQ should be changed for the block range.

Change Tool—the tool used in the block s to which changes will be made. Blocks using this tool will be changed. (This field appears only for the Change Feeds and Speeds by Tools screen.) See Change Tool Number, on page 1 - 116 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Change Z-Start —the new Z-Start position.

Character Height—the height of the text.

Character Length—the maximum number of bits sent back and forth at one time.

Character Width—the character width. The width includes the character left-justified, plus some spacing between it and the next character to be milled. Spacing between the characters is equal to the tool's diameter.

Char Spacing—the amount of additional space to add between each character. Leaving at zero will use the default character spacing for the selected font.

Check Calc Assist Inconsistencies—this setting is useful when there are slight discrepancies or conflicts in contour data; for example, as happens occasionally with contours imported using DXF, due to bad segment connections in the DXF file. When set to Yes, an error message is generated when these inconsistencies are present in a contour segment. When set to No, the contour is allowed to draw and run, as long as there is enough relevant data to generate valid geometry.

Chipload—the feed per flute.

Chip Removal—the status of the chip auger.

Chip Removal Off Delay Time—sets the time the chip conveyor/auger cycles off, when Chip Removal On/Off Delay is enabled. See Machine Parameters Page 3, on page 1 - 69 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Chip Removal On Delay Time—sets the time the chip conveyor/auger cycles on, when Chip Removal On/Off Delay is enabled. See Machine Parameters Page 3, on page 1 - 69 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Chip Removal On/Off Delay Enable—enables the Chip Removal Delay. See Machine Parameters Page 3, on page 1 - 69 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Chord Error—the maximum distance the cutter deviates from the true arc path.

Circular Passes—the number of times to automatically repeat the probe cycle of a circular feature. After each pass the probe positions to the new center location and runs the cycle again. Multiple passes will provide better data because each pass starts closer to the true center. A poor starting location yields inaccuracies due to the diameter of the stylus and not being on line with the center. The default value is 2.

Because cutter compensation is not used in this routine and letter contouring follows the center of the tool, character spacing can be adjusted by adjusting the tool diameter in Tool Setup.


Closing Feed—the feed at which the tool enters the hole at the top and bottom to be certain that the tool is closed.

Color—the color of the path left by the tool in Solid Graphics, set in Advance Tool Settings screen. The default selection is Sequential, where tools are represented in the following order by color:

• Yellow—1st tool

• Orange—2nd tool

• Violet—3rd tool

• Green—4th tool

• Gray—5th tool

• Blue—6th tool

• Cyan—7th tool

• Magenta—8th tool

• Tan—9th tool

• Lime—10th tool

Alternatively, a specific color can be assigned to a specific tool by changing the selection in the field.

Comment Color—the current NC comment color. The color can be changed by selecting the Change... button or the Change Comments Color softkey.

Confirm APC Ready—in Machine Function data block, when M70 is selected, indicate Yes or No to require the APC READY button to be pressed before continuing operation after a pallet change.

Contact Point X—the X location (in machine coordinates) of the tool probe (touch tool probe only). When the machine is at this location, a tool will touch the center of the tool probe stylus. To enter these values easily, insert a tool in the spindle and jog down to the tip of the probe. When the tool tip is centered over the stylus, press the Store Position

This information is specific to each installation and is stored on the hard drive. If the hard drive is replaced or formatted, the above information must be restored. Refer to the Getting Started with WinMax Mill manual for information about restoring parameters.When the part probe is used, it must be activated by the control. For this to occur, the control needs to know when the probe is in the spindle. WinMax provides a Probe tool type in the Tool Setup screen. Before using the part probe, enter the part probe as a tool in Tool Setup:

1. Determine which tool number to assign to the probe. 2. Switch to the Tool Setup screen. 3. Enter the probe’s tool number in the Tool field.4. Select Probe for the tool type.

The control activates the probe hardware when the number in the Tool In Spindle field matches the probe’s Tool number.


key on the jog controls.

Contact Point Y—the Y location (in machine coordinates) of the tool probe (touch tool probe only). When the machine is at this location, a tool will touch the center of the tool probe stylus. To enter these values easily, insert a tool in the spindle and jog down to the tip of the probe. When the tool tip is centered over the stylus, press the Store Position key on the jog controls.

Control Power Off Time—turns the control off after the specified period of inactivity. See Machine Parameters Page 1, on page 1 - 62 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Coolant—the coolant used for the tool. Coolant is programmable on a tool-by-tool basis. The choices are Off/None, Primary, Secondary, or Both when the cursor is at the Coolant field. Select Primary for machines equipped with a coolant system, Secondary for machines equipped with a secondary coolant system (i.e. through spindle coolant), and Both for machines with two coolant systems.

—in the DRO, the coolant status.

Coolant Delay Time—the time the program pauses when the coolant is enabled. See Machine Parameters Page 1, on page 1 - 62 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Coolant Status—indicates Level OK and Filter OK. Both are required for tool coolant operation. Available with the Coolant Through Spindle (CTS) option.

Coordinate System—the coordinate system for the end position of the move, either Part or Machine.

Corner Radius—in Mill Slot, the blend radius for the corners of the Start Cap or End Cap, if either or both are set to Line.

—in Mill Frame and Rotary Frame, the radius of the reference corner when all four corners of the frame will have the same radius. See Mill Frame, on page 2 - 29 for more information.

Corner X—the X position of the intersection. This field appears when the Probing cycle is finished.

Corner Y—the Y position of the intersection. This field appears when the Probing cycle is finished.

CR / Chip Removal—the status of the chip auger.

Current Font—the current font used in NC Editor. Default is the system font, size 10 pts. Font and/or size can be changed using the Change Current Font softkey.

Current Time—in Auto screen, the reference time used to determine when the offset is applied, in Linear Thermal Compensation. Time can be changed during program run. Time is paused when program is finished running.

Cusp Height—available when the Use Cusp Height field is set to Yes in Swept Surface parameters. Specifies the step size for ball and flat end mills.


Custom NC File Extensions—provide custom filename extensions to enable loading of NC files that use the extensions (for example, NCC, TAP, TXT). Separate multiple entries with a comma.

Cutter Comp Parameter—the programmed tool automatically follows the finished contour of the part with cutter compensation. Without cutter compensation, the center line of the programmed tool follows the print line.

• Insert Arc—Inserts a tangent arc to connect two line segments, or a line segment and an arc segment (when the two cutter compensated segments are offset and do not intersect).

• Insert Lines—Joins the cutter compensated lines and arcs as described below:

• Two line segments are extended until they intersect (provided they form a 90º or greater angle). If the lines form an angle of less than 90º, a line is inserted to connect them.

• Line and arc segments have the line segment extended, and a tangent line to the arc segment inserted and extended until the lines intersect (provided they form a 90º or greater angle). If the segments form an angle of less than 90º, a line is inserted to connect them.

• Two arc segments have tangent lines (to the arcs) inserted and extended until the lines intersect (provided the extended tangent lines form a 90º or greater angle). If the extended tangent lines form an angle of less than 90º, a line or arc is inserted to connect them.

Cut Direction—controls the tool path while a 3D contour is machined:

• With Contour—machines the 3D contour using the tool path originally programmed.

• Normal—tool path follows the part at right angles to the original two-

1. Programmed Tool Path

2. Cutter Compensated Path

3. Completed path using the Insert Arc parameter

1. Programmed Tool Path

2. Cutter Compensated Path

3. Completed path using the Insert Line parameter


dimensional profile.

• Spiral—(Swept Surface) machines a continuous tool path resulting in a smoother surface.

Cutter Length—in Mill Thread, the cutter length. Displayed when Cutter Type is Multi.

Cutting Edges—the number of cutting edges on the tool.

Cutting Time—the number of minutes a tool has been running in the spindle (seconds are rounded up to the nearest minute). Starts at zero unless a time is pre-set (if there is already time on the tool). When Tool Life Monitoring is enabled in Tool Utilities and Settings a second field is also displayed, where the maximum cutting time for the tool can be specified. See Life Monitoring in Tool Utilities and Settings, on page 1 - 49 for more information.

Cycle—the tool probing cycle: No Probing, Length, Diameter, Length & Diameter.

Cylinder Angle—the coordinate of a point on the mirror line.

Cylinder Axis—the coordinate of a point on the mirror line.

Cylinder Radius—the radius of the cylindrical part. If the radius is a negative number, the tool will cut the rotary mill feature (e.g., rotary circle, rotary frame) from the top to bottom. Field present for all rotary configurations except Tilt B Rotary C.

D

Data Block Tool Entry Feed and Speed Update—how tool feeds and speeds should be updated when a tool is changed in a data block:

• Do Not Replace—leaves the previous feeds and speeds.

• Replace All—automatically replaces all feeds and speeds with the defaults from the tool. No prompt.

• Prompt Replace All—prompts the user to update all feeds and speeds in the block with the defaults from the tool with no distinction between tool defaults and manually entered values.

• Prompt Replace Manual Entries—matches the old behavior. The feeds and speeds in the block that were set to the defaults from the previous tool will be automatically updated, and if any manually-entered overrides are found, the user is prompted to updated these values. If there are no manual overrides, the prompt will not occur.

Data Origin—specifies the source of the serial number data, either User-provided or From File. Default is User-Provided.

If the radius of the cylindrical part is not defined in the Rotary Parameters data block and Cutter Compensation is used in rotary lines and arcs, the machine will define the part’s radius as the distance from Z Start to the rotary centerline.


• User-provided—the serial numbers are constructed with information provided by the user. When selected, the Starting Sequence and Increment fields appear.

• From File—the serial numbers are populated from a source file. When selected, the File field and Locate... button appear.

Default Conversational Program Type—select the default program type for new Conversational programs.

Default Cutter Comp Lookahead—looks ahead one segment to determine if the contour crosses itself and if the tool will fit into the contour. This value is set to 1 and cannot be changed.

Default Pocket Overlap—the cutter step-over movement in a pocket milling operation. After the first pass, the tool follows a path produced by offsetting the boundary by the tool radius, plus the pocket overlap for each pass while avoiding islands inside the boundary.

• The default is 50%.

• The range is 0 through 99%.

Default Tool Number—indicates which tool will be used at the beginning of the program.

Default View—the default graphics display view when WinMax is started, either XY plane, XZ plane, Isometric, or All Views.

Default Zone—the zone initially displayed in graphics display when the application is started. Dual-zone machines only.

Depletion Retract—the dimension above the part surface to which the Z axis retracts. The Z axis retracts while waiting for additional data to be transmitted into the current program during execution of an NC part program.

• The default is 0.005 inches (.127 mm).


Depletion Retract only applies to NC programs.

Description—a short text description of the part program.

Device—the tool setter method: gauge block or tool probe, if equipped.

Diameter—the nominal diameter of the tool's cutting surface (i.e., the diameter before the tool suffers from normal wear). The diameter range is 0 through 99.9999 inches/2539.997 mm. The Diameter also appears on the Tool Geometry screen.

The programmed diameter is used to automatically determine cutter compensation during milling operations. The system calculates the radius of the cutting tool and automatically allows for this distance when performing milling operations. This means it is not necessary to remember the size of the cutting tool or manually calculate tool offsets when programming the part.


Diameter Compensation Using Tool Setup—select Yes to use the Diameter and Diameter Wear values from Tool Setup to compensate for tool wear in ISNC programs. If set to No, G41/G42 must use a D code to specify an offset from the Tool Radius Offsets table.

Diameter Tolerance—the amount of deviation from the tool diameter programmed in the Diameter field in Tool Setup screen used when checking for a defective tool with automatic monitoring.

Diameter Wear—a value to compensate for tool wear:

Diameter Wear = (program tool diameter) - (actual tool diameter)

For example, to adjust a 0.5 inch diameter tool for .001 inch of wear, enter .001 in the Diameter Wear field to set cutter comp diameter to 0.499 inches.

The Diameter Wear value alters the toolpath for cutter compensation. For example, when milling a circle with Milling Type set to Outside, a positive number in the Diameter Wear field will result in a smaller diameter cut, and a negative number will result in a larger diameter cut.

If a probe is used to determine diameter, the Diameter Wear field will contain the compensated value based on the probed diameter. A (P) appears next to the Diameter Wear field to indicate that the value was derived from the probed diameter.

Disable Auto On Chip Removal—disables chip conveyor from turning on automatically in AUTO mode. See Machine Parameters Page 4, on page 1 - 76 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Disable Aux Out 1-12 During Interrupt—disables the specified Auxiliary M-code Output when an Interrupt cycle is selected during Auto Run mode. See Machine Parameters Pages 5 and 6, on page 1 - 78 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Disable Centerlines—(Available only in Rotary A, Rotary A Tilt B, Tilt A Rotary C, and Rotary B configurations.) Disables the use of rotary axis centerline data in Part Setup. When set to Yes, the centerline fields are not available. Default is Yes. This parameter is meant to maintain backward compatibility with old programs and is not recommended for new programs.

Direction—the direction of rotation from the start point to the end point around the center point, clockwise (CW) or counterclockwise (CCW).

—in Mill Thread, the direction of the threads (clockwise or counterclockwise) and the manner in which they are cut (up or down).

— in Stock Geometry, the direction of the stock cylinder: POS X, NEG X, POS Y, NEG Y, POS Z, or NEG Z (available when Stock Type is Cylinder).

Disable Tool Length Offset Table—select Yes to disable access to the Tool Length Offsets table in Tool Setup. Default is No. When Yes, Tool Length Offsets are cleared and only the Radius Offsets table can be accessed in Tool Setup.

Compensate for tool wear in this field rather than the Tool Diameter field. This will maintain the tool diameter and ensure accurate tool matching with other part programs that use the same tool.


Disable Tool Picker Option—turns off the Tool Picker option. See Machine Parameters Page 1, on page 1 - 62 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Disable Undo and Redo—Yes disables the Undo and Redo softkeys in the NC Edit Functions menu. Also disables the Ctrl + Z (undo) and Ctrl + Y (redo) keyboard shortcuts.

Disable X Scaling—disables any scaling performed in the X axis.

Disable Y Scaling—disables any scaling performed in the Y axis.

Disable Z Scaling—disables any scaling performed in the Z axis.

Display Machine Axes For Universal Type—select Yes to display, in Part Setup, only the rotary axes that are present on the machine. No will display axes IV and V even on a non-rotary machine. This setting also applies to Change Part Setup block, Work Offsets (in NC), and Universal Rotary position block.

Display Time—the amount of time the comment will be displayed when a Comment block is encountered during a program run.

Distance—the dimensional value between repeated patterns along the defined line in Pattern Loop Linear.

Display Units—the unit of measurement (inches or millimeters) displayed in Program Properties, used throughout part programming (this field does not apply to NC programs). These units will be used when the part program is loaded into memory but the display value can be changed using the unit (IN or MM) icon in the status bar.

Drawing scale—indicates the scaling ratio for the drawing to the part.

Drill Angle—the angle of the tool tip.

Drill Dwell—the pause (dwell) in seconds before the tool retracts at the bottom of a drill operation. The most often changed Holes Parameter is Drill Dwell. This parameter controls the length of time the drill stays at the bottom of a hole after it has drilled the hole. This parameter is not used for NC programs.

• The default is 0.0 (When set to 0.0 seconds, the drill immediately retracts out of the hole after it is drilled.)

• The range is 0 through 20 seconds.

Drip Rej. Delay—the time in milliseconds between each sample (specified in the Drip Rej. Samples field). For example, if Drip Rej. Samples is 200 and Drip Rej. Delay is 5 milliseconds (.005 seconds), the control must see the laser in a clean state for 1 second (200 x 5 msec) before continuing with tool monitoring.

Drip Rej. Samples—the number of samples for coolant drip rejection. Coolant drip rejection is the process the control uses to determine if enough coolant has cleared from the laser probe for proper function during tool monitoring. The value entered in the field is the number of probe samples the control takes in a specified period of time to determine if a clean probe state is present. Increase the value for heavy coolant flow.

Dual Laser Probe Present—sets tool probe in one or both zones of dual-zone machines. See Machine Parameters Page 1, on page 1 - 62 in Getting Started with


WinMax Mill for more information.

Dwell Time —the pause in seconds before the tool retracts at the bottom of a drill operation. Dwell Time is used with Rigid Tap.

E

Edit Lockout Level—sets the level of protection, Partial or Full, to limit access to part programming softkeys and other functions when Edit Lockout feature is enabled. If Partial is selected, the Lock Part Setup and Lock Tool Setup fields can be set to Yes or No. See Edit Lockout, on page 1 - 46 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill.

Edit Mode—the Edit Mode for information entry. Select either Ultimax Classic (default) or Windows Dialog. For example, Ultimax Classic requires the Enter key to change the value of a data field, while Windows Dialog will accept a number by pressing the Down arrow.

Enable—Yes to enable or No to disable the step.

Enable Automatic Matching—enables automatic matching of tools when Conversational programs are loaded:

• YES—tools in a program are automatically matched to existing tools in the Tool & Material Library.

• NO—tools in a program must be manually matched to existing tools in the Tool & Material Library, or added though Tool Review. When NO is selected all other parameters on this tab are disabled.

Enable Automatic Save—turn Autosave on or off; if Yes, programs are saved to memory at the time interval specified—it will not save to the source location of the program.

Enable Blend Moves—appears when either Left or Right is selected in the Milling Types field. When set to Yes, automatic arc blend-in and blend-out is performed. Default is Yes.

Also see Climb Milling (Left), on page 2 - 12 and Conventional Milling (Right), on page 2 - 12 for additional information.

Enable Cutter Comp—specifies whether the tool path is offset by the tool radius. Default is Yes. When enabled (Yes), the value of the Thread Diameter (set in Tool Setup) is used to determine the radius.

Enable Dual Zones—sets a dual-zone capable machine as either a single long bed machine, or as a dual-zone machine. See Machine Parameters Page 1, on page 1 - 62 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Enable FTP Server—enable the WinMax Control to act as an FTP Server.

Enable Lead In Error Checking—enables error checking to determine whether the lead in from the current position will overlap the segment.

Enable Lead Out Error Checking—enables error checking to determine whether the lead out from the current position will overlap the segment.


Enable Linear Thermal Compensation—in Auto screen, specifies whether to use Linear Thermal Compensation.

Enable Pecking Retract Clearance—enables the use of a different retract clearance for pecking operations. When set to On, the tool retracts to the height specified in the Pecking Retract Clearance parameter. When set to Off, the tool retracts to the Retract Clearance height. Default is Off.

Enable Program Restore—resets previously loaded programs when the application is started after a shutdown; default is No.

Enable Reset at Program Start—select Yes to enable variable reset at the start of program run.

Enable Retract Z-Axis on Power Loss—enables Z-axis retract upon power loss, when an M91 is present. See Machine Parameters Page 4, on page 1 - 76 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Enable Runtime Tool Display—specify Yes or No to see simulated tool move around the part in graphics display while the machine is running; tool also shown when jogging tool near part.

Enable Tool Life Monitoring—select Yes to enable tool wear monitoring. When enabled, the current cutting time is compared to the maximum cutting time set for the tool in Tool Setup Cutting Time field.

Enable Tool SFQ—select Yes to automatically apply a specific Surface Finish Quality (SFQ) when the tool is used in NC programs.

Enable Variable Monitoring—select Yes to enable monitoring of an NC variable during the program run. Default is No.

End Angle—in 3D Mold, the ending value of the angle of revolution for XY Revolved About X and XZ Revolved about Z. When determining End Angle, remember that 0º is where the contour begins and is located at the 3 o'clock position. For more information, see 3D Mold, on page 2 - 34 in Conversational Programming.

• The difference between the start and end angle determines the degrees that the 2D profile revolves about the axis.

• Start and End angles can be entered as positive or negative numbers. CCW motion is programmed as a positive number; CW motion is programmed as a negative number:

End Block—the number of the last block in the program to be changed or run.

End Cap—the shape that is used to close the slot at the specified end point:


• Line—flat edge connects the top and bottom edges of the slot, passing through the programmed endpoint.

• Append Arc—rounded edge; center of semi-circle is programmed endpoint.

• Include Arc—rounded edge; outermost edge of semi-circle is programmed endpoint.

End Job—the last job to be run.

Endpoint Tolerance—determines when the endpoints of DXF segments are close enough to be considered equal (or coincident).

Exchange Arm—indicates 0° or 90° position. 0° is required for ATC Status Home.

—in VM, VMX, VTXU, indicates 0° or 60° position. 0° is required for ATC Status Home.

• Cannot move from 0° to 60° unless Z-axis is at Tool Change Height, Tool Pocket is Down, Spindle is Oriented and Clamped.

• Cannot move from 60° to 0° unless Z-axis is at Tool Change Height, Tool Pocket is Down, and Spindle is Clamped.

Exported NC Decimal Places—the number of decimal places expressed when exporting a conversational program as NC (range is 1-8); desktop version only.

F

F(%)—the current Feedrate per Minute percentage set on the axis Feed Rate knob.

F / Feed—the current feed rate.

Fast Feed—the feed rate used when making the initial touch of the probe (prior to measurement touches). When the operator sets the diameter setting for the tool only the first time the tool is entered, the Fast Feed field will be updated with a suggested value—you may overwrite this value.

Fast Start Feed—the feed rate to use for auto part probing start movement.

Feed—in Custom Drill, the plunge feedrate.

—in Tool Setup, the default mill feed for the tool. This value is calculated based on diameter, feed/flute, and number of flutes. Value may also be entered directly into the field. Depending on tool type this field may be Plunge Feed.

—in the DRO, the current feed rate.

Feed/Flute—the tool's chipload (or feed per revolution). See Feed and Speed Calculations, on page 1 - 113 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Feed/Rev—the tool's feed per revolution. See Feed and Speed Calculations, on page 1 - 113 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

File—specifies the source file for serial numbers that are generated from a file. This field


appears only when From File Data Origin is selected.

Finish Feed (%)—allows a different feed to be specified for finishing operations without changing the tool. The specified percentage is a multiplier of the feed entered in Tool Setup. This multiplier is applied whenever the tool is entered for the finishing operation of a milling block. (See example below.)

Finish Feed / Finish Speed example:

Program Parameters: Finish Speed %=120, Finish Feed %=80

Tool Setup: Speed=5000, Feed=100

When a program block is created, the speed is automatically set to 5000 and the feed is set to 100. When the tool is entered into the finishing operation, the multipliers are applied, and finish speed is set to 6000 (5000 x 120%), finish feed is set to 80 (100 x 80%).

Finish Plunge Helix Radius—the value of the Helical Plunge radius as a percentage of the diameter of the finishing tool. The range is 0% to 100%. If a value of 50% or less is chosen, it will prevent a post from being formed by the Helical Plunge. The default setting is 25%.

Finish Plunge Ramp Slope—the slope of the Helical Ramp for the finishing tool. Range is 1° to 90°. Choosing 90° will result in a Straight Plunge. The default setting is 25°.

Finish Plunge Type—the plunging strategy to use for the finish phase. Choose Straight or Helix. The default setting is Straight.

Finish SFQ—the Surface Finish Quality (SFQ) for the finishing operation. The SelectSurface Finish Quality option is required. Default SFQ for finishing is 20. Values

If this parameter is changed in either Program Parameters or with a Change Parameters block, all existing data blocks that are affected by the multiplier will be updated.

The Finish Feed and Finish Speed parameters are not applied if the roughing feed or speed in a data block is changed.

Values entered manually into the Finish Feed or Finish Speed fields in the data block take precedence over these parameters.

If the Tool & Material Library option is enabled, separate roughing and finishing defaults can be set for each tool. If finishing defaults are defined for a tool, those values take precedence over the Finish Feed and Finish Speed multiplier parameters.


are:

Finish Speed (%)—allows a different speed to be specified for finishing operations without changing the tool. The specified percentage is a multiplier of the speed entered in Tool Setup. This multiplier is applied whenever the tool is entered for the finishing operation of a milling block. (See example below.)

Finish Feed / Finish Speed example:

Program Parameters: Finish Speed %=120, Finish Feed %=80

Tool Setup: Speed=5000, Feed=100

When a program block is created, the speed is automatically set to 5000 and the feed is set to 100. When the tool is entered into the finishing operation, the multipliers are applied, and finish speed is set to 6000 (5000 x 120%), finish feed is set to 80 (100 x 80%).

Finish XY—the stock width to be left by the roughing pass. The range is 0 to 1.0 inch (0 to 25.4 mm).

Finish Z—the stock depth to be left by the roughing pass. The range is 0 to 1.0 inch (0 to 25.4 mm).

SFQ Desired Result




If this parameter is changed in either Program Parameters or with a Change Parameters block, all existing data blocks that are affected by the multiplier will be updated.

The Finish Feed and Finish Speed parameters are not applied if the roughing feed or speed in a data block is changed.

Values entered manually into the Finish Feed or Finish Speed fields in the data block take precedence over these parameters.

If the Tool & Material Library option is enabled, separate roughing and finishing defaults can be set for each tool. If finishing defaults are defined for a tool, those values take precedence over the Finish Feed and Finish Speed multiplier parameters.

Stock is removed up to a maximum of 90% of tool diameter.

For example, if 25 mm is entered in the Finish XY field, and the tool has a diameter of 10 mm, the XY stock removed on the finish pass will be 9 mm (90% of the 10 mm tool diameter), despite the number entered in the Finish XY field.


First Move (Z Retract)—see Retract Type and Z Position.

First Peck Offset—permits modifying the depth of the first peck in milling and hole operations. Use this feature whenever a first peck needs to be deeper or shallower than subsequent pecks. The permitted range is –10.0000 to + 10.0000 inches or –254.00 to +254.000 millimeters. The First Peck Offset value is added to the operation’s peck depth in calculating the first peck only. Use a positive First Peck Offset value for deeper peck and negative value for shallower peck. A First Peck Offset of 0.000 will run the pecks normally, without any First Peck Offset.

For example, if the peck depth in a drill operation is set to 0.2000 inches and First Peck Offset is set to +0.0500 inches, then the first peck will be 0.2500 inches down from Z start plane and all subsequent pecks will be 0.2000 inches deep. If the First Peck Offset is set to –0.0500 inches, the result is a first peck only 0.1500 inches down from Z start plane and every subsequent peck will be 0.2000 inches deep.

Flutes—the number of cutting flutes for the tool. See Feed and Speed Calculations, on page 1 - 113 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information

Font—the lettering font. The font selection dialog box is opened with the Select New Font softkey, when the cursor is in the Text field.

Font Side of Contour—in Lettering Along Contour Start segment, the side of the contour that is used for the location of the text.

Frame Radius—sets a default corner radius to be used in Build DB in DXF.

FTP Server Port—the port number for FTP access.

G

Graphics Chord Error—the chord error to be used when drawing curves in graphics.

Graphics Optimization—optimizes graphics processing and rendering. Default is Full.

H

HD3 Save Program Type—the program type used when exporting conversational programs to the HD3 file format.

If Finish Z is zero on a pocketing finish pass, the tool only runs around the inside pocket wall.

Choices for HWM and HD3 Program Types are:

Standard = 3-axis

Rotary A or Rotary B = 4-axis

Rotary A, Tilt B or Tilt A, Rotary C = 5-axis


Height—the height of gauge or probe relative to the Z Reference.

Hole Diameter—determines the default diameter for a hole in a DXF drawing.

Hydraulic Status—indicates No Alarm or Alarm. An alarm will not allow programs to run or machine operation.

I

Include Offset Z in Tool Zero Cal—indicates whether or not the Offset Z value in Part Setup is added to the zero calibration value when tool lengths are adjusted. Default is Yes.

• Yes—Zero Calibration is adjusted by the Offset Z value.

• No—Zero Calibration is the distance from machine home to the tool tip when positioned at the workpiece or gauge block.

Increment—the amount to increment for each new serial number. This field appears only when User-provided Data Origin is selected. Default is 1.

Index Pulses—the number of positioning movements that the indexer head will make when rotating through an operation. It is used only when indexer equipment is attached to the machine. A new Position block must be put into the part program each time the part needs to move to a new indexer position.

Individual Profiles—allows different profile contours to be used for individual segments of the Draw Along contour in Swept Surface.

Inspection Cycle—the type of cycle to be inspected.

Intelligent ASR Triggers•conditions that turn ON automatic ASR buffering in NC:

• M128 is called.

• Tool Change—when a tool change occurs while a Transform Plane is active.

• Transform Plane begins.

• Rapid Move—when a rapid move includes an angle (A, B, C) or tool vector change (I, J, K).

• NC Merge starts.

• Conditions that turn OFF automatic ASR buffering:

• Program End

• Integrator M-code

• NC Merge End

Intelligent Automatic Safe Repositioning—turns automatic buffering on and off. Default is On.

Interrupt Cycle Z Retract—retracts the Z axis to Retract Clearance when you press the Interrupt Cycle console button on a Hurco control.


• Select No to keep the spindle in its current position when the button is pressed.

• The default is Yes.

Interrupt Cycle during tapping:

• When Interrupt Cycle button is pressed and this parameter has been set to NO, the spindle moves out of hole and stops; when set to Yes, the spindle moves out of hole and retracts along tool axis to Retract Clearance.

• When interrupt happens during tapping into hole, tool retracts at 100% spindle override and retract override. After resuming, tapping will repeat the interrupted process.

• When interrupt happens during tapping out of hole, it remains at the fast retract feedrate. After resume, tapping will not repeat the interrupted process since it is already done.

IV Angle—rotary-axis coordinate (angle) relative to Part Zero A or Part Zero C, depending on the configuration of your machine. Enabled when the Enable field is set to YES.

J

Jog Along Tool Axis—indicate if jogging should occur on tool axis (Tilt B axis machines).

K

Keep Original—select Yes if the original will be cut in addition to the mirror image. If only the mirror image is to be produced, select No for this field.

L

Last Used Serial Number—displays the most recently milled serial number.

Lead—the change in the Z axis dimension for each 360° of revolution of the helix in a helix segment of Mill Contour. This value provides information for the calculation of the X End, Y End, Z End, and Sweep Angle fields.

Lead Angle—the Lead Angle for this Mill Contour. See Lead In/Out Moves, on page 2 - 15. This field only appears for NC posted programs. This field is only available when Milling Type is set to Left or Right. Lead In/Out Moves will be ignored in the post unless Enable Blend Moves is set to Yes and the Display Apt Fields in Editor field on the Post Processor Configuration screen is set to Yes.

Leading Symbol— the character that is added to the beginning of the serial number as


a placeholder to achieve the minimum length. This can be an alpha or a numeric character. This character will be repeated in the serial number as many times as necessary to achieve the specified minimum length with the given starting sequence. See example below. This field only appears when Assure Minimum Length is Yes.

Lead Length—the Lead Length for this Mill Contour. See Lead In/Out Moves, on page 2 - 15. This field only appears for NC posted programs. This field is only available when Milling Type is set to Left or Right. Lead In/Out Moves will be ignored in the post unless Enable Blend Moves is set to Yes and the Display Apt Fields in Editor field on the Post Processor Configuration screen is set to Yes.

Least Dwell Units—the dwell units when using an integer to specify dwell. This field can be set to 0.001 or 0.0001.

Least Scaling Factor—the units of the scaling factor when an integer is used with the scaling command. This field can be set to 0.001 or 0.0001.

Length—the length along axis from reference position when Stock Type is Cylinder, in Stock Geometry.

Length of Cut—the length of the portion of the tool used for cutting.

Length Offset X—used to change the X table position when probing – applies only when probing tool length. Required for tools that have a cutter offset from the center.

Length Offset Y—used to change the Y table position when probing – applies only when probing tool length. Required for tools that have a cutter offset from the center.

Length Tolerance—the amount of deviation from the tool length programmed in the Tool Cal Length/Zero Calibration field in Tool Setup. Used when checking for a defective tool with automatic monitoring for Tool Length Wear.

Length (X)—the X length of the pocket. This field appears upon completion of the probing cycle.

Length (Y)—the Y length of the pocket. This field appears upon completion of the probing cycle.

Line 1-10—the comment text in a Comment block. Enter up to 10 lines of information to display. Each line holds up to 50 characters.

Linearization Override—use this setting to force the active linearization mode on or off.

List Icon Size—specify Small or Large for the size of icons in lists.

Location—the physical location of the tool:

• Spindle—tool is in spindle

• Manual—tool is defined

• Auto—tool is in ATC magazine

• Pock—displays the tool pocket location of the tool


M

M6 Initiates Tool Change—initiates a tool change at the M06 code when set to Yes. If set to No, tool changes are initiated by a T code.

Machine—the current relative axes location or distance-to-go (DTG).

Machine Class—the physical orientation of the spindle, relative to the table surface. The possible machine classes are vertical, horizontal, and universal.

Machine Coordinate Relative—specifies if the axis coordinates are machine relative.

Machine Hour Meter—total number of machine hours expended to date.

Magazine—the current pocket.

Magazine Lock—indicates Locked or Unlocked Position. Locked is required for ATC to begin.

Magazine Position•—indicates the current magazine position: In Pos (1) or In Pos (2).

• In Pos (1) is required for ATC Status Home.

• In Pos (2) is active when magazine is rotating and not in position.

Magazine Reference—indicates Reference Pos when the ATC calibration sensor is detected.

Magazine Status—the current magazine position (note that this may not be the tool number).

Maintain Operation Level 1 Order—in Tool Change Optimization, when set to Yes, all Level 1 operations (typically these are the roughing operations) are performed in block sequence, including any specified tool changes. When set to No, all Level 1 operations are performed in tool change sequence. Default is No.

Maintain Operation Level 2 Order—in Tool Change Optimization, when set to Yes, all Level 2 operations (typically these are the finishing operations) are performed in block sequence, including any specified tool changes. When set to No, all Level 2 operations are performed in tool change sequence. Default is No.

Manual Border Sizing—specify if you will manually size the border, in Stock Geometry (field available only when Manual Stock Sizing is set to NO). If Yes, specify Border Size.

For Holes, the first hole operation is treated as a Level 1 operation and will be executed when other Level 1 operations are executed, based on the Maintain Operation order. The other hole operations will always follow the first hole operation. If the hole operation should not be started until a previous block has been finished, then be sure to disable Tool Change Optimization prior to hole operation.

The Maintain Operation Level 2 Order parameter does not apply to holes operations.


Manual Jog Feed—the jog feedrate, entered on Manual screen.

Manual Rapid Feed—the feedrate of a linear axis move.

Manual Spindle Speed—the spindle speed, entered on Manual screen.

Manual Stock Sizing—specify if the stock dimensions will be manually set in the Stock Geometry screen. When set to No, the software automatically sizes and positions the stock. To calculate the automatic sizing, WinMax takes the diameter of the largest tool in the program and adds 7/10ths of that size to the stock diameter X and Y fields (with a minimum addition of .05). When this field is set to Yes, stock dimensions must be entered manually.

Mapping—the size of the text character including ascenders and descenders:

• Body Only—defines the height of the body of the lettering. Ascenders and descenders are calculated automatically.

• Descended—defines the height of the body and descenders (the portion of some characters that extends below the baseline) of the lettering. Ascenders are calculated automatically.

• Ascended—defines the height of the body and ascenders (the portion of some characters that extends above the x-height) of the lettering. Descenders are calculated automatically.

• Full Font—defines the height of the body, ascenders, and descenders of the lettering. No part of the lettering is calculated automatically.

Material—the material to be used, if specified (optional). This field appears as read-only in Program Properties; however, the material can be changed with the Change Material softkey. See Tool and Material Database, on page 1 - 123 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Math Assist Style—select either Ultimax Classic or Standard Calculator interface to be used when editing data fields:

• Ultimax Classic—select operation (=,-,*,/), then number, and then Enter. For example, if the number 5 is displayed as a value, pressing “+” and the number 3 will change the value to 8.

• Standard Calculator—select number, then operation (=,-,*,/), then Enter. For example, if the number 5 is displayed as a value, pressing 3 and “+” will change the value to 8.

Max Depth—the maximum depth of cut.

Maximum Contouring Rate—the maximum feedrate for contouring. Field appears in Standard motion only.

1. Body Only

2. Descended

3. Ascended

4. Full font


Maximum Diameter Difference—the maximum diameter difference for a tool to be considered a match.

Maximum Idle Time (Mins)—maximum amount of time before FTP connection is dropped.

Maximum Offset—appears when either Profile Left or Profile Right Milling Type is selected. The value is the distance between the programmed contour and the tool center during the first pass. The number entered here must be manually calculated. Refer to Maximum Offset, on page 2 - 13 for details.

Maximum Spindle Motor Speed—the maximum acceptable speed for the spindle.

Maximum Spindle Tool Speed—the maximum acceptable speed for a tool in the spindle.

Maximum Rapid Traverse Rate—the maximum rapid traverse rate.

Max Spread—he deviation (difference) between the minimum and maximum probe readings. If the deviation is greater than the Max Spread value, an error message appears.

Max Tool Cutting Time Exceeded—specify how you want to proceed when the maximum cutting time has been exceeded:

• Display Warning Message—specify if you want a warning message to post when a tool’s maximum cutting time is exceeded.

• Mark Tool Defective—when set to Yes, the program run will abort when attempting to change to a tool that has exceeded its maximum cutting time.

M Code—the M Code representing a machine function in a Machine Function block. Type the code into the field or select from the M code list.

Measurement Feed—the feed rate to use when measuring the part feature.

Mill Plunge Helix Radius—the Helical Plunge radius as a percentage of the tool diameter. The range is from 0% to 100%. Choosing 0% results in a Straight Plunge. If a value of 50% or less is chosen, it will prevent a post (a thin cylinder of material formed after helical plunging) from being formed by the Helical Plunge. The default setting is 25%.

Mill Plunge Ramp Slope—the slope of the helical ramp for the milling tool. The range is 1° to 90°. Choosing 90° will result in a Straight Plunge. The default value is 10°.

Mill Plunge Type—the plunging strategy to use for the milling pass. Choose Straight or Helix. The default setting is Straight.

Milling Direction—the milling type. Select Conventional or Climb milling for canned milling cycles (e.g., frame, circle, and ellipse) and for contours (e.g., line, arc).

• The default is Climb.

• The choices are Conventional or Climb.

Milling Type—the type of cutting operation. Identifies whether the system should


automatically compensate for the diameter of the tool when determining tool path; select the cutter compensation or pocket type with the softkeys or drop-down list box. Refer to Cutter Compensation (preliminary), on page 2 - 9 for more information.

The values in the Milling Type field vary according to the block type:

For information about Milling Type in Mill Face, see Conversational Programming, Mill Face, on page 2 - 31.

For information about Milling type in Mill Triangle, Diamond, and Hexagon, see Conversational Programming, Insert Pockets, on page 2 - 70.

Mill Feed—the X-Y feedrate. The value initially displayed has been calculated by the control and can be retained or changed to a different value. See Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Min Cusp Overlap (%)—the minimum cutter overlap used for cusp height (percent of cutter diameter) with a flat end mill. The Use Cusp Height field must be set to YES.

Minimum Length—the length (in number of characters) when Assure Minimum Length field is set to Yes. This field only appears when Assure Minimum Length is Yes.

Minimum Z—the working envelope the probe tip uses to search for part features in Z machine coordinates.

Min Length Delta—the distance below probe stylus or beam that the Z axis is allowed to travel; determines Min Z Position. Absolute Tool Length mode only.

Minus/Plus A/B/C Direction Travel Limit—the maximum and minimum travel limits for the A, B, and C axes in System Configuration.

Mill Contour Mill Circle, Frame, Ellipse, Slot, Polygon Mill Face Mill Triangle,

Diamond, Hexagon

On On X Unidirectional Inside

Left Inside X Bidirectional Inside 2 Passes

Right Outside Y Unidirectional Pocket Out/In

Profile Left Inside Tangent Y Bidirectional Pocket Out/In 2 Pass

Profile Right Outside Tangent Pocket In/Out

Pocket Boundary Pocket Boundary Pocket In/Out 2 Pass

Pocket Island Pocket Island

When the cursor is in any of these fields, the RESET PROBE WORK REGION TO MAXIMUM (F4) and STORE MACHINE POSITION (F7) softkeys become active.

• The RESET PROBE WORK REGION TO MAXIMUM (F4) softkey allows you to expand the working envelope for a new part.

• You can jog the axes and use the STORE MACHINE POSITION (F7) softkey to record the positions.


Minus/Plus X/Y/Z Direction Travel Limit—the maximum and minimum travel limits for the X, Y and Z axes in System Configuration.

Min Z—limits the negative Z motion to the Centerline Z value when set to Yes.

Min Z Position—the lowest position that Z will be allowed to travel during the probe cycle. This parameter sets up a safety zone for each tool. This value must be low enough to allow proper deflection of the probe. This is especially important when checking diameter as the tool must drop down next to the probe stylus.

Monitored Variable Number—the variable number to be monitored.

Move to Safe Pos During TC—indicates whether or not the table will move to the right/front of the machine when the operator is changing a tool. If this field is set to Yes when a part program block calls for a tool change, the table will move out of the way.

Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC—Manual Mode ATC operations are performed at Safety Position when enabled. See Machine Parameters Page 3, on page 1 - 69 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Multi-Tool Probing—specifies if multiple tools are to be probed. Yes will include current tool in multi-tool probe cycle.

N

Name—the file name of the part program. This field appears in Program Properties as read-only.

NC Dialect—Basic or Industry Standard NC.

NC Display Type—select axes data:

• Standard = 3-axis

• Rotary A or Rotary B = 4-axis

• Rotary A, Tilt B or Tilt A, Rotary C = 5-axis

• Universal Rotary = all types (default)

NC Optional Program Stop—specifies if program should stop on M01 command.

Neck Diameter—the diameter of the tool neck.

New Feed—the new Feed in a Change block.

New Finish Tool—the new tool for the finish pass in a Change block.

New Plunge Feed—the new Plunge Feed in a Change block.

New Speed (RPM)—the new Speed (RPM) in a Change block.

New Tool—the new Tool in a Change block.


New Tool Number—the new number assigned to a tool in Tool Setup.

Next Serial Number—displays the serial number that will be milled on the next cycle.

Next Tool—the tool that will be moved to the spindle by the next tool change.

Notes—a description of the touch-off device in Tool Measurement screen. To change the specified device number, select any field for that device.

Number—in Pattern data block, the number of times a pattern will be repeated along the defined line or path.

—in Universal Transform Plane Groups, the number of transform planes in the sequence.

Number of Axes Present—the number of axes present on the machining center.

Number of Holes—the number of holes in the pattern, including those skipped. Up to 250 holes can be programmed in one operation.

Number Of Sides—the number of sides the polygon will have, from three to 100.

O

Offset—in Plane Intersection part probing, the X or Y offset position (1, 2,...).

—in Two Point Edge Skew cycle part probing, the point offset from the original start point, which determines the second start point.

Offset X—the X offset positions from the Start location.

Offset Y—the Y offset positions from the Start location.

Offset Z—the Z dimension offset for part zero in Zero Calibration mode. This field is usually left at 0 and the Tool Calibration field in Tool Setup is used to determine each tool's part zero.

• To use Store Position softkey in Part Setup, the calibrated tool previously defined in Tool Setup for this program must be in the spindle.

• Entering a value in the Offset Z field adds or subtracts the amount of the offset to/from the Tool Calibration value. For example, you can adjust all Tool Calibration values in the Z axis and Z Start to compensate for part thickness by changing the Offset Z value without recalibrating each tool.

• The Include Offset Z in Tool Zero Cal parameter indicates if Offset Z is added to the Zero Calibration value when tool calibration is set using Store Machine Position. See Program Parameters, on page 1 - 124 for more information.

Operation—the operation number of the function (drill, tap, bore, etc). The system determines the operation number by the position of the function in the data block. Select the type of operation using the drop-down list or softkeys.

Operator Specify Pocket Start—if Yes, the pocket start location fields will appear on


pocket boundary screens, when Pocket Type Inward, ADP Zigzag, or ADP 1-Way are selected. The default setting is No. The value of Pocket Plunge Near Center is ignored.

Opt Stop On (Off)—the status (on or off) of the Optional Stop.

Orient Method—the method, Angles or Vectors, used to orient the transform plane:

• Angles—uses degree of rotation around X, Y, or Z.

• Vectors—uses a plane of rotation defined using two perpendicular vectors.

Orientation—in Mill Thread, specifies Inside or Outside threads.

—in Mill Triangle, the angle to rotate the pocket about the center. Leaving the field at zero specifies no rotation. A negative value will angle downward; a positive value will angle upward. See Conversational Programming, Mill Triangle, on page 2 - 71.

—in Stick and True-Type Lettering blocks, the angle of the text. The center of rotation is located at the reference point. Leaving the field at zero specifies no rotation. A negative value will angle the end of the text string in an upward direction; a positive value will angle the end of the text string in a downward direction.

—in the DRO, the orientation of the axes.

Orientation Angle—rotates the part in a Mill Polygon block. This field specifies an angle relative to the X axis that determines where the starting side occurs. An orientation of 0° indicates that the starting side is at the bottom of the polygon, parallel to the X axis. For example:

Origin Point—the coordinates in XYZ, from part zero, where the rotation begins.

Overlap—the percentage of tool diameter that overlaps for each pass in a pocket milling operation with Adaptipath (when Pocket Type is ADP Zigzag or ADP 1-Way). Specify Target (default 50) and Minimum (default 10) overlap percentages.

Overload Status—indicates Tripped or Not Tripped. Not Tripped is required to operate the machine.

Override Lockout—disables the Axis Feed dial on the jog unit of Hurco controls when set to On. The default is Off.

Override Machine Configuration—specify Yes to override the machine configuration with different rotary axis settings for graphics display.

0° Angle 45° Angle

Starting Side Starting Side


Overwrite Existing Zero Calibration—(Zero Calibration mode) when matching tools during a program load, the zero calibration from the program replaces the calibration for the tool on the machine. Default is YES.

P

Pallet—in Machine Function data block, the action the pallet makes when M70 (Pallet Change) is called:

• Exchange—pallets are exchanged

• Cycle to Pallet 1

• Cycle to Pallet 2

Pallet in Machine—indicates whether the APC table Position 1 or 2 is in the machining area.

Pallet Pin—indicates if the APC Pin is Locked or Unlocked. The operator uses the Manual Table Release Lever to engage/disengage the pallet pin. The pallet pin must be engaged to allow and APC cycle.

Pallet Reference Position—indicates if the pallet is in the correct orientation. Pallet must be in the correct orientation before engaging the pallet pin. The Manual Table Release Lever must be at Reference Pos to begin an APC cycle.

Pallet Status in Machine—indicates Pallet Squared/Not Squared. Pallet must be squared to begin an APC cycle.

Parity—provides simple error checking for transmitted data:

• Select Even if the data bits plus the parity bit result in an even number of 1's

• Select Odd if the data bits plus the parity bit result in an odd number of 1’s.

• Select None if there is no parity bit included in the transmission. When No is selected, its assumed that there are other forms of checking that will detect any errors in transmission.

• For example, suppose the data bits 01110001 are transmitted to your computer. If even parity is selected, then the parity bit is set to 0 by the transmitting device to produce an even number of 1's. If odd parity is selected, then the parity bit is set to 1 by the transmitting device to produce an odd number of 1's.

Part—the current relative axes location or distance-to-go (DTG).

Part Count—the number of parts already completed. This field can be edited by selecting the Reset Part Count softkey. A pop-up window opens, where the part count value can be changed or reset to zero.

The OVERWRITE EXISTING ZERO CALIBRATION setting applies both to tools that are automatically matched (during a program load), as well as tools that are manually matched.


Part Kinematics Z Reference—enter or store the Z axis position for the Part Kinematics Z Reference location.

Part Probe Cycle—the type of cycle selected.

Part Program Name—the name of the current part program.

Part Program Path—the part program’s directory path.

Part Surface—specify Yes or No to show the part surface in graphic display (appears as solid cyan line).

Part X Offset—manually offsets part zero in the DXF drawing. All dimensions are calculated from this point.

Part Y Offset—manually offsets part zero in the DXF drawing. All dimensions are calculated from this point.

Part Zero IV—the 4th-axis part zero coordinate in universal rotary configuration.

Part Zero V—the 5th-axis part zero coordinate in universal rotary configuration.

Part Zero A—the A-axis part zero rotary coordinate.

Part Zero B—the B-axis part zero rotary coordinate.

Part Zero C—the C-axis part zero rotary coordinate.

Part Zero Cycle—the type of cycle chosen from the Part Zero Probe Cycles softkey menu.

Part Zero X—the X-axis part zero coordinate.

Part Zero Y—the Y-axis part zero coordinate.

Part Zero Z—the distance from Machine Zero to the workpiece Z0 of the part in Absolute Tool Length Mode,. This field defaults to zero for all new programs. See Absolute Tool Length mode, on page 1 - 102 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

• Touch the top of workpiece with the tip of a calibrated tool and select the Calculate Part Z with Current Tool softkey. The value is automatically entered into the field as the distance from the touch-off gauge block to the workpiece.

• To add an offset, add or subtract a value from the Part Zero Z value.

Part Zero Z Shift—the global offset to the Part Zero value in Z (Absolute Tool Length Mode).

Password—the password that corresponds to the user name and allows access to the FTP Server.

Path—in Program Properties, the media and directory path to the saved program. Field appears as read-only.

If this field is not set before running a part program, tools will plunge to the gauge block height.


Path—in FTP Server Settings, the file path that the users will be allowed access to.

Peck Clearance Plane—the relative distance to the previous peck level. In conversational programming, the tool retracts to Z Start after each peck. The tool then rapids down to a position which is the Peck Clearance distance above the previous peck level before plunging to the next peck level at plunge feedrate.

• The default is 0.05 inches (1.27 mm).


Peck Depth—in Milling blocks, the maximum depth to be cut in one pass. If the total depth is greater than this value, multiple cutting passes occur. Entering a zero (0) value causes the total programmed depth to be cut in one pass of the tool.

—in Drill/Custom Drill, the distance the tool drills down into the part before stopping to clear out or break the chips. If used, this parameter is usually not larger than the tool's diameter. If a specific number of pecks is desired, the value for Peck Depth can be calculated by determining the absolute distance between Z Start and Z Bottom and dividing that value by the desired number of pecks. For example: a distance of 1.0000 inch between Z Start and Z Bottom divided by a peck depth of 0.2500 inch requires four (4) pecks to drill the hole.

Pecking Retract Clearance—in Drill/Custom Drill, an incremental distance above or below Z Start, to which the tool retracts between pecks.

• Field is only enabled when Peck Type is Standard.

• Defaults to 0.0, in which case the tool returns to Z Start between pecks.

• This value may be negative, indicating a peck retract plane below Z Start.

• If Peck Depth = 0.0, this field is disabled.

—in General 1 Program Parameters, the height above Z Start to which the tool should move between milling operations. Field is active when Enable Pecking Retract Clearance parameter is set to On.

Peck Retract Feed—the feed rate for the move out of the hole, when Rapid Peck Retract is No.

Peck Type—the type of pecking; used only with a Drill or Customer Drill operation. Two softkey choices appear: Standard and Chip Breaker.

• Standard - the tool retracts to Z Start or the location specified in the Pecking Retract Clearance field between pecks.

• Chip Breaker - the tool dwells at each peck level before continuing to feed to the next peck level. (Dwell time is the time selected in Program Parameters or Change Parameters (Holes).

Pitch—the distance between threads. In a Mill Thread block, field is read-only for multi-cutter thread mills; the value comes from Tool Setup. If this value is changed by the operator, the TPI is recalculated.

This field applies only to Holes drilling operations and has no relationship to the Pecking Retract Clearance field in Program Parameters, which applies only to Milling operations.


—in Tool Setup, appears when the tool type is Tap or Thread Mill (MC). Threads per Inch (TPI) appears when the program’s unit of measurement is inch. Pitch appears when millimeter is the selected unit of measurement. The range is 0.0 through 1000.00 inches for TPI (0.0 to 2514.6 mm for Pitch). If you enter a value for TPI, WinMax automatically calculates the Pitch. If you enter a value for Pitch, WinMax calculates TPI. “CAL” appears next to the calculated value.

Plunge Feed—the feed rate for the tool moving from Z Start to Z Bottom.

—in Tool Setup, the default plunge feed for the tool. This value is calculated based on diameter and feed per revolution. Value may also be entered directly into the field. Depending on tool type this field may be Feed.

Plunge Speed— the speed of the spindle with the tool closed while entering or exiting the hole in a Back Spotface operation.

Plunges—specify Yes or No to show plunge moves in graphics display (appears as purple lines). Default is Yes.

Pocket First—select YES if pocketing should be done before milling the swept surface.

Pocket Plunge Near Center—if Yes, UltiPocket will attempt to perform a plunge at the approximate center of the pocket and then move to the start point of the pocket. If the software detects an interference with plunging in the center, the plunge will be made at the start of the tool path. The default setting is No.

Pocket Overlap— the percentage of tool diameter that overlaps for each pass in a pocket milling operation. Appears when Pocket Boundary Milling Type is selected with Inward or Outward Pocket Type.

If the overlap is less than 50%, the toolpath may make additional moves to clean out the pocket. For example (toolpath is red):

The Pocket Plunge Near Center parameter may be used with frames, circles, ellipses, and contours with Pocket Type Inward, and contours with Pocket Type Outward.

Frames, circles, and ellipses with Pocket Type Outward automatically attempt to plunge to the center.

Additional corner moves for Pocket Overlap of 25%


Pocket Rough SFQ—Surface Finish Quality for pocket roughing.

Pocket Finish SFQ—Surface Finish Quality for pocket finishing.

Pocket Type—appears when Pocket Boundary is chosen for Milling Type. Defines if tool movement is Inside, Outside, ADP Zigzag, or ADP 1-Way. Requires the UltiPockets options, see Pocket Boundary, on page 12 - 2 in the UltiPockets chapter.

Pocket X Start—the X coordinate pocket plunge point.

Pocket Y Start—the Y coordinate pocket plunge point.

Present—the presence of a part probe. Select the Yes or No softkey to indicate whether the probe is present. If not present, then the remaining part probe parameters are not used.

Preset X—the offset for Part Zero X. Entering an offset in this field is optional.

The offset(s) will be subtracted from the center point and applied to Part Zero X if you select the ACCEPT POSITION AS PART ZERO softkey, which appears after the cycle has been run. This field appears when the Probing Axis is X or Y. It is not available for Probing Axis Z.

Preset Y—the offset for Part Zero Y. Entering an offset in this field is optional.

The offset(s) will be subtracted from the center point and applied to Part Zero Y if you select the ACCEPT POSITION AS PART ZERO softkey, which appears after the cycle has been run. This field appears when the Probing Axis is X or Y. It is not available for Probing Axis Z.

Probe Axis—the X, Y, or Z (Edge cycle) axis to probe. (Edge, Slot, and Web cycles only.)

Probe Cycle Type—the type of tool monitoring selected from the Probe Tool Monitoring menu: Tool Breakage Detection, Length Wear, Diameter Wear, or Length and Diameter Wear.

Probe Direction X—the direction, positive or negative, the probe moves when looking for the part.

Probe Direction Y—the direction, positive or negative, the probe moves when looking for the part.

If you change the Pocket Overlap using this field and save the file as an HD3 file, a Change Parameters data block will be inserted into the HD3 file to make the Pocket Overlap change. The Change Parameters block changes only the Pocket Overlap, leaving all other parameters as they were.

SFQ Desired Result





Probe Z—the distance from Z Zero to the top of the part (i.e., the height, or Z Plane), including the reference tool or part probe in the spindle; in Zero Calibration mode.

Probing Axis—the axis of deflection in the X/Y plane. Orientation of the probe will determine if it deflects along the X axis or the Y axis. It is assumed the probe will always deflect along the Z axis.

Probing Direction—the direction to probe: Positive or Negative. This field appears when the Probing Axis is X or Y. It is not available for Probing Axis Z.

Probing Direction X—the X direction to probe: Positive or Negative.

Probing Direction Y—the Y direction to probe: Positive or Negative.

Probing Length X—the maximum value of the estimated X length. Half of this value is used to determine the point at which the Z axis begins to move downward; i.e., its horizontal travel limit for X.

Probing Length Y—the maximum value of the estimated Y length. Half of this value is used to determine the point at which the Z axis begins to move downward; i.e., its horizontal travel limit for Y.

Probing Method—the Probing Method selected on the Tool Probing screen. Field is read-only.

Probing Radius—a value for the probe search radius. This value is used for determining the point at which the probe stops horizontal travel and begins to move downward.

Profile Number—the number of the Swept Surface profile.

Program Number—the NC program number.

Program Run Time—the time the program has been running.

Program Type—the type of program. Use the drop-down list to change the program type. The default Conversational Program Type can be set in Conversational Settings, see Conversational Settings, on page 1 - 48 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Protocol—the format in which the data is communicated. Choose from CTS/RTS (hardware flow control), Xon/Xoff (software flow control), and Full Handshake.

Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable—sets the Washdown Coolant pump run cycle; used in conjunction with other washdown coolant parameters. See Machine Parameters Page 1, on page 1 - 62 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Put Block Before—move a block in the program before the indicated block.

R

R(%)—the current Rapid Traverse Feedrate percentage set on the Rapid override knob.

Radial Peck Count—the number of radial peck passes in Mill Thread. If radial pecking is


not desired, set this field to 1 (default). See Radial Pecks, on page 2 - 53 in Conversational Programming for more information.

Radial Peck Depth—the incremental distance from the final cut when using radial pecking in Mill Thread. See Radial Pecks, on page 2 - 53 in Conversational Programming for more information.

Radius—the distance from the center point to start and end points.

—in Bolt Circle, the radius of the circle between the coordinate center and the center of the cutter's starting point.

—in Mill Thread, the radius of the major threads. When tapered threads are enabled, this is the radius at thread top.

—in Mill Triangle, the value for the radius of the inscribed circle.

—in Stock Geometry, the stock radius when Stock Type is Cylinder.

Radius Bottom—the plunge bottom point. Value may be positive or negative; negative values produce inside-cylinder milling.

Radius End—point where the Z-axis plunge into the cylinder ends.

Radius Start—the plunge feedrate start point. Value may be positive or negative; negative values produce inside-cylinder milling.

The value of Radius Start can be changed only in the segment in which it was created.

Rapid Clearance—the distance above the probe stylus or beam that determines Rapid Z Position (based on approximate tool length and probe height in Z calibration). Absolute Tool Length only.

Rapid Feedrate Override Max—Parameter not accessible by the user. Contact a Hurco Certified Service representative for assistance.

Rapid Feedrate Override Min—sets the Rapid Feedrate Override Minimum value. See Machine Parameters Page 4, on page 1 - 76 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Rapid Peck Retract—determines the rate at which the tool moves to the retract plane. When set to Yes, the tool will rapid back up to the retract plane. When set to No, the tool will feed back up to the retract plane at the feed rate specified in the Peck Retract Feed field.

Rapids—specify Yes or No to show rapid moves in graphic display (appears as yellow solid lines).

Rapid Traverse—the feedrate that the table (X and Y axes) moves between one point in the part program to the next point in the program (rapid table positioning). Set in Program Parameters, on page 1 - 124 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill.

• The default is 400 ipm (10160.0 mm/min).

• The Range MAX value is user-defined in the Maximum Rapid Traverse Rate field on the Machine Specifications screen. The Range MIN value is 0.1 ipm


(2.54 mm/min).

Rapid Z Position—the tool (in the Z axis) rapids down to this position and then continues downward at the speed specified in the Fast Feed field. For Zero Calibration mode, use the remote jog unit or type in a value for the Rapid Z Position field; For Absolute Tool Length mode the value is determined by Rapid Clearance. With the cursor in this field, the Position Tool Over Probe softkey can be used to position the tool over the probe before jogging Z to the desired position.

Ream Chamfer—the angle of the tool shaft.

Reference Point X—the reference point for the G28 command. The WinMax software allows you to select the tool change positions (X, Y, Z) or maximum travel limit (X, Y).

Reference Point Y—the reference point for the G28 command. The WinMax software allows you to select the tool change positions (X, Y, Z) or maximum travel limit (X, Y).

Reference Point Z—the reference point for the G28 command. The WinMax software allows you to select the tool change positions (X, Y, Z) or maximum travel limit (X, Y).

Refresh Speed—the refresh speed for graphics rendering. Choose one of seven options between fastest speed (Fastest Completion) to smoothest rendering (Smoothest). Default is Smoothest.

Relief 1—for Triangle, Diamond, and Hexagon, the direction of corner relief cut and the depth past the corner of the two walls. Provides the option of a right, center, or left relief cut (or none) in the corner at point 1.

Relief 2—for Diamond 1 Face and Hexagon, gives the option of a right, center, or left relief cut (or none) in the corner at point 2.

Relief 3—for Hexagon, gives the option of a right, center, or left relief cut (or none) in the corner at point 3 or the option of a face relief distance between points 3 and 4.

Repeat Count—the number of times a machine function (M Code) should repeat in a Machine Function block.

Repetitions—the number of Slow Feed touches when touching tools to the probe. You can program up to 99 repetitions to get the average length and diameter of the tool.

Replace In Files—specify if new tool feeds and speeds should be updated in current editing file only or in all open files.

Reset Cutting Time on Tool Data Change—specify when to reset tool monitoring data:

• Type—when the tool type changes

• Diameter—when the tool diameter is out of the specified tolerance

• Length—when the tool length is out of the specified tolerance

For each, you can specify automatic reset, prompt to reset, or do not update (reset).

Reset Numbering—resets the serial number back to the first string of the sequence.


Select the Reset Numbering button or the Reset Numbering softkey.

Retain Probed Part Setup—allows the probed part setup and/or tool calibrations to be retained for new program runs. Choices are:

• Do Not Retain—no updates will be made to part zero or tool lengths.

• Retain All—retains part setup and tool calibrations.

For example, the following table shows Part Setup values for a sample program before and after a Probed Part Setup is executed:

If Retain Probed Part Setup is set to Do Not Retain, the original values for Part Setup and Zero Cal will be restored. Part Setup and Tool Setup will contain the original data (20, 10, 15, 0, and 18).

If Retain Probed Part Setup is set to Retain All, Part Setup and Tool Setup will contain the probed values (19.1234, 11.1111, 16.5555, 2.0045, and 17.4444).

Retract Clearance—the Z coordinate to which the Z axis positions before rapid table positioning. This includes a tool moving from one drilled hole to another, or from one milling operation to another (programmed in separate data blocks or generated as a patterns operation).

• The default is the maximum programmable Z travel. This is the difference between the Z-Axis MAX Travel and the Z-Axis MIN Travel as indicated on the Machine Specifications screen.


• If the next operation has a different Z Start value, the CNC always retracts to the highest dimension. When a Position block is programmed, the tool always retracts to the safety plane programmed as Z Top of the Safety Work Region.

Retract Feed—the feed rate to use when retracting away from the probe immediately

Previous versions of WinMax may have included additional selections which have subsequently been removed; older programs that contained a selection other than Do Not Retain or Retain All will be converted to Retain All upon opening, and a message will appear informing the user.

Original Part Setup values Probed Part Setup values

Part Zero X = 20.0000

Part Zero Y = 10.0000

Probe Z = 15.0000

Skew Angle = 0.0000

Zero Cal = 18.0000 (Tool Setup)

Part Zero X = 19.1234

Part Zero Y = 11.1111

Probe Z = 16.5555

Skew Angle = 2.0045

Zero Cal = 17.4444 (Tool Setup)

OFFSET Z is not affected in any way by the probe block or the parameter setting.


after a deflection. This value is also used for the slow moves when determining deflection offsets.

Retract INCR—scales the incremental moves that may be required if the probe is still deflected after the initial move.

Retract INIT—scales the initial retract move after a deflection.

Retract Override—when set to OFF the tool automatically retracts, reorients, and plunges, using a series of moves computed automatically that do not violate machine limits. Set to ON to override the automatic repositioning and enter a retract distance along the tool vector from the target position.

Retract Type—the Z level to which Z-axis retracts at the beginning of the Universal Rotary Position data block.

• Z Home—Z-axis will move at Rapid feedrate to the position defined in Z Machine field.

• Z Position—Z-axis will move at Rapid feedrate to the position entered in the Z Position field.

Reverse Dwell—the number of seconds that the spindle dwells, in a Back Spotface operation, when it is reversing to give the tool time to open or close.

Roll End Point—when YES, sweeps the profile down to the horizontal plane at the end point.

Roll Start Point—when YES, sweeps the profile down to the horizontal plane at the start point.

Rotary Axis ISO Standard—specifies if the positive direction of the rotary axis matches the ISO standard. In Graphics Settings, available when Override Machine Configuration is set to Yes.

Rotary Centerline X/Y/Z—the machine coordinate for the center of rotation.

Rotary Centerline X—the distance from part zero to the vertical axis around which the part will rotate. (Tilt B Rotary C configuration only.)

Rotary Centerline Y —the distance from part zero to the horizontal axis around which the part will rotate. (Tilt B Rotary C configuration only.)

Rotary Jog Feed—the rotary feedrate, entered on Manual screen (rotary machines only).

Rotary Orientation—the method to specify the orientation of rotary features in Universal Rotary Parameters: User Defined, Rotary A/AB, Rotary B, Rotary AC, Rotary BC.

Rotary Position Out of Tol Proc—specifies how to process “Out of position” conditions for the axes. See Machine Parameters Page 4, on page 1 - 76 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Rotary Rapid Feed—the feedrate of a rotary axis move.

Rotary Safety Move—when set to Yes, moves the X and Y axes to the locations defined


in X Safety Position and Y Safety Position fields before rotary-axis orientation.

Rotate Angle—the angle between the repeated patterns in Pattern Loop Angular and Pattern Loop Rotate.

Rotation Angle—the angle between each transform plane in the sequence, around the rotation axis.

Rotation Angles—appears with Angles method in Universal Transform Plane and Transform Plane Groups. Specify the rotation angle around X, Y, Z.

Rotation Axis—the axis around which the transform planes are rotated.

Rough SFQ—the Surface Finish Quality (SFQ) for the roughing operation. The SelectSurface Finish Quality option is required. Default SFQ for roughing is 80. Values are:

S

S(%)—the current spindle RPM percentage set on the Spindle Speed override knob.

S / Spindle—the current spindle speed. In some instances, “L” or “H” may be displayed next to the field to indicate low or high gear in use.

Safety Clearance—when set to OFF the tool will retract to machine limits; set to ON to enter a tool tip clearance.

Safety Work Region—a part-relative safety area to prevent the cutting tool from colliding with fixtures or other equipment. The Safety Work Region created in Part Setup is saved with a conversational part program; the Safety Work Region is not saved with NC programs.

Save Active Program Only—specify Yes to save only the current program; specify No to save all loaded programs; default is No.

Save Frequency—the number of minutes between each autosave; range is 1-255.

Save NC State with Program—when set to Yes, an NC State file is saved with the NC program, in the same directory and with the same name. Default is No.

Screen Configuration—(desktop only) select Dual Screen or Single Screen display. Default is Single.

Set the Rotary Safety Move field to Yes if there is a potential for collision between the rotary axis and the spindle.

SFQ Desired Result





Screensaver Timeout—set screensaver timeout in minutes (range is 1-30 minutes); default is 10.

Second Move—see Enable, X Position, and Y Position.

Segment—the segment number within the Mill Contour operation. The system determines the number by the position of this segment in the contour.

Setup Fast Feed—the feed rate to use for setup moves near the probe. For example, when dropping down next to the probe to measure diameter, the drop down move uses this feed rate. This value is also used for calibrating the probe and the initial touch when determining deflection offsets.

Shank Diameter—in Tool Setup, appears when the tool type is Back Spotface and represents the diameter of the tool shank.

Shape—the shape of the slot, either line or arc.

Shape Angle—the angle formed by points 1 and 3 defining the shape with a range from 20° to 160°.

Shift—see Part Zero Z Shift.

Show All File Types—view all file extensions when opening files; default is No (only displays HWM, HD3, HD5, FNC, HNC, and NC file types).

Show Graphics—the type of graphic display: Show All, Tool Path, or Solids.

Show Roughing Tool Path for 2D Surfaces—specify Yes or No to show all the roughing tool path, applies only to Toolpath graphics.

Show Roughing Tool Path for 3D Surfaces—specify Yes or No to show all the roughing tool path for 3D Molds and Swept Surfaces, applies only to Toolpath graphics.

Side Length—specifies the length of the side. This field is available when the Side Length Sizing Method is selected.

Sister Tool—the spare tool for tool quality monitoring. See Tool Quality Monitoring, on page 4 - 14 in Tool Probing.

Sizing Diameter—specifies the diameter of the circle. This field is available when the Outer or Inner Diameter Sizing Method is selected.

Sizing Method—how the polygon size is established:

• Outer Diameter—the diameter of a circle that encompasses the outside of the polygon, touching it at the corners:


• Inner Diameter—the diameter of a circle contained within the polygon, touching at the center of each edge:

• Side Length—the length of one side of the polygon:

Skew Axis—the X or Y axis as the skew axis. There is no skewing in Z.

Skew Cycle—the geometric feature for the Part Skew cycle.

Skew Start Positions—the location where the probing process begins. The easiest method for entering the start positions is to jog the probe down to the desired start location and press the Store Position key. A single push of this key automatically enters all three coordinates (X, Y, and Z) for one Start position.

Skip List—in Bolt Circle, Enter up to 24 positions that should be skipped (not drilled).

Slow Feed—the feed rate used when taking measurements after the initial deflection. The default value is 4 mm per minute for a touch probe, 25.4 mm per minute for a laser probe.

Smoothing Tolerance—the maximum allowable deviation from the tool path. The range is 0.0000 to 0.0500 inches (0.0000 to 1.2700 mm); default is 0.0005 inches (0.01270 mm). This corresponds to NC code G05.2

Softkey Menu Position—positions the softkey menu to the right or left of the screen; default is Right.

Speed (RPM)—the spindle speed for the tool. Entering a value in the Speed field in a data block overrides the Tool Setup value, for that data block.

See Feed and Speed Calculations, on page 1 - 113 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

The range is set in Machine Specifications, on page 1 - 44 in Utilities.

Spindle—the current spindle speed. In some instances, “L” or “H” may be displayed next to the field to indicate low or high gear in use.

Spindle Chiller—indicates No Alarm or Alarm. No Alarm is required to begin an ATC operation.


Spindle Clamp/Unclamp —indicates “ON” when spindle unclamp button is depressed, “OFF” when it is not.

Spindle Clearance—used only when measuring tool diameter. Specifies an additional distance to leave between the tool and tool probe when determining the tool diameter. This value can be adjusted to optimize probe cycle time.

Spindle Load Monitor—the percentage of full load on each axis as the program runs. The load is displayed in a bar graph format, with colors progressing from green to yellow to red to indicate the percentage of load from 0 to 150%.

Spindle Speed—the spindle speed when the Spindle Usage field is set to either CW or CCW. When the operator sets the diameter setting for the tool probe, the Spindle RPM field will be set to a suggested value – this value may be overwritten by the operator. The suggested value for RPM is only done when the tool is first entered.

Spindle Status—indicates if the Spindle is Oriented or Not Oriented, and clamped or unclamped. Oriented is required for ATC to begin.

Spindle Stop—the point at which the spindle stops rotating after drilling the hole in a Gun Drill cycle. This field may be set to be the Z Bottom or the Z Start position.

Spindle Usage—specifies the direction the spindle should turn during the probe cycle. Choices are: manual (free rotating), oriented, clockwise (CW) or counter clockwise (CCW).

Start Angle—in 3D Mold, the starting value of the angle of revolution for XY Revolved About X and XZ Revolved about Z. When determining Start Angle, remember that 0º is where the contour begins and is located at the 3 o'clock position. For more information, see 3D Mold, on page 2 - 34 in Conversational Programming.

• The difference between the start and end angle determines the degrees that the 2D profile revolves about the axis.

• Start and End angles can be entered as positive or negative numbers. CCW motion is programmed as a positive number; CW motion is programmed as a negative number:

—in Bolt Circle, the angle of the circle measured counter-clockwise from the 3 o'clock position to the first hole. This angle may be specified to the nearest one-thousandth of a degree.

—in Mill Thread, the starting angle for the threading operation in the XY plane. Zero

The default value for a touch tool probe is the reverse of the programmed tool. For example, if the tool is CW, Spindle Usage for a touch tool probe will default to CCW. For a laser tool probe, Spindle Usage value defaults to the programmed tool direction.


Angle is at the 3 o’clock position.

—in Part Probing, the three probe deflection points (Start Angles 1, 2, 3). Relative to the 3 o’clock position, and increasing counter-clockwise as viewed from above the part, the default angles are 0, 120, and 240, respectively. Change the angles if the part contains geometry that interferes with the defaults.

—in Pattern Loop Angular and Rotate, the angle value between the original pattern and the location of the first pattern created by this routine. If this location is the same as the original programmed pattern, the value in this field will be zero.

—in Mill Circle and Rotary Circle, the location of the plunge start point on the circle, -360 to +360. A positive value is counterclockwise (CCW) from the 3 o'clock position, and a negative value is clockwise (CW) from the 3 o'clock position. Default is 0. Field is not available when Milling Type is Pocket Boundary with Pocket Type Outward or when pocket with user defined pocket start points is used.

Start at Center—specifies if the threading operation should start at the center of the threads. Default is Yes. If set to No, the Blend Offset value from Program Parameters is used. This field is available only when the Internal Thread field is set to Yes.

Start Block—the number of the first block in the program to be changed or run.

Start Cap—the shape that is used to close the slot at the specified start point:

• Line—flat edge connects the top and bottom edges of the slot, passing through the programmed start point.

• Append Arc—rounded edge; center of semi-circle is programmed start point.

• Include Arc—rounded edge; outermost edge of semi-circle is programmed start point.

Start Coordinate Reference—indicates if the start coordinates for a Probe Part Setup are relative to the machine zero or to the active part zero.

Start Job—the number of the first job to be run.

Start Pushbutton—indicates Off or On. On is displayed when the Start Cycle button is pressed.

Start Side—tool plunges on or around the middle of the side selected: Bottom, Right, Top, Left. Default is Bottom. Plunge will be referenced from the middle of the chosen wall, or at the end of a corner if the corner is larger than half of the wall length.

This field is not available when Milling Type is Pocket Boundary with Pocket Type Outward, ADP Zigzag, or ADP 1-way, or when pocket with user-defined pocket start points is used.

Starting Sequence—in HD3 Serial Number Lettering, the characters for the first serial number. The sequence can contain any combination of alpha or numeric characters, but the last character in the sequence must be a digit (number). This field appears only when User-provided Data Origin is selected. Default is 1.

Step Connect Type—the type of segment (arc or line) to connect passes of normal cut direction.


Step Size—the distance between cutter passes. Ultimately, this dimension determines the surface finish of the part. A larger step size machines faster but leaves a rougher surface. A smaller step size machines more slowly but leaves a smoother surface. Step size significantly affects the drawing speed of the graphics screen.

Stock Allowance—leaves or removes extra material on the surface of a 3D contour. Can be used for roughing, undersizing, or oversizing a surface. A Ball-Nosed End Mill must be used to maintain a uniform stock allowance dimension over the complete 3D contour. A positive stock allowance value programmed using a Flat End Mill leaves sufficient material for a finishing pass:

Stock Allowance Mode—specifies whether the Finish XY and Finish Z parameters used are those set in Program Parameters (Program Parameters mode) or those set in the individual data blocks (Data Block mode).

Step Size

1 Print Dimension

2 + Stock Allowance

3 - Stock Allowance

In Data Block mode, the Allowance tab is active in the data block, and the values entered there supersede the Finish XY and Finish Z values from Program Parameters. Finish XY and Finish Z must be entered in the data block; they are not applied automatically.

When Milling Type is ON, only the Finish Z parameter appears in the Allowance tab.


Stock Outline—specify Yes or No to show the stock outline, which is set in the stock geometry screen (appears as green solid line). Refer to Stock Geometry, on page 1 - 101 in Part Setup for more information.

Stock Transparency—shows the stock in a solid (Opaque) or clear (Translucent) view, in graphics display. Default is Opaque.

Stock Type—the type of stock in Stock Geometry screen:

• Box—enables settings for X length, Y length, Z length of stock box or cube.

• Cylinder—enables direction, length, and radius of cylinder.

Stop—pauses program operation until further input from the operator:

• If set to Yes, the program is stopped, the spindle goes to its Z Top position, and the coolant shuts off.

• If set to Optional, the behavior is dependent on the state of the Optional Stop setting on the Auto screen. (Refer to Auto Mode Monitoring, on page 1 - 162 for information about the Optional Stop On/Off softkey.) If the Optional Stop is enabled on the Auto screen, the program will be stopped (same as Yes). If it is not enabled, no stop occurs (same as No).

• If set to No, no stop occurs.

—in Universal Rotary Position block, Yes pauses program execution after the Rotary Position data block is executed. To restart the program, press the Start Cycle console button.

Stop Bits—stop bits signal the end of the transmission of data. Choose the size for the Stop Bit.

Store Result As—the destination for the probed length and/or diameter value.

Stylus Diameter—the stylus tip diameter, available on the specification sheet for the probing equipment.

Stylus Length—the length of the probe stylus.

Stylus Width—the width of the probe’s stylus along the Probing Axis (touch tool probe only).

Surface Finish Quality (Roughing Default)—the SFQ value for the roughing operation.

Surface Finish Quality (Finishing Default)—the SFQ value for the finishing operation.

Surface Side—the side of the Along contour on which the profile is cut:

• When set to Right, the profile is cut to the right of the contour forming a surface to the right of the along contour.

• When set to Left, the PROFILE is cut to left of the contour creating a surface

Press the flashing Start Cycle button to continue with the part program.


to the left of the along contour.

Surface Speed—the tool surface speed in feet per minute (or meters per minute), See Feed and Speed Calculations, on page 1 - 113 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Swap Screens—in User Interface Settings, select Yes or No to switch, or swap, the left and right screens on dual-screen Max5 consoles. When set to Yes, console keys ctrl + Home will swap screens, ctrl + Home again will swap the screens back.

Sweep Angle—the angular distance from the start point to the end point around the center point. The range is -360° to 360°.

T

Taper Angle—specifies the angle for tapered threads. External threads must be positive, and internal threads must be negative. Enter zero for non-tapered threads. This field is available only when the tool is a single-cutter thread mill.

Tap Retract (%)—the retract speed for a tap operation, as a percentage of the plunge speed. Appears only when the UltiMotion option is on.

• The default is 200%.

• The range is 50-1000%.

Text—the text to be milled.

Text Height—the height of the text.

Text Offset—the distance between the contour and the reference point of the text

Text Width—in Stick Lettering Along Contour, field appears when Specify Width is selected as Width Method. Enter the total width of the text along the contour, or use the Calculate Text Width softkey to automatically calculate the text width based on the contour length.

— in Rotary True-Type Lettering, the width of the text.

Third Move (End Position)—see X Position, Y Position, IV Angle, and V Angle.

Thread Bottom—specifies the Z position for the bottom of the thread.

Thread Diameter—in Tool Setup, appears when the tool type is Tap. Select the Tap icon, located to the right of the field. Choose the appropriate diameter from the pop-up box, as shown below:


Thread Top—specifies the Z position for the top of the thread.

Tilt Axis Preference—the tilt axis preference: neutral, positive, or negative. Neutral indicates no preference. In Graphics Settings, available when Override Machine Configuration is set to Yes.

Tilt Axis Safety Position—sets the position for the tilt axis during an automatic tool change when the Table Safety Move parameter is set to Yes for an Automatic Tool Change. See Machine Parameters Page 2, on page 1 - 65 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Time / Program Run Time—the time the program has been running.

Tip Angle—the angle of the tool tip.

Tip Diameter—the tool tip diameter.

Tip Length—the tool tip length.

TIS / Tool in Spindle—the tool number of the tool in the spindle.

Tool—the number and name of the tool used in the operation.

Tool Calibration Mode—sets the method used to calibrate tools.:

• Zero Calibration—stores the tip of tool dimension relative to home position (machine zero in z axis). See Zero Calibration Mode, on page 1 - 105 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

• Absolute Tool Length—stores the actual length of the tool from spindle nose to the tip of tool. See Absolute Tool Length mode, on page 1 - 102 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information. This is the default setting.

Tool Cal Length—the length of the tool from the spindle nose to the tip of the tool. Field

Select desired diameter

Touch to select

Use the sliderto select range


is available in Absolute Tool Length mode only. See Absolute Tool Length mode, on page 1 - 102 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Tool Change Optimization—indicates if Tool Change Optimization should be enabled for the program. Default is Yes. (This field is available in Program Parameters only; it is not available in Change Parameters.)

• No—Any Tool Change Optimization blocks are ignored by the program.

• Yes—Tool Change Optimization blocks are used by the program.

See Tool Change Optimization, on page 2 - 126 in Conversational Programming for more information.

Tool Holder—in HMX ATC Diagnostics, indicates 0° or 90° position. 0° is required for ATC Status Home.

—in VM, VMX, VTXU ATC/Machine Diagnostics, indicates Up or Down position. Up is required for ATC Status Home.

Tool in Spindle—the tool number in the Spindle.

Tool Length—the length of the tool.

Tool Length Tolerance—the value used for NC tool probing.

Tool Number—the number of the programmed tool.

Tool Path—specify Yes or No to show the tool path (appears as red dashed line).

Tool SFQ—the Surface Finish Quality (SFQ) that will be applied to the tool in NC programs. Set in the NC SFQ tab of Advance Tool Settings.

Tool Type—the type of tool. Use the appropriate softkey or drop-down list to select a tool type. If you do not see the type of tool that you wish to use, select the More softkey to display more tool type softkeys. The tool types are:


Touch-Off Device—the device used for touch-off. A read-only area displays notes that were entered for the device.

—in Tool Setup, displays the touch off device and type (gauge or probe) specified on the Tool Measurement screen. Displayed for reference only; edited on the Tool Measurement screen.

TPI—the threads per inch. This field is available only when units are imperial (inch). In Mill Thread, field is read-only for multi-cutter thread mills; the value comes from Tool Setup. When this value changes, the pitch is recalculated.

—in Tool Setup, appears when the tool type is Tap or Thread Mill (MC). Threads per Inch (TPI) appears when the program’s unit of measurement is inch. Pitch appears when millimeter is the selected unit of measurement. The range is 0.0 through 1000.00 inches for TPI (0.0 to 2514.6 mm for Pitch). If you enter a value for TPI, WinMax automatically calculates the Pitch. If you enter a value for Pitch, WinMax calculates TPI. “CAL” appears next to the calculated value.

Transform Part Zero—when set to Yes, used to activate Transform Plane for a non-rotary data block machined on multiple sides of a part. Refer to Universal Transform Plane, on page 5 - 8 in Rotary Programming for information about using Transform Plane in a Conversational rotary part program.

Type—in 3D Mold, the type of operation:

• Draw 2D Contour—renders the 2D contour

• XY Revolved about X—use a 2D contour programmed in the XY plane and revolve it about a centerline on the X axis to produce the finished 3D contour.

Standard Tools WinMax-Only Tools

Drill Ream

Tap Spot Drill

Boring Head Forming Tap

End Mill Counter Bore

Face Mill Counter Sink

Ball End Mill Keyseat Mill

Back Spotface Drill Thread Mill (SC)

Probe Thread Mill (MC)

Gun Drill Corner Round Mill

Center Drill Dove Tail Mill

Chamfer Mill Engraving Mill

Bull Nose Mill Taper Radius End Mill

Custom Tool


• XZ Revolved about Z—use a 2D contour programmed in the XZ plane and revolve it about a centerline on the Z axis to produce the finished 3D contour.

• XZ Translated in Y—use a 2D contour programmed in the XZ plane and translate it in the Y axis.

—in Insert Block, the type of code: Text or APT.

—in Laser Probe parameters, the type of tool probe. If a tool probe is not present, the remaining tool probe parameters are not used.

—in Swept Surface, the type of operation:

• Draw Profile(s)—program the XZ or YZ part dimensions.

• Draw Along—program the XY contour that the XZ or YZ profile follows.

• Swept Surface—program the details of the Swept Surface.

Type of Corners—the type of corner (rounded, extended, or truncated) to insert when there is a change of direction in the Draw Along contour in a Swept Surface block.

U

Universal Type—the type of machine when using Universal Rotary configuration, for graphics rendering.

Update Data Blocks With Tool Changes—Update feeds and speeds in conversational data blocks when tool feeds and speeds are changed. Specify if update this should occur automatically, prompt first, or should not update. Tool Utilities and Settings.

UPS Software Shutdown Off Time—sets the number of minutes the system will wait before it shuts down after a power loss condition has been detected. See Machine Parameters Page 1, on page 1 - 62 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Use Chord Error From Program—specify Yes or No to use the chord error value programmed in general parameters when rendering curves in NC in graphics display.

Use Cusp Height—when YES, step over is calculated from the specified cusp height. Used only with flat and ball end mills in a Swept Surface block.

Use Offset Z —in Zero Calibration mode only, available when Transform Part Zero is Yes. Determines if the value in the Offset Z field on the Part Setup screen will be used by the machine in a transformed plane. The default value is No. Refer to Rotary Part Programming, on page 5 - 5 in Rotary Programming for information about the Offset Z field.

• When set to Yes, the value in the Offset Z field on the Part Setup screen will be used to establish the part zero coordinate system in Transform Plane operations.

• When set to No, the value in the Offset Z field on the Part Setup screen will


be added or subtracted from the Z calibration point during Transform Plane operations.

Use Tool Type Checking—Yes only allows the selection of tool types that are valid for the operation in conversational mode:

• YES—only the tools that are valid for the data block can be selected (i.e., drills and taps displayed for hole operations).

• NO—allows any tool to be selected for any data block.

User Name—the log in name that will allow users access to the FTP Server.

V

V Angle—rotary-axis coordinate (angle) relative to Part Zero A or Part Zero C, depending on the configuration of your machine. Enabled when the Enable field is set to YES.

Variable Reset Value—the NC variable reset value.

Vertical/Horizontal—the current orientation of the machine. This field will be vertical for vertical machines and horizontal for horizontal machines. For universal machines, this field can be either vertical or horizontal.

W

Warm-Up Axis Feed Rate—Sets the axis feed rate for each step of the warm-up cycle. See Machine Parameters Page 4, on page 1 - 76 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Warm-Up Cycle Time Per Pass—sets the time for each step of the warm-up cycle. See Machine Parameters Page 4, on page 1 - 76 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Warm-Up Max Spindle Speed—sets the spindle speed for the final step of the warm-up cycle. See Machine Parameters Page 4, on page 1 - 76 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Warm-Up Speed Steps—sets spindle speed increments for each step of the warm-up cycle. See Machine Parameters Page 4, on page 1 - 76 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Warm-Up Starting Speed—sets the spindle speed for the initial step of the warm-up cycle. See Machine Parameters Page 4, on page 1 - 76 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Warn Before Saving in Old Format—select Yes to display a warning message when a program is about to be saved in the HD3 file format, which may not support some conversational features.


Washdown Off Delay Timer—the time the washdown coolant pump is off; used with Washdown On Delay Timer. See Machine Parameters Page 1, on page 1 - 62 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Washdown On Delay Timer—the time the washdown coolant pump is on; used with Washdown Off Delay Timer. See Machine Parameters Page 1, on page 1 - 62 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Way Lube Level—indicates Level OK or Low Level. A Low Level alarm will not allow programs to start running.

Width—the width of the slot. The slot width determines how far to expand the centerline or center arc segment programmed in the Geometry tab. Half of the programmed width is applied to each side of the line or arc.

Width Method—in Stick Lettering Along Contour, the method of determining the width of the text:



Write Protection—prevents changes to the program from being saved when set to ON. Changes can be made if set to OFF.

X

X—the X coordinate for a point on a line about which the Mirror Image routine occurs, as measured from part zero to the mirror line.

—in Position and Rotary Position data block, the X-axis coordinate where the mill feature will be located on the part. This dimension is measured relative to Part Zero.

—in Manual Rapid Move, the X end position of the move in a linear axis.

X Axis Safety Position—sets the absolute X axis machine location to which the table will move when the Table Safety Move parameter is set to Yes for an Automatic Tool Change. See Machine Parameters Page 2, on page 1 - 65 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

X Center—the X-axis coordinate for the center point of the shape.

—in Mill thread, the X-axis coordinate for the center of the thread.

—in Pattern Loop Angular and Rotate, the X coordinate of the reference point about which the pattern is rotated.

X Corner—the X coordinate of any one of the four corners of a frame or face which then becomes the reference corner.

A write-protected program can be saved with a different program name. The user will be prompted to do this when attempting to save.


X Direction—appears with Vector method in Universal Transform Plane/Transform Plane Groups. Enter I, J, K vector components for the X direction.

X Distance—the distance between the repeated patterns along the X axis line in Pattern blocks (negative values indicate direction.)

—in Transform Plane Groups, the distance between each transform plane in the sequence, along the X axis.

X End—the end point of the line in X.

X Length—the length of the rectangle along the X axis, measured from the reference corner. This value is positive or negative relative to the reference corner. If the reference corner is at the left side of the rectangle, the X Length is a positive (+) dimension. If the reference corner is at the right side, this field's value is negative (-).

—in Stick Lettering, the X axis length of the Sizing Box.

—in Stock Geometry, the X length of the stock (when Stock Type is Box.).

X Max—the maximum X coordinate to define the working envelope the probe tip uses to search for part features in X and Y machine coordinates. This envelope also helps protect against crashing the probe. These fields are similar to the safety work region in Part Setup.

X Min—the minimum X coordinate to define the working envelope the probe tip uses to search for part features in X and Y machine coordinates. This envelope also helps protect against crashing the probe. These fields are similar to the safety work region in Part Setup.

X Number—the number of times the programmed routine will be repeated along a line parallel to the X axis in Pattern Loop Rectangular.

X Offset—the offset for the X axis, to be added to the X dimension in the data block.

X Point—the plane of the arc in X when it is 180° or greater.

X Position—the X-axis coordinate relative to Part Zero X.

—in Universal Rotary Position, the location to which the X axis will move before the rotary axis orients.

X Radius—the distance along the X axis from X Center to the edge of the ellipse.

X Reference—in Lettering blocks, the X coordinate of the point where text begins/ends, relative to the X Ref Location.

—in Pattern Loop Angular, the X coordinate of the reference point (the only point in the pattern always on the circular path defined by this routine).

—in Pattern Scale, the X coordinate of the point from which the scaling will be performed.

X Ref Location—the location of the X reference point. Default is Start. Values are:

• Start—the lettering is left-justified; the first character begins at the X


reference point.

• Center—the lettering is centered left and right of the X reference point.

• End—the lettering is right-justified; the last character ends at the X reference point.

X Ref Position—the location of the stock on X axis relative to the Zero Ref, in Stock Geometry; can use Store Position or can be set to Part Zero with softkey.

X Safety Position—when the Rotary Safety Move field is set to Yes, defines the location to which X axis will move before the rotary-axis orients.

X Scale—the scaling factor from the X axis. If scaling is not executed from the axis, enter 1.0000.

• A value that is less than 1.0000 scales down the pattern.

• A value that is greater than 1.0000 scales up the pattern.

X Start—the starting point of the line or arc segment in X.

XY Angle—the angle of the XY line segment, in degrees, measured counterclockwise from the three o’clock position.

XY Length—the distance from the start point to the end point, in X-Y.

X/Y Skew (DEG)—represents, in degrees, how far the part is from perfect alignment with the table. See Part Skew Probing Cycles, on page 4 - 56 of Part Probing for more information about X/Y skew.

XZ Angle—the angle of the XZ line segment, in degrees, measured counterclockwise from the 3 o'clock position.

XZ Length—the distance from the start point to the end point, In X-Z.

Y

Y—in Pattern Mirror Image, the Y coordinate for a point on a line about which the Mirror Image routine occurs, as measured from part zero to the mirror line.

—in Position and Rotary Position data block, the Y-axis coordinate where the mill feature will be located on the part. This dimension is measured relative to Part Zero.

—in Manual Rapid Move, the Y end position of the move in a linear axis.

Y-Axis Safety Position—sets the absolute Y axis machine location to which the table will move when the Table Safety Move parameter is set to Yes for an Automatic Tool Change. See Machine Parameters Page 2, on page 1 - 65 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Y Center—the center point of the shape, in Y.

—in Mill Thread, the Y-axis coordinate for the center of the thread.


—in Pattern Loop Angular and Rotate, the Y coordinate of the reference point about which the pattern is rotated.

Y Corner—the Y coordinate of any one of the four corners of a frame or face which then becomes the reference corner.

Y Direction—appears with Vector method in Universal Transform Plane/Transform Plane Groups. Enter U, V, W vector components for the Y direction.

Y Distance—the distance between the repeated patterns along the Y axis line in Pattern blocks. (Negative values indicate direction.)

—in Transform Plane Groups, the distance between each transform plane in the sequence, along the Y axis.

Y End—the end point in Y.

—in Rotary AC Contour blocs, the rotary-axis coordinate (angle) for the ending point of the line.

Y Length—the length of the rectangle along the Y axis, measured from the reference corner. This value is positive or negative relative to the reference corner:

• Y Length is positive if the reference corner is at the left side of the rectangle.

• Y Length is negative if the reference corner is at the right side of the rectangle.

—in Stick Lettering, the Y axis length of the Sizing Box.

—in Stock Geometry, the Y length of the stock (when Stock Type is Box.).

Y Max—the maximum Y coordinate to define the working envelope the probe tip uses to search for part features in X and Y machine coordinates. This envelope also helps protect against crashing the probe. These fields are similar to the safety work region in Part Setup.

Y Min—the minimum Y coordinate to define the working envelope the probe tip uses to search for part features in X and Y machine coordinates. This envelope also helps protect against crashing the probe. These fields are similar to the safety work region in Part Setup.

Y Number—the number of times the programmed routine will be repeated along a line parallel to the Y axis in Pattern Loop Rectangular.

Y Off Of Centerline —determines where the tool will locate on the Y coordinate. The default selection is No. (Rotary A and Rotary A Tilt B configurations only.)

• If set to No, the tool will position the Y coordinate (specified in the A Centerline Y field on the Part Setup screen) directly over the centerline of the rotary axis when cutting a rotary mill feature (e.g., rotary circle, rotary frame).

• If set to Yes, the tool will stay at the current Y coordinate (specified in the A Centerline Y field on the Part Setup screen) when cutting a rotary mill feature (e.g., rotary circle, rotary frame).


Y Offset—the offset for the Y axis, to be added to the Y dimension in the data block.

Y Point—the plane of the arc in Y when it is 180° or greater.

Y Position—the Y-axis coordinate relative to Part Zero Y.

—in Universal Rotary Position, the location to which the Y axis will move before the rotary-axis orients.

Y Radius—the distance along the Y axis from Y Center to the edge of the ellipse.

Y Reference—in Lettering blocks, the Y coordinate of the point where text is aligned relative to the Y Ref Location.

—in Pattern Loop Angular, the Y coordinate of the reference point (the only point in the pattern always on the circular path defined by this routine).

—in Pattern Scale, the X coordinate of the point from which the scaling will be performed.

Y Ref Location—the location of the Y reference point. Default is Bottom. Values are:

• Bottom—the bottom of the letter is aligned with the Y reference point.

• Top—the top of the letter is aligned with the Y reference point.

• Center—the letter is centered above and below the Y reference point.

Y Ref Position—the location of the stock on Y axis relative to the Zero Ref, in Stock Geometry; can use Store Position or can be set to Part Zero with softkey.

Y Safety Position—when the Rotary Safety Move field is set to Yes, defines the location to which Y axis will move before the rotary-axis orients.

Y Scale—the scaling factor from the Y axis. If scaling is not executed from the axis, enter 1.0000.



Y Start—the starting point in Y.

—in Rotary AC Contour block, the rotary-axis start point coordinate calcualted with data programmed in the Start segment. The value of Y Start can be changed only in the segment in which it was created.

Z

Z—in Position data block, the Z coordinate for the position to which the tool should move (after Z Top position is reached). This dimension is measured relative to Part Zero.

—in Rotary Position, the offset for the Z axis. Z is used when a vise or other fixture holds multiple parts at different levels.


Z-Axis Position—indicates At Zero position.

—in APC Diagnostics, indicates if the Z-axis is At Zero (calibration point), APC position, or neither. Must be At APC position to begin an APC cycle.

Z Bottom—the plunge bottom point; where feed rate begins.

—in Hole operations, the bottom of the hole.

—in Manual Rapid Move, the Z end position of the move in a linear axis.

Z Break Out—the Z end position for the break out step at the specified feed and speed.

Z Center—the center point in Z.

Z Clearance—the incremental distance to rapid the tool away from the cutting distance. At this point, the tool pauses and the spindle returns to its original direction to close the cutter.

Z Corner—the Z-axis coordinate of any one of the four corners of the frame. This corner becomes the reference corner.

Z Depth— in a Back Spotface operation, the depth to which the tool feeds.

—in Part Probing, the distance, relative to the Start Position, the Z axis moves downward before changing direction and searching horizontally for each contact point on the cylinder’s diameter.

Z Drop Down Depth—used only when measuring tool diameter. This parameter (a negative value) indicates the distance to drop down from the surface of the probe or beam. For example, if you wish to measure the diameter of the tool ¼" from the tip, this parameter would be set to –0.25".

Z Distance—the distance on the Z-axis between each repetition of the mill feature or transform plane. The right-hand rule determines if Distance is positive or negative.

Z End—the end coordinate in Z.

—in Tilt B Rotary C configurations, the point where the Z-axis plunge into the cylinder ends.

Z Length—the Z length of the stock in Stock Geometry (when Stock Type is Box.).

—in Rotary Frame, Tilt B Rotary C configuration, the Z-axis coordinate measured from the reference corner:

• Z Length is positive if the reference corner is at the left side of the rectangle.

• Z Length is negative if the reference corner is at the right side of the rectangle.

Z Location— calculates the difference between Z Reference and the height of the touch-

There should be no deflection during the Z move.


off device.

Z Move Type—the level to which Z-axis retracts at the beginning of the Rotary Position data block:

• Z Home—Z-axis will move at Rapid feedrate to the position defined in Z Machine field.

• Z Safety—Z-axis will move at Rapid feedrate to the position defined in the Part Limit Z (+) field on the Part Setup screen.

Z Offset—the offset for the Z axis, to be added to the Z dimension in the data block.

Z Out—the Z end position of the retract move from Z Re-entry, in Custom Drill.

Z Plunge—the point within the hole to which the tool feeds before rapid movement to Z Bottom. This action assures that the cutter is fully closed, preventing damage to the tool and part.

Z Plunge Start—in Mill Thread, the Z position at which plunge feed begins.

Z Point—the plane of the arc in Z when it is 180° or greater.

Z Position—the position to which Z-axis retracts when Z Position is selected for the Retract Type in a Universal Rotary Position block.

Z Re-entry—the Z end position of the Custom Drill re-entry move back into the hole at the specified speed and feed.

Z Reference—the Z coordinate of the point from which the scaling is performed in Pattern Scale.

—in Tool Measurement screen, the machine reference position of the table top from machine zero.

Z Ref Position—the location of the stock on Z axis relative to the Zero Ref, in Stock Geometry; use Store Position or set to Part Zero with softkey.

Z Retract—in a Holes block, the Z position of the retract move through the hole at the specified speed and feed. Z Retract can be greater than, less than, or equal to Z Start.

—in a Position block, turns the Z retract move on or off.

Z Roughing—specifies if the Z roughing strategy be applied to the roughing pass.

Z Scale—the scaling factor from the Z axis. If scaling is not executed from the axis, enter 1.0000.



Z Start—the point where Plunge Feed rate begins, moving the tool to Z Bottom.

Z Start RPM—the spindle speed from Z Start to Z Bottom in a Gun Drill cycle.

Z Table Offset—the part offset in Z direction relative to the table top; field is available


only with Rotary configurations in Zero Calibration mode.

Z Top—the position of the entry move into the material at the specified speed and feed. The tool moves rapidly to this point and then slowly moves into the pre-drilled starting hole.

Z Top Feed—the rate at which the tool moves from the Z Top position to the Z Start position in a Gun Drill cycle.

Z Top RPM—the spindle speed from Z Top to Z Start in a Gun Drill cycle. negative values will result in a counter-clockwise rotation.

Zero Calibration—identifies Z-axis position of the tool tip when positioned at workpiece or gauge block. A (P) is displayed if the value is set by probing. Field available in Zero calibration mode only. See Zero Calibration Mode, on page 1 - 105 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.

Zero Ref—coordinate system zero from which to reference the stock zero position in Stock Geometry.

Zone—the zone on a dual-zone machine:

• 1 = Zone 1 (the left-side zone when facing the machine).

• 2 = Zone 2 (the right-side zone when facing the machine).

• 0 = the current zone. Zone 0 can be used when dual zones are enabled but you do not need to run the program in a particular zone. Setting the Zone field to 0 will run the program in the zone that the spindle currently occupies.

Errors Messages and Alarms 704-0116-501 Error Messages 7-67

ERROR MESSAGES

Error.wrc

NTID 001-025 NTID 026-050 NTID 051-075

NTID 076-100 NTID 101-125 NTID 126-150

NTID 151-175 NTID 176-200 NTID 201-225

NTID 001-025

NTID 001 CALIBRATE LIMIT SWITCH NOT FOUND ON AXIS [at].

CONDITION: During machine calibration, each axis travels to its respective limit switches (the positive or negative limit switch is determined by parameter ________).

The axis will stop when the limit switch input is detected by the software. A second limit switch signal is sent to the axis Servo Drive Amplifier which will also stop the axis movement.

DEFINITION: This error message indicates that the input signal to the software was not detected but the limit switch input to the servo drive amplifier was detected.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. Verify that the Servo Drive Amplifier for the axis indicates overtravel alarm in the direction that the axis was moving. If no overtravel alarm is reported, this would typically result in a Following Error alarm.

2. Check the wiring connections at the limit switch for the indicated axis that all four wires are properly terminated.

3. Use the electrical schematics to check the wiring terminations for the software input at the Slice I/O module. Check for continuity. If no continuity then replace harness. If continuity, swap Slice I/O module with another to see if problem goes away (replace Slice I/O module if problem goes away after swap).

NTID 002 SERVO DRIVE FAULT ON AXIS [at].

CONDITION: During axis motion, the Servo Drive Amplifier outputs a motion signal to the Servo Motor. Feedback from the Encoder or the Linear Scale is received by the Servo Drive Amplifier.

DEFINITION: This alarm indicates that a fault has occurred on the Servo Drive Amplifier and Control Power will be disabled.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

7 - 68 Error Messages 704-0116-501 Errors Messages and Alarms

1. At the Control Console, select Manual mode followed by the RESET SERVOS softkey. Error message should clear after a few seconds. Re-enable Control Power (press Power and Start pushbuttons) and repeat motion to see if error occurs again.

2. If error occurs again, open the Electrical Cabinet door (please observe all safety precautions for opening the electrical cabinet door with Machine Power enabled). This must be done with the error message still displayed.

3. For the axis indicated in the error message, check the display of the Servo Drive Alarm for an error code.

4. Refer to the Servo Drive Amplifier manual provided in the Electrical Cabinet for the definition and corrective action for the alarm.

NTID 003 SPINDLE FAULT - NOT AT SPEED ERROR.

CONDITION: During Spindle motion, the Spindle Drive Amplifier outputs a command to the Spindle Motor to rotate the Spindle. Feedback from the Spindle Encoder is received by the Spindle Drive Amplifier.

DEFINITION: This alarm indicates that the Spindle speed feedback did not achieve the commanded Spindle speed within a specified time frame. The alarm is typically displayed on the Spindle Drive Amplifier.

Typically, Control Power is not disabled with this alarm.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. At the control console, select Manual mode followed by the RESET SERVOS softkey. Error message should clear after a few seconds. If necessary, re-enable Control Power (press Power and Start pushbuttons) and repeat motion to see if error occurs again.


3. Verify the alarm code displayed on the Spindle Drive Amplifier.

4. Use the Electrical Schematics to verify the connection of the encoder feedback harness to the Spindle Drive Amplifier. Reseat connector and retry.

5. If issue persists, check Encoder connector at Spindle Motor. Reseat connector and retry.

6. If issue persists, open both ends of Encoder harness (at Spindle Motor and at Spindle Drive Amplifier) and verify wiring terminations at each pin. Resolder or replace harness.

7. If problem persists, replace Spindle Drive Amplifier.

8. If problem persists, replace Spindle Motor.

NTID 004 SPINDLE FAULT - WINDING NOT COMPLETED ERROR.

CONDITION: During Spindle motion, the Spindle Drive Amplifier outputs a command to the Spindle Motor to rotate the Spindle. On Spindle Drive Amplifiers that have a Low and High Winding, the Winding is automatically determined by the Spindle Speed Command.


Note that parameter ________ determines the Spindle Speed that the Winding change occurs.

DEFINITION: This alarm occurs if the Servo Drive Amplifier does not properly change to the Low or High Winding. Typically, Control Power will not be disabled.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. At the Control Console, select Manual mode followed by the RESET SERVOS softkey. Error message should clear after a few seconds. If necessary, re-enable Control Power (press Power and Start pushbuttons) and repeat motion to see if error occurs again.


3. Verify the alarm code displayed on the Spindle Drive Amplifier.

4. Retry the Spindle command at both the Low Winding and the High Winding (below and above the value in parameter ______).

5. If problem occurs with only one Winding, either Low or High, then replace Spindle Drive Amplifier.

NTID 005 SPINDLE FAULT - ORIENT ERROR.

CONDITION: During Tool Changes, Bore Orient cycles, Rigid Tap cycles, and Spindle Orient commands, the Spindle orients to a position to align the Spindle Drive Key to a specific angle.

Typically, a proximity switch or encoder marker is used to determine the absolute position of the spindle nose, and then an offset set in the Servo Drive Amplifier is used to command the Spindle to rotate to the angle.

DEFINITION: This alarm occurs when either the proximity sensor or marker is not detected during the Orient sequence, or the Spindle does not rotate to the specified angle after the proximity switch or marker is detected.

Typically, Control Power is not disabled when this alarm occurs.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. At the Control Console, select Manual mode followed by the RESET SERVOS softkey. Error message should clear after a few seconds. If necessary, re-enable Control Power (press Power and Start pushbuttons). Select ORIENT SPINDLE softkey in Manual mode and press Start to initiate Spindle Orient.

2. If problem persists, check the alignment of the Orient proximity sensor. Check continuity to the Spindle Drive Amplifier. Replace proximity sensor if no continuity,

3. If encoder marker is used, check connections of the Encoder harness at both the Spindle Motor and the Spindle Drive Amplifier.

4. Use the Electrical Schematics to verify continuity at both ends of Spindle Encoder Harness. Replace harness if wiring terminations inside either connector are defective or are missing continuity.


NTID 007 ATC ERROR - DETECTED SPINDLE BOTH CLAMPED AND UNCLAMPED.

CONDITION: Alarm occurs in response to failed steps during either a tool change or a requested action as part of Diagnostics.

DEFINITION: This message advises that some mechanism is sensing contradictory position input states (for example, both up and down). This is either an I/O or wiring problem.

CORRECTIVE ACTION: Authorized service personnel should use Diagnostics to determine if there is a mechanical or electrical fault.

NTID 008 PART PROBE BATTERY IS LOW.

CONDITION: Part Probe battery is low.

DEFINITION: Part Probe battery is being indicated as low.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. Check for faulty wiring.

2. Check Part Probe is functioning properly.

3. Replace Part Probe battery.

NTID 009 PART PROBE FAULT - UNABLE TO RECEIVE OPTICAL SIGNAL.

CONDITION: Part Probe Fault – Unable to receive optical signal.

DEFINITION: Spindle is oriented and Part Probe signal is not being received.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. Check Part Probe is functioning properly.


NTID 016 ATC ERROR - MAGAZINE REFERENCE LIMIT SWITCH NOT SEEN.

CONDITION: Occurs in response to failed steps during either a tool change or a requested action as part of Diagnostics.

DEFINITION: Message indicates which stage during the tool change an error occurred.


NTID 017 PROBE INPUT NOT DETECTED.

CONDITION: Probe input not detected.

DEFINITION: Probe signal was not detected by receiver.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:


1. Check to ensure line of site is clear for the unit(s).

2. Check power to the unit(s).

NTID 018 ATC ERROR - MAG IN POSITION SWITCH NOT SEEN.

CONDITION: Occurs in response to failed steps during either a tool change or a requested action as part of Diagnostics.



NTID 020 MAGAZINE CALIBRATE TIMEOUT; MAGAZINE REFERENCE LS NOT SEEN.

CONDITION: Magazine Calibrate Timeout; Magazine reference LS not seen

DEFINITION: Magazine has entered the calibration mode, but has not seen its limit switch.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. Check that chip doors are closed.


3. Ensure all home positions are working properly.

NTID 025 ATC NOT IN HOME POSITION; ENTER ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS.

CONDITION: ATC not in home position; Enter ATC & Machine diagnostics.

DEFINITION: ATC has not returned to its home position.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. Check that all doors are closed.

2. Check that magazine home sensor is working properly.

3. Check for faulty wiring at the Tool Changer.

NTID 026-050

NTID 033 ATC ERROR - DETECTED SPINDLE NEITHER CLAMPED NOR UNCLAMPED.

CONDITION: Spindle is neither clamped nor unclamped.

DEFINITION: Neither the spindle clamped switch nor the spindle unclamped switch is “true.” There may be a problem with the clamping mechanism or with the switches.

CORRECTIVE ACTION: Inspect the switches and clamping mechanism.


NTID 034 ATC ERROR OCCURRED ON SELECTED OPERATION.

CONDITION: ATC Error occurred on selected operation.

DEFINITION:

1. Z-axis has been commanded to move to the T/C position w/ no response received from the CNC.

2. Spindle fault during a T/C

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. Check drives/spindle to ensure they are working properly.


NTID 035 ATC ERROR - TOOL HOLDER DID NOT MOVE DOWN.

CONDITION: Error is the result of failed steps during either a tool change or a requested action as part of Diagnostics.



NTID 036 ATC ERROR - TOOL HOLDER DID NOT MOVE UP.




NTID 037 ATC ERROR - LOAD ARM DID NOT ROTATE TO 0°.




NTID 038 ATC ERROR - LOAD ARM DID NOT ROTATE TO 60°.





NTID 039 ATC ERROR - EXCHANGE ARM DID NOT MOVE DOWN.




NTID 040 ATC ERROR - EXCHANGE ARM DID NOT MOVE UP.




NTID 041 ATC ERROR - SHIFTER DID NOT MOVE DOWN.




NTID 042 ATC ERROR - SHIFTER DID NOT MOVE UP.




NTID 043 ATC - ERROR LOAD ARM NOT AT 0°.




NTID 046 ATC ERROR - EXCHANGE ARM DID NOT ROTATE!

CONDITION: Exchange arm did not rotate.


DEFINITION: Exchange arm did not move to position in the designated amount of time.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. Check exchange arm for debris that may be inhibiting travel.

2. Check exchange arm for debris that may be inhibiting travel.

3. Reset drives to see if this cures the situation.

NTID 047 ATC ERROR!! MAGAZINE MUST BE CALIBRATED.

CONDITION: Magazine is not calibrated.

DEFINITION: Tool change cycle is being requested, but the tool changer is not calibrated.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. Check for faulty magazine switches.

2. Calibrate Tool Changer.

3. Check magazine for loose or faulty wiring connections.

4. Check cabinet for loose or faulty wiring connections.

NTID 048 ATC ERROR - TOOL CHANGE CYCLE TOO LONG! ENTER ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS.

CONDITION: Tool change.

DEFINITION: Message means that the tool change took too long.

CORRECTIVE ACTION: Authorized service personnel should enter the Diagnostics screen to correct this condition.

NTID 051-075

NTID 051 ATC ERROR - ARM NOT RETRACTED! ROTATE LOAD ARM TO 0°

CONDITION: The message is in response to failed steps during either a tool change or a requested action as part of Diagnostics.



NTID 057 INDEXER NOT IN POSITION AT START

CONDITION: Indexer not in position at start.

DEFINITION: Message can occur when the indexer doesn’t move in the prescribed amount of time. Typically, this would be due to a faulty or slow indexer, or a problem with I/O.


CORRECTIVE ACTION: Check the indexer switch and connections. Telephone for technical assistance if necessary.

NTID 058 INDEXER NOT IN POSITION AFTER MOVE

CONDITION: Indexer not in position after move.



NTID 059 INDEXER POSITION LESS THAN 1

CONDITION: Indexer position incorrect.



NTID 060 INDEXER IN POSITION 10 SECOND TIME OUT

CONDITION: Indexer position incorrect.



NTID 064 INDEXER NOT INSTALLED OR CONFIGURED PROPERLY.

CONDITION: Indexer incorrect.



NTID 067 COOLANT PRESSURE IS TOO HIGH. TOOL CANNOT BE UNCLAMPED UNTIL PRESSURE IS CORRECTED.

CONDITION: Coolant pressure is too high. Tool cannot be unclamped until pressure is correct.

DEFINITION: Tool coolant pressure is being indicated as high.


CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. Check wiring of coolant pressure high input.

2. Check for faulty connections.

3. Check hydraulic clamping tool for pressure leaks.

4. Check hydraulic pump for pressure problems.

NTID 068 DOOR LOCK FAILURE - ENTER CE DIAGNOSTICS AND RESET FAULT.

CONDITION: Door lock failure – enter CE diagnostics and reset fault.

DEFINITION: CE feature is enabled and chip doors are not closed.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. Check all door switches for faulty wiring.

2. Check alignment of all doors.

3. Check alignment of all door switches.

NTID 069 ATC ERROR - DETECTED TOOL POCKET BOTH UP AND DOWN.

CONDITION: Message is in response to failed steps during either a tool change or a requested action as part of Diagnostics.

DEFINITION: Message indicates which stage of the tool change an error occurred.


NTID 070 ATC ERROR - DETECTED LOAD ARM BOTH 0° AND 60°.




NTID 071 ATC ERROR - DETECTED EXCHANGE ARM BOTH UP AND DOWN.


DEFINITION: These messages advise that some mechanism is sensing contradictory position input states (for example, both up and down). This is either an I/O or wiring problem.



NTID 072 ATC ERROR - TOOL POCKET UP SWITCH FAULT.




NTID 073 ATC FAULT - TOOL POCKET DOWN SWITCH FAULT.




NTID 074 ATC FAULT - LOAD ARM 0° SWITCH FAULT.




NTID 075 ATC FAULT - LOAD ARM 60° SWITCH FAULT.




NTID 076-100

NTID 076 ATC FAULT - EXCHANGE ARM UP SWITCH FAULT.




NTID 077 ATC FAULT - EXCHANGE ARM DOWN SWITCH FAULT.





NTID 078 FIXTURE MOVE FAULT - Z AXIS DID NOT REACH POSITION !

CONDITION: Fixture Move Fault – Z Axis did not reach position.

DEFINITION: Z-Axis did not move to a specified position in the designated amount of time.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. Check Z drive for faulty wiring

2. Check that the Z drive is functioning properly.

NTID 079 FIXTURE MOVE FAULT - X,Y AXES DID NOT REACH POSITION!

CONDITION: Fixture Move Fault – X, Y Axes did not reach position.

DEFINITION: X and Y axes did not more to a specified position in the designated amount of time.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. Check X and Y drives for faulty wiring.

2. Check that the X and Y axes are functioning properly.

NTID 080 FIXTURE MOVE FAULT - X,Y AXES DID NOT CLEAR!

CONDITION: Fixture Move Fault – X, Y Axes did not clear.

DEFINITION: The X and Y axes have triggered a move timer fault.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. Check X and Y drives for faulty wiring.

2. Check that the X and Y axes are functioning properly.

NTID 081 FIXTURE MOVE FAULT - SPINDLE NOT ORIENTED !

CONDITION: Fixture Move Fault – spindle not oriented.

DEFINITION: The Spindle has encountered an orientation fault.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. Check the spindle and drives for faulty wire connections.

2. Check that the Spindle is functioning properly.


NTID 082 FIXTURE MOVE FAULT - SPINDLE DID NOT UNCLAMP.

CONDITION: Fixture Move Fault – Spindle did not unclamp.

DEFINITION: Spindle did not unclamp when commanded.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. Check to ensure solenoids are working properly.


3. Check outputs to ensure they are working properly.

NTID 083 ATC ERROR - MAGAZINE PIN DID NOT LOCK!




NTID 084 ATC ERROR - MAGAZINE PIN DID NOT UNLOCK!




NTID 095 ATC ERROR - POCKET-TO-POCKET TIMEOUT FAULT!

CONDITION: ATC Error – Pocket-to-pocket timeout fault.

DEFINITION: Tool Changer is calibrated and the pocket-to-pocket indexing has timed out.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. Check the tool changer and motor for faulty wire connections.

2. Check tool changer motor is functioning properly.

3. Check pocket switches are functioning properly.

NTID 096 ATC ERROR - MAGAZINE ROTATE SWITCH UNDERCOUNT.

CONDITION: ATC Error – Magazine rotate switch undercount.

DEFINITION: Phantom count detected or “in position” not detected.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:


1. Check the tool changer for faulty input wiring.

2. Check that magazine indicator switches are functioning properly.

NTID 097 ATC ERROR - MAGAZINE ROTATE SWITCH OVERCOUNT.

CONDITION: ATC Error – Magazine rotate switch overcount.

DEFINITION: Phantom count detected or “in position” not detected.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. Check the tool changer for faulty input wiring.

2. Check that magazine indicator switches are functioning properly.

NTID 101-125

NTID 108 SERVO FAULT - X AXIS

CONDITION: Servo Fault – X Axis.

DEFINITION: X Axis has indicated a fault.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. Check wiring of Allen-Bradley Control Bit31 input.

2. Check wiring of INPUT Spindle @ Speed.

3. Check the X-Axis servo for faulty wiring.

4. Check the X-Axis servo for a faulty drive.

5. Reset servos to see if this cures the problem.

NTID 109 SERVO FAULT - Y AXIS

CONDITION: Servo Fault – Y Axis.

DEFINITION: Y Axis has indicated a fault.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:


2. Check the Y-Axis servo for faulty wiring.

3. Check the Y-Axis servo for a faulty drive.


NTID 110 SERVO FAULT - Z AXIS

CONDITION: Servo Fault – Z Axis.

DEFINITION: Z Axis has indicated a fault.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:



2. Check the Z-Axis servo for faulty wiring.

3. Check the Z-Axis servo for a faulty drive.

4. Check the Z-Axis servo for a faulty drive.

NTID 111 SERVO FAULT - SPINDLE ALARM

CONDITION: Servo Fault – Spindle Alarm.

DEFINITION: Spindle Axis has indicated a fault.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:


2. Check the S-Axis servo for faulty wiring.

3. Check the S-Axis servo for a faulty drive.


NTID 112 SERVO FAULT - A AXIS

CONDITION: Servo Fault – A Axis.

DEFINITION: A Axis has indicated a fault.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:


2. Check the A-Axis servo for faulty wiring.

3. Check the A-Axis servo for a faulty drive.


NTID 113 SERVO FAULT - B AXIS

CONDITION: Servo Fault – B Axis.

DEFINITION: B Axis has indicated a fault.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:


2. Check the B-Axis servo for faulty wiring.

3. Check the B-Axis servo for a faulty drive.

4. Check the B-Axis servo for a faulty drive.

NTID 114 SERVO FAULT - I/R OVERLOAD

CONDITION: Servo Fault – I/R Overload.

DEFINITION: I/R Overload has been detected.


CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. Check servos are functioning properly


3. Check for other faulty wiring with the servo.

NTID 115 SERVO FAULT - I/R FAULT

CONDITION: Servo Fault – I/R Fault.

DEFINITION: I/R Fault has been detected.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. Check servos are functioning properly.



NTID 116 SERVO FAULT - MOTOR OVERTEMP

CONDITION: Servo Fault – Motor Overtemp.

DEFINITION: Motor Overtemp Fault has been detected.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:




NTID 117 SPINDLE READY SIGNAL NOT DETECTED.

CONDITION: Spindle Ready signal not detected.

DEFINITION: Spindle “Ready” signal was not detected in a designated amount of time.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. Check for faulty wiring connections to the PLC.

NTID 120 A SERVO ERROR OCCURRED DURING TOOL FIXTURE SEQUENCE. (RESET SERVO'S TO CLEAR ERROR)

CONDITION: A servo error occurred during tool fixture sequence.

DEFINITION: A Servo has encountered an error.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:





NTID 121 SPINDLE SPEED FAULT SENSED - NOT AT COMMANDED SPEED!

CONDITION: Spindle speed fault sensed – not at commanded speed.

DEFINITION: An error with the spindle speed has occurred.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:




NTID 126-150

NTID 150 ATC ERROR!! TOOL HOLDER UP INPUT NOT DETECTED. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR ERROR.

CONDITION: ATC Error. Tool holder up input not detected. Enter “ATC & Machine diagnostics” to clear error.

DEFINITION: Tool holder “up” input was not detected in a designated amount of time.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. Check tool holder position indication switches are functioning properly.

2. Check for faulty wiring from the Tool Changer to the PLC.

NTID 151-175

NTID 151 ATC ERROR!! TOOL HOLDER DOWN INPUT NOT DETECTED. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR ERROR.

CONDITION: ATC Error. Tool holder down input not detected. Enter “ATC & Machine diagnostics” to clear error.

DEFINITION: Tool holder “down” input was not detected in a designated amount of time.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:


2. Check for faulty wiring from the Tool Changer to the PLC.

NTID 152 ATC ERROR!! TOOL HOLDER UP INPUT DETECTED, EXPECTED DOWN INPUT. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR ERROR.

CONDITION: ATC Error. Tool holder up input detected, expected down input. Enter “ATC & Machine diagnostics” to clear error.

DEFINITION: Tool holder position indicates that it is in the up position when it should be


in the down position.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. Check Tool Pocket Down input.

2. Check Tool Pocket Up input.


4. Check for faulty or mismatched wiring.

NTID 153 ATC ERROR!! TOOL HOLDER DOWN INPUT DETECTED, EXPECTED UP INPUT. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR ERROR.

CONDITION: ATC Error. Tool holder down input detected, expected up input. Enter “ATC & Machine diagnostics” to clear error.

DEFINITION: Tool holder position indicates that it is in the down position when it should be in the up position.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:





NTID 154 ATC ERROR!! BOTH TOOL HOLDER UP AND DOWN INPUTS DETECTED. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR ERROR.

CONDITION: ATC Error. Both tool holder up and down inputs detected. Enter “ATC & Machine diagnostics” to clear error.

DEFINITION: Tool holder position indicates it is in both the up and down positions when only one or no positions should be indicated.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:





NTID 155 ATC ERROR!! EXCHANGE ARM AT 60 DEGREES INPUT NOT DETECTED. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR ERROR.

CONDITION: ATC Error. Exchange arm at 60 degrees input not detected. Enter “ATC & Machine diagnostics” to clear error.

DEFINITION: Exchange arm expected to be at the 60 degree position and that input was not detected.


CORRECTIVE ACTION:


2. Check Exchange Arm position switches are functioning properly.

NTID 156 ATC ERROR!! EXCHANGE ARM AT 60 DEGREES INPUT DETECTED, EXPECTED 0 DEGREES INPUT. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR ERROR.

CONDITION: ATC Error. Exchange arm at 60 degrees input detected, expected 0 degrees input. Enter “ATC & Machine diagnostics” to clear error.

DEFINITION: Exchange arm expected to be at the 0 degree position and the 60 degree position input was detected instead.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. Check Air Pressure Sw input.

2. Check Spindle Alarm input.



NTID 157 ATC ERROR!! EXCHANGE ARM AT 60 DEGREES INPUT DETECTED, EXPECTED EXCHANGE ARM DOWN INPUT. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR ERROR.

CONDITION: ATC Error. Exchange arm at 60 degrees input detected, expected exchange arm down input. Enter “ATC & Machine diagnostics” to clear error.

DEFINITION: Exchange arm expected to be at the down position and the 60 degree position input was detected instead.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. Check ATC Arm 60 Degrees input.

2. Check ATC Arm Down & 180 Degrees input.



NTID 158 ATC ERROR!! BOTH EXCHANGE ARM AT 0 AND 60 DEGREES INPUTS DETECTED. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR ERROR.

CONDITION: ATC Error. Both exchange arm at 0 and 60 degrees inputs detected. Enter “ATC & Machine diagnostics” to clear error.

DEFINITION: Exchange arm detected the 0 AND 60 degree position input when the arm should be at either one or no positions.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:








DEFINITION: Exchange arm expected to be at the 0 degree position and the input was not detected.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:





DEFINITION: Exchange arm expected to be at the 60 degree position and the 0 degree position input was detected instead.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:





NTID 161 ATC ERROR!! EXCHANGE ARM DOWN INPUT NOT DETECTED. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR ERROR.

CONDITION: ATC Error. Exchange arm down input not detected. Enter “ATC & Machine diagnostics” to clear error.

DEFINITION: Exchange arm expected to be at the down position and the input was not detected.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:




NTID 162 ATC ERROR!! EXCHANGE ARM DOWN INPUT DETECTED, EXPECTED 60 DEGREES INPUT. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR ERROR.

CONDITION: ATC Error. Exchange arm down input detected, expected 60 degrees input. Enter “ATC & Machine diagnostics” to clear error.

DEFINITION: Exchange arm expected to be at the down position and the 60 degree input was detected instead.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. Check ATC Arm Down & 180 Degrees input.




NTID 163 ATC ERROR!! MAGAZINE NOT IN POSITION. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR ERROR.

CONDITION: ATC Error. Magazine not in position. Enter “ATC & Machine diagnostics” to clear error.

DEFINITION: Magazine is not rotating, but also is not in position.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:


2. Check Magazine position switches are functioning properly.

NTID 164 ATC ERROR!! SPINDLE UNCLAMP INPUT NOT DETECTED. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR ERROR.

CONDITION: ATC Error. Spindle unclamp input not detected. Enter “ATC & Machine diagnostics” to clear error.

DEFINITION: Spindle has not detected the unclamp input within the designated amount of time.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:


2. Check spindle unclamp sensor is functioning properly.

NTID 165 ATC ERROR!! SPINDLE CLAMP INPUT NOT DETECTED. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR ERROR.

CONDITION: ATC Error. Spindle clamp input not detected. Enter “ATC & Machine diagnostics” to clear error.

DEFINITION: Spindle has not detected the clamp input within the designated amount of time.


CORRECTIVE ACTION:


2. Check spindle clamp sensor is functioning properly.

NTID 166 ATC ERROR!! NEITHER SPINDLE CLAMP OR UNCLAMP INPUTS DETECTED. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR ERROR.

CONDITION:

DEFINITION:

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

NTID 167 ATC ERROR!! BOTH SPINDLE CLAMP AND UNCLAMP INPUTS DETECTED. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR ERROR.

CONDITION: ATC Error. Both spindle clamp and unclamp inputs detected. Enter “ATC & Machine diagnostics” to clear error.

DEFINITION: Spindle clamp and unclamp inputs have been detected when the spindle should either have one or no inputs being enabled.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. Check spindle clamp and unclamp sensors are functioning properly.


NTID 168 ATC ERROR!! SPINDLE ORIENT FAULT. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR ERROR.

CONDITION:

DEFINITION:

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

NTID 169 ATC ERROR!! SPINDLE NOT ORIENTED. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR ERROR.

CONDITION: ATC Error. Spindle not oriented. Enter “ATC & Machine diagnostics” to clear error.

DEFINITION: The spindle has not oriented properly in the designated amount of time.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. Check Spindle input.

2. Check Tool Unclamp input.

3. Check spindle sensors are functioning properly.



NTID 170 ATC ERROR!! MAGAZINE DID NOT ROTATE WHEN COMMANDED. IN-POSITION SENSOR MAY HAVE MALFUNCTIONED OR AN OVERLOAD MAY BE TRIPPED. ATC MUST BE RE-CALIBRATED. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS” TO CLEAR ERROR.

CONDITION: ATC Error. Magazine did not rotate when commanded. In-Position sensor may have malfunctioned or an overload may be tripped. ATC must be re-calibrated. Enter “ATC & Machine diagnostics” to clear error.

DEFINITION: Magazine has encountered a rotation error where the magazine did not more when told to.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. Check magazine sensors are functioning properly.


NTID 171 ATC ERROR!! MAGAZINE IN POSITION INPUT DETECTED OUT OF SEQUENCE. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR ERROR.

CONDITION: ATC Error. Magazine in position input detected out of sequence. Enter “ATC & Machine diagnostics” to clear error.

DEFINITION: Magazine is in a position that is not in the proper sequence of events.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:



NTID 173 ATC ERROR!! MAGAZINE REFERENCE INPUT DETECTED OUT OF SEQUENCE. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR ERROR.

CONDITION: ATC Error. Magazine reference input detected out of sequence. Enter “ATC & Machine diagnostics” to clear error.

DEFINITION: Magazine is in a position that is not in the proper sequence of events.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:



NTID 174 ATC ERROR!! MAGAZINE PIN LOCKED INPUT NOT DETECTED. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR ERROR.

CONDITION: ATC Error. Magazine pin locked input not detected. Enter “ATC & Machine diagnostics” to clear error.

DEFINITION: The magazine is expected to have a locked position enabled and that input is not detected.


CORRECTIVE ACTION:



NTID 175 ATC ERROR!! MAGAZINE PIN UNLOCKED INPUT NOT DETECTED. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR ERROR.

CONDITION: ATC Error. Magazine pin unlocked input not detected. Enter “ATC & Machine diagnostics” to clear error.

DEFINITION: The magazine is expected to have an unlocked position enabled and that input is not detected.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:



NTID 176-200

NTID 176 ATC ERROR!! BOTH MAGAZINE PIN LOCKED AND UNLOCKED INPUTS DETECTED. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR ERROR.

CONDITION: ATC Error. Both magazine pin locked and unlocked inputs detected. Enter “ATC & Machine diagnostics” to clear error.

DEFINITION: Both magazine pin locked and pin unlocked inputs have been enabled when the magazine should either have one or no inputs detected.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:



NTID 177 ATC ERROR!! EXCHANGE ARM "OK TO STOP" INPUT MALFUNCTIONED. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR ERROR.

CONDITION: ATC Error. Exchange arm “OK to stop” input malfunctioned. Enter “ATC & Machine diagnostics” to clear error.

DEFINITION: The Exchange arm Motor Brake input was not detected in the designated amount of time.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:


2. Check exchange arm sensors are functioning properly.

NTID 179 ATC ERROR!! BOTH MAGAZINE IN POSITION INPUTS DETECTED.


ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR ERROR.

CONDITION: ATC Error. Both magazine in position inputs detected. Enter “ATC & Machine diagnostics” to clear error

DEFINITION: Magazine position 1 and position 2 inputs have both been detected and have been on for more than 30 seconds.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:



NTID 189 SERVO FAULT - C AXIS

CONDITION: Servo Fault - C Axis

DEFINITION: There was a servo fault that occurred with the C Axis.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:





DEFINITION: Exchange arm expected to be at 90 degrees and the 0 degree input was detected instead.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:





NTID 192 ATC ERROR!! BOTH EXCHANGE ARM AT 0 AND 90 DEGREES INPUTS DETECTED. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR ERROR.

CONDITION: ATC Error. Both exchange arm at 0 and 90 degrees inputs detected. Enter “ATC & Machine diagnostics” to clear error.

DEFINITION: Exchange arm 0 degrees and 90 degrees inputs were detected.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:








DEFINITION: Exchange arm expected to be at 0 degrees and the 90 degrees input was detected instead.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:







DEFINITION: Exchange arm expected to be at 90 degrees and the input was not detected instead.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. Check ATC Arm 60 Degrees and 180 Degrees input.




NTID 195 FRONT DOORS MUST BE CLOSED BEFORE CYCLING THE PALLET CHANGER. CLOSE DOORS [amp] PRESS CONFIRMATION BUTTON TO CONTINUE.

CONDITION: Front doors must be closed before cycling the pallet changer. Close doors & press confirmation button to continue

DEFINITION: An error was encountered when trying to start the cycle of the pallet changer.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:


1. Check for faulty wiring and/or loose sensors.

2. Check front door alignment.

3. Check door switch for alignment.

4. Ensure that the pallet changer is in the home position.

NTID 196 FRONT DOORS OPENED DURING PALLET CHANGE. OPERATION ABORTED. PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE.

CONDITION: Front doors opened during pallet change. Operation aborted. Press any key to continue.

DEFINITION: An error was encountered during cycle motion of the pallet changer.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. Check for faulty wiring and/or loose sensors.

2. Check front door alignment.

3. Check door switch for alignment.

4. Ensure that the pallet changer is in the home position.

NTID 197 PALLET SETUP CONFIRMATION REQUIRED TO CYCLE PALLET CHANGER.

CONDITION: Pallet setup confirmation required to cycle pallet changer.

DEFINITION: The pallet setup requires a start confirmation from the user in order to continue with the pallet changer cycling.

CORRECTIVE ACTION: Start cycle in order to continue.

7 - 94 Alarms 704-0116-501 Errors Messages and Alarms

ALARMS

Servo Drive Alarm Descriptions

The following table shows the servo drive alarms and descriptions.

Alarm Display Alarm Name Description Motor Stop

Method32 A.020 Parameter Checksum Error The data of the parameter in the SERVOPACK

is incorrect. Gr.1

33 A.021 Parameter Format Error The data format of the parameter in the SERVOPACK is incorrect. Gr.1

34 A.022 System Checksum Error The data of the parameter in the SERVOPACK is incorrect. Gr.1

41 A.029 Motor Parameter Checksum Error The motor parameter data in the SERVOPACK is incorrect. Gr.1

44 A.02C Converter Parameter Checksum Error The data of the parameter in the power regeneration converter is incorrect. Gr.1

45 A.02D Converter Parameter Format Error The format of the parameter in the power regeneration converter is incorrect. Gr.1

46 A.02E Converter System Checksum Error The data of the parameter in the power regeneration converter is incorrect. Gr.1

48 A.030 Main Circuit Detector Error Detection data for main circuit is incorrect. Gr.1

64 A.040 Parameter Setting Error The parameter setting in the SERVOPACK is outside the allowable setting range. Gr.1

66 A.042 Parameter Combination Error Combination of some parameters exceeds the setting range. Gr.1

75 A.04B Converter Parameter Setting ErrorThe parameter setting in the power regenera-tion converter is outside the allowable setting range.

Gr.1

80 A.050 Combination Error The SERVOPACK and the motor capacities do not match each other. Gr.1

81 A.051 Unsupported Device Alarm The device unit unsupported was connected. Gr.1

82 A.052 Motor Type Setting MismatchThe motor type/Application selection setting (Pn01E.0) does not match the motor parame-ter written inside the SERVO-PACK.

Gr.1

83 A.053 Winding Selection Setting MismatchThe Winding Change Setting (Pn01E.1) does not match the motor parameter written inside the SERVOPACK.

Gr.1

84 A.054 Unsupported Winding Selection Alarm The combination of the SERVOPACK and motor does not support winding selection. Gr.1

90 A.05A Induction Motor Combination Error The capacity of the spindle motor is outside of the range that can be combined. Gr.1

91 A.05B Converter Combination Error The converter and SERVOPACK are not combined correctly. Gr.1

176 A.0B0 Canceled Servo ON Command Alarm

The host controller reference was sent to turn the Servo ON (Enable operation) after the Servo ON function was used with the utility function.

Gr.1

256 A.100 Overcurrent An overcurrent flowed through the IGBT.Heat sink of the SERVOPACK was overheated. Gr.1

266 A.10A Converter OvercurrentAn overcurrent flowed through the power transistor inside the power regeneration converter.

Gr.1

282 A.11A Converter Ground Fault A ground fault occurred inside the power regeneration converter. Gr.1

Errors Messages and Alarms 704-0116-501 Alarms 7-95

554 A.22A Converter Fuse Blowout The fuse of the main power supply inside the power regeneration converter is blown out. Gr.1

1024 A.400 Overvoltage The DC-bus voltage inside the SERVOPACK is excessively high. Gr.1

1034 A.40A Converter Overvoltage The DC-bus voltage inside the power regenera-tion converter is abnormally high. Gr.1

1035 A.40B Converter AC Overvoltage The AC power supply voltage inside the power regeneration converter is abnormally high. Gr.1

1036 A.40C Abnormal Voltage in Converter Main Circuit

An error occurred in the main circuit of the power regeneration converter. Gr.1

1040 A.410 Undervoltage The DC-bus voltage is excessively low. Gr.2

1050 A.41A Converter DC Undervoltage The DC-bus voltage inside the power regenera-tion converter is abnormally low. Gr.2

1051 A.41B Converter AC Undervoltage The AC voltage inside the power regeneration converter is abnormally low. Gr.1

1052 A.41C Power Failure While Motor Running The AC power supply was cut off while the motor was running. Gr.1

1068 A.42C Converter Initial Charging Error The charging of the main circuit capacitor did not finish within the specified period of time. Gr.1

1104 A.450 Main Circuit Capacitor Overvoltage The capacitor of the main circuit has deterio-rated or is faulty. Gr.1

1296 A.510 Overspeed The motor speed is excessively high. Gr.11313 A.521 Autotuning Alarm Vibration was detected during autotuning. Gr.1

1329 A.531 Excessive Speed Deviation The deviation between the speed reference and the actual motor speed is abnormal. Gr.1

1344 A.540 Overspeed(During Low-speed Winding)

The low-speed winding maximum rotation speed was exceeded during low-speed winding.

Gr.1

1680 A.690 Winding Selection Operation Fault

During the winding selection operation check that is performed when the power is turned ON, the electromagnetic contactor for winding selection did not change accord-ing to the internal command.

Winding selection was not completed within two seconds of receiving the winding selec-tion command.

Chattering occurred in the electromagnetic contactor for winding selection when the winding selection command was not received.

Gr.1

1712 A.6B0 Emergency Stop Failure The motor did not stop within 10s after the emergency stop signal input. Gr.1

1808 A.710 Overload: High LoadThe motor was operating for several seconds to several tens of seconds under a torque largely exceeding ratings.

Gr.2

1824 A.720 Overload: Low Load The motor was operating continuously under a torque largely exceeding ratings. Gr.1

1834 A.72A Converter Electric Operation OverloadContinuous electrical operation was per-formed that exceeded the rated output of the power supply regenerative converter.

Gr.2

1835 A.72B Converter Power Supply Regenerative Overload

Continuous regenerative operation was per-formed that exceeded the ratings of the power regenerative converter.

Gr.1

1840

1841

A.730

A.731Dynamic Brake Overload

When the dynamic brake was applied, rota-tional energy exceeded the capacity of dynamic brake resistor.

Gr.1

1866 A.74A Converter Inrush Resistance Overload The main circuit power supply turned ON and OFF frequently. Gr.1

1936 A.790 Motor Overheated The motor temperature exceeded the upper limit. Gr.1

1937 A.791 Motor Temperature Detection Error The motor thermistor is either disconnected or is damaged. Gr.1


1952 A.7A0 Heat Sink in SERVOPACK Overheated

The temperature of the heat sink in the SERVOPACK exceeded 100°C, or the thermistor in the SERVOPACK was discon-nected or damaged.

Gr.2

1963 A.7AB Built-in Fan in SERVOPACK Stopped 1 The fan inside the SERVOPACK stopped. Gr.1

1964 A.7AC Built-in Fan in Converter Stopped 1The fan inside the power regeneration con-verter stopped. Gr.1

1978 A.7BA Converter Heat Sink Overheated

The heat sink inside the power regeneration converter exceeded 100°C, or the thermistor in the converter was disconnected or dam-aged.

Gr.2

2064 A.810 Encoder Backup ErrorAll the power supplies for the absolute encoder have failed and position data was cleared.

Gr.1

2080 A.820 Encoder Checksum Error The checksum results of encoder memory is incorrect. Gr.1

2096 A.830 Absolute Encoder Battery ErrorThe battery voltage was lower than the speci-fied value after the control power supply is turned ON.

Gr.1

2112 A.840 Encoder Data Error Data in the encoder is incorrect. Gr.1

2128 A.850 Encoder Overspeed The encoder was rotating at high speed when the power was turned ON. Gr.1

2144 A.860 Encoder Overheated The internal temperature of encoder is too high. Gr.1

2208 A.8A0 2 External Encoder Error of The external encoder is faulty. Gr.1

2209 A.8A1 2 External Encoder Error of The serial converter unit is faulty. Gr.1

2210 A.8A2 2 External Encoder Error of The external encoder is faulty. Gr.1

2211 A.8A3 2 External Encoder Error of The position of external encoder is faulty. Gr.1

2213 A.8A5 2 External Encoder Overspeed The overspeed from the external encoder occurred. Gr.1

2214 A.8A6 2 External Encoder Overheated The overheat from the external encoder occurred. Gr.1

2865 A.B31 Current Detection Error 1 (Phase-U) The current detection circuit for phase-U is faulty. Gr.1

2866 A.B32 Current Detection Error 2 (Phase-V) The current detection circuit for phase-V is faulty. Gr.1

2867 A.B33 Current Detection Error 3 (Current detector) The detection circuit for the current is faulty. Gr.1

2890 A.B4A Converter Gate Drive Output ErrorAn error occurred in the gate drive signal of power transistor of the power regeneration converter.

Gr.1

3034 A.BDA Converter CPU: AD Conversion Circuit Error

An error occurred in the A/D conversion circuit inside the power regeneration converter. Gr.1

3036 A.BDC Converter Reference Voltage Error 2 An error occurred in the reference voltage out-put inside the power regeneration converter. Gr.1

3037 A.BDD Converter System Error 0 Internal program error 0 occurred inside the power regeneration converter. Gr.1

3050 A.BEA Converter System Error 1 Internal program error 1 occurred inside the power regeneration converter. Gr.1

3051 A.BEB Converter System Error 2 Internal program error 2 occurred inside the power regeneration converter. Gr.1

3056 A.BF0 System Alarm 0 Internal program error 0 occurred in the SERVOPACK. Gr.1




Errors Messages and Alarms 704-0116-501 Alarms 7-97


3088 A.C10 Servo Overrun Detected The servo motor ran out of control. Gr.1

3114 A.C2A Pulse Encoder Phase C Error/ Pulse Error

The number of pulses per revolution exceeded the setting range. Gr.1

3130 A.C3A Pulse Encoder Phase A Disconnection The signal line for phase A of the pulse encoder is disconnected. Gr.1

3131 A.C3B Pulse Encoder Phase B Disconnection The signal line for phase B of the pulse encoder is disconnected. Gr.1

3132 A.C3C Pulse Encoder Phase C Disconnection The signal line for phase C of the pulse encoder is disconnected. Gr.1

3152 A.C50Phase C Not Detected

Phase C was not detected during the first two rotations after the power supply was turned ON. Gr.1

Magnetic Pole Incorrect Detection The magnetic pole could not be detected.

3153 A.C51 Over travel Detection at Polarity Detection

An overtravel signal was detected during mag-netic pole detection. Gr.1

3154 A.C52 Polarity Detection Uncompleted

An attempt was made to detect the magnetic pole for the high-speed winding or when hanging the winding (for motors with a wind-ing selection).

Gr.1

3155 A.C53 Out of Range for Polarity Detection Movement during magnetic pole detection reached or exceeded the set value of Pn494. Gr.1

3156 A.C54 Polarity Detection Error 2 The magnetic pole could not be detected. Gr.1

3200 A.C80 Absolute Encoder Clear Error and Multiturn Limit Setting Error

The multiturn for the absolute encoder was not properly cleared or set. Gr.1

3216 A.C90 Encoder Communications Error Communications between the SERVOPACK and the encoder is not possible. Gr.1

3217 A.C91 Encoder Communications Position Data Error

An encoder position data calculation error occurred. Gr.1

3218 A.C92 Encoder Communications Timer Error An error occurs in the communications timer between the encoder and the SERVOPACK. Gr.1

3232 A.CA0 Encoder Parameter Error Encoder parameters are faulty. Gr.1

3248 A.CB0 Encoder Echoback Error Contents of communications with encoder is incorrect. Gr.1

3264 A.CC0 Multiturn Limit Disagreement Different multiturn limits have been set in the encoder and the SERVOPACK. Gr.1

3313 A.CF1 2Serial Converter Unit Communications Error (Reception error) Reception from the serial converter unit. Gr.1

3314 A.CF2 2Serial Converter Unit Communications Error (Timer stop)

Timer for communications with the serial converter unit is faulty. Gr.1

3328 A.D00 Position Error Pulse Overflow Position error pulses exceeded parameter (Pn520). Gr.1

3329 A.D01 Position Error Pulse Overflow Alarm at Servo ON Position error pulses accumulated too much. Gr.1

3330 A.D02 Position Error Pulse Overflow Alarm by Speed Limit at Servo ON

After a position error pulse has been input, Pn529 limits the speed if the SV_ON command is received. If Pn529 limits the speed in such a state, this alarm occurs when the position references are input and the number of posi-tion error pulses exceeds the value set for parameter Pn520 (Excessive Position Error Alarm Level).

Gr.2

3344 A.D10 Motor-load Position Error Overflow The position error between motor and load is excessive. Gr.2

3584 A.E00 System Alarm 5 Internal program error 5 occurred in the SERVOPACK. Gr.1




1. If the fan stops, an alarm or a warning will be issued in accordance with the setting of SERVOPACK parameter Pn00D.2.

2. The alarm that may occur when using external encoders.


3761 A.EB1 HWBB Function Signal Input Timing Error

The HWBB function signal input timing is faulty. Gr.1

3818 A.EEA Converter Local Bus WD Error A power regeneration converter local bus WD alarm occurred. Gr.1

3819 A.EEB Converter Local Bus Communications Error

A communications error occurred during the power regeneration converter local bus communications.

Gr.1

3824 A.EF0 Local Bus Connection Error The local bus is not connected. Gr.1

3826 A.EF2 Local Bus Drive WD Error A local bus watchdog alarm occurred in the SERVOPACK. Gr.2

3828 A.EF4 Local Bus Communications Error An error occurred during local bus communications. Gr.2

3866 A.F1A Converter AC Power Supply Open Phase

The voltage was low for one second in phase L1, L2, or L3 when the main power supply was turned ON.

Gr.1

3882 A.F2A Converter AC Power Supply Frequency Error The power supply frequency is faulty. Gr.1

3883 A.F2B Converter AC Power Supply Frequency Detection Time Exceeded

The detection of the AC power supply input frequency was not completed within the set time.

Gr.1

3888 A.F30 External DB Error There is an error in the connection to the external dynamic brake. Gr.1

3899 A.F3B Converter AC Power Supply Phase Sequence Error

An error occurred in the AC power supply phase sequence. Gr.1

Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Record of Changes -1

RECORD OF CHANGES

704-0116-501 rD, v9.1/10.1 June 2015

Revised by: H.Arle

Approved by: D.Skrzypczak

704-0116-501 rC, v9.1 June 2014

Revised by: H.Arle


Changes

• Added new Error Messages section.

• Added Servo Alarms section.

• Updated Automatic Tool Monitoring Parameter and other changes in Program Parameters.

• Updated Machine Parameters section to reflect reorganized parameters; also added new parameters

• Updated Linear Thermal Compensation section.

• Added Concurrent Programming section.

• Updated User Preferences section to reflect new import/export feature.

• Added Max5 UI Graphics Screen option for Max4 consoles.

• Added new Max5 console to Machine and Console Basics section.

• Added new Max5 Remote Jog Units. to Machine and Console Basics section.

• Other updates to reflect software changes.

Changes

• Added Pallet Changer Control (M70) definition to NC and related fields to Field Glossary.

• Added Linear Thermal Compensation feature to Auto Mode and related fields to Field Glossary/

- 2 Record of Changes 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

704-0116-501 rB, v9.1 March 2014

Revised by: H.Arle


704-0116-501 rA, v9.1 November 2013

Revised by: H.Arle

Approved by: D.Skrzypczak, November 2013

Changes

• Added new NC Settings parameter Diameter Compensation Using Tool Setup.

• Added Job List Estimated Run Time screen in Auto mode.

• Updated Rest Machining section.

• Updated Machine Function block section.

• Added new M Codes for Axis Limit Overrides (M210, 211, 212) and Kinematic ASR (M213, 214). See Miscellaneous Functions - M Codes.

• Added new softkey to Tool Management screen.

• Added NC parameters to Field Name Glossary.

• Cutter Compensation (preliminary) revisions.

• Two Point Edge Skew cycle in Part Probing

• Other updates to reflect software changes.

Changes

• Changes to support new Field Name Glossary.

• Moved optional features documentation into appropriate sections.

• Added new Extended Shop Floor documentation.

• Updates to reflect software changes.

WinMax Mill Programming Manual 704-0116-501 Index — 1

INDEX

Numerics10-base T 1 - 2024-station 1 - 1433D Arc Data Block 2 - 243D circular interpolation

G02.4 and G03.4 3 - 493D Mold 2 - 34

Blend Arc 2 - 40Contour 2 - 38Line 2 - 39Parameters 2 - 34

3D tool geometry compensation, G41.2 3 -77, 3 - 174

5-axis linear interpolation, G43.4 3 - 83

AA 7 - 1A Angle 7 - 1A Angle field

Rotary Lines and Arcs Start Segment 7 -1

A axisclamp, M32 3 - 166unclamp M33 3 - 166

A Center 7 - 1A Centerline X/Y/ Z 7 - 1A Corner 7 - 1A Distance 7 - 1A End field

Rotary Lines and Arcs Line Segment 7 -1

A Length 7 - 1A Offset 7 - 1A Start 7 - 1A-axis rotation 5 - 2Abort Port Operation softkey, Serial I/O

screen 1 - 51About X 2 - 34About Z 2 - 34absolute location, tool probing 4 - 24absolute machining mode, G90 3 - 135Absolute Tool Length mode 1 - 96ACCELERATED DRAW F2 softkey, graphics

screen 1 - 132ACCEPT POSITION AS PART ZERO (F1)

softkeyCylinder cycle 4 - 44Edge cycle 4 - 53, 4 - 55Hole or Circle Pocket cycle 4 - 55

Part Zero storage 7 - 39Plane Intersection cycle 4 - 46Rectangular Pocket cycle 4 - 50Rectangular Solid cycle 4 - 48

Accept softkey, DXF 2 - 133, 2 - 137ACCEPT X/Y SKEW ANGLE (F1) softkey

Cylinder Skew cycle 4 - 60Edge Skew cycle 4 - 62Hole Skew cycle 4 - 58Rectangular Pocket Skew cycle 4 - 61Rectangular Solid Skew cycle 4 - 59

access code 1 - 130changing 1 - 130

activate spindle, canned cycle 3 - 150Active Error Listing 1 - 51Active Status Listing 1 - 52AdaptiPath 2 - 140, 2 - 141Add As Manual Tool softkey

Tool Review screen 1 - 113Unmatched Tools Review 1 - 113

Add Job 1 - 31Add Location softkey 2 - 103ADD MATERIAL F1 softkey, Tool and Mate-

rial Database screen 1 - 117ADD TOOL F1 softkey, Tool and Material

Database 1 - 117Add Tool softkey, Tool and Material Data-

base screen 1 - 117Address Characters 3 - 3Address expressions 3 - 193Addresses

with numbers 3 - 190with variables 3 - 190

ADP 1-Way Pocket Type 2 - 141ADP Zigzag Pocket Type 2 - 140Advanced Tool Settings 1 - 103

softkey 1 - 102air

probe barrier, M43 (increase) 3 - 167probe barrier, M44 (decrease) 3 - 167

Air Pressure 7 - 1Alarm 3000 messages 3 - 190All Off, DXF 2 - 138All On, DXF 2 - 138Allow Plunge Outside Pocket 7 - 1Allow Vacant Variables 7 - 2Along Contour 2 - 76Alt Dwell Lt Side 7 - 2Alt Dwell Lt Side, machine parameters 1 -

66Alt Washdown Dwell 7 - 2Alt Washdown Dwell, machine parameters

1 - 66Alt Washdown Off Time 7 - 2Alt Washdown Off Time, machine parame-

2 - Index 704-0116-501 WinMax Mill Programming Manual

ters 1 - 67Angle 7 - 2Angle Center 7 - 2Angle Distance 7 - 2Angle End 7 - 3Angle Length 7 - 3Angle Number 7 - 3Angle Ref Location 7 - 3Angle Reference 7 - 3Angle Start 7 - 3ANSI/EIA RS-274-D standard 3 - 2APC 1 - 151

diagnostics 1 - 153Machine Function screen 1 - 152squaring the table 1 - 151

APC Clamp Status 7 - 3APC Door Status 7 - 3APC Position 7 - 3Append Tool and Material Database soft-

key, Import and Export 1 - 123Application Font Size 7 - 3Apply Border To Top 7 - 3Approach Feed 7 - 3Arc Radius 7 - 3ARG 3 - 23, 3 - 24Argument Type 7 - 3Arguments 3 - 186

NC 3 - 22passing 3 - 207

arrow keys 1 - 6Assume Feedrate .1 Increment 7 - 3Assure Minimum Length 7 - 3ATC 1 - 23, 1 - 141

large tools 1 - 25, 1 - 142loading 1 - 24, 1 - 141tool removal 1 - 25, 1 - 142

ATC Axis Positions 7 - 4ATC Disable 7 - 4ATC Disable, machine parameters 1 - 60ATC Door 7 - 4ATC OK to Stop 7 - 4ATC Position 7 - 4ATC Status 7 - 4ATC Z Axis Position 7 - 4Auto Balance Enable 7 - 4Auto Balance Enable, machine parameters

1 - 57Auto console key 1 - 18Auto Mode 1 - 128

Monitoring 1 - 162Auto Set Restart Marker 1 - 160Auto tab, Tool Library 1 - 115AutoCalc 2 - 7Autochain

Contours, DXF 2 - 135

DXF 2 - 133Automatic Buffering Off (M17) 3 - 164Automatic Buffering On (M16) 3 - 164Automatic Calculations 2 - 7Automatic Centerline Calculation 7 - 4Automatic mode 4 - 64automatic pallet changer 1 - 151automatic part probing cycles 4 - 64automatic part setup data block execution

4 - 66automatic return

from reference point, G29 3 - 67to reference point, G28 3 - 67

Automatic Safe Repositioning Command Buffer Off (G08.2) 3 - 56

Automatic Safe Repositioning Command Buffer On (G08.1) 3 - 54

Automatic Safe Repositioning Retract Over-ride 7 - 4

Automatic Tool Change Using TPS 1 - 149automatic tool changer 1 - 141

40-taper 1 - 14350-taper 1 - 145

Automatic Tool Monitoring 7 - 4Automatic Tool Monitoring field 4 - 17Automatic Tool Monitoring field, Probing

Parameters screen 4 - 17Automatic Tool Removal Using TPS 1 - 148Automatically Load Unmatched Tools As

Manual 7 - 4AutoSave Settings 1 - 46

softkey, Utilities screen 1 - 43Aux Output 1-12 Confirmation Enable 7 - 5Aux Output Confirmation Enable, machine

parameters 1 - 72Aux Work Coordinate Systems, G54.1 3 -

100Aux Work Offsets

LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 - 15Auxiliary

console key 1 - 6Mode 1 - 37

auxiliary outputdisable, M62 through M65 3 - 168, 3 -

178enable, M54 through M55 3 - 167

Auxiliary Work Offsets 1 - 94axes angle input, tool center point manage-

ment 3 - 172Axes Status 7 - 5Axis 7 - 5axis

control 1 - 8motion 3 - 8

Axis Center 7 - 5


Axis Configuration 5 - 4Axis Distance 7 - 5Axis End 7 - 5Axis Feed Rate dial 1 - 8Axis Feedrate Override Max (%) 7 - 5Axis Feedrate Override Min (%) 7 - 5Axis Feedrate Override Min (%) parameter

1 - 71Axis Length 7 - 5Axis Limit Switches 7 - 5Axis Number 7 - 5Axis of Rotation 5 - 23Axis Ref Location 7 - 5Axis Reference 7 - 5Axis Selector (& Override) Knob 1 - 15Axis Start 7 - 5Axis Start field 5 - 15

BB 7 - 6B Angle 7 - 6B axis

clamp M34 3 - 166unclamp M35 3 - 166

B Centerline X / Y / Z 7 - 6B Distance 7 - 6B Offset 7 - 6back boring, G87 ISNC 3 - 128Back Spotface 2 - 101Background Color 7 - 6Backup Config & Machine Files 1 - 39

softkey 1 - 38Ball-Nosed End Mill 2 - 42, 2 - 43

on a Contour 2 - 41Basic Programming Menu, NC 3 - 9Baud Rate 7 - 6B-axis rotation 5 - 2B-Axis Status 7 - 6Beam Offset 7 - 6Begin Reading from Port softkey, Serial I/O

screen 1 - 51Begin Writing to Port softkey, Serial I/O

screen 1 - 51beginning of file, NC 3 - 3Bidirectional 7 - 6Blank Spacing 7 - 7Blend Arc 2 - 22Blend Offset 7 - 7Blend Overlap 7 - 7Blend Type 7 - 8Block field

Mill Circle data block 7 - 8Block Renumbering mode softkey 3 - 14Block Skip Enable 7 - 8

BNC dialect 3 - 2Bolt Circle 2 - 102Bolt Circle to Holes Locations Conversion

2 - 104Bolt Circle to Pattern Locations Conversion

2 - 104Bolt hole circle program 3 - 236Border Size 7 - 8Bore 2 - 99

boring bar 2 - 99orient 2 - 100rapid 2 - 99

boreback boring cycle 3 - 147bore cycle 3 - 146chip breaker cycle 3 - 147counter, drill with dwell G82 3 - 115manual feed out and dwell, G88 ISNC

3 - 131manual feed out cycle 3 - 147orient cycle 3 - 146, 3 - 147orient G76 3 - 111rapid out cycle 3 - 147rapid out, G86 ISNC 3 - 125rigid tapping cycle 3 - 147spot drill, G81 3 - 113with dwell cycle 3 - 147with dwell G89 3 - 133

Bore Dwell 7 - 9Bore Orient Retract 7 - 9Boring and Reaming Operations 2 - 98boring, G85 3 - 123Bottom Tab, Custom Drill 2 - 94BPRNT/DPRNT Output Device 7 - 9BPRNT/DPRNT Output File 7 - 9Break Out Tab, Custom Drill 2 - 93Breakage Tolerance 7 - 9Breakage Tolerance field, Tool Monitoring

screen 4 - 15Build DB softkey 2 - 133Bypass TPS in an Automatic Tool Change

1 - 150Bytes Transferred field, Serial I/O 1 - 51

CC 7 - 9C Angle 7 - 9C axis

clamp, M12 3 - 164negative direction, M81 3 - 169positive direction, M80 3 - 169unclamp, M13 3 - 164

C Center 7 - 9C Centerline X / Y / Z 7 - 9


C Corner 7 - 9C Distance 7 - 9C End 7 - 9C Length 7 - 9C Offset 7 - 10C Start 7 - 10CAL to LS Velocity A 1 - 59CAL to LS Velocity A, B, C 7 - 10CAL to LS Velocity X 1 - 59CAL to LS Velocity X, Y, Z 7 - 10Cal to LS Velocity, machine parameters 1 -

60Cal Tool D 7 - 10Cal Tool H 7 - 10Cal Tool L 7 - 10Calculations, automatic 2 - 7calculator 1 - 80Calibrate Machine softkey, Manual Mode 1 -

138Calibrate the Tool Probe,Tool Setup

Probing Parameters, Zero Calibration mode 4 - 28

Calibrating the Machine 1 - 136calibration

laser tool 4 - 19part probe 4 - 34

cancel canned cycle 3 - 146, 3 - 150G80 3 - 113

canned cycleactivate spindle 3 - 150cancel 3 - 146, 3 - 150code (parameters) 3 - 148descriptions 3 - 142operations 3 - 146replace 3 - 150tapping 3 - 120

carriage return/line feed pair 3 - 4C-axis rotation 5 - 2CE Configuration field 1 - 129CE Diagnostics softkey 1 - 129CE Safety override mode 1 - 128CE Status & Diagnostics screen 1 - 129CE2000 1 - 128Center Beam X 7 - 10Center Beam Y 7 - 10Center Drill 2 - 89Center X 7 - 10Center X field

Hole or Circle Pocket cycle 4 - 50Rectangular Pocket cycle 4 - 51Ring Gauge Deflection Offset 4 - 35

Center X, DXF 2 - 138Center Y 7 - 10Center Y field

Rectangular Solid cycle 4 - 35

Center Y, DXF 2 - 138Centerline X 7 - 10Centerline Y 7 - 10Centerline Y field, 3D Mold Parameters 2 -

35Centerline Z 7 - 10Centerline Z field, 3D Mold Parameters 2 -

35Chamfer Angle 7 - 10Change Access Code softkey 1 - 130Change All Feeds Speeds & Tools softkey

1 - 124change feeds 1 - 125Change Feeds & Speeds by Tool softkey 1 -

124Change Finish SFQ 7 - 10CHANGE FTP ROOT DRIVE F5 softkey

FTP Server Settings screen 6 - 9Change Parameters 2 - 119Change Parameters (General) 2 - 120Change Parameters (Holes) 2 - 120Change Parameters (Milling) 2 - 120Change Parameters (Performance) 2 - 120Change Parameters (Probing) 2 - 120Change Part Setup 2 - 121change program blocks 1 - 124change programmed feedrate 3 - 44Change Rough SFQ 7 - 11change speeds 1 - 125Change Tool 7 - 11Change Tool Number 1 - 110

softkey 1 - 110Change Tool Number softkey 1 - 102

Tool Library screen 1 - 116change tools 1 - 125Change Z-Start 7 - 11changing access code 1 - 130Changing Feeds, Speeds, and Tools 1 - 125Char Spacing 7 - 11Character Height 7 - 11Character Length 7 - 11Character Width 7 - 11Check Calc Assist Inconsistencies 7 - 11Check for Errors softkey, Auto Mode 1 -

159chip breaker, G87 BNC 3 - 127chip conveyor M codes 3 - 168Chip Removal 7 - 11Chip Removal Forward On/Off softkey, Auto

Mode 1 - 163Chip Removal Forward On/Off soft-

key,manual mode 1 - 139Chip Removal Off Delay Time 7 - 11Chip Removal Off Delay Time, machine pa-

rameters 1 - 58


Chip Removal On Delay Time 7 - 11Chip Removal On Delay Time, machine pa-

rameters 1 - 58Chip Removal On/Off Delay Enable 7 - 11Chip Removal On/Off Delay Enable, ma-

chine parameters 1 - 58Chip Removal Reverse On/Off softkey,

manual mode 1 - 139Chipload 7 - 11Choose as Replacement softkey 1 - 114Chord Error 7 - 11chord error default 3 - 49Circle Data Block 2 - 26circular and helical interpolation, CW G02

3 - 44circular interpolation

3D G02.4 and G03.4 3 - 49multi-quadrant, G75 BNC 3 - 110single-quadrant, G74 BNC 3 - 110

Circular Passes 7 - 11Clear Graphics 1 - 132CLEAR TOOLS F6 softkey, Tool Library

screen 1 - 116Client

definition 6 - 2Climb Milling 2 - 12Close 1 - 30Closing Feed 7 - 12Coding standard 3 - 7Collapse and Expand Files 1 - 78Color 7 - 12Comment Block 2 - 123Comment Color 7 - 12Communications Panel 1 - 20Compute Estimated Run Time softkey, Auto

Mode 1 - 159Concurrent Programming 1 - 165concurrent programming

access from Input screen 1 - 165configuration of Hurco machining centers

5 - 3Confirm APC Ready 7 - 12console 1 - 3console buttons

Feed hold 1 - 17motion control buttons 1 - 17Motion hold 1 - 17

console keys 1 - 76Auto 1 - 18Delete 1 - 6End 1 - 6Enter 1 - 6Home 1 - 6, 3 - 5Insert 1 - 6Interrupt cycle 1 - 18

Machine Mode 1 - 18Machine Mode ,Single 1 - 18Machine Mode ,Test 1 - 18Machine Mode, Auto 1 - 18Page Down 1 - 6Page Up 1 - 6Single 1 - 18Test 1 - 18

console knobsAxis Feed Rate 1 - 8Rapid Override 1 - 8Spindle Speed 1 - 8

Constant Z level, in Swept Surface 2 - 74Contact Point X 7 - 12Contact Point Y 7 - 13Contour

End 2 - 25Contour Arc 2 - 21Contour Blend Arc 2 - 22Contour Line 2 - 20Contour Start Segment 2 - 19control panel 1 - 4Control Panel Function Groups 1 - 4Control Power Off Time 7 - 13Control Power Off Time, machine parame-

ters 1 - 57Control Power Off Timer 1 - 166Conventional Milling 2 - 12Conversational Components 1 - 121Conversational Overview 2 - 1Conversational part probing cycles 4 - 38Conversational Part Program creation 2 - 2CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAM F1 softkey,

Program Manager 1 - 28CONVERSATIONAL SETTINGS, Utilities

screen 1 - 42CONVERT TO LINEAR F7 softkey, Program

Review screen 1 - 127CONVERT TO ROTARY F6 softkey, Program

Review screen 1 - 127Coolant 7 - 13coolant

both systems off, M09 3 - 163both systems on, M10 3 - 163primary on, M08 3 - 163secondary on, M07 3 - 163

Coolant Delay Time 1 - 63, 7 - 13coolant parameters, defined 1 - 64Coolant Status 7 - 13Coolant Washdown On/Off softkey, Auto

Mode 1 - 163Coordinate System 7 - 13coordinate system rotation cancel, G69 3 -

105coordinate system setting 3 - 137


local, G52 3 - 93coordinate systems, multiple work G54-59

3 - 98coordinates, machine, G53 3 - 96Copy and Change Blocks 1 - 124

Input screen 1 - 84Copy Blocks softkey 1 - 124COPY DIRECTORY softkey

Disk Operations 1 - 34copy program blocks 1 - 124Copy Selection softkey 3 - 12COPY softkey

Disk Operations 1 - 35Program Review screen 1 - 127

Copy Tool softkey 1 - 110Corner Radius 7 - 13Corner Radius field

Mill Slot Caps tab 2 - 82Corner X 7 - 13Corner X field, Plane Intersection cycle 4 -

54Corner Y 7 - 13Counterbore 2 - 89Countersink 2 - 89CR / Chip Removal 7 - 13create a rotary-axis or tilt-axis program

from an existing Conversational pro-gram 5 - 4

CREATE DIRECTORY softkeyDisk Operations 1 - 35

Current Font 7 - 13Current Time 7 - 13cursor control 1 - 6Cusp Height 7 - 13

in Swept Surface 2 - 74Custom Drill 2 - 92Custom NC File Extensions 7 - 14Cut Direction 7 - 14CUT DIRECTORY softkey

Disk Operations 1 - 34CUT softkey


Cutter Comp Parameter 7 - 14cutter compensation 2 - 9, 3 - 74

exit move 3 - 79left, G41 3 - 77off, G40 3 - 76right, G42 3 - 78steps for programming 3 - 79tool length offset 3 - 76tool radius offset 3 - 75

Cutting Edges 7 - 15Cutting inside a cavity 2 - 120Cutting Time 7 - 15

Cycle 7 - 15Cycle field in Probing 4 - 9Cycle field, Tool Setup

Probing Parameters, Absolute Tool Length mode 4 - 3

Cycle Pallet Changer (M51) 3 - 167cycle, return to initial point, G98 3 - 142Cylinder

probing cycle 4 - 47probing part setup fields 4 - 47skew probing cycle 4 - 60

Cylinder Angle 7 - 15Cylinder Axis 7 - 15Cylinder cycle 4 - 47Cylinder Radius 7 - 15Cylinder Radius Data 5 - 23Cylinder Skew Probing cycle 4 - 60Cylindrical Rotary Wrap Off (G07.3) 3 - 53Cylindrical Rotary Wrap On (G07.2) 3 - 52

DD code 3 - 153Data block 2 - 2Data Block Tool Entry Feed and Speed Up-

date 7 - 15Data Origin 7 - 15data smoothing G05.2 3 - 51Datum Z field, Ring Gauge Deflection Offset

4 - 35DB SEARCH F6 softkey, graphics screen 1 -

133Default Conversational Program Type 7 -

16Default Cutter Comp Lookahead 7 - 16Default Cutter Comp Lookahead field

NC Parameters, NC Configuration screen 3 - 80

Default M and G Codes 3 - 5Default Order

softkey 2 - 133, 2 - 134Default Pocket Overlap 7 - 16Default Radius

DXF 2 - 133Default Tool Number 7 - 16default values, information about 3 - 5Default View 7 - 16Default Zone 7 - 16Default Zoom softkey

graphics screen 1 - 133Deflection offset calibration

probing 4 - 23, 4 - 34Deflection Offset column, Reference Block

Deflection Offset 4 - 36Delete Block softkey 1 - 127, 3 - 9


Delete Blocks softkey 1 - 124DELETE DIRECTORY softkey

Disk Operations 1 - 35Delete key 1 - 6Delete Location softkey 2 - 103DELETE MATERIAL F3 softkey, Tool and Ma-

terial Database screen 1 - 117delete program blocks 1 - 124Delete softkey

Disk Operations 1 - 35DXF 2 - 137Program Review screen 1 - 127

Delete Sub Block softkey 1 - 127DELETE TOOL F3 softkey, Tool and Material

Database screen 1 - 117Delete Tool softkey 1 - 100deleting

words or characters 3 - 5Depletion Retract 7 - 16depth, Z code 3 - 149Description 7 - 16DETERMINE LASER BEAM OFFSET (F1) soft-

key, Tool Setup screen 4 - 19DETERMINE LASER BEAM OFFSET softkey,

Tool Setup screen 4 - 19Device 7 - 16DIAGNOSTICS F3 softkey, Manual Mode 1 -

138Diagnostics screen

APC 1 - 153Diagnostics softkey 1 - 129Diameter 7 - 16

tool probing sequence, single tool 4 - 6, 4 - 12

Diameter Tolerance 7 - 17Diameter Wear 7 - 17

Tool Probing 4 - 6, 4 - 12Diamond Data Block 2 - 71Digital Read Out 1 - 88digital read out 1 - 164Direction 7 - 17Direction field

DXF 2 - 138Disable Auto On Chip Removal 7 - 17Disable Auto On Chip Removal parameter

1 - 57Disable Aux Out 1-12 During Interrupt 7 -

17Disable Aux Out During Interrupt, machine

parameters 1 - 72Disable Centerlines 7 - 17Disable Tool Length Offset Table 7 - 17Disable Tool Picker Option 7 - 18Disable Tool Picker Option, machine param-

eters 1 - 60

Disable Undo and Redo 7 - 18Disable X Scaling 7 - 18Disable Y Scaling 7 - 18Disable Z Scaling 7 - 18DISCONNECT ALL USERS F6 softkey

FTP Server Settings screen 6 - 9Disk Operations 1 - 34

softkey, Program Manager 1 - 30Display Geometry, DXF 2 - 135Display Machine Axes For Universal Type

7 - 18DISPLAY MACHINE IP ADDRESS F4 softkey,

FTP Server Settings screen 6 - 9Display Machine Specifications softkey 1 -

38Display Time 7 - 18Display Tool Notes 2 - 7Display Units 7 - 18Display Warning Message, Tool Utilities and

Settings 7 - 30Display WinMax Configuration softkey 1 -

38Dist to Go / Trans (Standard DRO) softkey

1 - 164Distance 7 - 18Distance To Go (QUAD-SIZE DRO) softkey

1 - 164Distance to Go (Standard DRO) softkey 1 -

164DO loops 3 - 203DO NOT ACCEPT (F2) softkey

Cylinder cycle 4 - 46Cylinder Skew cycle 4 - 50Edge cycle 4 - 60Edge Skew cycle 4 - 59Hole or Circle Pocket cycle 4 - 58Plane Intersection cycle 4 - 53Rectangular Pocket cycle 4 - 61Rectangular Pocket Skew cycle 4 - 62Rectangular Solid cycle 4 - 44Rectangular Solid Skew cycle 4 - 48

Door Lock Status field 1 - 129Door Switch Status field 1 - 129DRAW (PAUSE) softkey, graphics screen 1 -

132Draw 2D Contour 7 - 55Draw Along Contour 2 - 76Draw console key 2 - 132DRAW OPTIONS softkey, graphics screen

1 - 132Draw Profile Contour 2 - 75Drawing scale 7 - 18Drill 2 - 89drill

deep hole cycle 3 - 146


deep hole, G83 3 - 116peck, G73 3 - 107spot boring cycle 3 - 146with dwell, counter boring cycle 3 - 146

Drill Angle 7 - 18Drill Dwell 7 - 18Drill Operations 2 - 88Drip Rej. Delay 7 - 18Drip Rej. Samples 7 - 18drive

jump 1 - 22DRO 1 - 164drop-down lists 1 - 78Dry Run softkey, Auto Mode 1 - 160Dual Laser Probe Present 7 - 18Dual Tool Probe Present parameter 1 - 57Dual-Zone Machining 1 - 155dwell

bottom of hole, P code (canned cycle) 3 - 148

mode, G04 3 - 50P code 3 - 149

Dwell Time 7 - 19DXF

Editor 2 - 132Layers 2 - 138

DXF Edit ModifyArc 2 - 138Line 2 - 138Point 2 - 138

DXF Option 2 - 131

EEdge (X, Y, or Z) field

Edge Skew cycle 4 - 58Edge cycle 4 - 42Edge Skew cycle 4 - 58, 4 - 63Edit 3D Mold Parameters softkey 2 - 38EDIT ALONG CONTOUR softkey 2 - 76Edit Apt Parameters 1 - 109Edit Drawing

DXF 2 - 133, 2 - 136Edit Functions Menu 3 - 12Edit Functions softkey 3 - 10Edit Lockout 1 - 40Edit Lockout Level 7 - 19Edit Lockout Level field 1 - 40EDIT MATERIAL softkey, Tool and Material

Database screen 1 - 117Edit Mode 7 - 19EDIT PROFILE CONTOUR softkey 2 - 75EDIT TOOL softkey, Tool and Material Data-

base screen 1 - 117EIR Relay State field 1 - 129

Ellipse 2 - 33Emergency Stop 1 - 15, 1 - 165

button 1 - 5Enable 1 - 57, 7 - 19Enable Auto Numbering softkey 3 - 15Enable Automatic Matching 7 - 19Enable Automatic Save 7 - 19Enable Blend Moves field, Mill Contour

block 7 - 19Enable Cutter Comp 7 - 19Enable Dual Zones 1 - 156, 7 - 19Enable Dual Zones parameter 1 - 58Enable FTP Server 7 - 19ENABLE FTP SERVER field

FTP Server Settings screen 6 - 8Enable Lead In Error Checking 7 - 19Enable Lead Out Error Checking 7 - 19Enable Linear Thermal Compensation 7 -

20Enable Optional Numbering softkey 3 - 15Enable Pecking Retract Clearance 7 - 20Enable Program Restore 7 - 20Enable Reset at Program Start 7 - 20Enable Reset at Program Start, NC Settings

1 - 43Enable Retract Z-Axis on Power Loss 7 - 20Enable Runtime Tool Display 7 - 20Enable Tool Life Monitoring 7 - 20Enable Tool Life Monitoring, Tool Utilities

and Settings 1 - 43Enable Tool SFQ 7 - 20Enable Tool SFQ field, Advanced Tool Set-

tings 1 - 108Enable User M/G Codes field, NC M and G

Code Program Numbers 3 - 21Enable User S/B/T Codes field, NC M and G

Code Program Numbers 3 - 21Enable Variable Monitoring 7 - 20Enable Variable Monitoring, NC Settings 1 -

43End Angle 7 - 20End Block 7 - 20End Cap 7 - 20End Job 7 - 21End key 1 - 6end of file, NC 3 - 3End Of Program code (M30) 3 - 165end of program, M02 3 - 161Endpoint Tolerance 7 - 21Endpoint1 X, DXF 2 - 138Endpoint1 Y, DXF 2 - 138Endpoint2 X, DXF 2 - 138Endpoint2 Y, DXF 2 - 138Enter Access Code softkey 1 - 130Enter key 1 - 6


Enter Text To Search softkey 3 - 11entering the access code 1 - 130Entry Tab, Custom Drill 2 - 93Erase Functions 1 - 84

Input screen 1 - 84ERASE PART SETUP softkey 1 - 84ERASE PROGRAM softkey 1 - 84ERASE TOOL SETUP softkey 1 - 84Error History 1 - 52Error Messages 7 - 67Error messages

#3000 3 - 190Error.wrc 7 - 67Estimated Run Time Parameters 1 - 73Ethernet

definition 6 - 2European machines 1 - 2Exchange Arm 7 - 21Exchange Arm Jog Reverse F4, ATC and

machine diagnostics 1 - 147Exchange Arm Rotate F5, ATC and machine

diagnostics 1 - 147Exit/Cancel

DXF 2 - 133Expand and Collapse Files 1 - 78Explode PCurve softkey, DXF 2 - 137Export 1 - 123EXPORT AUTO AND MANUAL TOOLS soft-

key, Import and Export 1 - 123Export Log 1 - 54Export Manual Tools List softkey, Import

and Export 1 - 123Export Tool and Material Database softkey,

Import and Export 1 - 123Exported NC Decimal Places 7 - 21Exported NC Decimal Places field, NC Set-

tings 1 - 42Expression

keywords 3 - 195spacing 3 - 196symbols 3 - 193

Extend softkey, DXF 2 - 136

FF / Feed 7 - 21F code 3 - 3, 3 - 8

feedrate 3 - 148F words, feedrate 3 - 139F(%) 7 - 21Face Milling 2 - 31Fast Feed 7 - 21

Tool Probing 4 - 5, 4 - 11Fast Feed, Tool Setup

Probing Parameters, Absolute Tool

Length mode 4 - 4, 4 - 11Fast Start Feed 7 - 21Feed 7 - 21feed

functions, dwell mode 3 - 50functions, F words 3 - 139per minute feedrate, G94 3 - 139

Feed & Speed Optimization softkey, Auto Mode 1 - 159

Feed and Speed 1 - 106, 1 - 107Advanced Tool Settings 1 - 106Calculations 1 - 107

Feed Hold button, Remote Jog Unit 1 - 15Feed Hold console button 1 - 17Feedrate

part probing 4 - 39feedrate 3 - 3, 3 - 8

change programmed 3 - 44F code 3 - 148, 3 - 149inverse time G93 3 - 139

Field Name Glossary 7 - 1fields

Part Setup, rotary-axis program, WinMax Mill 1 - 90

File 7 - 21HD3 Serial Number Lettering Text tab

2 - 66File Transfer Protocol 6 - 8File transfer protocol

definition 6 - 2Find & Replace softkey 3 - 13Finish Feed (%) 7 - 22Finish Plunge Helix Radius 7 - 22Finish Plunge Ramp Slope 7 - 22Finish Plunge Type 7 - 22Finish SFQ field 1 - 126Finish Speed (%) 7 - 23First Move (Z Retract) 7 - 24First Peck Offset 7 - 24Fit to View softkey

DXF 2 - 135graphics screen 1 - 133

Flashlight 1 - 15, 1 - 16Flat End Mill 2 - 41

on a Contour 2 - 41Font 7 - 24Font Side of Contour 7 - 24Fonts, True-Type 2 - 56, 2 - 62formula

Washdown Off Delay Timer 1 - 68Washdown On Delay Timer 1 - 68

formula, speed and feed for tap 3 - 120Frame Data Block 2 - 29Frame Radius 7 - 24FTP


definition 6 - 2FTP Host 6 - 11FTP Host List screen 6 - 10FTP Host Properties 6 - 10FTP Host Properties screen 6 - 10FTP Manager 1 - 30, 1 - 35FTP MANAGER F8 softkey

Project Manager screen 6 - 10FTP Manager softkey

Disk Operations 1 - 35FTP Server Port 7 - 24FTP SERVER PORT field

FTP Server Settings screen 6 - 8FTP Server Settings 1 - 44, 6 - 8Full Precision Editing 1 - 77

GG code 3 - 3, 3 - 24, 3 - 27

alarm 010 3 - 30cancel canned cycle 3 - 30functions 3 - 31, 3 - 36groups 3 - 31, 3 - 36modal 3 - 31NC/Conversational Merge 2 - 129same block 3 - 30same group 3 - 30table 3 - 31

G Code Group 3 - 24G00 Rapid Traverse 3 - 40G01 Linear Interpolation 3 - 42G02 CW circular and helical interpolation

3 - 44G02.4 and G03.4 3D circular interpolation

3 - 49G03 CCW circular and helical interpolation

3 - 44G04 dwell mode 3 - 50G05.1 surface finish 3 - 51G05.2 data smoothing 3 - 51G05.3 Surface Finish Quality 1 - 108G05.3, Surface Finish Quality 3 - 51G07.2, Cylindrical Rotary Wrap On 3 - 52G07.3, Cylindrical Rotary Wrap Off 3 - 53G08.1, Automatic Safe Repositioning Com-

mand Buffer On 3 - 54G08.2, Automatic Safe Repositioning Com-

mand Buffer Off 3 - 56G09 precision cornering 3 - 58G10 setting tool offsets 3 - 60

with L3 3 - 61with P, R 3 - 60with T, H, D 3 - 60

G10 setting work coordinate systems with L2 3 - 59

G140 Motoman Robot Control 3 - 145G16 polar coordinates 3 - 61G17 XY plane selection 3 - 62G18 XZ plane selection 3 - 64G19 YZ plane selection 3 - 66G20 ISNC inch 3 - 67G21 ISNC metric 3 - 67G28 automatic return to reference point 3 -

67G29 automatic return from reference point

3 - 67G31 skip (probing) function 3 - 70G40 cutter compensation off 3 - 76G41 cutter compensation left 3 - 77G41.2 3D tool geometry compensation 3 -

77, 3 - 174G42 cutter compensation right 3 - 78G43 positive tool length compensation 3 -

80G43.4 5-axis linear interpolation 3 - 83G44 negative tool length compensation 3 -

80G45 tool radius offset increase 3 - 84G46 tool radius offset decrease 3 - 84G47 tool radius offset double increase 3 -

84G48 tool radius offset double decrease 3 -

84G49 cancels tool length offset 3 - 80G50 scaling, cancel 3 - 87G50.1 mirroring cancel 3 - 90G51 scaling 3 - 87G51.1 mirroring 3 - 90G52 local coordinate system setting 3 - 93G53 machine coordinates 3 - 96G54.1, Aux Work Coordinate Systems 3 -

100G54-59 multiple work coordinate systems

3 - 98G61 precision cornering on 3 - 100G64 precision cornering off 3 - 100G65 Macro Command, Subprogram Call 3 -

186, 3 - 206, 3 - 207, 3 - 208, 3 -210, 3 - 216, 3 - 221

G66 Modal Subprogram Call 3 - 186, 3 -207, 3 - 208, 3 - 215, 3 - 216, 3 -221

G67 Modal Subprogram Call Cancel 3 - 216G68 rotation 3 - 102G68.2 global rotation NC transform plane

3 - 104G68.3 local rotation NC transform plane 3 -

104G69 coordinate system rotation cancel 3 -

105


G69 rotation cancel 3 - 102G70 BNC units of measure, inch 3 - 106G70, Unit of Measure, Inch 3 - 106G71 BNC units of measure, metric 3 - 106G71, Units of Measure, MM 3 - 106G73 peck drilling 3 - 107G74 BNC single-quadrant circular interpola-

tion 3 - 110G74 ISNC left-handed tapping, 3 - 109G75 BNC multi-quadrant circular interpola-

tion 3 - 110G76, bore orient 3 - 111G80, cancel canned cycle 3 - 113G81 drill, spot boring 3 - 113G82 drill with dwell, counter boring 3 - 115G83 drill, deep hole 3 - 116G84 tapping 3 - 120G84.2 ISNC rigid tapping, right-handed 3 -

130G84.3 ISNC rigid tapping, left-handed 3 -

130G85 boring 3 - 123G86 ISNC bore rapid out 3 - 125G87 BNC chip breaker 3 - 127G87 ISNC back boring 3 - 128G88 BNC rigid tapping 3 - 130G88 ISNC bore

manual feed out and dwell 3 - 131G89 bore with dwell 3 - 133G90 absolute machining mode 3 - 135G91 incremental machining mode 3 - 135G92 part zero setting 3 - 137G93 inverse time feedrare 3 - 139G94 feed per minute feedrate 3 - 139G94.1, Rotary Tangential Velocity Control

3 - 140G98 return to initial point in canned cycles

3 - 142G99 return to R level in cycles 3 - 144Gauge Device setup, with Absolute Tool

Length Mode 1 - 97Gear pattern program 3 - 238General 1 Parameters 1 - 118General 2 Parameters 1 - 118Geometry, Advanced Tool Settings 1 - 104global rotation NC transform plane, G68.2

3 - 104Global variables 3 - 185

NC 3 - 22glossary 6 - 2GOTO statements 3 - 201Graphics 1 - 131Graphics Chord Error 7 - 24Graphics On/Off 2 - 119Graphics Optimization 7 - 24

Graphics Settings 1 - 131for Stock Geomety 1 - 95softkey 1 - 131softkey, graphics screen 1 - 133

Gun Drill 2 - 90

HH codes 3 - 211H00 3 - 81hardware options 1 - 2HD3 Lettering 2 - 69HD3 Save Program Type 7 - 24HDS Serial Number Stick Lettering 2 - 65Height 7 - 25helical and circular interpolation, CW G02,

CCW G03 3 - 44Helical Plunge (Inside/Outside) for Mill

Frames, Mill Circles and Ellipses 2 -45

Helical Plunge in the Center of a Pocket 2 -46

Helical Plunge Milling Parameter Fields 2 -45

Helical Plunge of Mill Frame Inside with No Pecking and Blend Offset 2 - 46

Helical Plunge Option 2 - 44Helical Plunge Using Operator Specify Pock-

et Start 2 - 143Helical Plunge with 3-D Part Programming

Option 2 - 50Helical Plunge with Lines and Arcs 2 - 50Helical Plunge with Operator Specified Lo-

cation 2 - 46Helical Plunge with Outward Pocketing 2 -

46Helical Plunge with UltiPocket 2 - 45, 2 -

143Helical Plunging of Mill Frame Inside with

Pecking and Straight Plunge Finish Pass and Blend Offset 2 - 48

Helix Data Block 2 - 23Help

On-screen Help 1 - 82Help key 1 - 6Hexagon Data Block 2 - 72HMX 1 - 55, 5 - 34HMX pallet change 1 - 151HMX630 tool magazine 1 - 146Hole Diameter 7 - 25Hole or Circle Pocke tcycle

probing part setup fields 4 - 45HOLE OR CIRCLE POCKET (F2) softkey 4 -

59Hole or Circle Pocket cycle 4 - 44


skew probing cycle 4 - 59Hole or Circle Pocket Skew Probing cycle 4 -

59Holes Block 2 - 87Holes End Block 2 - 105Holes Locations 2 - 103Holes Parameters 1 - 118Holes softkey

DXF 2 - 133Part Programming 2 - 2

Holes to Pattern Locations Conversion 2 -105

Home console key 3 - 5Home key 1 - 6Host

definition 6 - 2HTX 1 - 55, 5 - 34HTX500 tool magazine 1 - 146Hydraulic Status 7 - 25

II code, X axis incremental distance for

canned cycle 3 - 148icons 2 - iiIF statements 3 - 201Import / Export Functions 1 - 121Import and Export 1 - 123Import Functions

Input screen 1 - 84Import Into Manual Tool List softkey, Im-

port and Export 1 - 123Import Manual Tools, Import and Export 1 -

123Import softkey 1 - 29Importing NC States into Conversational

Programs 1 - 122Include Offset Z in Tool Zero Cal 7 - 25Increased Radius 2 - 35Increment 7 - 25incremental

distance, X axis (canned cycle) 3 - 148distance, Y axis (canned cycle) 3 - 148machining mode, G91 3 - 135peck depth, Q code (canned cycle) 3 -

148Index Pulses 7 - 25indexer port 1 - 22indexer, pulse one increment, M20 3 - 165Indirect variables 3 - 197Individual Profiles 7 - 25infinite solution examples, 3D tool geome-

try compensation 3 - 175Inner Diameter, Mill Polygon 2 - 85, 7 - 47Input

key 1 - 6Input Mode 1 - 84Insert Arc field, Milling Parameters 7 - 14Insert Block 2 - 123Insert Block / Sub Block Before softkey 1 -

127Insert Block Before softkey 3 - 9Insert key 1 - 6Insert Line field, Milling Parameters 7 - 14Insert Location Before softkey 2 - 103Insert mode 3 - 7Insert Pockets Option 2 - 70Insert Segment Before softkey 2 - 25INSERT TOOL F3 softkey, Tool Library

screen 1 - 116Insert/Overstrike Mode Toggle softkey 3 -

12Inspection Cycle 7 - 25inspection, part 4 - 67Integrator Configuration Parameters, N95

codes 1 - 69Integrator M-code, Intelligent ASR Triggers

7 - 25INTEGRATOR SUPPORT SERIVICES F4 soft-

key, Utilities screen 1 - 47Integrator Support Services 1 - 50Intelligent ASR Triggers 7 - 25Intelligent Automatic Safe Repositioning

7 - 25interpolation modes

linear interpolation 3 - 42rapid traverse 3 - 40

Interrupt console key 1 - 18Interrupt Cycle Z Retract 7 - 25Intersect softkey 2 - 133, 2 - 134inverse time feedrate, G93 3 - 139Inward Pocket Type 2 - 140IP (Internet Protocol) definition 6 - 9IP address

definition 6 - 3Island, Pocket 2 - 141ISNC dialect 3 - 2ISNC, in NC/Conversationl Merge 2 - 129IV Angle 7 - 26

JJ code, Y axis incremental distance for

canned cycle 3 - 148Job Lists 1 - 31jog

parameters 1 - 10Jog Along Tool Axis 7 - 26Jog Feed Override 1 - 16jog unit 1 - 9


Join softkey, DXF 2 - 136Joined Lines and Arcs 2 - 137Jump 3 - 10Jump & Search Functions softkey 3 - 15Jump and Search Functions Menu 3 - 10Jump and Search Functions softkey 3 - 10jump drive 1 - 22Jump M99 3 - 170, 3 - 203, 3 - 205, 3 -

217Jump to Beginning softkey 3 - 11Jump to Block Number softkey 3 - 10Jump To End softkey 3 - 11Jump to End softkey 3 - 10Jump To Next Syntax Error softkey 3 - 11Jump to Next Tagged Block softkey 3 - 14Jump To Previous Syntax Error softkey 3 -

11Jump to Previous Tagged Block softkey 3 -

14Jump to Sequence Number softkey 3 - 10

KK code, repeat operations for canned cycle

3 - 148Keep Original 7 - 26keyboard 1 - 5, 1 - 76, 1 - 80

close 1 - 81icon 1 - 81optional 1 - 7window 1 - 81

keyboard shortcuts 1 - 6Keywords 3 - 193

LL code 3 - 153

repeat operations for canned cycle 3 -148

Ladder File Configuration softkey 1 - 38LAN Requirements 6 - 2Language File Configuration softkey 1 - 38Language Quick Toggle 1 - 46Language Selection 1 - 46Large files 3 - 183large tools in the ATC magazine 1 - 25, 1 -

142laser calibration tool 4 - 19Laser Calibration Tool Probe cycle 4 - 21laser input update, M40 3 - 166Laser Probe 4 - 18, 4 - 19laser probe 4 - 6, 4 - 12LASER PROBE (F3) softkey, Tool Setup

screen 4 - 19laser tool calibration 4 - 19

laser tool probe parameters 4 - 19Last Used Serial Number 7 - 26LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 - 11Lead Angle 2 - 15, 2 - 16, 7 - 26Lead In/Out Moves 2 - 15Lead Length 2 - 16, 7 - 27Leading Symbol 7 - 26Least Dwell Units 7 - 27

Program Parameters screen 3 - 50Least Scaling Factor 7 - 27left-handed tapping cycle 3 - 146left-handed tapping, G74 ISNC 3 - 109Length 7 - 27Length (X) 7 - 27Length (Y) 7 - 27Length of Cut 7 - 27Length Offset X 7 - 27Length Offset Y 7 - 27Length Tolerance 7 - 27Length, DXF 2 - 138Lettering

HD3 2 - 69True-Type 2 - 69

Limited Manual Operations field 1 - 129Line 1-10 7 - 27linear interpolation, G01 3 - 42Linear Thermal Compensation 1 - 159, 1 -

161Linearization Override 7 - 27Lines and Arcs 2 - 19List Icon Size 7 - 27Load Session 1 - 132Load softkey 1 - 29

Disk Operations 1 - 35loading

tool in the spindle 1 - 23tools in ATC magazine 1 - 24, 1 - 141

local coordinate system setting, G52 3 - 93local rotation NC transform plane, G68.3 3 -

104Local variables 3 - 185

NC 3 - 22Location 7 - 27Location field 1 - 100Locations 2 - 103Log Files 1 - 47, 1 - 51Loop Angular 2 - 111Loop Linear 2 - 110Loop Rectangular block 2 - 109Loop Rotate 2 - 112Lube Cycle 2 - 122

MM Code 7 - 30


M code 3 - 155M00 program stop 3 - 160M01 planned stop, pause program 3 - 160,

3 - 161M02 3 - 203

end of program 3 - 161M03 spindle, start clockwise 3 - 162M04 spindle, start counterclockwise 3 - 162M05 spindle off 3 - 162M06 change tool 3 - 162M07 secondary coolant on 3 - 163M08 primary coolant on 3 - 163M09 coolant off, both systems 3 - 163M10 coolant on, both systems 3 - 163M12 C axis clamp 3 - 164M126 shortest rotary angle path traverse

3 - 171M126, Shortest Rotary Angle Path Traverse

3 - 171M127 shortest rotary angle path traverse

cancel 3 - 171M127,Shortest Rotary Angle Path Traverse

3 - 171M128 tool center point management 3 -

172M128, Intelligent ASR Triggers 7 - 25M128, Tool Center Point Management 3 -

172M129 tool center point management cancel

3 - 172M129, Tool Center Point Management 3 -

172M13 C axis unclamp 3 - 164M140 Tool Vector Retract 3 - 177M140, Tool Vector Retract 3 - 177M19 spindle, oriented stop 3 - 164M20 indexer pulse one increment 3 - 165M200 tool axis preference 3 - 179M200, Set Tilt Axis Preference 3 - 179M25 BNC Z axis, home position 3 - 165M26 part probe, select signal 3 - 165M27 tool probe, select signal 3 - 165M29 ISNC rigid tapping enable 3 - 165M30 Progam End 3 - 203M30 Program End 3 - 165M31 rotary encoder reset 3 - 165M32 clamp A axis 3 - 166M33 unclamp A axis 3 - 166M34 clamp B axis 3 - 166M35 unclamp B axis 3 - 166M36 servo off 3 - 166M40 laser input update 3 - 166M41 single-touch probing 3 - 167M42 double-touch probing 3 - 167M43, probe, increasebarrier airflow 3 - 167

M44, probe, reduce barrier airflow 3 - 167M45 probe, open shutter control 3 - 167M46 probe, close shutter control 3 - 167M47 probe laser emitter on 3 - 167M48 probe laser emitter off 3 - 167M49 probe laser receiver on 3 - 167M50 probe laser receiver off 3 - 167M51, Cycle Pallet Changer 3 - 167M52 through M55, enable auxiliary output

3 - 167M56 rotate pallet changer, nonconfirmation

3 - 168M57 rotate pallet changer to pallet 1 3 -

168M58 rotate pallet changer to pallet 2 3 -

168M59 Chip Conveyor Forward 3 - 168M6 for tool change 3 - 162M6 Initiates Tool Change 7 - 28M60 Chip Conveyor Reverse 3 - 168M61 Chip Conveyor Stop 3 - 168M62 through M65, disable auxiliary output

3 - 168, 3 - 178M68 washdown coolant system enable 3 -

168M69 washdown coolant system disable 3 -

168M80 right handed C axis 3 - 169M81 left handed C axis 3 - 169M90 Z Axis Retract Enable 3 - 169M91 Z Axis Retract Disable 3 - 169M98 Subprogram Call 3 - 169, 3 - 186, 3 -

208, 3 - 217, 3 - 221M99 Jump, Return from Program 3 - 170,

3 - 203, 3 - 205, 3 - 217Machine 7 - 28machine

Auto mode key 1 - 18components 1 - 2control 1 - 8control buttons 1 - 17major components 1 - 2mode console keys 1 - 18Single mode console key 1 - 18Test mode console key 1 - 18

Machine (Quad-size DRO) softkey 1 - 164Machine / Part (Standard DRO) softkey 1 -

164Machine and Console Basics 1 - 1Machine Class 7 - 28Machine Class field 1 - 39Machine Components 1 - 2Machine Coordinate Relative 7 - 28machine coordinate system, part setup 1 -

86


machine coordinates, G53 3 - 96Machine Function 2 - 122MACHINE FUNCTION softkey 1 - 152Machine Hour Meter 7 - 28Machine Operations 1 - 18Machine Parameters

Alt Dwell Lt Side 1 - 66Alt Washdown Dwell 1 - 66Alt Washdown Off Time 1 - 67ATC Disable 1 - 60Auto Balance Enable 1 - 57Aux Output Confirmation Enable 1 - 72Axis Feedrate Override Min (%) 1 - 71Cal to LS Velocity 1 - 60CAL to LS Velocity A 1 - 59CAL to LS Velocity X 1 - 59Chip Removal Off Delay Time 1 - 58Chip Removal On Delay Time 1 - 58Chip Removal On/Off Delay Enable 1 -

58Control Power Off Time 1 - 57Coolant Delay Time 1 - 63Disable Auto On Chip Removal 1 - 57Disable Aux Out During Interrupt 1 - 72Disable Tool Picker Option 1 - 60Dual Tool Probe Present 1 - 57Enable Dual Zones 1 - 58Machine Pause Time for Coolant 1 - 64Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC

1 - 61Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable

1 - 65Rapid Feedrate Override Min (%) 1 - 71Tilt Axis Safety Position 1 - 61Warm-Up Axis Feed Rate 1 - 70Warm-up Axis Feed Rate 1 - 71Warm-Up Cycle Time Per Pass 1 - 70Warm-up Cycle Time Per Pass 1 - 71Warm-Up Max Spindle Speed 1 - 70Warm-up Max Spindle Speed 1 - 71Warm-Up Speed Steps 1 - 70Warm-up Speed Steps 1 - 71Warm-Up Starting Speed 1 - 70Warm-up Starting Speed 1 - 71Washdown Off Delay Timer 1 - 63, 1 -

68Washdown On Delay Timer 1 - 67X-Axis Safety Position 1 - 59Y-Axis Safety Position 1 - 59

Machine Pause Time for Coolantmachine parameters 1 - 64

Machine Specifications softkeyUtilities screen 1 - 38

machining center configuration 5 - 3Macro Command, Subprogram Call G65 3 -

186, 3 - 206, 3 - 207, 3 - 208, 3 -210, 3 - 216, 3 - 221

Macro Mode 3 - 184Subprogram Variables 3 - 23

Macro Mode Alocal variables 3 - 185Subprogram Variables 3 - 23

Macro Mode A G Code Group Status 3 - 24Magazine 7 - 28Magazine Lock 7 - 28Magazine Pin Lock / Unlock F2, ATC and

machine diagnostics 1 - 147Magazine Position 7 - 28Magazine Reference 7 - 28Magazine Status 7 - 28Maintain Finishing Sequence field

Tool Change Optimization 2 - 125Maintain Operation Level 1 Order 7 - 28Maintain Operation Level 2 Order 7 - 28Maintain Roughing Sequence field

Tool Change Optimization 2 - 125Manual Border Sizing 7 - 28Manual console key 1 - 18Manual Function Setup 1 - 138

softkey, Manual Mode 1 - 138manual jog

feed keys 1 - 16feed parameter 1 - 10hand wheel 1 - 16hand wheel multiplier keys 1 - 16

Manual Jog Feed 7 - 29Manual Mode 1 - 128

LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 - 15Tool Library 1 - 115

Manual Rapid Feed 7 - 29Manual Rapid Move 1 - 139

softkey, Manual Mode 1 - 139Manual Spindle Speed 7 - 29Manual Spindle Speed parameter 1 - 10Manual Stock Sizing 7 - 29Manual tab, Tool Library 1 - 116Mapping 7 - 29Mark Tool Defective, Tool Utilities and Set-

tings 1 - 43, 7 - 30Match Tools softkey

Tool Review screen 1 - 113Unmatched Tools Review 1 - 113

Matching tools 1 - 113Material 7 - 29Material Database 1 - 117Math Assist Style 7 - 29Math expressions 3 - 193Max Depth 7 - 29Max Spread 7 - 30Max Tool Cutting Time Exceeded 7 - 30


Maximum Contouring Rate 7 - 29Maximum Diameter Difference 7 - 30Maximum Idle Time (Mins) 7 - 30MAXIMUM IDLE TIME (MINS) field

FTP Server Settings screen 6 - 8Maximum Offset 2 - 13, 7 - 30Maximum Rapid Traverse Rate 7 - 30Maximum Spindle Motor Speed 7 - 30Maximum Spindle Tool Speed 7 - 30M-Code field, NC M and G Code Program

Numbers 3 - 21Measurement Feed 7 - 30Mill 2 - 84Mill Circle 2 - 142Mill Contour 2 - 19Mill Contours 2 - 141Mill Ellipse 2 - 33Mill Face 2 - 31Mill Feed field 7 - 31Mill Frame 2 - 142Mill Frame data block 2 - 29Mill Hexagon Data Block 2 - 72Mill Plunge Helix Radius 7 - 30Mill Plunge Ramp Slope 7 - 30Mill Plunge Type 7 - 30Mill Polygon 2 - 84Mill Slot 2 - 79Mill Thread data block 2 - 51Mill Triangle Data Block 2 - 71Mill True-Type Lettering 2 - 69Milling

3-D arccalculate centerline 2 - 24guidelines 2 - 25

data blocks 2 - 18Milling 1 Parameters 1 - 118Milling 2 Parameters 1 - 118Milling Direction 7 - 30Milling softkey


Milling Type 2 - 15, 7 - 30Milling Type field 2 - 9

Mill triangle data block 2 - 71Min Cusp Overlap 7 - 31Min Length Delta, Tool Setup


Min Z 7 - 32Min Z Position

Tool Probing 4 - 5, 4 - 11Min Z Position,Tool Setup


Minimum Length 7 - 31

Minimum Z 7 - 31Minus/Plus A/B/C Direction Travel Limit

field 7 - 31Minus/Plus X/Y/Z Direction Travel Limit 7 -

32Mirror Image 2 - 115mirroring

cancel G50.1 3 - 90G51.1 3 - 90

miscellaneous functions, M codes 3 - 155Miscellaneous softkey, Part Programming

2 - 3Modal Subprogram Call Cancel G67 3 - 216Modal Subprogram Call G66 3 - 186, 3 -

207, 3 - 208, 3 - 215, 3 - 216, 3 -221

Modal subprograms 3 - 214Mode 1 - 15Mode Selector buttons, LCD Remote Jog

Unit 1 - 15Modify Dimensions 1 - 124

softkey 1 - 124Modify softkey, DXF 2 - 136Monitor Motion, probe part setup 4 - 34Monitored Variable Number 7 - 32Monitored Variable Number, NC Settings

1 - 43Motion Configuration softkey 1 - 38Motion Hold button 1 - 17Motion System 1 - 174motion, axis 3 - 8Motoman Robot Control (G140) 3 - 145Move Blocks softkey 1 - 124move commands, scaling 3 - 87move program blocks 1 - 124Move to Safe Pos During TC 7 - 32Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC 7 -

32Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC, ma-

chine parameters 1 - 61Move Tool To Spindle softkey, Tool Library

screen 1 - 115, 1 - 116Move Z-Axis to Zero, ATC and machine di-

agnostics 1 - 147moving

the cursor 3 - 5Multi Tool Probing

Tool Probing 4 - 7, 4 - 13Multi Tool Probing, Tool Setup


Multi Tool Probing,Tool SetupProbing Parameters, Zero Calibration

mode 4 - 9Multiple Block Functions softkey, Program


Review screen 1 - 127multiple parts 3 - 98Multi-Tool Probing 7 - 32

NN words 3 - 2N95 Codes (Integrator Configuration Pa-

rameters) 1 - 69Name 7 - 32navigation 3 - 5NC Configuration screen 3 - 80NC Dialect 7 - 32NC dialect 1 - 30NC Display Type 7 - 32NC Editor 3 - 6NC Editor Settings Menu 3 - 18NC Editor Settings softkey 3 - 18NC Merge End, Intelligent ASR Triggers 7 -

25NC Merge, Intelligent ASR Triggers 7 - 25NC Monitor softkey

Auto Mode 1 - 163NC/Conversational Merge 1 - 162

NC Optional Program Stop 7 - 32NC Parameters 3 - 20NC Parameters, Program Parameters 1 -

120NC part program

address characters 3 - 3Block 3 - 4sequence number 3 - 2special characters 3 - 3start 3 - 2starting new 3 - 8Words 3 - 4

NC Part Programming 3 - 1Principles 3 - 2

NC Probing Part Setup 3 - 25NC Program Call softkey, Part Programming

2 - 3NC Program softkey, Program Manager 1 -

28NC Programming Rules 3 - 8NC Settings softkey, Utilities screen 1 - 42NC SFQ, Advanced Tool Settings 1 - 108NC States 1 - 121NC Variables 1 - 122, 3 - 22NC Work Offsets 1 - 93NC/Conversational Merge 2 - 129Neck Diameter 7 - 32nested Pattern Loop data blocks, rotary-

axis program 5 - 27nested Pattern Loop data blocks, rotary-

axis program, WinMax Mill 5 - 21, 5 -

31, 5 - 35, 5 - 39network 1 - 20network ports 1 - 22networking terms 6 - 2New Feed 7 - 32New Finish Tool 7 - 32new NC program 3 - 8New Plunge Feed 7 - 32New softkey, Program Manager 1 - 28New Speed (RPM) 7 - 32New Tool 7 - 32New Tool Number 7 - 33Next Serial Number 7 - 33Next Tool 7 - 33Next Tool Change softkey, graphics screen

1 - 132Notes 7 - 33Notes, Advanced Tool Settings 1 - 109Number 7 - 33Number of Axes Present 7 - 33Number of Holes 7 - 33Number Of Sides 7 - 33numeric keypad 1 - 7

Ooff

servo M36 3 - 166spindle, M05 3 - 162

Offsetmaximum 2 - 13

Offset 1 7 - 33Offset X 7 - 33Offset Y 7 - 33Offset Z 7 - 33Offset Z field 1 - 88, 1 - 99On-screen Help 1 - 82Open softkey 1 - 28operating the APC 1 - 152Operation 7 - 33Operator Specify Pocket Start 2 - 143, 7 -

33Opt Stop On (Off) 7 - 34optional keyboard 1 - 7Optional Stop On/Off softkey, Auto Mode

1 - 163options

hardware and software 1 - 2Orient Method 7 - 34Orient Method field, Transform Plane 5 - 8Orient Method field, Transform Plane Group

Locations 5 - 12Orient Spindle softkey, Manual Mode 1 -

138Orientation Angle 7 - 34


orientation hole 1 - 23orientation key 1 - 23Origin Point 7 - 34Out Tab, Custom Drill 2 - 95Outer Diameter, Mill Polygon 2 - 85, 7 - 46Outward Pocket Type 2 - 140Overlap 7 - 34Overload Status 7 - 34override

knobs 1 - 8Override Lockout 7 - 34Override Machine Configuration 7 - 34Overwrite Existing Zero Calibration 7 - 35

PP code, dwell at bottom of hole for canned

cycle 3 - 148Page Down key 1 - 6Page Up key 1 - 6Pallet 7 - 35pallet changer 1 - 151Pallet in Machine 7 - 35Pallet Pin 7 - 35Pallet Reference Position 7 - 35pallet rotation

M56 nonconfirmation 3 - 168to pallet 1, M57 3 - 168to pallet 2, M58 3 - 168

Pallet Status in Machine 7 - 35Pan softkey

DXF 2 - 136graphics screen 1 - 133

Parameter Change 2 - 7parameters 3 - 23

jog unit 1 - 10laser tool probe 4 - 19manual jog feed 1 - 10manual spindle speed 1 - 10part probing 4 - 32probing option 4 - 39retract clearance 2 - 119touch tool probe 4 - 18

Parity 7 - 35Park Machine 1 - 166

softkey, Manual Mode 1 - 138Part 7 - 35Part Count 7 - 35Part Fixturing and Tool Loading 1 - 93Part Inspection

cycles 4 - 67fields 4 - 68files 4 - 69programming 4 - 68

Part inspection 4 - 67

PART INSPECTION (F5) softkey, New Block screen 4 - 68

Part Inspection cycles 4 - 67Part Inspection files 1 - 50Part Inspection Probe.txt, sample file 4 -

69Part Kinematics Z Reference 1 - 97, 7 - 36part probe

calibration 4 - 34cycles, accessing 4 - 42deflection 4 - 39deflection offset calibration 4 - 34

reference block 4 - 36ring gauge 4 - 35

Part Probe Cycle 7 - 36part probe cycles

selecting type 4 - 38PART PROBE DEFLECTION OFFSETS (F7)

softkey, Part Setup screen 4 - 34, 4 -35, 4 - 36

part probe parametersaccessing 4 - 32Part Setup screen Probing menu 4 - 39

PART PROBE PARAMETERS softkey, Part Setup screen Probing menu 4 - 32

Part Probe Probe Deflection Offset screen 4 - 34

part probe, select signal, M26 3 - 165part probe, tool setup 7 - 12part probing 4 - 38

automated method 4 - 64manual mode part setup cycles 4 - 42manual mode part skew cycles 4 - 57parameters 4 - 32X/Y Skew 4 - 57

part probing automatic cyclesfields 4 - 65Part Zero 4 - 65

part probing cyclesCylinder 4 - 47Cylinder Skew 4 - 60Edge 4 - 42Edge Skew 4 - 58Hole or Circle Pocket 4 - 44Hole or Circle Pocket Skew 4 - 59Part Setup fields 4 - 43Part Zero storage 4 - 55Plane Intersection 4 - 53Rectangular Pocket 4 - 49Rectangular Pocket Skew 4 - 61Rectangular Solid 4 - 51Rectangular Solid Skew 4 - 62

Part Probing softkey, Part Setup screen 4 -32, 4 - 38

part program


address characters 3 - 3axis motion 3 - 8components 3 - 2deleting 3 - 5feedrates 3 - 8printing 1 - 47sequence number 3 - 2

Part Program Name 7 - 36Part Program Path 7 - 36Part Program Printing softkey 1 - 47Part Program Tool Review 1 - 110

softkey 1 - 102, 1 - 127Part Program Tool Review Softkeys 1 - 112Part Programming 2 - 1, 2 - 2

Input screen 1 - 84softkey 1 - 100, 1 - 127, 2 - 2softkey, Tool Review screen 1 - 112

Part Quality Verification 4 - 67Part Relative (QUAD-SIZE DRO) softkey 1 -

164Part Setup 1 - 85, 1 - 127, 4 - 38

fields 1 - 88LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 - 15manual probing cycles 4 - 42Orient Spindle 1 - 89Part Probing 1 - 88Part Programming 1 - 88probing option 7 - 39Program Parameters 1 - 88softkey 1 - 100Stock Geometry 1 - 89Store Machine Position 1 - 89Tool Setup 1 - 88Work Offsets 1 - 88working envelope 4 - 39

PART SETUP (F1) softkey, Part Setup screen 4 - 38

Part Setup cycles, manual method 4 - 42Part Setup probing cycles 4 - 40Part Setup probing cycles, processes for

each type 4 - 40Part Setup screen 4 - 38PART SETUP softkey, Part Setup screen 4 -

32Part Setup softkeys 1 - 88Part skew

automatic probing cycles 4 - 64manual probing cycles 4 - 57

Part Skew cycles 4 - 56Part Skew cycles, manual method 4 - 57PART SKEW PROBE CYCLES (F3) softkey,

Part Setup screen 4 - 38, 4 - 58Part Skew Probing cycle 4 - 57Part Skew probing cycles, processes for

each type 4 - 56

Part X Offset 7 - 36Part Y Offset 7 - 36Part Zero A 7 - 36Part Zero B 7 - 36Part Zero C 7 - 36Part Zero Cycle 7 - 36Part Zero cycle fields 4 - 65Part Zero IV 7 - 36PART ZERO PROBE CYCLES (F2) softkey,

Part Setup screen Part Probe func-tions 4 - 38

PART ZERO PROBE CYCLES softkey, Part Setup screen Part Probe functions 4 -42

Part Zero storage 4 - 55Part Zero storage, at end of probing cycles

4 - 55Part Zero V 7 - 36Part Zero X 7 - 36Part Zero X field 4 - 55Part Zero Y 7 - 36Part Zero Y field 4 - 55Part Zero Z 7 - 36Part Zero Z field 2 - 122Part Zero Z Shift 7 - 36Part Zero Z Shift field 1 - 88part zero, setting, G92 3 - 137Password 7 - 36Paste Into Directory softkey

Disk Operations 1 - 34Paste Selection softkey 3 - 13Paste softkey


Path 7 - 36Pattern 2 - 142Pattern End 2 - 115Pattern Locations 2 - 113Pattern Locations softkey 2 - 134Pattern Loop Angular 2 - 111Pattern Loop data blocks, nesting, rotary-

axis program, WinMax Mill 5 - 21, 5 -31, 5 - 35, 5 - 39

Pattern Loop Linear 2 - 110Pattern Loop Rectangular 2 - 109Pattern Scale 2 - 114Patterns Operations 2 - 107Patterns softkey, Part Programming 2 - 3pause program, M01 3 - 161Peck Clearance Plane 7 - 37Peck Depth 7 - 37peck drilling cycle 3 - 146Peck Retract Feed 7 - 37Peck Type 7 - 37Peck Type field


Bore and Ream Operations 2 - 89Pecking Retract Clearance 7 - 37percent character 3 - 2Performance Parameters 1 - 118Plane Intersection cycle 4 - 53plane of interpolation, specify 3 - 44plane selection

G17 XY 3 - 62G18 XZ 3 - 64G19 YZ 3 - 66

Plunge Feed 7 - 38Plunge Speed 7 - 38Plunges 7 - 38Pocket Boundary 2 - 140Pocket Finish SFQ 7 - 39Pocket First 7 - 38Pocket Island 2 - 141Pocket Overlap 7 - 38Pocket Overlap (%) field, Swept Surface 2 -

79Pocket Plunge Near Center 2 - 143, 7 - 38Pocket Rough SFQ 7 - 39Pocket Type 7 - 39polar coordinates, G16 3 - 61Polygon Milling Data Block 2 - 84pop-up

keyboard 1 - 81pop-ups 1 - 79port

pin descriptions 1 - 21USB 1 - 22

Position block 2 - 120Position data block 2 - 118Position softkey


POSITION TOOL OVER THE PROBE (F5) softkey 4 - 9, 4 - 28, 7 - 42

Power On button 1 - 17precision cornering

off G64 3 - 100on G61 3 - 100

precision cornering, G09 3 - 58Present 7 - 39preset values

skew angle 4 - 58Preset X 7 - 39Preset Y 7 - 39Previous Segment softkey 2 - 25principles for programming 3 - 2Printing

Part Program 1 - 47Probing Data 1 - 50

Printing Setup 1 - 47softkey, in Utilities screen 1 - 47

probeclose shutter control, M46 3 - 167double-touch M42 3 - 167increase barrier airflow, M43 3 - 167laser emitter off, M48 3 - 167laser emitter on, M47 3 - 167laser input update M40 3 - 166laser receiver off, M50 3 - 167laser receiver on, M49 3 - 167open shutter control, M45 3 - 167reduce barrier airflow, M44 3 - 167single-touch M41 3 - 167skip function G31 3 - 70

Probe Axis 7 - 39Probe Calibration

Zero Calibration mode 4 - 27with Part Probe 4 - 28with Reference Tool 4 - 28

Probe Cycle Type 7 - 39Probe Cycle Type field, Tool Monitoring

screen 4 - 15Probe Cycle Type, Tool Wear Detection 4 -

15Probe Direction X 7 - 39Probe Direction Y 7 - 39Probe Multiple Tools softkey 4 - 7, 4 - 13PROBE PART SETUP (F6) softkey, New

Block screen 4 - 65Probe Part Setup data block 4 - 65

accessing 4 - 64execution 4 - 66

Probe Part Setup fields 4 - 65PROBE PART SETUP softkey, New Block

screen 4 - 65Probe Tool Monitoring data block 4 - 14Probe Z 4 - 10, 7 - 40Probe Z field, Edge cycle 4 - 55Probe Z,Tool Setup


ProbingTool 4 - 1

PROBING (F2) softkey, Tool Setup screen 4 - 23

PROBING (F5) softkey, Part Setup screen 4 - 34, 4 - 42

Probing Axis 7 - 40Probing Cycle field 4 - 3, 4 - 9Probing Data Printing 1 - 50

softkey 1 - 47Probing Direction 7 - 40Probing Direction X 7 - 40Probing Direction Y 7 - 40Probing Length X 7 - 40Probing Length Y 7 - 40


Probing Method 7 - 40Probing Parameters 1 - 118

feedrate 4 - 39Probing Part Setup, NC 3 - 25Probing Radius 7 - 40Profile Contour 2 - 75Profile Left 2 - 13Profile Number 7 - 40Profile Right 2 - 13progname.dat 4 - 67progname.txt 4 - 67program

functions, M00, M01, M02, and M30 3 -160

Program control statements 3 - 200call subprogram 3 - 200current program 3 - 200indirect variables 3 - 200

Program End (M30) 3 - 165Program End, Intelligent ASR Triggers 7 -

25Program Execution Menu 3 - 16Program Manager 1 - 27

Input screen 1 - 84Program Number 7 - 40Program Parameters 1 - 118

Input screen 1 - 84Program Parameters softkey 1 - 102, 1 -

127Tool Review screen 1 - 112

Program Properties 1 - 30, 1 - 33Program Review screen 1 - 126Program Run Time 7 - 40Program Type 7 - 40programming mode keys 1 - 6Protocol 7 - 40Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable 7 - 40Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable, ma-

chine parameters 1 - 65Put Block Before 7 - 40

QQ code, incremental peck depth, canned cy-

cle 3 - 148

RR code

BNC canned cycle 3 - 148ISNC canned cycle 3 - 148

R level, return in cycles, G99 3 - 144R parameter, angle of rotation 3 - 102R(%) 7 - 40R/W 3 - 24

Radial Peck Count 7 - 40Radial Peck Depth 7 - 41Radial Pecks 2 - 53Radius 7 - 41Radius Bottom 7 - 41Radius End 7 - 41Radius Start 7 - 41Radius Start field 5 - 15Radius, DXF 2 - 138Rapid Clearance 7 - 41Rapid Clearance field, Tool Setup


Rapid Feedrate Override Max 7 - 41Rapid Feedrate Override Min 7 - 41Rapid Feedrate Override Min (%) parame-

ter 1 - 71Rapid Jog Rate Knob 1 - 15Rapid Move, Intelligent ASR Triggers 7 - 25Rapid Override dial 1 - 8Rapid Peck Retract 7 - 41Rapid Traverse 7 - 41rapid traverse, G00 3 - 40Rapid Z Position 7 - 42

Tool Probing 4 - 5, 4 - 11Rapid Z Position,Tool Setup


Rapids 7 - 41Read restrictions 3 - 188Ream 2 - 99

rapid 2 - 100reaming tool 2 - 99

Ream Chamfer 7 - 42Reaming Operations 2 - 98Recovery and Restart 1 - 137Recovery Restart softkey, Auto Mode 1 -

160Rectangular Pocket cycle

probing cycle 4 - 49skew probing cycle 4 - 61

Rectangular Solid cycleprobing cycle 4 - 51skew probing cycle 4 - 62

Redo softkey 3 - 13Re-entry Tab, Custom Drill 2 - 94Reference Block column, Reference Block

Deflection Offsets screen 4 - 37Reference block deflection offset method

4 - 36REFERENCE BLOCK METHOD (F2) softkey,

Reference Block Deflection Offsets screen 4 - 36

Reference Point X 7 - 42Reference Point Y 7 - 42


Reference Point Z 7 - 42Reference Tool Touch, tool probing 4 - 24Refresh Speed 7 - 42Relief 1 7 - 42Relief 1 field

Mill triangle data block 2 - 71Relief 2 7 - 42Relief 3 7 - 42remote jog

unit 1 - 9removing tools from the ATC 1 - 25, 1 -

142RENAME DIRECTORY softkey

Disk Operations 1 - 35RENAME softkey

Disk Operations 1 - 35Renumber Numbered Blocks softkey 3 - 15Renumbering and Tagging Menu 3 - 14Repeat Count 7 - 42repeat operations, K code (canned cycles)

3 - 148repeat operations, L code (canned cycles)

3 - 148Repetitions 7 - 42replace canned cycle 3 - 150Replace In Files 7 - 42Replace Tool and Material Database soft-

key, Import and Export 1 - 123Reset Control 1 - 137Reset Cutting Time on Tool Data Change

7 - 42Reset End Marker

Auto Mode 1 - 160Reset Numbering 7 - 42Reset Part Count softkey, Auto Mode 1 -

162RESET PROBE WORK REGION TO MAXIMUM

(F4) softkey, Part Setup screen 7 - 31RESET PROGRAM PARAMETERS F3 1 - 84Reset Restart Marker 1 - 160Reset Servos and Spindle softkey, Manual

Mode 1 - 138Reset Start/End Markers softkey 3 - 17Reset Wireframe Markers softkey 3 - 17Rest Machining 2 - 141restart after emergency stop 1 - 5Restart Control 1 - 167

Utilities screen 1 - 47, 1 - 167Restart Markers, NC 1 - 160Restart, Conversational 1 - 160Restore Config & Machine Files 1 - 39

softkey 1 - 38RESTORE USER DEFAULTS, Program Pa-

rameters 1 - 120RESTORE WINMAX DEFAULTS, Program

Parameters 1 - 120Retain Probed Part Setup 7 - 43retract along tool vector 3 - 173Retract Clearance 2 - 119, 7 - 43Retract Feed 7 - 43Retract INCR 7 - 44Retract Override 7 - 44Retract Tab, Custom Drill 2 - 96Retract Tool softkey, Manual Mode 1 - 139Retract Type 7 - 44Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files 1 - 53Return from Program M99 3 - 170, 3 - 203,

3 - 205, 3 - 217return to initial point in cycle, G98 3 - 142Reverse Dwell 7 - 44Reverse, DXF 2 - 133Review key 1 - 6Review Mode 1 - 126Review, Tools in Part Program 1 - 110Rigid Tap softkey 2 - 97rigid tapping

G84.2 ISNC right-handed 3 - 130G84.3 ISNC left-handed 3 - 130G88 BNC 3 - 130

rigid tapping enable, M29 ISNC 3 - 165RING GAUGE (F1) softkey, Part Probe De-

flection Offsets screen 4 - 35ring gaugedeflection offset method 4 - 35Roll End Point field, Swept Surface 7 - 44Roll Start Point 7 - 44Rotary Axes Parameters 1 - 45, 1 - 97Rotary Axis ISO Standard 7 - 44Rotary Axis machining 5 - 3Rotary Centerline 1 - 90Rotary Centerline X 7 - 44Rotary Centerline X/Y/Z 1 - 45, 7 - 44Rotary Centerline Y 7 - 44Rotary Circle softkey 5 - 6Rotary Circle, BC configuration 5 - 38rotary encoder reset, M31 3 - 165Rotary Frame softkey 5 - 6Rotary Jog Feed 7 - 44Rotary Lines and Arcs softkey 5 - 6Rotary Locations, AC configuration 5 - 32Rotary Locations, Rotary A and Rotary A Tilt

B configurations 5 - 7Rotary Loop field, Rotary A and Rotary A

Tilt B configurations 5 - 7Rotary Loop, AC configuration 5 - 31Rotary Loop, BC configuration 5 - 34, 5 -

39Rotary Milling field 5 - 5Rotary Mirror, Rotary A and Rotary A Tilt B

configurations 5 - 7Rotary Orientation 7 - 44


Rotary Orientation field 5 - 23Rotary Parameters field 5 - 5Rotary Parameters, AC configuration 5 - 33Rotary Part Setup 5 - 5Rotary Pattern End, AC configuration 5 - 33Rotary Patterns field 5 - 5Rotary Patterns, BC configuration 5 - 34,

5 - 38Rotary Polygon softkey 5 - 6Rotary Position field 5 - 5Rotary Position Out of Tol Proc 7 - 44Rotary Rapid Feed 7 - 44Rotary Rectangular, Rotary A and Rotary A

Tilrt B configurations 5 - 7Rotary Safety Move 7 - 44Rotary Slot softkey 5 - 6Rotary softkey, Part Programming 2 - 3Rotary Stick Lettering 5 - 20Rotary Stick Lettering softkey 5 - 7Rotary Tangential Velocity Control (G94.1)

3 - 140Rotary Transform Plane, AC configuration

5 - 33Rotary True Type Font 5 - 6Rotary, overview 5 - 2rotary-axis hardware 5 - 2rotary-axis table 5 - 3Rotate Angle 7 - 45ROTATE F5 softkey, graphics screen 1 -

133rotation

angle of 3 - 102cancel, G69 3 - 102G68 3 - 102negative R, CW 3 - 102positive R, CCW 3 - 102

Rotation Angle 7 - 45Rotation Angles 7 - 45Rotation Axis 7 - 45Rough SFQ 7 - 45Roughing and Finishing

Passes 2 - 43Tools 2 - 41

RS-232 Cserial communications 1 - 20serial port 1 - 21

RS-274-D standard 3 - 2Run Program softkey, Auto Mode 1 - 160

SS / Spindle 7 - 45S code 3 - 3

spindle speed 3 - 151S(%) 7 - 45

safetyCE safety circuit switches 1 - 128override mode 1 - 128

Safety Clearance 7 - 45Safety Work Region 7 - 45Safety Work Region field 1 - 88sample part inspection probe file 4 - 69Sample programs 3 - 234

Bolt hole circle 3 - 236Gear pattern 3 - 238

SAVE 1 - 29Save Active Program Only 7 - 45SAVE AS 1 - 29SAVE AS USER DEFAULTS, Program Param-

eters 1 - 120Save Frequency 7 - 45Save NC State with Program 7 - 45Save Session 1 - 132Save to Database softkey 1 - 114Saving variables to files 3 - 197Scale 2 - 114scaling

cancel G50 3 - 87circular radius command 3 - 87G51 3 - 87ISNC methods 3 - 87specify center point 3 - 87specify, factor 3 - 87

screenCE Status & Diagnostics 1 - 129

Screen Configuration 7 - 45Screens

Gear pattern 3 - 238NC

NCPP bolt hole circle 3 - 236screens

FTP Host Properties 6 - 10NC Configuration 3 - 80NC, Tool Setup 3 - 81Part Setup, rotary-axis program,

WinMax Mill 1 - 90Screensaver Timeout 7 - 46Search Again softkey 3 - 11Second Move 7 - 46Segment field

Mill Contour block 7 - 46SELECT DRO F4 softkey 1 - 164Select DRO softkey, Auto Mode 1 - 163Select Holes by Diameter, DXF 2 - 135SELECT LANGUAGE softkey, Utilities screen

1 - 46Select Layer 2 - 138SELECT MATERIAL FOR PART PROGRAM F5

softkey, Tool and Material Database screen 1 - 117


Select New Font softkey 2 - 62, 7 - 24Select Tool from List 2 - 6SELECT VIEW F2 softkey, graphics screen

1 - 133SelectSurface Finish Quality 1 - 118, 1 -

120Sequence Number 3 - 2Serial I/O 1 - 47, 1 - 51Serial Number block 2 - 65Serial Number Stick Lettering block 2 - 65Serial Numbers Printing

softkey 1 - 47Serial Port Settings 1 - 44SERIAL PORT SETTINGS F1 softkey, Utili-

ties screen 1 - 39serial ports 1 - 21Server

definition 6 - 2Servo Power 1 - 136Set End Marker

Auto Mode 1 - 160Set End marker softkey 3 - 17Set Restart Marker 1 - 160Set Start marker softkey 3 - 17Set Tilt Axis Preference, M200 3 - 179Set Tool Zero softkey 1 - 101Set Tool Zero Using Gauge Block softkey

1 - 102Set Wireframe End Marker softkey 3 - 17Set Wireframe Start Marker softkey 3 - 17setting axis configuration 5 - 4Setup Fast Feed 7 - 46SFQ 1 - 119Shank Diameter 7 - 46Shape 7 - 46Shape Angle 7 - 46Shift 7 - 36shift offset 1 - 93shortest rotary angle path traverse cancel,

M127 3 - 171shortest rotary angle path traverse, M126

3 - 171Shortest Rotary Angle Path Traverse, M126

& M127 3 - 171Show All File Types 7 - 46Show Graphics 7 - 46Show Roughing Tool Path for 2D Surfaces

7 - 46Show Roughing Tool Path for 3D Surfaces

7 - 46Shutdown Control 1 - 167SHUTDOWN CONTROL F6 softkey, Utilities

screen 1 - 47SHUTDOWN CONTROL softkey

Utilities screen 1 - 167

Side Length 7 - 46Side Length, Mill Polygon 2 - 85, 7 - 47Single console key 1 - 18single key 1 - 18SINGLE STEP F3 softkey, graphics screen

1 - 132Sister Tool 7 - 46Sister Tool, Tool Setup


Sister Tool,Tool SetupProbing Parameters, Zero Calibration

mode 4 - 9Sizing Diameter 7 - 46Sizing Method 7 - 46Skew Angle (Deg) field, Part Setup screen

4 - 58Skew angle, preset values 4 - 58Skew Axis 7 - 47Skew Cycle 7 - 47Skew Start Positions 7 - 47skip function G31 3 - 70Skip List 7 - 47Slot Milling Data Block 2 - 79Slow Feed 7 - 47

Tool Probing 4 - 6, 4 - 11, 4 - 12Slow Feed, Tool Setup

Probing Parameters, Absolute Tool Length mode 4 - 4, 4 - 11

Smooth 1 - 133Smoothing Tolerance 7 - 47SNAPSHOT F7 softkey, graphics screen 1 -

133Softkey Menu Position 7 - 47softkeys 1 - 5, 1 - 76, 1 - 77software options 1 - 2Software Options softkey 1 - 38Software Version softkey 1 - 38Spacing in expressions 3 - 196Special Characters 3 - 3special function keys 1 - 6Speed (RPM) field

Mill Contour block 7 - 47speed and feed formula, tap 3 - 120Spindle 1 - 23, 7 - 47spindle

activate 3 - 150control 1 - 8direction 3 - 150manual speed 1 - 10off, M05 3 - 162oriented stop M19 3 - 164speed, S code 3 - 151start clockwise, M03 3 - 162start counterclockwise, M04 3 - 162


tool removal 1 - 23Spindle Chiller 7 - 47Spindle Clearance 7 - 48

Tool Probing 4 - 6, 4 - 12Spindle Clearance, Tool Setup


Spindle Load Monitor 7 - 48Spindle loading 1 - 23Spindle Speed 7 - 48Spindle Speed dial 1 - 8Spindle Speed, Tool Setup


Spindle Stop 7 - 48Spindle tab, Tool Library 1 - 115Spindle Unclamp button 1 - 23Spindle Unclamp PB 7 - 48Spindle Usage 7 - 48

Tool Probing 4 - 5, 4 - 11Spindle Usage, Tool Setup


Spiral, in Swept Surface 2 - 74Split softkey, DXF 2 - 137Spotface 2 - 89squaring the APC table 1 - 151Standard Calculator 7 - 29Start Angle 7 - 48Start Angle, DXF 2 - 138Start at Center 7 - 49Start At Center field

Thread Mill block 7 - 8Start Block 7 - 49Start Cap 7 - 49Start Cap field

Mill Slot Caps tab 2 - 82Start Coordinate Reference 7 - 49Start Cycle 1 - 15Start Cycle console button 1 - 17Start Job 7 - 49Start Marker, NC 1 - 160START PROBING CYCLE (F1) softkey

Cylinder cycle 4 - 46Cylinder Skew cycle 4 - 54Edge cycle 4 - 60Edge Skew cycle 4 - 61Hole or Circle Pocket cycle 4 - 50Hole or Circle Pocket Skew cycle 4 - 48Plane Intersection cycle 4 - 52Rectangular Pocket cycle 4 - 59Rectangular Pocket Skew cycle 4 - 44Rectangular Solid cycle 4 - 62Rectangular Solid Skew cycle 4 - 58, 4 -

63

Start Pushbutton 7 - 49Start Segment 2 - 19starting new part program 3 - 8Starting Sequence 7 - 49Status Address 3 - 23, 3 - 24Status Bar 1 - 80status bar 3 - 7Status field, Serial I/O 1 - 51Status History 1 - 53Step Connect Type 7 - 49Step Size 7 - 50Stick Lettering 2 - 54Stick Lettering Along Contour 2 - 59Stock Allowance 7 - 50Stock Allowance Mode 7 - 50Stock Geometry 1 - 95

Part Setup 1 - 95STOCK OUTLINE, Graphics Settings 1 - 95Stock Transparency 7 - 51Stock Type 7 - 51Stop 7 - 51Stop Bits 7 - 51Stop Cycle button, LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 -

15Stop Cycle console button 1 - 17stop program

(planned), M01 3 - 161M00 3 - 160

Stop program execution 3 - 204Store Calculated Value 2 - 7STORE MACHINE POSITION (F7) softkey,

Part Setup screen 7 - 31Store Position key 1 - 15Store Result As 7 - 51Stream Load 1 - 29Stylus Diameter 7 - 51Stylus Length 7 - 51Stylus Width 7 - 51Subprogram

G65 3 - 186G66 3 - 186M98 3 - 186

subprogramcommands 3 - 93

Subprogram call 3 - 200Subprogram Call G65 3 - 186, 3 - 206, 3 -

207, 3 - 208, 3 - 210, 3 - 216, 3 -221

Subprogram Call M98 3 - 169, 3 - 186, 3 -208, 3 - 217, 3 - 221

Subprogram Variables 3 - 23Macro Mode 3 - 23

Subprograms 3 - 205fixed 3 - 219G65 3 - 206


G66 3 - 215layering local variables 3 - 208modal 3 - 214passing argument lists 3 - 207passing single dedicated parameters 3 -

221specifying iterations 3 - 208user defined 3 - 219

Supplier, Advanced Tool Settings 1 - 109surface contact point, 3D tool geometry

compensation 3 - 174surface finish G05.1 3 - 51Surface Finish Quality 1 - 119

G05.3 1 - 108, 3 - 51Surface Finish Quality (Finishing Default)

7 - 51Surface Finish Quality (Roughing Default)

7 - 51surface normal vector, 3D tool geometry

compensation 3 - 174Surface Side 7 - 51Surface Speed 7 - 52Swap Screens 7 - 52Sweep Angle 7 - 52Sweep Angle, DXF 2 - 138Swept Surface 2 - 74, 2 - 75Symbols 3 - 193system

principles 3 - 2SYSTEM CONFIGURATION F1 softkey, Utili-

ties screen 1 - 38System variables 3 - 185

NC 3 - 22

TT code 3 - 153Tagged Block List softkey 3 - 14Tap Operations 2 - 97Tap Retract (%) 7 - 52Tap softkey 2 - 97Taper Angle 7 - 52tapping cycle 3 - 146tapping, G84 3 - 120TCP/IP

definition 6 - 3TCPM cancel, M129 3 - 172TCPM, M128 3 - 172Temporary Parameter Change 2 - 7Test console key 1 - 18Test key 1 - 18Text 7 - 52Text Height 7 - 52Text screen 1 - 6Text Width 7 - 52

Third Move (End Position) 7 - 52Thread Bottom 7 - 52Thread Diameter 7 - 52Thread Mill 2 - 51Thread Milling Data Block 2 - 51Thread Top 7 - 53Tilt Axis machining 5 - 3Tilt Axis Preference 7 - 53tilt axis preference, M200 3 - 179Tilt Axis Safety Position, machine parame-

ters 1 - 61tilt-axis hardware 5 - 2tilt-axis table 5 - 3time 1 - 80Time / Program Run Time 7 - 53Tip Angle 7 - 53Tip Diameter 7 - 53Tip Length 7 - 53TIS / Tool in Spindle 7 - 53Toggle Edit Lockout State softkey 1 - 37,

1 - 40Toggle Language 1 - 46Toggle Rapid Override Enable softkey, Auto

Mode 1 - 163Toggle Units softkey 3 - 23, 3 - 73Tool 7 - 53tool

change, M06 3 - 162functions, D, L, and T codes 3 - 153holder, orientation hole 1 - 23in Spindle 1 - 23initiate change, NC Parameters, M6 3 -

162loading, machine spindle 1 - 23removal from ATC magazine 1 - 25, 1 -

142removal from spindle 1 - 23

Tool & Material Library 1 - 115Tool and Material Database 1 - 117tool breakage detection 4 - 15Tool Breakage Detection cycle 4 - 15TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION softkey, Tool

Monitoring screen 4 - 15Tool Cal Length 7 - 53

Tool Probing 4 - 6Tool Cal Length field, Tool Probing 4 - 2Tool Calibration Mode 7 - 53Tool Calibration Mode field, Tool Utilities

and Settings 1 - 43tool center point management 3 - 173tool center point management cancel,

M129 3 - 172tool center point management, axes angle

input 3 - 172tool center point management, M128 3 -


172Tool Center Point Management, M128 &

M129 3 - 172Tool Change Optimization field, General Pa-

rameters 7 - 54Tool Change Optimization Off block 2 - 125,

2 - 126Tool Change Optimization On block 2 - 125Tool Change Optimization parameter 2 -

124Tool Change Review Screen softkey

Tool Review Screen 1 - 112Tool Change, Intelligent ASR Triggers 7 -

25tool changer 1 - 23

orientation key 1 - 23tool changer (see Automatic Tool Changer)

1 - 141Tool field

Custom Drill Tool Tab 2 - 92Tool Fixture Option 1 - 148Tool Geometry 1 - 104Tool Holder 7 - 54Tool Holder Up / Down, ATC and machine

diagnostics 1 - 147Tool Home softkey 1 - 101Tool in Spindle 7 - 54Tool In Spindle field for activating probe

hardware, Tool Setup screen 7 - 12Tool Information Printing

softkey 1 - 47Tool Length 7 - 54tool length offset

cutter compensation 3 - 76G43, G44, and G49 3 - 80table 3 - 73

Tool Length Tolerance 7 - 54Tool Library 1 - 115

Auto 1 - 115Manual 1 - 115, 1 - 116Spindle 1 - 115

tool magazineHMX630 1 - 146HTX5000 1 - 146VTXU 1 - 146

Tool Management softkey, Manual Mode 1 -138

Tool Matching 1 - 113Results 1 - 114

Tool Measurement screen 1 - 97Tool Measurement screen, use in Tool Prob-

ing 4 - 26Tool measurement settings 1 - 96tool monitoring 4 - 14

spare tool 4 - 14

tool breakage detection 4 - 15Tool Monitoring (Probing) softkey 4 - 14Tool Monitoring Enable, General Parame-

ters screen 4 - 17Tool Number 7 - 54tool offset 3 - 73

assigning 3 - 61radius 3 - 84

Tool Offset Cancel (G49) 3 - 84tool offsets

setting with G10 3 - 60setting with G10 and L3 3 - 61setting with G10 and P, R 3 - 60setting with G10 and T, H, D 3 - 60

Tool Offsets softkey 1 - 100Tool Path 7 - 54tool positioning

G00 3 - 41G01 3 - 42G02 3 - 44G02.4 and G03.4 3 - 49G03 3 - 44

tool probedeflection offset calibration 4 - 23multiple tool cycle 4 - 7, 4 - 13

TOOL PROBE DEFLECTION OFFSET (F7) softkey, Tool Probe Deflection Offsets screen 4 - 23

Tool probe deflection offset calibration 4 -23

absolute location 4 - 24reference tool touch 4 - 24

Tool Probe Deflection Offset screenaccessing 4 - 23

Tool Probe ParametersLaser Probe 4 - 19Touch Probe 4 - 18

Tool Probe Parameters screen 4 - 18Tool Probe Setup softkey, laser tool calibra-

tion 4 - 21tool probe, select signal, M27 3 - 165tool probing

Diameter sequence, single tool 4 - 6, 4 - 12

multiple tool cycle 4 - 7, 4 - 13PROBE MULTIPLE TOOLS (F4) softkey

4 - 7, 4 - 13Zero Calibration sequence, single tool

4 - 5, 4 - 11Tool Probing Cycle Defaults 4 - 4Tool Probing Option 4 - 1Tool Probing softkey 1 - 102, 4 - 8Tool Probing softkey, Tool Setup



Tool Probing,Tool SetupProbing Parameters, Zero Calibration

mode 4 - 28Tool Quality Monitoring 4 - 14tool radius offset

cutter compensation 3 - 75G45, G46, G47, G45 3 - 84table 3 - 73

Tool Removal 1 - 148TOOL REVIEW

Input Screen 1 - 84Tool Selection List 2 - 6Tool Setup 1 - 100

LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 - 15Tool Setup Fields 1 - 100

Location 1 - 100Tool Setup Probing Parameters

Zero calibration mode 4 - 8Tool Setup softkey

Tool Review screen 1 - 112Tool Setup Softkeys 1 - 100

Advanced Tool Settings 1 - 102Change Tool Number 1 - 102Delete Tool 1 - 100Part Program Tool Review 1 - 102Part Programming 1 - 100Part Setup 1 - 100Program Parameters 1 - 102Set Tool Zero 1 - 101Set Tool Zero Using Gauge Block 1 -

102Tool Home 1 - 101Tool Offsets 1 - 100Tool Probing 1 - 102

Tool SFQ 7 - 54Tool Tab, Custom Drill 2 - 92Tool Type 7 - 54Tool Type Checking 2 - 7Tool Type Setup/Advanced Tool Settings

1 - 117Tool Utilities and Settings 1 - 43tool vector 3 - 173Tool Vector Retract, M140 3 - 177tool vector, 3D tool geometry compensa-

tion 3 - 174Tool Wear Detection cycle 4 - 15Toolpath and Solid Graphics 1 - 132Toolpath Graphics 1 - 132touch probe 4 - 6, 4 - 11TOUCH PROBE PARAMETERS softkey, Tool

Setup screen 4 - 18touch tool probe parameters 4 - 18Touch-Off Device 7 - 55touchscreen 1 - 76Transfer 1 - 35

transfer filesjump drive 1 - 22

Transform Part Zero 7 - 55Transform Plane 5 - 8Transform Plane End field 5 - 5Transform Plane field 5 - 5Transform Plane Groups 5 - 11Transform Plane Groups field 5 - 5Transform Plane, Intelligent ASR Triggers

7 - 25Translated in Y 2 - 34travel limits 4 - 39travel limits, part probe 4 - 39Triangle Data Block 2 - 71Trim softkey, DXF 2 - 137True-Type Fonts 2 - 56, 2 - 62, 5 - 18True-Type Lettering Along Contour 2 - 62Type 7 - 55Type field

3D Mold Parameters 2 - 35Type of Corners 7 - 56Types 3 - 23, 3 - 24

UUltimax classic edit mode 1 - 76Ultimax Classic Math Assist 7 - 29UltiMonitor 6 - 1UltiMotion 1 - 173UltiMotion Option 1 - 174UltiNet 6 - 1

glossary 6 - 2UltiPocket 2 - 18UltiPockets 2 - 143UltiPockets Option 2 - 139Undo softkey 3 - 13unit of measure 1 - 80Unit of measurement, changing 3 - 73units of measure

G70 BNC, inch 3 - 106G71 BNC, metric 3 - 106ISNC G20, inch 3 - 67ISNC G21, metric 3 - 67

Units of Measure (BNC G70, G71) 3 - 106Units of measure, changing 3 - 23Universal Transform Plane 5 - 8Universal Type 7 - 56UNLOAD PROGRAM F5 1 - 84unrotated coordinate system, part setup

1 - 86Update Data Blocks With Tool Changes 7 -

56UPS Software Shutdown Off Time 7 - 56USB port 1 - 22Use Chord Error From Program 7 - 56


Use Cusp Height field, Swept Surface 7 - 56USE DATUM POINT TO GET Z OFFSET (F2)

softkey, Ring Gauge Deflection Offset 4 - 35

Use Editing File softkey, Auto Mode 1 - 159USE GAUGE TO GET X&Y OFFSETS (F1)

softkey, Ring Gauge Deflection Offset 4 - 35

Use Hole Location Method softkey 2 - 133Use Hole Pattern Method softkey 2 - 133Use Offset Z 7 - 56USE PROBE TO DETERMINE OFFSET (F1)

softkey, Reference Block Deflection Offsets 4 - 36, 4 - 37

USE PROBE TO DETERMINE OFFSET soft-key, Reference Tool Touch 4 - 24

Use Tool Type Checking 7 - 57USER 1-4 NAME field

FTP Server Settings screen 6 - 8USER 1-4 PASSWORD field

FTP Server Settings screen 6 - 8USER 1-4 PATH field

FTP Server Settings screen 6 - 9User defined

B code 3 - 221B codes 3 - 216B, S, and T codes 3 - 219, 3 - 221codes 3 - 216G and M codes 3 - 216G code 3 - 221M code 3 - 221S code 3 - 221S codes 3 - 216T code 3 - 221T codes 3 - 216

User defined value 1 - 107USER INTERFACE SETTTINGS softkey, Util-

ities screen 1 - 40User Name 7 - 57USER PREFERENCES softkey, Utilities

screen 1 - 39Utilities 1 - 37

VV Angle 7 - 57Vacant variables 3 - 191Value Address 3 - 23Values 3 - 23, 3 - 24Variable example 3 - 197Variable expressions 3 - 193Variable Reset Value 7 - 57Variable Reset Value, NC Settings 1 - 43Variable summary 3 - 224Variables 3 - 23, 3 - 185

fixed 3 - 219global 3 - 22indirect 3 - 197layering 3 - 208Local 3 - 22NC 3 - 22restrictions 3 - 188system 3 - 22vacant 3 - 191

vector 3 - 173verification of tool and part quality 4 - 67Vertical/Horizontal 7 - 57VTX 1 - 55VTXU

tool magazine 1 - 146VTXZ 1 - 155

WWarm Up Machine softkey, Manual Mode 1 -

138Warming Up the Machine 1 - 136Warm-Up Axis Feed Rate 1 - 70, 1 - 71, 7 -

57Warm-Up Cycle Time Per Pass 1 - 70, 1 -

71, 7 - 57Warm-Up Max Spindle Speed 1 - 70, 7 - 57Warm-up Max Spindle Speed 1 - 71Warm-Up Speed Steps 1 - 70, 1 - 71, 7 -

57Warm-Up Starting Speed 1 - 70, 1 - 71, 7 -

57Warn Before Saving in Old Format 7 - 57washdown

Y-axis rear way cover 1 - 64Washdown Coolant On/Off softkey, Manual

Mode 1 - 139washdown coolant system M codes 3 - 168Washdown Off Delay Timer 1 - 63, 1 - 68,

7 - 58recommended formula 1 - 68

Washdown On Delay Timer 1 - 67, 7 - 58recommended formula 1 - 68

Way Lube Level 7 - 58WHILE loops 3 - 202Width 7 - 58Width Method 7 - 58Window Select softkey 2 - 133, 2 - 134WinMax Configuration softkey

Utilities screen 1 - 38WinMax IP Address softkey 1 - 38WINMAX UPTIME F3 softkey, Utilities

screen 1 - 44work coordinate systems setting with G10

L2 3 - 59


Work Offsets 1 - 93LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 - 15

Work Offsets softkey, Part Setup screen 3 -98

working envelope 4 - 39Working envelope, part probe 4 - 39Worklight On/Off softkey

Auto Mode 1 - 164Manual Mode 1 - 139

WorkPc / TR Plane (Standard DRO) softkey 1 - 164

workpiece coordinate system, part setup 1 - 86

Write Protection 7 - 58Write restrictions 3 - 188

XX and Y offsets, RIng Gauge Deflection Off-

sets 4 - 35X Center field

Mill Slot Geometry tab 7 - 58X code, X axis hole position 3 - 148X Corner field

Mill Frame data block 7 - 58X Direction 7 - 59X Distance 7 - 59X End field

Mill Slot Geomtry tab 7 - 59X field 7 - 58X Length field

Mill Frame data block 7 - 59X Length Offset, Tool Setup


X Max 7 - 59X Min 7 - 59X Number 7 - 59X Offset 7 - 59X Point 7 - 59X Position 7 - 59X Radius 2 - 33, 7 - 59X Ref Location 7 - 59X Ref Position 7 - 60X Reference 7 - 59X Safety Position 7 - 60X Scale 7 - 60X Start 7 - 60X Start field

Mill Slot Start tab 7 - 59X Value, DXF 2 - 138X/Y skew 4 - 66X/Y Skew (DEG) 7 - 60X-Axis Safety Position 1 - 59XML1 file 1 - 29

XY Angle fieldMill Slot Geometry tab 7 - 60

XY Angle, DXF 2 - 138XY Length 7 - 60XY plane selection, G17 3 - 62XY Revolved About X 2 - 34XY Revolved about X 7 - 55XZ Angle 7 - 60XZ Length field, 3D Mold Line 7 - 60XZ Plane Selection, G18 3 - 64XZ plane selection, G18 3 - 64XZ Revolved About Z 2 - 34XZ Revolved about Z 7 - 56XZ Translated in Y 2 - 34, 7 - 56

YY Center field

Mill Slot Geometry tab 7 - 60Y code, Y axis hole position 3 - 148Y Corner field

Mill Frame data block 7 - 61Y Direction 7 - 61Y Distance 7 - 61Y End field

3D Mold Parameters 2 - 36Mill Slot Geometry tab 7 - 61

Y field 7 - 60Y Length field

Mill Frame data block 7 - 61Y Length Offset, Tool Setup


Y Max 7 - 61Y Min 7 - 61Y Number 7 - 61Y Off Of Centerline 7 - 61Y Offset 7 - 62Y point 7 - 62Y Position 7 - 62Y Radius 2 - 33, 7 - 62Y Ref Location 7 - 62Y Ref Position 7 - 62Y Reference 7 - 62Y Safety Position 7 - 62Y Scale 7 - 62Y Start field

3D Mold Parameters 2 - 36Mill Slot Start tab 7 - 62

Y Value, DXF 2 - 138Y-axis rear way cover washdown on and off

cycles 1 - 64Y-Axis Safety Position 1 - 59YZ Plane Selection, G19 3 - 66YZ plane selection, G19 3 - 66


ZZ axis home position, M25 BNC 3 - 165Z Axis Retract Disable (M91) 3 - 169Z Axis Retract Enable (M90) 3 - 169Z Bottom field

Mill Slot Start tab 7 - 63Z Break Out 7 - 63Z Clearance 7 - 63Z code, Z bottom location 3 - 148Z Corner 7 - 63Z Depth 7 - 63Z Distance 7 - 63Z Drop Down Depth 7 - 63

Tool Probing 4 - 6, 4 - 12Z Drop Down Depth, Tool Setup


Z field 7 - 62Z Home 7 - 64Z Home field 7 - 44Z Length 7 - 63Z Location 7 - 63Z Move Type 7 - 64Z Offset 7 - 64Z offset, Ring Gauge Deflection Offset 4 -

35Z Out 7 - 64Z Plunge 7 - 64Z Plunge Start field

Thread Mill block 7 - 64Z Point 7 - 64Z Position 7 - 64Z Re-entry 7 - 64Z Ref Position 7 - 64Z Reference 7 - 64Z Reference position, setting 1 - 97Z Retract 7 - 64Z Roughing field, Swept Surface 7 - 64Z Safety 7 - 64Z Scale 7 - 64Z Start field

Mill Slot Start tab 7 - 64Z Start parameter 2 - 119Z Start RPM 7 - 64Z Table Offset 7 - 64Z Top 7 - 65Z Top Feed 7 - 65Z Top RPM 7 - 65Z-Axis Position 7 - 63Zero Angle Vector 5 - 23Zero Calibration 7 - 65

Tool Probing 4 - 12zero Calibration 3 - 81zero calibration

tool probing sequence, single tool 4 - 5,

4 - 11Zero Calibration Mode 1 - 99Zero Calibration,Tool Setup


Zero Radius 2 - 36Zero Ref 7 - 65Zone 7 - 65ZOOM F3 softkey, graphics screen 1 - 133ZOOM IN softkey

graphics screen 1 - 133ZOOM OUT softkey

graphics screen 1 - 133Zoom Out softkey

DXF 2 - 135Zoom Window softkey, DXF 2 - 135Zoom Window, DXF 2 - 133

WINMAX MILL PROGRAMMING DOCUMENTATIONcnc.hurco.com/media/Manuals/WinMax_Mill_Programming.pdf ·...

Documents

Transcript of WINMAX MILL PROGRAMMING DOCUMENTATIONcnc.hurco.com/media/Manuals/WinMax_Mill_Programming.pdf ·...